A VEDIC GRAMMAR

FOR STUDENTS
BY

ARTHUR ANTHONY MACDONELL

M.A., Ph.D.
BODEN PKOFESSOK OF yAXSKRIT IN THE
UMVEUSITT OF OXFORD
FELLOW OF BALLIOL COLLEGE FELLOW OF THE BHITISU ACADEMY
FELLOW OF THE KOYAL DANI.SH ACADEMY
;

INCLUDING A CHAPTER ON SYNTAX AND THKEE

APPENDIXES: LIST OF VEKBS, METEE, ACCENT

OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1916

ERSITY PRESS
TORONTO

RGH GLASGOW NEW YORK

MELBOURNE BOMBAY

HUMPHREY MILFORD
I'UliLISHER TO

THE UNIVERhlTV

PK

M3

PJ^EFACE
A
It is

PRACTICAL Vedic grammar has long been a desideratum.

one of the chief aids to the study of the hymns of the

Veda

called for forty-three years ago in the preface to his

edition of the Rigveda by Max Miiller, who adds, I doubt
not that the time will come when no one in India will call
'

himself a Sanskrit scholar

who

cannot construe the

hymns

It is mainly due
of the ancient Rishis of his country'.
to the lack of such a work that the study of Vedic literature,

despite its great linguistic and religious importance, has

never taken its proper place by the side of the study of
Classical Sanskrit either in

England or India. Whitney's

Grammar, indeed, treats the earlier language in its historical connexion with the later, but for this
very reason students are, as I have often been assured,
unable to acquire from it a clear knowledge of either the
one or the other, because beginners cannot keep the two
excellent Sansl-rit

dialects apart in the process of learning.

Till the publication of
in
Vedic
Grammar
1910, no single work
large

my

comprehensively presented the early language by itself.

That work is, however, too extensive and detailed for the
needs of the student, being intended rather as a book of
reference for the scholar.

Hence

have often been urged

grammar which would do for

Vedic language what my SansJcrit Grammar for Beginners

to bring out a short practical

the

does for

the

Classical

(1911) of the latter

language.

work

In the second edition

I therefore

pledged myself to

PREFACE

iv

meet this deinand as soon as 1 could.

redeems that pledge.
When planning the book I resolved,
to

make

The present volume

after

much

reflection,

correspond paragraph by paragnxph to the

SansJcrit Grammar' this being the best way to enable students
it

and contrast every phenomenon of the

to comijare

and the

To

later language.

presupposes the other

pendently.

me

but

it

earlier

this extent the present

book

can quite well be used inde-

The exjierience of many

years' teaching, however,

from starting the study of

Sanskrit by means of the present grammar.
Students
leads

to dissuade beginners

always commence with classical

more regular and definite, as well as
much more restricted in the number of its inflexional forms.
should,

in

my

Sanskrit, wliich

opinion,
is

good working knowledge of the later language should

acquired before taking up Vedic grammar,

therefore be

which can then be rapidly

learned.

In carrying out the parallelism of this grammar with

the other I have experienced a good deal of difficulty in
the corresponding paragraphs satisfactorily,
because certain groups of matter are found exclusively in
the Vedic language, as the numerous subjunctive forms, or

numbering

much more

fully, as the

with only one in Sanskrit

dozen types of infinitive compared

while some Sanskrit formations,
;

as the periphrastic future, are non-exi-jtent in the earlier

Nevertheless, I have, I think, succeeded in
language.

arranging the figures in such a

of the

compared.

The only exception

sisting of fifteen paragra^^hs,

deals

way

that the corresponding

two grammars can always be

paragraphs

is

which

with the Nagarl alphabet.

the

first

easily
chapter, con-

in the Sanslirit

As

Grammar

the present

work

throughout uses transliteration only, it seemed superfluous

to repeat the description of the letters given in the earlier
work.

I have accordingly substituted a general phonetic

PREFACE

survey of Vedic sounds as enabling the student to understand

clearly the linguistic history of Sanskrit.

The employment

of transliteration has been necessary because by this means

alone could analysis by hyphens and accentuation be

Duplication with Nagarl characters,

adequately indicated.
as in the Sanskrit Crrammar, would have increased the size

and the cost of the book without any compensating advan-

An account of the accent, as of vital importance in

Vedic grammar, would naturally have found a place in the
body of the book, but owing to the entire absence of this
tage.

subject in the Sansltit

its

The accent

is

Grammar and

to the fulness

which

introduction there was impossible.

accordingly dealt with in Appendix III as

treatment requires,

a substitute for the

'

its

Chief Peculiarities of Vedic

Grammar

'

appearing at the end of the Sanskrit Grammar.

The term Vedic is here used to comprehend not only the
metrical language of the hymns, but also the prose of

Brahmanas and of the Bjahmana-like portions of the

Atharvaveda and of various recensions of the Yajurveda.
The grammatical material from the later period is mainly

the

given in small type, and

by the addition of the

is .in

letter

any case regularly indicated

Brahmana). Otherwise

(for

the phase of the earlier language presented is that of the

Rigveda, as being both the oldest and furnishing the most
abundant material. But forms from the other Vedas are
often also supplied without any distinguishing mark as long
as they conform to the standard of the Eigveda.
If, however,

such forms are in any way abnormal, or

if it

seemed

advisable to point out that they do not come from the

Rigveda, this is indicated by an added abbreviation in
bi'ackets, as (AV.) for (Atharvaveda).' On the other hand
'

'

'

'(RV.)' is sometimes added in order to indicate, for some

reason or other, that a form is restricted to the Rigveda.
It is, of course, impossible to go much into detail thus in

PREFACE

vi

work IduI the exact source of any particular

form can always be ascertained by reference to the large
Vcdic Grammar. The grammatical usage of the other Vedas,
when it differs from that of the Eigveda, is regularly ex-

a practical

The reference is given with precise figures when

syntactical examples are taken from the Rigveda, but with
abbreviations only (as TS. for Taittirlya Samhita or SB. for
plained.

when

Satapatha Brfihmana)

they come

from elsewhere.

Syntactical citations are not always metrically intact because

words that are unnecessary to illustrate the usage in question

The accent

are often omitted.

to

in verbal

occur in Vedic texts without

it,

is

forms that happen

nevertheless given
there is any uncer-

position is undoubted, but when

In the list of verbs (Appendix I) the
tainty it is left out.
third pex'son singular is often given as the typical form even
if its

when only other persons actually occur. Otherwise only

forms that have been positively noted are enumerated.
I ought to mention that in inflected words final s, r, and d
of endings are given in their historical form, not according
to the law of allowable finals ( 27) ; e.g. dutas, not dutah
;

but when used

pitur, not pituh
syntactically they appear in accordance with the rules of

tasmad, not tasmat

Sandhi

e. g.

devanam dutah

The present book

Vedic

Grammar.

It

is to
is,

vrtrasya vadhat.

a great extent based on

howevei-,

my

large

by no means simply an

For besides being differently

abridgement of that work.
so
as
to
the scheme of the Sanskrit
with
agree
arranged,
it
contains
much
matter
excluded from the Vedic
Grammar,
Grammar by the limitations imposed on the latter work as
one of the volumes of Biihler's

Thus

Enc//cloj)aedia of Indo- Aryan

treatment of Vedic Syntax

and an account of the Vedic metres. Appendix I, aiioreover,
contains a list of Vedic verbs (similar to that in the Sanslrit
Grammar), which though all their forms appear in their

Besearch.

it

adds a

full

PKEFACE

vii

appropriate place within the body of the Vedic Grammar, are

not again presented there in the form of an alphabetical list,
as is done here for the benefit of the learner.
Having
subjected all the verbal forms to a revision, I have classified

some doubtful or ambiguous ones more satisfactorily, and

added some others which were inadvertently omitted in the
large work.

Moreover, a

full alphabetical list of

conjunctive

embracing forty pages and describing

the syntactical uses of these words has been added in order
The
to correspond to 180 of the Sanskrit Grammar.

and adverbial

particles

work

therefore constitutes a supplement to, as well

of, the Vedic Grammar, thus in reality
setting forth the subject with moi'e completeness as a whole,
though in a comparatively brief form, than the larger work.

present
as

an abridgement

I may add that this grammar is shortly to be followed by

a Vedic Header consisting of selected hymns of the Eigveda
and supplying microscopic explanations of every point on
which the elementary learner requires information. These

two books will, I hope, enable him in a short time to become

an independent student of the sacred literature of ancient
India.

For the purposes of this book I have chiefly exploited

my own Vedic Grammar (1910), but I have also utilized
Delbriick's Altindisclie Syntax (1888) for syntactical material,

and Whitney's Boots (1885) for the verbal forms of the

Brahmana literature. In describing the metres (Appendix II) I have found Oldenberg's Die Hymnen des Bigveda
(1888), and Arnold's Vedic Metre (1905) very useful.
I am indebted to Dr. James Morison and to my former
pupil, Professor A. B. Keith, for reading all the first proofs

with great care, and thus saving me from many misprints

that would have escaped ni)^ own notice.
Professor Keith
has also suggested important modifications of some of my
grammatical statements.
Lastly, I must congratulate

PREFACE

viii

Mr.

J.

C.

Pembiey, Hon. M.A.

Oriental

Reader

at

the

Clarendon Press, on having completed the task of reading

the final proofs of this grammar, now all but seventy years
after correcting Professor H. H. Wilson's Sanskrit Crrammar
in 1847.
This is a record in the histoi'y of Oriental, and

most probably

of any, professional

proof reading for the

press.

A. A.
6

Chadiington Road, Oxtord.

March

30, 1916.

MAC DON ELL.

CONTENTS
PAGES

Preface
List of Abbkeviations

iii-viii

xi

Corrections

xii

CHAPTER

I:

PHONETIC INTKODUCTION

Kelation of Veclic to Sanskrit Oral tradition and

Writing Sounds of the Vedic Language Tiie Vowels-^

Vowel Gradation The Consonants Ancient Pronuncia-

1-19

tion

CHAPTER

II:

EUPHONIC COMBINATION

External Sandhi Combination of Vowels and of ConsonantsInternal Sandhi Combination of Vowels and of
:

20-47

Consonants

CHAPTER

Nouns
with

DECLENSION
Consonant Stems unchangeable changeable
III:

Two Stems; with Three Stems Vowel Stems

Degrees of Comparison Numerals Cardinals Ordinals

Numeral Derivatives Pronouns: Personal Demonstra:

tive Interrogative Relative Reflexive Possessive

Compound Derivative Indefinite Pronominal Adjec-

47-117

tives

CHAPTER

CONJUGATION

IV:

Introductory The Present System First Conjugation

Conjugation The Augment ReduplicationTerminations
Paradigms Irregularities The Perfect
First Aorist Second
The Pluperfect -The Aorist

Second

AoristBenedictive The Future: Simple; Periphrastic

CONTENTS

Conditional The
finitiveDerivative
Intensive

PAGE

Participles Gerund InVerbs: Causative Desiderative

Passive

Denominative

117-207

CHAPTER V: INDECLINABLE WORDS

Prepositions Adverbial Case-forms Adverbs formed

with Suffixes Conjunctive and Adverbial Particles In-

208-253

terjections

CHAPTER

VI:

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

AND COMPOUNDS

Secondary Suffixes Gender Verbal

DeterCo-ordinatives
Nominal
Compounds
Compounds
Possessives
minatives
Dependent and Descriptive
Primary Suffixes

.........

Governing Compounds Syntactical

tive

IteraCompounds

Compounds

CHAPTER

VII:

254-282

SYNTAX

Introductory Order of Words Number Concord

Use of the Cases Locative and Genitive
Pronouns
Gerund Infinitive Use of the
Absolute
Participles
Tenses Use of the Moods: Imperative Injunctive Sub-

junctive

Optative Precative Conditional

Appendix

1.

Appendix

II.

Appendix

III.

Vedic Index

283-368

List of Verbs

369-435

Vedic Metre

436-447

The Vedic Accent

....

Genekal Index

448-469
471-498
499-508

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
= accusative case.
= Atmanepada, middle voice.
AA. = Aitareya Aranyaka.
AB. = Aitareya Brahmana.
Ab. = ablative case.
act. = active voice.
AV. = Atharvaveda.
Av. = Avesta.
= Brahmana.
B.
= Classical Sanskrit.
C.
= dative case,
D.
du. = dual number,
= feminine.
f.
= genitive case.
G.
Gk. = Greek.
= instrumental case.
I.
IE. = Indo-European.
I-Ir. = Indo-Iranian.
ind. = indicative mood.
= Kathaka Samhita.
K.
KB. = Kausitaki Brahmana.
= locative case.
L.
A.
A.

Lat.
ni.

mid.

MS.
N.
P.

PB.
pi.

RV.
6b.
s.

SV.

TA.
TB.

= Latin.
= masculine.
= middle voice.
= Maitrayani Samhita.
= nominative case.
= Parasmaipada, active voice.
= Pancavirn^a (= Tandya) Brahmana.
= plural number.
= Rigveda.
= !atapatha Brahmana.
= singular number.
= Samaveda.
= Taittiriya Aranyaka.
=

Taittiriya Bi-ahmana.

= Taittiriya Samhita.
= Vedic (in the narrow sense
V.
VS. = Vajasaneyi Samhita.
YV. = Yajurveda.

TS.

N.B.

Other

as opposed to B.

= Brahmana).

abbreviations will be found at the beginning of

I and of the Vedic Index.

Appendix

COREECTIONS
p. 25, line 24, fur ami iti read ami iti.
P. 27, line 29, lust word, read d-srat.

P. 133, line 5, for bibhrm^he read bibhrm^he.

Hi, line 31, for stride read strike.

P.

and 10.
and ci-ket-a-thas.

P. 156, lines 6

for ei-ket-a-t

and ci-ket-a-thas read of-ket-a-t

P. 158, line 21, for (vas desire) read (vas bellow).

P. 174, lines 30 and 31, delete cucyuvimihi and

cucyavirdta

(cp.

382 under cyu).

P. 188, footnote, for 'gerundive' read 'gerund'.
P. 200, line 6, for f yaj read of yaj '.
p.

'

'

'

P. 215, line 32, for tSvan read tavara ; similarly, pp. 220, line 15,
221, line 4, 222, line 4, 238, line 9, 242, line 30, for n read m.
P. 273, footnote, last line but one, for licietly read chiefly '.
'

P. 286, line 15, for 'follows' read 'precedes'.

P. 340, line 17, for tani read tyani.
P. 347, at the end of line 10, add (i. SP).
,,

,,

line 17, for

va load

va.

line 21, for duscarma read duscfirma.

P. 348, line 28, for vettu read vettu.
P. 350, line 20, after Kisdoin add (i. 42^).
,,

,,

P. 351, line 28, for

,,

abhi read abhl.

352, line 31, for vayum read vayum.

line 34, for (v. 69i) read (vi. 59').

'

'

CHAPTEE

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION
Vedic, or the langiiage of the literature of the Vedas,
represented by two main linguistic strata, in each of
which, again, earlier and later phases may be distinguished.
1.

is

The

older period

spells addressed

hymns and
which are contained in the
Of these the Rigveda, which is the most

is

that of the Mantras, the

to the gods,

various Samhitas.

The later period

important, represents the earliest stage.
that of the prose theological treatises called Brahmanas.

is

Linguistically even the oldest of them are posterior to most

of the latest parts of the Samhitas, approximating to the
But they still retain the use
stage of Classical Sanskrit.

and employ many different types of the

while Sanskrit has lost the former and preserves

of the subjunctive
infinitive,

The prose of these

only one single type of the latter.
works, however, to some extent represents better than the
language of the Mantras the normal features of Vedic
syntax, which in the latter is somewhat interfered with by
the exigences of metre.
The language of the works forming appendices to the
Brahmanas, that is, of the Aranyakas and Upanisads, forms
a

transition to that of the Sutras,

identical with Classical Sanskrit.

The

which

linguistic material of the Rigveda, being

extensive,
of which

is

practically

more

ancient,

and authentic than that of the other Samhitas, all

borrow largely from it, is taken as the basis of

this

grammar. It is, however, considerably supplemented

from the other Samhitas. The grammatical forms of the
Brahmanas, where they differ from those of Classical
Sanskrit, have been indicated in notes, while their syntax
1819

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

[1-3

is fully dealt with, because it illustrates the construction of

sentences better than the metrical hymns of the Vedas.

The hymns

Vedas were composed many centuries

which can
hardly have taken place much earlier than 600 b. c.
They
were handed down till probably long after that event by
oi'al tradition, which has lasted down to the present day.
Apart from such tradition, the text of the Sanihitas has
2.

of the

before the introduction of writing into India,

been preserved in manuscripts, the earliest of which, owing

to the adverse climatic conditions of India, ai*e scarcely five

How

centuries old.

soon they were

first

committed

to

writing, and whether the hymns of the Rigveda were edited

in the form of the Sainhita and Pada texts with the aid of
writing, there seems insufficient evidence to decide but it
almost inconceivable that voluminous prose works such
;

is

as the

could

Brahmanas, in particular the Satapatha Brahmana,

have been composed and preserved without such

aid.^

The sounds

3.

of the Vedic language.

There are

altogether fifty-two sounds, thirteen of which are vocalic

and thirty-nine consonantal. They are the following
:

a.

Nine simple vowels:

aaiiuurfl;

four diphthongs

e o ai au.

Twenty-two mutes divided into five classes, each of

which has its nasal, making a group of twenty-seven
*
k kh g gh n ;
(a) five gutturals (velars)

e ch j jh
n
(/?) five palatals
I).

^
The text of the Vedas, with the exception of Aufrecht's and
Weber's transliterated editions of the RV. and theTS., is always printed
in the Devanagari character. The latter having been fully described

in

my

repeat

Sanskrit

what

is

Grammar for
there stated.

Beginners ( 4-14), it is unnecessary to

It will suffice here to give a summary

account of all the sounds of the Vedic language.

This sound is very rare, occurring only once in the RV. and not
at all in the

AV.

THE VOWELS

3-4]
(y)

d Jind 1,^ dh and Ih,^ n

d dh n
five labials
p ph b bh m
Four semivowels y (palatal), r (cerebral), 1 (dental),
seven cerebrals'
dentals

{$) five
(e)
c.

t th,

th

(labial)

Three sibilants

d.

One aspiration
One
/
pure nasal
e.

s (palatal), s (cerebral), s (dental)

(m) called Anusvara {after-sound),

Three voiceless spirants: h (Visarjantya), h (Jihva-

g.

midlya),

4.

a.

h (Upadhrnaniya).
The simple vowels

a ordinarily represents an original short vowel (IE. a e 6)

but it also often replaces an original sonant nasal, representing the reduced form of the unaccented syllables an and
;

am, as sat-a beside sant-am

a-gam-at has gone.

being

ga-ta

gone beside

a represents both a simple long vowel (IE. a e 6) and

e. g. matar (Lat. mater) mother ; asam
a contraction

d-as-am I

ivas.

It

frequently also represents the unaccented

kha-ta dug from khan dig.

e, g. div-i (Gk. Sifi)
ordinarily an original vowel
It is also frequently the low grade of e and ya
in heaven.
beside v6d-a (oiSa) I Jcnoiv
e. g. vid-ma
{i'Sfieu) ive Icnotv
syllable

an

e. g.

is

nav-istha newest beside nav-yas nciver. It also represents the

low grade of radical a e. g. ^is-ta taught beside sas-ti teaches.
;

an original vowel e. g. jiv-a living. But it also often

e. g. as-i-mahi ive ivoidd
represents the low grade of ya
i is

as-yam I ivould attain or a contraction e. g.

mati Tjy
have sped (= i-is-ur 3. pi. pf. of is)

attain beside
isvir

they

thought

{=

matia).

much the rarest class of mutes, being scarcely half as

even the palatals.
2
These two sounds take the place of d dh respectively between
vowels in the RV. texts e. g. ile (but idya), milhuse (but midhvan).
1

This

is

common

as

e2

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

[4

an original vowel e. g. madhu (Gk. fi^dv) honey.

low grade of o and va e. g. yug-a n. yoJx
beside y6g-a m. yoldng sup-ta asleep beside svap-na ni.

is

It is also the

sleep.

an original vowel e. g. bhru {6-^pv-s:)

e. g. dhu-ta
also the low grade of au and va

is

dhau-tari

f.

slialdng

stid

stvccten

and often represents a contraction;

they have spoken

pi. pf. of vac)

(3.

It is

hroio.

f.

shalccn Ijeside

svad enjoy ;
u -uc-iir
uc-iir
e.g.
bahu the two arms
beside

bahu-a.
a vocalic r, being the low grade of ar and ra e. g.
beside ca-kar-a I hare done
done
kr-ta
grbh-i-ta seised
beside grabh-a m. seizure.
r

is

and gen. pi. m. and f. of ar stems

e. g. pitfn,
lengthened low grade)
(in which
svasrnam.
matrh pitrnam,
1 is a vocalic 1, being the low grade of al, occurring only
T occurs only in the ace.
is

it

the

in a few forms or derivatives of the verb kip (kalp) he in

order
(VS.)

caklpr6

3.

j)!.

kalp-a m. pious

ciklpati

3.

aor.

s.

beside kalpasva

arrangement

f.

pf.

2.

s.

subj.

klpti

impv. mid.,

worTc.

The diphthongs.
and 6 stand for the original genuine diphthongs at au.
They represent (1) the high grade corresponding to the
weak grade vowels i and u e. g. s6c-ati pours beside
b.

Bik-ta. poicred
(2)

bhoj-am beside bhiij-am

the result of the coalescence of a with

and internal Sandhi

pad6 =

pada

e. g.

6ndra

du. n. two steps

aor. of
i

a indra

bhaveta

bhuj enjoy
and u in external

6 cit = a u cit
= bhava ita 3.
;

s,

tm) weak stem of

few words before
maghavan hountiful
o = az
beside
as-ti
e-dhi
he
s.
of
as
h
2.
d, dh,
impv.
e.g.
before bh of case-endings, and before y and v of secondary
e. g. dv6so-bhis inst.
suffixes
pi. of dvdsas n. hatred

opt.

might

he;

maghon (= magha
;

T^j e

= az

in

VOWEL GRADATION

4-5]

duvo-yu

to

loisliing

duvas-yu)

(beside

give

saho-vau

mighty beside sahas-vant.

and au etymologically represent ai and au, as is

by the fact that they become ay and av in Sandhi
and that the Sandhi of a
e. g. gav-as coivs beside gau-s
with e (= ai) and o (= au) is ai and au respectively.
ai

indicated

5.

Vowel gradation.

change

Simple vowels are found to interand nominal in-

in derivation as well as in verbal

flexion with fuller syllables, or if short also with long vowels.

This change is dependent on shift of accent the fuller or
:

long syllable remains unchanged while it bears the accent,

but is reduced to a simple or short vowel when left by the
accent.
This interchange is termed vowel gradation. Five
different series of such gradation
a.

The Guna

be distinguished.

may

Here the accented high grade

series.

e, o, ar, al, constituting the fundamental stage

and called Guna (cp. 17 a) by the native grammarians, interchange with the unaccented low grade syllables i, u, r, 1

syllables

Guna

Beside the

respectively.

much

syllables appear, but

ar

(al does not occur),

which are called Vrddhi by the same authorities and may be
regarded as a lengthened variety of the Guna syllables.

less frequently, the syllables ai, au,

Examples are did6s-a has pointed out dis-ta pointed out

6-mi I go i-mas ive go ap-no-mi I obtain ap-nu-mas we
obtain; vdrdhaya to further: vrdhaya, id.
a. The low grade of both Guna and Vrddhi may be i, u, ir, ur
as
:

bibhay-a I
has invoked

liave feared ixnd

:

hu-td invoked

hibhAy -a, has feared

;

tatar-a has crossed

hhl-ta. frightened
:

tir-ate crosses

juhav-a

and

tir-nd

crossed.
b.
The Samprasarana series. Here the accented high
grade syllables ya, va, ra (corresponding to the Guna stage
e, o, ar) interchange with the unaccented low grade vowels

u, r

desires

i,

e. g.

i-yaj-a

us-masi

theg have seised.

ive

I have

desire

sacrificed

is-ta sacrificed

ja-grah-a //iave seised

vas-ti

ja-grh-iir

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

Similarly the long syllabhs

a.

jya

f.

mUjlit

svad-ii

stveei

The a

c.

5'a,

overcoine

sud-aya-ti sweetens

is

ji-yd-t8

[5

va, ra are reduced toi, u, ir

e. g,

bruv-i-td
bru-ya-t ivould say
dragh-lyas lo)) get- dirgh-i, long.
:

id.

series.

low grade stage a would noriiially disappear, but

as a rule it remains because its loss would in most cases
e. g. as-ti is
lead to unpronounceable or obscure forms
In

1.

its

ja-gam-a I have gone ja-gm-iir tlmj have

gone pad-ya-.te goes pi-bd-ana standing firm han-ti slays
ghn-anti theg slay.
2. The low grade of the Vrddhi vowel a is either a or
total loss; e. g. pad m.. foot: 'pad-a, tvith the foot
dadha-ti
s-anti

are

the>/

puts

dadh-masi

purify

put pu-na-ti purifies pu-n-anti they

da-da-ti gives deva-t-ta given hy the gods.
:

When

3.

tve

normally

a represents the Guna stage its low grade

e. g. stha-s thou hast stood
sthi-ta stood.

is

a. Sometimes it is i owing to analogy

e. g.
pu-na-ti purifies
pu-ni-hi purify. Sometimes, especially wheia the low grade syllable
has a secondary accent, it is a e. g. gah-ate plunges gdh-ana n. depth.

The

d.

at and

The low grade

au

series.

of at (which appears as

and a before consonants)

song

is i

e. g.

ay

gay-ati

before vowels

ga-tha m.

sings,

gi-ta sung.

5 a) is u
of au (which is parallel to va
dhav-ati washes dhu-ta tcashed dhau-tari f. shalcing
dhu-ti m. shaJcer, dhu-ma m. smoJce.
e.
Secondary shortening of i, u, r. The low grade

The low grade

e. g.

syllables i, u, ir and ur
owing to shift of accent
to

?>

(=

r)

are further reduced to

1,

u, r,

its

normal position in a word

beginning, in compounds, reduplicated forms, and

from

its

vocatives; e.g.a-hutif, invocation: -hiiti call; didi-vi shining:

kir-ti f.
ear-kr-se tliou commemoratest
di-paya hindle
:

praise (from root kr)

devi
pr) ; d6vi voc.
:

nom.

mother-in-laiv.

pi-pr-tam 3. du,
pur-ta full (root
nom. goddess svasru voc. sva-sru-s
:

THE CONSONANTS

6-7]

The Consonants.
The guttural mutes represent the

6.
velars

(that

drs

e.g.

Inclo-Euvoiiean

In the combination k-s the

q-sounds).

the regular phonetic modification of a palatal

is

guttural
before s

is,

see

adrk-sata

aor.

vac speak

fut.

vak-syati.

The palatals form two series, the earlier and the later.
Original palatals are represented by ch and s, and to

7.
a.

some extent by j and

1. The aspirate ch

h.

derived from an IE. double sound,

is

s+

aspirated palatal mute; e.g. chid cut off=Gk. cr)(^t.

But in the inchoative suffix cha it seems to represent s +

mute

unasj^irated palatal

The

2.

e.

= Gk. (Sda-Koi.
an IE. palatal (which seems

gaeha-mi

g.

sibilant s represents

have been pronounced dialectically either as a spirant or

e. g. satam 100 = Lat.
centum, Gk. k-Karov.

to

a mute)

The

3.

French

old palatal

(originally the

recognizable by
final or before mutes
e. g.
j)

sacrificed,

yas-tr

The breathing h

4.

I-Ir. zh.

I-Ir. z,

when

yaj-ati sacrifices beside

a-yat has

media of

appearing as a cerebral

is

aor.

sacrificer, is-td sacrificed.

represents the old palatal aspirate

an old palatal when, either as

It is recognizable as

final or before

t,

it is

replaced by a cerebral

vah-ati

e. g.

carries beside a-vat has carried.

The new palatals are

h.

and

to

some extent

and h.

are derived from gutturals (velars), being int^n-changee. g.

able, in most roots and formatives, with gutturals
s6c-ati shines beside s6k-a m. flame, suk-Yan flaming, suk-ra

They

yuj-e I^/oJce beside yug-a n. poJce, yc3g-a m. yoldng,

du-droh-a has injured
yuk-ta yohed, -yug-van yoking
beside drogh-a injurious.
hriUiant

a.

The

original gutturals

sounds

i, i,

m.

from

will

were changed

y immediately following;
cit perceive

e. g.

to palatals by the palatal

eit-t^ noticed beside k6t-a

6j-iyas stronger beside ug-rd, strong

proper name, beside drdgh-a

injurious.

druh-yu, a

PHONETIC INTKODUCTION

The cerebrals are

8.

Indian product and

[s-io

entirely secondary, being a specifically

in the Indo-Iranian period.

unknown

are prohaljly due to aboriginal, especially Dravidian,

They are still rare in the EV., where they never

They

influence.

occur

initially,

but only medially and

finally.

They have

as a rule arisen from dentals immediately following the

cerebral s (= original s, s, j, h) or r-sounds (r, r, r)
e.g.
dtis-tara (= dus-tara) mvincihle; vas-ti (= vas-ti) ivishcs;
;

mrs-ta (= mrj-ta) deansecl nida (= nizda)^ tiest; dii-dhi

(= duz-dhi) ill- disposed drdha (= drh-ta) /nji nr-nam
(= nr-nam) of men.
Final cerebral mutes represent the old palatals j, s, h
e. g. rat (= raj) m. rider nom. s.
vipat (= vi-pas) f. a river
;

sat

(=

(3. s.

overcoming

sah)

a-vat

a-vah-t) has conveyed

(=

aor. of vah).

The dentals

are original sounds, representing the

IE.
dentals.
The mutes t and d, however,
corresponding
sometimes take the place of original s before s and bh
e. g.
a- vat-sis (AV.) aor. of vas dwell
respectively
9. a.

mad-bhis inst. pi. of mas month.

h. The labials as a rule represent the corresponding IE.
sounds.
But b is very rarely inherited the numljer of
;

words containing

this

sound has, however, been greatly

increased in various Avays.

Thus it often replaces p or bh
in Sandhi and bh in reduplication
e. g. pi-bd-ana firm
;

rab-dha taken beside rabhante they

take
ba-bhiiva has heen from bhu he. There are also many
words containing b which seem to have a foreign origin.
beside

pad-a

n. place

10. The nasals. Of the five nasals belonging to the

corresponding five classes of mutes, only the dental n and
the labial
appear independently and in any part of a word,

'
z ( = s or old palatal zh), the soft form of s, lias always disa2:)peai'ed
after cerebraliziiig d or dh and lengthening the preceding vowel.
^
Though written as a short vowel the r is j^rosodically long.

NASALS

10]

initiallj',

name.

n.

medially, and finally e. g. matr f. mother, naman

The remaining three are always dependent on
;

a contiguous sound.
cerebral n are never

The guttural
initial,

ft, and the

two are never final.

n, the palatal

and the

last

finally only when a following k or g

has been dropped, as in stems ending in fie or nj and in
nom. s. of
e. g. pratyan
those compounded with drs

The

guttural

n appears

pratyanc /(<cm^

ki-drn nom.

of ki-drs ofivhat hind?

s.

Medially n appears regularly only before gutturals

m. Iioolc ankhaya embrace anga n. limh jangha
anka
g.
Before other consonants it appears only when k or g
leg.
a.

e.
f.

has been dropped

2. s. impv. of yuj
b.

The
eh

them

yun-dhi

for

yung-dhi (=yufij-dhi)

join.

palatal nasal occurs only before or after c or

before
let

e.g.

e. g.

panea five

yaj-na m.

sacrifice

j,

and

vafichantu

desire.

cerebral n appears within a word only, either

before cerebral mutes or replacing dental n after r, r, or s
(either immediately preceding or separated from it by certain
c.

The

danda m. staff; nr-nam of men;

varna m. colour usna hot kramana n. step.
d. The dental n is the commonest of the nasals
it is
more frequent than m, and about three times as frequent as
intervening letters); e.g.
;

the other three taken together.

As a rule it represents
IE. n but it also appears in place of the dental d or t, and
;

of labial

before certain suffixes.

before the suffix -na

secondary

suffixes

and

e. g.

for

an-na

vidyiin-mant gleaming (vidyiit

earthen

(mrd

before suffixal

f.

earth).

m or v

been dropped as final

a-gan-ma, gan-vahi

It

is

n.
f.

and before

e. g.

the

(from ad

food

lightning)

It is substituted

substituted for

or t before

for

n. rein

d
of

eat)

mrn-maya

before t

suffixal s or t that

yan-tra

(yam

have

restrain)

gam go) a-gan ( a-gam-s,

a-yan ( a-yam-s-t)
a-gana-t) 2. 3. s. aor. of gam go
3. s. aor. of yam restrain
dan gen. of dam house (=dani-s).
(aor. of

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

10

[lo-ll

m e. g. naman,
commonest labial sound, being
more frequent than the four labial mutes taken together.
/ The pure nasal. Distinct from the five class nasals is
the pure nasal, variously called Anusvara and Anunasika,
which always follows a vowel and is formed by the breath
The

e.

labial

Lat. nomen.

m as a

It is

by

rule represents IE.

far the

passing through the nose unmodilied by the influence of any

consonant. The former is usually written with a dot before

The proper use

consonants, the latter as * before vowels.
of Anusvara is not before mutes, but before sibilants and h

When final, Anusvara usually

A 2). Medially Anusvara

(which have no class nasal).

represents m, sometimes n (66

h e. g. vamsa m.
mainsa
n.
simha m. lion.
ojfer'mgs
flesh
before
where
it
s,
usually appears
always represents

regularly appears before sibilants and

reed
It

havimsi

or

e. g.

mamsate

3.

s.

subj.

aor.

of

man

tlmik

pimsanti beside pinasti from pis crush kramsyate fut. of

kram stride. When Anusvara appears before s or h (= IE.
;

guttural or palatal)

it

represents

the corresponding class

nasal.

H. The semivowels.

The semivowels

y, r,

v are

1,

peculiar in having each a vowel corresponding to it, viz.

i, r, 1, u respectively.
They are called anta(h.)stha in the
intermediate
as standing midway between
or
',
Pratisakhyas,
'

vowels and consonants.

a. The semivowel y is constantly written for i before
other voAvels within the Veda itself.
It also sometimes

appears without etymological justification, especially after

roots in -a, before vowel suffixes
e. g. da-y-i 3. s. aor. pass,
;

of

da

give.

Otherwise

it

is

based either on IE.

spiritus asper) or voiced palatal spirant

ya-s

iclio

(Gk.

(eco),

(Gk. o-y),

yuj yoke (Gk. ^vy-).

ya

yas

hoil

It is

and

yam

in the perfect, but yaj sacrifice

(= Gk.
()

e.g.

but yas loil

probably due to this

yaj sacrifice (Gk. dy-Lo^)

difiference of origin that

Avith

y {= Gk.
;

restrain reduplicate

with

i.

SEMIVOWELS

11]

The semivowel v

b.

11

constantly written for

is

Veda

other vowels within the

Otherwise

itself.

before

it

seems

be based on IE. u, that is, on a v interchangeable

always
with u, but never on an IE. spirant v not interchangeable
with u.
to

The semivowel

c.

also often to IE.

it

both,

seems as

r generally corresponds to IE. r, but

As Old Iranian invariably has r for

1.

if

there had been a tendency to rhotacism

In order to account for the

in the Indo-Iranian period.

Vedic relation of r to

1,

it

a mixture of three dialects

appears necessary to assume

one in which the IE. r and 1

were kept apart another in which IE. 1 became r (the

and a third in which IE. r became 1
Vedic dialect)
;

throughout (the later Magadhi).

r is secondary

when

it

as the final of stems in is

takes the place of phonetic d (= z)

and us before endings beginning

with bh e. g. havir-bhis and vapur-bhis. This substitution

is due to the influence of external Sandhi, where is and us
would become ir and ur.
;

Metathesis of r takes place when ar would be followed by s or h

It appears in forms of drs see and srj send forth; e.g.
drfctum to see, sdmsrastr one 2vho engages in battle also in brahmdn m.
priest, brdhman n. devotion beside barhfs n. sacrificial Utter (from brh or
a.

+ consonant.

barh make

big)

and in a few other words.

The semivowel

d.

represents IE.

and

in a

few instances

than in any cognate language except Old

in
which
it
does not occur at all. It is much rarer
Iranian,
than r, which is seven times as frequent. A gradual increase
of 1 is apparent in the KV.
thus in the tenth book are
IE.

It is rarer

r.

found the verbs mluc and labh, and the nouns 16man,
lohita, which in the earlier books appear as mruc sink,

rabh

seize,

rdman

n.

hair,

rohita ixd.

This letter occurs

eight times as often in the latest parts of the EV. as in the

oldest
and it is seven times as common in the AV. as in
;

the

RV.

It

seems likely

tliat

the recorded Vedic dialect

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

12_

[11-12

was descended from an Indo-Iranian one in which rhotacism

had removed every 1 but that there must have been another
Vedic dialect in which IE. r and 1 were kept distinct, and
a third in which IE. r became 1 throughout
from the
latter two 1 must have found its way into the literary
;

language to an increasing extent. In the oldest parts of the

RV. there are no verbal forms preserving IE. 1, and only a few

nouns

(u)loka m. free space, sloka m.

call,

and -misla mixed.

occasionally occurs both medially and

bal iti (AV.), of.
e. g. ile (VS. Kanva) = ide (RV, ile)
finally for d
RV. bal ittha. In a good many words 1 is probably of foreign origin.
a.

In the later Samhitas

12. The sibilants are all voiceless, but there are various
traces of the earlier existence of voiced sibilants (cp. 7 a 3 ;

There is a considerable interchange between

15, 2 A:).
the sibilants, chiefly as a result of assimilation.
a. The palatal sibilant s represents an IE. palatal (mute
8

or spirant). Besides being the regular substitute for dental s

in external Sand hi before voiceless palatals (e. g. indras ca),

occasionally rej^resents that sibilant within words by

sasa
e. g. svasura (Lat. socer) father- in-Um
assimilation
it

Sometimes this substitution takes place,

without assimilation, under the influence of allied words, as
It is also to
in k6sa m. hair beside k^sara (Lat. caesarks).
some extent confused with the other two sibilants in the
(IE. Tiaso)

m.

hare.

Samhitas, but here it interchanges much oftener with s

Before s the palatal s becomes k, regularly
s.

than with

when medial, sometimes when

final

e. g.

drk-s-a-se

2. s. aor.

and -drk[sj nom. s. from drs see.

h. The cerebral s is, like the cerebral mutes, altogether
secondary, always representing either an original palatal or
subj. mid.,

an original dental

sibilant.

Medially

it

represents the

and the combination ks

before the cerebral tenues t th (themselves produced from
nas-ta from nas he lost
e. g.
dental tonnes by this s)
from
3.
s.
mrs-ta
mrj ioi])e tas-ta from taks liew.
impf.,
palatals s

{=

I-Ir. s)

and

(=: I-Ir. z)

H SPIRANTS

BREATHING

12-14]

13

Medially it is regularly, and initially very frequently,

substituted for dental s after vowels other than a and after
the consonants k,
3.

su-sup-ur
uksan m. ox

varsa

spxva,nt\ tliey praise

-in heaven.

rain

n.

from stha stand

rsabha m. hull)

tisthati

e. g.

from svap

pf.

pi.

r,

sleep]

havis-su in oblations anu

divi san being

go-sa.ni tvinning cattle

Occasionally s represents dental s as a i-esult of assimilasat victorious nom. s. from

e. g. sas six (Lat. sex)

tion

sah overcoming.
The dental
c.
horse, Lat. equo-s

s as a rule represents IE.

by the palatal

replaced
bral s.

and

In Sandhi

Gk. ea-ri.

as-ti,

oftener

still

e. g.

asva-s

is

often

by the

cere-

it

The breathing h

is a secondaiy sound repi'esenting

as a rule the second half of an original guttural or palatal
aspirate, but occasionally of the dental dh and the labial bh.

13.

usually stands for palatalized gh, this origin being

recognizable by the appearance of the guttural in cognate
forms e. g. hdn-ti strihes beside ghn-anti, jaghana ; dudroha
It

has injured beside

drogha

an old palatal aspirate (=

injurious.

being replaced as final or before t

carries beside

a-vat has carried,

dh

It

sometimes represents

I-Ir. zh), as is

by

recognizable by its
e. g. vah-ati

a cerebral

udha (= uz-dha)

for

vah-ta.

gah-ate plunges beside gadha n.

ford hi-ta placed beside dhi-ta from dha put. It represents
bh in the verb grah seise beside grabh. The various origins
It stands for

e.

g. in

of

led to a certain

amount

of confusion in the groups of

forms from roots containing

mugdha,
appears

mudha

original final s or r.

pausa.

sound.

Thus beside

muh

be confused,

(AV.) bewildered.

14. Voiceless spirants.

ing

that

the phonetic past participle of

Visarjanlya has

is

at the root

its

proper place in

the tongue) is the

of
appropriate before initial voiceless

Jihvamuliya [formed

guttural spirant and

There are three such represent-

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

14

[14-15

gutturals (k, kh). UpadhmFintya {on-hrcathing) is the bi-labial

spirant f and appears before voiceless labials (p, ph).

Visarjanlya may take the place of the latter two, and always
does so in the printed texts of the Samhitas.
15. Ancient pronunciation.
As regards the pronunciation prevailing about 500 b. c. we have a sufficiently exact
knowledge derived from the transcription of Sanskrit words
in foreign languages, especially Greek
from the information
contained in the old grammarians, Panini and his school and
;

from the detailed statements of the Pratisakhyas,

the ancient phonetic works dealing with the Samhitas.
especially

The internal evidence supplied by the phonetic changes

occurring in the language of the texts themselves and the
external evidence of comparative philology justify us in
concluding that the pronunciation in the period of the
Samhitas was practically the same as in Panini's time.

The only possible exceptions

The following few remarks
subject of pronunciation

are a very few doubtful points.

will therefore suffice on the

The simple vowels i, u and a were

as
in
But a in the time of the
Italian.
pronounced
Pratisakhyas was already sounded as a very short close
1. a.

The vowels.

It is, however,
neutral vowel like the u in English liut.
probable from the fact that the metre hardly ever admits
of S, being elided after e and o in the RV., though the

written text drojjs

that at the time

it

in about 75 percent, of the occurrences,

the hymns were composed the

when

pronunciation of a was still open, but that, at the time

when the Samhita text was constituted, the close pronun-

was already becoming general.

The vowel r, now usually sounded as ri (an early pronunciation as shown by the confusion of r and ri in ancient
inscriptions and MSS.), was in the Samhitas pronounced as
a vocalic r, somewhat like the sound in the final syllable of
the French chumhre. It is described in the RV. Pratisakhya
ciation

PKONUNCIATION

15]

This agrees with ere,

as containing an r in the middle.

the equivalent of r in Old Iranian.

The very

rare vowel

1,

now

in the Samhitas a vocalic

1,

16

Iri, was
RV. Pratisakhya

usually pronounced as

descril^ed in the

representing an original r.
h. The diphthongs e and o were already pronounced as
the simple long vowels e and 6 in the time of the Pratisakhyas
as corresponding to

and that

this

was even the

shown bj'
a was no longer ay and av,

case in the Samhitas is

the fact that their Sandhi before

and that the a was beginning to be elided after e and

But that they represent the original genuine diphthongs
and au is shown by the fact that they are produced

o.

ai

in

Sandhi by the coalescence of a with i and u.

The diphthongs ai and au are at the present day pronounced as ai and au, and were so pronounced even at the
time of the Pratisakhyas. But that they etymologically
represent ai and au is shown by their Sandhi.
c. Lengthened vowels.
The vowels i and u were often
pronounced long before suffixal y e. g. su-ya-te is pressed
(\/su) jani-yant desiring a tvifc (jani) also before r when
a consonant follows; e.g. gir-bhis (but gir-as)
a, i, u
;

become long before v e. g. a-vidh-yat he ivounded

rta-van
(a is augment) ji-gi-vams having conquered {Vji)
ya-vant how great as compensation
observing order (rta)
for the loss of a following consonant
e. g. gu-dha for guh-ta
often

(15,

h)

reasons

they are also often pronounced long for metrical

e. g. srudhi havam hear our prayer.

When a consonant is in conjunction

with r or a nasal, the metre shows that a very short vowel ^
must often be pronounced between them e. g. indra =
d.

Svarabhakti.'

ind^ra

yajna

= yaj'^na

sacrifice

gna

g"na tvoman.

term used in the Pratisakhyas and meaning vowel-part '.

Described by the PriitiSakliyas as equal
to g-, ^, or | mora in length
equ
and generally as equivalent to a in sound
^

"^

'

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

16

[15

With very few exceptions the only

a which, in one per cent, of its occurrences
in the RV. and about 20 per cent, in the AV. and the metrical
c.

Loss of vowels.

vowel

lost is initial

portions of the YV., is dropped in Sandhi after e and o.

In a few words the disaj^pearance of initial a is prehistoric
e. g. vi bird (Lat. avis)
santi the>/ are (Lat. sunt).
;

In the written text of the Samhitas hiatus,

as
a
rule
tolerated in dij^hthongs only, appears in
though
Sandhi when a final s, y, v has been dropped before
a following vowel
when final i, u, e of dual endings are
f.

Hiatus.

followed by vowels

and

and when a remains

after

final

o.

Though not
the Samhitas

common

written, hiatus is

elsewhere also in

y and v must

often be pronounced as i and u,

and a long vowel or diphthong as two vowels, the original
vowels of contractions having often to be restored both
:

within a word and in Sandhi

e. g.

jy^stha mightiest as

(= jya-istha from jya he miglity).

Consonants, a. The aspirates were double

jya-istha
2.

consisting of mutes followed

pronounced as in ink-horn
'

'

in

'

'

top-heavy

b-h as in

'

by a breathing
;

t-h as in
"

'

g-h as in log-house

Hob-house

sounds,

thus k-h

is

'

'

p-h as
mad-house ';

pot-house

d-h

as in

'

'.

h. The gutturals were no doubt velars or sounds produced by the back of the tongue against the soft palate.
They are described by the Pratisakhyas as formed at the
root of the tongue and at the root of the jaw
'

'

'

'.

c.

The

palatals c, j,

ch are pronounced

ch in church
'

',

and ch in the second part of Churchill'.

The cerebrals were pronounced somewhat like the

in 'join',
d.

like
.'

t, d, n in English, but with the tip of

the tongue turned farther back against the roof of the
mouth.
They include the cerebral 1 and Ih which in

so-called dentals

Rigvedic texts take the place of

latter occurs medially only

The

d and dh between
;

vowels.

the former finally also.

PKONUNCIATION

15]

e.

ila refreshment; tura-sal

are:

Examples
a-salha

17

abhi-bhuty6jah

invincible.

The dentals

in the time of the PiTitisakhyas were

post-dentals, being produced by the tongue, according to

'
their description, at the root of the teeth (danta-mula),
'

/.

The class nasals

same position as

in the

are produced with organs of speech

for the formation of the correspond

mutes while the breath passes through the nose

The pure nasal, when called Anunasika, combines with the

ing

preceding vowel to form a single sound, a nasalized vowel

in the French 'bon'; when called Anusvara {after
sound), it forms in combination with the preceding vowel

as

two

successive sounds, a pure vowel immediately followed

the
pure nasal, though seeming to form a single sound,
by
as in the English 'bang' (where, however, the nasal is
guttural, not pure).
g.

The semivowel y is the voiced palatal spirant produced

same place as the palatal vowel i. The semivowel v

in the
is

described by the Pratisakhyas as a voiced labio -dental

It is like the English v or the German w.
The

spirant.

semivowel r must originally have been a cerebral, as is

shown by its phonetic effect on a following dental n. By
the time of the Pratisakhj^as it was pronounced in other

Thus the RV. Pratisalihya speaks of it as

positions also.
either post-dental or produced farther back (but not as
cerebral).

The semivowel
pronounced

the

in

means that it was a

h. The sibilants
like s in

'

sin

'
;

is

described in

same position

as

post-dental.
are all voiceless.

the Pratisakhyas as
the dentals, which

The

the cerebral s like sh in

dental s sounds
'

'

shun (but with

the tip of the tongue farther back)

while the palatal is
the
between
two, being the sibilant proproduced midway
nounced in the same place as the spirant in the Grerman
;

ich.

Though

1819

the voiced sibilants

C

z, z (palatal

= French

j),

PHONETIC INTRODUCTION

18

[16

zh

(cerebral) have entirely disappeared, they have generally

of their foi'mer existence in the phonetic changes
traces
left
7.,

they have produced.

The sound h was undoubtedly pronounced as a voiced
i.
The Pratisakhyas describe it as
breathing in the Samhitas.
voiced and as identical with the second element of voiced
aspirates

d-h,

(g-h,

b-h).

This

is

corroborated

by the

(= dh) beside 36 1 (= d).

spelling
are
three
voiceless spirants appearing only as
There
j.
finals. The usual one, called Visarjanlya in the Pratisakhyas,
is

1-h

according to the Taittirlya Pratisakhya articulated in the

Its place
place as the end of the preceding vowels.

same

may

be taken by Jihvamullya before the voiceless

gutturals k, kh and
initial labials p, ph.
;

initial

by Upadhmanlya before the voiceless

These two are regarded by the EV.

Pratisakhya as forming the second half of the voiceless

aspirates kh and ph respectively (just as h forms the second
half of gli, bh, &c.). They are therefore the guttural spirant
(Greek) x ^^^^ ^^^ bilabial spirant f respectively.
Loss of consonants. This is almost entirely confined
7c.
to groups of consonants.

When

the group

is final,

all

but

element, as a rule, is dropped in pausa and in

Sandhi (28). In initial consonant groups a sibilant is often
e. g. candra shining beside scandra
lost before a mute
the

first

stanayitnu m. beside tanayitnii thunder; tayii m. beside

stayii thief; tr beside str m. star pasyati sees beside spas
m. S2)y, -spas-ta seen. In a medial group the sibilants s
and s regularly disappear between mutes e. g. a-bhak-ta,
;

3. s. aor. for

a-bhak-s-ta beside a-bhak-s-i.

disappear between a nasal and a mute

yung-dhi.
tt.

e. g.

mute may
yun-dhi for

Medially, voiced sibilants, the dental z, the cerebral z,

palatal z, have disappeared before the voiced dentals

and the

d, dh, and h, but nearly always leaving a trace of their

former existence. Only in the two roots containing a,

PEONUNCIATION

15]

as

sit,

19

sas oidcr, the sibihmt has disappeared without a trace

But when a preceded the z the loss
:

a-dhvam, sa-sa-dhi.

by e taking the place of az

sed, perfect stem of sad

of the sibilant is indicated

e. g.

e-dhi

for

sit

(for

sazd

dad-dhi.

az-dhi) from as he

similarly in de-hi give (for daz-dhi) beside

other vowels than a preceded, the z was

When

cerebralized and disappeared after cerebralizing the following dental and lengthening the preceding vowel ; thus
a-sto-dhvam (= a-stoz-dhvam for a-sto-s-dhvam) 2. pi.

similarly midha n. retvanl (Gk.

the
old
voiced palatal z disappeared after
Similarly
/xto-^o-s).
a
following d or dh and lengthening the
cerebralizing

beside a-sto-s-ta

aor.

preceding vowel

taks fashion]
sas-tha

sixtlt.

e. g.

ta-dhi for taz-dhi (= tak-s-dhi) from

so-dha for sas-dha (= sak-s-dha) beside

Still

commoner

is

the loss of the old aspirated

palatal zh represented by h, which was dropped after

cerebralizing and aspirating a following t and lengthening
the preceding vowel e. g. sa-dhr for sah-tr conqueror from
sah giidha concealed for guh-ta (from guzh-ta).
Haplology. When two identical or similar syllables
are in juxtaposition, one of them is sometimes dropped
;

I.

e. g.

roaring

tuvi-ra[va]-van
ir[adh]adhyai inf. of iradh
a plant yielding honey, beside

ness; sirsa-[sajkti

f.

miglitily
sceTi

to

beside

win

tuvi-rava

ma-dugha m.

madhu-dilgha shedding

headache.

0-2

sweet-

20

CHAPTER

II

RULES OF SANDHI OR EUPHONIC COMBINATION

OF SOUNDS
16. Though the sentence

is

naturally the nnit of speech,

of syllables euphonically

which forms an unbroken chain

it is

combined,

strictly so only in the prose portions of the

AV. and the YV.

But

as the great bulk of the

Vedas

is

metrical, the editors of the Samhita text treat the hemistich

(generall}'^ consisting of two Padas or verses) as the euphonic

being specially strict in applying the rules of Sandhi

between the verses forming the hemistich. But the evidence
of metre supported by that of accent shows that the Pada is
the true euphonic unit. The form which the final of a word
shows varies according as it appears in pausa at the end of
a Pada, or in combination with a following word within the
Pada. With the former is concerned the law of finals in
unit,

pausa, with the latter the

rules of Sandhi.

Avoidance

of hiatus and assimilation are the leading principles on

which the rules of Sandhi are based.

Though both
laws,

it

is

are in general founded on the same phonetic

owing to certain differences, to dis-

necessary,

tinguish external Sandhi, which determines the changes

of final and initial letters of words, from internal Sandhi,
which applies to the final letters of verbal roots and

nominal

stems

when

followed

by

certain

suffixes

and

terminations.
a.

The

rules of external

Sandhi apply with few exceptions

(which are survivals from an earlier stage of external Sandhi)

to words forming compounds, and to final letters of nominal

stems before the case-endings beginning with consonants

{-bhyam -bhis, -bhyas, -su) or before secondary (182, 2)
suffixes beginning with any consonant except y.

EXTEENAL SANDHI

17-18]

A.

21

Extei'nal Sandhi.

Classification of Vowels.

17. Vowels are divided into

A.

1.

Simple vowels:

aa;ii;uu;rr;

2.

Guna vowels

a a

3.

Vrdd hi vowels:

ai

o
;

ar

au

1.

al.

ar.^

a. Guna {secondary quality) has the appearance of Ijeing

the simple vowel strengthened by combination with a preceding a according to the rule (19 ) of external Sandhi

Vrddhi {increase),
(except that a itself remains unchanged)
of being the Guna vowel strengthened by combination with
;

another

a.^

B.- 1.

u,

r^

Vowels liable to be changed into semivowels i, i

and the diphthongs e, ai, o, au (the latter half of
:

which is i or u) consonantal vowels.

2. Vowels not liable to be changed into semivowels (and
:

only capable of coalescence)

a,

Combination of Pinal and

unconsonantal vowels.
Initial Vowels.

18. If the same simple vowel (short or long) occurs at

end of one word and the beginning of the next,

the

^
contraction resulting in the long vowel is the rule in the
Thus ihasti
iha asti
written text of the Samhitas.

= indra a tvagne =
siiktani = su uktam.

indra

tva agne

vidam

= vi idam

The Vrddhi form

of 1 (vvliich would be al) does not occur.

In this vowel gradation, as Comparative Philology shows, the
Guna vowel rejjresents the normal stage, from which the simple
vowel was reduced by loss of accent, while Vrddhi is a lengthened
^

variety of Guna (5 a).

are parallel with the

The reduction

Guna

of the syllables ya, va, ra (which

stage) to the corresponding vowels i, u, r

(5 h) is termed Samprasarana (distnicUon).

^
r never appears under conditions rendering it liable to be

into r (cp. 4
^

rr never meet in the Samhitas, and

even occur in the RV.

r does not occur because

r does not

changed

a, p. 4).

final

EXTERNAL VOWEL SANDHI

^2
The

a.

+a

contraction of a

[I8-10

and of u + u occasionally does

not take place, even in the written text of the RV., both
between the Padas of a hemistich and within a Pada thus
;

manisa

agnih.

manisa abhi

vilu uta

su urdhvah

and in a compound, su-utayah.

h. On the other hand, the metre requires the contracted
vowels of the written text to be restored in pronunciation.

In such cases the restored

initial

long by nature or

is

position, while the preceding final, if long, must be shortened.^

Thus casat is pronounced as ca asat ; carcata as ca areata ;

map^h

as

ma ap6h

(for

ma

ap61i)

mrlatidrse as mrlati

yantindavah as yanti indavah bhavantuksanah

bhavantu uksanah. When the first word is a mono-

idrse
as

syllable (especially vi or hi), the written contractions i and

are usually to be pronounced with hiatus ; thus hindra as

hi indra.

19. a and a
coalesce with the simple vowels 1 and u to the Guna
iha iha ;
vowels e and o ^ respectively ; e. g. ihoha
'^

a.

pit6va = pita

iva

6m = a

im

6bha =

a ubha.*

are never contracted to ar in the written text of the

VS.

^
;

but the metre shows that the combination

be pronounced
sapta-rsayah the seven
as

to

ar,

seers

^
Because of tlio prosodical
shortened before another vowel.

for

instance

= saptarsayah.
rule that
Cf.

note

is

the

in

They
RV. or

sometimes

compound

a long vowel

is

always

5.

Occasionally a -f i remain uncontracted in the written text of

the RV., as jya iyam, piba imam, ranaya ih^.
'
This contraction is a survival because e and o arc simijle long
2

vowels, but they were originally = ai, au.

*
But in many instances where the contraction
original simple vowels

must be restored with hiatus

is written, the
thus subhdgosah

= subhaga usah.
s

e. g.

is

always shortened or nasalized before r in the written text

rtuh (for tatha) vipanyam rtfisya (for vipanya).

td.tha

EXTERNAL VOWEL SANDIII

19-21]
h.

coalesce with

Guna vowels

Vrcldhi

to

23
aibhih

e. g.

a ebhih.^
are absorbed

c.

= sdmasya

by Vrddhi vowels

e. g.

somasyaii^ijah

ausijah.

20. The simple consonantal vowels

and u before

dis-

similar vowels or before diphthongs are regularly changed

to the semivowels y and v respectively in the written text
of the

Samhitas

ajijanat

e. g.

ayam

praty

= janitri ajijanat

a tv

= prati ayam
= a tii 6ta.

6ta,

jdnitry

But the

y or v nearly always
Thus vy usah must be

evidence of the metre shows that this

has the syllabic value of

read as vi usah

or u.^

vidathesv anjan as vidathesu anjan.

Final r (which does not occur in the RV.) becomes r
an example is vijnatr etat
before a dissimilar vowel
vijnatr etat (SB.).
;

a.

The Guna vowels e and o

remain unchanged before a,^ which

21.
a.

is

generally

elided

in the written text of the Samhitas, biit according to the

evidence of the metre, must almost invariably in the RV.,

and generally in the AV. and YV., be pronounced,^ whether

written or not." In devaso apturah (i. 3^) the a is both
^

a instead of contracting with e is sometimes nasalized befoi-e it

6vaih. (for a e)
updstham eka (for a e). Again a is
:

aminantam

sometimes elided before e and o

as up'esatu (for a e), yath'ohise

(for a o).
2
Because i and u are prosodically shortened before a following
vowel (p. 22, note 1).
^

The exceptional treatment of e in stdtava ambyam for stotavs

is a survival showing that the Sandhi of e and o before a
was originally the same as before other vowels.
*
In the RV. it is elided in about 75 per cent., in the AV. in about

ambyam

66 per cent, of its occurrences.

^
In the RV. it must be pronounced in 99 per cent., in the AV. and
the metrical parts of the YV. in about 80 per cent, of its occurrences.

The frequent elision of the a in the written text compared with

almost invariable retention in the original text of the RV., indicates
a period of transition between the latter and the total elision of the
^

its

post-Vedic period.

EXTERNAL VOWEL SANDHI

24

written and pronounced in

restored as sunave agne.

sunav6 'gne

(i.

[21-23

1") it

must be

h.

before every other vowel (or diphthong) would naturally'

(the form they assume within a word),

become ay and av

but the former drops the semivowel throughout, while the

e. g. agna iha (for agnay)
latter does so only before a

vaya ukth^bhih (for vayav)

22. The Vrddlii vowels

but vayav a yahi.

at

and au are treated before

every vowel (including a) or diphthong exactly in the same

way as e and o before vowels other than a. Thus ai

becomes a (through ay) throughout, but au only before u

(through av) e. g. tasma aksi (for tasmay), tasma indraya
sujihva lipa (for sujihvav), but tav a, tav indragni.
;

a. The (secondary) hiatus caused by the dropping of y

and v in the above cases {21 h and 22) as a rule remains.
But further contraction is sometimes actually written in the
Samhitas
e. g.
sartavajau for sartava ajau (through
sartavay for sartavai) vasau for va asau (through vay
;

for vai).

written, is

Sometimes, again, the contraction, though not

Thus ta indra must be
required by the metre.

pronounced as tendra, and gostha lipa (AV.)

(through gosthay) as gosthopa.

Irregular

for

gosth^ lipa

Vowel Sandhi.

23. Vrddhi instead of Guna results from the contraction of

a.

the preposition a (in the

a rti and in archatu

in arti

AV. and VS.) with

=a

rchatu.

initial r

In the case of

the latter verb, the TS. extends this contraction to prei^ositions

ending in a liparchati = upa rehati and avarchati
:

ava rehati.

Because e and o were originally = ai and au.

Tliis is also the Sandhi of the AB. and KB.

ABSENCE OF VOWEL SANDHI

23-25]
h.

The

preposition

praisayur

pra

pra

arta

2. s. imj^f.

3, s. aor.

the EV.) with initial

in

isayui*.

The augment a with

c.

aichas

(in

25

the initial vowels

of is wish

aunat

3.

s.

i, u, r ;'
impf. of ud

e. g.

tvet

of r go.

Absence of Vowel Sandhi.

24. The particle u

is

unchangeable- in pronunciation

before vowels, though as a rule written as v after a con-

sonant ;' e. g. bha u amsave, but av6d v indra. When it

combines with the final a of a particle to o, in 6 = a
u, atho = atha u, uto = uta u, mo = ma u, it remains
unchanged even in the written text e, g. atho indraya.
;

and u of the dual (nom. ace.) never change

to y and v.
This dual i is never to be pronounced short,
but the u sometimes is e. g. hari (v^ -) rtasya, but sadhu
This i may remain before i, as in hari iva,
(- w) asmai.
25.

a.

The

but in several instances the contraction

r6dasim6

is

written, as in

= rodasi

not written,

it

im6, while in several others, though

must be pronounced.

rare locatives singular in i and u are also regularly

written unchanged in the EV.,'' but they seem always to be
treated as prosodically short.
h.

The

nom. plur. m. (of the pronoun asau) ami

as
always given
unchangeable in the Pada text (ami iti),
but it never happens to occur before a vowel in the EV.
c.

The

of the

is

This

is

perhaps a survival of a prehistoric contraction of a (the

form of the augment) witli i, u, r to ai, au, ar.

^
The term applied by the native phoneticians to uncliangeable
vowels is pragrhya separated. Such vowels are indicated in the Pada
u is always there written in its lengthened
text by an appended iti.
and nasalized form as iim iti.
2
It is occasionally written unchanged in its lengthened form even
after a consonant, as tdm vi akrnvan.
*
Except vedy asyam, to be pronounced vedi asyam.
original

CONSONANT SANDHI

26

[25-27

a. Tho i of the nora. s. in prthivi, prthu-jrdyi, samrajiii rarely, of

the instr. su^ami once, and of the instr. uti often, remains unchanged
before vowels ;^ o. g. sanirajni ^dhi, susfimi abhuvan.

26. The diphthong e

and verbal forms.
a.

The

e of the

nom.

is

unchangeable in various nominal

ace. dual

{= a + i),

of a stems, is not liable to Sandhi

rghayamanam.
h. The verbal dual e^

of the

2.

3.

^
;

fern,

e. g.

pres.

and neut.

rodasi ubh6

and

perf.

mid.

never combines, though it is nearly always prosodically

shortened e. g. parimamnathe asman.
;

c.

The

in thee,
e. g.

tv6

e of the locative of the pronominal forms tv6

asni6 ^ in us, yusm6 in you are unchangeable ; ^
it

asm6 ayuh

yusm6

Combination of Final and

ittha.

Initial Consonants.

27. The external Sandhi of consonants is primarily and

almost exclusively concerned with the assimilation of a final
to a following initial sound.
Since the Sandhi of final
consonants generally speaking starts from the form they
it is necessary to state the law of allowable

assume in pausa,"

finals at the outset.

That law may be formulated as follows

only unaspirated hard mutes, nasals, and Visarjanlya are

tolerated, and palatals are excluded, as finals.
By this law
the thirty-nine consonants classified in 3 are reduced to
*
The unchangeableness of the vowel here being only occasional
not indicated with iti in the Pada text.

is

Except dhisnyeme for dhisnye im6, as it is also probably to bo

pronounced.
^
Under the influence of the nominal dual e for there was originally no difference between this dual e and any other e in middle
forms, such as the dual vahe, sing, te, aiad the plur. ante.
*
Also used as dat. in the RV.
^
They are always written with iti in the Piida text.
Final n and r
are, however, to a considerable extent treated not
on the basis of their pausal form, but of etymology.
;

EXTERNAL SANDHI OF CONSONANTS

27-28]

the following eight as permissible in pausa

p,

k, n

The

aspirate

/3),

by

(n

t,

Visarjaniya.

and

mutes

soft

(3 b) are

eliminated, leaving

only hard unaspirated mutes to represent them.

(3 h

27

including s

(3 d),

and h

by

s (3

(3

e),

The

palatals

by k or

are replaced

n).

s (3 d) is replaced

The

nasal

t,

n (Shy) and

r (3 c) by Visarjaniya.
(7) and
the three semivowels y, 1, v (3 c)

do not occur.

28. The rule

that only a single consonant may be

but the first of a group of consonants
e. g.
abhavan 3. pi. impf. were (for
dropi^ed

Hence

final.

must be

abhavant)

tan

tudants)

(for

aehan
a.

k,

t,

hend
3. s.

ace. pi.

those

tudan

striking

for pranc-s)

or t, when they follow an r and belong to the

allowed to remain
e. g. vark 3. s. aor. of vrj
'

s.

tans)

has pleased (for achantst).

urk nom.
(for vark-t)
impf. of mrj wipe a-vart

nom.

(for

pran fonvard (through prank

3. s. aor.

root, are

is

all

of

s.

of

urj

3. s. aor. of

strength;

vrt turn

a-mart
su-hart

suhard friend.

There are seven instances in the Sanihitas in which a siiffixal s or

retained instead of the preceding radical consonant. (1) s tlius
sadha-mas beside
api^eara in the following four nominatives sing.
a.

t is

sadha-mat

sadha-mad-s) companio7i of the feast ava-yas (for avaavayas (for avayaj-s) ni. a kind of priest
yaj-s) f. sacrificial share
puro-das sacrificial cake (for piiro-das-s).^ (2) s or t similarly ajipears in
the following four singular verbal preterite forms a-ya-s (for d-yaj-s)
(for

beside a-yat 2

s.

aor. of yaj sacrifice

a-bhanas (for a-bhanak-s) 2.

(for a-sras-t)3 3. s. aor. of sras fall.

emit

The only instance

of a suffix

of dr cleave beside d,-dar

2.

s.

a-sras (for d-sraj-s) 2. s. aor. of srj

s. impf. of bhanj break ;
and a-sra^

remaining after

r is in dar-t 3.

s.

aor.

(for d-dar-s).

The s is probably due to the analogy of nominatives, like mas moon,

dravino-da-s wealth-giver, &c.
-

The appearance

of s or t here

is

due

to the

beginnings of the

EXTEKNAL CONSONANT SANDHl

28

[29

Classification of Consonants.

29. The assimilation, of which the application of the

Sandhi consists, is of two kinds. It is

rules of consonant

concerned either with a shift of the phonetic position in

which a consonant is articulated, or with a change of the
of the consonant. Hence it is necessary to understand
quality

fully the classification of consonants

from these two

aspects.

2b-h) an arrangement according to the

the consonants except
place of articulation is given of all
voiceless
h
three
and the
spirants, which
four, the breathing

In

Sh

(cp. 15,

are phonetically described in 15, 2 ij.

a. Contact of the tongue with the throat produces the
with the palate the palatals, with the roof of
gutturals,

th mouth the cerebrals, with the teeth the dentals, while

contact between the lips produces the labials.
b. In forming the nasals of the five classes, the breath
the tongue or the
partially passes through the nose while
the corresponding
for
in
the
are
articulating
position
lips
The real Anusvara is formed in the nose only,
tenuis.
is in the position for forming the particular
vowel which the Anusvara accompanies.
c. The semivowels y, r, 1, v are palatal, cerebral, dental,
and labial respectively, pronounced in the same position as

while the tongue

the corresponding vowels i, r, 1, u, the tongue being in

with the place of articulation in the first
partial contact
contact in the fourth.
three, and the lips in partial
d.

The three sibilants

are hard

respectively.

(English

z,

spirants produced by
roof, and teeth

tongue with the palate,

There are no corresponding

of the
partial contact

French

j),

infei-red from various

soft

sibilants

but their prehistoric existence

phenomena

of

Sandhi

may

(cp. 15, 2

be

Jca).

and
tendency to normalize the terminations so as to have s in the 2. s.
Some half-dozen examples of this have been found in
t in the 3. s.
the Brahmanas e. g. a-ves 2. s. impf. (= a-ved-s) from vid knoiv.
;

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

29-32]

29

e. h and h are
respectively soft and hard spirants produced
without any contact, and articulated in the position of the
vowel that precedes or follows, h occurs only before soft

h only after vowels and before

30. Quality of consonants.

letters,

certain hard letters.

Consonants are
1.

either

p ph

s s s

hard (surd,
h h h (3)
;

voiceless)

k kh,

c ch, t th, t th,

or soft (sonant, voiced)

vowels and diphthongs).

2.
either aspirated
:

ph bh, h h h

h, s s s

or unaspirated

all

the rest

all

kh

(3)

(besides all the

gh, eh jh, th

dh

Ih,

th dh,

the rest.

the change of c to k is a change of the position of

articulation (palatal to guttural), and that of e to j is a

Hence

change of quality (hard

to soft)

while the change of c to g

j (hard dental to soft

(hard palatal to soft guttural) or of t to

one of both position and quality.

essential to remember that consonant Sandhi
cannot be applied till finals have been reduced to one of the

palatal) is

31. It

is

The latter are then modified

eight allowable sounds (27).
without reference to their etymological value (except partially
in the case of n and Visarjaniya).
Only six of these
allowable finals occur at

all frequently, viz.

and Visarjaniya, while the cerebral

k,

n, p,

t,

m,

and the guttural n

are rare.
I.

32.

final

Changes of Quality.
is, a mute or

consonant (that

Visarjaniya) is
assimilated in quality to the following initial, becoming soft
before soft initials, and remaining hard before hard initials
(consonants).

Hence final k, t, t, p before vowels and soft consonants

become g, d, d, b respectively e. g. arvag radhah (through
arvak for arvae) havyavad jtihvasyah (through -vat for
;

-vah)

sal

urvih (through sat for sas

cp.

3 6

y)

gamad

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

30
vajebhih

gdmat)

(for

agnid rtayatah (through agnit

for

tristiib gayatrl (through tristiip for tristubh)

agnidh)
abja (for ap-ja).
33. Final k, t,
;

[32-37

t, p before n or
become the nasal of

regularly do,

may, and in practice

own

their

class

e.

g.

pranan martyasya (through pranag for pranak) viran

mitravarunayoh (through virad for virat) san-navati (TS.)
(through sat-) for sas-navati asin nd (through asid for
trikakum nivartat (through
asit) tan mitrasya (for tad)
;

trikakub for trikakiip from trikakiibh).

34. Final t becomes 1 through d e. g. angal lomnah
(for an gat).
35. Since the nasals have no corresponding hard sounds,
they remain unchanged in quality before initial hard sounds.
The guttural n,^ which is rare, remains otherwise unmodified
;

also (cp. 52)

but

may before sibilants

it

insert a transitional

is liable to
k, e. g. pratyank sa beside pratydn sa. Final
all
consonants
of
before
Final
dental
(42).
position
change

change before vowels (42, 52), palatals, dentals,

1, and sometimes p (40).
36. The dental nasal n remains unchanged before (1) the

is liable to

the semivowel

gutturals k, kh, g, gh; (2) the labials p,^ ph, b, bh,

(3) the
soft dentals d, dh, n; generally also before t (40, 2)
(4) the
semivowels y, r, v, and the breathing h ; (5) the cerebral
;

and the dental sibilants s and s.

a. Before s and s a transitional
tan-t sam.
e.g. ahan-t sahasa

may

be inserted,

II.

Changes of Position.

37. The only four final consonants (27) liable to change of

position are the dental t and n, the labial m, and Visarjaniya.
^

The

palatal

and

cerebral nasals, as has already been stated, do not

occur as finals.
^
Before p it sometimes becomes

mh

cp. 40, 5.

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHl

37-40]

31

The two

a.

h.

dentals become palatal before palatals.'

adapt themselves to the phonetic
Visarjanlya and

position of the following consonant.

1.

38. Final
palatal (e or

jaaa

t.

t before palatals (c, j,

j)

e.g. tac

eaksuh

ch,

for tat

s) is

to a

changed

caksuh; yatayaj-

yatayat-jana; rohic chyava for rohit syava.-

for

2.

to

Final

Final n.

39. Final n before vowels is changed, after a long vowel,

Anusvara if the preceding vowel is a, to m, if it is i, u,
:

mr

vidvam agne for

g. sargam iva for sargan
paridhimr ati for paridhm abhisumr iva for
abhisiin nrmr* abhi for nrn.
40. 1. Final n before all palatals that occur becomes

f, to

vidvan

;"

e.

fi

palatal

e.g.

urdhvan carathaya

for

urdhvan

tafi

vajrin snathihi for vajrin ; but since

jusetham
;
before s a transitional t may be inserted, vajrnt snathihi
for

may
a.

tan

'
(through vajrinc snathihi) become vajrn chnathihi.''
Before c the palatal sibilant is sometimes inserted in
'^

the EV., the preceding

n then becoming Anusvara.

This

Final dentals never come into contact with initial cerebrals in

No initial cerebral mutes occur in the RV., and even
the cerebral sibilant s occurs only in sds six and its compounds, and
'

the Sainhitas.

once in sat for sat from sah.

2
On the change of s to eh after c see 53.
^
and mr here represent original ns through mh, the Sandhi
Both
an in
of h being here the same as that of ah ih uh rh before vowels,
Tin remain unchanged at the end of a Pada (as being in pausa) before

a vowel

e. g.

devayanan atandrah
'

(i.

72'').

fmr occurs only once, otherwise remaining unchanged as fn,

because two r sounds are avoided in the same syllable (cf. Vedic
Orammar, 79).
5
That is, t before

'

s becomes c (38).
That is, after c initial s may become ch (53).
There are no examples of the inserted sibilant before ch

Samhitas.

in the

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

32

when

insertion takes place, only

the sibilant

justified/ almost exclusively (though not

even

here

amenams

and cid

ca

before

^)

is

[40-41

etymologically

without exception

e. g.

anuyajams

ca,

In the later Samhitas the inserted sibilant

eit.

becomes commoner, occurring even where not etymologically justified.^

Final

2.

n usually remains unchanged

tvavan tmana

e. g.

the

in

inserted

before dental

t,''

but the dental sibilant is sometimes

RV., the preceding n then becoming
;

insertion takes place, only when the

sibilant is historically justified;^ e.g. avadarns tvam (for
In the later Samhitas the inserted sibilant
avadan).

This

Anusvara.

becomes

occurring even

commoner,

where not

etymo-

logically justified.^

Final

3.

before initial

always becomes nazalized

1;

jigival laksam.

e. g.

4.

Though
h (36,

y, r, V,

n generally remains unchanged before

an, in, tin sometimes become am, imr, urar

final
4),

Ijut svavam
e. g, devan havamahe
yatu (for svavan) dadvam va (for dadvan) pivo-annam
rayivrdhah (for annan) panimr hatam (for panin) das-

as before vowels (39)

yonau (for dasyun).

Final n when etymologically representing ns sometimes

5ru.mr
5.

becomes

mh

p (36, 2) thus nrmh pahi (for nrn)

svatavamh payiih (for svatavan).

before

nfmh patram

3.

41. Final

agnim
^

ile

That

is,

in the

Final m.

remains unchanged before vowels

I praise

e.g.

Agni.

nom.

s.

and

ace. pi. m., whicli originally

ended

in ns.

E.g. pa^un ca sthatrn car^tham (i. 72^).

As in the 3. pi. impf., e. g. dbhavan (originally abhavan-t' and the
voc. and loc. of n stems, e. g. rajan (which never ended in s).
^

No

initial

th occurs in the RV.

33
EXTEKNAL CONSONANT SANDHI
In a very few instances the m
dropped and the vowels there.

41-42]

is

a.

mostly indicated by the metre only

It is very rarely
thus rastram ihil must be pronounced rastr6ha.
written, as in durgahait^t for diirg^hani etat. The Pada text, however,
neither here (durg^ha etat) nor elsewhere analyses a contraction in
This Sandhi

contract.

upon

is

this way.

42. Final

m before consonants

before the semivowel

1.

r,

is

the

changed
three

sibilants s,

s,

and the breathing h to Anusvara e. g. hotaram ratnadhatamam (for hotaram) vardhamanam sve (for vardha;

manam)

mitram huve

(for

mitram).^

becomes nasalized y, 1, v
instead
printed texts regularly use Anusvara
before y,

2.

1,

it

yudhi

yajnam

'^

e.g.

tvastuh.

sam

e. g.

vastu.'

before mutes

3.

but the

it

becomes the

class nasal,

and n before

bhadraii karisyasi
navan
tyan camasam
bhadran nah. Most MSS. and the printed texts,
;

e. g.
however, represent this assimilated
by Anusvara
bhadram karisyasi ; tyam camasam navam tvastuh ;
bhadram nah.
;

This Sandhi is identical with that of u befoi-e the palatals c,j, ch

and the soft dentals d, dh, u (36, 3), and of t before n (33).

a.

(40)

Anusvara seems to have been used originally before the sibilants

and h only. Compounds like saiu-raj show that m originally remained
'

unchnnged before r (49 h).

2
The Taittiriya Prati^akhya allows the optional use

of

Anusvara

before these semivowels.

Forms with internal

that

originally remained

like

yam-y^mana and Spa-mlukta show

unchanged in

extei'nal

and forms like jagan-van (from gam

one time become n before v in Sandhi.

and
at

m
1

go)

Sandhi before y
its having

point to

Before labials it of course remains.

This assimilation befoi'e n being identical with that of d, led to
ambiguity in some instances and consequent wrong analysis by the
Padapatha.
"
Max Miiller in his editions prints Anusvara throughout, even
Aufrecht has Anusvara except before labials, where
befoi'e labials
he retains m.
^

1819

EXTEKNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

34

[43

Final Visarjaniya.

4.

43. Visarjaniya is the spirant to which the hard s and

If followed
the corresponding soft r are reduced in pausa.
hard
a
sound,
by
(t) mute, it becomes the
devas eakrma (through devah
for devas)
yas te
pus ca (through puh ca for piir ca,)
anvibhis tana (for -bhih).
(for yah)

a palatal

1.

(c,

ch) or a dental

corresponding sibilant

e. g.

'

Visarjaniya, if preceded by i and u, before dental t often becomes

In the RV.
cerebral s, which cerebralizes the following initial t to t.
a.

this occurs chiefly, and in

kratus tarn
e. g. agnis te
;

change takes place in

all

the later Vedas only, before pronouns

also n^kis tanusu.
In compounds this
the Sanihitas e. g. dus-tara hard to pass.^
;

2. a guttural (k, kh) or labial

remains or becomes Jihvamullya

and UpadhmanTya

before

(h)

it

ph) mute,

(p,

either

(h) before the gutturals

the labials
e. g.
visnoh
;

karmani (for visnos) indrah. panca

punah (for punar) dyauh prthivl.
;

(for

indras)

punah-

a.

After a it often, in the RV., becomes

s,

and s after

i,

u, r

;^ e.

g.

divds

dyaus pita. In compounds this change

pari ; pdtnivatas krdhi
takes place regularly in all the Samhitas e. g. -pareis-pa, far-proiectitig ;
havis-pa drinking the offering dus-krt evil-doing, dus-pd evil-footed.
;

3.
e. g.

sat

a simple sibilant,

it

either remains or is assimilated

vah sivatamah. or vas sivatamah d6vih sat or d6vis

nah sapatnah or nas sapatnah piinah, sam or punas
;

sam.^

Assimilation

is

undoubtedly the original Sandhi

This combination (in which Visarjaniya i-ejiresents original r) is

contrary to etymology, but is universal in sentence Sandhi and is
subject to only two exceptions in compounds svar-caksas and svarcanas.
~
The only exception in the RV. is catus-trimsat thirty-four.
2
This treatment before gutturals and labials corresponds to that
before t (1 a), and was doubtless the original one in sentence Sandhi.
^

This combination (in which Visarjaniya represents original r),

to etymology, is universal in external Sandhi ; but

though contrary

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

43-46]

35

but the MSS. usually employ Visarjaniya and European

editions regularly do so.
Before a sibilant immediately followed by a hard mute, a final
e. g. mandibhi stomebhih (through mandiis dropped
bhih for mandibhis) du-stuti f. ill-praise (for dus-stuti). The dropping
is i>rescribed by the Prati^akhyas of the RV., the VS., and the TS.,
and is applied by Aufrecht in his edition of the RV.
b. Before a sibilant immediately followed by a nasal or semivowel,
a.

Visarjaniya

a final Visarjaniya is optionally dropped

ni-svarani (through nih- foi- uis-).

e g.

krta sravah (for krtah)

44. Visarjaniya (except after a or a) before a soft sound

(vowel or consonant) is changed to r; e.g. rsibhir idyah
(through rsibhih for rslbhis) agnir h6ta (through agnih
;

for agnis)

45.

1.

paribhur asi (through -bhuh for -bhus).

The final syllable ah (= as) drops its Visarjaniya

e. g. suta ini6 (through

visva vi (through visvah for visvas).

before vowels or soft consonants

sutah
2.

for sutas)

The

final syllable

ah (=

as)

e.
Visarjaniya before vowels except a
drops
khya a (through khyah for khyas).
h. before soft consonants and before a, is changed to

a.

its

g.

o,

e. g. indavo vara
which a may be elided (21 a)
(through indavah for indavas) no ati (through nah for
nas) or no 'ti.
46. The final syllables ah (= ar) and ah (= ar), in the
in which the Visarjaniya
comparatively few instances
represents an etymological r, do not form an exception (45)

after

'

to the general rule (44)

svar druhah

pratar agnih

e. g.

piinar

nah

var avayati.

e. g. vanar-sad,
compounds the original r frequently remains
dhur-sdd, &c. This survival shows that r originally remained before
sibilants in sentence Sandhi,
1
ahar day, us^r
r is original in dvar door, var protector, var water

in

daini,

udhar

udder,

vadhar weapon, vanar

2. 3. s.

svar

light

ant^r within,

the voc, of r stems, e.g. bhratar

of past tenses from roots in r, e. g. avar, from vr cover.

avdr down, piinar again, pratar

the

icood,

early

D 2

EXTEENAL CONSONANT SANDHI

36

[47-49

47. r followed by r is always dropped, a preceding short

vowel being lengthened e. g. puna rupani for punar.^
48. The three pronouns (nom. m. s.) sah that, syah that,
esah this, drop the Visarjanlya before all consonants
e. g.
;

'^

sa vanani, sya dutali, esa tarn.

otherwise treated regularly

padista sah cakra esah

eso asura, eso 'manclan
i

*
;

The Visarjaniya

at the

is

here

end of a Pada,

e. g.

and before vowels,

(for

amandan)

s6 apah,
sd osadhih, esd

e. g.

indrah.
a.

sd,

vowel

however, generally combines in the EV. with a following

sasmai for sk asmai sed for sd id s^usadhih for sa

e. g.

osadhih.

Sandhi in Compounds.

49. The euphonic combination at the junction of the

members of compounds is on the whole subject to the rules
Thus the evidence of metre
prevailing in external Sandhi.
shows that contracted vowels are often to be pronounced
initial vowel of the second member is

with hiatus when the

prosodically long (cp. 18

e. g. yukta-asva (for yuktasva)

h)
deva-iddha Jcindled htj the gods (for
dev6ddha), aeha-ukti (for aehokti) invitation.
Compounds have, however, preserved many archaisms of
Sandhi which have disappeared from Sandhi in the sentence.

having yoked

horses,

a. In vis-pati lord of the house and vis-pd.tni mistress of the house s

remains instead of the i* required by external Sandhi.
b. In
sam-raj sovereign ruler
appears instead of the Anusvara
required befoi'e r (42, 1), as in sam-rajantam.

'

of

In a few instances o appears instead of a (=

ah as the pausal form of neuters in as e.
;

iadha = iidhar)
2

also in the

g.

comioound aho-ratra for aha-.

it in the RV.
si,h. paliknih

sdh, however, twice retains

and sds tava (viii. 33^^) for sah.
^

under the influence

iidho romasfim (for

ar)

sydh never occurs in the RV. before a vowel or

a Padn.
'

vis-pati has in post-Vedic Sanskrit

become

vitpati.

at the

(v. 2*)

end

uf

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

49-50]

37

c. A
group of compounds formed with dus ill ;is first meml)er combine that adverb with a following d and n to du-d (= duz-d) and du-n
= duz-n) instead of dur-d and dur-n ;! du-dabha (for
(
dus-dd.bha) liard

to deceive, du-das not

worshipping (for dus-das), du-dhi malevolent (for
dus-dhi); dii-ndsa hard to attain (for dur-n^sa), du-nasa (for dus-nasa)
hard to attain and hard to destroy,

d.

RV.

Final (etymological) r in the first member is preserved in the

before hard sounds where the rules of external Sandhi
require

Visaj-janiya or a sibilant (43): -v&v-^&VYi. producing water

brilliant as light;

pur-pati

vanar-sad and vanar-s^d

svd,r-caksas

lord of the stronghold,

sitting in the loood,

svar-pati lord of lieaven;

dhur-sad hdng on the yoke

svar-sa winning light; sv&,r-sati acquisition oflight.^

ahar-pdti lord of day, and dhur-sah. bearing the yoke.^

The VS.

has

also

e.
Radical stems in ir, ur mostly lengthen their vowel before con
sonants (as they do within the simple word); 2 e.g. dhiir-sad being on

the yoke,

pur-yana

leading

to the fort.*

50. Compounds further often contain archaisms which

still existing in external Sandhi are obsolescent and

though

disappear entirely in later periods of the language.

a.

In six compounds scandra

sibilant in the second

with horses,

word

it is,

member

puru-scandra

bright retains its old initial

e. g.

asva-scandra brilliant
As an independent

veri/ brilliant.

excepting three occurrences in the RV., invariably

candra.^
b.

second

final s of the first

member

duh-saha hard
1

But

meml^er or an

cerebralized

loc. pi.

e. g.

initial

s of the

dus-tara hard

to cross,

to resist.^

the form required by the later external Sandhi

commoner in the RV. e. g.

Nouns ending in radical r retain

already
2

dvLT'

is

is

dur-dfsika, dur-naman.
the r before the ending su of the

gir-sii, dhiir-su, pur-sii.

e.

External Sandhi gradually encroaches here in the later Samhitas

g. svah-pati in the SV.

But glr retains its short vowel in gir-vanas fond

vahas praised in song.

of praise

and

gfr-

How nearly extinct scandr^ is as an independent word is indicated

by the fact that in the analysis of its six compounds it always appears
as candra in the Padapatha.
G
In post-Vedic Sanskrit only dustara, duhsaha.
^

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

38
c.

dental

in the second

in the first

r, r, s

member

member

[50-51

cerebralized after

is

a. almost invariably, whether initial,

medial, or final in a root, when
a vcrlial derivative is compounded with a preposition that contains r

nir-nij f. bright garment, p^ri-hnuta denied, pran-d m. breedh and

even in suffixes, as pra-yana n. advance (from ya go).
0. predominantly in other comi^ounds wlien the second member is
e. g.

a verbal

yana

noun; e.g. grama-ni chief of a village, dur-gani dangers, pitrtrodden by the fathers, rakso-han demon-slaying
but puro-yavan
;

beside pratar-yavan going out early. Cerebralization never takes place

in -ghn the weak form of -han killing; nor in aksa-nah tied to the axle,

kravya-vahana

conveying corpses,

carma-mna

tanner,

yusma-nita

led

by you.
y.

when

less regularly

verbal)

noun

e. g.

candra-nirnij having a
d.

The

final

tlie

uru-nasa

brilliant

vowel of the

especially before v ;
This is often due to

member

is an ordinary (nonprS-napat great-grandson but

garment, piinar-nava again renewed.

second

broad-nosed,

e. g.

first

member

anna-vrdh

is

often lengthened,

prospering

hi/

food.

an old rhythmical tendency (also

appearing in the sentence) to lengthen a vowel before
a single consonant between two short syllables
e. g.
;

ratha-sah
e.

able to

Final a or

draw
i

the ear.

of the first

member

is

often shortened

before a group of consonants or a long syllable e. g. lirnamradas soft as wool (urna) prthivi-stha standing on the
;

earth (prthivi)

The

51.

am.iva-catana driving away disease (amiva).

Doubling of Consonants.
palatal ch etymologically represents a double

sound and metrically lengthens a preceding short vowel.

For the latter reason the RV. Pratisakhya prescribes the
doubling of ch (in the form of cch) after a short vowel, and,
as regards long vowels, after a only, when a vowel follows.'
This rule

RV.
1

e. g.

is followed by Max Muller in his editions of the

uta echadih, a-cchad-vidhana, but me chantsat.

The Vedic MSS. almost invariably write the simple ch, and this
is followed by Aufrecht in his edition of the Rigveda and
It is also followed in the
v. Schrocder in his edition of the MS.

practice
L.

present work.

EXTEENAL CONSONANT SANDHI

52-56]

52. Before vowels

vowel, are doubled

Though the

nasal

that this rule is

Tlie

e. g,

n and

n, if

preceded

kidrnn indrah

])y

a short

ahann indrah.

always written double, the metre shows

only partially applied as regards pronunis

RV.

ciation in the
a.

final

39

compound vrsan-asvd

stallions

loitJt

as

steeds

(n

= n)

is

an

exception.

Initial Aspiration.

53. After a

final c, initial s regularly

yae chaknavama

for

The same change

a.

becomes eh

e. g.

yad saknavama.
occasionally takes place after t

thus

vipat ehutudri (for sutudri) turasat chusmi (for susmi).

54. Initial h, after softening a preceding k, t, t, p, is
;

changed to the soft aspirate of that mute e, g. sadhryag

ghita for hita avad dhavyani for avat havyani sidad
;

dhota

for sidat hota.

55. If gh, dh, bh, or h are at the end of a (radical)

beginning with g, d, or b, and lose their aspiration
as final or otherwise, the initial consonants are aspirated by

S5'llable

way

of compensation

injunctive

-bhut

dhak

is

duh

^
;

(for

e.

g.

from dagh reach the 3. s,

-budh icahing becomes

dagh-t)

milking becomes dhiik.

B. Internal Sandhi.

56. The rules of internal Sandhi apply to the finals of

roots and nominal and verbal stems before all endings of declension (except those beginning with consonants of the
middle stem 73 a) and conjugation, before primary suffixes
:

and before secondary suffixes (182, 2) beginning

with a vowel or y. Many of these rules agree with those
of external Sandhi.
The most important of those which
differ fi-om external Sandhi are the following
(182,

1)

'

not really compensation but the survival of the original

such roots, which was lost owing to the avoidance
of an aspirate at the beginning and end of the same syllable.
Hence
when the final aspirate disappeared, the initial returned.

This

is

initial aspiration of

INTERNAL .SANDHI

40

[57-61

Final Vowels.
57. In many cases before a vowel i is changed to iy
u and u to uv e. g. dhi + e = dhiy-6 dat. s. for thought
bhu + i = bhuv-i on earth yu-joiv-^ has joined (-/yu).
58. Final r before y becomes ri (154, 3) e. g. kr rnahc
;

kri-yate
terminations
siuallow

is

changed to

gir-yate

is

after labials to iir

swallowed, gir-na swallowed

ir,

Final r before consonant

3. s. pres. pass, is done.

gr
pr Jill

e. g,

pur-yate is filled, pur-na filled.

59. e, ai, o, au are changed before suffixes beginning
with vowels or y to ay, ay, av, av respectively
e. g.
se + u = say-ii lying rai + e = ray-6 for wealth
go + e =
gav-e for a cow; nau + i = nav-i in a boat; go + ya =
gav-ya relating to cows.
;

Final Consonants.

60. The most notable divergence from external Sandhi is

the unchangeableness of the final consonants (cp. 32) of
roots and verbal or nominal stems before suffixes and
terminations beginning with vowels, semivowels and nasals
(while before other letters they usually follow the rules of
external

Sandhi);

vac-ya to he spoken, duras-yu

vac-mi I speak (but vakti
speak, paprc-yat would mix prane-

e.g.

worshipping, yasas-vat glorious

speaks)

ah nom.
a.

voc-am I
pi.

will

forward.

Before the primaiy

suffix na,

is

assimilated

e. g.

an-na

n. food

(for ad-na), ehin-nd cut off (for chid-na) ; and before the secondary
suffixes mant and niaya, t and d ; e.g. vidyun-mant accompanied by

and mrn-niaya consisting o/chiy (mfd). In the nominal

case-form san-nam (for sat-nam) of six (sds) the final t is assimilated.

lightning (yidyut)

61. Nominal or verbal stems ending in consonants and

followed by terminations consisting of a single consonant,
drop the termination altogether, two consonants not being
tolerated at the end of a

that remains

is

word

(28).

then treated according

The

final

consonant

to the rules of external

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

G1-G3]

Thus pranc + s nom.

Sandhi.

(the s being first dropped,

41

forward becomes pran

s.

the palatals being changed to

and the k being then dropped by 28)

a-doh + 1 = a-dhok he milked (55).
62. Aspirates followed by any sounds except vowels,
semivowels or nasals (60) lose their aspiration e. g. randh +
dhi = rand-dhi 2. s. aor. impv. subject; labh + sya-te =
gutturals by 27,

similarly

'

lap-syate (B.)

a-rabh-ya

3.

s.

fut,

take

tvill

but yudh-i in

battle

seising.

A lost soft

thrown back before

(55)
pi. impv. of indh
Jcindle
bhud-bhis inst. pi., bhut-sii loc. pi. But before s
this rule applies only partially thus from dabh harm des.
bhas
dip-sa-ti desires to injure, dip-su intending to hurt
a.

dhv, bh,

aspirate
;

e. g.

is,

if

possible,

ind-dhvam

2.

chciv

baps-a-ti chews

aghuksat

dah hum

guh
part,

hide

des,

ju-guk-sa-tas beside

daksat beside dhaksant

duh

a-duksat beside a-dhuksat.

h. But it is thrown forward on a
following t and th/
which are softened
rabh + ta = rab-dha seized
e. g.
runadh + ti = runad-dhi rundh + tam = rund-dham 3. s.
impv. let him obstruct.
63. Palatals, a. While c regularly becomes guttural
before consonants (cf. 61
27
7 b), j in some cases (the
milk

aor.

majority) becomes guttural (k,

g),^

in others cerebral

(t,

d,

s)

'
For the Vedic language tolerates two aspirates neither at the
beginning and the end of the same syllable, nor at the end of one and
On the other hand, there is no loss of
the beginning of the next.
aspiration in the root if an aspirate (after a vowel) which belongs to a
suffix or a second member of a compound follows
e. g. vibhu-bhis
;

garbha-dhi m. breeding-place. (The two imperatives bodhi be for bho-dhi, and ja-hi strike for jha-hi, follow the general rule.)
Except in the case of the root dha 2)Zce, the weak stem of which
dadli (following the analogy of 62) becomes dhat before t and th
with the Vibhus

'^

(cf.

134

b).

always becomes k before a conjugational

sva 2. s. impv. of rarj wipe.
j

s (cp. 144, 4)

e. g.

mrk-

TNTEENAL CONSONANT SANDHI

42

[63-65

uk-ta spoken (-/vac) ; yuk-ta joined ('/yiij) rug-na

broken (\/ruj: cp. 65); but rat nom. s. king (for raj + s);
mrd-dhi 2. s. impv. wipe (for mrj-dhi) ras-tra kingdom (for

e. g.

raj-tra: cp. 64).

The

b.

palatal s before
-

before s

fut. of

looks (pas),

vis enter

direction

(not

s)

(73 a) normally

vid-bhis

vik-su

nak nom.

c and

c.

always

bhis with

bh

and th

s before t

s.

ivith

loc. pi.

nas

of

3.

s.

palatalize a following

sis- aor.,

a-prat

e.

g.

^
;

pad-

vek-syasi

dik nom.

s.

of dis

vis-ta entered (-/vis).

yaj-na sacrifice, but pras-na question.

The ch of the root prach ask
d.
a-prak-sit

(cp. 64)

tribes (vis)

(vis)

night

becomes d

n
is

3. s. s- aor.

e. g.

yaj

treated

(=

+ na =
like

a-prach-s-t)

prs-ta asked, pras-tum inf. to ask.

64. Cerebrals change following dentals to cerebrals (39);
avid-dhi 2. s. impv. ise. g. is + ta := is-ta ; av-is + dhi

av san + nam (for sat-nam) = san-nam (cp. 33, 60 a).

a. While the cerebral sibilant s seems always' to become a cerebral mute (t or d) in declension and becomes
d in conjugation, it regularly becomes k before s in conjugation (cp. 63 b and 67) e. g, dvis + s = dvit nom. s. hating,
av-is +
vi-prxis + s = vi-priit droj), vi-prud-bhis inst. pi.
dhi = avid-dhi 2. s.impv. is- aor. of av favour dvis + sa-t =

aor. of

dvik-sat

3. s. inj.

sa- aor. of dvis hate.

65. Change of dental n to cerebral n.

preceding cerebral

r, f, r, s (even though vowels, gutor

mutes
nasals, y, v, or h intervene) changes
(followed by a vowel or n, m, y, v) to cerebral n ;

tural or labial

a dental

= nrnam of men pit? + nam = pitrnam of

g. nr + nam
var
+ na = varna m. colour-, us + na = usna hot
fathers
e.

g in cases of dis and dfs dig-bhyas, drg-bhis.

in the nom. vit (vis), vi-pat (vi-pas) and spfit spy (spds) the
cerebral lias taken the place of the phonetic k owing to the influence
of other forms in which the cerebral is phonetic.
s No
example occurs of this sound before the su of the loc. plur.
^

But

CEREBEALTZATION OF DENTAL N

65]

43

kramana

n, step (vowels and labial nasal intervene), ark6na

brah(guttural and vowel) ; grbhnati seizes (labial mute)
manya devotion (vowel, h, labial nasal, vowel ; n followed
;

by

y).^

This rule

which

a s

followed throughout within a word even

is

it

contains

is

by Sandhi;

jDroduced

when

usuvanah.

e.g.

u suvanah).

(for

The ccrebi-alization of n takes place almost as regularly in verbs

compounded with the prepositions pra lie/ore, para moan, pari round,
a.

nir (for nis)

tions

e.g.

denied

out,

thrust) , -pva-netv guide

praniti breathes (a/ an)

with ghn

(e. g.

nominal derivatives of these combina-

as well as in

para-nude {hxlA

nir hanyat (ban

abhi-pra-ghnanti)

{m

pari-hnuta
but not in forms
but pari-hiu6mi
lead);

strike),

pra hinonii,

(hi impel).
b.

In nominal compounds n

initial of

the second

member

is

usually cerebralized

when

it

is

the

e.g. dur-naman ill-named,

tri-nak^ n. third heaven. It is less fre-

in the

RV.

pra-napat great-grandson but

quent medially e. g. piirvahna/o?*enoow, vfsa-manas manly-spirited, but
fsi-manas offar-seeing mind nr-pana giving drink to men, but pari-pana
n. drink (ep. 50 c iS).
;

t. Cerebralization is even extended to external Sandhi in a closely

connected fullowing word, most often initially in the enclitic nas us,
I'arely in other monosyllables such as mi now, na like, occasionally in
other Avords also ^ e. g. saho sii nah pdri neta
It somevisat.
times occurs mediallj', oftenest in the enclitic pronoun ena this e. g.
indra enam. It occasionally apj^ears in accented words also after
final r ; e. g. gor ohena.
;

Table showing

when n changes

to n.

r
r
r

gutturals (including h),

labials (including v),

by vowels,

to

n,

and y

in spite of intervening vowels,

There

ai'e

two exceptions

change

if

followed

m,

y, V.

to this rule in the RV., the gen. plur.

ustranam and rastranam.

^

After the final cerebral t of sdt (for sds six), assimilated to the
n (33), initial dental n is cerebralized in san-navati ninety-six

following
(TS.)

and in san niramimita

(B.).

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

44

[6o

66

A. The dental n
remains unchanged before y and v e. g. han-yate is
slain
tan-v-ana stretching/, indhan-van possessed of fuel
(indhana), asan-vant having a mouth.
1.

2.

becomes Anusvara before

as final of a root

gham-sa-ti wishes

to hill

(V^han)

when

also

before final s or s in the neuter plural (71c;

6nams-i

n.

pi.

of

6nas

sin

havims-i

n.

is

it

pi.

e.g. ji-

inserted

83); e.g.
of havis

ohlation (83).

B.
1.

The dental s
becomes dental

as the final of roots or

nominal

stems
a.

before the s of verbal suffixes (future, aorist, desiderative)

in the three verbs vas

divell,

a- vat-sis thou, hast dwelt

vas

and ghas

shine,

vat-syati

ivill

shine

eat

thus

ji-ghat-sati

and jighat-su hungri/.^

before case-endings with initial bh in the reduplicated
thus jagrvad-bhis
perf. participle and in four other words
usad-bhis from usas f. dawn ;
inst. pi. having aivdkened
wishes to cat (171, 5)
h.

mad-bhis, mad-bhyas from mas m..month; svatavad-bhyas

from sva-tavas self-strong.
This change was extended
without phonetic justification " to the nom. ace. s. n. in the
RV., as tatau-vat extending far.
2. disappears
e. g.
a-bhak-ta
a. between mutes
;

3.

s.

s-

aor.,

for

a-bhak-s-ta beside a-bhak-s-i, of bhaj share cas-te for

caks-te (= original eas-s-te) 3. s. pres. of caks speak;
;

a-gdha uneaten

for a-ghs-ta

from ghas

similar loss occurs in verbal

eat.

compounds formed with

The change of s to t before the t of the 3. s. of a past tense, as in

vy-avat has shone forth from vi-vas, is probably not a phonetic change,
but is rather due to the influence of the 3. s. of other pi-eterites with t
1

*^-vas-t having thus become a-vat instead of *dvas,

2
There having been no case-ending s here. No example occurs in

the RV. and

AV.

of a loc. pi. in vat-su.

CEREBRALTZATION OF

66-67]

ud and

the i^reposition

45

stambh

the roots stha stand and

support e. g. ut-thita and ilt-tabhita raised up.

h. before dh ; e. g. sa-dhi for sas-dhi 2. s,
impv. of sas
order; a-dhvam 2 pi. mid. impv. of as sit; also after
;

becoming s and cerebralizing the following dental e.

a-sto-dhvam (for a-sto-s-dh.vam) 2. pi. aor. of stu praise.
;

g.

67. Change of dental s to cerebral s.

preceding vowel except a (even though Anusvara^
intervenes) as well as k, r, s change dental s (followed by
a vowel, s, t, th, n, m, y, v) to cerebral s ;^ e. g. from havis
oblation: havis-a inst. s., havims-i nom. pi.
eaksus n.
caksus-a
inst.
caksiiins-i
nom.
havis-su
loc.
eye:
s.,
pi.;

pi.

sraj

loc.

pi.

wreath

f.

ti-sthati

loc.

stands from

pi.

gir

stha stand

f.

so)ig

has

slept

gir-su

caksus-mant

bhavi-syati xvill be from bhli he

from svap sleej). But sarpih (final)
^
precedes) us-ra matutinal.

possessing eyes

(a

srak-sii

su-svapa

manaa-a

The

a.

in verbal

cerebralizatiou of

compounds

regularly takes place in the RV. initially

ending in 1 and u, as well as in

after prepositions

nominal derivatives from such compound verbs

tion nis out;

manah

e. g.

ni sida

sil

down,

the initial

than a

also after the preposinih-sd.hapraise

tliey

conquering.*

In nominal compounds,

b.

when

dnu stuvanti

e. g.

s of

more usually cerebralized than not,

is preceded by vowels other
abundant Soma. But s is often retained in
s is

the second

su-s6ma having

member

the RV., not only when r or r follows, as in hrdi-spfs touching the

heart,
rsi-svara sung by seers, but also when there is no such cause to prevent
1

The

s,

however, remains in forms of hims

injure,

nims

kiss,

and

pums man, probably under the iufluence of the strong forms hiuasti,
pumamsam, &c.
2
Words in which s otherwise follows r or any vowel but a must be
bfsaya a demon, bisa n. root fibre, bus^ n. vapour.
remains when immediately followed by r or r, o. g. tisrSs, tisfbhis, tisfnam f. of tri three; usras gen., usri and usram loc, beside
usar voc. dawn.
*
The s remains unchanged when followed by r (even when t inor v in
tervenes) or r (even though a intervenes, with additional
of foreign origin, as
3

smav remember

aTid

svar sound\.

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

46

go-sakhi beside go-sakhi possessbuj cattle. After r the

f. oUainment of light.
Cerebralization is even extended to external Sandhi in initial

the change
s

; e. g.

s in svar-sa light winning, svar-satl

becomes
c.

[67-69

and u in the RV. when the two words are syntactically

This change chiefly takes place in monosyllabic
such as sa, sya, sim, sma, svid, and particuand
particles,
pronouns
It also occurs in numerous verbal forms and
e. g. u su.
lai-ly su
stha /or ye are, divi siin being in heaven. In
participles e.g. yuyam
other words the change is rare e. g. tri .sadhdstha.^ In the later
Samhitas this form of external Sandhi is very rare except in the

s after a final

closely connected.

combination u

sii.

Table showing

when

changes to

Vowels except a

change

(in spite of inter-

vening Anusvara),

to

followed

if

by vowels,
t,

r, s

k,

s.

m,

th, n,
y, V.

68. The labial m remains unchanged before y, r, 1 (cp,

60 and 42 B 1) e, g. yam-yamana being guided, vam-ra m.
But before suffixes beginning
ant, apa-mlukta concealed.
V
with
it becomes n;
e.g. jagan-van having gone (from
;

gam

go).

69. a. The breathing h becomes k in all roots before s

sak-si 2. s. pres.
e. g. dhak-si 2. s. pros, from dah hum
from saJa prevail.
h. In roots beginning with d it is treated like gh before
;

t,

th,

form

(62 b), dnh + tam

treated
is the oldest
Similarly
of the perf. pass, participle of the root
miig-dha

dh

e. g.

= dug-dham

dah + ta

3.

dag-dha burnt

du. pres.

muh

beivildered.
c.

which

in all other roots is treated like

after

changing a following

1
In tlie EV. occurs the Sandhi y^juh
out cerebralization of the nn (cp. 65).

t,

an aspirate cerebral,
th, dh to dh and

skanndm

(for

skanndm) with-

DECLENSION

69-70]

lengthening a preceding short

47

vowel,

is

dropped

e. g.

+ ta = sa-dha overcome rih + ta = ri-dha liclced

muh + ta = mu-dha (AV.) hetvildered vah + ta = u-dha ;"
vah + dhvam = vo-dhvam (VS.).^
'

sah

d.

An

c is the root nah hind, in which h is

nad-dha hound. An exception to both h
the root drh dr-dha firm (begins with d and has

exception to

treated as

and

c is

dh

a short vowel).

CHAPTER

III

DECLENSION
70. Declension, or the inflexion of nominal stems by
means of endings that express the various syntactical relations represented by the cases, is most conveniently treated,
owing to characteristic difference of form, meaning, and use,
under (1) nouns (including adjectives) (2) numerals; (3) pro;

nouns.

In Vedic there are

a.

three genders

h.

three

c.

eight cases

masculine, feminine, and neuter

numbers
:

singular, dual,

and plural

nominative, vocative, accusative, instru-

mental, dative, ablative, genitive, locative.^

1

In

With Samprasarana.

all these past participles

the

dh

is

in the

RV. written

as Ih.

^
Through vazh-dhvam azh here becoming o just as original as
(through az) becomes o (cp. 45 b).
*
Before this dh the vowel r never appears lengthened, but it is
prosodically long (cp. 8, note 2).
^
This is the order of the eases in the Hindu Sanskrit grammarians,
excepting the vocative, which is not regarded by them as a case. It
is convenient as the only arrangement by which such cases as are
:

identical in form, either in the singular, the dual, or the plural,

be grouped together.

may

DECLENSION

48
71.

[71-72

The normal case-endings added

following

Dual.

Singular.
m. f.

N.
V.

A.

am

au

Ab.l

__

as

ic

bhyam

b^Lis

bhyas

'

am
su

The

n.

OS

L*

p.

D.

m.

n.

1'

I.

Plural.

m. f.

n.

stem are the

to the

same (apart from the accent) as

numbers except the masc. and fern,
sing, of vowel stems generally and the masc. sing, of consonant stems in -an, -man, -van -mant, -vant -in -as
-yams, -vams -tar.
h. The noni. ace. sing, has the bare stem excepting the
words in -a, which add m.
c. The nom.
voc. ace. plur. neut. before the ending i
insert n after a vowel stem and before a single final mute
a.

vocative is the

the nominative in

all

or sibilant of a consonant stem (modifying the

to the character of the

72.

consonant

An important distinction in

the strong and the

weak

stem.

in derivative consonant stems

66

op.

n according

A 2).

declension

is

that between

It is fully developed only

formed with the

suffixes -anc,

-yams, -vams.
In the first four and in the last the weak stem is further
reduced before vowel endings.
The stem here has three
be
which
forms,
may
distinguished as strong, middle, and
weakest.
-an,

a.

-man, -van

-ant, -mant, -vant

Shift of accent

was the cause

-tar

of the distinction.

The

stem, having been accented in the strong cases, here naturally

preserved its full form but it was shortened in the weak
For a similar
cases by the accent falling on the endings.
;

reason the last vowel of the strong stem,

if

long, is regularly

DECLENSION

72-74]

49

shortened in the vocative, because the accent always shifts

to the first syllable in that case.

73. The strong stem appears in the following cases

Nom.
Nom.
Nom.

Nom
When

voc. ace. sing.

voc. ace. dual

of masc. nouns. ^

voc. (not ace.) plur.

voc. ace. plural only of neuters.

the stem has three forms, the middle stem

terminations beginning with a consonant^
before
appears
(bhyam, bhis, bhyas, su) the weakest before terminations
a.

beginning with a vowel in the

nom.

pratyanc-au

e. g.

du.

remaining weak cases

pratyag-bhis inst. pi.

pratic-6s gen. du. (93).

h. In neuters with three stems, the nom. voc. ace. sing,
are middle, the nom. voc. ace. du. weakest e. g. pratyak
pratic-i du.
pratyanc-i pi. (93). The other cases
sing.
;

are as in the masc.

NOUNS.
74. Nominal stems are, owing to divergences of inflexion,
under the main divisions of consonant and
vowel declension.
^
I. Stems ending in consonants
may be subdivided into
best classified

A. unchangeable
II.

B. changeable.

Stems ending in vowels into those

and u; C. i and u.

in A. a

and a

B.

Excepting names of relationship in -tar (101), nearly all nouns

with changeable stems form their feminine with the suffix -i (100).
2
Changeable stems are named in this grammar in their strong and
original form, though the middle form would be more practical, inasmuch as that is the form in which changeable stems ajjpear as prior
'

member in compounds.
^
Some Sanskrit grammars

begin with the vowel declension in a

A) since this contains the majority of all the declined stems in
the language. But it appears preferable to begin with the consonant
decleiTsion which adds the normal endings (71) without modification.
(11.

181Q

DECLENSION

50
A.

I,

[75-77

Unchangeable Stems.

75. These stems are for the most part primary or radical,
but also include some secondary or derivative words. They

end in consonants of
always become

palatals,

sound in certain
as are i-equired

terminations

all classes

They are

cases).

liable to

such changes only

the rules of Sandhi before the consonant

by

16

(cp.

except gutturals (these having

to the original

which however revert

Masculines and feminines ending

inflected exactly alike
and the

a).

same consonant are

in the

neuters differ only in the ace.

76. The

and nom.

s.

voc. ace. du.

and

pi.

consonants of the stem retain their original

sound before vowel terminations (71) but when there is no
final

in the nom. sing., in which the s of the m. and

dropped), and before the ending su of the loc. pi., they

ending
is

f.

(i.e.

must be reduced to one of the letters k, t, t, p or Visarjanlya

(27) which respectively become g, d, d, b or r before the
terminations beginning with bh.
a. The voc. sing. m. f. is the same as the nom.
except in
stems in (derivative) as (83).
h.

Forms

in the

of the

Samhitas

nom.

voc. ace. pi. n.

seem not

to occur

'

except in the dez'ivative as,

where they are common

e.g.

is,

us stems

apamsi, arcimsi, caksumsi.

Stems in Dentals.
77. Paradigm tri-vrt m.
N. m.

f.

A. m.

f.

I.

Sing.
n. trivrt
trivrt
trivrt-am n. trivrt
trivrt-a
trivrt-e
trivrt-as
trivft-i

D.

Ab. G.
L.

f.

n. threefold.

Dual.
N.A.) ftrivrt-a,

N. m.

f.

m.f.

A. m.

f.

(trivrt-au

Plur.

'

G.
L.

[trivrt-os]
trivrt-os

But in the Bi-ahmanas are found from -bhrt

pi. n.

triv^t-as

I.

G.
L.

m.

-hu-t sacrificing the N.

trivrt-ai^

f.

V.

trivrt-a
trivrt-s
trivrt-a

bearing, -vrt turning,

forms -bhrnti, -vrnti, -hunti.

STEMS IN DENTALS

77]

51

1. Of the stems in t most are radica], nearl)' thirty of

them being formed with a determinative t added to roots

ending in

the short vowels

srii-t hearing, ki'-t

appear as the last

dyu-t

f.

brilliance

u, r;

i,

conquering,

e.g. ji-t

all of

Nearly

mahing.

them, however,

member of compounds, except cit f. thought

nrt f. dancing vr-t 7^05^. From sarva-

f.

hu-t offering cornpletehj occurs in N. pi. n. the form sarvahunti in the AB. There are also a few derivative stems
formed with the suffixes -vat, -tat, -it, -ut, and secondary
-t; e.g.
f.

stream

pra-vat
;

f.

deva-tat

height,

mar-vit m. storm-god

f.

divine service-, sar-it

n. liver,

yakr-t

sakr-t n.

excrement.

There are only three stems in th

path, abhi-snath adj. piercing.

2.

kaprth,

n. penis,

path m.
3.

a.

About 100 stems end in

radical d, all but a

few

e. g.
being roots used as the final member of compounds
nom. adri-bhid mountain-cleaving.
Only eight occur as
;

monosyllabic substantives nid f. contempt, bhid f. destroyer,

vid f. knowledge, ud f. u-ave, mud f. jog, mrd f. dag, hrd n.
:

heart

(used in

weak

latter lengthens its

Sing. N. pat.

pad-as.

h.

foot.

The

A. pad-am.

I.

pad-a.

D. pad-6.

Ab.G.

L. pad-i.

Du. N.A. pad-a.

PL

eases only)
and pad m.
vowel in the strong cases

I.

Ab. pad-bhyam.

A. pad-as.
N, pad-as.
L. pat-su.
G. pad-am.

There are also

six

I.

pad-bhis.

G.L. pad-6s.
D. pad-bhyas.

stems formed with derivative d

(suffixal -ad -ud), seemingly all feminine: drs-adand dhrs-ad

nether millstone, bhas-ad hind quarters, van-ad longing, sar-ad

autumn, kak-iid summit, kak-ud palate.

4. There are about fifty radical stems in dh, simple or
compound. They are almost restricted to m. and f., no
distinctively n.

forms (N. A. du.

forms being used as

n. in the

pi.)

G. L.

e2

occurring and only four

s.

Seven stems appear

DECLENSION

52
as monosyllabic

the rest as

Jmnger

fern,

yiidh

vrdh strengthening as a masc. adj

nadh bond sridh foe ksiidh
mrdh conflict vrdh prosperity sprdh

nouns

.,

substantives

fight

[77-78

hattle.

5. Eadical stems in n are formed from half a dozen roots.

Four of these are monosyllabic substantives tan f. succession
ran m. jog van m. wood svan adj. sounding.^ There are
also the compound adjectives tuvi-svan roaring cdoud and
:

Han staging occurs as the final

coivs.
of at least thirty-five compounds, but as it follows
for the most part the analogy of the an stems, it will be
go-san ivinning

member

treated

under these

(92).

Stems in Labials.

in p, bh, and
only, are not
neuters occur in the first two and only one

78. These stems, which end

numerous.

two

or

No

in the last.

All the monosyllabic stems in p are fem. substantives.

They are: ap ivater, krp heautg, ksap night, ksip finger,
rip deceit, riip earth, vip rod. There are also about a dozen
1.

compounds, all adjectives except vi-stap f. summit. Three

e. g. pasu-trp
of the adjectives occur as f., the rest as m.
m. delighting in cattle.
;

a.

ap lengthens the stem

sometimes used

in the N.V. pi. ap-as, a

for the A. also.

The forms occurring

form
are

Du.N. ap-a. Pl.N.V. ap-as. A.

ap-as. I. ad-bhis. D.Ab. ad-bhyas. G. ap-am, L. ap-sii.
2. The six uncompounded stems in bh are all f. substanSing.

I.

ap-a. Ab.G. ap-as.

ksubh

push, grbh seising, nabh destroyer, subh

stubh ^;ra/se (also adj. praising), and kakilbh^eaA;.
There ai'e also more than a dozen compounds the substanthere are
tives are all f., the rest being m. or f. adjectives

tives

splendour,

The accent

of these stems is irregular in remaining on the radical

syllable (App. III. 11,

1),

except tana (beside tana) and vanam.

STEMS IN PALATALS

78-79]

53

The cases of tri-stubh f. triple praise (a metre)

N.
tristup. A. tristiibh-am. I. tristiibh-a. D.
Sing.
tristiibh-e.
Ab. ti'istiibh-as.
L. tristubh-i 7 PI. A.
no neuters.

are

tristubh-as.

nabh lengthens

a.

its

vowel

the N.

in

nabh-as.

pi.

A. nabh-as.

There are

3.

gam, jam

f.

five or six

monosyllabic stems in m, and

sam n. happiness, dam n. (?) house, ksam,

sam-nam f. favour.
earth, him m. (?) cold

one compound

Gam and jam syncopate in the s.

a.

ksam

LAb.G. gm-a, jm-a

:

s.
and
gm-as, jm-as
syncopates
its
N.
vowel
in
ksam-as.
lengthens
du.pl. ksm-as; ksam-a;
;

the

in

Ab. G.

Dam

dan (for dam-s) in the expressions patir

dan and pati dan = dam-patis and dam-pati lord of the
has the G.

s.

house and lord and lady of the house.

Stems in Palatals.
79. The palatals

(c, j, s) undergo a change of organ when

and before consonant terminations (cp. 63). c always
becomes guttural (k or g), j and s nearly always become
guttural, but sometimes cerebral (t or d).

final

1.

The unchangeable stems in

are monosyllabic and

'

when uncompounded

almost exclusively

f.

substantives.

Tvac sm, however, twice

occurs as a m., and krunc curlew

is m.
Compounds, as adjectives, are often m., but only one
form occurs as a n., in the adv. a-prk in a mixed manner.

Vac

speech

would be declined

as follows

A. vac-am (Lat. voc-em).

Sing. N.V. vak.
D. vac-6.
Ab.G. vac-as. L. vac-i.
Dual. N.A.V. vac-a, vac-au.
I. vag-bhyam.
Plur. N. V. vac-as. A. vac-as (rarely vac-as).
D.Ab. vag-bhyas. G. vac-am.
^

Stems in derivative anc are changeable

I.

I.

vac-a.

vag-bhis.

(93).

DECLENSION

54

tvac

[79

sic hem rue lustre,

slcin^
Similarly declined are
sue flame, srue ladle
re stanza, mrc injur);
ni-mriic
sunset and other compounds.
Krunc forms its N. s. krun,
du. kruucau.
:

There

2.

prch

asJc

3.

a.

only one stem in eh, formed from the root

is

N. du. m. bandhu-preh-a ashing after kinsmen

also the D.
to greet

and A.

infinitive foi'ms

prch-e

to asl;

vi-preh-am and sam-prch-am to

Uncompounded radical stems in

substantives

but

sam-preh-e

ask.
j

are mostly

aj driver, vij stake at play are m.,

f.

and

bhraj are m. as well as f. Neut. forms occur in

compound adjectives, but never the distinctively n. endings
yiii,'^

raj,

of the

N.A.V. du. and

When

the

is

pi.''

derived from a guttural,

it

becomes a

guttural in the N. s. and before consonant endings when

derived from an old palatal, it becomes a cerebral in the
;

N.

s.^

the L.

and before consonants, but k before the su of

pi.

Thus
garment
mistress

in the N.
;

urk

(urj) vigour

nir-nik (nir-nij) bright

but bhrat m. shining (bhraj), rat m, king, f.

L. pi. srak-su garlands (sraj), pra-yak-su offerings

(pra-yaj).

and of avayaj m.
anomalous in dropping the j and adding
ava-yas, avayas (cp. 28 a

Tlie N. of ava-yaj

a.

priest

who

f.

share of the sacrificial oblation

offers the oblation is

the s of the nom.

There are seven m. and f. adj. or subst. formed with

the suffixes -aj and -ij
a-svapn-aj sleepless, trsn-aj thirstij,
h.

iwj,

From vyac

extend occurs the strong form uru-vyancam/ar extendand from sac accompany only the strong forms A. -sac-am, and N. pi.

-sae-as.
2
This word meaning companion also has a nasalized form in
N.A. s. du. yiin (for yunk), yuiaj-am, yiinj-a.
2
But in a Brahmana -bhaj sharing forms the N. pi. n. form -bhanji.
*
Except in rtv-ik from rtu-ij m. sacrificing in due season, priest (from
:

yaj

sacrifice).

STEMS TN PALATALS AND

79]

dhrs-aj

m.

san-aj old

hold,

There

trader.

usij m.f.

the n. asrj

'

A.

I.

usij-am.

55

f.

ann, van-ij

blood.

would be declined as follows

Sing. N. usik.
G. usij -as.

Du.N.

us-ij desiring, bhur-ij

is also

usij-a.

D.

usij-e.

G.L. usij-os.

usij-a.

PI.N. usij-as.
A. usij-as.
G. usij-am.

I.

usig-bhis.

D. usig-bhyas.

There are about sixty monosyllabic and compound

Nine monos formed from about a dozen roots.
dis
f.
das
stems
are
direction, drs look,
worship,
syllabic
4.

stems in

nas

nigJit, pas sight, pis ornament, pras dispute,

vris finger.
Two are m. is lord and spas
rest are compounds (about twenty of them
Some half-dozen cases of the latter
-drs).
:

vis settlement,
spg.

All the

formed from
are

used as

forms (N.A. du. pi.) occur.

The s, as it represents an old palatal, normally becomes
Before
cerebral d before bh, but in dis and drs a guttural.
the su of the L. pi. it phonetically and regularly becomes k.
neuter, but no distinctively

n.

becomes k in the N. s. (which originally

ended in s), as dik, nak but cerebral t in spas and vi-spas
spij, vis and vi-pas a river.
The normal forms, if made from vis settlement, would be
D. vis-6. Ab.G. vis-as.
I. vis-a.
N.V. vit. A. vis-am.
It usually also

L. vis-i.

Du. N.A. vis-a, vis-au.

PI. N.A. vis-as.
I vid-bhis.

D. vid-bhyas.

G. vis-am.

L. vik-su.
a.

The N.

of

some compounds of dra

is

nasalized, as ki-dfn (for

but ta-dfk suck.

The N. s irregularly represents the final palatal (28 a) in purodas
m. sacrificial cake N. purodas, A. purodasam.

ki-dfnk)

of what kind?,

1
This word
reduced suffix.

is

of obscure origin, but the

probably represents a

DECLENSION

56

[80-81

Stems in Cerebrals.

80. The only cerebral stems that occur end in d and s.

Of the former there are only two id f. praise (only found
in s. I. id-a) and id f. refreshment (only in s. I. id-a and
:

G. id-as).

There are a number of stems from about a dozen roots

ending in s preceded by i, u, r, or k. Seven of these are
uncompounded is f. refreshment, tvis f. excitement, dvis f.
:

hatred, ris

The

hold.

sris

f.

uks

lean,

vrs rain

injury
rest are

us

f.

mus

sprinJcle,

aks em.

dawn

compounds

The

prks

steal,

becomes

bh, but

is

of course dropped

when k

vi-priit

f.

drop,

an-ak

Uind

o.

The

final

eyeless,

prus

t in

dadhrs
mis ivinh,
dhrs dare,

satiation

f.

of the above or of
drip,

the N., and

precedes
I. pi.

e. g.

vi-prud-bhis.

becomes k in the adverbial neuter form dadhrk

Stems in

before

N. dvit,

boldly.

h.

There are some eighty stems formed from about

All three genders are found in their inflexion,
but the neuter is rare, occurring in two stems only, and
never in the plural. Of monosyllabic stems nih destroyer,
81.

a dozen roots.

mih

mist, giih hiding-place, riih sprout are

f.,.

druh fiend

is

m.

is m., mah (jreat, m. and n.

All the
f., sah conqueror
rest are compounds, more than fifty being formed from the
three roots druh hate, vah carry, sah overcome over thirty
The two stems usnih f. a metre,
of them from the last.'

or

and sarah
a.

As h

hec are

obscure in origin.

represents both the old guttural

gh and the

old

palatal jh it should phonetically become g or d before bh,

but the cerebral represents both in the only two forms that

occur with a

bh

ending.

In the only L.

pi.

that occurs,

^
upa-ndh f. shoe occurs only in the L. s. upa-nah-i. Judging by
the inflexion of the word in classical Sanskrit the h would become a
dental in the N. s. and before consonant endings.

STEMS IN H AND R

81-82]

57

anadiit-su (from anad-vah), the h imphonetically became t,

which has been dissimilated to t. In the N. the phonetic k
aj^peai's in the six forms -dhak, -dhuk, -dhruk, -I'uk,
-sprk, usnik, and the unphonetic
Sat)*

the three forms -vat,

t in

S^P^La
a

Stems formed from vah and sah lengthen the radical

vowel in the strong cases, the former always, the latter
^

h.

generally.

The forms actually occurring

would be

made from sah

if

victorious

m.

Sing. N.V.

f.

sat.-

Ab.G. sah-as.
Du. N.A.V. m.
PI.

N.A.V. m.
f.

sah-as.

f.

A. m.

f.

sah-am.

sah-a and sah-au.

f.

I.

sah-a.

D. sah-6.

L. sah-i.

sah-as.

D.

A. m.

sad-bhyas.

N.A.

n. sah-i.

and sah-as
sah-am.
L. m.

sah-as

G. m.

sat-sii.

Stems in

r.'^

82. There are over fifty stems in radical r.^ The preceding
vowel is nearly always i or u, only two stems containing
a and three a. Twelve stems are monosyllabic (seven f.,^
three

two

m.,"

n.^),

the rest being compounds.

The r
and
the
radical
vowel
pi.,

remains before the su of the L.

^
anad-vdh being a changeable stem with three forms is ti-eated
under the irregular changeable stems (96).
^
When h becomes t the initial s is cerebralized.
3
There are no stems in 1 while the five which may be regarded
as ending in the semivowels y or v are treated below (102) as ai, o,
or au stems.
*
The stems in which the r is derivative (and preceded by a), in
the suffixes -ar and -tar, are treated below (101) as r stems.
^
gir praise, dvar door, dhiir burden, piir stronghold, t^r star, psiir
;

victuals,

st^r

star.

gir praising, var protector, miir destroyer.

var

loater,

svar

light.

DECLENSION

58

lengthened in the N.

is

The forms

occurring,

Sing. N. pur.
L. pur-i.

if

s.

and before consonant endings.

made from pur, would be

A. pur-am.

Du. N.A. pur-a, pur-au.

N.V. pur-as. A. pur-as.

D. pur-bhyas.

pur-bhis.

I.

Ab.G. pur-as.

D. pur-6.

PI.

G. pur-am.

[82-83

L. pur-su.

a. dvar has the weakened A. pi. form duras (also once duras and
once dvaras), the only weak case occuri-ing.
b. tdr occurs in one
(strong) form only, N. pi. tar-as, and star in
one (weak) form only, I. pi. stfbhis.^
c. svar n. light has the two contracted forms D. sur-6, 6. sur-as.'^
It drops the case-ending in the L. s.^ siiar.

Stems in
83.

The

1.

radical s stems

s.

number about

forty.

dozen

are monosyllabic, five being m. jnas relative, mas month,

vas^ abode, pums niale,^ sas ruler two f. kas cough, nas
:

nose

five n.

The

tvelfare.

as face, bhas
rest are

light,

compounds,

mas
e.g.

flesh,

dos arm, yos

su-das giving

tvell,

liberal.

bh

Before

a.

The A.

h.

pi.

becomes d in the two forms I. mad-bhis and D.

one that occurs dor-bhyam.
has the accentuation of weak cases in mas-as and

the

mad-bhyas, and

r in the only other

jnas-as.

The

2.

derivative stems in s are formed with the suffixes

-as, -is, -us,

tives.

and

are,

pi. n., e.g.

manamsi, jy6timsi, caksumsi.

mostly compounds with these

are

member.
a. The as stems
^
3
^

with few exceptions, neuter substan-

All of them lengthen their final vowel in the N.V. A.

The m. and

stems as their

consist almost entirely of neuters,

f.

final

which

With the accent of a disyllabic.

irregular accent.
*
This word might be a feminine.
Like the an stems (90, 2).
This woixl will be treated later (96, 3) as an irregular changeable

With

stem.

STEMS IN AS

83]

59

are accented on the root, as man-as mind, but these as final

members of adjective compounds may be inflected in all
three genders.
There are also a few primary masculines,
which ai-e accented on the suffix, being either substantives,
as raks-as m. demon, or adjectives (some of which occur also
in the

f.

as well as

n.),

as ap-as active

and one primary

f.,

us-as dmvn.

The N.

s.

m.

f.

lengthens the vowel of the suffix e. g.

In about a dozen
f., su-manas m. f.
:

angiras m., usas'

compounds the long vowel appears (owing to the influence

of the m.) in the n. also
e. g. urna-mradas soft as ivool.
;

Before endings with initial bh the suffix as becomes o

The forms actually occurring, if made from ap-as,
(45 h).
n. (Lat. opus) worJc

and ap-as m.

f,

aetive

would be as follows

A. apas ; apas-am.
I. apas-a ;
apas.
;
D.
Ab.
apas-as apas-as.
apas-e ; apas-e.
apas-a.
V. apas.
L. apas-i ; apas-i.
D. apo-bhyam.
Du. N.A.V. apas-i ; apas-a, apas-au.-

Sing. N. apas

G. apas- OS.
PI.

apams-i;

bhyas

apas-as.

I.

apo-bhis; apo-bhis.
G.

apo-bhyas.

apas-am

D. apoL.

apas-am.

apas-su; apas-su.
Similarly N. n.

yasas

glory,

m.

f.

yasas glorious

f.

apsaras nymph.
a.

number

in the A.

maham
wisdom,

of forms

and N.A.

s.

have the appearance of being contractions

m. f. am = asam and as = asas thus
:

pi.

vedham ordaincr, usam dawn, jaram old age, medham

vayam vigour, an-agam sinless, apsaram. PI. N. ni. angiras,
great,

an-agas, na-vedas cognisant, sa-j6sas united; f. medhas, a-josas insatiA. m. au-agas, su-medhas (?)
able, na-vedas, su-radhas bountiful.
intelligent;

f.

usas.

The vowel

of

tliis

word

is

optionally lengthened in the A.

usas-am beside usas-ara, &c.

The ending au is here very rare and occurs chiefly in the

N. A. du., N. V.

Samhitas.

pi.

s.,

later

DECLENSION

60

'

[83

The

is stems, numbering about a dozen, consist

of
neuters only.
primarily
they form final members
of compounds, they are secondarily inflected as m. ; only
h.

When

one single such form, N.

as a

sva-soeis self-radiant, occurs

s.

f.

The

s becomes s before vowel-endings and the

and r before bli. The inflexion of the n. differs
from that of the m. in the A. s., N.A. du. and pi. The
actual forms occurring, if made from socis glow in the n.
and from -socis m. (when it differs from the n.), would
final

L. pi. su,

be

m. -socis-am.
I.
A. socis
socis-a.
Ab.G. socis-as. L. socis-i. V. socis.
PI. N.A. socims-i, m. -socis-as.
I. socir-bhis.
D. socirN.

Sing.

socis

D. socis-e.

G. socis-am.

bhyas.

L. socis-su (67).

a. asis f. praxjer, which is not really an is stem, being derived from

a + sis (the reduced form of the root sas\ is inflected thus: N. asis.
A. asis-am. I. asis-a. PI. N. A. asis-as.

The US stems, numbering

c.

at least sixteen exclusive

of comjiounds, comprise several primary masculines as well

as neuters ; three of the latter when compounded are also
inflected as
all

Eleven of the us stems are n. substantives,

hirth) accented on the radical syllable

f.

but one ( janiis

four of these (arus, caksus, tapus, vapus) are also used as

m. adjectives. Three of the exclusively m. us stems are
adjectives accented on the suffix, while
are substantives accented on the root.

The

final

before bh.

becomes

The

two (nahus, manus)

before vowel

inflexion of the n. is the

endings, and r
same as that of

The only
the m. except in the A. s. and N.A. du. pi.
f.
forms (about half a dozen) occur in the N. and A. :
e. g.

N. caksus seeing, A. du. tapus-a

The actual forms occurring,

and seeing as m. would be
:

if

hot.

made from caksus

eye as n.

CHANGEABLE STEMS

83-85]

61

I. caksus-a.
A. caksus ; m. caksus-am.
Sing. N. caksus.
D. caksus-e.
Ab.G. caksus-as. L. caksus-i.

Du. N. A. caksus-i m. caksus-a. D. caksur-bhyana.

m. caksus-as.
PI. N.A. caksums-i
I.
caksur-bhis.
;

G. caksus-am.

D. caksur-bhyas.

I.

Changeable Stems.

B.

84. Kegular changeable stems

are

found only

among

nouns formed with suffixes ending in the dentals

Those in t are formed with the
t, n, s, or the palatal c.
suffixes -ant,
those in n with -an,
-mant, -vant
-man, -van, and -in, -min, -vin those in s with -yams
and -vams those in c with -anc (properly a root meaning
derivative

to

The stems

hencl).

in -ant (85-86), -in (87),

-yams

(88)

have two forms, strong and weak those in -an (90-92),

-vams (89), and -anc (93) have three, strong, middle, and
;

weakest

(73).

Nouns with Two Stems.

85. Stems in -ant comprise present,^ future, and aorist
participles (156) active (m. and n.).- The strong stem is in
-ant, the weak in -at'*; e.g. ad-ant and ad-at ea^m^ from
ad eat. These participles are inflected in the m. and n.
f.
The n. inflexion
having a special stem in i.from the m. in the N.V.A. s. du. pi. only. The
accent, if resting on the suffix, shifts in weak cases to the
endings that begin with vowels.

only, the

differs

'

Excepting those of the reduplicating verbs and a few others that

follow their analogy (85 h).

On the formation of the
'

G.

f. stems see 95.

In Latin and Greek the distinction was

edentis, idovTo^.

lost

by normalization

DECLENSION

62

[85

Masculine.

N. adan^(GU.
V. adan

t^coj')

A. adant-am (Lat. edentem)

I.

adant-as (Gk. e^orre?)

a dantas

adant-a -au
adant-a -au
adant-a -au

adat-as
I. adad-bhis
D.Ab. adad-bhyas

adat-a
D. adad-bhyam
G. adat-6s

D. adat-6

Ab.G. adat-as

PLURAL.

DUAL.

SINGULAR.

L. adat-i

G.

adat-am

L.

adat-su

Neuter.
adant-i

adat-i

N.A. adat

arc-ant singing, sid-ant (sad sit),

Other examples are
ghn-ant (ban sJaij), y-ant (i go), s-ant (as U) pasy-ant
suny-ant 2ircssing
seeing) ich-smt wishing ^rnv-a.nt doing
:

bhanj-ant hreaJcing jan-ant knowing janay-ant begetting

yuyuts-ant wishing to fight fut. karisy-ant about to do aor.
;

saks-ant (sab overcome).

a.

of these participles is followed by a few

that have lost their old participial meaning:
prsant spotted, brbant great, riisant brilliant;

The analogy

adjectives

rbant

ioeah,

also the substantive

dant^

tooth.

The

adj.

mabant

great,

also originally a participle,^ deviates from the participial

declension in lengthening the vowel of the suffix in the

strong forms
Sing. N. m.

mahan

n.

mabat. A. mabant-am.

I.

mabat-a.

mabad-bbyam.
Du. N.A. mabant-a, -au.
mabad-bbis.
I.
A. mabat-as.
PI. N. mabant-as.
D.

L. mabat-su.

For original addnt-s, cp. Lat. edens.

loss of the
Probably an old participle of ad eat witli prehistoric
initial a like s-dnt being from as he.
3
From the root mail (originally magh). Cp. Lat. mag-nu-s.
'

PEESENT PARTICIPLES

85-8G]
J).

base,

The
i.

(172),

e.

63

participles of verbs with a reduplicating present

those of the third class (127, 2) and intensives

do not distinguish a strong stem,' in other words,

have at throughout

e, g.

repeatedly hilling (\/han).

bibhyat fearing, ghanighn-at

The analogy of these participles

followed by a few others formed from unreduplicated

w orshipping, sas-at instructing; also daks-at

is

bases: das-at

aor. part, of dah hum.

few others, again,
originally participles, have come to be used as substantives
with a shift of accent to the suffix. Three of these are f.

and dhaks-at

and two m.
vaghat m.

sravat ^

stream

vehat ^

f. barren cow
m. pursuer. Besides the first
three substantives just mentioned there are no feminines
:

vahat,'^

sacrificer

sascat

f.

'

except the adjective a-sascat unequalled when used as a f.

Hardly any n. forms occur except from the old reduplicated
participle jag-at going, living (from ga go), used chiefly as
a substantive meaning tlie animate ivorld.
The inflexion of
''

these reduplicated stems in at is like that of the compounded

radical t stems (77), the accent never shifting to the
endings.

The forms occurring

would be:

if

made from dadat

A. m. dadat-am.
Sing. N. m. n. dadat.
dadat-e.
G. dadat-as. L. dadat-i.
Plur. N.A. dadat-as.

I.

dadad-bhis.

I.

giving (-/da)

dadat-a.

D.

G. dadat-am.

86. The adjective stems formed with the suffixes -mant

and -vant, which both mean possessing, are inflected
exactly
alike and differ from the stems in -ant
solely in lengthening
the vowel of the suffix in the N. s. m.^ The V. of these stems
1
Which ]ias been weakened because here the accent
on the reduplicative syllable,
But vah-ant carrying as a participle.

is

regularly

"^

3
^

*
But ST&v-&-nt flowing.
The derivation of this word
But s^sc-at as a participle (from sac accompany).

Lit. having no equal

The

f.

is

but ^-saseaut-i as

formed with

tlie

f.

is

uncertain.

of the participle sascat.

mat-i, vat-i (95).

from the weak stem

DECLENSION

64

[86-87

is regularly^ formed with mas and vas

e.g. ha vis-mas
from havis-m.ant bhaga-vas from bhaga-vant.
;

From go-mant 2)ossessed

Sing. N. m.

mat-i.

g6man

n.

L.

would be formed

A. m. gomant-am.

gomat.

L. go-

V. m. gomas.

N. m. gomant-as

PI.

ofcoivs

n.

gomant-i.^

A. m. gomat-as.

gomat-su.

87. Adjective stems are formed with the suffixes -in,

-min, -vin, which mean iiossessing. Those in -in are very
common, those in -vin number nearly twenty, but there
only one in -min

is

in the

m. and

rg-min
*

n.

praising.

but the

only
occurring in the s. N. I. G. only.
come to be used as m. substantives
;

They

are declined

forms are very rare,

These stems sometimes
n.

e. g.

gath-in

singer.

As

in all derivative stems ending in n, the vowel of the

suffix is lengthened in the N. s. m., and the n disappears in

that case (in the n. also) and before consonant endings.

The forms actually occurring,

hands, would be as follows

if

made from hast-in

having

Sing. m. N, hasti. A. hastin-am. I. hastin-a. D. hastin-e.

Ab.G. hastin-as. L. hastin-i. V. hastin.

Du. m. N.A.

hastin-a,

-au.

I.D.

hasti-bhyam.

G.L.

hastin-os.
PI.

m. N. hastin-as.
hastin-am.

Sing. n. N. hasti.

I.

hasti-bhis.

D. hasti-bhyas.

G.

L. hasti-su.
I.

hastin-a.

G. hastin-as.

There are sixteen in the KV. in vas and only three in the later
more in the AV.). There are six
(of which there are eight
vocatives in mas in the EV., but no example of tlie form in man.
2
There are also vocatives in vas from stems in van and vams
from stems in yams).
(cp. the V. in yas
*
The only two forms that occur are ghrt&vanti and pasumanti.
The Padapatha reads vanti and manti in these forms, and the
lengthening of the vowel seems metrical.
4
The f. stem is formed with i asvin possessing horses f. a^vin-i.
1

van

COMPARATIVE STEMS IN YAMS

88-89]

65

88. 3, Comparative stems are formed with the suffix

yams, which is nearly always added with the connecting
vowel i to the accented root. Only two stems are formed
with yams exclusively
jya-yams greater and san-yams
six others are formed with yams as well as i-yams
older
The strong stem
e.g. bhu-yams and bhav-iyams more.
:

reduced in the weak cases, by dropping the nasal and

These stems are declined
shortening the vowel, to yas.
in the m, and n. only.^
No forms of the du. occur, and in

is

the

The V. s. ends in
made from kan-

only the N. A. G. are found.

pi.

The forms actually

yas.^
iyams younger, would be as

occurring,
follows

if

Masculine.
PLUKAL.

SINGULAR.

N. kaniyan

kaniyamsas

A. kaniyarns-am

kaniyas-as

I.

D.
Ab. G.
L.

V.

kaniyas-a
kaniyas-e
kaniyas-as
kaniyas-i
kaniyas

G.

kaniyas-am

Neuter.
N.A. kaniyas

The I.D.Ab.G.

kaniyams-i

sing, n., identical

with the m., also occur.

Nouns with Three Stems.

89.

1.

The stem

the suffix vams.

ways
'

The

of the perf. part, active is

This

is

before consonant terminations (by dropping the nasal

f.

is

formed by adding

to the

weak stem,

dearer.
"^

Cp. the mant, vant (86), and the

1819

formed with

reduced in the weak cases in two

-p

vams

(89)

stems

e.g.

pr^yas-i

DECLENSION

66

[89

and shortening the vowel) to vas which becomes vat

and before vowel terminations (by loss of the nasal accompanied by Samprasarana) to us which becomes us. There
are thus three stems
vams, vat, and us. The accent
always rests on the suffix in uncompounded forms. The
inflexion is restricted to the m. and n.The only specifically
n. form occurring is the A. s.
The V. s. is regularly formed
with vas,^ The forms actually occurring, if made from
cakrvams having done, would be as follows
^

Masculine.
SINGULAR.
N. cakrvan
A.

cakrvams-am

DUAL.

PLURAL.

STEMS IN AN, MAN, VAN

89-90]

ok-i-van

'

(uc be

ivoni).

This

i is

G7

dropped before us

e. g.

tasth-us-a, iy-us-as, jagm-iis-e.

90.

2.

Nouns

in an, man, van include a large number

van being by far the commonest, those

of words, those in

in

an the

least frequent.

to

m. and

n.

and there

is

These stems are almost restricted

but some forms of adjective stems serve as

one specifically f. stem yos-an tvomnn.
'"

f.,

In the strong cases the a of the suffix is visually lengthened,

adiivan-am but in half a dozen an and man stems it
remains unchanged, e. g. arya-man-am. In the weak cases
e. g.

the a

often syncopated before vowel endings, though

are preceded by a consonant,

is

when man and van

never

gravna from gravan pressing

e. g. I. s.

stone (but

as-man-a

stone), while before consonant endings the final n disappears,^

In the RV. syncopation never takes place
e.g. raja-bhis.

in the

N.A. du.

in the L.

As

n.,

nor with one exception (sata-davni)

s.

stems, the nasal is dropped in the N. s.,

But there are two peculiarities
of inflexion which, being common to these three groups, do
The
not appear elsewhere in the consonant declension.
in all other

m. adhva,

e. g.

n.

karma.

s. is in the EV. dropped more often than

miirdhan beside murdhan-i on the head. In the
n. both the final n of the stem and the termination i

ending of the L.
not

N.A.

e. g.

pi.

the RV., dropped in nineteen stems, e.g. karma;*

while they are retained in eighteen, e. g. karmani.
1. The an stems, which are both m. and n.," besides the
are, in

With

reversion to guttural, lack of reduplication, and strengthened

radical vowel.
2
The stems in an and man form their f. with i added to their
weakest form those in van substitute vari.

That is, the a represents an original sonant nasal.

*
Seven of these appear with a in the Samhita text, but with a, like
the rest, in the Pada text. The evidence of the Avesta indicates that
the a form of the Samhita is the older.
^
Six or seven adjectival forms ai-e used as f.
;

f2

DECLENSION

68
one

f.

.ire

yosan,

rbhu-ksan

[90

In the strong forms

Rhhus, pus-an, a god, and y6s-an
tiks-an ox and vfs-an hull fluctuate

not numerous.
the

chief of
ivoman retain short a

between a and a. In the inflexion of these stems (unlike

those in man and van) the concurrence of three consonants
is

not avoided

e. g.

sirsn-a,

I.

of sirs-an.

Six stems belong etymologically to this group though seeming to

^
belong to one of the other two. They are yu-v-an m, youth, sv-dn m.
^
dog, rjf-svan^ m. a man, matari-s van m. a demi-god, vi-bhv-an^/aro.

'

reaching,

pari-jm-an* going round,

siras head

sirs-dn n.

is

an extended form of

sir(a)s-din.

The normal forms,

SINGULAR.

if

made from rajan Mng, would be

STEMS IN MAN

90]

the strong forms

arya-man

victorious retain the short

forms, even

when

t-man

a god,

ra.

vowel in the

the suffix

is

In the

drop either the

ni. self,

suffix.

e. g.

bhu-man-a,

seven stems not only syncopate, but

or the n as well prathi-n-a, pre-n-a,

I. s.

bhu-n-a, mahi-n-a, vari-n-a; draghm-a, rasm-a.

The normal forms, if made from as-man (Gk.
m.

would be:

stone,

j6-man

In the weak

preceded by a vowel, about

a dozen forms do not syncopate the a,

da-man-e.

69

dKfj.coi/)

asma. A. asman-am. I. asman-a.' D. asman-e.'

Ab.G. asman-as. L. asman-i and asman. V. asman.
Du. N.A.V. asman-a. L. asman-os.
Plur. N.V. asman-as.
I. asma-bhis.
D.
A. asman-as.
Sing. N.

asma-bhyas.

The

n.

karman

differs

act are

karma.
karma.

Sing,

Gr.

in

asman-am.
the

N.A.

L. asma-su.

only.

These cases from

Du. karman-i.

PL karman-i, karma,

3. The stems in van are chiefly verbal adjectives and

are almost exclusively declined in the m.
Hardly a dozen
of them make n. forms, and only five or six forms are used

as

In the strong cases there

f.^

is

only one example of

the a remaining short anarvan-am.

In the weak cases,
when the suffix is preceded by a vowel, the a is always
:

syncopated in the Samhita text except in the forms da-van-e,

vasu-van-e, and rta-van-i. The V. is usually formed in

van,

but there are

four

in

vas

rta-vas,

eva-ya-vas,

pratar-it-vas, vi-bha-vas.^

When

the suffix is preceded by a voXvel, the a is generally syncomahi-mn-a, also mahi-n-a, &c.
2
The f. of these stems is otherwise formed with i, which is, however, never added to van, but regularly to a collateral suffix vara.
Twenty-five such stems in vari are found in the RV.
^
Cp. the mant, vant, yams, vams stems.
pated, as

DECLENSION

70

The normal forms

pressing-stone,

occurring, if

would be

[90-91

made from gra-van m.

A. gravan-am. I. gravn-a. D. gravn-e.

Ab.G. gravn-as. L. gravan-i and gravan. V. gravan.
Du. N.A.V. gravan-a, -au. I. grava-bhyam. G. gravn-os.
Sing. N. grava,

PL N.V.

gravan-as.

grava-bhyas.

The

n.

I. grava- bhis.
A. gravn-as.
G. gravn-am.
L. grava-su.

N.A. only. These cases (the du.

formed from dhanvan hoiv are
Sing.
dhanvani, dhanva, dhanva.

differs in the

not occur)

does

dhanva.

D.

PI.

Irregular Stems in an.

91.

1.

panthan,

Pdnth-an m.
is

best

radical a (97 A. 2
2.

ah-an

path, forming the strong stem

treated under the irregular stems in

a).

n. day,

otherwise regular, supplements the N.

s.

with ah-ar.'
sv-an m. dog, otherwise inflected lilie rajau, takes
Samprasarana in its weakest stem sun,^ which, as represent3.

ing an originally disyllabic stem,^ retains the accent

SINGULAR.

4,

IKREGULAE STEMS IN AN

91-02]

yii-v-an,

m.

71

youth, otherwise regular, forms its weakest

stem, yun, by Samprasarana and contraction

SINGULAR.

(yii-un)

DUAL.

N.

yuva
yuvan
A. yuvan-am

PLURAL.

N.A. yiivan-a

N.V. yuvan- as

V.

A. yun-as

D. yiin-e^
G. yxin-as

I.

yuva-bhis

D. yuva-bhyas

magha-van ^ hounti/ul, an epithet of Indra, also forms

weakest stem, maghon, by Samprasarana and contraction

5.

its

(magha-un)

SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

magha-va
magha-van
A. magha-van-am

magha-van-a

magha-van-as

G. maghon-as

maghon-os

N.

V.

udhan

6.

and udhas

n.

maghon-as

maghon-am

udder supplements the N.

pi. L. udhas-su,
92. The root han, which forms the

occurs

s.

with udhar

before consonant endings, the latter stem also

final

member

of

thirty-five compounds in the RV., follows, for the most part,

the analogy of derivative stems in an.
The strong stem is

Cp. Lat. juven-is and jun-ior.

retains the accent because
cp. sv^n.
'

The stem

The supplementary stem magh^-vant

N. raaghivan.
L. maghfivat-su.

cases

PI. I.

it

is

represents a disyllable

also

maghavad-bhis.

used in the following

D. magh^vad-bhyas.

DECLENSION

72

[92-93

-ban (with a long vowel in the N. s. only), the middle is -ha,

and the weakest -ghn.^ The cases that occur would in the

compound vrtra-han
SINGULAR.

N. vrtra-ha
v. vrtra-han

A. vrtra-hanam

Vrtra-slaying be

DUAL.

N.A. vrtra-han-a,

PLURAL.

ADJECTIVES IN ANC

93]

73

Masculine.
SINGULAR.
N. pratyan (61)

DUAL.

PLURAL.

N.A. pratyafic-a, -au

N. pratyanc-as

A. pratyanc-am

A. pratic-as

I.

pratic-a
D. pratic-6
Ab.G. pratie-as
L. pratic-i

L. pratic-6s

Neuter.
N.A. pratyak
a.

pratic-i

Other words similarly declined are

Strong Stem.

ny-aSc downward
^
sam-y-anc united

Middle

Weakest

Stem.

Stem,

ny-ak
sam-y-ak

nic^

tir-y-ak

tiras-c

anv-anc follotving

ud-ak
anv-ak

anuc

visv-afic all-pervading

visv-ak

visuc

sam-ic

tir-y-anc transverse
lid-anc upivard

lid-ic

'

About a dozen stems, in which the anc is preceded

word ending in a, have no weakest form. Such are
apanc backward, arvane Jdtherward, avafic dowmvard, devanc
The only
godivard, paranc turned atvay, pranc forward.
b.

by a

The stem nic seems to have retained the accent for the f. is nic-i
and the I. nica being used adverbially probably has an
adverbial shift of accent, devadrydnc godward also retains the accent
^

(not nic-i),

on the
^
^

suffix

I.

devadrica.

The y is here inserted by analogy.

Here tiri takes the place of tiras

across,

stem tirasc (= tirds + ae) is formed.

i i
i, though no y precedes the a of the

from which the weakest

suffix,

by analogy.

DECLENSION

74

[93-95

clu. and pi. aie the N.A. m.

words may be illustrated by apanc

The

cases occurring in the

inflexion of these

Sing. m. N. apan
L. apae-i.

A.

(61).

apanc-am.

I.

apac-a.

Du. N.A. apanc-a, apanc-au.

PI. N. apanc-as.

A. apac-as.

The only distinctively n. form is N.A. s. prak.^ The f. is

formed from the weak stem with i prac-i.
94. The points to be noted about changeable stems are
1. The vowel of the suffix is lengthened in the N. s. m.
except in ant and anc stems g6-man, agni-van kaniyan
:

taras-vi
2.

The N.

sing,

raja; asma, grava,

but ad-an, pratyan.

cakr-van;

yiiv-a;

ends in a nasal in

all

hasti,

rg-mi,

changeable stems

except those in n, which drop it.

3. All changeable stems that lengthen the vowel in the
N. s. m. shorten it in the V.
Those that drop the n in
the N., retain it in the V., while those that have
in the N. drop it in the V., and add s

(after a)

thus rajan (N.

grava),

yuvan

raja),"

(N.

asman

(N.

gravan (N.
havismas

asma),

yiiva);^ hastin (N. hasti);

^

havisman), marutvas (N. marutvan)

kaniyan) cakrvas (N. cakrvan).
(N.

kaniyas

(N.

in which the V. does not differ in form

does in accent) from the N. are the ant and anc stems
ddan (N. adan) pratyan (N. pratydn).
a.

The only changeable stems

(though

it

95. The feminines of nouns with changeable stems are

In B. some half-dozen N.A. plur. n. forms occur pranci, pratysamyanci, sadhryanci, anvanci.
One an stem has a V. in as matari-sv-as (p. 68, n. 5).
Four van stems form their V. in vas rta-vas, eva-ya-vas, pratar:

aiici, arvafici,
^

it-vas, vi-bha-vas.
*
The RV. has three vocatives in van arvan,
The AV. has five others, but none in vas.
:

iatavan, ^avasavan.

FEMININES OF CHANGEABLE STEMS

95-9(5]

75

formed by adding i to the weak stem (when there are two

stems) or the weakest (when there are three) e. g. adat-i
;

dhenumat-i

dhenumant), amavat-i (m.

arkin-i
amavant)
navyas-i (m. naviyams)
(m. arkin)
jagmus-i(m.jagm-i-vams); sam-rajn-i(m.rajan), maghon-i
(m. maghavan), -ghn-i (rn. -han) pratic-i (m. pratyanc)
(m. adant);

(m.

avitr-i (m. avitar).

The

a.

(125)

f.

of the present participle active of the first conjugation

the strong m. stem in ant (cp. 156); that of

made from

is

weak stem in at e. g. bhavant-i

uchant-i shining, pusyant-i obtaining abundantly, coddyant-i
urging but ghnat-i (m. ghnant) slaying, -pipvaX-l furthering (m, piprat),
the second conjugation from the

'

being,

krnvafr-i

(m. krnv^nt), yunjat-i (m. ynnjdnt) yoking, puriat-i (m.

pundnt)

purifying.

b. The f. of the
simple future participle is foi'med like the present
participle of the first conjugation sii-syant-i about to bring forth, sanisy^nt-i going to obtain.
:

c.
f.

Adjectives in van form their

pi-var-i

(91. 4) is

{nUtpa
yuva-ti.

Irregular

niffpia).

in var-i

f.

The

f.

e. g.

pi-van

(iriajv) fat,

of the irregular yii-v-an young

Nouns with Changeable Stems.

96. 1. ap f. water lengthens its vowel in the strong cases

and pi. and substitutes t for p before bh. The forms

du.

occurring are
Sing.

ap-as.

I.

ap-a.

A. ap-as.

Ab.G. ap-as.
I.

ad-bhis.

Du. N.

apa.-

D. ad-bhyas.

Pi.

N.V.

G. ap-am.

L. ap-sii.
2.

anad-vah m. ox

(lit.

cart- drawer,

three stems: the last syllable

from anas + vah) has

lengthened in the strong

stem anad-vah
and shortened by Samprasarana in the
weakest anad-uh and in the middle anad-ud (dissimilated
is

Tlie

weak stem appears once in

gular sine-din t-i.

^
In a compound.

sinc-at-i sprinkling beside

the

DECLENSION

76
for anad-ud).
a stem in vant.

[96-97

The N. is irregularly formed

The forms occurring are

SINGULAR.
N. anad-van

A. anad-vah-am

as

if

DUAL.

PLURAL.

from

STEMS IN A AND A

97]

These two declensions are also the most irregular since the
endings diverge from the normal ones here more than
elsewhere.
The a declension is the only one in which the
N.A. n. has an ending in the singular, and in which the
'

Ab.

The inflexion of the n.

distinguished from the G.
from that of the m. in the N.A.V. s, du., and pi. only.
The forms actually occurring, if made from priya dear,
would be
s.

is

differs

DECLENSION

78

The N. A. neuter forms

a.

are

[97

Sing, priya-m.

Du. priy6.

priya" and

PI.

priya-n-i.'^
In the Brahmanas and Sutras the D. s. f. ending ai is used instead
3
of the Ab.G. ending as both in tliis declension and elsewhere (98. a)
e. g. jirnayai tvacah of dead skin.
a.

Eadical a stems, m. and f./'' are common in the RV.,

Most of them appear
roots.
being formed from about thirty
of compounds, but four are used as
member
final
the
as
only
ja child, tra protector, da giver,
monosyllables in the m.
ksa abode, 'kh.a. ivell,
stha standing; and seven in the f
2.

gna

divine

vra

troop^''

woman, ja child, jya bowstring, ma measure,

The forms occurring in the oblique cases are so

The form amba, occurring thrice in the RV., may have a V.

mother ! The VS. and TS. have the V. ambe as from a stem

meaning,

d.niba mother.
'^

This form seems to consist of a double ending as-as. The form

in the AV. as
is about twice in the RV. and twenty-four times
:

in as

frequent as that in asas.

8
That the ending was originally -ns is shown by the Sandhi (40. 2) ;
Gothic
-cms, Gk. inscr. -ors.
ep.
3
This ending is preserved in such Greek datives as imrois. It is
in the RV. than priy^bhis, but in the AV. it is
slightly commoner
It is almost always used in the Brahmanas.
five times as common.
10

11

The n seems
The u of su

to
is

have been due to the iniluence of the n stems.

almost invariably to be read with hiatus, even

before u.
12

This form

is

rare in the RV., being probably due to the influence

of the maiiy masculines.

13 The du. in a is more than seven times as

RV.
The form in a

common

as that in

au

in the

in the RV. than that in ani in the

In the AV. the proportion is reversed.
'5
This form is due to the influence of the an stems, which form
their n. pi. in both a and ani, e. g. nama and namani.
that
16 There are no
distinctively n. forms, as the radical vowel in
"ender is always shortened to a, and the stem is tlien inflected
1*

is

commoner

proportion of three to two.

according to the derivative

1''

These stems become

they often shorten the

derivative a stems.

less

final

declension.

common
vowel to

in the later Sarnhitas, where

are then inflected like

a,

and^

EADICAL A STEMS

97-98]

79

some endings, such as those of the L. s., the

The ni.
G.L. du., and the Gr. pi. are not represented at all.
s
in
the
f.
often
takes
the
N.
but
drops it,
always
s.,
rare that

doubtless owing to the influence of the derivative a stems.

The radical vowel is dropped before the endings e' and as
of tlie D. and G. s.
The forms actually occurring, if made

from j a

child

m.

Sing. N. ja-s,
V. ja-s.

f.

would be:

f.,

A. jam.

also ja.

Dual. N.A.V. ja and jau.

N. jas.
A. jas.

Plur.

I.

I.

I. ja.

D.

G. j-as.

j-6,

ja-bhyam.ja-bhis.

D. ja-bhyas.

Ab.

L. ja-su.

ja-bhyas.

Five anomalously formed m. derivative stems in a follow the

a.

analogy of the radical a stems.

Tlie strong stem of pathi m. path is in the RV. pfetha only Sing. N.
pdntha-s. A. p^ntlia-m. PI. N. pduthas. The AV. has besides the
stem pdnthan Sing. N. pdntha. A. panthanam. PI. N. panthau-as.
From the adverb tatha thus is formed the sing. N. a-tatha-s not say:

'

ing

yes

'.

usana m., a

mantha

seer,

churning

has a N. like a
stick

f.

and maha

A. usana-m. D. usan-e.
form the A. m^ntha-m and

usana.

great

maha-rn.
8.

Radical a stems,

m.

n.,

numbering about twenty,

consist almost entirely of stems in radical a that has been

shortened to a.
Excepting kha n, a^erfure they appear as
final

members

horn,

of

-ha slaying

compounds only;
is

e.g. prathaDaa-jay^rs^

a reduced form of

han

e. g.

satru-ha

slaying enemies.

98. B. Stems in i and u (m.f.n.).

Both declensions embrace a large number of nouns of all
But the i declension contains comparatively few
genders.
n. stems, and, excepting the N.A. s. and pi., n. forms are
^

Not, however, in most of the dative infinitives

give up,
^

pra-khyai

to see,

prati-mai imitate

e. g.

para-dai

to

(cp. 167).

Contrary to the rule generally ajiplicable to monosyllabic stems,

the accent remains on

thfe

radical syllable tliroughout.

DECLENSION

80

[98

In the
not occurring at .ill in several cases.
u declension the masculines greatly preponderate, being
about four times as numerous as the f. and n. stems taken
rare in

it,

while the neuters here greatly outnumber the

The inflexion, which is closely parallel in both
feminines.
together,

in all genders except that

groups, is practically the same
the m. and f., and the
from
n.
differ
and
s.
the N.A.
pi.

A.

pi.

m. and

(D.Ab.G.),

from each

differ

f.

the stem shows

Guna

other.

in three of the

as well as in the V.

s.

The
weak

final

vowel of

cases of the

and the N. pL m.

s.
f.,

The
it is
abnormally strengthened in the L. s.
normal ending as of the Ab.G. s. is reduced to s, while
that of the L. s. is always dropped in the i declension and
The inflexion of the n stems
in the u declension.
while

usually
has influenced the

declension in the

u declension in the G.Ab. and L.

when i and u are changed to y and

I.

s.

only, but the

also.

Oxytone stems,
v, throw the accent on
a following vowel, not as Svarita, but as Udatta, and even
on the nam of the G. pi., though the stem vowel in that
case does not lose

The

its

syllabic value.

adjectives siic-i IrUjlit

to illustrate the

and madh-u sweet may be used

forms actually occurring

Singular.

m.

n.

suci-s

N. stici-s

suci-m

A. suci-m
'

-J-

jsucy-a
suci-n-a
I

n.

madhu
madhu-m madhu

suci-n-a

madhv-a
madhv-a ^
madhu-nmadhu-n-a

siicy-a
siici

f.

madhu-s

madhu-m

'^

jo.^v.j

m.

madhu-s

suci
suci

[suci
1
Five Btems in the EV. form their I. like siicya, but twenty-five
like siicina.
(under the influence of the n declension)
2 This is the normal formation, but the contracted form in i is more
than twice as common in the EV. The latter is in the EV. further
shortened to i in about a dozen words.
3
The normally formed I. in a is made in the m. by only four stems,
but that with na by thirty in the EV. in the n. the na form is used
;

almost exclusively.

DERIVATIVE STEMS IN

98]

m.

suce-s^

b.

G. i5uce-s

i-n-a

V.

n.

siicaye

madhav-e'^

madhav-e madhav-e "

siice-s

[suce-s]

raadho-s

madho-s

suce-s

suce-s

sucau

suca
sucau

suce

suce

(suca

81

siicay-e^

'"'

tr

AND U

m.

n.

f.

D. ^ucay-e

siica

sucau

jmadho-s^
Imadhv-as
madhav-i ^
j
1

[suci]

madho-s

,madhu-n-e
madho-s "
Imadhu-n-as
f

madho-s ^^
ra.adhu-n-as

madhav-i

madhau

madhau

madho

madho

'^

madhau

[madhu-n-i

madhu

Dual.
[.A.V.

suci^ Slid

D.Ab.

madhu

suci

madhu

madhv-i "

suci-bhyam

r.L.

madhv-os madhv-os madhu-n-os''

siiey-os

ari m.f. deroitt and fivi m. sheep have ary-Ss and ^vy-as.
The form in au is more than twice as common as that in a in
m. and f.
^
The derivative 1, u and i stems are the only ones that do not take
a or an in the dual.
*
uti with aid is often used as a D. The RV. has seven datives in ai,
2

e.g.

bhrty-di /or sustenance, following the analogy of the

declension.

The RV. has six forms according to the i declension, e. g. yuvaty-as.

The form vidi on the altar, occurring twice, is the only L. from an
i stem with the normal
ending i ( = vedi-i).
'
This type occurs from over sixty stems, the normal formation
(m^dhv-e) from only three stems in the RV.
^
The normally formed type m^dhv-as is followed by six stems, the
prevailing type madho-s by over seventy in the RV.
'
Seven stems follow this type, while nineteen follow madhau in
the RV.
'"
Prom one stem also madhv-e.
'^
Once also mddhv-as.
^

^^
^^
'*

Also madhv-as, vdsv-as.

Only in the form sanav-i.
Tlie only

example in RV.

is

urv-i

janu-n-i two knees.

'^

The only example

1819

is

janu-n-os (AV.).

the two earths.

The VS. has

DECLENSION

82

[98

Plural.
m.

m.

n.

madhav-as' madhav-as

N.V. sucay-as^ sucay-as^jsiici*

A. siici-n

suci-s

suci-n-i

D.Ab.

suci-bhyas
suei-n-am

madhu-n-am

L.

suci-su

madhxi-su

a.

Twenty-seven
i

madhu-bhis
madhu-bhyas

G.

derivative

madhu
madhu
madhu-

madhu-s

madhu-n

suci-bhis

I.

n.

f.

stems in the RV. show forms according to the

declension in the D.Ab.G.L.

s. f.

e.g. bhrti

sustenance:

f.

D. bhrty-ai bhiimi f. earth: Ab.G. bhumy-as, L. bhiimy-ani. Such

forms in ai, as, am are much commoner in the AV. In B. ai is
numerous I. s.
regularly used instead of as (cp. 97 a a). Besides the
forms in na the EV. has half a dozen i stems showing the influence
;

n declension in the incipient use of the endings ni in the

N.A.V. du. n. and ni in the N.A. pi. n.
In the u declension the RV. has only three forms following the
analogy of the derivative i declension isu f. arrow D. isv-ai, G. isvThere are
as, su-vastv-as of the (river) Suvastu (all in late passages).^

of the

The only stem not taking Guna

ary-^s m.

is

ari devout

which has the N.

pi.

f.

original ending ns is in both ^liein and mdhiin preserved

Sandhi forms of ms or mr (39, 40).
^
About ten stems in i in the RV. have N. pi, forms according to
the derivative i declension e. g. avanis streams beside avdnayas.
*
The normal type siici ( = suci-i) is of about the same frequency
as its shortened form sdci, both together occurring about fifty times
in the RV. The secondary type sucini occurs about fourteen times.
"
There is only one example of the N. pi. m. without Guna mMhv-as
2

The

in the

occurring four times.

There are two examples of the N. pi.

and satd-kratv-as having a hundred powers.

itself

f.

without Guna

md,dhv-as

The typo without ending is made from twelve stems, the form
with shortened vowel being nearly twice as common as that with u.
The secondary type m&dhuni is more frequent than m^dhu.
"^

8
In B. the D.
Ab.G. as.

s. f.

ending

ai is here regularly

used instead of the

IRREGULAR

98-99]

STEMS

83

some forms following the analogy of the u declension A. d-bhirv&-hh.im fearless and N. du. and pi. in yuv-a and yuv-as fi'om
several stems derived with the suffix yu.
Besides the numerous I.
singulars m. and n., there are many alternative n. forms, in the
remaining cases of the s. and N. A. pi., following the n declension
D. madhu-ne, kasipu-ne
Ab. mMhu-nas, sanu-nas Q. caru-nas,
daru-nas, drii-nas, mddhu-nas, vd.su-nas L. ayu-ni, sanu-ni darualso

am from

ni

N.A.

pi,

darQ-ni, &c.

h. There is no example of a V. s. n. from an i stem, and the only one

from an u stem is giiggulu (AV.). This seems to indicate that the
V. s. in these stems was identical with the N.
c. Adjectives in u often use this stem for the f. also
e. g. caru dear
otherwise they form the f. in ii, as tanu m., tanu f. thin (Lat. ienu-is);
;

or in

i,

as

uru m., urv-i

f.

wide.

There are about a dozen stems in which final i seems to be radical

in a secondary sense as representing a reduced form of roots ending in
a.
They are mostly m. compounds formed with -dhi e.g. ni-dhi
There are also about eight stems formed from roots in u, all
treasury.
d.

of

which except

dyii day are final mepabers of compounds ; e. g. raghubesides some twelve stems in which u is radical in

drvi running sioiftly

a secondary sense, as representing the shortened form of the vowel of

three roots in u e.g. su-pu clarifying well (from t^xx. purify), pari-bhii
surrounding (from bhui he).
The inflexion of these radical i and u stems is exactly the same as
that of the derivative i and u stems given above.
;

Irregularities.

99.
D.G.L.

1.

pati (Gk.

Troo-^-y)

m. Jmshancl

irregular in the

is

paty-e, paty--ur,i paty-au; while the I. in this

sense has the normal form paty-a. When it means lord,
s.

either as a simple

word

or as final

member

of a

compound,

regular D. patay-e, brhas-patay-e, G. pate-s, prajapate-s, L. go-patau while the I. in this sense is formed
it is

with na: pati-na, brhas-patina.

TroTVLo) toife and lady.

The

f.

is

patni (Gk.

^
The anomalous ending appears to be due to the influence of the
Ab.G. in the names of relationship (101) in r like pitiii', G. of pitf

father.

g2

DECLENSION

84
a.

The

f.

jd.ni

[99

mfe takes the anomalous ending ur in the G. jdny-ui'.'

anomaly of forming its N. jni like the derivative
:

It has the further

i

declension.

sakh-i m. friend, besides having irregularities like pati

weak cases of the s., has a strong stem formed with

2.

in the

Vrddhi N. sakha, A. sakhay-am, I. sakhy-a, D. sakhy-e,

Ab.G. sakhy-ur,' V. sakhe.^ Du. sakhay-a and sakhay-au
:

PL N. sakhay-as,

A. sakhi-n,

1.

sakhi-bhis, D. sakhi-bhyas,

G. sakhi-n-am.
In the RV. sikhi occurs as the final member of eight compoiinds
it is inflected in the same way and is also used as a f.
e. g.
marut-sakha. N. m. f. having the Maruts as friends.
ft.

in

which

ari devout

is irregular in forming several cases like the

stems (except in accentuation) sing. A. ary-am
N. ary-as m. f.,
(beside ari-m) m., G. ary-as m.
j^l.
A. ary-as m. f,
3.

radical

The VS.

a.

d.vi s]iee2)

avy-as.

4.

thigh,

lias also

the N.

s.

ari-s,

beside the regular ari-s of the RV.

(Lat. ovi-s) also takes the normal ending as in the G.

vi m. bird has in the RV. the N. s. ve-s beside vi-s.

The neuters aksi ci/e, asthi hone, dadhi

form their weakest cases from stems

L dadhn-a, sakthn-a

curds,

in

an

s.

sakthi
;

e. g.

G. aksn-as, asthn-as, dadhn-as.

sakthi-bhyam, G. aksn-6s, but

Du.N. aksi-ni (AV.), I.

sakthy-os (VS.). In the pi. the an stems are used in the
N.A. also aksan-i (beside aksi-ni, AV.), asthan-i (beside
I. aksa-bhis, astha-bhis
D.
asthi-ni, AV.), sakthan-i
:

astha-bhyas.
5. dyu m. f.

ski/

(originally diu,

weak grade

of dyo, 102, 3)

stem before consonant terminations (taking

Vrddhi in the N.V. s.), but changes it to div before vowels

retains

this

Influenced, like pdtyur, by the

Formed

names

regularly like siice from ^dci.

of relationship in r (101).

STEMS IN

99-100]

AND U

85

dyau-s {Zev9 = zljeu?). A. div-am.^ I. div-a.

Ab.G. div-as (JiFos). L. div-i {AiFt)- V.

Sing. N.

D. div-6.

dyau-s'- [Z^v).
Pl.N. diy-as.^ A. m.

100.

Stems in

C.

dyun/
i

f.

div-as.

I.

and u are mostly

dyii-bhis.^

f.

when

substan-

tives, but a great many as final members of compounds are

adjectives used in the m. as well as f.
I.

The

stems are very differently inflected according as

they are radical

primary

(a)

or derivative

{b).

The analogy

of the

both

in
group (1)
and accentuation by a secondary group (2) of about
polysyllabic stems which, though formed with
radical

is

closely followed

inflexion

eighty

derivative

i,

are for the sake of clearness best treated as

a division of the radical group.

a. The normal
endings as they appear in the inflexion of
consonant stems are taken throughout this declension. The

however, preserves the normal ending am in one

form only (dhiy-am), nam being otherwise always
added. The N. s. always adds s.
Accentuation on the
final syllable of the stem is characteristic of this declension,
and, except in monosyllabic stems, the acute remains on
G.

pi.,

single

that syllable throughout.

Before vowel endings the i is
to
in
iy
split
monosyllabic nouns, even when they are final
members of compounds,'' as A. dhiy-am, pi. N. nana-dhiy-as

having diverse intentions

but in roots as final members of

^
The stem div, the Samprasarana form of dyav, has made its way
into the strong cases, A. s. and N. pi., owing to the very frequent
weak cases div-as, &c., which taken together occur more than 350 times

in the
^

KV.

i.e.

diau-s to be pronounced as a disylhible.

The

s of tlie

N.

is

retained in this form.

3 These
two forms, which occur only in the RV. or passages borrowed
from it, always mean daijs.
*
Except accented -dhf, as a-dhiam (but su-dhi follows the general

rule, as su-dhiy-as).

DECLENSION

86

[100

compounds only when two consonants precede/ as yajnapriy-am sacrifice-loving, but yajna-nyam (= yajna-niam)
Otherwise i is always written as y,
leading the sacrifice.
but is invariably to be pronounced as i, as nady-am pro-

nounced nadiam - stream.

The monosyllabic stems belonging to the radical class are
the feminines dht thought, hhifear, sri glory, and the m. vi
receiver (occurring

only once in the N.

s.).

The compounds

of the first three, being mostly Bahuvrlhis (189), and the

compounds formed from the roots kri huy, ni lead, pri love,

mi

diminish, vi move, si

Tatpurusas

(187), are

lie,

sri mix, being

both m. and

The secondary group

mostly accusative

f.

consists of

more than eighty

poly-

syllabic stems accented on the final syllable and probably

for this reason following the analogy of the radical com-

pounds.
nearly

all

Excepting about half a dozen they are substantives,

The masculines are ahi serpent, rathi charioteer,
f.

and about eight compounds.

i embraces a large number
of
the
means
suffix i (originally ya)
by
f. to m.
and
not normally accenting
to
a
words,
largely
supply
the suffix.'' It also includes a large number of miscellaneous
&.

The declension

in derivative

of stems formed

stems of an independent character having no corresponding

It includes seven m. stems, five of
m., as sac-i might.

f.

1
In the secondary radical group (a 2, p. 87) the i is split only in
samudxi and partly in cakri.
2
The resolved forms given below are spelt with i (not iy as they
may have been pronounced) so as to avoid confusion with the written
forms of the Samhita text that are spelt with iy. Again the resolved

is given as i (not i) because long vowels are regularly shortened

in pronunciation before vowels (p. 22, notes 1 and 5).
2
The exceptions are mostly stems in whicli the preceding syllable,

vowel

having been reduced, throws the accent forward, e.g. uru, f. urv-i,
or in which, as proper names, the accent has shifted to indicate
;
a change of moaning^ e. g. asikni a river, but ^sikni black.
ivide

RADICAL AND DERIVATIVE

100]

STEMS

87

which are proper names: Tirasci, Nami, Prthi, Matali,

Sobhari, besides rastri

The
radical

ruler, siri iveaver.

inflexion of these sterns^ differs

i

stems in three respects

(1)

from that of the

no s is added in

s. m. or f.
(2) the endings diverge considerably
from the normal ones, the s. A. taking m, the D. ai, the
Ab.G. as, the L. am, the pi. N.V.A. s (3) stems accented
on the final vowel shift the acute to the ending in the weak
cases of the s., in the G.L. du., and in the G. pi.

the N.

a.

1.

dhi

f.

Radical Stems.
tJtaugM.

2.

rathi m.

h.

f.

charioteer.

Derivative Stems.
devi

f.

goddess.

N.

RADICAL AND DERIVATIVE U STEMS

100]

h.

The

derivative class comprises

two divisions

89

the one

consists of about eighteen oxytone f. substantives, several

of which correspond to ni, or n. stems in u accented on the

the other and

e. g. a-grii (m. a-gru) maid
more numerous division consists of oxytone f. adjectives
corresponding to m, oxytones, e. g. babhrii (m. babhrti)

first syllable,

hroivn.
a. The normal endings as they appear in the inflexion of consonant
stems are taken throughout this declension (radical and derivative).^
The Gr. p]., however, takes the normal am in uncompounded radical
stems only,^ but nam in all others.
The N. s. always adds s. Before
vowel endings the u is split into uv in monosyllabic nouns and
generally in compounds with roots as final member (even when preceded by a single consonant). In the minority of such compounds
(some nine in the RV.) and in all derivative stems,* it is written as v,
but pronounced as u.* Thus A. bhuv-am, a-bhuv-am present
but
vi-bhii-am eminent, tanu-am.
;

The forms occurring if made from bhu

hocly would be the following

earth

and tanu

Singular.
radical.

derivative.

N. bhu-s
A. bhuv-am
I.

tanu-s

tanu-am

bhuv-a

tanu-a
D. tanu-e

Ab.G. bhuv-as
L. bhuv-i

Ab.G. tanu-as
/tanu-i
I

tanu

V. tanu
1
The derivative stems show an incipient tendency to be influenced
by the inflexion of the derivative i declension. The RV. has only one
such form
svasruam the AV. has at least ten such the VS. has
A. pumscalu-m courtesan, D. tanv-di, G. tanv-as. In B. the D. s. f.
:

ending ai is used for as e. g. dhenvd,i retah the seed of the coiv.

Judging by the only two forms that occur, bhuvam and joguvam.
2
It is, however, split in the derivative stems a-grii, kadrd Soma
vessel, in adjectives when u is preceded by y, and in bibhatsii loathiwj,
*
Hence in such forms it is given below as u (short because a vowel
is shortened before another in pronunciation
cp. p. 22, note 1).
;

DECLENSION

90

[100-101

Dual.
N.A. bhuv-a
I.

L.

N.A. tanii-a

bhii-bhyam
bhuv-6s

D,

tanu-bhyam

L.

tanu-os

Plural.
N. bhuv-as

N. tanu-as
A. tanu-as
I. tanu-bhis
D. tanu-bhyas

A. bhuv-as
G.

bhuv-am

G. tanu-n-am

101. D. Stems in r (m. and

f.),

which

in origin are

consonant stems in derivative ar or tar, closely resemble

an stems (90) in their declension. Derivative stems in r

two groups, the one formed with the original

with tar. The former is a small group
of only eight stems, the latter a very large one of more
than 150.
Both groups agree in distinguishing strong
and weak cases. The strong stem ends in ar or ar,
which in the weak forms is reduced to r before vowels and
r before consonants. Both groups further agree in dropping
the final of the stem in the N. s. m. f., which case always
consist of

suffix ar, the other

ends in

a.

They resemble the vowel declension in adding

n in the A. pi. m. and s in the A. j)l. f.,^ and in
n before the am of the G. pl.'^ They have the

the ending
inserting

peculiar ending
1.

nr

'

sister

ur

The stems

man
;

n.

1
^

f.

in the G.

in

ar are:

us-f dmvn,

ah-ar

cla/j,

s.^

m. dev-r husband's

nanandr

udh-ar

udder,

vadh-ar

svasr^

iveapon,

which

Except usr-d,s.
Except sv^sr-am and n^r-am.
Except n^r-as and usr-ds.
This word is probably derived with the suffix ar.
In this word the r is probably radical svd-sar.
:

brother,

sister,

husband's

STEMS IN

101]

occur in the N.A,

stems are

first five
a.
&.

s.

Til

The forms

only.^

'91

that occur of the

PI. N. devar-as.

nar-am

A.

AND

Sing. A. devar-am.
Sing.

Tl

{d-vep-a).

D.

L. devr-su.

nar-e.

G. nar-as.

V. nar-a and
L. nar-i (Ep. Gk. d-vep-L). Du. N.A. nar-a.
A. nr-n.
nar-au.
PI. N.V. nar-as (Ep. Gk. d-vep-es).

D.A. nr-bhyas.

nr-bhis.

I.

G.

nar-am and nr-n-am.^

L. nf-su.

L. usr-i and usr-am.^

c.
Sing. G. usr-as.
PI. A. usr-as.

d. Sing. G.

nanandur.

V. usar.

L. nanandari.

Sing. N. svasa. A. svasar-am. I. svasr-a. D. svasr-e.

Ab.G. svas-ur. Du. svasar-a, -au. L. svasr-os. PI. N.
e.

svasar-as.

A. svasr-s.

I.

svasr-bhis.

G. svasr-am* and

svasf-n-am.
2. This group includes two subdivisions, the one forming
its strong stem in tar, the other in tar (Gk. -rrjp, -rcop,
Lat.

-tor).

names

The former

of relationship

consists of a

small class of five

three m., pi-tar father,

bhra-tar

nap-tar grandson, and two f., duh-i-tar daughter

and ma-tar mother, together with the m. and f. compounds
brother,

formed from them. The second division consists of more

than 150 stems (including compounds) which are either
agent nouns accented chiefly on the suffix, or participles
accented chiefly on the root.
These stems are never f., and
only four are

n.

In the tr declension three stems are to be distinguished

the strong,

the middle, tr and the weakest, tr. The names of relationship take the Guna form,^ agent nouns the Vrddhi form of the
tar or tar

1
d,h-ar and udh-ar form their other cases from the an stems ah-an
^
often to be pronounced nfnam.
and udh-an. Cp. 91. 6.

Following the analogy of the derivative i declension.

svdsr-am and nar-am are the only two forms of the r declension
in which am is added direct to the stem.
5 The
strong stem n^p-tar does not occur in the RV., napat taking
*

its place.

DECLENSION

92
strong stem.
sing. G.

The

m. in

tf n,

The
da-tor),

f.

The
is

inflexion of the m.

formed in ur, the

tfs, Ct.

and

f.

[101
differs in the A. pi. only.

L. in ari, the V. in ar

inflexion of the thi*ee stems da-t^

{jirj-Tr^p,

m.

pi.

A.

giver [Soy-T-qp,

father {ira-Trjp, pd-ter), ma-tr

ma-ter) is as follows

pi-tr

the

in tfnam.

ni.

mother

f.

Singular.
N. data

pita

A. datar-am

pitar-am

I. datr-a
D. datr-6

pitr-a

Ab.G. datur
L.

datar-i

V. datar [ScoTep]

matr-a
inatr-6

matur

pitiir

pitar-i {Trarep-i)

matar-i

pitar

matar

{Ju-jjiter)

Dual.
N.A. datar-a, -au

G.L. datr-6s

N.

mata
matar-am

{fifJTep)

STEMS IN DIPHTHONGS

101-102]

RV. occurs in the weak stem only

nfip-tr in the

a.

D. nptr-e, G. ndpt-ur.

93
:

Sing.

I.

ndptr-a,

It is sup23lemented in tho

PI. I. n^ptr-bhis.

strong forms by npat (Lat. nepot-): Sing. N.V. n^pat. A. napat-am.

In the TS. occurs nSptar-am
Du. N.A. nd.pat-a. PI. N.V. n^pat-as.

svdsar-am among the r stems).

n. stems occurring are dhar-tf

(like
b.

The only

prop,

dhma-tf

smithy,

vi-dhar-tf meting out, and of these only about half a

dozen forms occur. The only oblique cases met with are the Gr. sthatiir
and the L. dhmatd,ri. The N.A. s. owing to its rarity seems never to
have acquired fixity in the Veda, but sthatfir represents the normal
stha-tf

staiionarij,

form.

In B. the N.A. form in r begins to be used in an adjectival

sense

bhartf sitpporting, janayitf creative.

c. The f. of agent nouns in tr is foi-med with I from the weak stem
of the m,, e. g. janitr-i mother (inflected like devf),
:

102.

E.

Stems

in

and

nau

The only stems

au.

o,

ai,

diphthongs are: rai m.

(rarely)

f.

tvealtli,

go m.

in

hull,

They
ship, glau m. f. lump.
form a transition from the consonant to the vowel declension
for while they take the normal endings like the ordinary
consonant declension, they add s in the N. s. m. f. and
have a vowel before the endings with initial consonant.
f.

coio,

dyo m.

f.

sky,

f.

There are no neuter forms.

rai appears as ray before vowels and ra before conThe forms occurring are Sing. A. ra-m (Lat.
sonants.
1.

Ab.G. ray-as.
D. ray-6 (Lat. rc-l).
ray-a.
re-m).
PI. N. ray-as.
A. ray-as.^ G. ray-am.
I.

go has as its strong form gau which appears as ga in

s. and pi.
The Ab.G. are irregular in adding s onlj^
instead of as.^ The forms occurring are
Sing. N. gau-s
I.
D.
Ab.G. go-s.
A.
gav-e.
gav-a.
ga-m (/Sco-i^j.
{^ov-s).
2.

the A.

L.

gav-i.

Du.

go-bhis.

I,

L. go-su.

D.

gav-a,

-au.

go-bhyas.

PI.

G.

N.

A.

gav-as.

gav-am and

ga-s.

go-n-am.''

V. gav-as.
once ra-s (SV.).

Rarely ray-as

As regards accentuation

this

word

is

not treated as a monosyllabic

stem, never shifting the accent to the endings.

3
This form, which follows the vowel declension and
common than gdv-am, occurs at the end of a Pada only.

is

much

less

DECLENSION

94

[102-103

3. dyo m. f. sJcp (cp. 99. 5) is declined like go.

The
^
forms occurring are
A. dyam
Sing. N. dyau-s {Zev^)Ab.G. dyo-s. L. dyav-i. V. dyau-s and
(Lat. diem).
dyau-s- (Zev). Du. N.A. dyav-a. PI. N.V. dyav-as.
4. nau is inflected quite regularly as far as can be judged
:

by the
{vrjf-i).

{vfjFa).

A. nav-as

{vrjf-e^, ndv-es).

{yr]f-as).

{vav-^i).

glau occurs in two forms only: Sing. N. glau-s and

5.

PI.

Sing. N. nau-s (i/aC-?).

occurring
L. nav-i
nav-a.
G.
nav-as
I.
[vrjf-6'i).

PI. N. nav-as

nau-bhis

I.

forms

fesv

nav-am

N.

I.

glau-bhis.^

Degrees of Comparison.

103. 1. The secondary suffixes of the comparative

tara^ (Gk. -repo) and the superlative tama (Lat. -timo) are
regularly added to nominal stems (both simple and compound), substantives as well as adjectives, generally to the
weak or middle stem e. g. priya-tara dearer, tavas-tara
;

vapus-tara more wonderful, bhagavat-tara more

bhuri-davat-tara
bounteous
vrtra-tara a worse Vrtra
ratnasasvat-tama
most
constant
more
abundantly
giving
stronger,

dha-tama

best bestower

best wielder
a.

The

of

final

the

of treasure hiranya-vasi-mat-tama
golden axe rathi-tama best cJiarioteer.
;

of the stem

is

i-etained before these sufiSxes

e. g.

An n is somemadin-tara more gladdening, vrsan-tama most manly.

e. g. surabhi-n-tara more fragrant
times even inserted
rayin-tama
;

veri/ rich.

The same

That

as the N. of

dyu

(99. 5).

diau-s with the proper V. accent, but with anomalous

retention of the N. s.
^
*

is,

The N. pi. glav-as also occurs in the AB.

These secondary comparatives and superlatives are commoner than

the primary in the j^roportion of thi*ee to two.

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE

103]

95

In a few instances the strong stem of a present participle is used

vradhan-tama being most mighUj, sahan-tama most victorious and
milhusthe weakest stem of a perfect participle vidiis-tara mser
tama most gracious.
h.

e. g.

c.

These secondary

suffixes

and

primary comparatives

are occasionally found added to the

superlatives, e. g. sr6stha-tania most

beautiful.

They also form

ud up ut-tara

d.

tion

These

e.

2.

suffixes

a comparative and superlative from the preposihigher, ut-tamd,i highest.

form their

f.

in a

e. g.

matf-tama most

The primary suffix of the comparative iyams

motherly.

(Gk.

-lo^v,

istha (Gk. -laro) are

-ior) and that of the superlative
'
added directly to the root, which is regularly accented and

Lat.

gunates

and

but leaves

u,

nasalization in a few instances.

with the

initial of

the suffix to

be read as two

e,

unchanged apart from

Final radical a combines

which

is,

however, usually

Examples are t6j-iyams

jav-iyams quieher,
sJiarper, t6j-istha veri/ sliarp (tij he sharp)
jav-istha qiikJcest (ju he sioift) yaj-iyams sacrificing hctter,
mamh-istha most liberal (mah
yaj -istha sacrificing hest
bestow ahundantly) jy^stha greatest and jyestha eldest (jya
to

syllal)les.

overcome).
a. In many instances these superlatives attach themselves in meaning to derivative adjectives, being formed from the root which the
latter contain
e. g. to-iyams smaller, to-istha smallest beside an-u
minute dav-iyams/a/Z/icr beside dii-ra/a?- dragh-iyams longer, dragh;

istha longest beside dirgh-d long lagh-iyams lighter beside lagh-ii light;
var-iyams wider, var-istha loidest beside ur-ii loide ; ^ds-iyams more fre;

6s-istha very quick beside 6s-am quickly

bSrh-istha very lofty beside brh-dnt great; y^v -istha youngest beside
ydv-an youth v^r-istha most excellent beside var-a choice sadh-istha
quent beside sas-vant constant

siraightest

beside sadh-ii

With the

When

straight.

accent of the ordinal suffix tamfi.

used as an ordinal suffix tama forms

its

f.

in accented

(cp. 107j.
^

Except jyestha meaning

eldest

and kanistha meaning

youngest.

DECLENSION

9.6

[103

form of

the suffix is added to tlie derivative

13. In a few examples
the root which appears in the adjective thus as-istha (ui/f-iffTo-s) beside
as-u (wK-v-s) sioift (from as reach) tiksn-iyams sharper beside tiksna
nav-istha netvest beside u^va
sharp (from tij he sharp) n^v-iyams neicer,
neui
svad-Iyams {tjS'lwv, suuv-ior) sweeter, svad-istha (t^S-io-to-s) beside
;

svad-li

{rjh-v-s, suav-i-s)

sweet

(from svad

be sweet).''-

Beside the usual forms in iyams there occur about

half a dozen alternative comparatives made with the shorter
form of the suffix, yams tav-yams (tav-iyams) stronger
pan-yams (pan-iyams)
nav-yams (nav-iyam-s) newer
a.

bhu-yams^ (bhav-iyams) becoming more,

more violent; sah-yams
greater; rabh-yams (rabh-iyams)
more have no
half-dozen
Some
(sah-iyams) stronger.
them:
beside
form
alternative
jya-yams greater, older;
dearest
vas-yams
(priya dear)
pre-yams dearer, pr^-stha
more

tvonderful,

vas-istha

better,

best

sr6-stha best (sri be

(sana
h.

old),

(vasu good) sr6-yams {Kpdcov) Utter,

older
bright), san-yams (Lat. sen-ior)
;

sthe-yams most

steadfast (sthi-ra firm).

Some comparatives and

superlatives belong

to

their

"

lesser, tjounger,
positives in sense only; e.g. kan-iyams
*
kan-istha smallest and kan-istha youngest (alpa small) ;

(Av. nazdvars-istha^
nearest (antika near), vars-iyams higher,

n6d-iyams (Av.
ista)

highest

nazd-yali)

(vrddha groivn

nearer,

n6d-istha

up).

From the adj. pap^ had,i\\e radical element of which is uncertain,

formed direct the comparative pap-iyams in the TS.
2
Here the vowel remains unchanged. This is also the case in the
moreover adds the suffix
corresponding superlative bhu-y-istha, which
1

is

with an intervening y.
^
Cp, kan-ya girl{= kania), Gk. /catvo-y (=
*
Appears in this sense in the TS.
^
Cp. vars-man n., vars-mdn m. height.

Kavio-s).

104]

CARDINALS

DECLENSION

98
a.

are

[104-105

The numbers intermediate between the decades 20-100

Dvandva compounds formed by prefixing the accented

e. g. asta-vimsati 28
6ka-trimsat 31
unit to the decade
trayas-trimsat 33 nava-catvarimsat 49 nava-sasti 69
navasiti 89 panca-navati 95, san-navati 96, asta-navati
;

98

6ka-satani 101, catuh-satam 104, trimsac-chatam 130.

Intermediate numbers

a.

also be expressed

may

unit and decade with or without ca

e.g.

by adding together
nava ea navatim ea nineiy and

navatim nava ninety-nine.

In the TS. the number preceding a decade is also expressed by
kan nd, by one not = minus one thus ekan na vim^ati twenty less one
= 19 ekan n^ catvarimsat 39 ekau ni. sasti 59 6kan nasiti 79
6kan ni, sat^m 99.

nine,
P.

There are two ways of forming multiples. The larger

in the du. or pi. may be multiplied by the smaller
used as an adjective e. g. dv6 sat6 200 sastim sahasra
60,000 trini sata tri sahasrani trimsac ca nava ca 3,339.
Otherwise the multiplier prefixed to the larger number
foi'ms with it a possessive (adjective) compound accented on
h.

number

the last syllable

e. g.

trayastrimsat tri-satah sat-sahasrah

6,338.
a.

Multiples of numbers below 100 are sometimes formed in these two

= 810 tri-saptd 21, tri-nav^ 27.
e.g. navatir nava nine nineties

ways

Declension of Cardinals.

105 Only
.

the

first

four cardinals, like other adjectives,

6ka one, while inflected chiefly in

distinguish the genders.
the s., forms a pl.^ also in the sense of some ; dva two is of
course inflected in the dual only.
1. 6ka is declined like the pronominal adjectives visva

*
A N. f. du, form of 6ka in the sense of a
yuvati (AV.) a cei'tain pair of maidens.

certain

appears in 6ke

CARDINALS

105]

and sarva
are

b).

in the Samhitas

m.

s.

s.

A. 6kam.

N. 6kas.

6kasmin.
f.

The forms occurring

'

(120

99

PI. N. 6ke.

A. 6kam.

N. 6ka.

6kena.

I.

G.

I.

L.

6kasya.

D. 6kebhyas.
6kaya. G. 6kasyas.

N.

PI.

6kas.
n.

s.

2.

6kam.
dva tivo

PI. N. eka.

N.

priya (97 A.

is

1).

declined quite regularly

The forms occurring are

m. N. dva,^ dvau.
f.

N. dv6.

N. dv6.

n.

3.

dvabhyam.
dvabhyam.

I.

L.

I,

as

a dual, like

G. dvayos.

L. dvayos.

dvayos.
m.

tri three is declined in the

The

n. pi. quite regularly, like

stem is tisr,^ the inflexion of which

differs in the N.A. from other r stems* by adding the
normal ending as to the unmodified stem.
The forms
suci (98 B).

occurring are

f.

m. PI. trayas. A. trin.

trinam. L. trisu.
N. tisras.

f.

A. tisras.

I.

I.

tribhis.

D. tribhyas.

G.

tisi'bhis.

D. tisrbhyas.

G.

tisfnam.^

N.A.

n.

4.

tri, trini.

m. n. has the strong stem catvar

In the G. pi., though the stem ends in

catiir four in the

(cp. Lat. quatiior).

1
The only form of the Ab. s. occurring, 6kat, follows the nominal
declension it is used in forming compound numerals, 6kan na trimsat 29, &c. (TS.); 6kasmat, used in the same way, occurs in a B. jias;

sage of the TS.

2
The dual form is retained in the numeral compound dva-dasa 12.
Otherwise dvi is used as the stem in compounds, as dvi-p^d hq^ed, and
in derivation, as dvf-dha in two ways, Sic.

'
*

Probably for tri-sf, formed like sva-sr (101. 1, note 5).

Except nar-ds (101. 1 c).
Once written tisrnam, though the r is actually long metrically.
'

h2

DECLENSION

100
a consonant,

stem

f.

is

catasr, which

shifts its accent like

f.

The

inserted before the case-ending.^

is

m. N. catvar-as.

[105-106

is inflected

panca.

exactly like tisr

The forms occurring

A. catur-as.

I.

bhyas. G. catur-nam.^
N. A. catasr-as.
I. catasr-bhis.

are

and

D. catur-

catur-bhis.

D. catasr-bhyas.

G.

catasrnam.
N.A. catvar-i.

n.

106. The

cardinals

from

to

five

though used

nineteen,

adjectivally, do not distinguish gender and take no ending

in the N.A.'
They also have in common the peculiarity
of accenting a before the consonant terminations * and the
final syllable in the G.
a.

The forms

N.A. sat
6.

of sas six occurring in the Sanihitas are

I.

(27).

sad-bhis.

D. sad-bhyas.

The forms of asta eiglit indicate

The forms that occur are

dual.^

c.

panca

five

I.

asta-bhis.

was an old

D. asta-bhyas.

as well as sapta seven

L. asta-su.

and the cardinals

an (90. 2)

to nineteen are declined like neuters in

except in the G., which follows priya

occurring are

N.A. panca.

canam.

it

N.A. asta/' astau.

from nine

that

L. sat-sii.

(97).

The forms

I.

paiica-bhis.

D. panea-bhyas.

G. pan-

L. panca-su.

Like san-nam, the G. of sds, which, however, does not seem to

occur in any of the Samhitas.

2
With accent on the final syllable like the G. of pdnca, &c.
^
Except asta and ast&u which are N. A. dual forms.
*
Except asta, which accents the terminations.
^

Meaning probably

the two tetrads

(perhaps with reference to the

fingers of the two hands).

asta is the stem used as the first
*>

member

RV., but asta begins to be used in the AV.

of

compounds

in the

106-107]

N.A.

SYNTAX OF CARDINALS. ORDINALS

101

D.Ab. sapta-bhyas.

G.

sapta,

I.

sapta-bhis.

saptanam.
N.A. nava.
N.A. dasa.

I.

nava-bhis.

D. nava-bhyas.

G.

I.

dasa-bhis.

D. dasa-bhyas.

G.

navanam.
dasanam.

L. dasa-su.
N.A. ekadasa. D. ekadasa-bhyas. N. dvadasa. D. dvadasa-bhyas. N. trayodasa. I. trayodasa-bhis. D.

trayodasa-bhyas.
bhyas. N. sodasa.

N. pancadasa.

D.

paficadasa-

D. sodasa-bhyas. N. saptadasa.
D.saptadasa-bhyas. N. astadasa. D. astadasa-bhyas.
N. navadasa. I. navadasa-bhis. D. 6kan na vim-

satyai (TS.).
d. The cardinals for the decades from
hvcnty to ninety
with their compounds are f. substantives, nearly always
inflected in the sing, and according to the declension of the
stem final
e. g. N. vimsati-s.
A. virnsati-m.
I. vim;

saty-a.

N. trimsat.

A. trimsat-am.

trimsat-i.

If the sense requires

used in the

pi.

e.

navatinam of nine

g.

be declined in

nava navatis nine

all

In the group

trimsat-a.

L.

nineties

may be
navanam

five to nineteen

are neuters, which

dv6 sat6 two hundred

tJioitsand

numbers

sapta satani seven hundred

a.

I.

these numerals

nineties.

sata hundred and sahasra

may

it

tri

e. g.

sahasrani

the bare stem

oblique cases agreeing with substantives;

seven priests (cp. 194 B a).

three thousand.

may

e.g. sapta.

be used in the

hotrbhih with

Ordinals.

107. The ordinals, being all adjectives ending in a, are

declined in the m. and n. like priya.
The f. is formed
with i (declined like devi) except in the first four, which
take

a.

The

ordinals

suffixes,

viz.

from
(t)iya,

are formed with various

The formation
thama, ma.

first to tenth

tha,

DECLENSION

102
of the

first

four

from

is

somewhat

[107

irregular.

The stems

of the

from those of
the corresponding cardinals only in being accented on the
final syllable
their inflexion diff^ers from that of the latter
in following priya.
Thus ekadasa eleventh forms the
cases m. s. A. ekadasa-m.
PI. N. ekadasasas.
A. ekaordinals

eleventh

to

nineteenth

differ

dasan.

I.

ekadasais.

The

ordinals from twentieth to ninetieth (including their

compounds), which also end in accented a, seem to be

forms of the corresponding cardinals

catvarimsa fortieth.^
abbreviated

e. g.

The ordinals for hundredth and thousandth are formed

with the superlative suffix tama accented on the final
syllable
sata-tama, sahasra-tama."
:

1st

pra-thama,^

f.

a.^

NUMEEAL DEKIVATIVES

OEDINALS.

107-109]

11th

eka-dasa.

52nd dva-pancasa

21st

eka-vimsa.

61st

34th catus-trimsa

(B.).

(B.).

100th sata-tama.

(B.).

1000th sahasra-tama

catvarimsa.

40fch

eka-sas-ta

103

(B.).

48th asta-catvarimsa.

Numeral
108.

Derivatives.

A number of derivatives,

chiefly adverbs, are

formed

from the cardinals.

Multiplicative adverbs

a.

dvi-s
fri-s)

ttvice

(Gk.

Sl-9,

sa-krt wice

Lat. bis)

(lit.

one maTcing)

tri-s thrice (Gk. rpc-9, Lat.

catiis four times (for catur-s).

Others are expressed

by the cardinal and the form krtv-as times (probably makings

A. pi. of krtu) which is used as a separate word except in
asta-krtvas (AV.) eigJit times e. g. dasa krtvas (AV.) ten
times, bhuri krtvas many times.
Adverbs of manner formed with the suffix dha
h.
dvi-dha in two ivays or jyarts, tri-dha and tre-dha, catur;

dha, panca-dha, so-dha, sapta-dha, asta-dha, nava-dha,

sahasra-dha.
c. A few
multiplicative adjectives derived with the
suffixes

dvay-a

a,

taya,

twofold

vaya meaning

dasa-taya

tenfold

-fold
;

tray-a

threefold,

catur-vaya fourfold.

PRONOUNS
109. Pronouns
declension.

They

differ from nouns both in origin and

are derived from a small class of roots

with a demonstrative sense, and they have several distinct

These peculiarities have in
peculiarities of inflexion.
varying degrees been extended to several groups of adjectives.

DECLENSION

104
A.

[109

Personal Pronouns.

This class displays the greatest number of peculiarities

they are for each person derived from several roots or
:

roots
they are specially irregular in
not
do
distinguish gender, nor to some
they
Some resemble neuters in form
extent even number.
in two of them the
a few have no apparent case-ending

combinations
inflexion

of

A.

pi.

m. does duty as

f.

also.

Plural.

Singular.

"

ah-am I
A. mam me

tv-am
tv-am

N.

I.

^^'"

ma-y-a hy me

vay-am
asman ^

thou
thee

ma-hyam

'
.

ma-hya
Ab.

us
[

ynsman you

us

tu-bhyam

to

thee

asma-bhyam yusma-bhyam
for us

for you

mad from me

tvsid from thee

asmad from yusmad from

ma-ma

tava of

asmaka-m

us
G.

ye

asma-bhis hy

tva
j

Itva-y-a
D.

yu-y-am

ive

of me

thee

you
'

yusmaka-m*

in

yusm6

of us
in
L. m.a-Y-i
''

me

itve^
,

m
.

(tva-y-i

fasma-su''
thee
us
1
^^

of you
in you

lasm6

Cp. Lat. mihi and tibi.

= tva-i), is found in the EV. The
this, the normal form (
irregular tvdyi appears in the later Samhitas.
^
asman and yusman ai'e new formations according to the nominal
'

Only

declension.

a + sma and

The stems are compounds of the pronominal elements

yu + sma. The VS. twice has the distinctly f. new forma-

tion yusmas.
*

asmakam and yusmakam are properly the A. n.

asmaka our, yusmaka your.
asmasu is a new formation following the analogy

s.

of the posses-

sives
^
6

asme is also used as D.

Changed from original yus-am by the influence

of asmabhis.

of vay-am.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS

109-110]

105
"

and avam (SB.) tve two. A. avam (^B.) us

Ab. ava-bhyam (K.) and avad (TS.)/rom us two.
G. avay-os (SB.) of us two.
A. yuvam you two. I. yuva-bhyam
N. yuvam ye two.
and yuva-bhyam hy you two. Ab. yuvad from you
two.
G. yuv-6s and yuvay-os of you two.
Dual. N.

vam

'

two.

'

The following unaccented forms, inadmissible at the beginning

*
*
Sing. A. ma, tva. D.G. me (Gk. fioC), te
(Gk. rot). Du. A.D.G. nau (Gk, vwi), vam. PI. A.D.G. nas (Lat. nos),
a.

of a sentence, are also used

vas (Lat.

vos).

The usual stems of these pronouns used in derivation or as first

member of compounds are ma, asma tva, yuva, yusma thus
asma-druh hating us tva-yata presented by thee yuva-yii desiring you
two
yusma-yd.nt desiring yon. But the forms mad, asmad, tvad occur
a few times as first member of compounds thus mat-krta done bj me
b.

asmit-sakhi having us

B.

as companions

tv^d-yoni

derived from thee.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

110. The inflexion of these pronouns, as compared with

the nominal a declension, has the following peculiarities
1. in the
in the N.A. n.
sing, d is added instead of

the element
in

sma

between the root and the ending

in
and
sya in the D.Ab.G.L. f.
n.,
the ending in the L. m. n.
2. in the pi.
apjDears

the D.Ab.L. m.

(instead of

i)

is

the N. m. ends in e instead of as

the G. has s instead of

before the ending am.

The stem ta that (also he, she, it) may be taken as the type
for the inflexion of adjectival pronouns
:

1
vam (probably abbreviated for avam), occurring once in the RV.,
seems to be the only N. du. form found in the Sarnhitas.
^
The N. avam (SB.) and A. avam (K. SB.) .seem to have been the
normal forms judging by yuvdm and yuvam.

^
*

yuv-6s occurs in the RV., yuvay-os in the TS.

te, originally L., have come to be used as D. and G.

me and

106

DECLENSION

[110

DEMONSTEATIVE PKONOUNS

iio-iuj

m. Sing. N. esa-s (67, 48). A. etam.

smai. Ab. etasmad. G. etasya.

I,

107

et6na.

D. eta-

Du. N. eta, etau.

f.

PI. N. et6.

A. etan.

I.

et^bhis, etais.

Sing. N. esa.

A. etam.

I.

etaya.
etasyam. Du. N.
I. etabhis.
L. etasu.

et6.

Sing. N. etad.

n.

2.

tya
It

that.

A. etas.

PI. etas.

is
is

D. et6bhyas.

L.

PI. N. eta, etani.

derived from ta with the suffix ya and means

common in the KV., but rare in the later

Samhitas.'

Unlike ta it is used adjectivally only, hardly

ever occurring without its substantive.
It never begins
a sentence except when followed by the particles u, cid,
nil, or su.

The forms occurring

m. Sing. N.

sya,^

PI. N. ty6.
f.

Sing. N. sya.
tj6.

PI.

n. Sing. tyad.

are

A. tyam.

A. tyan.
A. tyam.

N. tyas.

G. tyasya.

I.
I.

Du.

N. tya.

ty6bhis.
tya.

G. tyasyas.

Du. N.

A. tyas.

PI. tya, tyani.

3,
very rare derivative is ta-ka this little, which occurs
only twice in the EV. in the two A. sing, forms m. taka-m,
n. taka-d.
a. sima seems to have the sense of an
emphatic demonstrative.* The
forms occurring are: Sing. N. sim^s. V. sima. D. simdsmai (n.).
Ab. simdsmad. PI. simi.

111. In the inflexion of the demonstrative which in the

N.

s.

ni.

appears as

ayam

this Jiere

found a few times in B.

See 48, note 3.
*
It is generally given the meaning of
more probable sense.

the two pronominal

It is also

every, all,

but the above

is

the

DECLENSION

108

[111

and a^
(which nearly always has a double ending)
and
m.
the
N.
in
the
A.,
are employed, the former
s.)
(except
the latter in all the other cases. The A. s. m. f. starts from
i-m (the A. of i), which appears in the du. and pi. also, so
roots

that all these cases have the appearance of being formed

from a stem ima."

Plural.

SlNaULAR.
FEM.

i-d-am
i-d-am

i-y-am

i-m-6

i-m-a

i-m-as

i-m-am

i-m-an

i-m-ani

i-m-as

N. a-y-am

A. im-am'

D.

e-na^
a-smai

Ab.

a-smad

I.

G.

a-sya

a-y-a

e-bhis

a-bhis

a-syai

e-bhyas

a-bhyas

'

'^

a-syas
a-syas

e-s-am

a-s-am

a-syam

e-su

a-sii

a-smin

L.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

NEUT.

MASC.

Dual.
N.A. m. im-a, -au.
m. G.L. a-y-6s.

f.

im-6.

n.

im-6.

m. D.Ab. a-bhyam.

These two roots are frequently used in derivation

a-tha then

i-da

noxo,

i-hd

e. g.

a-tra here,

here, i-tara other,

is formed the adverb ima-tha thus.

the A. of i, from which is also formed the A. f. i-m
and the n. i-d, both used as particles.
*
Also twice ana. ena and the remaining oblique cases, when used
2

From

Here i-m

as nouns
s

The

this

stem

is

and unemphatic, may

lose their accent.

Ab., according to the nominal declension,

ad

is

used as a

conjunction.

6 Both
asya and asmai may be accented dsya and asmai when
occurs once
emphatic at the beginning of a Pada. The form imdsya
and imasmai in the AA. for asmai.
in the RV. instead of asya
^
Instead of aya the form andya occurs twice in the KV. it is the
only form from ana found in the Samhitas.
;

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

112]

112. The demonstrative corresponding to

109

ayam employed

to express remoteness in the sense of that there,

you, and
having in the N. s. the curious forms m. f. a-s-au, n. a-d-as,

uses throughout its inflexion the root a, but always in an

extended form. The fundamental stem used in every case
This is extended by
(except the N. s.) is a-m A. m. of a.
of the particle u to amu,' which
appears
throughout the sing, (with u in A. f.) except the N. In the
pi. amu is the f. and ami the m. stem (except the A.).

the addition

The forms occurring

are

m. Sing. N. a-sau." A. a-m-u-m,

I, amu-n-a.
D. amusmai. Ab. amii-smad. G. amii-sya. L. amu-smin.

'

PI. ami.

A. amun.

D. ami-bhyas.

G. ami-sam.

A. a-m-ifi-m. I. amu-y-a.* D. amuSing. N. a-sau.G.

syai.
amu-syas. Du. N. amu. PI. N. amu-s.

f.

A. amu-s.
n. Sing.
a.

N.

PL

a-d-as.''

The unaccented

e-na"

[he,

besides the

is

I.

ene.

sing,

amu.

defective

pronoun of the third person

all numbers,

declined in the A. of

she,

it)

I. s.

and the G. du.

A. sing. m. ena-m,
f.

N.

n.

PI. m. enan,ena-m,
ena-s.

enena,

f.

ena-d.

Du.

m. enau,

f.

G. du. en-os (RV.), enay-os (AV.).

a. Another unaccented demonstrative

pronoun restricted to the RV.
(excepting one form in the AV. and the TS.) is tva meaning one, many

1
This stem is used in derivation e.g. amu-tas thence, amu-tra there,
amii-tha thus (B.).
^
Here the pronominal root a seems to be compounded with sa
extended by tlie particle a a-sa-u and a-sa-u.
"
This is the only example of sya being added to any but an a stem.
;

Used adverbially, with shifted accent.

''Here the neuter a-d of tlie pronominal root a

the
"

is

extended with

suffix as.

Here we have the same

e (L. of a) as in 6-ka one, e-vd, thvs.

DECLENSION

110
a

[112-]13

generally repeated in the sense of one another. The n. tvad

The forms occurring are
is also found in B.

one,

meaning parily

A. m. tvam.

Sing. N. m. tvas, f. tva, n. tvad.

D. m. tvasmai, f. tvasyai. PI. m. tve.

p.

The pronoun av^

occurs only in the G. du. form av63 in

of you tivo being such (used like sa in

vam meaning

combination with
s6,

this

m. tvena.

I.

tv4m thou as such).

The pronoun dma

this

y.

the AB.) in the formula

occurs only once in the

dmo 'h^m asmi

this

am

AV.

(also in

I.

Interrogative Pronoun.

C.

113. The interrogative ka who ? which ? ivhat ? used as

both substantive and adjective, is inflected exactly like ta,
excepting the alternative neuter form ki-m," which instead
of the pronominal

attached to a stem in

has the nominal

i).

A. ka-m.

m. Sing. ka-s.
ka-smad. G. ka-sya.
PI. k6.

I.

k6-bhis.

I.

n. Sing.

(never elsewhere
are

L. ka-smin.

Du.

N. kau.

L. k6-su.

N.A. ka-d and ki-m.^

PI.

Ah.

D. ka-smai.

k6na.

Sing. N. ka. A. ka-m. I. ka-y-a.

L. ka-su.
ka-s. A. ka-s.

f.

The forms occurring

G. ka-syas.

PI. N.

N. ka and kani.

a. In derivation the stems ki and ku as well as ka are used ; e. g.

ki-y-ant how great ? ku-ha ichere ? ka-ti hoic many ?
As first member of a compound kad occurs twice kat-paya greatly
kim is similarly used a few
swelling, k^d-artha having what purpose?
times in the later Samhitas and the Brahmanas e. g. kim-kard
:

servant.
b. k&-ya, an extended form of kfi, occurring in the G. only,
in combination with cid kdyasya cid of whomsoever.

is

found

From

this

pronoun are derived the

I.

and Ab. adverbs (with

shifted accent) ama at home and amad/rom 7iear.

*
The N. s.m. is preserved as a petrified form in nS-ki-s

and ma-ki-s

no one, nothing.
2

The

three.

relative frequency of

kA-d and ki-m

is

in tlie

RV.

as

two

to

11-115]

RELATIVE AND REFLEXIVE PEONOUNS

111

Relative Pronoun.

D.

114. The relative pronoun ya who, which, what

The forms occurring are

exactly like ta.

is

declined

m. Sing. N. ya-s. A, ya-m. I. y6na and y^na. D. yasmai. Ab. ya-smad.'' G. ya-sya.
L. ya-smin.
Du, N. ya, yau. D. ya-bhyam. G. ya-y-os. L. ya-y-os
and y-6s.^
PI. N. j6.
A. yan. I. y6-bhis and yais. D. y6-bhyas.
^

G. y6-s-am.
Sing. N. ya.

f.

L.

L. y6-su.

A. ya-m.

I.

ya-y-a.

G.

ya-syas.

ya-syam.

Du. N. y6.
PI. N. ya-s.

s-am.

G.L. ya-y-os.
A. ya-s. I. ya-bhis.

D. ya-bhyas.

G. ya-

L. ya-su.

N.A. Sing. ya-d. Du. j6. PI. ya, yani.

The stem of yi, is used to form derivatives e. g. ya-tha, as. It
also appears as first member of a compound in ya-dfs which like. The
neuter ydd is also once used thus in the EV. ydt-kama desiring ivhat
n.

a.

and a few times

later, as

yad-devatya having

ivhat deity (K.),

yat-karin

doing what (SB.).

h.
form of the relative

A
extended with the diminutive suffix ka,
ya-kd who, occurs only in the sing. N. m. ya-kd-s, f. ya-ka, and the pi.
IN", m. ya-k6.
Reflexive Pronouns.

E.

115.

a.

The

reflexive indeclinable substantive

self is properly used as a

Sometimes, however,

all

it

RV. as y6na, but the Pada

The Ab., formed according

to the

nominal declension, yad

as a conjunction.
^
y-6s for yd-y-os like

Derived from
from a).

svfi

**

three persons.

in the

y^na is twice as
always reads y^na.

N. referring to

N. nature being forgotten,

common

'^

its

sva-y-am

is

is

text

used

yuv-6s for yuvd-y-os (p. 105, note 3).

with suffix am and interposed y (like a-y-am

DECLENSION

112

e. g. ayuji svayam dhuri I have yoked myself

It
or as agreeing in sense ^yith another case.

used as an A.
to the pole

[115-116

means spontaneously.
tanu body is used in the EV. to express self in other
cases than the N. and in all numbers.
The reflexive
e. g.
pronoun sva and a possessive G. may be added
occasionally
h.

yajasva tanvam

svam

own

worship thine

The

self.

yajasva tanvam tava

a,iid

ivorship thyself

reflexive sense of

tanu

has disappeared in B.
There are one or two instances in the RV.

a.

atman

soul in a reflexive sense

The A. atmanam

e. g.

of the incipient use of

balam dadhana atmani

putting

frequently thus used in the later

Sarnhitas (though never in the RV.) and in B.

force into himself.

c.

sva own

is

is

a reflexive adjective referring to

all

three

an ordinary
adjective (priya) in the RV. (except the two isolated
The forms
pronominal forms svasmin and svasyas).
and numbers.

persons

occurring are

It

inflected

is

like

m. Sing. N, svas
sv6na.

D.

(Lat.

A. svam.

suits).

Ab. svad.

svaya.

G.

I.

sv6na and

svasya.

L. sv6

and svasmin (RV.).

A. svan.

PI. N. svas.

G.

bhyas.
f.

Sing.

N.

svayai.
PI.

o.

N. svas.

As

first

sv6bhis and svais.

D. sv6-

L. svesu.

D.
A. svam.
I.
sva (Lat. sua).
svaya.
Ab. svayas. G. svasyas (RV.). L. svayam,

Sing. N.A.

n.

I.

svanam.

A. svas.

svam

member

I.

of

L. svasu.

svabhis.

(Lat. suum).

compounds

PI. A.

svd. several

sva

(Lat. sua).

times appears in the

substantive (as well as the adj.) sense; e.g. sva-yukta self-yoked.

svayam is similarly used in the Sarnhitas e.g. svayam-ja self-lorn.
;

F.

Possessive Pronouns.

Possessive pronouns are rare because the G. of the

personal pronoun is generally used to express the sense

116.

which they convey.

PKONOMINAL COMPOUNDS

116-117]

The

a.

possessives of the

first

mama-ka my and asma-ka

^

Sing. D. mamakaya.
Sing. N. m. mamaka-s.

G.

person are

our.

Tlie

113

mama-ka and

forms occurring are

mamakasya.
n.

mamaka-m.

PI. G.

mamaka-

nam.
I.
N.A. n. asmaka-m.'^
asmakena.
asmakasas. I. asmake-bhis.

The

n.

the G.

s.

asmakara, by fai- the commonest of these forms,

the personal pronoun = of us (109).

m.

N.

PI.

Sing.

is

used as

pi. of

h. The possessives of the second person are tava-ka^ thy

(only D. pi. tavak6bhyas), tva tliy (only I. pi. f. tva-bhis),
and yusma-ka your. Of the latter, three forms occur:
I. s.

m. yusmakena,

yusmakam
pronoun
e.

pi.

pi.

of you.
Besides being

used

employed as a simple
person (like Lat. suus),
thy, your,

yusmaka-bhis, and the N.A.

f.

used as the G.

and of the

of the

reflexively

sva

second

is

n.

personal

fairly

often

generally of the third

her, their, but also of the second,

possessive,
his,

first,

my, our.

The

inflexion (115

c) is

the same in both senses.

Pronominal Compounds and Derivatives.

G.

117. With -drs^ in the EV. and other Samhitas, and

with -drksa in the VS. are formed the following pronominal
compounds i-drs, ta-drs, eta-drs such, ki-drs what liJce ?
ya-drs what like i-drksa, eta-drksa such.
'

'"'

Both formed from the G. of the personal pronoun mdina. There

RV. the derivative ma-k-ina my.
^
The VS. has once the N. s. asmakd-s our formed like mamaka beside
mdimaka.
^
Formed from the G. tava.
*
In the Brahmanas (SB.) -drsa begins to appear i-ifsa, ta-dfsa,
^

also occurs once in the

ya-drsa.
5
N. s. m. ki-drn.
^
With the very anomalous L.
1819

s.

yadfsmin.
I

DECLENSION

114

[117-119

a. With the suffix -ka, conveying a diminutive or contemptuous

meaning, very rarely used derivatives are formed from the pronouns
ti, ya, sa, and asd,u: ta-kd tliaf little (110. 3), yd-ka 7vko, which (114 &),
sa-kfi (only N. s. f. sa-ka), asakau N. s. f. that little (VS.).

With the comparative

h.

kd,

suffix

i-tara other, ka-tara lohich of two? ya-tarfi, %cho or which oftivo

(op. 120)

ka-tam&

tvho or

many

b.

and ya

ka-ti liow

(Lat. toti-dem)

s.

N. iyat,

much ?

many

(Lat. quot)

No inflected
ya-ti as many.
in
the
sense of
They appear

pi. only.

With yant

much derivatives
n.

with a numerical sense are

ti derivatives

ta,

forms of these M'ords occur.

the N.A.

which of many? ya-tama who orivhich of many,

118. a. With
formed from ka,
td-ti so

formed from i,
-tama from the latter two

suffix -tara derivatives are

and with the superlative

yd.,

sing.

expressing the quantitative meaning of

from i and ki : 1-yant so much

are formed

pi.

iyanti

N.

n.

kiyat

D. iyatyai

s.

f.

kiyati.

f.

ki-yant how
D. m. kiyate.
;

L. kiyati (for kiyati).

With vant are formed derivatives from personal proc.

nouns with the sense of liJ\e, attached to and from others in
thus tva-vant like thee,
the quantitative sense of great
;

ma-vant

yuva-vant devoted to you ttvo (only D.

yusma-vant belonging to ymt (only L. pi.
yuvavate)
yusmavatsu) eta-vant and ta-vant so great ya-vant as
D. m. n. ivate.
great; i-vant so great (s. N. n. ivat.
m.
ki-vant
lioic far?
G. ivatas
A.
ivatas)
(G. s.
pi.
like

vie,

kivatas).

Indefinite Pronouns.

119.

a.

The only simple pronoun which has an un-

doubtedly indefinite sense is

The six forms that occur are

mai.
PI. N.

Ab. samasmad.
same.

sama
:

G.

m.

s.

(unaccented) any, every.

D. samas-

A. samam.

samasya.

L.

samasmin.

119-120]

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES

115

are foi'med

by combining

Compound indefinite pronouns

b.

the particles ca, cana, or cid with the interrogative ka

thus kas ca an^/, any one kas cana any one soever, every
;

kas cid any, some

any

one,

some

one.

Pronominal Adjectives.
120. Several
to

adjectives derived

from or

allied in

mean-

pronouns, follow the pronominal declension (110)

ing
altogether or in part.
a. The adjectives that strictly adhere to the pronominal
type of inflexion are anya other and the derivatives formed

The specifically
with tara and tama from ka and ya.
pronominal cases of the latter that have been met with are
:

Sing. N. n. katara-d, yatara-d; katama-d, yatama-d.

D. katama-smai. G. f. katama-syas. L. f. yatama-syam.
PI. N.

m. katam^, yatam6, yatar6 (K.). From itara occur in

s. itarasmai and N. pi. itare.

the Kathaka Samhita m. D.

The forms

of

anya

that occur are

m. Sing. N. anya-s. A. anya-m, I. any^na. D. anyaL. anya-smln.

smai.
G. anya-sya.
PL N. anye.
A. anyan. I. any6-bhis and anyais. D. any^-bhyas.
G. any6-sam.
L. any6-su.
f.
Sing. N. anya. A. anyam. I, anya-y-a. D. anya-syai.
L. anya-syam.
G. anya-syas.
Du. N. any6. PI. N.
A.
I. anya-bhis.
G. anya-sam.
anya-s.
anya-s.
L. anya-su.
n. Sing. N. anya-d.
Du. I. anya-bhyam. PI. N. anya.
h. visva all, sarva whole, 6ka one are partially pronom-

inal, differing only in taking

m instead of d in the N. A.

s.

n.

Thus:
Sing.

D. visvasmai.'

The RV. has

tlie

Ab. visvasmad.^

L.

visvasmin.^

nominal forms D. visvaya, Ab. vfsvat,

once each.

i2

L. vi'ilve,

DECLENSION

IIG

[120

but
G. m. visvesam, f. visvasam
visvam.
Ab. m. sarvasmad.
Sing. D. m. sarvasmai. f. sarvasyai.
f.
sarvasam but
sarvesam.
m.
N.
sarve.
G,
PI.
sarvam.
N.
n.
sing.
PI. N. m. 6ke
L. m. 6kasmin.^
Sing. G. f. 6kasyas.
PI.

N. visve.

sing. N. n.

but sing. N. n. 6kani.

c. More than a dozen other adjectives, having pronominal
affinities in form or meaning, occasionally have pronominal
case-forms (but always m instead of d in the N.A. s. n.)
:

1. Eight adjectives formed witli the comparative suffixes

-tara and -ra, and the superlative suffix -ma ut-tara hiffher,
:

later

Sing. Ab. L. aittarasmad and littarasmin beside littarad

G. uttarePI. N. uttare.
littare.
L. f. uttarasyam.

and

sam

(K.).

apa-ra, ava-ra, upa-ra loiver: sing. L. aparasmin (K.).

PI. N. m. apare, avare, lipare beside aparasas, avarasas,

uparasas and uparas.

ava-ma

loirest

upa-ma

highest

para-ma
masyam.

sense

L.

farthest:
PI.

madhya-ma
2.

L.

s.

f.

s. f.

avamasyam.
upamasyam.

sing.

f.

m. N. paramd
middlemost

G. paramasyas.

L.

para-

(K.).

sing.

f.

L.

madhyamasyam.

Five other adjectives with a comparative or pronominal

:

para ulterior sing. D. m. parasmai. Ab. m. parasmad.

PI. m. N.
G. f. parasyas.
li. m. parasmin beside pare.
G.
beside
parasas.
pare
paresam.
Ab. purvasmad.
piirva prior: sing. D. purvasmai.
PI. N. m. purve (very
L. purvasmin (K.), f. purvasyam.
common) beside piirvasas (very i*are). G. m. ptirvesam,
:

f.

piirvasam.
'

The AV. once has ke

as L. sing.

CONJUGATION

120-121]

nema

nam

'

other

m. n^masmin.

sing. L.

117

PI. N.

iii.

neme, but G. nema-

(unaccented).

sva own (116c), othei"\vise following the nominal declension, has

once sing. G. f. svasyas and once L. n. svasmin,
samana similar, common has once sing. Ab. n. samanasmad beside

samanad.
3.

Four

occasional

adjectives,

numerical in form or meaning, have

prathama first has the

pronominal endings

trtiya third has sing. L. f.

libhaya of both Jdnds has pi. m. G. ubhayesam
trtiyasyam
and N. ubhaye beside ubhayasas and libhayas ^ kevala
sing.

G.

f.

prathamasyas

exclusive

has once

pi.

N. m. k^vale.

CHAPTER

IV

CONJUGATION
two voices, active and
The middle forms may be employed in a passive
except in the present system, which has a special

121. Vedic verbs are inflected in

middle.
sense,

Some
passive stem inflected with the middle endings.
verbs are conjugated in both active and middle, e. g. krno-ti
and krnu-t6 makes others in one voice only, e. g. as-ti is

others partly in one, partly in the other

turns, but perfect va-vart-a has turned.

e. g.

varta-te

a. The Vedic verb has in each tense and mood three

numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural, all in regular use,

Perhaps from na + ima

Cp. 107, note

not this.

4.

ubha both is declined in the Du. only

ubhabhyam. G. ubhayos.

I.

N.A. m. ubha,

f.

ubhe.

CONJUGATION

118

[121-122

with three persons in each (except the imperative in which

first persons are wanting).
122. There are five tenses in ordinary use, the present,

the

the imperfect, the perfect, the aorist, and the future.

The
terms imperfect, perfect, aorist are here used in a purely

formal sense, that

is,

as corresponding in formation to the

Greek tenses Ijearing those names. No Vedic tense has an

imperfect meaning, while the perfect sense is generally
expressed by the aorist.
are four moods, the
a. Besides the indicative there
the
the
subjunctive,
injunctive,
optative, and the imj)erative,
all of which are formed from the stems of the present, the
The imperfect has no moods and
perfect, and the aorist.
the only modal form occurring in the future is the unique
subjunctive karisyas from kr make.
;

a. The subjunctive, very common in the

or four times as frequent as the optative

RV. and the AV.,

is

three

the hitter, comparatively

rare in the Samhitas, occurs far oftener than the former in the
Brahmanas. Both form stems with a special modal affix.

The

subj. adda a to the indicative stem

when

the latter distin-

guishes a strong and a weak stem, the a is attached to the former,

while it coalesces to a with the final of a stems. Thus the pr. subj.
stem of duh 'nlk is doh-a, of joij jom yundj-a, but of bhu he bhava.
The opt. adds ya or i, which when strong and weak stems are dis-

tinguished are attached to the latter. Stems in a take i throughout

others take i in the mid., ya in the act. thus the pr. opt. stem of bhii

is

bhave

bhdva-i)

duh and

of

yuj, act. duh-ya, yuiij-ya,

mid.

duh-i, yuiij-i.

The

inj. is

identical in

(impf., aor., plup.).

It is

form with an unaugmented

very

common

disappeared from the Brahmanas, except

tive particle

j^ast

tense

in the RV., but has almost

when used with

the prohibi-

ma.

The impv. has no modal affix, adding its endings direct to the tense
stem e. g. 2. s.pr. vid-dhi hioiv, pf. mumug-dhi release, aor. ^ru-dhl hear.
In the 2. 3. du. and 2. pi. act. and mid. (ending in tam, tam; atham,
atam ta dhvam) it is identical with the inj.
;

h. Participles, active and middle, are formed from the

tense stem of the present, future, aorist, and perfect. There

THE PKESENT SYSTEM

122-124]

119

are also passive particii^les, present, perfect, and future

the first being formed from the passive stem in ya, the
;

other two from the root.

c.

There are also gerunds, which are stereotyped cases

nouns and having the value

(chiefly instrumentals) of verbal

of indeclinable active participles with a prevailingly past

e. g. gatvi and gatvaya having gone.
There are about a dozen differently formed types of
infinitives, which are cases of verbal nouns made directly
or with a suffix from the root, and hardly ever connected

sense

d.

with a tense stem

e. g.

idh-am

to

kindle

gan-tavai

to go.

The Present System.

123. While the
endings

perfect, aorist,

and future tenses add the

directly (or after inserting a sibilant) to the root,

the present group (that is, the present with its moods and
participles, and the imperfect) forms a special stem, which
is

made

in eight different

ways by primary

The Eight

sixth

In the
classes,

Classes.

two conjugawhich comprises the first, fourth, and

the present stem ends in a and remains

124. These eight

tions.

verbs.

classes are divided into

first,

unchanged throughout (like the a declension). The secondary

conjugations in a (desideratives, intensives, causatives,
denominatives) as well as the future follow this conjugation
in their inflexion.

characterized

by

The second

shift of accent

accompanied by vowel gradation.

five classes, in

or graded conjugation is
between stem and ending,
It comprises the remain-

which the terminations are added

directly
ing
to the final of the root or to the (graded) suffixes no or na,
and the stem is changeable, being either strong or weak.

CONJUGATION

120

A.

125.

The

1.

[1-25-127

First Conjugation.

Bhu

first or

class

adds a to the

last letter of

the root, which being accented takes Guna of a final vowel

(short or long) and of a short medial vowel followed by one

consonant

e. g. ji

conquer

jay-a

bhu

Jje

bhav-a

budh

bodh-a.
The sixth or

aicake:

Tud class adds an accented a to the root,

2.
which being unaccented has no Guna. Before this a final f
changed to ir.
The fourth or Div class adds ya to the last letter of
the root, which is accented;^ e.g. nah hind: nah-ya div
is

3.

'play:

(cp. 15, 1

div-ya

B.

c).

Second Conjugation.

126. The strong forms are

1. The singular present and imperfect active
2. The whole subjunctive
:

3.

The

third person singular imperative active.

In these forms the vowel of the root or of the affix, beingwhile in the weak forms it is
accented, is strengthened
;

reduced because the terminations are accented.

a. In the ninth class the accented form of the affix is na, the unaccented ni or n in the seventh they are respectively nd and n.
;

127.

1.

The second

or root class adds the terminations

directly to the root (in the subjunctive and optative with

the intervening modal suffix). The radical vowel in the

strong forms

is

accented - and takes

Guna

if

possible (125,

1)

^
The weak form in some instances assumed by the root points to
the ya having originally been accented (cp. 133 B 1).
2
Except in the augmented (128 c) imperfect singular because the
augment is invariably accented.

FOEMATION OF PKESENT STEM

127]

from i go

e. g.

sing. 1. 6-nii, 6-si, 6-ti

dvis hate

121

dv^s-mi,

dv6k-si, dv6s-ti.

The third

2.

or reduplicating class acids the terminations

directly to the reduplicated root,

Guna

takes

if

which

forms

in the strong

Contrary to analogy, the accent is

possible.

not, in the majority of verbs

belonging to this

on the

class,

root in the strong forms, but on the reduplicative syllable

(which is also accented in the 3. pi. act. and mid.).^ Thus
hxi sacrifice

Sing.

The seventh

3.

1.

ju-ho-mi,
pi. 1.

bi-bhar-mi,

1.

Sing.

pi.

l.ju-hu-mas; bhr &car:

bibhr-mas,

3.

bi-bhr-ati.^

or infixing nasal class adds the termina-

tions directly to the final consonant, before which na is

inserted in the strong and n in the weak forms e. g. yuj
;

join

yu-na-j-mi. yu.nj-mas.

The

4.

fifth

or

nu

class

adds in the strong forms the

weak forms is reduced

accented syllable no, which in the

nu

to

e. g.

kr mahe

kr-no-mi, krn-mas.^

Four roots ending in n

a.

liave the

appearance of being formed with

a sutfix u, but this is probably due to the an. of the root being reduced
to the sonant nasal
thus from tan stretch ta-nu (for tn-nu). In the
tenth Mandala of the RV. the anomalous weak stem kur-u appears
;

three times (beside the normal kr-nu) and the strong stem karo in
the AV. These stems gave rise to the eighth or u class of Sanskrit

grammar.
5. The ninth or na class adds to the root in the
strong
forms the accented syllable na, which in the weak forms is
reduced to ni before consonants and n before vowels. The

root

shows a tendency to be weakened. Thus grabh seize:

pi. 1. grbh-ni-masi and grbh-ni-mas, 3. grbh-

grbh-na-mi,
n-anti.

It is doubtless as a result of this accentuation that these verbs

n of the endings in these two forms bibhr-ati, bibhr-ate.

The intensives conjugated in the active (172) follow this

lose the
2

class.
3

The u

is

dropped before the

m of the

1. pi.

ind. act.

and mid.

CONJUGATION

122

[128-129

The Augment.
128. The imperfect, pluperfect,

and conditional

aorist,

generally prefix to the stem the accented syllable a which

gives to those forms the sense of past time.
a. This augment sometimes appears lengthened, before
aor. a-nat (nas attain)
r, v of seven or eight roots
impf. a-yunak, aor. a-yukta, a-yuksatam (yuj join) impf.

the n, y,

a-rinak and

aor.

a-raik (ric

impf. a-vrni (vr choose)

a-vidhyat (vyadh
1).

wish

contracts with the initial vowels

i,

u, r

Vrddhi vowels ai, au, ar e. g. aichat impf. of is

aunat impf. of ud wet ar-ta (Gk. S)p-To) 3. s. aor.
;

mid. of r
c.

aor. a-var (vr cover) ;

leave)
impf. a-vrnak (vrj turn), impf.

ivound).

The augment

to the

go.

The augment

is

very often dropped

a survival from the time

this is doubtless

when it was an independent

particle

that could be dispensed with if the past sense was clear from
the context.
In the KV. the unaugmented forms of past

much more than half as numerous as the augmented

In sense the forms that drop the augment are either
indicative or injunctive, these being about equal in number

tenses are
ones.

in the

EV.

About

one-third of the injunctives in the

are used with the prohibitive particle

AV. nearly
which

all

the unaugmented

four-fifths are

EV.

ma

In the
(Gk. firj).
forms are injunctives, of

used with ma.

Reduplication.

129.

verbal

Five

formations take reduplication

the

present stem of the third conjugational

class, the perfect

the
one
kind
of
(with
pluperfect),
aorist, the desiderative,
and the intensive. Each of these has certain peculiarities,

which must be treated separately under the

reduplication (130, 135, 149, 170, 173).
the following
:

special rules of

Common

to all are

KEDU PLICATION

1-29-130]

123

General Rules of Reduplication.

The

1.

lirst syllable

ends with a vowel)

of a root
is

(i.e.

that portion of

reduplicated

e. g.

budh

it

which

jyerce'we

bu-budh.
Aspirated letters are represented by the corresponding
e. g. bhi fear
bi-bhi dha put da-dha.
unaspirated
2.

h by
smite
4.

lirst
5.

Gutturals are represented by the corresponding palatals,'^

3.

j
:

e. g.

gam

go

ja-gam

khan

dig

ca-khan

han

ja-ghan.

with more than one consonant, the

only
reduplicated e. g. kram stride ca-kram.
If a root begins with a sibilant followed by a hard
If the root begins
is

consonant, the latter is reduplicated ; e. g. stha stand

ta-stha ; skand leap ca-skand. But svaj embrace sa-svaj

(v is soft)

smi

smile

si-smi

(m

is soft).

whether

final or medial, is long,

shortened in the reduplicative syllable;^ e.g. da give:
da-da radh succeed ra-radh.
6.

If the radical vowel,

it is

Special Rule of Reduplication for the Third Class.

130. r and r are represented in reduplication by i

bhr hear bi-bhar-ti
pr fill pi-par-ti. The root
;

e. g.

vrt turn

the only exception

va-vart(t)-i.

Thirteen roots also reduplicate a with

a.

is

This

(173

is

i,*

while nine do so with

a.

not always the case in the reduplication of intensives

6).

There are some exceptions to this rule in the reduplication of

intensives (173, 3).
^
This rule does not apply to intensives (173), nor for the most
part to the reduplicated aorist (149, 2), and in the reduplicated perfect
"^

it is

subject to

numerous exceptions

(13i), 9).

Three of these, pa drink, stha stand, han slay, have permanently

gone over to the a conjugation, while ghra smell is beginning to do so.
*

CONJUGATION

124

[131

Terminations.
131. The following table gives the terminations, which
are on the whole the same for all verbs, of the present

The

system.

characterized

conjugation.
si,

ti,

&c.),

chief difference

is

in the optative which is

'
i
in the second

and ya and

in the

first,
by
The present indicative has the primary (mi,
and the imperfect, the optative, and (with

some modifications) the imperative have the secondary

terminations (m,
between the two.

s, t, &c.),

while the subjunctive fluctuates

Of the other tenses the future takes the

and
the
pluperfect and the aorist, with the
primary,
benedictive and the conditional, take the secondary terminaperfect has in the active (with many
the
variations)
secondary, and in the middle the primary
tions

while the

endings.

The following

distinctions between the

should be noted.

In the

first

two conjugations

or a conjugation (as in the

is never on the terminations, but

always on the same syllable of the stem (the root in the

a declension) the accent

first

and

fourth, the affix in the sixth class),

which therefore

On

the other hand, in the second

conjugation (as in the declension of changeable stems) the
accent falls on the strong stem, which is reduced in the weak

remains unchanged.

forms by the shifting of the accent to the endings. In the

second conjugation therefore the endings are accented
except in the strong forms (126).

unaugmented imperfect

That

is,

The same

applies to the

(128).

coalescing with the final a of the stem

bhava-i.
2

That

is,

the modal

affix

shows vowel gradation

(5

b).

e. g.

bbav-e

131]

CONJUGATIONAL ENDINGS
Active.

PRESENT.

IMPERFECT.

125

CONJUGATION

126

[131

Middle.
PRESENT.

IMPF.

OPTATIVE.

1.

2.

se

thas

i-thas

3.

te

ta

i-ta

IMPERATI

SUBJUNCTIVE.

iya*
I

a-se, a-sai

sva
tain

a-te, a-tai*'

am
1.

2.

vahe'

vahi^

ethe^(l),

etham (1),
atham (2)
'

athe
3.

ete'(l),

ate
1.

(2)

(2)

mahe'

etam^

(1),

i-vahi

a-vahai

i-y-atham

aithe

etham ^ (1
atham

i-y-atam

aite

etam^ (1)
atam (I

atam (2)
mahi^

i-mahi

a-mahai)

a-mahe
2.

dhve

3.

iite(l),

ate

(2)

dhvam

i-dhvam

nta

i-r-an

(1),

ata

(2)

a-dhvai

dhvam

a-ntaij^

ntam (1)
atam (2)

a-nta^

The

final a of the first conjugation is lengthened before

and v.
This i combines with the final a of the first conjugation to e
bhdve.
^
In these forms e takes the place of the final a of the a conjugation.
*
This modal i combines with the final a of the first conjugation to
'^

bhdveya, &c.
The RV. has a-se only, the AV. and the Brahmanas a-sai only.
"
The form a-te is almost exclusively used in the RV., while a-tai
the prevailing one in the AV., and the only one later.

is

^
^

The ending a-ntai occurs in B. only.

The form in a-nta in the a conjugation, where

it is very common,
bhava-nta, is an injunctive; but in the graded conjugation a
subj., e.g. krnav-a-nta (inj. krnvata).
e. g.

CONJUGATIONAL ENDINGS

132]

127

Paradigms.
132.
well as

Since the three classes of the

all

first

conjugation, as

the secondary verbs the stems of which end in

a,

are inflected exactly alike,' one paradigm will suffice for all
of them. The injunctive is not given here because its forms

Forms

are identical with the

unaugmented imperfect.
which no examples are found in the Samhitas are added

of
in

square brackets.
'

All other conjugational stems ending in

8 futui-e (151), the a (141 a), the sa (147),

aor. are similarly inflected.

a,

the passive (154), the

and the reduplicated (149)

CONJUGATION

128

[132

FIRST CONJUGATION.
First Class

bhu

Present.
Active.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

1.

bhava-mi

bhava-vas

2.

bhava-si
bhava-ti

bhava-thas
bhava-tas

3.

fbhava-masi
(bhava-mas
bhava-tha
bhava-nti

Imperfect.
1.

a-bhava-m

2.

a-bhava-s
a-bhava-t

3.

fa-bhava-va]

a-bhava-ma

a-bhava-tam
a-bhava-tam

a-bhava-ta
a-bhava-n

Imperative.
2.

bhava

bhava-tat)
3.

bhava-tu

bhava-tam

bhava-ta

bhava-tam

bhava-ntu

Subjunctive.
1.

bhava-ni

bhava
2.

3.

bhava-si
bhava-s
bhava-ti
j
(bhava-t

bhava-va

bhava-ma

bhava-thas

bhava-tha

bhava-tas

bhava-n

Optative.
1.

bhav-eyam

2.

bhav-es

bhav-et.

bhav-ema

[bhav-eva]
[

bhav-etam]
bhav-etam

[bhav-eta

Participle,

bhav-ant,

f.

bhav-eyur

-i

he

FIRST CLASS

132]

FIRST CONJUGATION.
Present stem bhav-a.

Middle.
Present.
SINGULAR.

129

180

13-2]

SECOND CLASS

181

CONJUGATION

132

[132

Third Class

bhr

hear

Active.

Present.
SINGULAR.

bibhar-mi

DUAL.
[bibhr-vas]

PLURAL.

jbibhr-masi
bibhr-mas
bibhr-tha
(

2.

3.

bibhr-thas
bibhr-tas

bibhar-si
bibhar-ti

bibhr-ati

Imperfect.

a-bibhar-am

a-bibhr-ma

[a-bibhr-va]

a-bibhar

(28)

a-bibhr-tam

ja-bibhr-ta
(a-bibhr-tana

a-bibhar

(28)

a-bibhr-tam

a-bibhr-an
a-bibhar-ur

Imperative,
2.

jbibhr-hi
Ibibhr-tat

bibhr-tam

bibhar-tu

bibhr-tam

bibhr-ta
bibhr-tana

bibhr-atu

Subjunctive.
1.

2.
8.

bibhar-ani
bibhar-a-s
bibhar-a-t

[bibhar-a-va]
bibhar-a-thas
[bibhar-a-tas]

bibhar-a-ma
[bibhar-a-thaj

bibhar-a-n

Optative.
1.

bibhr-yam

2.

bibhr-ya-s
bibhr-ya-t

8.

[bibhr-ya-va]
[bibhr-ya-tam]

bibhr-ya-tam
Participle,
bibhr-at,

f.

bibhr-at-i

bibhr-ya-ma
[bibhr-ya-ta]
bibhr-yiir

THIRD CLASS

132J

133

Present stem bibhar, bibhr.

Middle.
Present.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

bibhr-e

bibhr-valie

bibhr-mahe

bibhr-se
bibhr-te

bibhr-athe
bibhr-ate

bibhr-dhve
bibhr-ate

Imperfect.
[a-bibhr-i]

a-bibhr-vahi]

[a-bibhr-mahi]

a-bibhr-thas

[a-bibhr-atham]

a-bibhr-ta

[a-bibhr-atamj

[a-bibhr-dhvam]
a-bibhr-ata

Imperative.
bibhr- sva

bibhr-tam

bibhr-dhvara

bibhr-atham

bibhr-atam

[bibhr-atamj
Subjunctive.

rbibhar-ai]

bibhar-a-se
bibhar-a-te

bibhar- a-mahai

bibhar-a-vahai

[bibhar-a-dhve]
bibhar-a-nta

[bibhar-aithe]
[bibhar-aite]

Optative.

bibhr-iya
[bibhr-i-thas]
bibhr-i-ta

bibhr-i-mahi

[bibhr-i-vahij

[bibhr-i-yatham
[bibhr-i-yatam]
Participle.

bibhr-ana,

f.

[bibhr-i-dhvamj
bibhi'-i-ran

CONJUGATION

134

Fifth Class

SINGULAR,
1.

kr-n6-mi

2.

kr-no-si
kr-no-ti

3.

1.

[132

kr make

FIFTH CLASS

13-2]

135

Present stem kr-no, kr-nu.

Middle.

Present.
SINGULAR.

krnv-6
krnu-s6
krnu-t6
ikrnv-6

DUAL.

PLURAL.

krn-mahe

[krn-vahej

krnv-athe
[krnv-ate

krnu-dhv6j
krnv-ate

Imperfect.
[a-krnv-i]

a-kmu-thas
a-krnii-ta

a-krn-mahi
a-krnvi-dhvam
I

a-lirnv-atham]
a-krnv-atam.]
fa-krn-vahij

a-krnv-ata

Imperative.

krnu-sva

krnu-tam

krnu-dhvam

krnv-atham

rkrnv-atam

krnv-atam

Subjunctive.

krnav-ai

krnav-a-vahai

krnav-a-se
krnav-a-te

krnav-aithe
krnav-aite

krnav-a-mahai
[krnav-a-dhve]
krnav-a-nta

Optative.
[krnv-iya]

[krnv-i-vahij

[krnv-i-thas]
krnv-i-ta

[krnv-i-yathamj
[krnv-i-yatam]
Participle.

krnv-ana,

f.

[krnv-i-mahi]
[krnv-i-dhvam]
[krnv-i-ran]

CONJUGATION

KiG

[132

Seventh Class

yuj join

Active.

Present.
SINGULAR.
1.

2.
3.

1.

2.

8.

yu-na-j-mi
yu-na-k-si (63, 67)
yu-na-k-ti (63)

DUAL.

[yunj-vas]
I

yunk-thas]

[yunk-tas]

PLURAL.

yunj-mas
[yunk-tha]
yufij-anti

SEVENTH CLASS

132]

Present stem

137

yu-na-j, yu-n-j.

Middle.

Present.
SINGULAR.

yunj-6

DUAL.

PLURAL.

[yunj-mahe]

[yunj-yahe]
yunj-athe
yuSj-ate

yunk-se
yunk-t6

yung-dhv6
yunj-ate

Imperfect.
a-yunj-i]

a-yunj-vahi]

a-yunk-thas]
a-yunk-ta]

a-yunj-atham]
a-yunj-atam]

[a-yufij-mahi]
[

a-yiing-dhvam]
a-yunj-ata

Imperative.

yunk-sva

(63, 67)

yun-tam

yung-dhvam

yunj-atham

yunj-atam

[yuJQj-atam]

Subjunctive.
[yunaj-ai]
[yunaj-a-se]
yunaj-a-te

[yunaj-a-vahai]
[yunaj-aithe]
[yunaj-aite]

yunaj-a-mahai
[yunaj-a-dhve]
[yunaj-a-nta]

Optative.
fyunj-iya]

[yvinj-i-vahi]

[yiinj-i-mahi]

[yunj-i-thas]
yunj-i-ta

[yunj-i-yatham]
[yunj-i-yatam]

[yunj-i-ran]

Participle.

yunj-ana,

f.

[yunj-i-dhvam]

CONJUGATION

138

Ninth Class

[132

grabh

Active.

Present.
SINGULAR.
1.

2.

3.

,)c(^

DUAL.

PLURAL.

seise

NINTH CLASS

132]

139

Present stem grbh-na, grbh-ni, grbh-n.

Middle.
Present.
SINGULAR.

DUAL.

grbh-n-6

[grbh-ni-vahe]

grbh-ni-se

[grbh-n-athe]

grbh-ni-te

[grbh-n-ate]

PLUEAL.

grbh-ni-mahe
[grbh-ni-dhv6]
grbh-n-ate

Imperfect.
a-grbh-n-i
[a-grbh-ni-thas]
a-grbh-ni-ta

a- grbh- ni- vahi]

a-grbh-ni-mahi
[a-grbh-nx-dh.vam
a-grbh-n-ata

a-grbh-n-atham]
a-grbh-n-atamj
Imperative.

grbh-ni-sva

[grbh-n-atham]

grbh-ni-dhvam

grbh-ni-tam

[grbh-n-atam]

grbh-n-atam

Subjunctive.
I

grbh-n-ai]

grbh-na- vahai

[grbh-na-se]

[grbh-n-aithe]

[grbh-na-te]

[grbh-n-aite]

grbh-na-mahai
grbh-na-dhve]

[grbh-na-nta]

Optative.
[grbh-n-iya]
[grbh-n-ithas]
grbh-n-ita

[grbh-n-i-mahi]
[grbh-n-i-yatham] [grbh-n-i-dhvam]
grbh-n-i-yatam] [grbh-n-i-ran]

[grbh-n-i-vahi]

Participle.

grbh-n-ana,

f.

CONJUGATION

140

[133

Irregularities of the Present Stem.

First Conjugation.

133.

Bhu

A. First or

lengthened in

guh

Class.

and in

hide

The

1.

kram

radical

vowel

is

sfride (in the act. only)

krama-ti (but mid. krama-te) uh consider takes

Guna: 6h-a;- krp lament does not take Guna: krp-a.^
2. gam go, yam restrain, yu separate form their
present
stems with cha (Gk. cr/c)
ga-cha (Gk. /3a-o-/c&)), ya-eha,
gxiha,'

yu-eha.
3.

sad

a.

The four

roots

pa

drinl;

stha stand, sac accompany,

form present stems that originally belonged to the

piba (Lat. hiho) tistha {icrTr]-/xL, Lat.
reduplicating class
sit

sisto);
h.

sasca^

(for sa-s(a)c-a);

sida

(for si-s(a)cl-a

Four stems are transfers from the

fifth

or

Lat

nu

sldo).

class,

being either used beside or having entirely superseded the

simpler original stems i-nv-a-ti (from i send) beside i-no-ti
:

ji-nv-a-ti (from ji quicJcen) beside ji-no-si hi-nv-a-ti (from

hi impel] beside hi-no-ti ; pi-nv-a fatten, doubtless originally
;

pi-nu
4.
5.
s.

2.

3. s.

(-/pi).

dams

and sanj hang

lose their nasal

das-a, saj-a.
tat (besides being regularly used in the
impv. by twelve verbs) is exceptionally used for the
in gaeha-tat and smara-tat. Only one example occurs,
bite

The ending

in this class, of the 2. pi. impv. act. ending tana: bhajaand one of dhva (for dhvam) in the 2. pi, mid. :

tana

yaja-dhva.

^
'^

Instead of taking Guna.

But uh

remove remains

unchanged

(125, 1).

Against 125, 1.
A reminiscence of the reduplicative origin of

of the nasal in tlie 3.

]il.

prcs. sasc-ati

and

3.

\>\.

stem is the loss

mid. sasc-ata.

tliis

Inj.

IREEGULAEITIES OF PRESENT SYSTEM

133-134]

Ya

Fourth or

B.

Class.

The

1.

reduced in seven verbs: spas sec loses

radical

141

syllable

its initial:

is

pas-ya

vyadh pierce takes Samprasarana vidh-ya a is shortened

in dha suck
va weave
dha-ya ma exchange ma-ya
hva
call
va-ya vya envelope vya-ya
hva-ya.
:

Final r sometimes becomes both ir and

2.

ur

jr

waste

away: jur-ya and jir-ya(AV.) tv cross: tilr-ya and tir-ya

pr fill becomes piir-ya only (because of its initial labial).
3. sram lie weary lengthens its vowel
sram-ya in B.
tarn faint and mad he exhilarated do the same
tam-ya,
;

mad-ya.
Sixth Class. 1. The radical vowel is nasalized in
krt cut
krnt-a
trp he pleased
trmp-a

C.

eight verbs

adorn

pis

limp-a

sinc-a.
shine
2.

pims-a

muc

release

munc-a

lip

2)

smear

Iw^hreal:: lump-a Yxdifind: vind-a sic sprinMe

Three other roots, tud thrust, drh malce firm, subh
:

have occasional nasalized forms.

Four roots form their present stem with the

{cp.

is tvish

i-cha

v go: r-cha ;
root vrasc cut,
:

pras ash

suffix

cha
^

pr-eha
which seems to be
:

vas shine u-cha. The

formed with c,' takes Samprasarana vrsc-a.
3. Three roots in r, kr scatter, gr swallow, tr
cross, form
the present stems kir-a, gir-a, tir-a (beside tar-a).
:

a. Beside the normal use of the imperative suffix tat for the
mrdd-tat, visa-tat, vrha-tat, suva-tat, it also appears for the

2. s.

in

3. s.

in

vis^-tat.

134. A. Second or Root Class.

1.

verbs
a.

The root

is

irregularly

strengthened in the following

ksnu

instead of

irhet,

yu

Guna

in

nu and stu praise take Vrddhi

the strong forms before terminations

unite,

^
With Samprasarana and loss
and Old German/ragf-en ask and
'

'^

of

s.

Cp. Lat. prec-or and po{rc)-sco,

'

for-scon {forschen).

Cp. -vras-ka culling, past participle vrk-nft

cut,

and vfk-a

wolf.

CONJUGATION

142

beginning with consonants

a-stav-am.

e, g.

[134

stau-mi, a-stau-t, but

forms marj-mi,
ivipe takes Vrddhi in the strong
but
mrj-mas, mrj-anti.
mars-ti,
si lie mid. takes Guna and accents the radical syllable
c.
2. s6-se
throughout its weak forms e. g. s. 1. 3. say-e,
h.

mrj

{KH-a-ai).

It has the additional irregularity of inserting r

before the endings in the

s6-r-atam, a-se-r-an.

3. pi. pr.,

impv., impf.

s6-r-ate,

a. i go, bru siKak, stu j^raise, han slaij before the ending of the 2. pi.
impv. act. have the alternative forms 6-ta and 6-tana, bravi-tana,st6-ta,
hdn-tana. Bru has the same irregularity in the 2. pi. impf. abravi-ta

and ^bravi-tana.

The root

2.

verbs

vas

a.
1. pi.
h.

is

weakened

irregularly

in the following

desire

weak forms

takes Samprasarana in the

us-masi, part, us-ana, but 1. s. vas-mi.

as be drops its initial a in the optative and

forms of the
pr. s-mas we

pr.

and impv.

e. g.

all

the

weak

opt. s-yat would be

impv. du. 2.
are, s-anti (Lat. sunt) they are
2.
s. impv. preserves the
The
3.
s-antu.
2.
s-ta,
s-tam, pi.
vowel (in an altered form) in e-dhi (for az-dhi, Av. zdi).
In the impf. it inserts i before the endings of the 2. 3. s,
as-t).
as-i-s, as-i-t (beside as
;

weak forms loses its n before terminations

consonants
with
(except m, y, v), as ha-tha, but
beginning
In the 3. pi. pr., impv., impf., and part., the a is
han-ti.
c.

han

slay in

syncopated and h reverts to the original guttural gh:

ghn-anti, ghn-antu, a-ghn-an ghn-ant. The 2. s. impv.
initial instead of
is ja-hi
(for jha-hi), with palatalized
;

gha-hi.

In B. ru

cry,

su

impel,

sku

tear,

rau-ti, sau-ti, skaii-ti, snau-ti.

snu

distil

liave the

same peculiarity

IRREGULARITIES OF THE SECOND STEM

134]

3.

vowel

following verbs

The

a.

roots

or semivowel

is

143

irregularly inserted in the

an

rud

breatJie,

vam

weep,

vomit,

svas blow,

before all terminations beginning with

a consonant, except in the 2. 3. s. impf., where they insert i
e. g. an-i-ti, an-i-t
a-vam-i-t ; svas-i-ti.

svap

insert

sleejJ

The

b.

the

2.

s.

and

pi,

from other roots

snath-i-hi

The

mid.

(2. s.

occur

also
pierce,

add

is rule

id-i-sva

Occasional forms

Isi-dhve.

clothe,

and

roots id praise

in

is-i-se

inipv.)

some forms of
(beside

ik-se),

with connecting

jan-i-sva he born, vas-i-sva

stan-i-hi thunder.
:

bru

inserts i in the strong forms

S2)eaJi
before terminations beginning with consonants: brav-i-mi,
a-brav-i-t
am injure inserts i before consonants thus
c.

root

am-i-ti, am-i-sva, am-i-t (TS.).

4. With regard to the endings

The

a.

root sas order loses the

and

in the 3. pi. act.

mid., and in the part.

sas-ate, sas-atu, sas-at.
b. The root duh niilk is
very anomalous in
:

its

endings.

The

irregular forms are the following: act. impf. 3. s.

a-duh-a-t beside a-dhok, 3. pi. a-duh-ran beside a-duh-an
and duh-iir
opt. 3. s. duh-iyat (for duh-yat), 3. pi.
;

duh-i-yan (for duh-yiir). Mid. pr. ind. 3. pi. duh-r6 and

duh-rate beside the regular duh-at6 ^ impv. 3. s. duh-am,^
3. pi. dnh-ram and duh-ratam
part, dugh-ana.
e. Roots
ending in a take ur instead of an in the 3. pi. impf.
;

Uct.

e.g. ^Bb protect

show the same

a.

The

vei'bs is

observe, brii

7-ule,

A few roots ending in consonants

a-p-ur.

irregularity

duh

milk,

e. g.

vid

tvis be stirred: a-tvis-ur.

,find,

si

lie

frequently, and cit

3. s. pr. mid.
is-e,

speak rarely, take e instead of te^ in the

duh-6, vid-6, iiy-e cit-6, bruv-6.

p. In the AV. and B. subj. forms with a instead of a are
;

common
^

2
^

e. g.

r.ot

y-a-s, fis-a-t,* brd.v-a-thaR, h4n-a-tha, dd-a-n.

But with irregular accent, as also rih-al6 they lick.

In the AV. the 3. s. impv. mid. is similarly formed
This irregularity occurs in B. also.
In B. subj. forms with primary endings are very

in ^ay-am.

rai'e.

un-

CONJUGATION

144

Third or Reduplicating

B.

Roots

[134

Class.

drop the radical vowel before

terminations beginning with vowels
e. g.
ma measure
1.

ending in

1.

s.

a.

mim-e, 3.
The a of

ha

mim-ate.

pi.

ma

measure,

ma

helloir,

ra

give,

sa sharpen,

weak forms usually changed to i before congo away

sonants (cp. 5 c) mimi-te rari-thas ^ sisi-masi jihi-te.
6. da give, dha place, the two commonest verbs in this
class, use dad and dadh as their stems in all weak forms
in

is

dad-mahe, dadh-masi. When the aspiration of dadh is

lost before t, th, s it is thrown back on the initial
dhat-te,
dhat-tha, dhat-sva. The 2. s. impv. act. is de-hi (for
and dhe-hi (for
daz-dhi) beside dad-dhi and dat-tat
:

dhaz-dhi) beside dhat-tat.

The

vyac takes Samprasarana, e. g. 3. du. pr.

hvar he crooked makes some forms with
Samprasarana and then reduplicates with u e.g. ju-hur-thas,
2.

vivik-tas

root

2. s. inj.

mid.

bhas chew, sac accompany, has laugh syncopate the

vowel in weak forms thus ba-ps-ati 3 pi. ind. pr.

3.

radical

(but

ba-bhas-a-t

sa-sc-ata

3.

3. pi. inj.

s.

subj.)

sa-sc-ati

3.

ja-ks-at (for 3a-gh(a)s-at)

pi.

ind.

pr.,

pr. part.

da give, dha put, pr cross, yu separate, sa sharpen, hu

forms with a strong vowel in the 2. impv. act. s.
yu-yo-dhi, si-sa-dhi (beside si-;i-hi); du. yu-yo-tam (beside yu-yut&m); pi. i-y-ar-ta, dd.-da-ta and d^-da-tana, dd,-dha-ta and dd,-dhatana, pi-par-tana, yu-yo-ta and yu-yo-tana, ju-ho-ta and ju-ho-tana,
a-dada, dha, ha leave, have similar strong forms in the 2. pi. impf.
a.

The

sacrifice

roots r

have

go,

sevei-al

da-ta, S-dadha-ta, a-jaha-tana.

p. There are numerous transfers

from this to other classes. The

form such stems according to the
while
a conjugation exclusively, piba, tistha, jfghna (cp. 133 A. 3 a)
ghra smell, bhas cliexo, ma helloiv, ra give, sac accowpany occasionally use
the a stems jighra, b^psa, mima, rd.ra, sdsca. The roots da give and
dha put also make some forms from their weak stems according to the
roots

pa

drink,

stha

stand,

han

stride

'

But

2. s.

imjw.

act.

rara-sva (AV.).

IRREGULARITIES OF PRESENT SYSTEM

1:34]

a conjugation, as

become a
C.

root

Fifth or

before the

3. pi. act,

dd.dh-a-nti,

3. pi.

The former, dad, has even an incipient tendency

impv. d^dh-a-ntu.
to

mid. diid-a-te,

3. s. pr.

145

thus

Nu

it

forms the past part. pass, dat-td

Class.

of the

1.

The u

ind. act.

1. pi.

of the suffix

and

raid., as

given.

is

dropped

krn-mas,

krn-mahe.
2. When nu is preceded by a consonant its u becomes uv
before vowel ^endings
e. g. 3. pi.
pr. as-nuv-anti (but
;

sii-nv-anti).
3. sru hear forms (by dissimilation) the stem sr-nu, and
vr cover (with interchange of vowel and semivowel) iir-nu

beside the regular vr-nu,

4. Beside the regular and very frequent present stem
kr-nu (from kr maA'e) there begins to appear in the tenth
Mandala of the RV. the very anomalous kuru.^ The strong
form of this stem, karo, which has the fui-ther anomaly of
Gruna in the root, first aj^pears in the AV.^
^

man

a. The four roots ending in n, tan stretch,

think, van win, san
gain, have the appearance of forming their stem with the suffix u, as
tan-vi.
These (with three later roots) form a separate (eighth) class

But the a of these present

according to the Hindu grammarians.
stems in reality probably represents the sonant nasal, = tn-nu. This
group was joined by kur-u, the late and anomalous present stem of
kr make (cp. C 4).
j8. Five stems of this class, i-nu, r-nu, ji-nu, pi-nu, hi-nu, have
come to be used frequently as secondaiy roots forming present stems
according to the a conjugation inv-a, rnv-a, jfnv-a, pfnv-a, hinv-a.
7. In the 3. pi. pr. mid. six verbs of this class take the ending re*
with connecting vowel i
iiav-i-r^, rnv-i-r6, pinv-i-re, srnv-i-r,
:

sunv-i-r6, hinv-i-r6.

After the preposition pari around this stem prefixes an unoriginal

pari-s-krnv-dnti theij adorn.
2
Twice in the 2. s. impv. kuru and once in the 1. pi. pr. ind.

kur-mas.
'

the
*

But the forms made from krnu are still six times as common in
as those from karo, kuru, which are the only stems used in B.
Like duh-re in the root class.

AV.
181U

CONJUGATION

146

[m-i35

5. In the impv. the 2. s. act, has the ending hi, as srnvi-M, three
times as often in the RV. as the form without ending, as iSrnu in the
AV. it occui-s only about one-sixth as often as the latter in B. it has
almost disappeared. In the RV. the ending dhl also occurs in ^rnudhl. The ending tat occurs in krnu-tat, hinu-tat, kuru-tat. In the
;

du. are found the strong forms krno-tam, hino-tam and in the 2. pi.
krno-ta and krn6-tana, iSrn6-ta and srn6-tana, sun6-ta and suno-tana,
hin6-ta and hino-tana tan6-ti and kar6-ta.
2.

D. Infixing Nasal Class.

1.

anj anoint, bhanj

hreal',

drop their nasal before inserting na

a-nd-k-ti, bha-na-k-ti, hi-na-s-ti.
trh crush infixes n6 in the strong forms
2.

hims

injure

tr-n6-dhi (69
E.

as

e. g.

c).

Ninth or

ju hasten, pii

Na

Class.

jnirifi/

1.

The

three roots ji overpower,

shorten their vowel before the

affix

form grab take Samprasarana

ji-na-mi, ju-na-si, pu-na-ti.

2.

grabh

seize

and

its later

grbh-na-mi, grh-na-mi (AV.).

3. jna know and the four roots which in forms outside
the present system appear with a nasal, bandh hind, manth
nasal
shake, skambh make firm, stambh prop, drop their
:

ja-na-ti, badh-na-ti, math-na-ti, skabh-na-ti, stabh-na-ti.

4. Four roots ending in consonants, as eat, grab seize,
bandh hind, st&mhh prop, liave the peculiar ending ana in
the 2. s. impv. act. as-ana, grh-ana, badh-ana, stabh-ana.
:

o. pr fill
make, beside the regular stems prna and
mrna, the transfer stems, according to the a conjugation, prnfi
and mrnd, from which several forms occur.

and

mr

crush

The Perfect Tense.

135.

Tliis tense is

present,

it

has,

formed by reduplication. Like the

an indicative, the subjunctive,

besides

and imperative moods, as well as

an
and
augmented form, the pluperfect. It is
participles,
common,
])eing formed by nearly 300 verbs in the
very
injunctive,

Samhitas.

optative,

PEKFECT

TPTE

in5-i36]

147

Special Rules of Reduplication.

r

1.

and

{=

139, 9);

(cp.

obtain

= i-i

and

Initial

2.

ap

kr

e.g.

adapted: ca-klp

and

ar)

v go: ar

or

(=

al)

ca-kr

do:

(=

u-ii)

l)ecomes

move

is

e. g.

a-ar).

The long vowels

ap.

always reduplicate with a

tr cross: ta-tr
kip he

an

breathe

an

and u remain unchanged

1

e. g.

is-6

s.

uh

consider

3. s. iih-6.
3.

Roots beginning with

u+u

to

syllable is

and u contract

+i

to i

and

except in the sing, act., where the reduplicative

separated from the strong radical syllable by its

own semivowel

e. g.

po

2.

s.

i-y-6-tha

ue

be pleased

mid. uc-i-s6, but 8. s. act, u-v-6c-a.

4. Roots containing ya or va and liable to Samprasarana
in other forms (such as the past part, pass.) reduplicate
2. s.

and u

There are four such with ya

tyaj forsaJce, yaj sacrifice, vyac extend, syand move on
and five with va vac ^
ti-tyaj, i-yaj, vi-vyac, si-syand
with

respectively'.

speak,

vad

spealc,

vap

streio,

vah

carri/,

u-vad, u-vap, u-vah, su-svap.

three roots

yam

reduplication
va-vas.

stretch,

ya

or

van

On

n-i)i,

sleep:

irear

have the

u-vac,
the other hand the

vas

va throughout

svap

full

ya-yam, va-van,

136. The singular perfect active is strong (like the sing.

the remaining
pr. and impf. act.), the root being accented
forms are weak, the terminations being accented. The
;

endings are the following

Middle.

Active.
SING.
1.

DUAL

PLUR.

SIKG.

DUAL

PLUR.

CONJUGATION

148

Terminations beginning with

a.

[13G

consonants are as

initial

mahe is invariably so
a rule added directly to the stem
The endings tha, ma, se, re are nearly always
added.
added direct to stems ending in vowels thus from da r/ive
;

dada-tha
jvess

conquer: ji-g6-tha

ji

susu-ma

hu

call

juhii-r6

nin6-tha

ni lead:

su

kr malr cakar-tha,
The same endings tha,
:

cakr-ma, cakr-s6, but eakr-i-r^/

ma, se, re are added directly to I'oots ending in consonants,
if the final syllable of the stem is prosodically short, but
with connecting i^ if it is long * e. g. tatan-tha jagan-ma,
vivit-s6
jagrbh-ma, yuyuj-ma
ca-klp-r6, tatas-re,
yuyuj-r6, vivid-r6 but uv6c-i-tha, uc-i-ma, papt-i-ma
;

ij-i-r6.

Before terminations beginning with vowels (cp. 137, 1 a)

1 preceded by one consonant become y if preceded by

h.
1

more than

one, iy

e, g.

bhi fear

bibhy-atur

sri resort

sisriy-6.

u ordinarily become uv e. g. yu join yuyuv-6 sru

susruv-6 su sicell susuv-6/
e. g. kr mahr
3. r becomes r, r becomes ir
cakr-6,
cakr-a tr cross titir-iir str strew tistir-6.
2.

hear

The Strong Stem.

Short vowels followed by a single consonant take Guna
di-d6s-a
e. g. dis 2^oi7it
throughout the singular active
1.

no

he iront

uv-6c-a

krt cut

ca-kart-a

but jinv qukliev

ji-jinv-athur.
Roots in r always add re with connecting i.
The final radical vowel a in weak forms is reduced to i, e.g. from
dha puf, dadhi-dhve. This reduced vowel in the very common verbs
da and dha was probably the starting-point for the use of i as a con1

necting vowel in other verbs.

^
This is due to the rhythmic rule that the stem may not have two
prosodically short voAvels in .successive syllables. Cp. p. 155, note 2.
*

"Bwi

h.\i call

juhv-6

bhu

6e

babhuv-a;

six

bring forth: sa-suv-a.

THE STEONG STEM

136-137]

Final vowels take Vixldhi in the

2.

149

3. s.

'
;

e. g.

ui lead

ni-nay-a sru hear su-srav-a kr make ca-kar-a.

3. Medial a followed by a single consonant takes Vrddhi
:

in the 3.

'

s.

e. g.

han

strike

ja-ghan-a, but taks fashion

Eoots ending in a take the anomalous ending au in

and 3. s. act.
e. g. dha put
da-dhau. The only

4.

the

1.

exception is the root pra fill, which once forms the

pa-pra beside the regular pa-prau.

3. s.

The Weak Stem.

In roots containing the vowels i, u, r the radical
remains
unchanged except by Sandhi e. g. yuj
syllable
join
yu-yuj-ma vid find vi-vid-6 kr ?nake ca-kr-ma.
137.

1.

a. Before terminations beginning with vowels, i and r, if

preceded by one consonant become y and r, if by more than
one, iy and ar while u and r regularly become uv and ir
;

e. g. ji

conquer

ji-gy-iir

bhi fear

bi-bhy-ur

kr make

sri resort
yu join yu-yuv-e sru
si-sriy-6
tr cross: ti-tir-ur
hear: su-sruv-6; su sivell: su-suv-6
str strew : ti-stir-6.

cakr-ur

2.

In roots containing a medial a or

is weakened.
About a dozen

final

a the radical

syllable

in which a is preceded and

consonant
(e. g.
pat) and which
by
single
consonant
the
initial
unchanged (this excludes
reduplicate
roots beginning with aspirates, gutturals, and for the most
part v) contract the two syllables to one containing the
a.

followed

diphthong e

roots

(cp. Lat. fac-io, fec-i).^

They

are the following:

The 1. slug, never takes Vrddhi in the RV. and AV. In an

Upanisad and a Sutra eakara occurs as 1. sing, and in a Sutra jigaya
'

(Vji) also.
-

This vowel spread from contracted forms like sa-zd (Av. ha.:d) weak
sit (az becoming e
cp. 134, 2 b and 133 A 1).

perfect stem of sad

CONJUGATION

150
tap

dabh harm, nam

heut,

stretch,

sap

yam'

'

pac couk, pat flj, yat

rabh r/msp, labh ^a/rc, sak fee tt^^t',
Examples are pat pet-atur sak

extend,

sap

curse,

[137

seri'g.

bend,

sek-iir.

The two
AV.

and

roots tan stretch

i>,2LG

follow join this class in

the

Four roots with medial a but

khan dig: ca-khn

h.

their vowel:

initial guttural,
;

gam

yo:

syncopate

ja-gm

ghas

ja-ks ; ban smite ja-ghn.

Six other roots, though conforming to the conditions

eat

described above (2

jan

beget:

man
a.

a),

syncopate the a instead of contracting

stretch: ta-tn
pan admire: pa-pn

ja-jn; tan

think:

ma-mn; van

va-vn

ivin:

sac folloic: sa-sc.

pat fly both contracts and syncopates in the RV.

pet and pa-pt.

c. Eight roots containing the syllables ya, va, ra take

"
Samprasarana yaj sacrifice, vac and vad s^jeak, vap stretv,
vas chvell, vah carry, svap sleej^), grabh and grab seise;
In the first six, as they
e. g. sii-sup, ja-grbh and ja-grh.
is
a contraction to i and u.
i
result
the
or u,
reduplicate with
uc
vac
Thus yaj ij (= i-ij)
(= u-uc).
d. A few roots with medial a and penultimate nasal, drop
tarns shake: ta-tas
the latter: krand cry out: ca-krad
:

sk.ambh. prop
c.

ca-skabh (AV.)

stambh ^rqp:

ta-stabh.

Boots ending in a reduce it to i before consonants

dha place dadhi-ma
e. g.
it before vowels

and drop
dadh-ur.

In the wk. perfect of yat and yam the contraction is based on the
combination of the full reduplicative syllable and the radical syllable
with Samprasarana yet = ya-it, yem = ya-im.
^
From yaj occurs one form according to the contracting class (2 o)
'

yej-e.

PARADIGMtt OF THE PERFECT

i;JSj

151

Paradigms of the Reduplicated Perfect.

138.

1.

tud

strike

strong stem tu-tod

weak tu-tud.

Active,
singulak.
1.
>

dual.
[tu-tud-va]

tu-tud-athur
tu-tud-atur

plural.

tii-tud-ma
tu-tud-a
tii-tud-ur

CONJUGATION

152
4,

ni lead

strong stem ni-n6, ni-nai

[138

weak

ni-ni.

Active,
singular.
1.

dual.

plural.

138-13!)]

PARADIGMS OF THE PEKFECT

gam go

7.

strong stem ja-gam, ja-gam

158

weak ja-gm.

Active,

dual.

singulak.
1.

ja-gam-a

[ja-gan-va]

2.

ja-gan-tha

3.

ja-gama

ja-gm-athur
ja-gm-atur

plural.

ja-gan-ma
ja-gm-a
ja-gm-ur

Middle.
1.

ja-gm-6

2.

ja-gm-i-se

o.

ja-gm-6
8.

vac

speali

[ja-gan-vahe]

ja-gan-mahe

ja-gm-athe
ja-gm-ate

ia-gm.-i-dhv6
ja-gm-i-r6

strong stem u-vac, u-vac

Active.
1.

3.

weak

uc.

CONJUGATION

154

[139

vid know ionns au unreduplicated perfect with present

meaning 1. v6d.-a / know {oiSa, German weiss), 2. vet-tha
o.

{oJ<T-9a

weiss-t), 3.

vid- a,

wissen), 2.

v6d-a

[oiSe

weiss)

pi. 1.

vid-ma

[iS-fxev;

3. vid-iir.

few isolated unreduplicated foi'ms from about six other roots

taks-Sthur; skambh-dthur and skambh-ur cet-atur; yamatur and yam-ur nind-i-ma arli-i-re.
a,

oucur

4. The initial of ci gather, ci observe, cit perceive, ji conquer,

han kill reverts to the original guttural in the radical syllable

bhr bear
ci-kay-a, ci-k6t-a, ji-gay-a, ja-ghan-a.
almost invariably reduplicates with j in the RV. ja-bhar-tha,
3. s. act.

ja-bhara, ja-bhr-ur; ja-bhr-6, ja-bhr-i-s6, ja-bhr-i-r6

but only once with b ba-bhr-6.

5.

and

all

say

is

defective,

The two

ali-ur.

forming only the

additional forms

3. s.

2. s.

and

pi.

at-tha,

ah-a
du.

3.

ah-atiir occur in the Brahmanas.

Five roots beginning with a prosodically long a reduplicate with an: Q.vas attain, anj anoint, ardh thrive, arc
6.

praise,

arh

Only the

deserve.

first

two make several forms.

Here the radical nasal is repeated with the initial vowel

s. 3. an-ams-a (Gk. ^V-ey/c-a)
pi. 1. an-as-ma, 2. an-as-a,

3.

an-as-ur

mid.

s.

3.

an-as-e

mid.

s.

3.

an-afija, mid.

s.

1.

The analogy spread from these

to

an-aj-6, pi. 3. an-aj-r6.

the roots which have no nasal

an-rh-vir

'
;

s.

3.

pi. 3. an-rc-ur, an-rdh-ur,

an-rdh-6.
an-rc-6,
:

bhu

be has the double irregularity of reduplicating

with a and retaining its u throughout (cp. Gk. 7re-(f>v-a,<Ti)
2. ba-bhu-tha and
sing. 1. ba-bhu-v-a (Gk. 7ri-(f>v-Ka).
Du. 2. ba-bhu-v-athur.
ba-bhu-v-i-tha. 3. ba-bhu-v-a.
2. ba-bhu-v-a.
PI. 1. ba-bhu-v-i-ma.
3. ba-bhii-v-atur.
7.

3.

ba-bhu-v-ur.

In a Sutra occurs the

2. pi.

mid. an-as-a-dhve.

lEREGULAEITIES OF THE PERFECT

I3y-i40j

su briny forth lias the same peculiarities

the only perfect form of this root occurring.
8.

cyu

'

155

in sa-su-v-a,

reduplicates ci-cyu (beside cu-cyu) and dyut

This was due to the vocalic

stir

shim similarly di-dyut.

pronunciation of the y
9.

The

ciu, diut.

reduplicative vowel

thirty perfect stems

e. g.

kan

is

ja-gr; kip he adapted: ca-klp

strong: tu-tu;

su

lengthened in more than

ca-kan gr tvake
dhi thinJc: di-dhi tu be

be pleased
;

su-su.-'

sicell:

the Mantra portion of the Samhitas there once occurs a periphrastic perfect form with the reduplicated perfect of kr make governing the ace. of a fern, substantive in a derived from a secondary
Ill

a.

This form is gamayani cakara (AV.) he

(causative) verbal stem.
caused to go (lit. wutrfe a causing to go).
In the Brahmana parts of the
later iSamhitas (TS., MS., K.) such i:)eriphrastic forms are occasionally

met with, and they become more frequent

Moods
140. Modal forms

of the Perfect.

of the perfect are of rare occurrence in

the Sainhitas except the

1.

in the regular Brahnianas.

The subjunctive

RV.
is

normally foimed by adding a

to

the strong perfect stem accented on the radical syllable.

In the active the secondary endings are the more usual ;
when the primary endings are used the reduplicative syllable
is in several forms accented.^
In about a dozen forms the

weak stem

The

is

root si

used.

lie

Middle forms, of which only seven or

also redujjlicates w^ith a in the part, sa-say-anfi.

si, are the only roots with an i or u vowel that

These three, bhvi, sii,

reduplicate with a.
^

Here the radical vowel

itself is shortened. The quantitative form

subject to the rule that it may not contain two prosodiHence sah reduplicates
cally short vowels (except in the 1. s. act.).
either as sa-sah or sa-sah (in a weak form).

of the stem

is

Cp. the accentuation of the reduplicating class in the

system.

2'i'eseiit

CONJUGATION

156

[m

eight occur, are almost restricted to the

are

3. sing.

Examples

Act.

1.

s.

an-aj-a

'

bu-bodh-a-s (biidh
a-si (jus enjou)

2.

ta-tan-a-s (tan

pi-pray-a-s

{-pvi jilease)

ci-kit-a-s (cit observe),

stretch),

ju-jos-

mu-muc-a-s (muc

ci-ket-a-t, ja-ghan-a-t (han smite), ta-tan-a-t,

3.

release).

anoint)

(afij

ivake),

tu-stav-a-t

di-des-a-ti (dis
(v/stu x^raise), pi-pray-a-t
bu-bodh-a-ti, mu-moc-a-ti mu-muc-a-t, vi-vid-a-t

point),

(vid find).

Du.
2.

2.

ei-ket-a-thas, ju-jos-a-thas.
3. ta-tan-a-n.

PI.

1.

ta-tan-a-ma.

ju-jos-a-tha.

Mid.

8.

s.

ta-tap-a-te,

PI.

ju-jos-a-te.

1.

an-as-a-

mahai.'

The injunctive

2.

occui's in hardly a

dozen forms, a few

in the sing, act., the rest in the 3. pl. mid.

(=sa-sas-s: sas
mid.

{sv\ifl,ow);

pl. 3.

e.g.

s.

2.

sa-sas

dii-dho-t (dhu s7<aA;e), su-sro-t

ta-tan-a-nta (cp. 140, 6).

on/er).

3.

The optative is formed by adding the accented modal

suffix combined with the endings to the weak perfect stem.
The active forms are much commoner than the middle.
3.

Examples are
Act.

1.

s.

2.

vrt-yam.

an-as-yam/ ja-gam-yam, ri-ric-yam, vaba-bhu-yas, va-vrt-yas.

3.

an-aj-yat,' ja~

gam-yat, va-vrt-yat, ba-bhu-yat.

Du. 2. ja-gam-yatam. Pl, 1. va-vrt-ya-ma.
yiii',

Mid.
Pl.
a.

1.

3.

ja-gam-

va-vrt-yur.
s. 1. va-vrt-iya.
va-vrt-i-mahi.

2.

va-vrdh-i-thas.

Tliere also occurs one mid. precative

3.

va-vrt-i-ta.

form sa-sah-i-s-thas (sah

overcome).

In these three forms the a of the reduplicative syllable an is

if the indicative contained an augment.
Identical in form with the unaugmented plujierfect (140, 6).
From ams attain, with the long reduplicative vowel retained.

shortened as
2

'

Cp. 139,

6.

PEEFECT OPTATIVE

140]

4.

The impei'ative

perfect

is

formed like that of the

the radical syllable being

present reduplicating
except in the 3. s. act., where
class,

157

it is

strong.

forms occurring, which number about twenty, are

Examples
Act.

s.

are

weak

all

Nearly

the

active.

ci-kid-dhi (v^cit), di-did-dhi (/dis), mu3.

ba-bhu-tu,=
(Vmuc), sa-sa-dhi (\/sas).^

2.

mug-dhi
mu-mok-tu.
Du. 2. mu-muk-tam, va-vrk-tam

(vrj

PI.

twist).

2.

di-dis-tana (\/dis), va-vrt-tana.

Mid. s. 2. va-vrt-sva. PI. 2. va-vrd-dhvam.

Participle.
5.

are

Both active and middle forms of the perfect participle

common. It is formed from the weak perfect stem,

with the accent on the

If,

suffix,

in the active form, the stem

is

as cakr-vams, cakr-ana.

reduced to a monosyllable,

nearly always added with the connecting vowel i,

but not when the stem is unreduplicated e. g. papt-i-vams
Examples are
(Gk. TreTTT-co?), but vid-vams (Crk. elS-cos).
the suffix

is

Act. ja-gan-vams

ja-grbh-vams

(Vgrabh),
ji-gi-vams ( v/ji), ju-ju-vams'^ (a^Ju), ta-sthi-vams (V'stlia),
ba-bhu-vams (Gk. Tre-cpv-co^). ri-rik-vams (Vric), va-vrt(\/gam),

vams, va-vrdh-vams,^ sa-sah-vams,^su-sup-vams / svap)

iy-i-vams (Vi), us-i-vams (vas dwell); das-vams (das
ivorship), sah-vams (v^sah).
Mid. an-aj-ana v^afij), an-as-ana V'aras), ij-ana Vyaj),
(

uc-ana(v'vac), ja-gm-ana(\/gam), ti-stir-ana(v'str), tepana (^tap), pa-spas-ana (Vspas), bhej-ana (\/bhaj),

1
"

2. pi. Kt-KXv-re {k\v = sru hem-).

With u unchanged as in strong forms elsewhere
With long reduplicative vowol.

Cp. Gk. Ki-K\v-0i,

(139, 7).

CONJUGATION

158

[i40-ui

yem-ana (^^yam), va-vrdh-ana, sa-say-ana

(a/si), si-sriy-

ana (-/sri), si-smly-ana (-/smi), su-sup-ana (\^svap),

seh-ana (\/sah).
Pluperfect.

Corresponduig to the imperfect there is an augmented

form of the perfect called the pluijerfect. The strong stem
6.

used in the singular active, the weak elsewhere. The

secondary endings only are used in the 3. pi. ur always
^
The s and t
appears in the active and iran in tlie middle.
of the 2. and 3. s. are in some forms preserved by an
is

interposed

There are

i.

The

in other past tenses.

forms made with

several

also

The augment

thematic a in this tense.

total

is

often dropped, as

nimiber of pluperfect forms

occurring is about sixty.

Examples are
Act. s. 1. a-cacaks-am, a-jagrabh-am,
:

a-tustav-am;
cakar-am, eiket-am (\/cit). 2. a-jagan (= a-jagam-s)
na-nam-a-s; a-vives-i-s(\/vis). 3. a-jagan ( = a-jagam-t),
a-ciket (\/cit)
ra-ran {= raran-t
ran rejoice)
a-jagrabh-i-t a-cikit-a-t and a-ciket-a-t tastambh-a-t.
Du. 2. a-mu-muk-tam
mu-muk-tam. 3. a-vavas-i-

tam

(vas desire).

PI. 2. a-jagan-ta

Mid.

1.

s.

a-cucyav-i-tana.

a-susrav-i.

3.

3.

didis-ta (Vdis).

a-cucyav-ur.
PI. 3. a-eakr-

iran, a-jagm-iran, a-pec-iran; a-vavrt-ran, a-sasrg-ram

There are also several transfer forms as from
(A/srj).'-

a stems

e. g.

a-titvis-a-nta, cakrp-a-nta, da-dhrs-a-nta.

Aorist.

141. This tense

is

of very

common

occurrence in the

Vedas, being formed from more that 450

1

Two forms

take ran only instead of iran.

roots.

There are

It is

a]>;o

an

several

transfer forms in anta.

2

ram

Witli reversion of the palatal to original guttural, and ending

for ran.

AOETST

141]

159

augmented tense, taking the secondaiy endings and formingmoods and participles. It is distinguished from the imperfect
by having no corresponding present and by difference of
meaning. There are two types of aorist. The first or
is formed by inserting s, with or without an
It is taken by
the root and the endings.
between
added a,
more than 200 roots. The second aorist adds the endings
to the simple or the reduplicated root either directly or with

sigmatic aorist

It is taken by over 250 roots.

the connecting vowel a.
There are four forms of the first Aorist, and three of the
second.
Upwards of 50 roots take more than one form.
One verb, budh ^valie, has forms from five varieties of this

tense.

First Aorist.
a.

The stem

augmented

of the first

form

root the suffix sa.

is

made by adding

It is inflected like

to the

an imperfect

of the sixth or a class of the first conjugation, the sa being

accented in unaugmented forms. It is taken in the Samhitas
by only ten roots containing one of the vowels 1, u, r, and
'

ending in one of the consonants

phonetically become k before
krus
yaj sacrifice, vrj tivist

j, s, s,

or h,

all of

which

These roots are mrj nnjie,

cry oid, mrs and sprs touch
dvis hate guh hide, duh milk, ruh ascend. In the indicative
no dual forms are found and in the mid. only the 3. s. and
s."

',

are

pi.

met

with.

The only moods occurring

are

the

injunctive and the imperative, with altogether fewer than

a dozen forms. This form of the aorist corresponds to the

Greek First Aorist

(e.g. '4-Sei^e,

as in other past tenses,

is

Lat. dixi-t).

The augment,

sometimes dropped.

In B. nine additional roots take the sa aorist krs drag, dia point,
dih mnear, drs see, druh he hostile, pis crush, mih viingere, vis enter, vrh
tear
and in S. lih lick.
2
The stem of this aorist therefore always ends in ksa.
'

CONJUGATION

160

[141-143

2. adruksas (B.),
aduksat
and adhukakruksat, aghuksat,
PI.
1. amrksaamrksat
sat,
(v^mrs), aruksat, asprksat.
ma (v^mrj), aruksama. 3. adhuksan dtiksan^ and
dhuksan.
Mid. s. 3. adhuksata duksata and dhuksata. PI. 3.
amrksanta (\/mrj).

Act.

Indicative.

adhuksas.

1.

s.

avrksain.

3.

'

In the injunctive only the following forms occur

Act. s. 2. duksas,^ mrksas (v^mrs). 3. dviksat.

PI. 2.

mrksata (-/mrs).
Mid. s. 8. duksata' and dhuksata, dviksata.
dhuksanta.
In the imperative only three forms occur
Act. du.

Mid.

2.
2.

s.

mrksatam

3.

(\/m.rj).

to

respectively.

yaksatam.

dhuksasva.

142. The other three forms of the

by adding

PI. 3.

First Aorist are

the augmented root the suffixes

They

are

inflected

second or graded conjugation.

The

s,

made

is,

s-is

imperfects of the
sis form is used in the

like

only (excepting three optative forms) and is taken by

not more than six roots. The other two are very common,
being formed from nearly 300 roots in V. and B. taken
act.

together.

Second or

148. This form of the aorist

In addition
roots in V. and B.
a
and
the
moods
all
participle.

form.
is

taken

l^y

least

at

to the indicative

135

it

forms

(a

being

Indicative.
1.

The

radical

vowel as a rule takes Vrddhi

lengthened) in the active. In the middle, excepting final i

and u (which take Guna) the radical vowel remains un'

On

these forms without initial aspiration ep. 02

a.

FIRST AORIST

143]

161

The only point in which the inflexion differs

the imperfect of the graded conjugation is that
that
of
from
In the active, the
the 3. pi. act. invariably ends in iir.
changed.

s and t of the 2. 3. s. disappear and the tense sign

unless
the root ends in a vowel e. g. a-har
a-har-s-t,
also,

endings

but a-ha-s

a-ha-s-t.

The AV. and

TS., however, less

often than not, insert a connecting i before these endings,^
thus preserving both the latter and the s of the tense stem
;

e.g. a-naik-s-i-t (nij wasli).

actually occurring would,

active,

if

The forms of the indicative

made from bhr hear in the

and from budh walx in the middle, be as follows

Active.

1.

2.
3.

PLURAL.

DUAL.

SINGULAR.

a-bhar-s-am
a-bhar
a-bhar

a-bhars-ma

[a-bhars-va]

a-bhars-tam
a-bhars-tam

a-bhars-ta
a-bhar-s-ur

Middle.
DUAL.

SINGULAR.
1.

a-bhut-s-i (62

2.

d-bud-dhas (62 h)
a-bud-dha (62 h)

3.

The middle
stu

'praise, is

Sing.
o

1.

plural.

a-bhut-s-mahi

[a-bhut-s-vahij

a)

a-bhud-dhvam

a-bhut-s-atham
a-bhut-s-atam

voice, as exemplified

inflected as follows

a-sto-s-i.

2.

[a-sto-s-vahi].
PI. 1. a-sto-s-mahi.

2.

by a root ending

3.

a-sto-s-ta.

[a-sto-s-atham].
2.

in

ti,

Du.

1.

a-sto-s-thas.

(62 a)

a-bhut-s-ata

a-sto-dhvam (66

a-sto-s-atam.

3.

Zj).

3.

a-sto-

s-ata.

1
The KV. and K. have no forms with the inserted i while in B.
the chief forms without it are adrak (drs see) and ay at (yaj sacrifice)
also bhais (Vbhi) = bhais-s, which while losing the s ending preserves the appearance of a 2. sing.
;

1819

CONJUGATION

162

The subjunctive

2.

common

is

Guna throughout
would be

PL

sto-s-ani.

Du.

sto-s-a-t.

Mid.
Du.

1.

st6-s-a-ma.

1.

2.

occurring, if

in active

root regularly takes

The primary endings

made from stu praise,

Act. sing.
s-a-ti,

and middle).

(active

The forms

KV/

in the

The

forms, but not in the middle.

are frequent.

[i43

1.

sing.

sto-s-athe

2.

sto-s-a-thas.

sto-s-a-tha.
2.

sto-s-ai.

3.

st6-s-a-tas.

sto-s-a-n.

3.

sto-s-a-se.

(for sto-s-aithe).

st6-

3.

sto-s-a-si, sto-s-a-s.

2.
2.

PI.

3.

3.

sto-s-a-te.

sto-s-a-nte,

Injunctive forms are fairly common. When normal

of course identical with the unaugmented indicative.
are
they
But the sing. 1. act. is irregular in never taking Vrddhi
3.

the forms of

all

je-s-am (Vji)

(yu separate)
ye-s-am (ya

The

latter

that occur either have Guna, as sto-s-am,

or lengthen the radical vowel, as yu-s-am

it

or substitute e for a in roots ending in a, as

go),

ge-s-am (ga

ge-s-ma, de-s-ma (da

(yu

also

irregularity

give),

go),

sthe-s-am (stha

stand).

je-s-ma,
appears in pi. 1
beside the normal yau-s-ma
:

separate).

in the middle only, the 2. 3.

The optative occurs

4.

s.

The

always having the precative s (with one exception).

forms actually occurring are.:
Sing. 1. di-s-iya" (da ciii), bhak-s-iya (bhaj divide),

ma-s-iya' (man
{vdigive),

s-i-s-thas=
ita
1

tlnnli),

muk-s-iya (muc

sak-s-iya* (AV.), str-s-iya

(man

tlmik).

dar-s-i-s-ta (dr

3.

mrk-s-i-s-ta
(SV.), mam-s-i-s-ta,

ra-s-iya

release),

(str streiv).

(mrc

2.

tear),

injure).

mam-

bhak-sDu. 2.

in B. except yaks-a-t (-/yaj)

Subjunctives of this aor. are very rare

and vaks-a-t (-/vah).

2

With

radical a reduced to

cp. 5

c.

Similarly dhi-s-iya

inB.
s
*
s
c

With an reduced to a (= sonant nasal).

From sah overcome, with radical vowel lengthened,
Anusvara for n (66 A 2).
Without the precative s.

(Vdha)

MOODS OF THE

U3-144]

AORTST

163

protect). PI. 1. bhak-s-i-mahi, mam-s-iand va-s-i-mahi (van win), sak-s-ivam-s-i-mahi

mahi,mahi (sac folloiv), dhuk-s-i-mahi (duh milJi). 3. mam-

tra-s-i-tham^ (tra

'

s-ii'ata.
5.

Only

six

imperative forms occur, and four of these are

transfers (with thematic

are

They

a).

Act.

Mid.

2.

s.

and par-s-a (pr take across).

Du. 2. ra-s-atham.
ra-s-a-tam.
3.
(Vsah).
ra-s-a-ntam.

(ni lead)

s.

2.

ne-s-a

sak-sva
PI.

3.

Only two or three forms of the active participle

occur dak-s-at^ and dhak-s-at (dah hum), sak-s-at (-/sah).
6.

a dozen stems, irregularly formed by adding s to

the root with an intermediate a and taking the regular

About

may

ending ana,
e. g.

be accounted middle

mand-a-s-ana

rejoicing,

Irregularities of the

144.

Before the suffix

1.

s aorist participles

yam-a-s-ana

form.

final radical

s, (a)

being driven.

(as

well

m) becomes Anusvara (66 A 2), as a-mam-s-ata ('/man),

vam-s-i-mahi (Vvan) (&) s becomes t in the verb vas
a-vat-s-i-s ^ (AV.) thou
divell and possibly also in vas shine
hast dtvelt and a- vat (= a-vas-s-t) has shone (AV.).
2. The KV. has one example of an incipient tendency to

as

in 2. s. a-ya-s (=a-yaj-s-s)
preserve the s and t of the 2. 3. s.
beside the phonetically regular form of the 3. s. a-yat
The AV. has three or four examples of this
a-yaj-s-t).

(=

2.

s.

1
'^

sra-s (=sraj-s-s:

Vsvj);

For tra-s-iyatham.
With Anusvara for n (66 A 2).
With an reduced to a (= sonant

Without

See 66

aor. suffix s

initial aspiration

cp.

3.

a-srai-t

(=

a-srai-s-t

nasal).

62 a and 156

a.

In an Upanisad the 2. du. appears as d,-vas-tam, the

having been lost without affecting the radical s.
1.

CONJUGATION

164

[144
'

(= a-hai-s-t v^hi); a-va-t (= a-vas-s-t

vas sJdne). The later Samliitas here frequently preserve
these endings by inserting i before them s. 2. a-rat-s-i-s
-/sri); a-hai-t

a-tam-s-i-t (v'tan),
(v^radh), a-vat-s-x-s (vas dtvell);
a-naik-s-i-t (\/nij), tap-s-i-t (Vtap), bhai-s-i-t (\/bhi),
vak-s-i-t (-/vah), ha-s-i-t, hvar-s-i-t (v^hvar).
3.

a. The ending dhvam (before which the s of the aor. is lost) becomes
dhvam when the s would have been cerebralized (66 B 2) d-stodhvam = a-sto-z-dhvam) is the only example.
:

The

3.

to

roots

da

give

and da

in a-di-s-i, di-s-iya

cut reduce the radical

gam, man, van

vowel

lose their nasal in

a-ga-smalii, ma-s-iya, va-s-i-mahi (beside vam-s-i-mahi)

while sah lengthens its vowel in a-sak-s-i, sak-s-i sak-s-

ama

sak-s-iya

The

4.

act.:

2. sra-s

s.

sak-sva.

roots srj emit

(=

and pre mix take metathesis in the

Du. 2.
3. a-srak
a-prak.

srak).

a-sras-tam.
5.

are the forms occurring in the 3. s. ind.

the ending t is lost a-jai-s ( V}i), a-pra-s,
both the tense-sign s and the ending t are lost :^

The following

act. in

a-ha-s

which
(h)

(a)

a-kran (krand crij out), a-ksar (ksar flow), a-cait (cit

a-tan (tan stretch), a-tsar
Xjerceive), a-chan (chand seem),
a-dyaut (dyut shine), a-dhak (dah
hum), a-prak (pre mix), a-prat (prach asTi), a-bhar (bhr),
a-yat (yaj sacrifice), a-yan (yam guide), a-raut (rudh

(tsar approach stealthily),

obstruct),

a-vat (vah

couve//),

a-vat^ (vas shine), a-svait (svit

he hright), a-syan (syand move on), a-srak (srj emit), a-svar

(svar sound), a-har (hr tahe), a-raik (rie leave).
6. After a consonant other than n, m, r the tense sign s
e. g. a-bhak-ta (beside
is dropped before t, th, and dh
;

a-bhak-s-i)

a-muk-thas

(beside a-muk-s-i).

in this instance represent the changed final radical

There are a few additional examples in B.
ajait
nait (\/ni).
(beside ajais and ajaisit Vji) acait (^ci);
2
And even the final consonant of the root when there are two (28).
1

But the

144,

may

(b).

AOKIST

IS

145]

Third or

165

form.

is

145. About 145 roots take this aorist in V. and B. It

from the s aorist merely in adding the s with the
connecting vowel i, which changes it to s (67).
differs

Indicative.
1.

The

vowel as a rule takes Guna throughout

final vowel takes Vrddhi and a medial

radical

but in the active a

vowel

is

same
end in is
(= is-t). This aorist has all the moods, but
Middle forms are not common and very few

The endings

sometimes lengthened.

as those of the s aorist except that

and

(=

is-s)

no

participle.

it

occur except in the

are the

2. 3. s.

2. 3. sing.

The normal forms

would be

the

occurring,

if

made from kram

stride,

Act. sing. 1. a-kram-is-am. 2. a-kram-is.

3. a-kram-is-tam.
PI. 1. a-kram-is-ma,

Du.

3.

a-kram-it.
3.

a-kram-

is-ur.

Mid.
is-ta.

sing. 1. a-kram-is-i.

Du.

2.

a-kram-is-thas.

a-kram-is-atam.

3.

PI. 3.

2. Subjunctive forms
Examples are

3.

a-kram-

a-kram-is-ata.

are rare except in the

2. 3. s. act.

Act. sing.

dav-is-ani.

1.

is-a-t, bodh-is-a-t.

Mid.

pi. 1.

2.

av-is-a-s, kan-is-a-s.

3.

kar-

PI. 3. san-is-a-n.

yac-is-a-malie.

3.

san-is-a-nta.

Injunctive are commoner than subjunctive forms.

They occur most frequently in the 2. 3. s. and plur.
3.

Examples

are

Act. sing.

1.

2. av-is (av
sams-is-am (sams praise).
(yudh fight), sav-is (su
Du. 2. taris-tam, mardh-

favour), tar-is (tr cross), yodh-is

generate). 3. as-it (as eat), tai'-it.

is-tam (mrdh neglect). Pi. 1. sram-is-ma. 2. vadh-is-ta

and vadh-is-tana. 3. jai'-is-ur (jr waste away).
Mid. sing. 1. radh-is-i (radh succeed). 2. mars-is-thas

CONJUGATION

166

(mra not

3.

heed).

mahi (vyath

pav-is-ta (pu j;Mr(/2/),

The

2. 3.

s.

1.

Sing.

rare, occurring in the

take the precative

Examples

s.

2.

edh-is-ija, {edh tJmve).

Du.

3. jan-is-i-s-ta.

rejoice).

PL

1.

vyath-is-

waver).

Optative forms are

4.

[Ii5-146

1.

middle only.

are

mod-is-i-s-thas

(mud

PI. tar-is-

sah-is-i-vahi.

i-mahi.

Imperative forms are

5.

av-id-dhi.

2.

Sing.
is-tam.

PL

The

a.

2.

occurring in the active only.

Du. 2. av-is-tam. 3. av-

av-is-tana.
medial a

I'adical

rare,

av-is-tu.

3.

lengthened in kan

is

enjoy,

car move, das

stan fhnnder, svan sound, and optionally in vad

speak, ran rejoice, san gain, sah prevail ; while the radical syllable
appears in a reduced or unstrengthened form in the opt. s. 1. mid. of
gam and rue shine gm-is-iya and ruc-is-iyd.
6. The root grabh seize takes the connecting vowel i (as it does in
waste,

mad

exhilarafc,

other verbal forms) instead of i, as d,-grabh-is-ma.

c. In s. 1. ind. act. the ending im appears instead of is-am in the
three forms a-kram-im, d,-grabh-im, and vadh-im, doubtless owing to
the analogy of the 2. 3. s. in is, it. In B. is also found a-grah-ais-am
(-/grab).

Fourth or
differs

prefixing an additional
a,

form.

from the preceding one simply in

Only seven verbs
n, or m, ga slug, jna Inow,^ pya Jill up, ya go,

146. This form

ending in

sis

s to the suffix.

ha leave, van ^oin, ram rejoice, take this aorist. The total
number of forms occurring is under twenty and middle
forms are found in the optative only. The forms occurring
;

are

1.

Indicative.

PL

tam.
2.

va

2.

a-ya-sis-ta.

Subjunctive.

Sing.

In B. also occurs dhya

Uoio,

hva

1.

Sing.

call.

a-ya-sis-am.

Du.

3.

a-ya-sis-

3.

a-ga-sis-ur, a-ya-sis-ur.

3.

ga-sis-a-t, ya-sis-a-t.

ildnk,

besides forms in s-it from dra

sleep,

3.

PI.

FOEM OF THE FIKST AORIST

SIS

116-147]

Optative.
1.

1.

Sing.

2.

vam-sis-iya.

167

ya-sis-i-s-thas,^

pya-sis-i-mahi.

Injunctive. Sing. 1. ram-sis-am. Du. 2. ha-sis-tam.

ha-sis-tam.
PI. 2, ha-sis-ta.
3. ha-sis-ur.

4.
3.

5.

Du.

Imperative.

2.

PI. 2. ya-sis-ta."

ya-sis-tam.

Seeond Aorist.

(^ '<z^'^-^y

147. This aorist resembles an imperfect formed directly

from the root, the terminations being added with or without
the connecting vowel a.
The first form is like an imperfect of the accented a class
(125, 2), the stem being formed by adding a to the unmodified root."
first

It

corresponds to the second aorist of the

Greek. It is taken, in V. and B.

in

conjugation

by nearly eighty
Middle forms are rai'e.

together,

roots, chiefly

with a medial vowel.

1. Indicative.
The forms actually occurring would,
made from vid find, be as follows

if

Act. sing.
avidava.

Mid.

sing.

avidavahi.
2.

1.

PI.

1.

1.

avidam.
avidama.

avide.

2.

avidetam.

avidas.

2.

3.

avidata.

2.

avidathas.

3.

avidat.
3.

Du.

1.

avidan.

avidata.

Du.

1.

avidamahi. 3. avidanta.
The subjunctive forms from the same root would be
3.

PI.

Act. sing. 2. vidasi, vidas.

3. vidati, vidat.
vidava. 2. vidathas. 3. vidatas. PI. 1. vidama.

Du.
2.

1.

vid-

atha, vidathana.

Mid.
3.

sing. 3. vidate.

Act. sing.

Mid.
4.

^
2

'

PI.

1.

vidamahe.

The injunctive forms from vid would be

1.

vidam.

sing. 3. vidata.

The optative

With
With

2.

precative
i

for

is

vidas.

PI. 1.

3.

vidamahi.

PI. 3. vidan.

vidat.
3.

vidanta.

rare in V., but not infrequent in B.

s.

i.

Three roots witJi r, however, show forms with Guna (147 o 2 and

c).

CONJUGATION

168

The forms from vid

almost restricted to the active.

It is

would be
Act.

[W-US

PI. 1.
2. vid6s.
3. vid6t.
1. videyam.
vid6ma.
Mid. sing. 1. vid6ya. PI. 1. vid6mahi. There also occurs
one precative form, s. 3. vid^sta (AV.).
5. Imperative forms are rare and almost restricted to the
Those made by sad sit are
active.
2.
sada. 3, sadatu. Du. 2. sadatam. 3. sadatam.
Sing.
sing.

sadatana.

PI. 2. sadata,

sadantu.

3.

sadadhvam. 3. sadantam.
6. Eather more than a dozen examples of the participle,
e. g. trp-ant,
taking active and middle together, occur
sucant; guhamana, sucamana.
Mid.

pl. 2.

Irregularities.
Several roots form transfer stems according to this instead of the
root form, chiefly by reducing the radical syllable.
a.

1.

khya

vya

see,

hva ccdl shorten their a to a a-khya-t,

dha put, stha stand occasionally do the same,
:

envelope,

d-vya-t, d-hva-t da
in tlie forms a-da-t

order shortens a to

(jive,

a-dha-t (SV.) and dha-t

a-stha-t (AV.)

sas

sisat, part, sisant.

e. g. 3. s. inj.

2. kr make and gam go form a few transfers from the root class in
the AV., retaining the strong radical vowel ^-kar-a-t, a-gam-a-t,
5-gam-a-n.
b. Tlie root is reduced by the loss of its nasal in krand cry out, tarns
:

shake, d h vams scai^er,

3.

sing, dtasat

pl.

bhrams /aZi, randh

dhvasdn subj. ]A.
;

radham 2. kradas 3. bhrasat.

c. The root takes Guna in r go, drs
mented 3. pl. ind. mid.); ddrs-am (s.
drs6yam,

1.

swft/eci,

.srains /aZZ

radhama

inj.

e.g.

sing.

1.

1. s.

wia&e

pl.

drs^ma)

sdrat

see,

st flow

1. inj.,

but

(unaugmented

Second Form

e.g.

dr-anta (unaugdrs^n, opt.

pl. 3. inj.
3. s.).

Root Aorist.

of the simple aorist is taken by about

100 roots in V., and about 25 others in B., the commonest
being those with medial a (about 30). It corresponds to

148. This form

KOOT AORIST

148]

169

the second aorist of the second conjugation in Greek.

inflected in both active and middle.

It is

Indicative.
1. Tlie root is
strong in the sing, act., but weak elsewhere.
Roots ending in vowels, however, tend to retain the strong
vowel throughout the active except the 3. pi. Those en ding-

in a regularly retain that vowel throughout the ind. act.

except in 3. pi. where it is dropped before ur, which is

always the ending in these verbs. In the 3. pi. mid. the

ending ran is more than twice as common as ata ram as
well as ran is taken by three roots.
;

a. The forms occurring from roots ending in a, if made

from stha, would be
Act. sing. 1. a-stha-m i^i-a-T-q-v). 2. a-stha-s. 3. a-stha-t
(e-o-TT;). Du. 2. a-stha-tam. 3. a-stha-tam. PI. 1. a-stha-ma
:

(i-arrj- fxiiv).

Mid.

2.

a-stha-ta.

3.

a-sth-ur.

sing. 2. a-sthi-thas {k-ard-Or^s).

a-sthi-mahi.

3.

a-sthi-ta.

3.

PI. 1.

a-sthi-ran.

Roots in r take Guna throughout the ind. act. except

The forms from kr would be
Act. sing. 1. a-kar-am.
2. a-kar.
Du. 2.
3. a-kar.
h.

the

3. pi.

a-kai'-tam.
3.

3.

a-kar-tam.

PI.

1.

a-kar-ma.

2.

a-kar-ta.

a-kr-an.

Mid.

sing.

a-kr-vahi.

dhvam.
c.

3.

bhu

1.

3.

a-kr-i.

2.

a-kr-tam.

a-kr-thas.
PI.

1.

Du.

a-kr-ta.

3.

a-kr-mahi.

2.

1.

a-kr-

a-kr-ata.

throughout (as in the

and a following a

he retains its ii

interposing v between

it

perfect),

a-bhuv-am.^ 2. a-bhu-s.
3.
a-bhii-t (e-^u).
a-bhu-tam.
3.
a-bhu-tam.
PI. 1. a-bhu-ma
2. a-bhii-ta and a-bhu-tana.
3. a-bhii-v-an.
(e-^y-ziei/).
d. The following are forms of the 2. 3. s. act. in which
Act.

Du.

1.

2,

With

split

in the later language a-bhuv-aui.

CONJUGATION

170

[us

the endings s and t are lost: 2. a-kar, a-gan (= a-gam-s),

a-ghas, a-var (vr cover), a-spar (spr tvin) with lengthened
augment: a-nat' (nas attain), a-var (vr cover), a-vas^ (vas
;

3. a-kar, a-kran' (kram

stride), a-gan,' a-ghas,
a-cet (cit observe), a-tan, a-dar (dr pierce), a-bhet (bhid

shine).

pierce),

a-bhrat (bhraj

(myaks

shine),

a-mok (muc

a-myak

release),

be situated), a-vart (vrt ^wm), a-star;

augment: a-nat,* a-var (vr

augment

vark

cove)-),

(vrj twist),

with lengthened
a- vas- (vas shine) without
;

skan ^ (skand

Icaj)).

e. In the 3.
pi. act. and mid. roots with medial a are
syncopated: a-ks-an (=a-ghas-an), a-gm-au (=a-gam-an);
a-gm-ata (= a-gam-ata), a-tn-ata := a-tan-ata) but in
the 2. 3. s. mid. they lose their nasal a-ga-thas, a-ga-ta,
(

a-ma-ta (but

Final a

also

to

in the mid. ind. reduced to

e. g.

PL

(e-^e-To).

du. gan-vahi, pi. a-gan-mahi).

1.

is

1.

2.

a-di-thas,

a-dhi-mahi

i,

and before

a-sthi-thas.

3.

and a-di-mahi

(TS.)

a-dhi-ta
(VS.),

a-dhi-mahi.
g.

In the

3, s.

ind.

ghas

reduced to g gdha (=:ghas-ta) ';

ar-ta (unaugmented) and ar-ta

is

while r go takes Guna:

(wp-To), 3. pi. ar-ata.

/*.
The forms taking ran in 3. pi. mid. are a-krp-ran,
a-grbh-ran, a-jus-ran, a-drs-ran, a-pad-ran, a-budh-ran,
a-yuj-ran, a-vas-ran (vas shine), a- vis-ran, a-vrt-ran,
:

a-srg-ran,* a-sthi-ran, a-sprdh-ran

with

ram

a-drs-ram,

a-budh-ram, a-srg-ram.*
^
For a-nas-s, the phonetic result of which should have been
a-nak (63 6).
"
For a-vas-s, a-vas-t. These forms have by an oversight been
omitted in 499 of my Vedic Grammar.
'
For d-kram-t, -gam-t.
*
'
^
For a-nas-t.
For skand-t.
For varj-t.
By syncopation gh-s-ta loss of s between consonants (66 B 2 a)
gh-ta, and loss of aspiration, which is thrown forward on the t and
renders it sonant (62 b).
''

With

reversion to the original guttural.

MOODS OF THE KOOT AORIST

14S]

171

2. The subjunctive is common, nearly 100 forms being

met with. The forms occurring, if made from kr, would be
Act. sing. 1. kara and kar-ani. 2. kar-a-si and kar-a-s.
:

kar-a-ti and kar-a-t.^

o.

Du.

2.

kar-a-thas.

3. kar-anti, kar-a-n.
1. kar-a-ma.
Mid. sing. 2. kar-a-se. 3. kar-a-te,^
and kar-a-mahai. 3. kar-anta.

kar-a-tas.

3.

PI.

PI.

kar-a-mahe

1.

The injunctive is fairly frequent, nearly sixty forms of

being met with. Examples are
Act. sing. 1. kar-am, dars-am,^ bhuv-am, bhoj-am.
2. je-s, bhu-s, bhe-s (bhi /car), dhak^ (dagh reach), bhet
(bhid split), rok (ruj break). 3. bhu-t, sre-t (Vsri), nak
3.

it

and nat (nas attain). PI. 1. dagh-ma, bhu-ma ched-ma/

ho-ma ^ (hu call). 3. bhuv-an, vr-an (vr cover) kram-ur,
dur (da give), dh-iir (dha put).
Mid. sing. 1. nams-i (nams = nas attain). 2. nut-tlias
(nud push), mr-thas (mr die), mrs-thas (mrs neglect), rik;

thas

ar-ta

(r go),

as-ta (as attain), vik-ta

1. dhi-mahl {dhQ,put).
Morethanforty optative forms are met with. Examples

4.

are

3.

(ric leave).

(vij tremble),

vr-ta (vr

choose).

PI.

Act. sing.
give).

2.

1.

as-yam

as-yas,

bhu-yat^ (AV.). PI.

bhu-yama, sthe-yama.
Mid. sing. 1. as-iya.

3.

(as obtain),

vrj-yam, de-yam (da

rdh-yas, gam-yas, jne-yas, bhii-yas.

1.

as-yama, rdh-yama, kri-yama,

as-yiir (as attain), dhe-yur.

3.
3.

ar-I-ta [v

^
^

PI.

go).

idh-i-mahi (idh Mndle), nas-i-mahi (nas

5
s

as-i-mahi,

reach).

The root is weak in the isolated forms fdh-a-t, bhiiv-a-t, sriiv-a-t.

The weak root appears once in the form idh-a-t^. The weak root
form rdh-athe.
This may, however, be an irregular a aorist cp. 147 c.
For dagh-s.
With strong radical vowel.
The RV. has no forms of the 3. s. in yat, but only precatives in

also appears once in the 2. du.

'

1.

yas (= yas-t).

CONJUGATION

172

[us

a. There are also about

thirty precative forms (made from
about twenty roots in the Samhitas), all of which
except two

are active.

Examples are

Act. sing. 1. bhu-yasam. 8. as-yas {=.

as-yas-t), gamyas,
Du. 2.
dagh-yas, pe-yas (pa dnnli\ bhu-yas.

bhu-yastam. PI. 1. kri-yasma. 2. bhu-yasta.

Mid. s. 3. pad-i-s-ta, muc-i-s-ta.
5. Over ninety forms of the
imperative occur,

all but
about twelve being active. Several forms in the 2. persons
act. have a
strong root, which is then usually accented.

Examples
Act.

are:
2.

kr-dhi, ga-dhi (gam), pur-dhi {^'i fill), bo-dhi,'

yo-dhi" {jndh fight), sag-dhi (sak he able) ga-hi (gam go),
ma-hi (ma measure), sa-hi (sa hind). 3. gan-tu (gam go),
dha-tu, bhu-tu, sro-tu.
Du. 2. kr-tam and kar-tam (AV.), ga-tam and gan-tam,
da-tam, dhak-tam (dagh reach), bhu-tam, var-tam (vr
cover), vo-lham (vah carr//), sru-tam. 3. gan-tam, pa-tam,
vo-lham. PI. 2. kr-ta and kar-ta, ga-ta and gan-ta, bhii-ta,
yan-ta, sru-ta and sro-ta kar-tana, gan-tana, dha-tana,
bhu-tana. 3. gam-antu, dhantu, sruv-antu.
Mid. s. 2. kr-sva, dhi-sva (dha put), yuk-sva (yuj join)
s.

accented on the root

mat-sva, yak-sva (yaj sacrifice), ra-sva,

sak-sva (sac follow). PI. 2. kr-dhvam,

vam-sva (van ivin),

vo-dhvam.
6. Of the participle
only seven

or eight examples occur

in the active, but nearly forty in the middle.
Examples are
:

Act. rdh-ant, kr-ant, gm-ant, sthant.

Mid. ar-ana, idh-ana, kr-aiia, drs-ana and drs-ana,
budh-ana, bhiy-ana, vr-ana (vr cover), subh-ana and
sum-bhana, suv-ana (always to be pronounced svana) and

sv-ana

(SV.).

Formed from both bhu be (for bhu-dhi) and budh awake

bod-dhi instead of bud-dhi).
"
For yud-dhi (through yod-dhi).
1

(for

EEDUPLICATED FORM

14ft]

173

Third or Reduplicated Form.

149. This

formed from nearly ninety verbs in

more in the Brahmanas.
a
unconnected in form
few
exceptions)
Though (with
slight
with the causative, it has come to be connected with the
aorist is

the Samhitas and from nearly thirty

causative in sense, having a causative meaning when the

corresponding verb in aya has that meaning. The characteristic feature of this aorist is

the almost invariable quantitative

sequence of a long reduplicative and a short radical vowel

(- w). In order to bring about this rhythm, the reduplicative

vowel (unless it becomes long by position) is lengthened, if

With
the radical vowel is (or is made) prosodically short.

view the radical vowel is shortened in vas hello/v, sadh

succeed, hid he JiostUe and, by dropping the nasal, in krand

this

cry out,

jambh

The stem

crush,

randh

subject,

syand
forms

of the great majority of

srams fall.
made with a

flow,
is

But about a dozen roots ending in vowels

and
svap sleep make occasional forms from stems
u, r)
(a,
without thematic a, the inflexion then being like that of an
thematic

a.

i,

imperfect of the reduj^licating class (127,

2).

medial

vowel remains unchanged or is weakened, but a final

vowel takes Guna. All the moods occur, but no participle.
radical

Special Rules of Reduplication.

a.

The vowels
by
The vowel

syllable
Tj.

a, f, 1 are represented in

the reduplicative

i.

of the reduplicative syllable, unless already

long by position, is lengthened.

1. The forms of the indicative
actually occurring would,
if made from jan heget, be as follows
:

Act.

s.

1.

ajijanatam.

Mid.

s.

3.

ajijanam.
PI. 1,

2.

ajijanas.

ajijanama.

ajijanata.

Pi. 2.

2.

o.

ajijanat.
3.

ajijanata.

ajijanadhvam.

3.

Du.

2.

ajijanan.

ajijananta.

CONJUGATION

174

[149

The following are examples

s. 1. aninasam
(nas he lost), acikrsam (krs drag),
2.
apiplavam (B.), apiparam (pr pass).
aei-krad-as,
abubhuvas sisvapas without thematic a a-jigar (gr
:

Act.

and gr waken) sisvap. 3. aciklpat, acucyavat (K.),

ajihidat (Vhid), adidyutat, abubudhat, avivasat (Vvas),

stvallow

avi-vrdhat, asisyadat( %/syand); bibhayat, sisnathat (snath

without thematic a: a-sisre-t (\/sri), a-sisnat.

pierce);

avivasan (\/vas), asisrasan (Vsrams), asisadan

abibhajur (B.).
( -/sad)
Mid. s. 3. avivarata (vr cover). PI. 2. avivrdhadhvam.
3. abibhayanta, avivasanta
(\^vas), asisyadanta.
PI.

3.

2.

The subjunctive

occurring, all active

Act.

s.

1.

rare,

raradha.

2.

PI.

Examples are
Act.

s. 1.

pisprsas,

active,

are

Examples
3.

titapasi.
1,

Injunctive forms are

occurring in the

only about a dozen forms

except one.

sisadhati (Vsadh).
3.

is

eiklpati, pisprsati,^

riramama, sisadhama.
fairly common, more than
but only

five

the

in

fifty

middle.

eukrudham, didharam(dhr/?o/(;).
sisadhas.

riradhas,

mimayat (ma

heUoiv),

2.

ciksipas,

3.

cucyavat, didharat,
sisvadat (svad sweeten).

Du. 2. jihvaratam. PI. 2. riradhata.

3. riraman,
susucan (sue shine). 3. sisapanta (sap serve).
4. The optative forms number hardly a dozen,
being
made from only three roots, mostly from vac speaJc, the rest
from cyu
Act.

s.

stir
1.

and

ris hurt.

voc6yam.

They

are

2. ririses, voc6s.

3.

voc6t.

Du. 2. voc^tam. PI. 1. voc6ma. 3. voceyur.

Mid. s. 1. voc6ya. PI. 1. cucyuv-i-mahi, voc^mahi.
^

3.

There

cucyav-i-rata.^

form

is also

the

riris-i-s-ta.

'

Without thematic

a.

3.

s.

mid. precative

MOODS OF THE REDUPLICATED AORIST

149-150]
5.

Hai'dly

them

of

2.

2.

jigrtam

(gr ivakcn),

didhrtam,^ vocatam. PI.

susiidata

paptata, vocata,
pupurantu (pr fill), sisrathantu.
didhrta,

jigr-ta,^
3.

occur, all

These are
vocatat. 3. vocatu.

active.

Sing.

Du.

more than a dozen imperative forms

175

2.

(AV.).

Irregularities.
a.

am

that of

while

*
reduplicative syllable of dyut shine has i
^
am-am-at ( =
injure repeats the whole root

The

1.

it

fi-didyutat

is left

and in

didhrtfi (beside d,-didharat),

didipas (dip

d-am-am-at)
short in jigrtam, jigrt& (beside d-jigar), didhrt^m,
:

the isolated

inj.

didipas for

shine).

2. The radical syllable suffers contraction or syncopation (as in the

weak forms of the perfect) in the three verbs nas be lost, vac speak, and
cp.
pat fall; thus a-nes-at (= 6-nanas-at), a-voc-at (= ^-va-uc-at
Gk. i-un-o-v) and d-papt-at. Having all had the reduplicative vowel
:

of the perfect (while the regular aorist reduplicative i appears in

the alternative forms d-ninas-at and d,-pipat-at), they were probably
But they have come to be aorists as is shown
in origin.

pluperfects
by their meaning

and by the occurrence of modal forms (as vocatu,

and paptata).
3, The initial of the suffix is retained from the causative stems

&c.,

jna-paya, stha-paya, ha-paya, bhi-saya, ar-paya, ja-paya (Vji)The radical vowel is reduced to i in the first four, while the reduplicative vowel comes after instead of before the radical vowel in the
fifth

athas

thus d,-ji-jmp-at fi-ti-sthip-at ji-hip-as

arp-ip-am*; i-ji-jap-a-ta^ (VS.).
;

bi-bhis-as, bi-bhia-

Benedictive or Precative.

150. This is a form of the optative which adds an s

modal suffix and which is made almost exclusively
from aorist stems. In the RV. it occurs in the 1. 3. s, and

after the

3
*

Without thematic
Cp.

its

a.

perfect reduplication

139, 8.

with a + nasal (139, 6).

Cp. the perfect reduplication of roots
Here the p of the suffix is not only retained, but reduplicated.

The causative

from which this aor. is formed, would

In B. also occurs the form d-ji-jip-ata.

of ji conquer

normally have been jay-aya.

CONJUGATION

176
1. pi. active,

and in the

with the modal

Act.

s.

Mid.

s.

1.

2.

i-s-thas.

ya-s {= yas-s)

pi. 1.

ya-s-ma.

3. i-s-ta.

perfect precative occurring is the 2.

The only

a.

3,

ya-s-am.

The endings together

mid.

2. 3. s.

suffix are

[150-151

mid.

s.

sa-sah-i-s-thas.

Of the root

h.

aorist nearly thirty precatives are

in the Samhitas.
1.

2.

pi.

mid.

They
3.

occur in the act.

(see 148, 4

s.

a).

3.

1.

The a

met with
2.

s.,

aorist

du.,

and the

in the 3. s.
reduplicated aor. have one precative form each
four
s
aorist
In
the
4
and 149, 4).
mid. (147,
precative

forms occur in the

and

2.

3. s.

mid. (see 143,

4).

Simple Future.
formed by adding the suffix sya or
frequently with connecting i) i-sya to the root.

151. The stem

(rather less

is

often expressed by the subjunctive

the
indicative, the future tense is not
and sometimes
by
EV.
the
in
common
being formed from only sixteen roots,

As

the future sense

is

also

it from about thirty-two others, and

from over sixty roots. In V. and B. taken
the future in sya and over
together over one hundred form
derivative verbs that form
The
in
that
isya.
only
eighty
the future (always with isya) are causatives, of which four

AV. makes

while the

the TS. forms

it

stems appear, two in the EV. and two in the AV. Eoots
those ending in other
ending in r always take isya, whereas
vowels generally take sya.
vowels take
a. Final vowels and prosodically short medial
e. g.
Guna, final a and medial a remaining unchanged
da
lead: ne-sya
give: da-sya
ji conquer: je-sya
mih sJied ivater mek-sya yuj join yok-sya krt cut
;

bhu
isya.

he

dah hum
bhav-isya

kart-sya

dhak-sya
sr

^flotv

bandh

sar-isya

hind
;

bhant-sya

vrt turn

vart-

SIMPLE FUTURE

151-152]

177

Causatives, which always take isya, retain the present stem,

final a ; thus dharay-isyS (dhr support); vasay-iayfi

a.

dropping only the

(vas wear)

first

would be
Act.

s.

Du.

cover).

conjugation

The forms met

only.

sing.

varay-isyfi (vr

inflexion of the future is like that of the present of

(bhavami). Middle forms occur in the

The

b.

the

dus-ay-isyd, (dus spoil)

with,

if

made from kr

do,

1.

2.

kar-isyami.

3.

3.

kar-isyasi.

kar-isyati.

PI.

1. kar-isyakar-isyathas.
3.
2.
-masi.
kar-isyanti.
kar-isyatha.
mas,
Mid. s. 1. kar-isy6. 2. kar-isyase. 3. kar-isyate.

2.

kar-isyatas.

1. Only one subjunctive, the 2. s, act. kar-isyas, has

been met with in V., and one other, 1. du. mid., not-syavahai (nud imsli) in B.
2. More than twenty participles occur, of which only four

are mid.

Examples are

Act. kar-isy-ant, dhak-sy-ant (-/dah)

mana

mid. yak-sya-

(Vyaj), stavisya-mana (-/stu).

Irregularities.

c.

In su

vowel, which
is

stem is formed with unchanged final

moreover accented su-sya while the medial a of sah

bring forth the future

lengthened

is
:

sak-syd.

152. There

is

Periphrastic Future.
no certain example of

yajnapatir vo atra

this

But such a phrase

future in the Samhitas.

(TS.,

VS.)

as

form of the

anv-aganta

the sacrifice)' is folloiving after

may be an example

of its incipient use.^

In B. this future is taken by nearly thirty roots. It is made by
using the N. s. of an agent noun in tr (ISO), to which the present of
the verb as be is added in the 1. 2. persons, while in the 3. persons du.

you here

and

pi.

the N. du. and pi. appear.

The use

of this tense-form is

1 The forerunners in V. of this new tense-formation in B. are the

agent nouns in tr which, generally accented on the root, are used
partieipially governing an ace. and may be employed predicatively
with or without the copula e. g. data yo v^nita magh^m (iii. 13') who
gives and wins bounty.
;

1819

CONJUGATION

178

[152-154

almost limited to the active, only a few isolated examples being

found in the middle. Forms occurring, if made from bhii be, would
3. bhavita.
3.
1)6: Act. sing. 1. bhavitasmi
PI. 1. bhavitasmas
bhavitaras. Mid. sing. 1. 2. bhavitase. PI. 1. bhavitasmahe.
;

Conditional.

153. This

is a past tense of the future meaning would

Only one example occurs in the Samhitas a-bharThis form is
isya-t (RV. ii. 30") was going io hear off.
very rare in B. also, except in the SB. where it is found
more than fifty times.

have.

Passive.

154. The

passive,

which takes the terminations of the

middle, differs from the latter only in the forms made from
From the middle of
the present stem and in the 3. s. aor.

verbs of the fourth class

hinds

it

differs in accent

only

nah-ya-te

hound.

nah-ya-te
The stem is formed by adding accented ya to the
is

which appears
1.

Final

e. g.

jna Icnow

e. g.

ri

Final r becomes ir

da

give

di-ya

but

it

jna-ya.

and u are lengthened

sru hear: sru-ya-te.

3. Final r becomes
4.

root,

weak form.

Final a mostly becomes

also remains
2.

in its

e.g. ji conquer: ji-ya-te

e. g.

kr

malce

kri-ya-te.^

e. g.

sr crush

sir-ya-te.^

5. Roots ending in a consonant preceded by a nasal, lose

the nasal; e.g. anj anoint: aj-ya-te; bandh hind: badhya-te bhaiij hreaJc bhaj-ya-te vane move croohedly vac:

ya-te

sams praise

sas-ya-te.

1
The only two roots in which r is preceded by two consonants and
which form a passive are str sfretv and smr rememher. Their passives do
not occur in the Sainhitas, but in B are found stri-ya-te and smar-yd-te.

2
The passive oi-pfflll does not occur in the Samhitas, but in B.
pur-ya-te (the f being preceded by a labial).

it is

PASSIVE

154-155]

179

Boots liable to Samprasarana (17 note 1) take it e. g.

vad si^eaJc ud-ya-te vah carry
vac spcalc
uc-ya-te
6.

uh-ya-te

grab

seize

grh-ya-te.

Derivative verbs in aya (causatives) drop the suffix while retainhas been noted in
ing the strong radical vowel. Only one such stem
the Samhitfis bhaj-ya-te is caused to share (from bhaj-dya causative of
a.

bhaj

share).

The forms of the present indicative

made from hu. call, would be
a.

if

passive occurring,

1.

Sing.

PL

As

forms

(s.

the

Du.

3.

3.

1.

regards the

su-ya-ta
in

hii-ya-te.

hu-ya-nte.
hu-ya-mahe.
moods only two certain subjunctive
uh-ya-te, bhri-ya-te) and one injunctive (s. 3.

hu-y6-te.
h.

o.

hu-ya-se.

2.

hu-y6.

3.
:

su hring

No

forth) occur.

RV. or AV.^

There

are,

imperative forms occurring in the

optative forms occur

however, nearly thirty

These forms,

2. 3. s. pi.

by hu call, are s. 2. hu-ya-sva. 3, hu-ya-tam.

hu-ya-dhvam. 3. hu-ya-ntam.
c.
Of the participle over forty examples occur e. g. huya-mana being called. Of the imperfect only about eight
forms have been noted, occurring only in the 3. s. and pi.
illustrated

PI, 2.

a-hu-ya-ta and a-hu-yanta.

Irregularities.
(7.

tan

stretch

forms

its

passive from ta

ta-yd.-te'^.

Similarly jan

which, however, in foi-m belongs to the

mri-ya-te dies (Vmr) and dhri-y-te
radically accented fourth class,
in form, are intransitive in sense.
while
is
passive
steadfast,
(v^dhr)
beget

becomes ja-ya-te

is

born,

Aorist Passive.

155.

Outside the present system the passive has no

form except in the 3. sing. aor. This is a

special finite

peculiar middle
^

form (made from about

forty-five roots in

But they are met with in the Brahmanas.

In B. kha-yfi-te is formed from khan dig.

N 2

CONJUGATION

180

[ir,5-i56

the Samhitas) which is used with a

predominantly passive
meaning. When it is formed from verbs with a neuter sense,
like gam go, that sense remains
unchanged (as in the past
'

passive participle). It
root takes the ending

is
i.

3.

s.

The

ind. in

which the augmented

characteristic feature of this

form is the strengthening of the root as compared with other

middle forms; e.g. a-kar-i beside a-kr-i (1. s. mid.).
Prosodically short medial i, u, r take Guna, and medial a is
final i, u, r take Vrddhi, while final a
before the ending.
The accent of unaug-

normally lengthened
interposes a

mented forms

is

always

on the

root.

Examples

are:

a-ved-i {vid find), a-bodh-i (budh wake), a-dars-i (drs scr),

a-vac-i (vac speak) ; a-sray-i (sri resort), a-stav-i (stu
praise), a-kar-i (kr do), a-dha-y-i (dha put).

More than twenty unaugmented forms

injunctively

e. g.

srav-i

let

are

also

used

he heard.

Irregularities.
a.

jdn-i
2.

The medial a is not lengthened

(beside jan-i), and S-vah.-i.

1.

From

jaraya-y-i

in fi-jan-i, the

the denominative stem jarayai^Za?/

him he embraced is formed.

lover

tfte

unaugmented

the unique form

let

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,
I.

AND

INFINITIVE.

Active Participles.

156. The stem of the present (except the reduplicating

class), the future, and the aorist active participle is formed
with the suffix ant.^ The strong stem may be obtained by
dro2^ping the

ant, as-yant;

of the

3. pi.

ind. act.

bhav-ant, ksipduh-ant, krnv-ant, bliind-ant, pri-nant.

About a dozen more are found in B.

On

e. g.

the declension of participles in ant see 85

of their fern, stems, 95 a.

nn the formation

PARTICIPLES

156-157]

Stems

of the reduplicating class

forms

because

they drop

the

181

do not distinguish strong

e. g.
juhv-at (3. pi.

juhv-ati).

The strong stem of the future participle may similarly be

obtained by dropping the i of the 3. pi. act,
bhavisyant,
:

karisyant.

The

formed by the root aorist, the

and the s aorist, from the unaugmented tense stem
in the latter two e. g. vida-nt, sak-s-ant (sah premil) and
from the weakened or unmodified root in the former e. g.
rdh-ant, kr-ant (kr make), gm-ant (gam go), pant (pa
a

active participle is

aorist,

drinh).

In the pi-es. part, the initial a of as he and the

a. Irregularities.
medial a of han slaij are lost sant (3. pi. santi), ghn-ant (3. pi. ghn'
dnti); while the n of the suffix is lost in das-at worshipping and sas-at
The
n
is
the
of
ham
also
lost
in
s
aor.
dah
(3. pi. sas-ati).
part,
dfiks-at and dhdks-at. Whether it was also lost in s^ks-at, the part,
of the same aor. from sah prevail, is uncertain because it is only met
with in a weak case.
:

157. The reduplicated perfect participle is formed

from the weak (but uucontracted or unsyncopated) stem to
which the suffix vams is directly added. There are more
than

Examples are cakr-vams, jagantastabh-vams

(stambh prop), tasthi-vams
go),
dad-vams
(stha stand), dadrs-vains,
(da give), ba-bhu-vams,
vavrt-vams, sasa-varns (san gain), susup-vams (svap
fifty

such stems.

vams (gam

sleep).

Some

a.

half-dozen of these participles are formed

by

adding the suffix with connecting i to the reduplicated stem

contracted to a single syllable i-y-i-varns (i go) iis-i-vams
:

ok-i-vams

"

(uc &e pleased) ; papt-i-vams (pat

(vas dwell)
sasc-i-vams (sac follow) in the later Sainhitas also
fall)
;

'

Both da^ and sas belong to the

root,

and not the reduplicating

class.
2

With

strong radical vowel and reversion to the original guttural.

CONJUGATION

182

[157-158

The only certain example of a perf.

eaf).^
the
suffix
with connecting i to the fully
adding

jaks-i-vams (ghas
part,

reduplicated stem
h.

is

vivis-i-vams

(TS.).^

A few perfect participles are formed

to the unreduplicated

sah-vams

knoiving,

stem

das-vams

prevailing,

and

by attaching vams

ivorshipping,

vid-vams

perhaps khid-vams^

Similarly formed is midh-vams bountiful, though

the root does not occur in independent use.
Three unreduplicated roots take connecting i in the later Samhitas
oppressing.

das-i-vams (SV.)
vai'j-i-vams
a.

''

(AV.) having

Irregularities.

guttural

worshipping,

vis-i-vams (AV.) entering,

twisted.

In seven steins the palatal reverts to the original

cikit-vams

(\/cit),

jigi-vams

(\/ji),

ririk-vams (Vric),

ruruk-vams (Vruc), vivik-vams vVvic), susuk-vams (Vsuc), ok-ivams (v/uc). The radical vowel is strong in dada-vams (AV.), ok-ivams, sah-vams while the reduplicative vowel is long in sasahvams and susu-vams (Vsu).
;

II.

Middle and Passive Participles.

158. The participles of the future middle, of the present

and the present middle of the a conjugation are
formed by adding the suffix mana to the stem (which
always ends in a); e.g. fut. mid. yaksya-mana (Vyaj);
passive,

kriya-mana (-/kr); pros. mid. yaja-mana.

Verbs of the second conjugation add the suffix ana to
the weak stem in the j)res. mid.
e.g. bruv-ana {Vhvu),
rundh-ana
juhv-ana (-/hu),
(Vrudh), krnv-ana (v^kr),
pres. pass,
a.

pun-ana (Vpu).
.

There are several irregularities in the formation of the middle

1. The root as
pai'ticiples of the root class.
anomalous suffix ina : as-ina beside as-ana.

1
-

2
*

sit

2.

optionally takes the

The final of the root

jaks syncopated for jagh(a)s.

In B. are also found dadrs-i-vams and cichid-i-vams.
Occurring only in the voc. khidvas.

Presupposed by the

fern, varjusi.

PERFECT PARTICIPLES

158-160]

duh

milk optionally reverts to the original guttural

3.
few roots take Guna

the regular duh-ana.

yodh-an (Vyudh), s4y-ana (Vsi)> stav-and.

183
diigh-ana beside

oh-and (Vuh),
4.

(v/stu).

Several of

thes^e participles optionally accent the radical syllable instead of

final vowel of the suffix ; e. g. vid-ana beside vid-anfi.

the

159. The Perfect Middle Participle is formed by adding

weak form of the stem as it appears

the suffix -ana to the

before the ending of the

3.

pi.

mid. re

(ire,

rire).

It is

common, more than eighty examples occurring. The following are some of them anaj-ana ( v/afij), anas-ana (v/ams),
:

ar-ana {Vr), ij-ana (\/yaj),

(% kr),

cikit-ana

{/cit),

uc-ana

(\/vac),

jagm-ana (Vgam),

cakr-ana
tasth-and

(Vstha), tistir-ana (V'stf), tep-ana (\/tap), pap-ana (pa

clrinJc), paspas-ana (\/spas), bhej-ana (s/bhaj), yem-ana
(\/yam), lebh-ana (-/labh), vavas-ana (vas wear anddwell),
sisriy-ana (A/sri), sismiy-ana(V'smi), susup-ana (\/svap).

a. Irregularities.
1. This participle of si lie has the double anomaly
of reduplicating with a and of strengthening tlie radical syllable ^
sasay-an6. 2. The root sail prevail adds the suffix to a reduplicated as
:

sasah-ana and seh-ana. 3. The radical

vowel of kam love and sam labour is not syncojjated cakam-an^ and
sasam-ana. 4. Four of these participles have the intensive accent on
well as to a contracted stem

the reduplicative syllable

and sasad-ana'^

tutuj-ana'^, susuj-ana, siisuv-ana

(-y/sii),

{seid prevail).*

160. The Perfect Passive Participle is formed by adding,

in the great majority of instances, the suffix ta (with or
without connecting i) or, far less commonly, the suffix na
(directly) to the root.

Cp. a similar irregularity of si in 184, 1 b.

Also normally, but less frequently, accented txituj-ana.
^
Cp. the Gk. perf. mid. part. KeKaS-ixevo-s.
*
The first three cannot be accounted intensives because they have
not the intensive reduplicative vowel (173, 1). Though the redupli^

cative vowel of sasad-ana

may

bo that of either perfect or intensive,

it favours the view

the occurrence of the perf. form sasadiir beside

that it is a perf. participle.

CONJUGATIONS

184

[160

is attached
na, which is taken by primary verbs only,
to the (unweakened) root, which ends in a long vowel or one
Before this suffix,
of the consonants d and (rarely) c or j.
reduced to i or i
or
is
remains
a
i and u remain
1.

unchanged

becomes

xr or (generally

a labial precedes) ur d is
revert to the original guttural.

when

n c and j
Thus li cling li-na du hum du-na dra sleep dra-na
da tlivide di-na ha leave hi-na gr swallow gir-na
mr crush: mur-na jr waste away: jur-na bhid S2)l'it:
bhin-na; skand leap: skan-na vrasc cut up: vrk-na

assimilated to

ruj

hreaJ:

rug-na.

Several roots take alternative forms iu ta nun-na aucl nut-ta

san-na- and sat-ta (sad sit) ;
vin-na and vit-td (vid find)
:

(Vnud)

si-n^ and si-ta (sya coagulate) pr fill pur-na and pur-ta sr cmsh
sir-nd, and sur-ta
pre viix -prg-na and prk-ta.
break reverts tO
b. The final palatal of pro viix, vrasc cut up and ruj
:

the guttural

(cp. 160, 1).

When

is added direct the root tends to appear in its

verbs liable to Samprasarana take it a medial
or final nasal is lost a is often reduced to i or i ya some2.

weak form

ta

times to

i.

Examples

are

ya-ta, ji-ta, bhi-ta, stu-ta,

lost), sik-ta (7 sic), yuk-ta

hu-ta, kr-ta; nas-ta (\/nas he

(^^yuj),

gu-dha(N/guh)/ dug-dha (A/duh), srs-ta (/sfj)

vid-dha (^/vyadh), uk-ta (/vac), u-dha
;

is-ta (\/yaj),

(Vvah),-' sup-ta(v/svap), prs-ta (Vprach)

ta-ta (-v/tan), ga-ta (/gam); pi-ta (pa

ak-ta (/anj),
drinJi),

sthi-ta

(V'stha); vi-ta(\/vy&).

The

a.

Medial a

root
is

dha

pitt is

reduced to

doubly weakened in hi-tfi beside -dhi-ta.

Syncopation and loss of

in sis-ta (sas order).

appear in -g-dha eaten (^ghas).^

-data in the comb. Excepting the occurrence of the normal form
uses the weak pres.
pound tva-data given by thee, da give regularly

corebralization and aspiration of the suffix, loss of the radical

and lengthening of the radical vowel (cp. 62, 69 c).
With the same changes as in gudha after vah-ta has been reduced

With

final
"

by Samprasarana

to uh-t^.

Cp. p. 170, note

7.

PERFECT PASSIVE PARTICIPLE

160-lGi]

185

The latter is
dat-ta.
its past passive participle
further reduced to -tta in deva-ttfi. given by the gods, and when combined with certain jn-epositions vy-a-tta opened, pari-tta giveyi awmj,
prati-tta given back. The same syncopation appears in the compound
stem dad in forming

participle of da divide
in an
c. One root

dva-tta

cut

off.

and three or four in am retain the nasal and

lengthen the vowel dhvan sound dhvan-ta kram stride kran-td
sam be quiet: san-t^ sram be ivearg sran-ta dham blois has the
irregular dhma-td and dham-i-td..
'
khan dig kha-t^ jan be born ja-td
d. A few roots in an have a
van ivin -va-ta san gain sa-ta.
:

i-ta is

3.

taken by a considerable number of roots ending

consonants or in single consonants

not only in conjunct

combine with t, but also in simple consonants,

The
especially sibilants, which present no such difficulty.
root is not weakened (excepting four instances of Sampradifficult to

Secondary verbs (almost without exception causatake ita exclusively (after dropping aya).^
grath-ita, il-ita,
nind-ita, raks-ita
Examples are

sarana).
-

tives)

car-ita, jiv-ita

mus-ita

arp-ita

pat-ita,

pan-ita

(arp-aya cause

to

kup-ita, stabh-ita ;
go), cod-ita (cod-aya

66^ in motion).

The

a.

seize

vad

roots taking Samprasarana are:

grbh-i-ta and grh-i-ta (AV.);^ vaks

s;peuh

nd-ita

161. There

is

srath

slacJcen

gives

having
'

grab.
;

srth-ita.

once found in the

AV.

participle extended with the possessive

it

grabh and

increase: uks-ita

a perfect passive

suffix

the sense of a perfect participle active

vant, which
asita-vant
:

eaten.*^

Representing the long sonant nasal.

Only one perfect participle passive has been noted from a desiderative
mimam-s-ita called in question, and one from a denominative
bham-it6 enraged.
^
In B. jnapaya, causative of jiia know, forms its part, without con2

necting
<
5
^

i:

jnap-td.

Usually (and abnormally) accented ax'p-ita.

With i for i as in some other forms from this root.
This type of participle hardly occurs even in the Brahmanas.

CONJUGATION

186

[162

162. The Future Passive Participle is in the KV. formed

with four suffixes: one with the primary suffix ya, which is
common, the rest with the secondary suffixes ay-ya, 6n-ya,
and tv-a, each of which occurs ahout a dozen times. In the

AV.

there begin to be vised two other gerundives, formed

with tavya and aniya, each occurring twice. All these

sense

in

correspond

participles

the

to

Lat,

gerundive

in -ndus.

In the EV. about forty examples of the gerundive in

ya occur, and about twenty more in the AV. The suffix is
nearly always to be read as ia, which accounts for the
1.

treatment before

it

The

of final radical vowels.

root,

being

accented, appears in a strong form excepting a few examples

which have the short radical vowel i, u, or r.
. Final a coalesces with the initial of ia to e, between which and
the following a a phonetic y is interposed da give deya ( = da-i-y-a)
:

to he

Final

b.

of

given.

u, r regularly take Guna or Vrddhi, the final element

as y, v, r, as before a vowel
e. g. li cling :

i,

which always appears

-lay-ya
hii call

nu

h^v-ya

Medial

c.

praise

vr choose

u, r, if

i,

ndv-ya

bhii be

var-ya.
followed by a single consonant,
;

vac

assailed

to be

d.

final

future

dves-ya

hateful

may
yudh

Guna

take
:

yodh-ya

accomplished
mrj
marj-ya to be
vac-ya to be said but also giih-ya to be concealed -dhrs-ya
-sad-ya to be seated.
short vowel sometimes remains unchanged, a t being
:

bhav-ya and bhav-y5

and a may be lengthened e. g. dvis

to be subdued
rdh drdh-ya to be
purified

then interposed i-t-ya to be gone

made carkf-t-ya to be praised,
:

sru-t-ya

to

be

heard

-br-t-ya

to

be

2. The suffix ayya, nearly always to be read ayia, is

almost restricted to the RV. e. g. pan-ayya to he admired

It is sometimes
vid-ajja, to be found sva,v-a,jya glorious.
to
a
stems
causative
attached to secondary
pauay-ayya
to a desiderative
diadmirable, sprhay-ayya desirable
;

dhi-s-ayya

tas-ayya
3.

to be conciliated

to be

enya

\/dha)

to

an intensive

vi-tan-

hastened.

(generally to be read 6nia)

is

attached to the root,

GERUNDIVE

162-163]

187

which remains unaltered except when it ends in a vowel

thus dvis-enya malignant, yud.h-6nya to he combatted, drsenya worthy to he seen but var-enya choiceivorthij (vr choose).
It is once added to an aor. stem
yam-s-enya to he guided
:

Secondary verbs also take this suffix desideratives

didrks-6nya ivorthij to he seen, susrus-6nya deserving to he

v/yam).

marmrj-6nya

intensives:

heard;

6nya

he

to

glorified

he

to

denominatives

vavrdh-

glorified,

sapar-6nya

he

to

adored.
4.

tv-a,

read tua,
accented.

almost restricted to the RV.^ and generally to be

added to the strong form of the root, which is

is

Thus kar-tva

(\/hi), so-tva

to he

driven on

The only two examples

5.

to he

pressed [Vsu], vak-tva to he said; with

with connecting i
san-i-tva to he -won

connecting i
bhav-i-tva future.
:

made, h6-tva

to he

in V. (both occurring in

AV.)

of the gerundive in tavya, which in both cases is added

with connecting i, are jan-i-tavya to he horn and hims-i-

tavya

to he injured.^

The only examples

of the gerundive in aniya (both

appearing in the AV.) are upa-jiv-aniya to he subsisted on
6.

and a-mantr-aniya

III.

ivorthy to he addressed.^

Gerund or Indeclinable

Participle.

163. More than 120 examples of the gerund occur in

the RV. and AV. It expresses an action which accompanies
It is formed
or more often precedes that of the finite verb.
old
of stems
cases
suffixes
with the three
tvi, tva, tvaya (all
1

few examples occur in the Brahmanas

bathe), ban- tva (han slay).

j^-tva

( ji

conquer),

sna-tva (sna
^

With

instead of

i.

This gerundive has become not uncommon in B., where

formed not only from the root, but from secondary stems.
*
In B. nearly a dozen examples have been met with.
*

it

is

CONJUGATION

188

which

in tu

simple
1.

is

also used to

is

form

[163

infinitives) attached to the

root.

The form in tvi, which is almost restricted to the EV./

commonest of the three in that Samhita, where fifteen

the

old locative of
examples occvu-. It probably represents an
stems in tu. It is as a rule added directly to the root,
which has the same form as in the perf. pass, participle
in ta.
gone,

Examples are kr-tvi having made, ga-tvi liavmj

gu-dhvi having hidden, bhu-tvi having become, vrk-tvi
:

having overthroivn (-/vrj), hi-tvl having abandoned (v^ha).

There are two forms in which the suffix is added with the

skabh-i-tvi
connecting vowel i jan-i-tvi having produced and
:

having propped.
2.

The

suffix tv-a (an old inst. sing, of a verbal

noun

in tu)

is taken by nine roots in the RV. and about thirty more in

the AV. The root has the same form as before the ta of the
The forms occurring in the EV. are
pass, participle.
:

perf.

pi-tva (pa drinJc), bhit-tva having shattered, bhu-tva having

become, mi-tva having formed (v^ma), yuk-tva having yolced,
vr-tva having covered, sru-tva having heard, ha-tva having

Some of the forms from the

hi-tva having abandoned.
are: is-tva having sacrificed (Vyaj), jag-dhva having
devoured (>/jaks), tir-tva having crossed (Vtr), tr-dhva

slain,

AV.

having shattered (-/trh), dat-tva having given ( v'da), pak-tva

having cooked (v^pac), bad-dhva having bound (v^bandh),
bhak-tva having divided (^/bhaj), ru-dhva having ascended

(/ruh), vrs-tva having ctd up (\/vrase), sup-tva having

three take the conned ing vowel i cay-i-tva
slept (V'svap)
:

noting (Vcay), hims-i-tva having injured, grh-i-tva having

a few also are formed from secondary stems in aya
;

seised

(which
3.

is

The

retained)
rarest

e. g.

gerund

kalpay-i-tva having arranged.

that in tvaya, which is formed

is

1
This gerundive is not found in the AV., but
disappeared in the Bralimanas.

it

has not entirely

GERUND

163-164]

189

from only eight roots in the RV.' ga-tvaya having gone,

jag-dhvaya having devoured, dat-tvaya having given, drstvaya having seen, bhak-tvaya having attained, yuk-tvaya
having yoled, ha-tvaya having slain, hi-tvaya having abandoned three more of these gerunds appear in the Yajurveda
:

kr-tvaya having

ta-tvaya having

done,

vr-tvaya

stretched,

having covered.

164.
either

When

ya or

the verb

vowel of the

is

In at

tya.

suffix is

compounded the

suffix is regularly

least two-thirds of

long in the RV.

such forms the

The

root

is

always

accented.

ya is added (but never with i) to the

same form as before tva, except that

which has
a and am
remain unchanged. Nearly forty roots in the RV. and
about thirty more in the AV. form these compound gerunds.
Examples from the RV. are ac-ya bending {= a-ac-), abhy1.

the

root,

final

up-ya having

enveloped (Vvap), abhi-kram-ya approaching,

abhi-gur-ya graciously accepting (gr sing), sam-grbh-ya
gathering, ni-cay-ya fearing, vi-tur-ya driving forth (-/tr),

a-da-ya talcing, ati-div-ja plajjing higher, Sinu-dfs-ya, looking

a-rabh-ya grasping, ni-sad-ya having sat down from
a causative stem
prarp-ya setting in motion (pra-arpaya).
from
the
AV. are ud-uh-ya having carried tip
Examples

along,

(v^vah),

sam-gir-ya

imtting in (-/da),

stvallotving

up

(V'gr),

upa-dad-ya

sam-bhu-ya

combining, ut-tha-ya arising

(\/stha), sam-siv-ya having sewed; from a causative stem

vi-bhaj-ya having apjwrtioned (\/bhaj).

Three roots nre found in the RV. compounded with adverbs or
punar-da-ya giving back, mitha-spfdh-ya vying together,
karna-grh-ya seising by the ear, pada-gfh-ya grasping by the foot, hastagrh-ya grasping by the hand.
a.

substantives

This gerund occurs twice in the AV. and about half a dozen times
It is once formed from a causative stem in the SB.
spaiS-ay-i-

in B.

tvaya (\/spas).

CONJUGATION

190

[165-167

165. 2. tya (nearly always with long vowel in the RV.)

is added instead of ya to compound verbs ending in a short
e. g. 6-tya having come (a-i), abhi-ji-tya having
vowel
conquered, a-dv-tya regarding, apa-mi-tya" having borrowed,
upa-sru-tya having overheard with adverbial or nominal
arani-kr-tya having made read)), akhkhali-kr-tya
prefix
^

namas-kr-tya (AV.) paying homage.

The analogy of these verbs is followed by some
m preceded by a, which drop the nasal as in the

shouting,
a.

or

roots ending in
j

erf. pass. part.

vi-ha-tya having driven away (Vhan), a-ga-tya having come (Vgam),

ud-ya-tya (AV.) lifting up (Vyam).

in am of certain verbal nouns,

like a gerund in the Samhitas, is
construed
not
though
yet
not infrequently so construed in the Briihmanas and Sutras.

166. The accusative

Before the

suffix,

3. s. aor. pass. (155)

form

e.g.

hold of a &;-rtwc/?(SB.);
together

it

sakham sam-a-lambh-am

tahing

malianagam abhi-sam-sar-am running

around a great

snaJce (SB.).

IV.

167. The

is almost always comassumes before the i of the

the root (which

pounded) appears in the

infinitive, all

Infinitive.

the forms of which are old cases

of verbal nouns, ace, dat., abl.-gen., orloc, is very frequent,

Only the ace. and
occurring about 700 times in the EV.
dat.

forms are common, but the datives outnumber the

ace.

in the proportion of 12 to 1 in the RV. and 3 to 1 in

It is a remarkable fact that the infinitive in turn,
the AV.

the only form surviving in Sanskrit, occurs not more than

five times in the RV., while the dative infinitive, which in
the RV. is more than seven times as common as all the
rest

put together, has already for the most part disappeared

in the
1

Brahmanas.
Sometimes not original but reduced from a long vowel.
Here mi is reduced from ma measure.

INFINITIVE

167]

191

a. The infinitive is as a rule formed from the root, not being

connected with any tense stems or ever showing the distinctions of
voice. The forms in dhyai, i,se and s^ni are, however, not infrequentlyconnected with a present stem that in dhyai is once formed from
a pei-fect stem, and is also in several instances taken by causative
stems. The forms in dhyai and tav&i are at once recognizable as
that in stoi, though it has an
infinitives by their abnormal endings
;

ordinary case-ending, by its isolated stem-formation. The ace. inf.

in tum and am and the abl. gen. inf. show their infinitive character

by their power of combining with prepositions and their verbal

Some infinitives, however, cannot be distinguished

construction.
from ordinary cases of verbal nouns they are not to be regarded as
genuine infinitives unless they are isolated case forms or have a verbal
:

construction.

Dative Infinitive.

1.

This infinitive^ ends in

or stem combines to

e,

which with the

formed from

It is

ai.'^

final

a of a root

About a dozen are

a. roots, about sixty forms occurring.
formed from roots ending in long vowels and from one in i,
all of them (except an alternative form of bhu) being compounded with prefixes e. g. para-dai to give up, pra-hy5
to send (Vhi)
-miy-e to diminish ( v'mi), -bhv-e and bhuv-6
;

to he

-tir-e to cross.

The

rest are

from roots ending

forms are commoner;

-niid-e

to thrust,

to pierce,

-syad-e

e.g.

-preh-e

to

-grabh-e
to ash,

About
mih-e to

in consonants.

a dozen are uncompounded, as mah-e

shed ivafer, bhuj-6 to enjoy, drs-6 to see.

to be glad,

But the compounded

to seise,

-vae-e

-idh-e

to sjyeaJc,

to kindle,

-vidh-e

floiv.'''

^
The only dat. inf. in ordinary use in B. is that in tavai. Otherwise
two in tave, av-i-tave and staronly five or six in e (see note 6)
tave, and one in dhyai, sa-dhyai to conquer (-y/sah) have been noted in B.
;

Loc. infinitives have disappeared.

Excejit srad-dhe fo Mist and pra-m6
^
^
''

''

to

form, wliich drop the

a.

With Samprasarana.
With lengthened vowel.
With loss of nasal (Vsyand).
In B. have been noted half a dozen infinitives in e from roots

CONJUGATION

192

[i67

h. verbal
nouns derived with nine different suffixes.
These in the aggregate are more numerous.
1. Some twenty-five are datives of stems in as
e. g.
^

caks-as-e to see, ear-as-e to fare, pusy-as-e

bhiy-as-e to fear, sriy-as-e to he resplendent.
2. Five or six datives of stems in i are found in the RV.,
and one or two in other Samhitas tuj-aye to breed, drs-ay-e
ay-as-e

to go,

to thrive,

mah-ay-e

to see,

irin:
3.

grh-aye
Four or

refresh,

to rejoice,

to seize (K.),

five are
to

pi-tay-e

yudh-ay-e
cit-aye

to

to fight,

san-ay-e

datives of stems in ti:

drink,

to

nnderstand (VS.).

vi-tay-e

to

is-tay-e

enjoy,

to

sa-tay-e

to ivin.

4. More than thirty are datives of stems in tu" (added to

the gunated root, sometimes with connecting i)
e. g.
at-tav-e to eat, 6-tav-e to go, d-tav-e to weave ('/u
va),
kar-tav-e to male, gan-tav-e to go, pa-tav-e to drinl', bhar;

tav-e

to

hear away, yas-tav-e

vas-tav-e

v6-lhav-e

to sacrifice,

vak-tav-e

to speak,

av-i-tav-e
convey (Vvah)
to refresh, car-i-tav-e to fare, sav-i-tav-e tohring forth (-/su),
srav-i-tav-e to floiv (/sru), hav-i-tav-e to call (\/hu);
to shine,

jiv-a-tav-e
5.

to lire,

to

star-i-tav-e (AV.) to lay low (\/str).

of stems in tava (which

More than a dozen are datives

added like tu to the gunated root) and have the peculiarity

e. g. 6-tavai to go, 6-tavai to
of being doubly accented
to
go, pa-tavai to drinl; man-tavai to think,
weave, gan-tavai
is

sar-tavai

to flcnv

yam-i-tavai

to

guide,

srav-i-tavai

to

flow.

ending in consonants,
see,

prati-dhfs-e

to

all

but one being compounded drs- (TS.) to

pra-mrad-e to crush (SB.), a-r^bh-e
:

withstand (TS.),

to take hold (SB.), a-sad-e to sit upon (AB.), ati-sfp-e to glide over (MS.).
All these excejit pra-mrad-e occur in the RV.
*
Which is generally accented, but about half a dozen examples

accent the root.

2

The only examples

startave.

of this infinitive noted in B. are dvitave

and

DATIVE INFINITIVE

167]

193

a. This infinitive is still in regular use in B., where the following

examples have been noted 6tavdi and yatavdi (o go, kartavdi to do,
d6diyitavai to Jly aicuy, drogdhavdi to x)lot, m^ntavai to think, md.nthi:

tavdi

to rule,

stdrtavdi

nir-astavai

bring,

hvayitavai

to call

to

to

lay low, ati-caritavdi

throiu

out,

to

transgress,
to

pdri-staritavdi

strew

a-netav&i

around,

to

sam-

together .

There is only one certain example of a dative infinitive

from a stem in tya i-tyai to go.
7. More than thirty-five are datives (almost restricted to
the KV.) of stems in dhya, which is added to verbal stems
6.

ending in a (generally accented)

gama-dhyai to go, cara-dhyai
(s/si),

to

stava-dhyai

iya-dhyai to go {Vi),
saya-dhyai to lie
praise (v/stu); piba-dhyai to drink
;

e. g.

to fare,

prna-dhyai to fill ( v^pr), huva-dhyai to call ( -/hu)

^
^
vavrdha-dhyai to strengthen nasaya-dhyai to cause
^
to
turn.
to
cause
disappear, vartaya-dhyai
(

v/pa),

Only one of these

a.

infinitives

^
;

to

has been noted in B. sadhyai to

one example ending in e instead
:

In the TS. occurs

conquer (\/sah).
of ai gamd-dhye to go.
:

8.

Five are datives of stems in

man

da-man-e to give (Gk. S6ixu-ai),

bhar-man-e to preserve, vid-man-e

tra-man-e

dhar-man-e
(Gk.

i'S-fx^v-ai)

to protect,

to

to

support,

Motu.

Three are datives of stems in van tur-van-e to overcome (Vtr), da- van- e (Gk. Sovvat = Sofevai) to give, dhurvan-e * to injure.
9.

2.

Accusative Infinitive.

is formed in two ways.

them (of which more than a dozen examples
occur in the RV. besides several others in the AV.) is made
with am added to the weak form of the root, which nearly

This infinitive
a.

One

of

made from regular present stems.

the reduplicated perfect stem.
^
the causative stem, from which about ten such infinitives
are formed.
1

The

From
From

last three are

With interchange
1819

of

vowel and semivowel

ur =

vr,

Cp. 171.

2.

CONJUGATION

194

[i67

e. g.
always ends in a consonant (except dha, mi, tr)
sam-idh-am to Jcindle, sam-preii-ani to asJc, a-rabh-am to
reach, a-riih-am to mount, siibh-am to shine
pra-tir-am
;

to ])rolong

[Vtv], prati-dha-m

to x^lace

upon,

pra-miy-am

to

neglect (\/mi).

The second

1).

foi-m

which

much

less

(= Lat. supine) is
the same stems.
about as

tum

many

Only

five

others in the

is

made from stems

common

in tu

than the datives from

examples occur in the EV. and

AV.

EV.

6 -turn

to

weave, da-

pras-tum to ask, pra-bhar-tum

to present, anu-pra-volhum to advance
AV. at-tum to eat,
kar-tum to maJce, dras-tum to see, yac-i-tum to as7i,
spardh-i-tum to contend with K., VS. khan-i-tum to dig.
to give (Lat. da-turn),

The aec. inf. has become nearly twice as frequent as the dat. in B.
The form in am is not imusual, while that in turn is quite common.
a.

3.

Ablative- Genitive Infinitive.

This infinitive

is rare,

fewer than twenty examples occur-

It is rather of the nature of a verbal

ring in the Samhitas.
noun than a genuine infinitive. Like the ace. infinitive it

formed in two ways from a radical (consonant) stem and

from a verbal noun in tu. It thus ends either in as or tos
and as each of these endings represents both the abl. and
is

the gen., the cases can only be distinguished syntactically.

a. The as form has the abl. sense almost exclusively.

There are
pierced,
tact,

six examples of it in the EV.

a-trd-as heing
ava-pad-as falling doivn, sam-prc-as coming in con:

abhi-sris-as binding, abhi-svas-as hlotving, ati-skad-as

leaping across.

the gen.

There seems to be one certain example of

ni-mis-as

to

wink.

Of the tos form the EV. has six examples in the abl.
sense
6-tos and gan-tos going, jan-i-tos being horn,
h.

ni-dha-tos putting doivn, sar-i-tos heing shattered, s6-tos

Three examples in the gen.
'pressing, han-tos heing struck.
sense are
a.

The

kar-tos doing, da-tos giving, jd-tos ivarding

abl. gen. inf.

has become as

common

as the dat. in B.

ojf.

LOCATIVE INFINITIVE

I(i7-I6sj

Locative Infinitive.

4.

This form of the infinitive

a dozen examples occur even
included.
a.

195

is

if

rare

hardly more than

several doubtful forms are

Five or six are locatives of radical stems

vy-us-i at

sam-caks-i on leholdmj, drs-i and sam-drs-i

on seeing, budh-i at the tcaldng. As these forms, however,
have nothing distinctive of the infinitive and govern the
the daicning,

genitive only, they are rather to be regarded as ordinary

locatives of verbal nouns.

From a stem in tar are formed dhar-tar-i to support

and vi-dhartar-i to bestoiv it is, however, doubtful whether
J).

these forms are genuine infinitives.

c. The EV. has eight locatives from stems in san, with

ne-san-i

a genuine infinitive sense:

pass,
to

abhi-bhu-san-i

abide

jjresent

(\/sac);

stems

to

aid,

to

su-san-i

lead,
to

par-san-i to
sak-san-i

sivell,

with connecting i: tar-i-san-i

gr-ni-sani

to sing,

str-ni-san-i

from

to spread.

DERIVATIVE VERBS.
I.

Causatives.

far the commonest of the secondary

formed
from more than two hundred
conjugations, being
roots in the Samhitfis and from about a hundred additional
ones in the Brahmanas. Of about 150 causative stems
in the KV., however, at least one-third have not a causative,
but an iterative sense. The whole formation may indeed
This perhaps
originally have had an iterative meaning.

168. This

explains

is

how an

by

iterative formation, the reduplicated aorist,

The same root

specially attached itself to the causative.
occasionally forms both the iterative and the causative, as
pat-aya-ti flies about and pat-aya-ti causes
simi:)le verb pata-ti flies.

o2

to flij

beside the

CONJUGATION

196

[i68

The causative is formed by adding the

root, which is usually strengthened.
medial
vid Imoiv

suffix

to the

aya

u, r, 1 (if not long by position) take

ved-aya cause to know krudh he
angry: krodh-aya enrage; rd dissolve (intr.): ard-aya
trp lie pleased tarp-aya delight kip he adapted
destroy
kalp-aya arrange.
Initial or

1.

Guna

e. g.

i,

a. Several roots, mostly lacking the causative meaning,

leave the radical vowel unchanged e.g. rue shine : ruc-aya,
;

id.

(but roe-aya illumine).

h. Initial or medial a (if not long

in about thirty roots; e.g.

injury

nas

nas-aya

ram

and pat-iya

lengthened
suffer

destroy.

rest

cause

thus pat

Jlij

pat-aya

Jly about,

once cause

to Jhj,

to Jly.

In about twenty-five roots the a always remains short, the

meaning being mostly absent e. g. dam control dam-aya
jan beget jan-aya id.

causative
;

is

am-aya

exhilarated,

id.

by position)

he injurious:

In the following roots the a optionally remains short in the

gam go, das icaste mvay, dhvan disappear, pat Jlij, mad he

a.

causative

P.

he lost

am

Final

c.

ksay-aya
shaJcc

i,

bhu

u, r take

cause
he

to

Guna

or Vrddhi

dwell securely

bhav-aya

cyu

cause to hecome

e. g.

ivacer
;

ghr

ksi
:

2)0ssess

cyav-aya

drip)

ghar-

aya cause to drip sru hear, jr waste away, and sr flow have
Guna as well as Vrddhi: srav-aya and srav-aya cause to
;

hear

cause
d.

jar-aya and jar-aya wear out, sar-aya and sar-aya

flow dr pierce has Guna only dar-aya shutter.
Koots ending in a add paya " e. g. dha j^ut dha-paya
to

cause to

pnit.

e. The causative retains the suflfix throughout the conjuIts inflexion is

gation even outside the present system.
identical with that of the primary verbs of the first conju*

1
The only example of a causative from a root in final i (except the
irregular japdya from ji conquer and srapaya from iSri resort),
^
As to other routs taking paya see 'Irregularities', 2.

197

CAUSATIVE

168]

gation (132).

and present

Suhjunctive/ imperative,- injunctive, imperfect,

forms are common but the optative

participle
at all in the
very rare in the active and does not occur
in the KV. and the
occur
forms
future
four
middle.
Only
;

is

AV.

dusaj-isjimil shall spoil, dharay-isyati tvill support,

unll shield.
vasay-isyase thou tvilt adorn thyself, varay-isyate
9
a) occurs
In the perfect only one periphrastic form (139,
are
forms
aorist
gamayam eakara-' (AV.). Keduplicated
There
a.
stems
connected with only six causative
3).
(p. 175,
are also three is aorists formed from the causative stem:
:

vyathay-Ts from vyath-aya dislnrh ailay-it from il-aya

dhvanay-it from dhvan-aya envelope.*
qiiiet down
the following are examples
f. Of nominal derivatives
a few perf. pass, partia pres. pass. part, bhaj-ya-mana
;

ves-i-ta caused to
ciples: ghar-i-ta smeared,cod-i-%a, impelled,
in ayya (162, 2) trayay-ayya to he
enter a few
:

gerundives

panay-ayya admiraUe sprhay-ayya desirable

guarded
ten infinitives in dhyai
nasaya-dhyai to destroy, &c.

(p.

198, 7)

set

four gerunds in the AV.

arpay-i-tva having
kalpay-i-tva having arranged, saday-i-tva having
:

delivered up,

down, sramsay-i-tva

letting fall.

Irregularities.
Three causaf ives in the AV. sliovten the a before paya jna-paya
canse to knoiv, sra-paya cook, sna-pdya hafhe beside sna-pdya (RV.).
2. Four roots in vowels other than a, that is, in r or i, take paya;
r go
ar-p4ya cause to go ksi chvell kse-p4ya cause to dive.ll (beside
:

1.

1
The only du. mid. form occurring is 3. madfiyaite and the only
mid. form in ai (except 1. du.) in the RV. is madayadhvai.
2
The 2. s. in tat occurs in both V. and B. and from vr cover occiu's
;

the unique 2. pi. varaya-dhvat in K.

3 In
B. such forms are still uncommon except in the SB., where

they are numerous.

*
In B. desideratives are formed from about a dozen causative
stems e. g. di-drapay-isa desire to cause to run.
;

CONJUGATION

198

[168-169

ja-p^ya cause 1o
ji conquer and ^ri reaort stibstitute a for i
sra-p&ya raise?3 The root bhi fear forms the quite anomalous causative stem

ksay-5,ya)

conquer,

bh i - s dy a /r ^/ fen
4. The roots pa
-

drink and pya swell add aya with interposed y

pay-fiya cause 1o drink and pyay-d,ya fill iip. This is probably to be
explained by the assumption that the original form of these roots was
:

pai and pyai.

5.

The vowel

of

grabh

(irasp is

weakened by Samprasiirana grbh-fiya

:

The
grasp ; while that of dus spoil is lengthened
diis-^ya, id.
root pf.fiJl, owing to its initial labial, forms its causative with medial
:

for a

piir-^ya, fulf I.

Desideratives.

II.

which is the least common of the

formed from the root with an
secondary conjugations,
accented reduplicative syllable and the suffix sa. This sa is
169. The

deslderative,

is

i in the RV., nor, with the

in
the AV,, ji-jiv-i-sa in the
of
pi-pat-i-sa,
single exception
in
the
TS.'
The desiderative is formed
and
ji-gam-i-sa
VS.,

never added with a connecting

from fewer than sixty roots in the Samhitas and from more
than thirty additional ones in B, It is inflected like verbs
of the first conjugation (132).

The accent being on the reduplicative syllable, the root as

a rule remains unchanged e. g. da give di-da-sa desire to
:

give

bhid

cleave

ju-guk-sa (62
drk-sa.

bi-bhit-sa

69

and

bhu

ni lead

he

ni-ni-sa

bu-bhu-sa

guh

drs

see

hide
:

di-

are lengthened, and r becomes ir e. g.

sru hear: su-sru-sa; kr mahe: ci-

conquer: ji-gi-sa

ji

a)

But

final i

1.

a,

kir-sa,
final

2.

is

in three roots reduced (cp. 171, 3) to i

and in

In B. the root ruh. rise, even though ending in a consonant, takes

paya after dropping its h ro-paya raise (beside roh-dya),
^
In B. about a dozen other roots form their desiderative stem
'

thus

6, g.

ei-kram-i-sa, ji-grah-i-sa, vi-vid-i-sa (vid know), &c.

DESIDERATIVES

169-171]

one

to

ga go:

pi-pa-sa)

ji-gi-sa (SV.)

ha go forth

ji-hi-sa

199

pa drink: pi-pi-sa
dha 2)ut di-dhi-sa
:

(beside
(beside

dhit-sa).

Special Rule of Reduplication.

170. The

ing

characteristic reduplicative

vowel

is

i,

which

stems except those formed from roots containe. g. jya overpoiver

(which reduplicate with u)

appears in

all

ji-jya-sa;

vi-vrt-sa

mis mix: mi-mik-sa; pri?ovc: pi-pri-sa; vrt turn:

;

but

guh

hide

j\i-guk-sa

bhu

he

bu-bhu-sa.

Irregularities.

or n lengthen the
Five roots with medial a followed by
ban smite ji'-gham-sa (66 A 2) man
ji-gam-sa
go
think lengthens the reduplicative vowel also: mi-mam-sa (66 A 2)
van 7vin and san gain drop the nasal vi-va-sa and si-sa-sa,

171.

vowel

1.

gam

dhvr

2.

after interchange of

injure,

semivowel and vowel to ur,

Cp. p. 193, note 4,

3. Haifa dozen roots continiiig a or a shorten the radical syllable
da give and dha imt lose their vowel
by a kind of syncopation

lengthens

its

dii-dhiir-sa.

dhf-t-sa ( = di-dh[a]-sa)
di-d[a]-sa) beside di-da-sa
beside di-dhi-sa
dabh harm, labh take, sak 6e able, sah prevail lose
^
their initial radical consonant and their vowel : di-p-sa ( = di[da]bhsik-sa
sa), lip-sa^ (= li[la]bh-sa),
(= si[sa]k-sa), sik-sa, with
di'-t-sa

(=

lengthened reduplicative vowel

rt.

ap

cated
(

and rdh

si[sa]k-sa).^

(treated as ardh) contract the redupliwith the radical initial to i: ip-sa (=i-ap-sa) and irt-sa

obtain

thrive

i-ardh-sa).

4.

In

ci

reverts to

nrjte,

the

cit perceive, ji conquer,

original

guttural

han

ci-ki-sa,

slay,

the radical initial

ci-kit-sa,

ji'-gi-sa,

jf-

gham-sa.

Also dhipsa in B.
Also lipsa in B.
^
In B. are similarly formed dhiksa (dah burn), pitsa ^pad
ripsa (rabh grasp).
'-

go),

CONJUGATION

200
5.

ghas

eat

its final s to t

changes

(66

[171

1)

ji-ghat-sa (AV.) be

hungry.
6, Three roots reduplicate with a long vowel: tur cross
(= tf)
tu-tur-sa badh oppress bi-bhat-sa ^ man think mi-mam-sa.'^ On
the other hand the reduplicative syllable is reduced in the desidei-ative
f yaj sacrifice and nas attain
by loss of the initial consonant i-yak-sa
In one form from ap
(for yi-yak-sa) and i-nak-sa (for ni-nak-sa).
obtain the reduplication is dropped altogether
ap-santa.
:

a.

The two

roots with initial vowel as

eat

and edh

increase

form their

desiderative stem with the reduplicative vowel in the second syllable

a^-i^-i-sa (B.) and ed-idh-i-sa (VS.).

In the inflexion of the desiderative

present

besides

system,

the

moods

all

the

imperfect,

are

of the

represented,

and of present participles more than

though not fully
The forms occurring,
twenty-five examples are met with.
if made from vi-va-sa desire to win, would be
Present ind. act. sing. 1. vivasami.
2. vivasasi.
3. vivasati.
3. vivasatas.
PI. 1.
Du. 2. vivasathas.
vivasamas. 3. vivasanti.
;

Mid.
PI.

1.

sing.

vivase.

1.

vivasamahe.

Subj.

3.

vivasani.

act. sing. 1.

Inj. act. sing. 3. vivasat.

Opt. act. sing.

Mid. sing.

ma.

Impv.

Part.

3.

vivasat.
pi. 3.

PI. 3.

vivase-

PI.

vivaseya.
vivasa and vivasatat.

3.

vivasatu.

2.

vivasata.

3.

vivasant.

act.

vivasan.

vivasanta.

3.

act. sing. 2.

act.

vivasate.

vivaset.

Du. 2. vivasatam.
3. vivasantu.

Impf.

3.

Mid.

vivaseyam.

1.
1.

vivasase.

2.

vivasante.

sing.

2.

vivasatam.

PI.

1.

Mid. vivasamana.

avivasas.

3.

avivasat.

PI.

3.

avivasan.

*
2

With shortening of the radical vowel.

With lengthening of the radical vowel.

DESIDERATIVES

171-172]

201

^
a. Outside the present system only two desiderative verbal forms
fi-cikits-is and
have been met with, two is aorists in the AV.
the perf.
Three participial forms have also been noted
irts-is.'
to be
pass. part, mimams-i-td' and the gerundives didrks-enya tvorthy
seen and i5usrus-6nya worthy to he heard*
Finally, over a dozen verbal
adjectives formed witli u from the desiderative stem occur in the RV.,
e. g. iyaks-ii wishing to sacrifice.
They have the value of a pres. part.
:

governing a case.

Intensives (Frequentatives).

III.

172. Tliese verbs are meant to convey intensification or

frequent repetition of the action expressed by the simple
root.
They are common, being formed from over ninety
roots in the Samhitas, and about twenty-five others in the

The formation

Brahmanas.
initial

The

is

restricted

to

roots

with

consonants, nor is it ever applied to derivative verbs.

stem, of which a peculiar form of strong reduplication

The primary type, which

the
adds
commonest,
personal endings immeby
the
stem
to
(accented on the first syllable
diately
reduplicated
12
III.
It is inflected, in both
in strong forms
e).
App.
is characteristic,

has two forms.

far the

is

active

and middle,

class (132)

e. g.

form, which

like a

is rare,

verb of the third or reduplicated

n6-nek-ti. The secondary

adds accented yd in the same way as

nij tvash

3. sing.

the passive (154) to the reduplicated stem.

in the middle only, like the passive
;

It is conjugated
e. g.

vij

tremble

ve-vij-ya-te fremUes violenth/.

1
In B. periphrastic perfect forms from five or six desiderative
stems have been noted.
'
In B. is aorists from half a dozen desiderative stems occur e. g.
One or two
aips-it, aips-is-raa, a-jighams-is, a-mimams-is-thas.
simple and periphrastic futures also occur in B., as titiks-isyate (tij
;

he sharp),
3

didrks-i-taras (drs

In B. also

jijyiis-i-tfi

see).

jiv

live),

dhiks-i-t4 (dah burn), susrus-i-t4

(srii hear).
*

In B. also lips-i-tavya (labh

jijnas-ya (jiia knou:).

take),

didhyas-i-tavya (dhya think),

CONJUGATION

202

[172-173

a. The primary intensive optionally inserts i between the

root and terminations beginning with consonants.
This i
is found in the 1. 3. s. ind. act. and the 2. 3. s. inipv. and

act.

impf.
i-hi.

ind. cakas-i-mi, cakas-i-ti

e. g.

j6hav-i-tu

3.

3.

impf.

2.

impv.

cakas-

a-johav-i-t.

Special Rules of Reduplication.

173.

Eadical

1.

Guna vowels
ne-ni

sue shme

and u are reduplicated with the respective

e and o
:

e.

so-^ue

dis

g.

nu

de-dis

j^oitit

praise

nl lead

no-nu

bhu

be

bo-bhu.
Eadical a and f are reduplicated in two ways
More than a dozen roots with medial a (ending in

2.

a.

and one in m) as well 'as three with

kas shine ca-kas pat fall
pa-pat gam go ja-gam gr ivake ja-gr dr split da-dr
dhr hold da-dhr also cal stir ca-cal.
All other roots containing r (dr and dhr also alternatively) and those with medial a followed by r, 1, or a
e. g. kr comnasal, reduplicate with ar, al, an or am
krs drac/
car-kr and car-kir
car-krs
dr
memorate
dar-dir
dhr
dar-dr
and
hold
dar-dhr
(beside da-dr)
split

mutes or
final

sibilants,

reduplicate with a

r,

I).

(beside da-dhr)

phar

scatter

hrs he excited jar-hrs

:

par-phar

cal

stir

car move

gam go jan-gam (beside ja-gam) jambh chew up

:

car-car

cal-cal (beside ca-cal)

jan-jabh

bite: dan-das; tan thunder: tam-stan (66 A 2).

Over twenty roots with final or penultimate nasal,
r or u, interpose an i (or i if the vowel would be long by
position) between the reduplicative syllable and the root

dams
3.

han slai/
gan-i-gam (but gan-i-gm-at)
ghan-i-ghan krand erg out kan-i-krand and kan-i-krad
skand leap kan-i-skand and can-i-skad bhr bear bhare.

g.

gam

go

i-bhr

vrt turn

dav-i-dliv

var-i-vrt

dyut

shine

nu jjm/.se nav-i-nu dhu shaJce

dav-i-dyut.

INTENSIVES

174]

203

Irregularities.

1/4. The
shine:

radical vowel is shortened in roots with medial a

ea-kas

badh

oppress

ba-badh

vaa

belloiv

kaiS

In a few

va-vas.

thus gr swallow
roots containing r or r the radical syllable varies
jar-gur and jal-gul car move car-cur beside car-car; tr cross: tartur beside tar-tar.
:

al-ar (dissimilation)
r go reduplicates with al
gah
with a nasal: jan-gah;^ badh oppress, with its final mute:^
^
bad-badh (beside ba-badh) bhr hear and bhur quiver, with a palatal
jar-bhr, jar-bhur bhur and gur (jreef reduplicate u with a jar-bhur,

The root

rt.

ijlunge,

jar-gur.

Roots with

interposing i before the root,

thus krand cry out kan-i-krand.
gam go gan-i-gam han (for ghan) slay ghan-i-ghan kr iiiakc has
both kar-i-kr* and car-i-kr;* skand te'p has both kan-i-skand and
can-i-skad.
h.

initial

guttural,

reduplicate with the same guttural

:

if

A. The forms of the primary type that occur,

uij tvash, would be the following

from
1.

made

if

Pres. ind.

nek-si.

n6nej-mi, n6nej-i-mi.
n6nek-ti, n6nej-i-ti. Du. 2. nenik-thas.

3.

nik-tas.

PI.

Mid. sing.

1.

1.

act. sing.

1.

nenij-mas, nenij-masi.
nenij-6.

3.

3.

nenik-t6.

n6-

2.
3.

ne-

n6nij-ati.

Du.

3.

n6nij-ate,

PI. 3. nenij-ate.
2.

a-t.

Subj. act. sing,

Du.

Mid. du.

1,

nenij-ani.-

n6nij-a-va.

1.

3.

nenij-aite.

PI.

1.

2. nenij-a-s.

nenij-a-ma.

3.

3.

n^nij-

n6nij-a-n.

PI. 3. n6nij-a-nta.

In B. also jaii-jap-y^-te (jap

mutter).

Here

duplicates with n (together with interposed

trace of a nasal in the root
van-i-vah-yate.

i)

also

vah

carry

though there

is

re-

no

^
3
*

and
"

This is the only example of such reduplication.

This root shows the same peculiarity in the perfect (139, 4).
The intensive of this root occurs only in the 2iarticiple karikr-dt
carikr-^t.

The only form occurring

strong radical syllable

in this person has the interposed

and

tar-tar-i-thas.

"
The only form actiially occuriing in this person
(accented like the subj. of the reduplicating present).

is

janghto-ani

CONJUGATION

204

No

Opt.

3.

[174

1.

pi.

3. s.

RV. and only two

certain forms occur in the

active forms in other Samhitas: sing.

ja-gr-yama (VS., MS.,

TS.),

3.

vevis-yat (AV.),

jagri-yama

The

(TS.).

mid. nenij-ita occurs in K.

Impv. About twenty active (but no middle) forms

occur.
Made from jagr these would be sing. 2. jagr-hi,
'

4.

jagar-i-hi, jagr-tat.

3.

tam.

PI.

3.

jagr-tam.

Du.

jagar-tu, jagar-i-tu.
2.

2.

jagr-

jagr-ta.^

Of the participle over forty stems occui', about two-thirds

them being active. Examples are: act. kanikrad-at,

5.

of

eekit-at, janghan-at, jagr-at, dardr-at, nanad-at, roruvat

mid. jarbhur-ana, dandas-ana, yoyiiv-ana (yu join),
;

sarsr-ana.

Impf. Fewer than thirty forms of this tense occur,

three
of them being middle.
only
Examples of the persons
are
occurring
6.

Act. sing.

a-cakas-am.

1.

2.

3.

a-jagar.

a-dardar,
Du. 2.

a-var-i-var, a-johav-i-t; dav-i-dyot, nav-i-no-t.

a-dardr-tam.

PI.

1.

marmrj-ma.

3.

a-carkrs-ur,

a-

dardir-tir, a-nonav-ur.

Mid.

sing. 3. a-dedis-ta, a-nan-na-ta.^ PI. 3.

marmrj-ata.

a. Outside the present system few intensive forms occur.

There
are four act. perfect intensives with present sense sing. 1. jagara.
3. jagar-a {kypi'jyope), davidhav-a (dhu shake), n6nav-a(nui))'a?se); also
dodrav-a '^dru run
TS.), yoyav-a (yu separate: MS.), lelay-a (li he
:

There is besides the perf. part, jagr-vams. A causaunsteady MS.).

tive intensive appears once in the participial form vai'-i-varj-ayant-i
:

twisting about*

In B. occurs the 2. s. mid. form nenik-sva (-y/nij).

The RV. has no impv. forms with interposed i, but the AV. and
VS. have a few in the 2. 3. s., as cakas-i-hi, johav-i-tu.
A few
'

examples occur in B.
*

From nam

benri,

also.

with

loss of nasal (a

sonant nasal),

for

^-nan-

nan-ta.
*
In B. also occur the causative stems from intensives jagar-aya
and dadhar-^ya (dhr hold).

INTENSIVES

174-175]

The forms

B.

205

secondary type, which

of the

is

indis-

tinguishable from a passive in form, number only about

a dozen. They occur only in the 2. 3. s. and 3. pi. ind. pres.,
besides a few participles.
They are :
Pres. ind. sing. 2. co-sku-ya-se (sku

3.

tear).

dedis-

ya-te, ne-ni-ya-te, marmrj-ya-te, rerih-ya-te, vevij-yate,

vevi-yate

(vi enjoij).

PI.

tartur-yante (Vtv), marmrj-

3.

yante.
Part, earcur-ya-mana (\/car), neni-ya-mana, marmrj-

ya-mana.
Denominatives.

IV.

175. These verbs, inflected like those of the a conjugation

the suffix ya,
(132), are derived, almost exclusively with
from nouns, to which they express some such relation as

wish for
More than a hundred denominative stems occur in the RV.
and about fifty in the AV.^ The suftix is normally accented,
but a certain number of undoubted denominatives, such as
mantra-ya utter a prayer, artha-ya make an object of, desire,
'

be or act like

'

',

treat as

',

turn into

or

',

'

use as

'.

',

have the causative accent, thus forming a connecting link

between the regular denominatives and the causatives.
A. Before the
1.

final i

(kavi),
(rju)

enemy
2.

ened

suffix

ya

and u are lengthened

rayi-ya

desire

wealth

vasu-ya

desire

wealth

e. g.

(rayi)

(vasu)

kavi-ya

rju-ya

he

he tvise

straight

satru-ya play

the

(satru), he hostile.

final
;

it

a usually remains unchanged, but

is

sometimes changed

to i

is

often length-

and even dropped

1
Denominatives are less common in B. thus the AB. has hardly
twenty, and the SB. about a dozen.
*
Except arati-yS ud like an enennj, he hostile beside arati-yd, and
jani-ya seek a wife beside jani-ya gatu-ya set in motion (gatu).
3
In the Pada text the i is usually, the u is always, written short.
;

CONJUGATION

206
e. g.

jara-ya

treat like

[175
^

deva-ya serve the gods, rta-ya

act according to sacred order
asva-ya desire horses, rta-ya
observe sacred order (beside rta-ya), yajna-ya sacrifice
adhvari-ya perform the sacrifice (adhvara), putri-ya desire
a son (putra), rathi-ya - drive in a car (ratha) adhvar-ya
lover,

"^

perform
(tavisa

sacrifice
:

adhvari-ya),

(beside

tavis-ya le mighty

beside tavisi-y a).

a remains unchanged e. g. gopa-ya act as herdsman,

prtana-ya^ fight Final o, in the only example
occurring, becomes av gav-ya desire cotvs.
4. Consonant stems, the commonest being those in as,
nearly always remain unchanged; e.g. bhisaj-ya jj?^ the
3. final

ptrotect,

physician, heal uksan-ya act like a hull (uksan) ; vadhar-ya

hurl a holt (vadhar)
su-manas-ya he gracious (su-manas) ;
tarus-ya engage in fight (tarus).
;

a. A few denominative forms are made without a suffix, direct

from nominal stems, but nearly always beside regular denominatives
in ya. e. g. bhisak-ti from bhisaj act as pJiysicicm beside bhisaj-ya
and the forms taruse-ma, tarusa-nte, tarusa-nta (fi'om tarusa
;

conqueror) beside tarus-ya.

Inflexion.
B. All the tenses, moods, and participles of the present

system are represented. If made from namas-ya pug homage

the forms occurring would be
:

Pres. ind.

namasyami. 2. namasyasi.
3. namasyatas.
Du. 2. namasyathas.
namasyati.
2. namasyatha.
PI. 1. namasya-masi, -mas.
3. namas1.

act. sing.

1.

3.

yanti.

Mid. sing.

With

1.

namasy^.

2.

namasyase.

3.

namasyate.

causative accent.

The Pada text in this and nearly every example has

the Samhita text of the AV. has putri-yd.
'
The a may also be dropped prtan-yay/(//ii against.
2

i-ya.

Even

DENOMINATIVES

175]

207

3. namasy^te.
PL 1. namasyanamasy^the.
3. namasyante.
2. Subj. act. sing. 1. namasya.
3. na2. namasyas.
Du. 3. namasyatas. PI. 3. namasyan.
raasyat.
Mid. sing. 2. namasyase. 8. namasyate.
8. Inj. act. sing. 2. namasyas.
PI. 3. namasyan.
4. Opt. act. sing. 2. namasyas.
3. namasy^t.
PI. 1.

Du.

2.

mahe.

namasyema.
Mid. sing.

3.

namasy^ta.

Impv. act. sing. 2. namasya. 3. namasyatu. Du. 2.

namasyatam, 3. namasyatam. PI. 2. namasyata. 3. namasyantu.
Mid. sing. 2. namasyasva.
PI. 2. namasyadhvam.
3. namasyantam.
6. Part. act. namasyant.
Mid. namasyamana.
7. Impf. act.
sing. 2. anamasyas. 3. anamasyat. Du. 3.
namasyatam. PI. 3. anamasyan.
Mid. sing. 3. anamasyata. Du. 2. anamasyetham. PI. 3.
anamasyanta.
a. The only finite forms occurring outside the present
5.

system are four

Two

aorists.

are injunctives

(EV.) from

leave unfulfilled

(TS.)

lead into evil (papa)

3.

unaya
from papaya

asaparyait (AV.) has

s.

(una)
;

ivor shipped

2. pi.

2. s.

iinay-is

papay-is-ta

and two indicatives

(an irregular form,

3. pi. a-vrsay-is-ata (VS.) tliey

a-sapary-it)
have accep)ted} The TS. has also the three fut. participles

probably

kanduy-isyant

"
^

aJjout to scratch,
-

meghay-isyant ahout

to be

with the corresponding

pass. part, kanduyita, meghita, sikita.^

cloudy,
perf.

sikay-isyant

ahout

to drip,

B. also occurs the is aor. asuyit has murmured.

In B. also occurs the future gopay-isyati.
In B. there are also a few other past pass, jjarticlples and a few
111

gerunds.

CHAPTER V
INDECLINABLE WORDS
Prepositions.

176.

Two

have to be distinguished.
the
or
adverbial prepositions.
comprises
genuine
These are words with a local sense which, primarily used to

The

classes of prepositions

first

modify the meaning of verbs, came to be connected independently with the cases governed by the verbs thus
modified. They show no signs of derivation from inflexional
forms or (except tiras and puras) forms made with adverbial
suffixes.
The second class has been called adnominal
prepositions because they are not compounded with verbs,
but govern cases of nouns only. They almost invariably

end in case terminations or adverbial

1.

suffixes.

Adverbial Prepositions.

(if sam is included) fifteen genuine

when
used independently of verbs,
which,

There are fourteen or

prepositions
define the local

meaning of cases. They are almost entirely

employment with the ace, loc, and abl. As

restricted to

their connexion with the abl.

prepositions appear to

the ace. and

loc. only.

is only secondary, the genuine

have been originally connected with

As

a rule these prepositions follow,

but also often precede, their case.

1. The accusative is exclusively taken by acha towards,
ati hei/ond,

and tiras

anu

after,

abhi towards, prati (Gk. npoTL)

against,

across (cp. Lat. trans).

a. pari (Gk. -mpi) around takes the ace. primarily, but

secondarily and more frequently the abl. in the sense of

from

{around).

PREPOSITIONS

176-177]

xipa

h.

and

209

(with verl)s of motion) takes the aec. primarily,

fo

less frequently the loc. in the sense of hesiile, upon, at.

The locative

2.

is

exclusively taken

and primarily by adhi upon, antar

in, at, to,

puras

^ttl)

(Lat. inter) bettveen,

upon
a

on,

before.

adhi takes the

a.

by dpi (Gk.

abl. secondarily

and

less

commonly

in the sense

o{/rom {upon),

The last three secondarily take both abl. and ace. purds does
without change of meaning.
antar witli abl. nieans/>'o?rt {loHliin) ; with ace, behveen,
a with ace. means to, expressing the goal with verbs of motion.
WiUi the abl., if following,' it means/)-om (on) if preceding, up to.^
h.

so

The ablative seems

3.

to be used once or twice indepen-

dently with ava in the sense of clown from.

2.

Adnominal Prepositions.

177. These prepositions, being adverbs in origin, govern

Several of
oblique cases (except the dat.) independently.
them govern the genitive and the instrumental, cases that
are practically never connected with the genuine prepositions
in the Samhitas.
In the following list these prepositions

are grouped under the cases which they accompany :

Ace. : adhas below (also with abl. or gen.), antara
1.
between, abhi-tas around,

with

(also

abl.,

more

upari

paras beyond
pari-tas around (AV.),

above, hei/ond,

often inst.),

sanitur apart froni.^

saha ivith, sakam with, sumad tvitJi, smad

avas below (also abl.), paras outside (also ace. and abl.).
Abl. adhas beloiv (also ace. and gen.), avas dotvnfrom
Instr.

2.

ivith

3.

sometimes also precedes the abl. in this sense.

This is almost the only use of a in B. in C. it means both /rom
and up to.
^
In B. several adverbial instrumentals expressing situation or
direction govern the ace.
dntarena between, avarena below, parena
uttarena fo the north of, ddksinena to the south of.
beuond
'

It

1819

INDECLINABLE WORDS

210

[177-178

(also instr.), q.x^ far from (also gen.), rt6 tvithout, paras a2)art
from (also ace. and inst), pura before, bahir-dlia from out,
sanutar far from.
4. Gen.
puras-tad in front of^
:

Loc.

5.

saca

{in association) with, hesicle, at, in.

Adverbial Case-forms.
178. Many case-forms of nominal and pronominal stems,
not otherwise in use, are employed as adverbs.
Examples of all the cases appear with adverbial function.
1. Nom.
prathama-m firstly, dvitiya-m secondly. Such
adverbs were originally used in apposition to the verbal
often

action.
2. Ace.
these adverbs find their explanation in various
meanings of the case. They represent (a) the cognate ace.
e. g. bhuyas more, and
comparatives in taram added to
verbal prefixes, as vi-taram (kram) {stride) more ivldely
:

the appositional ace. e. g. nama hy name, rupam in form,

satyam truly (c) the ace. of direction e. g. agram (i) {go)
{h)

front of, before, astam (gam) {go) home {d) the ace. of
distance and time e. g. duram a long way off, far naktam
to the

hy nighi,

sayam

in the evening,

nityam

constantly,

purvam

formerly.

There are also sume

a.

stems, as ara-m
stems, as adas
3.

Instr.

adverbs derived from obsolete nominal

others from pronominal
nii-nam notv
i-dd.m here, now, ki-m idiy ?, yad when.
aec.

sufficiently,

the)-e,

adverbs with the ending of this case (sometimes

pi.) are formed from substantives, adjectives, and pronouns.

They usually express manner or accompanying circumstances,
as B2ih.a>s-di forcibly, navyas-a anew, ena in thisivay
also not
;

In B. the gen. is governed by this adverb as well as by paras-tad

suktasya purastat be/ore the hymn samvatsarasya paras Lat

after; e. g.

after a year.

ADVERBS

178-179]

211

infrequently extension of space or time, as agrena in front,

aktii-bhis hi/ night, div-a dtj day.
a. The substantive instrumentals are chiefly formed from feminines
in a not otherwise used, as rtaya in the right waij, naktaya by night.

The adjective instrumentals are formed from stems in a and

e.g. ucca and ucciis on high, pasca beltind, madhya in the
midst, sanais slowhj
pvko-a. forwards. Tliere are also several anomalous
fcaiinines from stems in u and one or two in i e.g. asu-y-a siviftlij,
b.

a few in c

raghu-y-a

sadhu-y-a straight, urviy-a/rtr.

c. The pronominal instrumentals are formed from stems in a and
one in u e. g. ana tints, ama at home, aya thus, kaya how ?, ubhaya in
rapidUj,

both

wags

amu-y-a

Dat.

4.

for

the

(vara
5.

in

tiiat

wag.

the adverbial use of the dat.

future (from apara

later),

is rare
aparaya
varaya according to ivish
:

choice).

Abl.
as

tives,

these adverbs are seldom formed from substan-

arat from a distance, asat from near

or from

pronouns, amat from near, at then, tat thus, yat as far as

but they are fairly often formed from adjectives, as uttarat
;

from the north, dUrat from afar, pascat from behind, sanat
from of old, saksat visihly.
6. Gen.
such adverbs are very rare
aktos hg night,
:

vastos
7.

in the morning.

Log.

agre in front, astam-ik6

179, The

at home,

ak6

dur6 afar; aparisu

in future.

Adverbs formed with

Suffixes.

afar, rte without,

suffixes

more

formation of adverbs

may

near,

commonly used

or less

ar6

in the

be grouped under the senses

expressed by the instr., abl., and loc. cases.

1. Instr.
tha forms adverbs of manner especially from
pronominal stems a-tha and more commonly (with short:

ened vowel) a-tha then, i-t-tha thus, ima-tha in this manner,

ka-tha how ?, ta-tha thus, ya-tha in ivhich manner, anya-tha
urdhva-tha upwards,
otherivise, visva-tha in every ivay
;

p2

INDECLINABLE WORDS

212

[179

purva,-tha formerly, pratna-tha as of old; rtu-tha regularly,

nama-tha h// name eva-tha just as.
;

a.

tham

is

similarly used in it-tham thus and

dha forms adverbs

ka-th^m

manner from numerals

of

Jwiv?

or cognate

kati-dha how
many times, puru-dha variously, bahu-dha and visva-dha
in many ivays, sasva-dha again and again.
It also forms
adverbs from a few nouns, adverbs, and pronouns priyadha Jcindly, mitra-dha in a friendly loay bahir-dha outward
a-dha then, a-d-dha [thus =) truly. The same suffix, with

words

eka-dha

dvi-dha

singli/,

in tiro ways,

vowel shortened, forms sa-dha {in one way =) together,

which appears as the first member of several compounds,
and as an independent word assumes the form of saha with.
its

&.

Tlie suffix

ha probably

also represents original

visva-ha and visvd.-ha

(Praki'it i-dha), kii-ha lohere?

in some way or other.

dha in i-ha liere

aiica/js, sama-ha

va, expressing similarity of manner, forms the two adverbs

i-va like, as, and e-va (often e-va) thus,
vam appears in

e-vam

thus,

the later form of eva.

vat forms adverbs meaning

adjectives

e. g.

manu-vat

like

from substantives and

Manu

like

purana-vat, pur-

as of old.

va-vat, pratna-vat
sas forms adverbs of

manner with

a distributive sense

sata-sas hy hundreds, sahasra-sas hy thousands, sreni-sas in

rows rtu-sas season hy season, deva-sas to each of the gods,
parva-sas joint hy joint, manma-sas each as he is minded.
;

forms two or three multiplicative adverbs dvi-s twice,

adha-s
It also appears in a few other adverbs
:

tri-s thrice.

dyu-s (from dyu day) in anyedyii-s next day and ubhaya-dyu-s on both days.
tas forms adverbs in the ablative sense from
2. Abl.
pronouns, nouns, and prepositions e. g. a-tas hence, amu-tas
daksina-tas from
thence, i-tas from here, mat-tas from me

helotv,

ava-s doivmcards

the right, hrt-tas

from

the heart

abhi-tas around, pari-tas

ADVERBS

179-180]

213

These adverbs are sometimes equivalent to

ato bhuyas more than that.
tat (an old abl. of ta that) forms adverbs with an abl.
sense (sometimes merging into the loc.)
e. g. adhas-tat
round about.
ablatives

e. g.

below

avat-tat from afar

pasca-tat /rom behind

puras-tat
prak-tat from the front.
3. Loc.
as forms adverbs chiefly of a local or temporal
sense tir-as across, par-as beyond, pur-as before sa-div-as
and sa-dy-as to-day, sv-as to-morrow, hy-as yesterday also
;

in or frotn the front

mith-as wrongly.
tra or tra forms adverbs with a

local sense,

mostly from

pi-onominal or cognate stems a-tra here, anya-tra elsewhere,

visva-tra everywhere
asma-tra among us, sa-tra in one
:

daksina-tra on

the right, puru-tra in many places,

bahu-tra amongst many deva-tra among the gods, martyatra among mortals, sayu-tra on a couch.

place,

a.
6. g.

These adverbs are sometimes used as equivalents of locatives,

hdsta a daksinatra iri the right hand.

da forms adverbs of time almost exclusively from pronominal roots i-da now, ka-da lohen ? ta-da then, ya-da at
ivhat time, sa-da and sarva-da always.
:

and da-nim, an extended

p. dam occurs beside da in sa-dam always
form of da, in i-da-nim notv, ta-da-nim then, visva-da-nim always.
y. There are also various miscellaneous adverbs, mostly of obscure
e. g. pur-a
origin, formed with other suffixes of rare occurrence
before, mith-u wrongly.
;

Conjunctive and Adverbial Particles.

180. anga emphasizes a preceding word (sometimes

separated from it by short particles like hi and im) in such
a way as to express that the action especially or exclusively
applies to that word, =just, only, else
yad ariga just ivhen, just because
;

who

kim anga

lioiv else,

why

else?

e. g. yo anga just he
tvam anga thou only
;

INDECLINABLE WORDS

214

[180

In B. ariga never has this meaning; but it sometimes there begins

with an adhortative sense, accentuating the verb aiigl, no

a.

a sentence

yajia^m vyac^ksva

pra?/ explain the sacrifice to ns (MS.).

atra sometimes occurs as the correlative to yad tvhcn ;

visve yad asyam ranayanta devah, pra vo 'tra sum-

e. g.

nam asyam

ivhen all the gods shall rejoice in

it,

then

may I

ohtain your favours.

atha, a collateral

form of adha, occurs chiefly in the more

EV., and entirely supplants the older
hymns
doublet in the later Vedas.
Connecting sentences and
of the

recent

It may
it expresses a temporal or logical sequence.
generally be translated by {and) then, (and) so when there
is a contrast, especially after a negative, it is equivalent to

clauses

It often corresponds to a yada when or hi since, as, in

but.
the antecedent clause. With very few exceptions atha begins

the sentence or clause.

te astu,

sakhyam

with the Maruts,

96")

(viii.

come

so

to

are

Examples

befriends
Indra, then thou shalt win all these battles

huv6 vam, atha ma (= ma a) gatam / call you,

me (viii. 10^) yad^d adevir asahista maya,
;

athabhavat kevalah somo asya when

godless

mariidbhir, indra,

athema visvah prtana jayasi

Soma became

iviles.

makim sam

makim

he had overcome the

exclusively his (vii. 98-)

makir

sari k6vate, atharista-

nesan,
risan,
bhir a gahi let none be lost, let none suffer harm, none incur
fracture in a pit, but come bach, tvith them uninjured (vi. 54").
From B. patim nu me punaryuvanam kurutam, atha
:

vam vaksyami
tell

you (SB.)

I am
a.

make my husband young again, then I shall

aham durg6 hanta^ity, atha kas tvam iti

called the slayer in danger, but loho are

dtha

is

also occasionally used after

an antecedent

you ?

(TS.).

gerunds (which are equivalent

clause) sdubhagyam asyai dattvaya^d,tha^_^fistam vi

pdretana having wished her luck, tlten go home (x. 85^^). This use is
common in B., where it also occurs after present participles and
to

locatives absolute.
h.

^tha in the sense of

also

connects substantives, but this use

represents an abridged sentence

e.g.

im6 somaso ddhi

turvfifie.

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

y^dau, im.6 kanvesu

vam

215

d.tha Uiese Sonia^ are heside Turva.<a,

beside

Yadu, {tlietj arc) also heside the Kanras for you (viii. 9'^). From B. idfim
hi pita^eva^agri 'tha putro 'tha pautrah/or liere first comes the father, then
:

the son, then the

grandson (SB.).

In B. atha also connects the verbs of a compound relative clause

ydsya pita pitamahdh punyah syad, atha t^n n^ prapnuyat whose
father and grandfather are inous, but ivho cannot attain to this (TS.).

c.

atho (= atha u) generally means and also, moreover:

arvavato na a gahy atho, sakra, paravatah come to us from
near, and also,
mighty one, from afar (iii. 37"). From B.
:

sam inddha

nakh^bhyo

himself completely up

to his

'tho

nails

and

lomabhyah

also his hair (SB.).

but also, e.g. t6 vi,i dv6
of them, but there may also

a. In B. atho sometimes has the sense of

bhavatah
atho api trini syuh there are two
.

he kindles

he three (SB.).

adha

EV.

occurs in the

only,

and almost exclusively, as

compared with atha, in the earlier hymns. Like the latter

it means then, expressing both a temporal and a logical
sequence

and

now
atha

when

there

at last
it is

that particularly

and even

adha... adha both...

a contrast, hut.

is

adha dvita and

adha sma

adha

nii just noiv

especially then.

Unlike

never used with u.

also, even generally precedes the word it

yo gopa api tarn huve he loho is the herdsman,
Mm too I call (x. 19^) osadhir bapsad agnir na vayati,
punar yan tarunir api Agni tires not of chewing plants,

dpi meaning

emphasizes

to the young ones (viii. 43"^).

From B. tad
dhaitad apy avidvamsa ahuh even those who do not know
say this (SB.) adyapi even to-day (AB.).
aram is an adverb meaning suitably, in readiness. Sometimes used like an adjective, it is construed with the dative
e. g. tavan ayam patave s6mo astu, aram manase yuva-

returning even

bhyam s^fc7i let

this

mind for you two

(i.

Soma

he {for you) to drink, according to (your)

108^);

In combination with kr

sasmai^aram it is ready for him.

means serve, prepare (anything)

it

INDECLINABLE WOEDS

216
for,

with gam,

sufficiently,
a.

serve, with bhu, accrue

always taking the dative.

dlara, the

suitaUi/ or

not fit for offering, nor

aha

any one)

form in which the preceding word appears in B., is there

e. g. sa nllam ahutya asa nalam bhaksaya it

often similarly used

was

(to

[180

for consuming (SB.).

fit

KV. and AV. emphasizes

in the

a preceding M^ord
be verb, substantive, pronoun, adjective, adverb,
or preposition.
Its sense may generally be exj^ressed by

whether

surely,

it

or merely by stress.

certainly, indeed, just,

It also

appears after other emphasizing particles such as id, gh6d,

ut6, im.
Examples of its use are: kvaha ivhere jpray?
(x.

naha

51^);

not at all

esu ranyati in

(i.

147^)

the pressings

yasyaha sakrah savan-

of wJiomsoever

the

mighty one

rejoices (x. 43*^).

In B. this use of dha is still found. But here it generally occurs in

first of two slightly antithetical sentences, the verb of the first
being then nearly always accented, while the antithesis in the second
the

either not expressed at

sentence

is

fitha, u,

or tu

all, or is indicated by the particles

paracy d,ha dev6bhyo yajndm vdhaty arvaci
manusyan avati turned away it takes the sacrifice to the gods ; turned hither
it advances men
Sometimes (in MS. and TS.) dha is thus used
(SB.).
with the first of two va's e. g. kdsya vahedam svo bhavita kdsya va
;

e. g.

this ivill to-morroio belong either to the one or the otJier

(MS.).

a (otherwise a preposition) appears in V. fairly often

emphasizing, in the sense of completeness, words expressive
of number or degree, or sometimes even ordinary adjectives
and substantives e. g. trir a divah three times each day
142 ) k6 vo varsistha a, narah ivho is the very mightiest
(i.
;

of you, heroes? (i. 37*'); pra bodhaya puramdhim jara a

sasatim iva awake the wise man, just as a lover a sleeping
maiden (i. 134^).
ad (originally an abl. of the pronoun a =.from or after
that) is

used as an adverb expressing sequence of time

thereupon, then, often as a correlative to yad,

when, sometimes to the relative

when

yada or yadi
equivalent to those

conjunctions: yad^d ayukta haritah sadhasthad ad ratri

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PAKTICLES

180]

vasas tanute as soon as he has yoked

his steeds

then night spreads her garment

115"^);

(i.

217

from their stall,

adha yo visva

bhiivanabhy avardhata, ad rodasi jy6tisa vahnir atanot

now {who =) 'When he surpassed all beings, then the charioteer
overspread the

tivo

worlds with light

(ii.

17*).

sometimes connects words and clauses in the sense of and,

moreover asau ca ya na urvd.ra^ad imam tanvam md.ma that field of ours
and this mij body (viii. 91) yad, indra, dhan prathamajam ahinam, an
a.

It

mayinara. dmiuah prot^ m.ayah when,, Indra, thou didst slay the firstborn
of t fie serpents and thai didst bring to nought the tviles of the wily (i. 32*).
b. It is sometimes used with interrogatives, when it means then,
pray

kim ad ^matrara sakhyam

Iiow

mighty then

the friendship ?

is

(iv. 23").
c. Unless used
with interrogatives, ad almost invariably begins
the Pada.
d. ad is often followed by id, when it means just then, then at once,

then more than ever.

iti thus is used with verbs of speaking and thinking,

which have sometimes to be supplied. The particle generally
concludes the speech and is followed by the verb ya indra ya
:

'

tvho sags

ive tvill

Soma for Indra

'

press
sunavama^iti^aha
n6ndro asti^iti n6ma u tva aha Indra does not
(iv. 25*)
Less commonly the
exist one and another sags (viii. 100').
verb precedes: jyestha aha camasa dva kara^iti the eldest
said I ivlll make two cups (iv. 33''). Very rarely both iti and
*

'

'

'

the verb precede the speech: vi prchad iti mataram, ka

ugrah he asked his mother, who are the strong ones? (viii. 77^).
'

'

The verb

is

occasionally omitted

tvasta duhitr6

vahatum

krnoti^iti^idam visvam bhuvanam sam eti Tvastr prepares

a ivedding for his daughter' (thinking) thus this tvhole world
^

Thus a principal sentence as direct

comes together (x. 17^).
is
used
with
iti
in other languages a subordinate
where
speech
sentence would be employed.
1. In B. the use of iti is much the same, only that iti regularly follows
and seems seldom to be omitted the verbs of saying and thinking,
too, with which it is employed, are more numerous
t6.tha^iti deva
abruvau 'j/es', said the gods (SB.).
;

INDECLINABLE WOEDS

218

[180

There are in B. also some additional uses

Very often the quotation is only an appellative that may be
expressed by inverted commas yams tv etad deva aditya iti^a-c^ksate
2.

a.

wJiom they

thus: 'the divine Adifyas' (SB.).

Sometimes iti is used at the end of an

6.

call

forms a well-known aggregate

yasmin prano vak caksuh. srotram iti
that

it

are breath,

enumeration to express
etad vai sirah. samrddham

fhat is a complete head in nhich

ear (KB.).

sijeech, eije,

c. The
particle is also often used in a special sense with reference
to a ritual act to indicate how it is done
iti^gre krsati^dtha(_,iti,_;
:

dtha iti^dtha^iti(_^atha^iti (SB.)

then

so,

then so

so,

{=

as you

so he first draivs theftirroxo, then so, then

see).

Sometimes a conjunction is introduced before the quotation

that ends with iti, but without changing the construction s4 rt4ra
abravid yatha s^rvasv evd. samavad vasani^iti (MS.) he sivore {that)
I will dwell with all equally^ (= that he icoidd).
d.

'

ittha primarily

ittha as

means

so

ganta

Ijcfore, so come ye noiv

(i.

nunam

39")

yatha pura^
satyam ittha truly so
mean (just so as it
.

(viii. 33"^').
Secondarily it comes to
should be=) truly: krnoti^asmai varivo ya ittha^indraya
somam usat6 sunoti lie (Indra) gives ease to him that truly

presses

Soma for Indra who

the word

is

desires

it

In

(iv. 24'').

sometimes used like an adjective

this sense

ittha sakhi-

bhyah/o>" (those who are truly =) true friends (iii. '^2'^^).

id (n. of the pron. stem i, Lat. i-d) is a very common
particle in the RV., is much less frequent in the AV., and
is comparatively rare in B.^
It emphasizes preceding words
of all kinds, including the finite verb (which it accents), and

may
by

usually be rendered by just or stress only, sometimes

even

this is

e. g.

tad in naktam tad id diva

what they

tell

me

id indrasya sarmani

may

this

mahyam ahuh

hy day (i. 24^-) ;

we he in Indra's care (i. 4^)

by night,

syama
adha

sma no maghavan carkrtad

it then especially thinJc of us,

sadrsir adya sadfsir id u svah
When the verb is
to-day, alike even to-morrow (i. 123'^).

Bounteous One
alilce

(i.

104'^)

1
In classical Sanskrit id survives only in the compound particle
ced //= ca-id.

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

compound, the
not the verb

jalgulah
mortar (i.

particle

219

regularly follows the preposition,

v, indra,

ulukhala-sutanam ava^id

itself:

Ii/dra,

gul2) eagerly doivn,

drops shed by the

llie

28^).

n^ ta it sadyo 'ny^smai dti

a. In B. the particle is similarly used
diset he should noi assign {just those =) the same {cows) to another on the
:

same

da>f

iva

(SB.)

is

an

tatha^in

nundm

enclitic particle

means

td.d

asa now thus

with two uses

it

came

to

pass (SB.).

in abbreviated similes in appoIt follows

like yatha.
a
clause
sition, never introducing
the word with which comparison is made if the comparison
consists of several words, the particle generally follows the
1.

It

as

if, as,

lilic

the second. The comparison is usually

but
not
infrequently it is only partially expressed.
complete,
This employment of iva is very common in V., but comfirst,

less

commonly

Examples of this use are dur6 cit

paratively rare in B.
san talid ivati rocase even though far away, thou shinest
:

brightly as if near at

hand

(i.

heaven

(i.

as such be accessible to us,

94^)

see that step like

bhava

22-)

padam

tat

pasyanti
an eye fixed in
sa nah pita^iva sunave agne supayano

diviva caksur atatam they

Agid, as a father

to his

son

dviso no ati nava^iva paraya taJce its across our foes

tabhi rajanam
as [across the ocean] in a ship (i. 97')

(i. l^j

parigrhya tisthati samudra iva

bhumim

with these he keeps

embracing the king, as the sea the earth (AB.).

2. It modifies a statement not intended to be understood
in

meaning

its strict sense,

as

it

were.

It chiefly follows

iva is
adjectives, adverbs, prepositions or verbs. This use of
are
in
B.
common
but
in
rare
Examples
iha^_,iva
V.,
very
srnve I hear close at hand as it were (i. 37") tad, indra,
:

pra^iva viryam cakartha

that heroic deed,

perforin [asittvere=) quite pre-eminently

(i.

Indra, thou didst

103')

yapra^iva

nasyasi who [as it were=) almost losest thyself (i. 146^);

yadi tan na^iva haryatha if ye are not quite pleased ivith that
From B. tasmat sa babhruka iva hence he {is as
(i. 161^).
:

INDECLINABLE WORDS

220

[180

he called hrown (SB.)

rebhati^iva he seems to
tan na sarva iva^abhipra padyeta not exactly
every one should have access to that (SB.)
upari,_^iva vai tad

it

tvere=)

may

chatter (AB.)

yad urdhvam nabheh

above

may

he called what is higher than

the navel (SB.).

im

(an old enclitic ace. of the pron. root

is almost restricted to the RV.

employed as an
sometimes even as an

It is generally

1.

i)

occurs in V.

and

only,

= him,

her,

it,

ace. sing, of all

ace. du. or pi.

genders
It either

takes the place of a noun, or prepares for a following noun,

or is accompanied by other pronouns (tarn, yam, enam,

a gachanti^im avasa they come to him with aid

(i. 85^^)
a^im asiim asave bhara hring him, the swift, to the
tam im hinvanti dhitayah him devotions impel
swift (i. 4")

enan)

e. g.

(i.

144^)

when
2.

yad im enan usato abhy avarsit

with yad {whenever), with interrogatives

(ivhoever),

pray ?),
ajayah

narah

(vii.

103^)

has rained upon them that longed (for rain).

im also appears as a generalizing particle with relatives
it

is

with

kim cana

[nothing at

all)

tvJiatever conflicts take place (vii.

[ivho,

yd im bhavanti
ka im vyakta
32^'^)
e. g.

ivho, pray, are the radiant men? (vii. 56^).

an enclitic particle, often written u where the metre

requires or favours a long syllable, especially in the second

It often
syllable of a Pada, before a single consonant.

appears contracted to o (ep. 24) with a preceding a or a

(mostly the final of particles or prepositions, also of the
pron. esa, sometimes of verbal forms).
uses in the RV.

It has

two main

of

1.

It is

a.

With

employed

an action

deictieally

with verbs and pronouns.

expresses the immediate commencement

with a past
with a present
now, already

verbs

it

with an imperative, injunctive, or optative

sii is here very often
used in an impv. sense = at once
=
When the verb is accomadded, u su being
instantly.

tense =JMs^;

panied by a preposition, the particle regularly follows the

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

ISO]

221

Examples of its use are lid u tyam jatavedasam

devam vahanti ketavah Ms beams note hear aloft the god that
knows all creatures (i. 50^) abhud ii bhah the light has just
latter.

arisen

46^)

(i.

Agni, our neighhourlng foes

instantly,

This use of

a.

tapa^u sv agne antaran amitran

u with

(iii.

hum

18^).

verbal forms does not seem to be found in B.

emphasizes deictic pronouns, which may then be

rendered by stress, and interrogative pronouns, when it may
be translated by pray ; e. g. ayam u te, sarasvati, vasistho
h.

It

dvarav rtasya subhage vy avah

for

ka u sravat
a.

this

Vasisfha has opened

hountiful Sarasvati, the tivo doors of sacrifice

thee,

hear ?

ivho, xoray, ivill

In B. this use

very rare with deictic ijronouns, but not

e. g. idam u no bhavisyati yadi no

is

infrequent with interrogatives

jesyd,nti this at least loill remain

to us, if

they conquer us (TS. )

kim u

sa

iva yajiadm n^ duhita iohat sort of sacrifice,

? (MS.).
if he were not to milk out the sacrifice like a cow

yajnena yajeta yd
pray, would he offer

(vii. 95*')

(iv. 43^).

gam

used anaphorically to connect sentences, when a word (usually the first) is repeated in the
second, in the sense of also e. g. trir naktam yathas, trir
2,

The

particle

is

u, asvina,

diva

thrice

Asvins,
hy night ye come, thrice also,
trata tvam u no vrdh^ bhuh thoic he

hy clay (i. 34'^) tvam

our protector, thou, too, he for our increase (i. 178^). The
no
repeated word need not always have the same form yo
;

dv6sty adharah. sas padista,

yam u dvismas tam u prand

jahatu may he ivho hates us fall downward; ivhom also loe hate,
him too let his breath forsake (iii. SS^i). The u sometimes
appears in both sentences, sometimes in the first only:

vayam u
call thee
a.

tva diva sut6,

hy day

It is

to the

vayam naktam havamahe

pressed Soma,

tve also

hy night

sometimes used without referring back

tve

(viii. 64'').

definitely,

but simply adding some similar quality or activity with

and also, and e. g. sa devo
reference to the same thing
u ta paribhur brahvisv6d
devan prati paprathe prthu,

manas pdtih he,

and

he,

the god,

has extended himself tvidely

Lord ofVrayer, embraces

all this universe

(ii.

to the

24^^).

gods,

INDECLINABLE WORDS

222

[iso

same sentence, expresses a contrast = on

more frequently, with the demonstrative ta

It also, in the

h.

the contrary, or,

e. g.
corresponding to the relative ya
again, in return
striyah satis tan u me pumsa ahuli tJiose who are women,
them on the contrarti they speak of to me (as) men (i. 1Q4}^')
;

yd adhvar^su h6ta

tam u namobhir a krnudhvam him

ivho is xiriest at sacrifices, in return bring hither with devotions

772).

(i.

In B. the anaphoric use is common, prevailing chiefly in the

SB.
e.g. t^smad va indro 'bibhet, tasmad u tvastabibhet of thai
Indra ivas afraid, of that also Tvastr loas afraid (MS.).
a. The demonstrative here often refers back with u to
previous
statements uto pancavattam ev^ bhavati pankto yajnah, panktah
pasuh, paiicartavah samvatsarasya
esa^u paiacavattasya sampat
a.

hut

it

is also

divided into five parts

the sacrifice is fivefold, cattle are fivefold,

year are five : this is the sum of what is divided into five
Similarly used are the phrases tdd u ha smaha with
reference to this he used to say, tad u hovaca with reference to this he said
tad u tatha n^ kuryat that one should not do thus.
the seasons of the

parts (SB.).

0. A slight contrast is expressed by ii in the second sentence

yadi nasnati pitrdevatyo bhavati, yady v asnati devan aty asnati
:

if

he does not eat, he becomes a tvorshipper of

tJte

Manes, but

if

he does

eat,

he

eats before the gods (SB.).

Used

kim, u expresses a climax in the

manusya in nva upastirnam ichanti,
kim u deva yesam navavasanam even men ivish for something spread out,
7.

in combination with

second clause

= how

how muclt more

the

mucli more

gods whose

is

a neio dwelling (TS.).

uta in the RV. means and, connecting two or more words

or sentences.
a. The particle commonly couples two words
e. g. yah
prthivim uta dyam 6ko dadhara who alone has siifiported
heaven and earth (i. 154^).
When there is an enumeration
of more than two objects, uta comes after the last
e. g.
adite, mitra, varuna^uta
Aditi, Mitra, and Vannia
When a word is repeated from the beginning of
(ii. 27^*).
a clause, uta (like u) follows the repeated word trih saubhagatvam trir u.ta sravamsi nah thrice (grant) us prosjjerity
and thrice fame (i. 34^).
.

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PAETICLES

180]

When

I).

uta connects a sentence with a preceding one, it

et^nagne brahmana vavrdhasuta pra nesy abhi vasyo asman tvith this xirayer,

placed at the beginning

is

va

c.

strengthen thyself, and

Ac/ni,

fortune

va

223

onward

lead us

to

greater

SV"^).

(i.

uta. ..uta

means

both. ..and;

uta va or; uta va...uta

or;
uta^idanim bhagavantah syama^^uta
prapitva uta madhye ahnam both notv may we be fortunate
and at eventide and at midday (i. 41'^) samudrad uta va
divas pari from the ocean or from heaven (i. il*') ya apo
divya uta va sravanti khanitrmah either the waters that are
either...

e. g.

celestial or that Jioiv

a.

assertion generally

uta

channels

in.

(i.

49-).

In B. uta does not mean and, but

and not

even, emphasizing the

notion in the sentence

also,

(like api) a single

bhavati jivaty ev^ ecen when his breath is gone, he still

lives (TS.).
Even when preceding a substantive ut^ seems to refer to
the whole statement uta matsya eva matsyam gilati it is also tlie case
yddi^_^ita,sur

that one fish devours another

(SB.).

0.

With

take place

the 025tative
:

that an action might after

utfi exjiresses

uta^^evsun cid devan abhi

bhavema

all

we might thus

after all

overcome the gods (SB.).

h. utd...uta in B.
(as well as in V.) means both... and: ut^ rtava
uta pasava iti bruyat lie slwuld say hoih fite seasons and tlie animals (SB.).
7. uta is i-egularly the first word in the sentence except that kim
or forms of ta or ya precede it
tasmad uta bahur apasur bhavati
'

'

flierefore

ecen fhougli rich

lie

bcconies caftleless (SB.).

uto (= uta u) in the RV. means and also: uto no asya

usaso jus6ta hi and may he also be pleased tvith us this
morning
In

(i.

131*').

uto has the sense of but also or also ahavaniye havimsi

uto garhapatya eva srapayanti lliey slioidd cook tlie
srapayeyuh
a.

13.

oblation on

tlie

Ahavcmlija fin; hut they also cook

it

on the Garhapatya (SB.).

eva has two uses in the RV. and the AV.

At the beginning of sentences or clauses it means thus,

referring either to what precedes or follows e. g. evagnir
gotamebhir astosta thus Agni has been praised by the
Gotamas (i. 77^) eva tarn ahur indi'a 6ko vibhakta
1.

thus they speak of

him

'

Indra

is

the one dispenser

'

(vii. 26"^).

INDECLINABLE WORDS

224

It often appears as the con-elative of

[180

as

yatha

yatha na

purvam aparo
as the later

jdhaty, eva, dhatar, ayumsi kalpayaisam

abandons not the earlier, so, Creator, arrange their

With the impv. eva = so, then eva vandasva

varunam brhantam (viii. 42-) then praise the lofty Varuna

lives (x. 18').

(who has done these great

2. As an emphasizing
which stress is laid, eva
quite,

alone,

6ka eva

&c.,

or

quite alone

spontaneously, jata

eva

following the word

particle

be variously rendered

may

stress

by
;

deeds).

atraiva

e. g.

on

just,

tarn eva him only

just here

svayam eva

scarcely horn, na^^eva not at

quite

all.

a. In B. the first of the above uses has entirely clisapi;)eared (evdm

here taking the place of ev^), while the second is extremely common.
The particle follows all kinds of words requiring emphasis for any
reason; this is especially the case when a word is repeated
e.g.
;

yd,m Sgre 'gnim hotraya pravrnata, s pradhanvad, y5.m dvitiyam

pravrnata, sa prfi^_^eva^adhanvat ihe Agni ivJiom they first chose for the
he ichom they chose the second time, likewise jjerished
notions are connected by w.iy of contrast or otherfollow either the first or the second e. g. amum evd,

priesthood, perished

(SB.).

When two

wise, evd,

may

deva upayan, imam d,surah (SB.)

the

Asuras

Soma

this one

(the earth)

the gods inherited that world

(heaven),

somo yusmakam, vag evasmakam

(let)

(be) yours, Vac ours (^B.).

evam

thus occurs only once in the

RV.

(as correlative to

yatha as) and in the AV. not at all with yatha, but only as
an adverb with the verb vid Jcnow ya evam vidyat he ivho
:

may possess such hnoivledge.

In B. evam

veiy common, having two uses

y^tha as, being often accompanied by a form
of the same verb as the latter ; e. g. ydtha vdi parjdnyah siivrstim
1.

is

It is correlative to

vdrsaty, evd.ni yajiio ydjamanaya varsati as Parjanya rains heavily, so

When the second verb is
the sacrifice rains for the sacrificer (TS.).
e.g. t deva abby
omitted, ydtha. .evd,m is equivalent to iva
;

asrjyanta y^tha vittim vetsyfimana evdm the gods rushed up like those
wishing to oHain piropertg (SB.).
in the very
2. It accompanies verbs as an .ndverb, especially

frequent phrase

evdm

yd,

evdm v6da

cin ua labheran

he

who

possesses such knowledge

after all they ivill thus not touch

it

(SB.).

utfi^

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

]80]

kam

an accented and an unaccented

as

appears l)oth

The foriner use

the KV. only.

particle.

latter in

225

is

found in both V. and

B.. the

to the

kam as an adv. with the full meaning well (equivalent

Vedic sam) appears in B. only e. g. kam me 'sat

may

he well with

a.

1.

it

form

me (SB.);

a-kam bhavati

it

also occurs in a negative

he fares not well (TS.).

kam

has the same meaning attenuated after datives

at
the end of a Pada) either of persons
j^r i/e
(generally
b.

of

henejit

kam

i/e

of Tiujra

182'")

(i.

shiji in the
;

samanam

(ix.

106^^)

the

same hue

waters for the benefit of

tvam devaso amrtaya kam

B.

benefit

is

kam

kasmai

the

anjy anjate siibh6

saJce

(vii. 57'^) witli

to

shine {well).

iti

for whose

tdjase kani

purnama

agnihotram hiiyata

Agnihotra offered? (MS.)

ijyate for the

of immortalitji

kam

adorn themselves in order

theij

sindhusu plavam taugryaya

thee the r/ods hare drunl; for the love

papuh

From

eakrathiil;i

two hare placed that

son

the

commodi)

(dat.

yuvam etam

e. g.

or of abstract nouns (final dative)

of splendour the fill moon

sacrifice

is

offered (MS.).
2. The unaccented kam occurs in the RV. only excepting
one independent passage of the AV. It always appears as
an enclitic following the particles nu, su, hi. It means
wiUinghj, gladly, indeed, but the sense is generally so attenuated as to be untranslatable, nu kam appears with the inj.,

impv., subj., ind., also in relative clauses e.g. aso nu kam

su kam
ajaro vardhas ca be imaging and grow (x. 50'').
tistha
su
with
the
maghakam,
only
imperative
appears
;

van,

ma

further

(iii.

532).

(occasionally

raja hi

who

Yd

means

kam bhuvananam
(n.

ivhy

of ki
?

e. g.

still,

kam

omitted),

rules over beings

kim

bounteous god, go not

generally appears with the ind.
sometimes with impv. or subj.

praji stand

para gah

(i.

= ka)

abhisrih /br ho indeed

is

the king

98^).

has two uses.

kim u

sr^sthah

In the

first

place

it

kim yavistho na ajagan

INDECLINABLE WORDS

226

why has

has the youngest come

the best, ivhij

[180

us

to

(i.

161^).

It is also a simple interrogative particle (equivalent to a

mark

of interrogation)

juseta
(vii.

86^)

free

beyond the ivcUiin? (AV.

else

kim me havyam ahrnano

e. g.

from anger, enjoy an ohlatlon of mine ?

kim rajasa ena paro any ad asti is there anything

tvotild he,

v. ll'^).

With following u it here adds

a. In B. kim is similarly used.
a climax in a second sentence = hoio much more (see u) with following
ut^ and the optative it means ivluj after all e. g. kim utd tvareran
;

why, after

kila,

all, sho^(ld they

an

hasten? (6B.).

uncommon

certainly, strongly

particle

emphasizes

(in

in V., meaning indeed,

EV. and AV.) the preceding

word (noun, pronoun, adjective, and the negative na) e. g.

svadiis kila^ayam (vi. 47^) sweet, indeed, is this (Soma)
tadttna satrum na kila vivitse then thou didst find no foe at
;

all

(i.

32*).

similar; e.g. ksipriim kila^a strnuta (6b.)

But here kila usually follows other
esa v&i kila haviso yamah this, indeed, is
particles, v&i or (ha) vavd,
tava ha vava kila bhagava idam Sir,
the course of the sacrifice (6b.)
a.

In B. the use

is

quickly, then, sjjread (the barhis).

:

you only (AB.\

this belongs to

kuvid, a pronominal interrogative particle, introduces

sentences which, though apparently independent, are treated
as dependent, since the verb (except twice in the RV.) is
regularly accented.
particle's liaving

This use seems to have arisen from the

been employed as an

elliptical expression of
"

doubt such as might be rendered by I wonder (whether)

e. g. tdm, indra, madam a gahi kuvin nv asya trpnavah
'

come, Indra, to this carouse (to see) whether you shall enjoy
(iii.

42^)

Soma
a.

(x.

kuvit somasya
119^)

= (I

In B. kuvfd

fias lie actually killed

silent? (6b.).

is

apam

have

I, indeed,

it

drunk

wonder) whether I have drunk Soma.

e. g. kuvin me putrfim dvadhit
kuvit tuanim aste does he indeed sit

similarly used

my

iti

son

(SB.)

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

ISO]

khalu

indeed, in truth, does not occur at all in the

and only once in the RV., where

In B. the particle

with other

is

common.

AV..
emphasizes an imperative

it

mitram krnudhvam khalu pray,

a.

227

conclude friendship

It is rarely

(x. 34^*).

used alone, but often

particles.

appears alone with the impv., subj., or ind. e.g. dtra khdlu
ramata here, pray, remain (f^B.) rdhn^vat khdlu sd. yo raaddevatyam
a.

It

agnim
crated

add.dliatai he indeed shall prosper who shall establish a fire conseto

me(TS.); asmakdra evd^idfim kh^lu bhuvanam

to

us alone

indeed this loorld belongs (SB.).

b. After the particles u or i,tho

and before or after v^i, it emphasizes

the word preceding the combined particles; e.g. td u khdlu maha-

yajio bhavati

thus, indeed, the great sacrifice arises (6b.).

used either to express an (usually preferred)

or rather, but sjirehj rather
or to introduce an
e. g. vaisvadevdm iti bruyad, dtho khfilu aindr^m fti
objection
bruyat 'for all gods' one should say, or else one should say 'for Indra'
(TS.); diksitena satyam eva vaditavyam
atho khalv ahuh
ko
'rhati manusyah sarvam satyam vaditum iti an initiated man should
speak the truth only ; noiv they make the objection : what man can speak the
a.

khd,lu

fitho

alternative

is

or else,

'

truth?' (AB.).
vdi kh^lu can only be distinguished from vdi alone as an
emphatic vi,i. But kh&lu v&i in the TS. and AB, has the special use
of introducing a second causal protasis after a first
with
ichole

^.

beginning
simple vdi, the conclusion then following with evd e.g. prajapaty6
v&i purusah
prajapatih kh&lu v&i td.sya veda
prajapatim evi,
avina, bhagadhey^na upa dhavati now mayi comes from Prajapati
; again
Prajapati knows about him : so he approaches Prajapati icith the portion (of
the sacrifice) belonging to him (TS.). This use
occasionally occurs even
though the preceding clause does not begin with vfii.
;

gha

is

an

enclitic particle,

almost restricted to the RV.

Generally occupying the second place in the Pada, it is with

few exceptions metrically lengthened to gha. It emphasizes
the preceding word, which is nearly always either the
negative nd, or a pronoun (demonstrative or personal), or a
verbal preposition, the meaning being
variously rendered by
It emphasizes a noun
just, onJif, very, or merely stress.

only

twice and a verb only once in the

at least at the third

amrtasa etat

Soma

libation

RV.
(i.

16P)

those immortals desire this (x.

w2

gha savane
usanti gha t^

trtiye
;

10'*).

INDECLINABLE WORDS

228

[180

and is an enclitic conjunction used

words and sentences. It regularly follows
an accented word, and when it adds a clause, the first word
ca (Gk.

re, Lai. -que)

to connect both

of that clause.

ca connects

1.

substantives

e.
numerals) and adverbs
I invoice Mitra and Varuna
;

and

the patrons

ive

(i.

73^)

(including

pronouns and

mitram huve varunam ca

maghavano vayam ca
(i. 2')
satam 6kam ca a hundred and

g.

adya nunam ca to-day and now (i. 13^).

117^^)
(i.
In a few passages (but never in B.) the ca follows the first
usasa niffht and
word instead of the second nakta ca

one

morning

73'').

(i.

a. ca...ca are used mucli in the same way; e.g. girdyas ea dyava
divds ca gm&s
ca bhuma the mountains and heaven-and-earth (i. 61^*)
ca of heaven and of earth (i. 37^) asman ca tarns ca us and fliem (ii. 1"^)
n^va ca navatira ca nine and ninetij (i. 32'*) a ca para ca carantam
moving hither and away (i. 164^').
Similarly in B. devas ca(_;asuras ca gods and Asxras (SB.) sastfs
ca trmi ca satani sixty and three hundred purastac cai__^updristac ca
from before and from behind.
ndkta ca cakrur usd,sa
j3. ca...ca sometimes also express a contrast
krsnd.m ca v^rnam arund,m ca s^m dhuh they have made
virupe
night and morning of different aspect : they have imt together the black colour
and the ruddy (i. 73'').
;

in

Similai'Iy
sacrifices loth

B.

what

is

ubhdyam gramydm
fame and mhat

is ivihl

ca^_^aranydm ca juhoti he

(MS.).

a.
peculiar use of ca in the RV.
vocative in the form of a nominative

ca

yatam

Vayu and Indra, come

is

to

e. g.
(i.

add a second

vayav indras

2*^).

Another peculiar use of ca, both in V. and B., is to

add one noun (nearlj^^ always in the nom.) to another which
has to be supplied e. g. a yad indras ca dadvahe when we
h.

and Indra, receive

pibatam, brhaspate do ye,
two,

(I)

drink

(viii.

34^^)

(thou),

indras ca

somam

Brhaspati, and Indra.

(iv. 50^'>).

From

B.

(he) and
samjnarn krsnajiuaya ca

ta brhaspatis ca^anvavaitam they two,

Brhaapati, followed them (TS.)

tat

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

vadati

so he

pronounces harmoni/ (between

it)

and

229

the black

antelope skin (SB.).

o. In B. ca is used to add a siiiglt; word at the end of a sentence in
the sense of and {so did) e. g. sr^mena ha sma vdi tdd deva jayanti
y^d esam jfiyyam asa^fsayas ca hy penance the gods were wont to loin what
;

won by them, and

ivas to be

so

did the seers (SB.

).

interrogative ka, or the relative ya

und the interrogative ka combined, gives them an indefinite
sense: kas ca or yah kas ca any one, whoever (cp. 119 h).
2. ca also connects both principal sentences and relative
a devdbhir yahi yaksi ca come with the gods and
clauses
ya vyusur yas ca nunam vyuchan that
sacrifice (i. 14^)
have shone forth and that shall now shine forth (i. 113^");
yd 'sman dvesti yam ca vayam dvismah who hates us and
c.

ca following

tlie

whom we
a.

hate (SB.).

ca...ca connect sentences

express a contrast

to

by

means

of parallel verbal forms which are either identical or

at least appear in the same number and person, the first

verb being then always accented para ca yanti

ca yanti they yo away and come again (i. 123^''^).
:

a.

In B. the use of ca...ca

is

simihar

e. g.

punar a

vatsd.m ca^upavasrjAty

ukham
Tlie

caj^^adhi srayati he admits ih'e calf and puts the pot on the fire (TS.).
rule of accentuation api>lies even when tire second verb is

omitted

agnaye ca havih paridddati guptya asyai ca prthivydi

he delivers the oblation for protection

to

Fire

and

lo

this

Earth (SB.).

This

connecting use is particularly common in parallel abridged relative

sentences
sSrvan pasun ni dadhire ye ca gramya ye ca^_,aranyah
they laid down all animals, those that are tame and tliose that are wild (SB.).
:

3.

ca

is

used a few times in V. in the sense of if with, the

subjunctive or the indicative: indras ca mrlayati no, na

nah pascad agham nasat if Indra he gracious to us, no
calamity will hereafter befall us

pratiharyatha, naro, visv^d

graciously accept this song,

from you

(i.

41^\); imam ca vacam

vama vo asnavat if ye

(ii.

heroes,

it

will obtain all goods

40^).

cana, properly meaning not even,

is

most usually employed

INDECLINABLE WORDS

230

[180

e.
g. trtiyam asya nakir a dadharsati,
cana
vayas
patayantah patatrinah no one dares approach

after a negative

third

his

155*).

(i.

where
comes

it

(step),

not

even the winged

birds though

they fly

From its use in such supplementary clauses,

may also be translated by even, the latter sense

to be the natural or

even necessary one after a negative

e. g. yasmad rt6 na sidhyati

in a single clause sentence

yajn6 vipascitas cana without whom

the sacrifice does not

succeed [not] even of the ivise man (i. 18") ; indram na mahna
prthivi cana prati even the earth is not equal to Indra in
greatness (i. 81*). As one of the two negatives is superfluous
in a single clause sentence, cana alone occasionally does
mah6 cana tvam para sulkaya
duty for the negative
:

deyam

not even for a great reward would

give thee

away

(viii. 1*).

In a few passages, even when there is no accompanying

cana throwing off its own negative sense, means
aham cana tat suribhir anasyam I too would
even, cdso
adha cana srdd
acquire this with the patrons (vi. 26")
dadhati therefore cdso they believe (i. 55*).
a.

negative,

a.

B.

Ill

cana appears only after

negative

in

single

clause

sentences, in which n& cana means not even e. g. na hainani sapdtnas

tvistiirsamanas cand strnute no enemij fells him even U/ough desirunj io fell
;

hv,n

8B.\

cana gives the interrogative an indefinite sense

cana any one, na kas cana no one (cp. 119 b).
li.

kas

cid is an enclitic particle very frequently used to emphasize

the preceding word.
It has two senses:
1. expressing that the statement is not to be expected
in regard to the

arujo

word emphasized

even

e. g.

drdham

cid

gavyam urvam

through

(iii.

32^'^).

even the firm eoivstall thou hast broken

This sense is, however, sometimes so

attenuated as to be capable of being rendered by stress only

e. g. tvam cin nah samyai bodhi svadhih be thou attentive

to

our endeavour

(iv. S*).

180]
2.

pra

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PAETICLES

generalizing

any, every, all

mumugdhy asmat
committed (by

all) sin

(i.

us).

krtam cid 6nah

e. g.

24^) remove

231

from us any

(every,

Similarly, with interrogatives

thus kas cid any one srn6ti kas

any, with relatives = ever

suncid esam any one {= every one) hears them (i. 37^-^)
cid
avratam
karn
subject every impious
vadbhyo randhaya
man to those that 'press Soma (i. 132-*); na or ma kas cid [not
:

any =) no one kada cid ever = at any time or always; yas

cid tvhoever y ac cid if ever yatha cid as ever.
;

In B. the only use that survives is the generalizing sense with

e. g. fitha kam cid aha then he
interrogative pronouns = any, some
yfit te kds cid Abravit tchal any one said to
satjs to some one (SB.)
a.

you (SB.).

c6d (= ca id) if occurs only three times in the KV., but

In the RV. and AV. it is found
later becomes commoner.
with the ind. pres. and aor. in the AV. it also occurs once
with the opt. Thus vi c^d uchanty, asvina, usasah, pra
vam brahmani karavo bharante ivhen the Baivns shine forth,
;

AsviiiS, the singers offer

prayers

to

you

(vii.

ced dhastam agrahit sa eva patir ekadha

has taJcen her hand, he alone

72'^)

brahma
Brahman

if a

iti
her husband (AV. v. 17*)
thus one ivould

is

manvita yacitah vasam c6d enam yaceyuh

thinlc, who has been
him (AV. xii. 4.-^%
a.

In B. c6d

is

requested, if they were to request

used with the ind.

pres., aor., fut.

a cow of

and with the

opt.

dtas c6d evi, nditi nasya yajno vyathate if he does not go away
from tJiere, his sacrifice does not fail (MS.) sa hovaca turiyam-turiyam
cen
abibhajams turiyam ev^ tarhi vaii niruktam vadisyatiti
f. g.

mam

he said

'

if

they have given

me

only one-fourth each time, then Vac will speak

'

distinctly only

murdha
will

to

the extent of one-fourth

burst (SB.)

chindyam

td,m c6n

me nd

et^m ced anydsma anubruyas tdta

if you were

to tell

tatas occurs in the

this to another,

EV.

local sense of the ablative

vavyte

(SB.)

te vi patisyati if you cannot explain this (riddle)

tlience the

to

vivdksyasi,

me, your head

eva te ^fras

I would strike off your head (SB.).

several times adverbially in the

thence

e. g.

poison has turned away.

tato

visam pra

It also,

but very

INDECLINABLE WORDS

232

has the temporal sense

rarely,

of

[180

then

thereupon,

e. g.

yajnair atharva prathamah pathas tate, tatah suryo

ajani tvith sacrifices Athar van first extended the paths, then the
.

sun was horn

In

83'^).

(i.

on the otherhand,the temporal sense oithereupon is extremely

Here it also often appears at the beginning of a sentence
connected with a preceding one in the sense of therefore, consequently
e. g. sa yaja^m ev&, yajnapatrani pra vivesa; tdto hainamnd, iiekatur
a.

B.,

common.

nf rhantum

it

entered

consequently those

into

tivo ivere

the

unable

sacrifice
to

expel

it

i(se% into the

tatha occurs in the RV. in the sense of

tatha rtuh such

the rule

is

(i.

vessels

sacrificial

thus

so,

e. g.

It also appears as a

83^'').

(though less often than eva) to yatha

syavasvasya sunvatas tatha srnu yathasrnor atreh
correlative

In B. the use

a.
it

came

yfitha

to

^Jass

SyCwaha as
is

(SB.)

thou didst listen

to

Atri

e. g.

it

listen

(viii. 36''^).

tdtha^i'n niinfi,m tad asa

as correlative (though less often than

similar

nd vdi t^tha^_^abhud ydtha^amamsi

e. g.

to the sacrificing

(SB.).

so,

indeed,

evam)

to

has not come about as I had

thought (f^B.).

= tdtha^u) occurs in B., meaning and in the same way, but

(
tdtho evottare ni vapet and in. the same icay he should assign
the last two
TS.
sa yad daksina-pravana syat, ksipre ha yd.jamano
'mum lokam iyat, tdtho ha yajamauo jyog jivati //// (the altar) iverc
t^tho

h.

so

e. g.

to

sloping

the sacrificer

the soutli,

would

quicldij go

to

irarld, but

i/ondi'r

thus

(as it is) the sacrificer lives a long time (SB.).

tad

is

often used adverbially in the

different senses
1.

RV.

It

then has three

means

It frequently

tlicn

as correlative to

yad when

yaj jayatha vrtrahatyaya tat prthivim aprathayali

when thou wast horn for the Vrtra-fight, tlwu didst spread out

e. g.

the earth (viii. 89'^).

2.

goal)

It is also often used in the sense of thither (ace. of the

;

e. g.

tad

it

tva yukta harayo vahantu

yoked haps ivaft thee

3.

Occasionally

it

(iii.

thither let the

53'^).

has the sense of therefore

deva abruvan, tad va aganiam

that

tlic

e. g.

gods said

tad vo
to

i/ott,

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

to you (i. 161-)

pra tad visnuh stavate
Visuu is praised for his heroism (i. 154^).

therefore

I Mve come

viry^na

therefore

a.

In B. tdd-has four different adverbial uses

1.

as a

ydtra

correlative

(ivhere)

there

233

to
e. g.

ydd (when, inasinucli. as) = thereby, and to

ydn nv evd, rajauani abhisunvtoti, tit t&m

ghnanti now ivhen they press the king (soma), they kill him thereby (SB.)
ydtranya 6sadhayo mlayanti tad et^ modamana vardhante ivherc
other plants wither, it (the wheat) grows merrily (SB.).
e. g. athaj^itithim s^mam tdd
2. in the sense of thereupon, then
aughi aganta, tan ma navara upakalpya^upasasai now in such and
;

such a year a Jlood

to

me
3.

of as

will then

come, then having built

a ship you

shall

turn

(SB.).

constantly with reference to a preceding statement in the sense

to that, thereby, thus
e. g. yajnSm ev^ tdd deva vipayan the gods
;

thus obtained the sacrifice (SB.)

tdt tad

avaklptdm ev^ y^d brahmano

'rajanyah syat so it is quite suitable that a Brahman should be toithout

a king (SB.)
tad ahuh ccs to that they say t5.d u tdt noio as to this (SB.).
4. before yad with reference to a preceding statement to add an
explanation, and may be rendered by that is to say, now ; e. g. t&d
ydd esi, etdt tapati tena esa sukrah now, inasmuch as he hums here,
therefore he is bright (^SB.).
Similarly in the phrase tdd yat tdtha titat is
;

to

say, ivhy

it is

so (is as

follows)

the reason for this is as follows (SB.).

tarhi at that time, then, occurs only once in the RV., but
na mrtyur asid amrtam na
several times in the AV.
:

In
tarhi there tvas not death nor immortalitjj then (x. 129^).
the AV. the word appears as correlative to yada iohen, and
in B. to yati'a, yad, yada, yarhi trhen, and yadi if; e. g.
raksamsi va enam tarhy a labhante yarhi na jayate the
Eahmses then seize him when (the fire) does not arise (AB.)
yadi va rtvijo 'loka bhavanty aloka u tarhi yajamanah
:

if the priest is tvithout a place, the sacrificer is then also without

a place (SB.).

tasmad

therefore is not

found as an adverb in the RV.,

but occurs several times as such in the AV., and is constantly

so used in B.
As correlative to yad hecause it appears once
in the AV. and is very common in B.
e. g. yad vai tad
;

varunagrhitabhyah
hecause those who were
called

Ml/a

{hod//).

kam
seized

abhavat tasmat kaydh (MS.)

hi/ Varuna felt well, therefore it is

INDECLINABLE WORDS

234

though accented, never commences a sentence or Pada.

tii,

has two uses

It

[i8o

an emphasizing

1. It is

occurs nearly fifty times,

In the RV., where it

seems to be restricted to this

particle.

it

sense.
a. In about two-thirds of its occurrences tu emphasizes
an exhortation in the 2. pers. impv. (rarely the 3. pers., or
the subj. in an impv. sense) = pray, then] e.g. a tv 6ta, ni
sidata jjm^ come, sit you down (i. 5^) na te dur6 parama
cid rajamsy, a tu pra yahi haribhyam eve)i the highest
;

spaces are not far to thee

(iii.

h.

come

hither, then, tvith thy

two hays

302).

In several passages tu emphasizes assertions (generally

following the demonstrative ta) in the sense oi surely, indeed

e. g. tat tv asya that
surely is his tvorJc (iii. 30^-).
2.

It is

an adversative

i^article

meaning

hut.

This

is its

sense in the only passage of the AV. in which it occurs, and

is its only
meaning in B. e.g. cakara bhadram asmabhyam
;

atmane tapanam tu sah

painful

to

himself (AV.

he has done what

iv. IS*')

is

good for

lis,

hut

tad evam v6ditor na tv

evam kartavai that one shoidd hioiv thus, hut not do thus (MS.).
With aha or nu in the preceding clause, it expresses the
sense

is

it

true...

evatah sthitih
practice

is

hut;

this

e.g.

indeed

is

tad aha t^sam vaco, 'nya tv

what they say, hut the estahlished

different therefrom (SB.).

tena occurs in B. as au adverb correlative to y^d

gramyasya nd^dsnati tena gramyan dva runddhe

because; e.g. yfid

because he does not

any fame animal, therefore he gains tame animals for himself (MS.).
tvava (compounded of tu vavi), a particle sometimes occurring
in B., does not perceptibly differ in sense from vav& (q. v.); e.g.
trdyo ha tvavd pasfivo 'medhyah there are just three kinds of animals

eat

unfit for sacrifice

tv^i

(6B.).

(compounded

of tu vdi) is

sometimes found in B. meaning

but indeed.

dvita, a particle occurring about thirty times, is restricted

RV. There can be no doubt that it is an old instru-

to the

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

mental, etymologically meaning doubly.

either literally
especially,

dhenum

dvita

This sense taken

In tivo ivays, or figuratively

more than

which the word

ever,

seems

235

= emphatically,

to suit all the passages in

bharadvaj aya^a va dhuksata

ca visvadohasam isam ca visvabhojasam
occui's

e. g.

on Bharadvdja do ye (Maruts) milk doivn doubly, both the

all-milking cow and all-nourishinij food (vi. 48^^) raja devanam
;

uta martyanam dvita bhuvad rayipati rayinam as king of

gods and mortals may he be doubly lord of riches (ix. 97^*)
dvita yo vrtrahantamo vida indrah satakratuh lipa no
haribhih sutam may he ivho above all is knoivn as the best
Vrtra-slayer, Indra Satakratu, (come) to our pressed Soma
with his bays (viii. 93^^)
gavam 6se sakhya krnuta dvita
;

48^) in the search for the cows he especially concluded friend-

(x.

ship (with me).

u.

The word

douhhj or

particulurlij

(i.

too

e.g. vi t^d

so;

132^).

na has two
in B.)

times with ddha, meaning itnd thai

vocer ddha dvita explain (his, and (do

occur.s several

cs2>ecicdly,

senses in V. (but only the

first

of the

two

1. As a negative particle meaning not it denies an assertion,

appearing in principal sentence:^ with the ind. of all tenses,
with the subj., the opt., the inj. (in the sense of a fut.), but

not with the impv.

it

is

also

employed

in relative

and

It negatives either the assertion of

conjunctional clauses.
the whole sentence (when it appears as near the beginning
as possible, in V. even before the relative) or only the

assertion of the verb.

It

can only be used in a sentence

which contains a finite verb or in which one is to be supplied.

There seems to be no undoubted example of its negativing
any word (such as a participle or adjective) other than the

The employment

verb.

same

of this negative

na

is

much

the

in B. as in V.

verb (such as asti is) lias often to be supijlied with this

a.
negative in simple sentences, especially with the gerundive, the

I
INDECLINABLE WORDS

236

infinitive, or a dative equivalent to an infinitive

nd yo
tliat (is) not, to be troubled about (MS.)

ksyam

for hindering = ivJio is

supplied in a second
tisthate,

n prat^h

irresistible

tdn

e. g.

sentence from the

first

he worships at night, (he does) not

morning (TS.)b. Two negatives express a strong positive

bhunjanti/or cattle always cat (MS.).

e.g.

be

to

upa

nd.ktain

e. g.

sur-

n6,

ivho (is) not

vdraya

Qr the verb has

1435).

(i.

[180

(worship)

in the

na hi pasdvo n&

2. na is used in V. (very commonly in RV., comparatively

rarely in A V. but never in B. ) as a particle of comparison,
This meaning seems to be derived
exactly like iva as, like.
,

from not as negativing the predicate of a thing

which

to

'

'

it

properly belongs e. g. he (neighs), not a hoi'se neighs

he neighs like a horse '.
he, though not a horse, neighs
with the preceding
in
sense
connected
This na, being
closely
;

'

'

'

word, never coalesces in pronunciation (though it does in the

written Sandhi) with a following vowel, whereas na not
This na always follows the word of comgenerally does.
parison to which
several words, the

commonly

it

belongs

the second

like

or

if

the simile consists of

follows the first word, less

aran
na
nemih pari ta babhuva
e.g.

he surrounds them as the

sakha na

na generally
fell//

the spokes

a branch with ripe fruit

(i.

(i.

S2^-')

pakva

8'').

When

the object compared is addressed in the voc. (which

sometimes to be supplied), the object with which it is compared
sometimes also put in the voc. agreeing with it by attraction e.
a.

dso na subhra a bhara

i,ave
b.

e. g.

na

Dawn, (O

citre, arusi like a brilliant mare,

sacrificer) bring

rudely

Dawn

it

were

(i.

g.

57^)

30^^).

79^).

nd sometimes interchanges with iva

. g.

t&tsinaya as a carpenter (fashions) a car for him who

na-kis^

{not

restricted to the

(i.

(i.

When the object compared is not expressed, nd means as it iverc;

sivabhir n^ smayamanabhir agat he has come icHh gracious smiling

loomen as
c.

like brilliant

is

is

if

ud,
(i.

tdsteva
61*).

any one) is found in V. only, being almost

RV., where it frequently occurs. It properly

N. sing, of interrogative ki

regular use

rdtham
desires

'cp. 113).

(Lfit. qui-s)

of

which the

n.

kf-m

is

in

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

ISO]

means no
Indra,

one

is

superior to thee

its

none of the worms shall he left (AV. ii. 3P).

N. sense/ it comes to be used, though less often,

ucchisyatai

Losing

nakir indra tvad uttarah no one,

yatha krminam nakir
(iv. 30^)

e. g.

237

that

as a strong negative adverb

meaning not

at

all,

never

yasya sarman nakir deva varayante na martah.

protection gods never hinder

him nor mortals

(iv.

e. g.

whose

in

Cp.

17"^).

makis.

na-kim ^ occurs only twice

in one

hymn

of the

RV.

in the

sense of a strong negative adverb

not at all, never nakim
indro nikartave Indra can never be subdned (viii. 78^).

na-nu occurs only

of a strong negative

tw^ice in the

hi/

RV. where

it

has the sense

In B.

no means, never.

it

occurs

an interrogative expecting assent (= nonne),

not?; e.g. nanu susruma have we not heard? (SB.),
na-hi, as the compounded form of na hi, occurs only in V.,
where it sometimes has the sense of for not e. g. nahi tva
satruh starate for no foe strilces thee down (i. 129"^). More
a few times as

commonly it emphatically negatives a statement as something

well known = certainly not, by no means, as appears most
clearly at the beginning of a

hymn

arbhako, d^vasah not one of you,

.

e.

g.

nahi vo asty

gods, is small (viii. 30^).

This compounded form never occurs in B., where n hi alone

On the other hand, na hi seems never to occur in V.

is

found.

nama

used adverbially in the following two senses

e.g. sa ha sruta indro nama devah that god
famous as Indra by name (ii. 20'') k6 nama^asi zvho art thou
1.

is

by name

byname? (VS.

vii.

29).

2.

namely, indeed, verily; e.g. ajasro

gharmo havir asmi nama I am constant heat, namely the

oblation (iii. 26")
mam dhur indram nama devata they
have placed me among the gods verily as Indra (x. 49^).
;

'

Pi-obably because the N. has no longer an independent existence

coupled with the fact that the pronoun ki has gone out of use except
in the one form ki-m.

Probably A. n. of nfi-kis with lengthened vowel.

INDECLINABLE WORDS

238

nu

'

implored

(i.

145^)

now proclaim
82')

the

indra, te hari
(i.

now; e.g. sa nv lyate he is noiv

indrasya nu viryani pra vocam I ivill
heroic deeds of Indra (i. 32')
yoja nv,

means

or nu'-

[180

1.

noiv

i/oJce

(=

uvasosa uehac ca

Indra, thy two hai/s

Daun
has shone (in
48^)

at once),

nii

(i.

the past) and she shall shine noiv (= henceforth) asmabhir

u nu praticaksya^abhut to us she has just noiv become visible
;

oa nii great

(vi. 52"')
still

I he

in

with relatives

shall accomplish

none

(a) even now,

3.

8^).

(i.

to

5.

1Q5^^).

overcome him

still

e.g.

pray with
when, pray

nu

ever,

at all

with negatives

asti there is none at all to

(vi. 66-).

6.

cid dadhisva

with cid

me

it

means
now

girah even

dasasya no, maghavan, nu

(i. 10^)
one
e. g.
us
still, Bountiful
(viii. 46^^)
(6) never
favour
cid dhi parimamnathe asman for never have ye despised

taJce to

cit

thyself my songs

nu
us

mahan indrah paras

(i.

(communion with) Varuna (vii. 86-).

ya nu krnavai tvhatever (deeds)

na^asya varta na taruta nv

obstruct,

more

kada nv antar varune bhuvani

at last), shall

ever

4.

Indra and

is

interrogatives

(=

sun rising

see the

still

pasyema nu suryam uccarantam we

still:

2,

113^^).

(i.

woidd

(vii. 936).

a.
1.

The
Now

senses of nti found in B. are the following

actually in aifirmative sentences, often correcting a previous
:

statement ; e. g. nirdaso nv abhud, yajasva ma^anena now he is actually

more than ten days old : sacrifice him to me (AB.). 2. then, pray, in exhortations with the subj., the impv., or ma with the inj., e.g. Iraddhadevo
avdm nii vedava Manu is godfearing; let us two then try him
vd,i mdnur
ma nu me prfi harsih praj/, do not strike at me (SB.). When
(6b.)
dtha follows such sentences, nii may be translated by first: nirdaso
nv astv, atha tva yajai let him (the victim) /?rs< be more than ten days old,
then I ivill sacrifice htm to you (AB.). 3. pray, in questions with or without
an interrogative e. g. kvk, nu visnur abhut ivhat, pray, has become of
Vipiu ? (6B.) tv&m nu khfilu no brfihmistho 'si are you, pray, indeed
the wisest of us? (SB.).
4. noiv, after iti followed by fi,tha 7iext: iti nu
:

piirvam patalam, athottaram

^
^

this

now

is the first section ;

Never begins a sentence.

Often begins a sentence.

next follows the

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

230

5. indeed, in the first of two antithetical chiuses, wlicn

introduced with tii or kim u e. g. yo nv ev& jnatds
tfismai bruyad, ni, tv ev^ sdirvasma iva he man indi'od iell it fo him who
IS known to him, but not to any and erenj one (_SB.).

second (AB.).

the second

nnnam

is

RV.
With the ind. pres. means now as opposed to formerly
or in future (an opposition often expressed by pura before
and aparam after) e. g. na nunam asti no svah there is no
now and no to-morrow (i. 170^).
noiv has three uses in the

it

1.

It is a few times used with the perfect in combination

with pura to express that an action has taken place in the
e. g. pura nunam ca stutaya
past and still takes place
rsinarn pasprdhra indre formerly and now the praises of
;

seers have striven to

2.

With the

Indra

(vi. 34^).

subj., impv., opt., or inj., it expresses that

action is to take place at once ;

shall now shine forth (i. 124^^); pra

stut6

e. g.

vi

nunam uchat

an
she

nunam purnavandhuras

praised advance note with laden car (i. 82^).

the perfect it is a few times used in the

ysilii

With

RV.

to

e. g. upa
express that an action has just been completed
nunam yuyuje hari he has just yoJccd his two bay steeds
;

(viii. 411).

3.

It occurs

kada nunam

sometimes with interrogatives = _pra?/ e.g.

dasema tvhen, pray, may we serve thee?
;

te

(vii. 293).
rt.

In B. none of these uses seem to survive, while the new sense of

assuredly (perhaps once already in the AV.) has appeared
tatha In nuri&m tdd asa. just so assuredly it came to pass (SB.).

certainly,
e. g.

n^d (= na id and not

treated as a

compound by the

Padapatha) has two uses in both V. and B.

1. sometimes
an emphatic negative, certainly not e. g. anyo n6t surir
6hate bhuridavattarah no other patron indeed is accounted
more liberal (viii. 5-") dham vadami n6t tvam I am speah-

as

ing, not thou (vii. 38*)

do not cat

it

before

it is

n6d anuhutam prasnami I certainly

2. much more commonly

invoiced (SB.).

as introducing a final clause in order that not

with the subj.

INDECLINABLE WORDS

240

[iso

Lat. ne)
e. g. vy iicha, duhitar divo, u6t tva tapati
shine forth, daughter of the sk/j, test the sun scorch thee

(=

surah
(v.

79'^)

ma

n^n

rudro hinasat

lest Tiudra injure me (SB.).

be
also
in
the
n6d idam bahirdha
may
inj.
bhavat lest it be outside the sacrifice (SB.).

In B. the verb

yajnad

= mi vd.i as analysed by the Padapatha of the TS.) occurs not

rt. nv^i
(
infrequently in B. in the sense of indeed e.g. iti nva et^d brahmanam
;

udyate

ma

such indeed

is the

Brdhmana

that

is

told

(SB.).

the pi-ohibitive negative (Grk. fiij) regularly used

It is never used with the impv.
with

is

with the injunctive.

the opt. only in the single form bhujema (RV.)

the subj. only once (SB.) e. g. ma no vadhih
;

104'')

(i.

ma

hrnitha abhy asman

2^%
An interrogative

and with

sla)/

us iwt

be not enraged against

us

(viii.
a.

nite sense in the

delirer

ns not

to

RV.

ani/foe

following
;

i.

e. g.

ma

ma

in a few cases receives an indefi-

kfismai

dhatam abhy amitrine nah

120*).

ma-kis {not any one, Gk. firj-ris:), occurring about a dozen

times in the RV., to which it is restricted, is used in prohibitive sentences with the injunctive in two senses
:

1.

makis tokasya no

no one:

risat maij no one of our

offspring be injured (viii. 67^^).

2. more often an emphatic negative

makir devanam apa bhuh

(x.

IV).

= by no

means, never

not at all atvay

l)c

from

the gods

Cp. na-kis.

as an emphatic prohibitive particle with

the injunctive, occurs only in two passages of the RV.
makim sam sari k^vate let none suffer fracture in a int

ma-kim, used

(vi. 54').

employed in two main senses 1. usually as

a relative adverb, meaning cohere, but sometimes whitJie)
ndro yatra devayavo madanti where pious
g- yajfie
in
men rejoice
yatra rathena gaohathah
sacrifice (vii. 97^)
yatra

is

whither ye go

with your car

(i.

22*).

generally tatra, sometimes atra or tad.

The

correlative

is

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

241

a. Occasionally as equivalent to the locative of the

relative; e.g.
a gha ta gachan littara yugani ydtra jamdiyah krndvann fijauji (hose
Infer generations ivill come in n-hicJi those who are akin nrill do xchat
befits not
kinsmen (x. 10^*).

2.

not infrequently as a temporal conjunction, ivhen, in

both V. and B.

yatra pra sudasam avatam when ije

In V. adha, atra, tad appear as
correlatives
e. g. yatra sui'asas tauvo vitanvat6
adha
sma yacha tanv6 tane ca chardih. /vJien the heroes strain
Sudds

liclped

e. g.

(vii.

83'"').

theinselves (in battle)

then especially hestow protection on us

and our sons (vi. 4(P-). In B. tad is generally the correlative,

sometimes tatas
e. g.
tarn yatra deva aghnams, tan
;

mitram abruvan
Mifra

pura
as

the

f/ods

MM

him,

thet/

said

to

(SB.).

yatha has two

1.

irJicn

adverb meaning as

noiv as before

we wish

that do

(i.

(x.

89")
38-)

agnir ahito jiryati as a

been laid grows old (TS.).

RV.,

is

it

and B.

distinct uses in both V.

as a relative

usually eva,

e. g.

nunam yatha

yatha vayam usmasi tat krdhi

yatha vai puruso jiryaty evam

man

groios old, so fire ivhen

When

there

is

it

has

a correlative in the

sometimes tatha

in B.

usually

evam, sometimes tatha.

2. as a conjunction meaning in order that, so
that, introducing a posterior clause, generally with the subj.. rarely
the opt.
e. g. havis krnusva subhago
yatha^asasi prepare
;

the oblation that thou mayest be successful

(ii.

26'-)

a daivya

vrnimahe 'vamsi, yatha bhavema milhiise anagah (vii. 97-)

we crave divine aids that we may appear sinless to the gracious
tatha me kuru yatha^aham imam senam jayani
god
arrange it so for me that I may conquer this army (AB.)
tathaiva hotavyam yatha^agnim vyaveyat it must be
:

poured so that

it

should divide the fire (SB.).

In the RV. after verbs of knowing or saying yatha introduces an

explanation = hoic e. g. kds t^d brxiyad anud^yi yathaj^dbhavat 7oho
could tell MS this, (viz.) how the gift teas:' (x. 135''}.
Occasionally it is
used thus even without such verbs nd prarafye savitur ddivyasya
.

1819

INDECLINABLE WOEDS"

242

bhuvanam

l&d ydtha visvam

Savifr (is not

fo

dharayisydti

[180

ihai (power)

of the divine

will not decay, (viz.) that he will support the whole icorld

=)

(iv. 54).

yad
1.

the relative ya) is used in four distinct senses

expanding the meaning of a word in the preceding

(n. of

tliat,

principal clause

e.g.

vrtram I praise
Vrtra

grn6 tad, indra, te savo yad dhaipsi

this might// deed

of

thine that thou slayest

kim aga

asa, varuna, jy^stham yat

(viii. 62*^)
stotaram jighamsasi sakhayam, what has been the chief guilt,
;

Varuna, that thou wishest

friend? (vii. 86*j. This use
yad

is

to

slay thy praiser

common

not

is

(who

is)

tliy

in V.

similarly employed in B. with reference to a preceding

e. g. t^d ydt payasa srlnati
vrtro v&i soma

tdd (often omitted)

Soma wifh mill- ijs) this: Vrtra

was Soma (8B.). This nse is also found in B. after certain verbs
fiva kalpate it is suitable, ut sahate is able, ich^ti desires, yakt6 bhavati
is intent on, veda knoivs, and isvara it is possible
e. g. n^ hi td.d avak^lpate ydd bruyat /or it is )wt suitable that he should saij (^B.).
asit that

(= the reason why)

he mixes

2.

n^ien

with the ind.

with the subj.

bruvate

e.g.

pres., imp., perf.,

aor.,

and

fut.,

yad dha yantl marutah sam ha

Mantis go along, they spealc together (i. 37^^)

kam apasyo yat te bhir agachat ivhom didst thou see when
indras ca yad yuyudhate
fear came upon thee ? (i. 82'*)
ahis ca, maghava vi jigye n-lien Indra and the serpent fought,
the hountiful god conquered (i. 32^^')
citro yad abhrat bright
ivhen the

has shone forth

fflien he

(i.

66'^)

tigma yad asanir patati,

adha no bodhi gopah when the sharp holt shall fly, then he
our protector (iv. 16^'^).
It also occurs rarely in anacolutha
with the pres. part, and the past pass. part, much as in
English

e. g.

pacanti te vrsabhan, atsi t6sam

maghavan, huyamanah
of them,
a.

aor.,

8.

yd.n,

they roast hulls for thee, thou eatest

bounteous one, tchen being called

(x. 28"').

In B. ydd occurs with tlie sense of when with the pres..

in the sense of ichenever or ivhile with the impf.

fut.,

and

and

v/used with the ind.

pres.. the subj., or the opt.

e.g.

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

]S0]

248

yad, indrd, udaii nyag va huyase, a yahi tuyam //,

Indra. thou art caUccl ctJjove or hctoiv, come quicUi/ (viii. 65^)

yad urdhvas tistha dravina^iha dhattad yad va ksayah

if thou Shalt stand upright, bestow treasures here, or if thou shalt
lie

(iii.

The

8').

when

used

opt. is

condition will not be fulfilled

e. g.

assumed that the

it is

yad, agne, syam aham

te satya iha^asisah

tvam, tvam va gha sya aham, syus

Agni, I were thou, or if thou

if

iccrt I,

prayers here

ihij

u-Qidd he fulfilled (viii. 44-").

a.

In B. ydd

is

used with the opt. as in V.

fihnent of the condition

sa yd,d bhidyeta^artini

xmvM fall into

vy apatisyat ifilioii

itacriftcer

te

while with y^di the

ful-

usually assumed) and with the conditional

is

arched y^jamanah

ydd
misforhine (TS.)
luidsi not spoktir lima,
;

if

it

xcere

to

break,

the

evam nd^dvaksyo murdha

fin/

head icould have fallen

to

pieces (SB.).

with the subj., very

in
e. g. a vaha devatatiip sardho
the
V.
with
opt.
rarely
yad adya divyarn yajasi bring hither the host of the gods that
4.

in order that, in posterior clauses,

;

thou magest adore

tJie

divine throng

(iii.

19"^)

asyam gatim, mitrasya yayam patha

that

obtain refuge, f umuld go on Mitra's path (v.

64'').

In B. this use of ydd is very

with the subj. e. g. t^t prapnuhi

rare, occurring only a few limes

te prano vatam apipddyatai

((.

(Main thou

this, that

yada when

is

thy hreath

may

correlative

tdd, tarhi

pat.s intu the irind (SB.).

with the
fut.

word (when there

;

y<lt

used in V. and B. with the ind.

and with the subj.

and with the
V. only
pres.,

yan nunam
I mag now

and

is

one)
in B. atha and tarhi.

aor. ind.

perf., impf.,

and the

inj.

in

The

opt.

in B.

is in

V. ad, atha, adha,

only.

yada is most commonly used in the RV. with the aor.

ind., when as the beginning of the action is emphasized,
the sense is as soon as e. g. yad^d adevir asahista maya,
1.

atha^abhavat kevalah s6mo asya as soon as lie had overcome

the ungodlji wiles, then Soma became his exclusivehj (vii. 98^')
abhi grnanti radho yada te marto ami bhogam anat they
;

b2

INDECLINABLE WOEDS

244

as soon as the mortal has dbtamcd

tlui tvealth

praise

[180

tin/

reward

When

the principal clause contains a historical

(x. 7^).
tense, the aor. with yada has the value of a pluperfect.
a. Tlie injunctive is found only once with yada in the RV.
yada
mfihyara didharo bhag^m, Indra, ad in ra&jk krnavo viryani irJien
:

Own

shall have necured for

heroic deeds ivith

2.

a.

my

me

Indra, then thou ahalf perform

mij f:hare,

help (viii. 100^).

with the impf. and

perf.

pada vicakrame, yada suryam

hari vavaksatuh icheii Vimu toolc
didst fix the
122'>^")

(viii.

sun in
;

yada visnus
adharaya, ad

e. g.

divi

his three steps,

the shy, then thy two lays

tasya yada

as soon as they touched

Iris

trini
it te

when thou

grew in strength

marma^agachann atha^acestat
weaJc spot, he quivered (MS.)

sa

yada^abhyam anuvaca^atha^asya tad indrah siras cicheda as soon as he had told them, Indra cut his head of{^B.).
yada satyam krnute manyiim
pres. ind.
visvam
drlham
bhayate 6jad asmat wJien Indra
indro,
shows Ms true anger, all that is firm, trembling, is afraid of him
h.

(iv.

with the

17^")

medhyo
old,

it

yada vai pasur nirdaso

bhavati as soon as the victim

bhavaty atha sa

heconies fit for sacrifice (AB.)

vdpaty atha snati

sa

more than ten days

is

yada kesasmasrii

n-hrn he has cut ofi^his hair

and

beard, he

bathes (SB.).

with the subj. (here = future perfect)

c.
yada srtam
krnavo 'tha^im enam pra hinutat pitrbhyah when thou
shalt have made him done, then deliver him to the fathers (x. 16^)
yada tarn ativardha, atha karsum khatva tasyam ma
:

bibharasi when I
having dug a
8. a.

with the

moksyami
b.

shall have

heep

pit,

fut.

me

in

it

grown

opt.

vapet as sooj^ as
Agni (MS.).

he

for

it,

you

shall,

yadaiva hota paridhasyaty atha pasan prati

n-hen the Hotr shall hace conchided,

with the

too big

(SB.).
I

sJiall

tighten the cords {A'B.).

yada samgramdm j&yed fitha^aindragndm uir

may have icon a haftle, he should sacrifice to Indra and
s

yadi (/"(sometimes when with a past tense) is found with

and impf. in V. only; with the ind. pres., aor., fut.,

perf.

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PAETICLES

l^o]

and with the

and B.

subj. in V.

and with the

245

opt. in B.

only.

With the pert", used hibtorically and with the inipf.

yadi means ivhen, the verb then having the force of a
pluperfect e. g. lid astambhit samidha nakam agnir yadi
bhrgubhyah pari matarisva havyavaham samidhe Agni
1.

supported the vault iclth fuel when Matarisvan from the Bhrgus
had Idndled the oblation-bearer (iii. 5^)
yadi sahasram
;

indriyam mahi pra vavrdhe

mahisan aghah, ad

it

a-hen thou hadsf eaten

a thousand

12^).

(viii.

ta

But when the

perf.

bulls, thy might gretv great

has the pres. perf. sense,

yadi has its ordinary meaning of if: grahir jagraha yadi

vaitad enam, tasya, indragni, pra mumuktam enam or if
illness has seised him, from that release him, Indra and Agni
1611).

(x.

with the pres.

yadi manthanti bahubhir vi
rocate when theg rub witli their arms, he shines (iii. 29*^)
adya muriya yadi yatudhano asmi to-day I would die, if I
a.

2.

am

a sorcerer

bhavati

if he

104^"')

(vii.

does

3Ianes (SB.).
b. with the aor.

not

yadi na asnati pitrdevatyo

eat,

he

becomes

dedicated

to

the

asthita,
yadi matur lipa svasa
if the sister (coming) //om the mother has
yady aha^enam pranapproached, the priest rejoices (ii. 5")
cam acaisir, yatha paraca asinaya prsthato 'nnadyam
upaharet if//ou liave piled it frontways, it is as if one handed
.

adhvaryur modate

food from behind to one sitting with averted face (SB.).

c. with the fut.
yady eva karisyatha, sakam devair
:

yajniyaso bhavisyatha if ye
objects

ye shall become

will act thus,

of worship together with the gods

imam abhimamsye kaniyo 'nnam

(i.

161-)

karisye

//

yadi va
shall plot

against him, I shall procure less food (SB.).

d.

with the subj.

will worship the gods, if

mama

sravad,

yajama devan yadi saknavama we

we shall be able

(i.

27^^)

asmakam indram indavah

yadi stomam
.

mandantu

INDECLINABLE WOKDS

24^

if he shall hear mi/ song of praise,

1^

(viii.

let

[180

our drops gladden Indra

yadi tva^etat piinar bravatas, tvam brutat

') ;

if thejj Uvo shall

sag that

to thee

again, do thou say (SB.).

a. With the opt. yddi is (excepting one occurrence in the &V.)

found in B. only, where this use is very common. Here a case is
usually supposed with a rule applicable to it in the principal clause

yadi na saknuyat, so guaye purolasam nir vapet

able to do if, he should offer a cake to Agni (AB.

be

should nof

if he

c. g.

after the verb

8.

vid

Jcnoir,

yadi

used in the sense of

is

one passage of the KV, (x. 129') and often in B.

hanta na 6ko v6ttu yadi hato va vrtro jivati va come,

tchether in
e. g.

one of us find out irhether Vrtra

let

is

dead or whether he

is

alive (SB.).

ySdi va is not only used after a preceding yadi in the sense of

but also alone in the sense of or, nearly always without a verb
e. g. so anga veda yadi va na veda lie alone knows or he does not know
yam vahanti satam asva yadi va sapta ivhoin a hundred
(x. 129')
a.

or

if,

xiii. 2"

yadi va^itarathix or conversehj (SB.;.

occurs only in B. where it is used with the
pres. or past ind., and with the opt. It has almost invariably tarhi or
e. g. sa tarhy eva jayate yarhy aguim
etarhi then as a correlative

horses draio, or seven

(AV.

yfi,rhi {at the time) ichen

moment when he lays his fire MS.) yarhi prajah.

ksudham nigaeheyus tarhi navaratrena yajeta ichen his people should

adhatte he

is

born at the

suffer from, luimjer, he should sacrifice u:ith the rite of nine nights (TS.).

y^smad does not occur as a conjunction in V., but it sometimes

e. g.
atha yasraat samistaappears as such in B. meaning ichy
yaJTinisi nama now (follows the reason) why fJtei/ are called Samistuyajas
;

(SB.)'.

It is used
is found in V. only.
or
and
with
the
With
with the indicative pres.
subj.
past,
in
RV.
arcamasi
as
the
e.
it
the ind.
means as far
yad
g.

yad

(an old abl. of ya)

eva vidma tat tva mahantam

great, as far as we Icnow (how to)
the

AY.

it

ya aksiyan prthivim yad ajayata

earth since

as long as

we praise thee, the

seems to mean since in

(vi. 21'')

it

e. g.

With

xii.

naitha uccarata^i he has once for

as long as sun

irlio

ruled the

yad means
1"'').
(AV.
ananukrtyam apunas cakara yat suryamasa

arose

and moon aUernatclg

all

the subj.

done what

is

inimitahlc

shall rise (x. 08^").

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

247

yavat already appears in V. as an adverb meaning as far

e. g. yavad
as long as, an extension of its ace. use
and earth,
it
as
heaven
tat
as
far
(x. 114*)
dyavaprthivi tavad
as,

jiihomi
(extends)
oblation as long as I am able (iii.
so

it

far

havyam yavad

18'')

yavad agnim na^adhatt^ man

ise

o_fer

ajato vai tavat puruso

so long unborn, as he does

is

not lag his fire (MS.)-

va

or

employed much in the same way as ca and.

word to which it belongs and

is

It is enclitic, following the

e. g. ata a gahi
connects words, clauses, or sentences
divo va I'ocanad adhi come from here or from the shining

it

realm of heaven

sasam

(i.

irhose

janayet

6")

yasya bharya gaur va yamau

or

ivife

coic

or welcomes songs of praise

cakrma
knowledge
or

(i.

(i.

is

same way

e.g. sakti

thee according

to

to

va ydt

te

our vower or

ndktam va hi diva va varsati for it rains by night

yad va^aham abhidudroha yad va sepa uta^dnrtam

31^*)

dag (TS.)
what evil I have
hij

irho

54').

fi'equenlly used in the

vida va ihat we have offered

va...va

".

prati yah
promotes the law

bears twins (AB.)

uktha va yo abhigrnati

invati,

plotted or

what I have sworn false! g

(i.

2:1-2).

When

they contrast two

exclusive alternatives, the
in
this
sentences
sense,
implying
l)nncipal
verb of the first is accented even when the second is incomplete
e. g. ahaye va tan pradadatu soma a va dadhatu nirrter up^sthe let

But va...va

h.

mean

also

either. ..or.

Soma
I'vii.

either deliver

104^)

not agree to

them

to

the serpent or place

them in

the lap of dissolution

tad va jajnau tad va na jajnau she either agreed to it or did

either do thou
it
(SB.) tasya va ivam mana icha sa va tava

seek his heart, or he thine (x. 10'*).

vava (doubtless a contraction of two particles) is found in B. only.

emphasizes the preceding word in the sense oi certainly, just, being
two correlated clauses; e.g. esa
particularly frequent in the first of
It

vav^ so 'gnir ity ahuh

that is certainly the

same Agni,

they say (TS.).

is an emphasizing particle meaning tmlg, indeed.

In the EV. this particle occurs only in 28 passages,

vai
1.

in

all

but three of which

the sentence

e. g.

bhadram

malce a good choice (x. 164-)

so is

my mind

(x.

it

119')

follows the

vai

iti

va

first

varam vrnate
iti

me manah

word

of

tridg theg
so,

indeed,

na vai strainani sakhyani santt

INDECLINABLE WORDS

248
there arc,

indeed,

no friendships

iromen

iriili

[180

The

95^^j.

(x.

on the whole sentence, not on any particular

word. The particle is often followed by u (va u) without
any perceptible change of meaning.

stress is laid

In

a.

tlie

AV. the use

similar except that here the particle often

e. g. tdsmad wiX sd. pfira-

is

api^ears after a demonstrative or a relative

bhavat therefore, imVed. he peiislud (xii. 4")

va adyd mahad vadet

sain, sa

may

yo v^i

ta vidyat pratyak-

n-hoever maij knon: Uieui i^lainlij, he. verily,

speak aloud to-day (xi. 8^).

In B. vai

usuallj^ occupies the same position, but often

yields the second place to c6d, hi, khalu, and of course
always to the enclitics iva, u, ca, sma, ha. When atho
2.

begins a sentence vai occupies the second place.

Here the use of vai in the first sentence of a narrative
typical

yamo va amriyata

e. g.

apabruvan Yama
(thinking
rt.

sions

The
;

died

Yama

of)

the

is

deva yamya yamam

gods (then) dissuaded Yaml from
:

t6

(MS.).

particle often ai:>pears in the concluding sentence in discus-

e. g.

tSsmad va apa upa

sprsati that

is,

indeed, ichy

he sips

ivater (SB.)b. It is very often placed after the first word of a sentence that
gives the reason for the one that follows ; e. g. sraddhadevo vai

mdnur
therefore

avam nu vedava now Mami

ascertain (SB.).

containing

it

is

When

vai

is

is

god-fearing

often equivalent to
vai vayur yo 'yam pdvate)

vaynm abruvan (ayam

ttco

>ve

iciV.

used in this way the clause

a parentlietical one
e. g.
te
;

vayo tvam idam

'

said to Vdyu (noiv Vdyu is he ivho blows),

Vdyn, ascertain
In this sense vai is especially frequent in periods of
three clauses, when that with vai contains the reason, and that with
evi, the conclusion
e. g. ta etabhis tanubhih sdm abhavan
pasdvo
vai devanam priyas tanvah
pasubhir eva sd.m abhavan they were
togetlier with tliese bodies ; now aiiiiuals are the bodies dear to thv gods: they

viddhi^iti
this'

theij

(SB.).

tvere therefore together loifh

The

animals (MS.).

between the use of vdi and of eva in B. are the

vdi coming after the first word emphasizes the whole
following
sentence, while eva emijhasizes a particular word in any jjart of the
c.

differences
:

vi,i follows the first word of a sentence beginning a narranever does in a period vai is typical in the clause stating
a reason, eva in that expressing the conclusion.

sentence

tive, evd.

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

180]

sa

often used pleonastically before relatives in B.

is

e.g.

'

J.

249

yo no vacam vyahrtam mithundna na^_,anunikrainat,

sa sarvam para jayatai he icho shall not follow the word
sa

uttered

bii

us with (another of) the corresponding gender, lie shall

This use led to sa being employed in

lose every tiling (SB.).

a formulaic

way not only pleonastically but also without

reference to gender or numljer e. g. tasya tani sirsani pra
;

cicheda.

sa yat

abhavat

Jic

somapanam

struclc off his heads.

asa tatah kapinjalah sam

Xo/r that /rhich had been

from that arose the francoUne partridge (SB.)

sa yadi na vindanti kim a driyeran now if they do not find
it, why should they mind? (SB.).

Soma-drinJcing,

Sim is an enclitic particle restricted to the KV. Originally

the ace. sing, of a pronoun, related to sa as kim to ka, it is
generally used (much like im) as an ace. of all numbers and
genders in the third person

her,

Jii)H,

it,

them, representing

(which sometimes follows) and frequently

between
a preposition and its verb, occasionally also
placed
after a relative
e.
g. pari sim nayanti they lead him around
pi'a sim adityo asrjat the Aditya made them (the
(i, 95-)

substantive

to

streams)

flow

(ii.

28^)

ni sim vrtrasya

indro apipatat Indra has caused

vital S2)ot (viii.

tarn

sun

suryam
(iv.

it,

marmani vajram

his holt, to fall on Vrtra's

yam sim akrnvan tamase viprce,

100")
ichom they created to disperse the darkness, that
;

13^).

sim sometimeti giveij the relative tlie sense

agas cakrma, sisrftthas tat whatever sin ue have
It.

of ever; e.g. yat sim

tommitled, reimce thai

^v.85').

su, su

well,

used asseveratively

thoroughly, fully,

eerily

and always referring to the verb, is almost restricted as an

independent particle to the Samhitas, being common in the
RV., but rare in the others e. g. jusasva su no adhvaram
thoroughly enjoy our sacrifice (iii. 24'-) namah su te homage
jaram su gaeha go safely to
verily (be) to thee (VS. xii. 63)
;

old age

(AV.

xix. 24'').

INDECLINABLE WORDS

250

[180

(h. With
preceding u the particle means right well ima u sti srudhi
vidmo &v asya mataram toe
girah Uear these songs right well (i. 26^)
knoiv/uU well his mother (AV. i. 2').
b. With
preceding ma it = by no means, not at all, never; e.g. mo su
:

tva

asraan ni riraman

let

none by any means keep thee from us

(vii. 321).

kam

sii

t.

impv. only

used like the simple su except that it appears with

su kam stand quite still (i. 191'^).

is

e.g. tisthata

sma, an

enclitic,

RV.

senses in the

tlie

two

slightly emphasizing particle, has

It generally emphasizes
demonstrative or personal pronouns, relatives, or nouns,
and may be rendered by just, especially, or simply by stress
1.

a.

sma pravita bhava he

sma prtanasu kasu cit

e.g. tasya
srudhi yah

hear thou, who especially in

light
h.

(i.

12*);

(i.

sa

suraih svah sanita

with heroes dost win the

129"^).

the verb, which or (if it is compounded) the preposition

it follows (generally at the beginning of the sen-

which

of

tence)
(i.

all battles

his helper

e.

87^^)

smasi sma vayam esam tve are indeed theirs

sma ratham tisthasi thou mountest indeed iqwn

g.

The verb is in the present ind. or the

thy car (i. 51^-).
it appears to have been accented
impv., rarely the perf.
before sma judging by the only example (vi. 44:^**) in which
;

it is
c.

sma
a.

not the

first

word

in the sentence (App, III, 19 A),

adverbs and particles e. g. uta

and ma sma by no means.
;

sma and

especially

na

In the AV. these emphasizing uses are simihir; but in B. they

luive entirely disappeared.

2.

In a few instances

sma

occurs in the

RV.

before

pura

with the pres. ind. to express that an action has habitually

taken place in the past down to the present time e. g. ye
;

sma pura gatuyanti who

and formerly did
a.

This use

common

in B.,

is

so

(i.

have alirays aided

irho aids

now

169'').

not found in the AV., but has become extremely

where sma

is

always preceded by ha.

The meaning

CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVBL. PARTICLES

Ml]

251

expressed is that something habitually took place in the past

does not as in the RV. include the present) e.g. nd ha sma vai
pura^agm'r aparasuvrknam dahati formerhj Agni ustd not fo biun what
liere
i^but

K'rts

not

off with the

hppcd

axe ^TS.).

Much more

b.

frequently, however, pura is left out and the

sma, from their frequent association with it, assume its
g. te ha sma yad deva asuraii jdyanti, tato ha sma^_,eva^

ha
meaning c.
enan puuar upottisthanti
particles

latter ahcai/s

op2)tjsed

common with
naraddh

as often as the gods defeated the Asuras, the

them again (SB.).

the jjresent perfect aha

This use of ha sma is very

e. g. etdd dha sma va aha
Other tenses than
sag (MS.).
;

Ndrada used to
the present with ha sma are found in the AB. where, in two or
three passages, the perf. and the impf. are used with them in the

same

with regard

to this

sense.

svid

emphasizing the first word of

an
usually
interrogative pronoun or adverb.
generally be translated hy pray e. g. kah svid vrks6
is

an

enclitic particle

a sentence,
Ft

may

madhye arnasah

nisthito

irJiiU

tree, pratj,

teas that

which

In one passage of the

RV. this particle gives the interrogative an indefinite meaning mata putrasya caratah kva svit the mother of the son
stood in the midst of the sea?

(i.

182").

that

traiiders

irho litotes

ichcre

(x.

34^").

Very rarely

(in

double questions) the particle appears without an interrogative asti svin nii viryam tat ta, indra, na svid asti
tad rtutha vi vocah is this thy heroic deed,
Indra, or is it
:

not

that declare in due season (vi.

18'^).

In a few instances svid apfiears in non -interrogative sentences

tvaya ha svid yuja vayam abhi smo vajasataye ivUh thee as eompaa,ioii
we are equipped for the Mainmenl of hoot g (viii. 102^).
a.

The employment of svid in B. is similar; e.g. kam u svid ato

varam varisyamahe nitat boon, prag, begond this sitall we choose ?
(MS.) tvam svin no brahmistho 'si art Ihoa, prag, tlie most learned of
us ? (SB.;
ydd ahgaresu juhoti tat svid agnau juhoti wl/at he pours
h.

'dhi

on

the coals, that itself he

pours on the fire (MS.).

ha, an enclitic particle occurring after all words capable

of beginning a sentence, has a slightly emphasizing and
asseverative force.
It is probably identical in origin with

gha. but unlike that particle hardly ever (onlj^ twice) appears

INDECLINABLE WORDS

252

RV. with

in the

vowel lengthened.

its

[180

It is

common

in the

occurring after personal, demonstrative, interrogative,

RV.,
and relative pronouns, nouns, verbs, verbal prepositions, and
adverbs.
a. In B. the use of this particle varies in frequency: it is comor
paratively rare in the TS., where it generally appears with sma
with perfects; while in the iSB. it is extremely frequent. It lays

stress

on the

or to

mark

marimrjyeta
these ivords he

word

first

new

or

of sentences so as to emphasize the connexion

important step in the narrative; e.g. iti

evam veda

ajarasam ha caksusman bhavati ya

should

loipe

possessed of vision (AB.).

often
b. It is very

(his eyes)

so

till

used after the

old age he ivho

first

word

knows

ivitli.

this becomes

of a story with or

predominantly with the perfect in those

parts of the SB. and the AB. that narrate with the perfect, mostly
with verbs of speaking. Thus sa ha^uvaca appeai-s here, while so
without v^i.

"bravit

is

It apjjears

said elsewhere.

hanta occurs three times in the RV.

exhortations

e. g.

we mil worship

the adorable

It is similarly

we

well,

ivitl

as an interjection in

yajamahai yajniyan hanta devan

used in B.

xtrepare the sacrifice

gods
:

votne,

(x. 53-).

hanta>^imam yajnam sambharama

(AB.).

in origin probably an emphasizing particle, is used

throughout as a subordinating conjunction Avhich regularly
hi,

throws the accent on the verb.

the

first

two
1

are
.

in

It nearly

always follows

word of the sentence, or the second when the first

In V. it is used in two ways
closely connected.
indicative sentences (the verb having sometimes to
:

be supplied) to express the reason (like yap), meaning either

it follows, or became, since, if it
for, if the clause containing
precedes

e. g.

balam dhehi tanusu no, tvam

hi balada

asi bestow strength on our bodies, for thou art a gicer of strength
srustivano hi dasiise devas, tan a vaha since
(iii. 53^*) ;
the

gods give car to the pious man, bring them hither (i. 45-j.
in exhortative sentences, mostly with the impv., as an
hi kesina
jjm?/, indeed; e.g. yuksva

2.

emphatic particle =
hari pi'uu harness thy two Img-maned bag steeds

(i.

lO'').

PARTICLES.

180-181]

INTERJECTIONS

253

ol' hi may be distinguished

expresses the reason, as in the first use in V., only that the
clause containing hi always follows { = for only), and the verb is
((.

In B. throe uses

1.

it

much

oftener omitted than expressed

e. g.

td indro 'mucyata, dev6

hf s&h from ihat Indra freed himself, for he (is) a god (i^B.). The particle
vdi is often added to strengthen hi e.g. vdjro hi va apah /or wafer I's
;

indeed a thuvderboH (SB,).

2. it is
e. g.

sometimes employed to emphasize an interrogative

kathdm

.3.

it

hi karisyfisi how, pray, wilt thou do it

expresses assent in answers after a

pray

(SB.).

word repeated from

t^m hi do you
e. g. tfim eva tv^m pasyasi^iti
a pi'eceding question
see hivi?' Yes, (I see) him (SB.).
a. In B., when hi appeal's in the relative clause of a period explaining a previous statement, the verb of the principal clause (to which hi
'

properly applies) is sometimes irregularly unaccented;

hi yada vfirsaty ^tha^osadhayo jayante for. ivhen if rains

phmts

.spring

vp (SB.),

certain

181.

number

of

e.g.

iddm

here, then the

words having the nature of

interjections occur in the Samhitas. They are of two kinds,

l^eing either exclamations or imitative sounds.

The exclamations are: bat (RV.) truly, bata (RV.)

hanta come, used exhortatively with the subjunctive
hiruk and huruk (RV.)
and hay6 come before vocatives
a.

alas

^^-a^.'

hai (AV.)

7/0.'

kikira
1).
Interjections of the onon^.atopoetic type are
tear to tatters
(RV.) used with kr = make the sound kikira
kikkita (TS.) used in invocations cisca (RV.) loMz ! (of an
:

kr mal'e a ichkzmg sound phat (AV., VS.)

phal (AV.) splash! bal (AV.) dash! bhuk (AV.)

arrow), used with

crash!

hang

sdl (AV.) clap

CHAPTER VI
NOMINAL STEM FORMATION AND COMPOUNDS
A.

Nominal Stems.

182. Declinable stems, though they often consist of the

bare root (either verbal or pronominal), are chiefly formed by
means of suffixes added to roots. These suffixes are of two
kinds: primary, or those added directly to roots (which
may at the same time be compounded with verbal prefixes)

and secondary, or those added to stems already ending in

a suffix and to pronominal roots (which ai"e thus treated as
primary stems).
1.

Primary Derivatives

strong form

v6d.-a

e. g.

show the

as a rule

m.

root in its

hioivledge (vid Icnow)

sdr-ana

running (\/sr); kar-a making (%/kr); grabh-a m. sei;?er

(^grabh). In meaning they may be divided into the two
classes of abstract action nouns (cognate in sense to infinitives)
n.

and concrete agent nouns (cognate in sense to participles)

ma-ti f. thought
e. g.
used as adjectives or substantives
Other meanings
fight).
yodh-a,
m.fyhter{judh.
(man think)
= da^ana)
e. g. dana
are only modifications of these two
;

of giving, then gift.

When the bare root

n. act
a.

used as a declinable stem,

is

it

bhid f.
e. g. da m.
giver,
unchanged
destroyer, yuj m. companion, spas m. spy, vrdh adj. strengthenRoots ending in i or u take a determinative t e. g.
ing.
mi-t f. pillar, stu-t f. praise. The root may appear in a
reduplicated form e. g. cikit wise, j6-gu singing aloud.
b.
Several primary nominal suffixes connected with the
verbal system have already been sufficiently dealt with, viz.
those of the pres. and fnt. participles ant (85
156), ana
usually remains

PRIMAEY NOMINAL STEMS

J82]

mana

and

(158)

of the perf. act. part.

of the perf. pass. part.

ta and na (160)

255

vams

(89

157)

of the gerundive:

ya, ayya, enya, tva, tavya and aniya" (162). The formation of stems to which the primary suffixes of the comparative and superlative, iyams and istha, are added has
'

also

been explained (88

103,

2).

Of the

the following

rest

in alphabetical order are the most usual and important

a: e.g. bhag-a m. share (^/bhaj) ; megh-a ra. cloud

water);

discharge

cod-a m.

instigator (\''cud)

(mih

sarg-a m.

nay-a m. leader (\^ni), priy-a pleasing

m.
invocation (\/hu); jar-a m. lover (v^jr);
hav-a
(/pri);
emission (/srj);

ve-vij-a quicJc (vij dart), csira,-cav-Q, far-extending.

but yug-a
stantives are almost exclusively m.
;

^vy-6-u

The

sub-

n.

(Grk.

Lat. jug-n-m).

m. a^ent nouns and about a dozen defective n. stems

uks-an m. ox, miirdh-an m. head, raj-an m. hing
as-an n. hlood, ah-an n. dati, ud-an n. water, iidh-an

an

e. g.

n. bidder.

ana:
sad-ana

n.

action nouns: bhoj-ana n. enjoyment (v^bhuj),

n. seat {\^83id);

invocation (\^hu);
enclosure

also

kar-ana

bhuv-ana

n.

m. agent nouns

n.

f?ea?(/kr); hav-ana

n.

being (\/bhu), vrj-ana n.

e. g.

kar-ana

active,

ana gladdening (\^mad), sam-gam-ana assemhling

mad-

tur-ana

speeding.

ana f. action nouns jar-ana old age, yos-ana woman,

vadh-ana slaughter. This is also the f. form of adjectives in
ana e. g. tur-ana speeding.
ani f. action nouns, and m. f. agent nouns e. g. ar-ani
:

f.

fire-sticli,

tcilUng

to

vart-ani

f.

trach

destroy (from des.

cars-ani active

stem of ruj

ruruks-dni

destroy).

Tlie second part, ya, of this suffix is secondary (182, 2), but the
The first pai't, tav, is
is employed as a primary suffix (162, 6).
probably derived from the old infinitive ending tave (p. 192, 4).
The second half of this suffix, iya, is secondary, but the whole fs
1

whole

t-mployed as a primary suffix (162.

6).

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

256

[is2

nouns (with accented root) and agent nouns

e, g. ap-as n. worlv (Lat.
op-us), ap-as
active
raks-as n. demon, raks-as m. id.
a f. action nouns (from roots and secondary conjugation
stems) e. g. nind-a blame ji-gl-s-a desire to win gam-ay-a
as

n. action

(with accented suffix)

asva-y-a desire for horses.

i
action nouns (nearly always f.) iigent nouns (adj. and
and a few neuters of obscure origin e. g. krs-i f.
subst.)
causinc/ to go

aj-i

tillage,

m.

contest; cakr-i active (/kr), suc-i bright;

f.

pan-i m. hand; aks-i

n.

asth-i

eye,

dadh-i

n. bone,

n.

sour

milTc.

is

n.

action nouns (mostly with concrete sense)

avc-ia flame, jjdt-is

f.

light,

am-is

rair flesh,

e. g.

havh-is straw,

u: agent nouns, adj. and subst. (mostly m., but several

and n.) e. g. tan-ii thin (Lat. ten-u-i-s) bah-u m. arm
;

(Gk.

TTTJ-^-v-?),

pad-ii m. foot

han-u

f.

jair

jan-u

n.

hiee

(Gk. yov-v).

una:

and m. n. subst. e.g. tar-una ^/oirn^, dhar-una

m. n. support, rait'h'UXidi forming a pair, m. couple
var-una m. a god, sak-una m. bird.
us n. action nouns and m. agent nouns e. g. dhan-us
n. boiv
jay-us victorious van-tis m. assailant.
u f., mostly corresponding to m. and n. in u e. g. tan-u
dhan-u sandbanA' (n. dhan-u) independently formed
bod]i
adj.

supporting,

cam-u dish, vadh-u bride.

ka (rare as a primary, but very common
suffix)

sl(3-ka

ta

as a secondary

sus-ka dry at-ka m. garment,

adj. and m. subst.
m. call, sto-ka m. drop vrsc-i-ka m. scorpion.
:

besides

appears, in a

ordinarily

forming

more general

perf. pass, participles,

as the suffix of a few

sense,

adjectives and of substantives with concrete meaning ; e. g.

trs-ta rough, si-ta cold ; du-ta m. messenger, gax'-ta m.
car-scat,

nak-ta

mar-ta m.
n. night

grey, r6h-i-ta red.

mortal, has-ta

with connecting

m.
i

liand

ghr-ta n. ghee,

as-i-ta blacl; pal-i-td

PRIMARY NOMINAL STEMS

132]

li

e.

is-ti

g.

offering,

amh-a-ti

jna-ti m,

f.

u-ti

aid

praise

am-a-ti indigence.

distress,

some twenty agent nouns used either

m. substantives; e.g. ra-ti ivilling to
m.

(h'sire,

(kr commemorate), ra-ti gift; is-ti

ga-ti motion, da-ti^ gift; didhi-ti devotion (dhi

kir-ti

(v'^av),

thinlx)

nouns

.iction

f.

cliiefly

257

sap-ti m. steed,

fist,

help)

am-a-ti

give,

vas-ti

eager;

dhu-ti m. shaker, mus-ti

abhi-sti m. helxjer (but abhi-sti

dr-ti m.

relative,

forms

It also

as adjectives or as

^7i-/m,

ar-a-ti

])oor,

m.

vrk-a-ti m.

servant,

murderer.
dat., abl.-gen., and ace.
and datavai Ab.G.
da-tii
D.
da-tave
infinitives; e.g.
also a few independent action nouns
da-tos ; A. da-tum

tu

forms the stem of

chiefly

and still fewer agent nouns 6-tu m. ireft (va

m, thread ak-tii m. ray (anj anoint), r-tu m.
;

tan-tu

iveave),

season, jan-tii

m. creature; vas-tu f. morning (vas shine); vas-tu

(vas direll Gk. acr-Tv).

n.

ahode

agent nouns, often used participially governing an ace.

e. g. gan-tr going to
is generally accented)
(ace), but kai'-tr m. doer, yas-tr sacrifieer (^yaj), us-tr
less commonly with connecting vowel
ploughing hull
tr

(when the root

cod-i-tr instigator, sav-i-tr stimulator a-mar-i-tr destroijer

tar-u-tr trinning, tar-u-trm. compieror wdiY-u-tv protector;
;

man-6-tr and man-o-tr

names

several
f.

of relationship

e. g.

pi-tr

m.

ma-tr

father,

mother (101).

tnu forms more than

e.

This suffix also forms

inventor.

g.

kr-tnu

cating,

tra
all

n.

active

piy-a-tnii reviling

maday-i-tnu

intoxi-

stanay-i-tnu m. thunder.
agent nouns, a few of them adjectives, the rest nearly
substantives, expressing the instrument or means ;

1
This word when the
syncope to tti bhdga-tti
:

v^su-tti
1819

a dozen agent nouns, mostly adj.

f.

receipt

of

final
f.

ijiJI

number

rif

offniivnc,

)ceallli.

compound

magha-tti

f.

is

reduced hy

receij)!

of hmmli',

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

258

kse-tra

e.g. jai-tra victorious, yaj-a-tra adorahje;

cup, vas-tra

[182

khan-i-tra

n. field,

n.

slwvel.
garment
There are also a few masculines, as ddms-tia tusk (dams
hite), mdn-tra prcujer, mi-tra friend (but n. friendshiii).

n.

pa-tra

tra

n.

occurs a few times as the

f.

form of the preceding

as-tra goad (as reach), ma-tra measure (Gk. /j.e-Tpo-u).

tha action nouns, more often ni. than n. e.g. ga-tha m.
:

song, bhr-tha m. ofcring, ra-tha m. car, ha-tha, m. slaughter

ar-tha' n. goal, uk-tha n. saying (\/vac), tir-tha n. ford
(\/tf cross), I'ik-tha n. inheritance (\/ric); with connecting
;

vowel

n. praise,

stav-a-tha m. praise.

occurs a few times as the

course,

na

uc-a-tha

tha

f.

ga-tha song, ni-tha tridc.

besides ordinarily forming

form

of

perf.

pass,

tha

kas-tha

participles

appears as the suffix of a number of adjectives (f. na)

and substantives, the latter mostly m., a few n. ; e. g. us-na
(160,

1)

budh-na m. t)ottom, yaj-fia

htacl; nag-na n(d;d
var-na m. colour; par-na n. wing, vas-na n. pricena as the f. form of na makes a few substantives trs-na
tJdrst, dh6-na cou\ s6-na missile, sthu-na i:)0st.
ni m. and f. action and agent nouns (some of the latter

hot,

m.

krs-na

sacrifice,

yo-ni m. receptacle, jur-ni f. heat pfs-ni spjcchled,

pre-ni loving (\/pra), bhur-ni excited; ag-ni m. fire, vah-ni
adj.)

m. draught animal.
nu action and agent nouns (including some adjectives),
nearly always m. e. g. ksep-nii m. jerl; bha-nii m. light,
su-nu m. son dhe-nu f. cow da-nu n. drop (m. f. demon).
ma: adj. and (almost exclusively m.) substantives; e.g.
idh-ma m. fuel, ghar-ma
jih-raa ohlique, ^ag-ma mighty
ni. heat, sto-ma m. praise, hi-ma m. cold
bil-ma n. chip
:

hi-ma

man
^

f.

winter.

action nouns (very numerous),

firtha occars often in the

Mandala X)

most of which

are n.

RV. but appears only three times

it is m. only.
,

as a m.; in tlie later language

(in

PRIMARY NOMINAL STEMS

18-2]

259

accented on the root, while a, good many are m. accented on

e. g. aj-man
n. course (Lat. ag-men), na-man
the suffix
;

bhu-man

sas-man n. praise
n, expanse
var-i-man
jan-i-man
(Lat. car-men)
m.
vid-man
m.
bhu-man
Inotvledge, prath-i-man
abundance,
m. breadth also a few rarely used m. agent nouns, mostly
accented on the suffix e. g. vad-man m. speaker, sad-man
m. sitter; as-man m. stone (Gk. dK-jxoov) 36-man victorious',
some of these differ in accent only from corresponding n.
action nouns (cp. as): da-man m. gioer: da-man n. gift;
dhar-man m. ordainer: dhar-man n. ordinance; brah-man
brah-man n. irorship sad-man m. sitter sadm. priest
n.

name

(Lat. no-mcn),

n. world,

n. hirtli

man

n. seat.

mi
mi m.
mi

one

(also

wave, ras-mi m. ray

a few f. substantives
;

siir-mi

yu

and m.

adj.

subst.

f.)

bhu-mi f.
bhu-mi

ja-mi

related

iir-

eartli.

laks-mi

earth,

sign,

tutie.

and m. substantives

a few adjectives

yaj-yu pious,
man-yu m. anger, mrtsundh-yu pure, sah-yu strong
yu m. deatli das-yu m. enemy, sim-yu m. enemy.
:

ra

many

adjectives,

mostly accented on the suffix e. g.

flying, aj-l-ra sn-ift; grdh-ra greedy;
;

ug-ra mighty, pat-a.-ra,

vip-ra inspAred also several substantives of different genders
khad-i-ra ni.
e. g. ksu-ra m. razor, vam-ra m. ant
(f. ra)
;

a tree;

aj-ra

sH-ra m. hero
sii-ra

f.

patron
:

abh-ra
n. hollow

n,
;

sar-i-ra n. body

dha-ra

f.

stream,

f. subst.
e. g. bhu-ri abundant, vadh-ri
jas-u-ri exhausted ; angh-ri m. foot, su-ri m.
as-ri f. edge, us-ri f. dawn
ang-ii-ri f. finger.

adj.

vaj-ra ra. thunderbolt,

ksi-ra
n. milk
ag-ra n.
cloud,

field (Gk. dy-po-s),

intoxicating liquor.

emascidated

ru

randh-ra

point,

ri

m.

and m.

adj.

and a few

n.

substantives

ca-ru dear (Lat.

pat-a-ru ,/?7//m/ vand-a-ru jt>mism//

san-e-ru otitaining; as-ru n. tear, smas-ru n. Ijeard.
ea-ru-s), hhl-rxi timid

va

adj.

and (mostly m.) substantives;

s2

e.g.

urdh-va

NOMINAL STEM FOEMATION

200
(Gk.

opO-o-s:),

pak-va

as-va m,

sal-ru-s);

ripe, i>nY-va, prccedinf/,

sar-va

sru-va m.

Jiorse (Lat. eq-tm-s),

[182

va f. disease.
van: adj. and

all (Lat.

am-i-

ladle;

subst. (mostly m., few n.)

e.g. rk-van
krt-van active, yaj-van sacrificing adh-van m.
road, gra-van m. stone
par-van n. joint.
sa
and
e. g. grt-sa adroit.
subst.
adj.
(all genders)
mah-i-sa
rj-i-sa rushing;
prk-sa dappled (s/prc);
mightii
ar-u-sa red; lit-sa m. fountain, drap-sa m. dro}!, puru-sa
m. man piir-i-sa u. rul/ldsh man-i-sa f. devotion.
;

j^raising,

snu

(from root or cans, stem) e. g. ji-snii victorious

vadh-a-snil murderous ; car-i-snii wandering maday-i-snu
:

adj.

mtoxicating.

Secondary nominal Suffixes.

The great majority of these form
2.

general sense of relating

to

adjectives with the

or connected with.

forms a large number of adjectives expressing the

a
sense of relation to or connexion with the primitive word
many of them have in the m. become apjjellatives and in
:

the n.

(mariit)
earth)

daiva

divine

manav-a

e. g.

medicine;

to the

sakhy-a

of priest (hotr).
a forms the
:

e. g.

nava

man

nava m.
gata m. n. gone.

eartldij

dasarajn-a

maghon-a n.

n. neiv

gata f.,
ani forms the

f.

e. g.

great

f.

Maruts

(prthiv-i

(man-u), m. human being

body (tanu)

of adjectives

f.

the

in

relating to the

bhesaj-a

which

in

priy-a

n. battle

bountifulness

n. friendsliip [saikhi friend);

f.,

personifications

marut-a

without Vrddhi

syllable

(deva god); parthiva

the ten Icings (dasa-rajan)

bountiful)

first

strengthened with Vrddhi (the

is

hclonging to

tanv-a helonging

van

The

nouns.

abstract

majority of instances
then always takes i)

f..

of

(magha-

adj. healing, n.

hotv-an.

m. and

office

end in a
m.
n. dear
pi'iy-a
n.

names of male beings in a, or f.

indr-ani wife of Indra, mudgal-ani

of

SECONDARY NOMINAL SUFFIXES

182J

wife of MuclgaUi

arany-ani

urj-ani Slrength (urj

itympli

of

tite

261

Forcd (aranya)

afrcngtli).

ayana forms m. patronymics with

kanv-ayana descendant of Kanva.
:

initial

Vi ddiii

e.g.

i
forms in. patronymics, witli initial Vrddhi, from
nouns in a
e. g.
paurukuts-i descendant of I'uruJcutsa
samvaran-i descendant of Samcavana. Similarly formed is
sarath-i m. charioteer (from sa-i'atha dr'wimj on the same
:

chanot).

in

forms numerous adjectives, in the sense of

possessing/,

almost exclusively from stems in a

e. g. ark-in praising
(ar-kajjra/se); from other stems: arc-in radiant {axc-iheam),
;

var-m-in

clad In armour (var-man)

irregularly formed
ret-in abounding in seed (r6t-as), hiran-in adorned -with gold
:

(hiran-ya).

iya {= ya after conjunct consonants): forms adjectives of

e. g. abhr-iya derlred from the clouds
(abhra),

relation

indr-iya belonging to Indra, samudr-iya oceanic.

i
forms the f. of m. stems made with suffixes ending in
consonants (95), or with tr (101 e), and often of stems in u
:

in a (always when formed with Vrddhi)

e. g.
<j or
ad-at-i eating, av-i-tr-i protectress, prthv-i broad (prthu),
dev-i goddess (dev-a).
Cp. 107.

(98

ina
forms adjectives, chiefly expressive of direction,
from the weak stem of derivatives in anc e. g. arvac-ina
:

turned towards (arvanc hitherward)

also others expressing
the general sense of relation e. g. visvajan-ina (AV.) con;

taining all kinds of people.

iya forms general adjectives, chiefly in the later Samhitas

e.g. grhamedh-iya relating to the domestic sacrifice, parvatiya mountainous ahavan-iya used for the o?>?afi'ow(a-havana),
:

as a

m.

sacrificial fire (AV.).

forms m. patronymics as well as a few general

adjectives; e.g. adit-eya m. son of Adit
paurus-eya

eya

relating

to

man

(piirusa).

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

262

ka

forms adjectives

and

diminutives

[is-i

e. g.

anta-ka

dura-ka distant, mama-ka mu padaka in little foot, raja-ka m. Icinglet with Vrddhi and connecting i vasant-i-ka belonging to the spring (vasanta). The
of some of the diminutives is formed with ika
f.
e. g.
kumar-ika f. little girl (kumara-ka m. little hog).
tana and (its syncopated form) tna form adjectives with
a temporal sense from adverbs and prepositions
e. g.
nu-tana and nu-tna present (nu now)
sana-taua and

making an end

(data),

sana-tna

eternal (sana

from of

old)

pra-tna ancient (pra

hefore).

tama

forms superlatives (from nominal stems

prep, lid) and ordinals ; e. g. puru-tama very many ;
sata-tama hundredth.
highest
:

and the
ut-tama

forms comi^aratives from adjectives, substantives,

and the prep, aid tavas-tara stronger rathi-tara better
tara

charioteer] lit-tara higher.

ta

forms abstract

f.

substantives Avith the sense conveyed

by the English suffixes -ship and -ness;

relationship,

human

ta

icealthiness

deva-ta

bandhu-ta

e.g.

divinity,

purusa-

nature.

and

tati

vasu-ta

(less

often) tat:

form abstract

substantives

f.

jyestha-tati superiority, sarva-tati complete

(like ta)
deva-tat divine service, sarva-tat
(Lat.
welfare
salu-tati-)
;

e. g.

completeness (Lat. salu-tcd-),

tya forms a few substantives and adjectives

from adverbs
and prepositions ama-tyam. companion (ama at home); apatya n. offspring; ni-tya constant, nis-ty a, foreign (nis out).
tva forms n. abstract substantives (like ta) e. g. amrtatva n. immortality, maghavat-tva liherality.
:

tvana (= tva-na): forms

all

n. abstract

substantives (nearly

of tliem duplicates of others in tva)

e. g.

jani-tvana

wifehood, sakhi-tvana friendship.

tha forms a few ordinals as well as adjectives (from

e. g.
pronominal stems) with a general numerical sense
:

HECONDAKY NOMINAL SUFFIXES

182]

catur-tha fourth,

sapta-tha

seventh

26y

kati-tha

the

how-

inanieth ?

ni

forms the

f.

of pati lord

and of parusa

knotty, as well

as of several adjectives in ta denoting colours

thus pat-ni
6-ni variegated (6-ta).
mistress[G\s.. woT-via), parus-ni a river
In a few of the colour adjectives ni is substituted for the
;

linal a, wliile

takes the place of t

e. g.

asik-ni hlack

(as-i-ta).

bha forms m. names of animals thus rsa-bha and

vrsa-bha bull garda-bha and rasa-bha ass.
ma forms superlatives (partly from prepositions) and
a few ordinals
e. g. ava-ma lotvesi
madhya-ma middle:

nava-ma

most;

ninth (Lat. novi-mu-s),

dasa-ma

tenth (Lat.

deci-mu-s).

mant forms adjectives in the sense of 2^ossessi/ig from

e. g. asani-msint possessing
substantives (except stems in a)
:

the thimderhoU,

^vatvL-mamt powerful

go-mant

rich in cows,

caksus-mant ^MssessecZ of eyes.

maya

forms adjectives

manas-maya

e. g.

mna

spiritual,

forms a few

dyu-mna

brightness,

(f.

i)

in the sense of consisting of;

mrn-maya made of clay

n. abstracts

su-mna

(mrd).

from nouns or particles

welfare.

forms adjectives of relation, m. patronymics and n.

abstracts.
Most of the latter two classes take Vrddhi of the
first syllable, but only about one-fourth of the adjectives do

ya

so

e.

Aditi

tya

pasav-ya relating to cattle (pasii) aditya m, son of

taugrya m. son ofTugra, but also tiigr-ya adhipa-

g.

n. lordship

(adhipati overlord).

forms comparatives (from prepositions) and ordinary

nouns, mostly adjectives e, g. ava-ra lower dhum-ra grey
ra

(dhuma
la

'k.di^i-ldi{moyikey-coloured=) brown,

m.

little

vat

smoke) rath-i-ra riding in a car (ratha).

forms adjectives and a few m. diminutives
;

e. g.

hahu-la abundant vrsa-la

;

man, sisu-la m. little child.

forms a few f. abstract substantives, almost cxclu-

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

264
sively

from prepositions, expressing

ud-vat

hchjld.

van

ni-vat

local

[182-183

position

e. g.

deptli.

forms adjectives in the sense oi possessing and a few

substantives
e. g.
magha-van houiififul, srusti-van

m.

samad-van

u-arUlcc; athar-van m. fire-priest.

forms adjectives, from every kind of nominal stem,
in the sense of possessing
e. g. as va- vant and asva-vant
owning horses sakhi-vant having friends visnu-vant accompanied hg Vhnu roman-vant hairg payas-vant containing

obedient,

vant

Some

milli.

pronominal

ma-vant

of these derivatives, especially those formed from

e. g.
stems, have the sense of resemhUng

lile

me

the use of the

n.

nr-vant manly. From this sense is derived

ace. as an adv. of comparison
e. g. manus;

vat

like

vin

3Ianus.

forms adjectives from stems ending in a (which is

e. g. ubhaya-vin
a, and as
iKirtal^ing of both
(ubhaya), astra-vin obedient to the goad, yasas-vin glorious.
Exceptionally formed are dhrsad-vin bold (dhrsat) and
:

lengthened),

vag-vin eloquent (vac).

sa
forms adjectives and m. substantives, sometimes
without change of meaning e. g. eta-sa variegated (eta id.),
:

yuva-sa youthful (yiivan id.), roma-sa hairy (roman hair)

anku-sa m. Itool:, kala-sa m. jar.
183. The above lists of suffixes practically supply the

rules

of gender for

summarized

as follows

the

Vedic

noun.

These

be

may

Speaking generally, bare roots as stems, if action nouns,

f., if agent nouns, m.
Derivative stems in a, i, u are f. stems in a, t, n may be
m. or n. stems in i and u may be of any gender.
are

a.

are all stems

formed with the

suffixes a,

i,^

ta, tat, tati, ti,^ tra.

Feminine

Except seven m. stems in i see 100, I h.

But when stems in ti appear as agent nouns they
:

m.

f.

as adjectives.

aiv m.,

and

GENDEK.

]S:J-184]

COMPOUNDS

I'Bo

h. Neuter are all stems formed ^\itll is, tva, tvana, aiul,
unless adjectives^ or agent nouns,' those formed with ana,

as, us.

Masculine are

c.

not used adjectivally)

(in so far as

stems formed with the sutlixes yu, va

bha,
d.

ayana,

all

ka,

la.

Masc. or

nil, mi, tr^

stems formed with the suffixes ni,

fern, are

also stems

formed with the bare

root.''

Masc. or neut. are stems formed with the

e.

i,^

ta, tha, na,

suffixes a,

vma, ma, ya, ra, tya, tra, tu, an, man, van
formed with in, vin, ina, iya, tana, tama,

also adjectives

maya, mant, vant.

tara,
/.

Masc,

fem., neut. are stems formed with

B.

184.

I.

or u.

Compounds.

Verbal Compounds

are formed by combining

roots with twenty prepositions and a few adverbs.

The
verb
in
is
finite
forms
compound
(which, however,
actually

compounded only in subordinate

clauses

when

the

j)

reposition

immediately precedes the verb) is conjugated like the simple

verb.
Thus gam go combines with sam together to sam-gam
go together, unite 3. s. sam-gachati.
can l)e used to form nominal stems by
;

suffixes

enumerated above

(182,

1);

The compound root

means of the primary
e.g. sam-gam-a m.

union.
a. The prepositions which are compounded with roots are
the following
acha to/cards, ati begoiul, adhi ujjon, anu
:

after, antar between, apa atrag, api on, abhi against, ava
^
down, a near, iid up, ni down, into, nis out, para away,
^

^
''

e. g.

When they are of course

When they are m.

m. as well as

n.

In patronymics.
Stems in tr are always m. when they are agent nouns.
These when used as adj. are occasionally, neuter.

The preposition a reverses the sense

a-gara cume, a-da

take.

of \erb8 of going or giving

VERBAL COMPOUNDS

2()6

pra

pain around,

fortit,

prati

towards,

vi

[is4

sam

asuHikr,

together.

h.

few adverbs are also compounded with a limited

number
aram
(hcc.)

of verbs

hand is combined with kr = serve (dat.), prepare

with gam = serve
with bhu = serve, conduce to
at

(dat.).

avis openly

is

two former

the

combined with
it

santi being manifest

manifest

make

with kr

bhu and kr

only

with

avis
visible, appear
avir agnir abhavat Agni became
means malce visible, e. g. avis karta

it

e. g.

manifest.

tiras aside
e. g.

as,

means become

ma

tiro

is

combined with bhu

bhut may

it

be

and dha put only

'

not disappear.

puras in front is combined with kr do and dha put only

krnotu ratharn purah may he place (our) car in the
;

e. g.

forefront.

word meaning heart (Gk. KapS-ia and KpaS-Lr],

having acquired the character of an adverb, is
once combined with kr and often with dha, put in the sense
srad, an old

Lat. cord-),

of p)ut faith

in, credit

= Lat.

credo for cred-do), but is nearly

always separated from the verb by other words e. g. srad

asmal dhatta believe in him srad visva varya krdhi entrust
;

cdl

boons (to us).

pra-dur {before the door) begins to appear in the AV. in

combination with bhu = become manifest, appear.
c. A few substantives, after assuming an adverbial character, appear compounded, like verbal prefixes, with jjarticipial
forms in the AV.

These are

asta-m ^ home with

go

astam-yant setting, astam-esyant alout to set, astam-ita

namas obeisance with the gerund of kr make namasset
krtya doing homage.
:

In the SB. aiul later tiras is alo combined witli kr

This word is still a substantive in the RV.

do.

VERBAL COMPOUNDS

184-185]

267

In the RV. a few substantives designating parts of the

budy are compounded with the gerund of grab

gi'hya seizing by

the

ear,

seize:

karna-

seising bg the foot,

pada-grhya

hasta-grhya grasping hy the hand.

The interjection hin is compounded with kr in the sense
(1.
e. g. hin-krnvati lowing.
of utter the sound hin, murmur
;

There are also a few reduplicated interjectional w'ords,

mostly onomatoi3oetic and nearly always ending in a, that
appear compounded with bhu and kr alala-bhavant sound:

ing merrily
glittering

janjana-bhavant sparkling malmala-bhavant

bharbhara-bhavat became confounded bibiba;

bhavant cracUing kik.ira krau tear to tatters masmasa

karam I have crushed; masmasa kuru and mrsmrsa kuru
;

crush

akhkhali-krtya

croaJcing.

compound is the only cx\mple in the RV. of i

The AV. has vati-krta
appearing in&tead of a before kr or bhii.
n. a disease (from vata ivind).
a.

The

latter

II.

Nominal Compounds.

185. From the Indo-European period the Vedic language

has inherited the power of combining two or more words
into one treated like a simple word as regards accent,
Both in the frequency and in
inflexion, and construction.

compounds the Vedic language resembles the

Greek of Homer. In the RV. and the AV. no compounds
of more than three independent members are met with, and

the length of

which three occur are rare, such as purva-kamakrtvan fulflling former wishes.
The two characteristic features of a compound are unity
of accent and employment of the uninflected stem in the

those in

first

member

both these
^

(or

rules.

members)

but there are exceptions to

Occasionally tmesis of a

compound

occurs.'

Chiefly in dual comi^ounds, as dyava ha ksama heaven and earth

few others, as nd.ra va samsara, for nara-samsam. It takes
;

also in a
plaice

only

when

the

compound

is

doubly accented.

NOMINAL COMPOUNDS

'268

The

[185-18(5

members is, moreover, sometimes

from that between words in a sentence.
a. The gender of compounds, if they end in substantives,
with few excejitions that of the last member the gender
yaiidhi between the

different

is

of collectives is always neuter.

The number in comjiounds
depends on the sense that in collectives is always singular.
;

When

the word appearing as the first member has two

the
weak stem is used when it has three, the middle
stems,
stem (73 a). In substantive compounds the last member
;

retains, as a rule, its gender, form,

adjectival

member
h.

compounds

while in

are of course variable.

Vedic compounds

Classification.

three

and inflexion

the gender and inflexion of the last

main

may

be divided into

classes according to their syntactical relations

which the members are

Co-ordinatives,
co-ordinated
2. Determinatives, or those in which the
or those in

1.

first
3.

member determines

or limits the sense of the last

which
general meaning
bahv-anna possessing miicJi food). To

Possessives, or adjectives

of

tlie

implies possession (as

these must be added, in order to classify Vedic compounds
4.
Governing comexhaustively, three lesser groups
:

pounds, or adjectives in which the first member governs the

last in sense (as ksayad-vira rulUui men)
5. Syntactical
compounds, or irregular formations arising from the juxtaG. Iteratives, or
position of t\'\'o words in a sentence
repeated words treated as compounds in the Sainhitas
inasmuch as they have only one accent and a special meaning
;

when

thus combined.
1.

Co-ordinative (Dvandva)

186. These

consist of

two

'

Compounds.

suljstantives, far less

adjectives, connected in sense

with

'

and

commonly

'.

1 This
term applied to co-(jrdiiiutiv(j by the later
marians, means pair or couple.

Hindu gram-

CO-ORDINATIVES

ISC]

209

1. The most numerous

group (about three-fourths of all
the Dvandvas) in the Rigveda comprises those compounds
(nearly always names of deities) in which each member is

dual

in form and has a separate accent

e. g. mitra-varuna
Mttraand Varuna; ma,tar3i--pitsira motJwr and father dyavaprthivi heaven and earth. In the RV. the two duals are often
separated, as in the line a nakta barhih sadatam usasa
let Night and Dawn seat themselves
The proper
tijjon the litter.
;

genitive of such compounds is e. g.

as these co-ordinate duals early

But

commonest ending

a unit, the

mitrayor varunayoh.
came to be regarded as

of the first

member, that of

the N. A., came to be retained unaltered in the other cases:

G. mitra-varunayoh, I. mitra-varunabhyam.
further

step towards unification

which the

is

taken in a minority of cases in

member loses its accent and

member (irrespectively of its

first

of the final

receives the

acute,

as

the last syllable

original accent)

surya-candramas-a sun and moon

The last stage in the Rigveda appears in

(candra-mas).
four examples in which the first member assumes the stemIn the later Samform, e. g. indra-vayu Indra and Vdyu.
and in B. this is the prevailing type in new formations,
daksa-kratu m. vnll and understanding (TB.).
2. Another type is represented
by the plural Dvandvas
which express pairs of groups. These show the stem-form

hitas
e.

g.

member and

in the first

the

last.

the accent on the final syllable of

in the RV. occur in Book

The only examples

e.g. aho-ratrani- days

and

and
but in the later Sainhitas this type becomes
sheep (avi)
quite general, e. g, bhadra-papah (AV.). the good and the Ijad.^
nights,

ajavayas goats

(aja)

Cp. Latin su-ove-tauriUa, a later type representing three groups.

This Dvandva shows a double in-egularity the gender of the first
member has prevailed over that of the second, and the f. stem ratrl
has been changed to ratra.
-

Several of the cardinal numerals are old Dvandvas, e.g. dvaiicelre Qwo and
tr&yo-dasa thirteen
ten), dva being an old dual

dasa

ijliiee

and

ten).

NOMINAL COMPOUNDS

270
3.

[1S6-187

There occur in the Samhitas a few singular Dvandvas

collective sense and are always neuter/ and

which express a

"

ista-purtam ivJiat has been

or
offered
given
krta^akrtam (AV.) what has been done and
kesa-smasrii n. Jiair and beard (AV.) bhadranot done
papam (AV.) good and evil] samista-yajiis (VS.) sacrifice and

accent the final syllable

e.

g.

sacrificial

formuJa.

Dvandvas consisting

B.

of three types

of adjectives are rare.

They

are

1. The adjectives designate colours, their combination

expressing a mixture of the two, as nila-lohita dark blue
darh red.
and red

2.

They express

uphill

and

a contrast, as

utkula-nikula (VS.) going

doivnhill.

are used with dual sul)stantives to express that

each is an attribute of one unit of the kind, as pad-bhyam
3.

They

daksina-savyabhyam (AV.)

irifh

the

two

feet, the right

and

the left.

Dvandvas (A 1) are frequently repi-esented

duals
which put one of a pair in the dual to
by elliptical
Mitra
heaven and earth mitra
as
dyava
express both,
a.

The

old dual

and Varum pitara

and father, parents.
;

=
= father

2.

and mother

matara

=
= mother

Determinatives.

187. This numerous class of compounds comprises two

In the larger group (2 a) the first member has the
groups.
a
substantive dependent, in the sense of an oblique
of
value
be either a verbal noun or
case, on the second, which may
an ordinary substantive. This may be called the dependent
determinative group (named Tatpurusa by the later Hindu
In the other group (2 I)} the final member,
grammarians).
1

Cf. the Greek vvxOqiJ-epoi'.

Originally doubtless istapurta, dual in both members.

DETERMINATIVES

187]

if

an ordinary substantive,

271

described adjectivally,

is

or,

if

by the first member. This may

be called the descriptive determinative group (called Karmaa verbal noun, adverbially,

dharaya by the later Hindu grammarians).

2

Dependent (Tatpurusa) Determinatives.

a.

member

(substantive or pronoun) may have

the form) of any oblique case.
even
often
the sense (and
an
it
has
When
ace, inst., abl., or loc. sense, the final

A. The

first

^
when it has a dat." or
mostly a verbal noun
The compound
noun.'*
an
it
is
ordinary
always
gen.' sense,
as the last
an
or
substantive
be
a
according
adjective,
may

member

is

member

is

one or the other.

In ace. dependents the final member is always a verbal

noun e.g. havir-ad eating the olilathn go-ghna coir-slayimj,
asva-haya urging on steeds; deva-madana exhilarating
1.

the gods

davan

gara-girna (AV.)

much

giving

vaja-sati

act

f.

slaying Vrtra.
2. Inst.
:

liaving

bhadra-vadin

of winning

deva-tta

hurnt

parana,

adj. crossing ivith oars

ivith fire

bala-vijnaya

to he

The subdivision ending

dependents

hoot//

The

Indra

l>y

given by the

recognized by

gods

in verbal

liis

agni-

aritra-

{nuth

strength.

nouns may be called

'

verbal

'.

2
Examples of this sense are very rare.
ordinary adjective or sulistantive.
^

tanu-subhra shining

bhtiri-

an auspicious cry
vrtra-hatya n. act of

uttering

indra-patama most drunk

dagdha
in body

swallowed jMtson

'''

final

member

of genitive

The

dependents

is

final

member

is

an

always an ordinary

substantive.
'

* The subdivision
ending in ordinary substantives
nominal dependents
5
Cf. Greek linTo-Sapio-s horse'iaming.

may

be called

'.

"

An

example of the rare use of

sense.
7

tta for datta (H'>o, 2

6).

a past pass. part, in a tr.ansitive

NOMINAL COMPOUNDS

272
Dat.

3.

hymns

vakmaraja-satya falt/i/ul
visva-sambhu salutary for all.

Abl.

4.

to

go-ja produced from cows

[is7

the

onlaincrs

of

tivra-su-t pressed

the fermenting mass.

from

Gen. (the commonest sense)

5.

raja-putra Icing's son

m. offi nee against the
;

vis-psitilo rd of the clan; deva-kilbisa

'

gods

dru-pada

Loc.

n. post ofivood.'

ahar-jata (AV.) horn

in the day
uda-pluta (AV.)
purii-bhu being in many places
swimming in the water
bandhu-ksit dwelling among relatives.
a. In their first member many dependent compounds
retain the case-ending, most commonly the ace, often the
loc, but the rest rarely.
Sing, endings (ace. and inst.) may
Plur. endings (ace. and loc.) someexpress a plur. sense.
6.

times occur, but du. endings never in these compounds.

The aec. generally expresses the object of a transitive

The form

verb.

in

am

is,

in the RV., the rule before the

verbal nouns -kara maJcing, -caya collecting, -jaya conquering, -tara overcoming, -dara cleaving, -bhara hearing, -ruja
hrealdng, -sani winning, -saha overwhelming

kara

am-dara,^ destroying

Soma

e. g. abhayamdhanam-jaya winning tjooty, pur*

forts, sutam-bhara
receiving pressed

it

also occurs before other verbal nouns, not infre-

quently before such as l^egin with vowels

devout,

An

visvam-inva

example
and

hrilliance,

looling fiercely.

kara doing
1

2
'

pirocnring security,

e. g.

dhiyam-dha

all-moving, asvam-isti^ seeding

Examples of an ace. pi. ending are ka-citmanner of things pasva-isti desiring Jcine.
"'

all

An

example of an objective genitive.

Here the genitive expresses the material.
The singular ace. form with plural sense.
Also im in pustim-bhard hringing pro^pcrilij ami harim-bliaril

hearinc/ fhe
''

horses.

of a cognate ace. is subham-ya moving in

of an adverbial ace, ugram-pasya (AV.)

lawny (bolt).
This and asvam-isti are Tatpurusa possessives

(181), 2).

DEPENDENT DETERMINATIVES

187]

Inst.

gira-vi'dh

irjoiciiif/

soiu/

278

sunesita driren hy

vidmanapas worlchuj (apas) trith wisdom

(suna)
(vidmana) ksudha-mara (AV.) m. death hy hunger vacadogs

stena

thief hy speech, secretly injuring hy words.

Dat.

the only example seems to be found in the loose

syntactical
as a proper

compound dasyave vrka wolf to

the

Basyu, used

name.

Abl.
divo-ruc shining
divo-ja produced from heaven
from the shy.
Gen. very common before pati hitshand or lord, as gna-s:

pati hushand of a divine woman-, ja-s-pati lord of a family

It also occurs in the

brahmanas-pati lord of prayer:"
names
divo-dasa
servant
and sunah-sepa
heaven
proper
of
Dog's-tail.

Loc.
common in the RV. before agent nouns formed
from the simple root e. g. divi-yaj worshipping in heaven
:

x'athe-stha standing

with a

e. g.

o)i

a car

divi-ksaya

also before several

formed

There are also

dtvelling in heaven.

several examples of plurals, as apsu-sad direlling in the

waters; gosu-yudh fighting in {= for) Jcine hrtsv-sis ptiercing
the heart.
The singular also occurs a few times before an
;

ordinary

adj. or subst., as

made-raghu

svapne-diihsvapnya (AV.)

n. evil

quick in exhilaration

dream in

sleep.

a. If a root forms the last member of a Tatpurusa, final long

vowels (a, i, u) undergo no change, while short vowels* (i, u, r") usually
add a determinative t e. g. agre-pa drinkbuj first yajna-ni leading the
;

Singular ending with plural sense.

rare

example of an

inst.

with an ordinary substantive as

final

member.
^

By

the false analogy of these words are also formed from a stems

rta-s-pati lord of pious ivorks and r^tha-s-pati lord of (he car.

lord of the house probably = dd.m-s-pati.
*

Radical

a,

as a

shortened form of

a,

often appears as a final,

hciefiy in the later Samhitas, as agre-ga going

name-giving.
1819

DSm-pati

in front,

nama-dhd (AV.)

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

274

[187-188

raja-3u king-creating but divi-ksi-t dwelling in heaven somaThere is, however, no t

su-t Soma-2n-essing jyotis-kf-t light -creating.
added in va,na,T-guforest-ruaming.^

sacrifice

Descriptive (Karmadharaya)

h.

188. This

Determinatives

class of

The

member

is

Compounds.

comparatively rare

generally an ordinary
substantive, but is sometimes a verbal or an ordinary
The relation of the first member to the last is
adjective.

in the Samhitas.

last

appositional, attributive,

three

ways

By

1.

or

adverbial.

It is expressed

in

subst., it has

an

Substantive.

is

If followed

by a

attributive sense equivalent to an adj.

compound nature;

male antelope

demon

purusa-mrga

(VS.) m. [man

=)

demon

in

ultika-yatu m. owl demon,

If followed

appositional

e.

by a verbal
in

sense

adj.,
e. g.

the preceding subst. is usually

isana-krt acting as a ruler

st6ma-tasta fashioned as a hymn of praise.

adverbial

it is

i.

purusa-vyaghra (VS.) m. man-tiger, a kind

vrsa-kapi m. man-ape.

form of an owl
of

e.g.

expressing sex or

e. g.

But sometimes

rtv-ij sacrificing in season

regidarly

sarga-takta speeding with a rush.

a.

Before a verbal noun a substantive sometimes implies a come. g. dhara-vakd. sounding like a stream, syend-jiita speeding like

parison

an

eagle.

Similarly before an ordinary adjective

suka-babhru (VS.)

reddish like a parrot.

If followed by an ordinary subst.,

2. By an Adjective.
the adj. has the usual attributive sense e. g. candra-mas
krsna-sakuni (AV.) m. raven (lit. hlacJc
m. (bright) moon
;

'
Final u sometimes appears as a shortened form of u in some
Tatpurusas, as dhi-jii inspiring the mind; puru-bhii appearing in many

'places.
2

This

is

the term applied to this class of compounds

Hindu grammai-ians.

))y

the later

KARMADHARAYA COMPOUNDS

iss]

bird)

nava-jvara m. new pain

275

maha-grama m.
'

(jrcat

hod

yavayat-sakha m.

protecting friend^- Sometimes the qualifying adj. indicates a part of what the last member expresses ;

adhara-kantha (VS.) m. hiver

ardha-deva m. demi-god purvahna
*
dhyam-dina m. midday.

e. g.

If followed
in sense

m. forenoon

satya-yaj
ttvice.''

By an Adverb

renewing

As

(inclusive of particles

evara

itself;

try-artisa

''

member
maha but

first

of

the

u.

punarpuro-yavan
sato-mahat equally

quite (eva) ready (ara)

punar-bhu

satyam-ugra

and prepositions)

amutra-bhuya (AV.)
;

arising again;

puro-hita placed in front

(sa-tas) great

appears as

visva-scandra

n of an stems is dropped"
maha-vrsa (AV.) m. great bitU, bha-

injuring wrongly

state of being there

'

of Karmadliarayas the final

aksnaya-druh

going before

dvi-ja (AV.) horn

yellow

glittering

(= sana)

in three places.

At the end

nava

sana-ja horn of old

{ satyam),

hari-scandra

in eka-vrsa (AV.) m. onJtj buU,

drahd' (AV.) n. auspicious daij.
8.

Similarly before ordinary adjectives

(AV.) ruddy
a.

swiftly-speeding

sacrificing truly

all-glittering

ma-

"

e. g.

asu-heman

neclc
;

by a verbal noun, the preceding adj. is adverbial

asu-patvan swift-// i/ing, i. e. flying swiftly

^
;

of the)

(part
'

truly mighty

sayam-bhava

Karmadharayas (and Bahnvrihis) mahfit

AV. has mahat-kandd great section.

Here siXh-i friend becomes sakha. Cf. 189, 4 d and 189 A. 2 a.

Here dhan day is syncopated and extended with a also in aparahnd (AV.) afternoon, ny-^hn-a (AV.) decline of dag.
*
With case-ending retained in the first member.
The sense is rather appositional in purva-pa drirJdng (as) frst,
^

.^

'^

vamd-jata horn as one

*
Cf. Gk. uiKv-ireTTjs
''

dear,

i.

e.

dear hy nature.

swift-flying.

Here the cardinals are used

for the

numeral

tri-s.
^
^

This is much commoner in Bahuvrlhis (189, 4).

Also in sad-ahd (AV.) m. period of six days (189,

t2

4),

adverljs

dvi-s,

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

276

[iss-iso

m. later part
(AV.) m. hecomimi evening pasca'-dosa (VS.)
m.
the
ida-vatsara
present year puro(AV.)
of the evening;
;

'

agni* (VS.) m. fire in front; su-da giving tviUinghj duhseva imfavouraUe a-mitra m. non-friend, enemy su-vasana
ati-krsna excessively darJc pra-napat m.
n. fair garment
;

adhi-raja m. supreme king

great grandson
m. fidl year.
sam-vatsara
hero
great
;

pra-vira

ni.

Possessive (Bahuvrihi) Compounds.

3.

are secondary adjectives.

They
determinatives
are
(generally Karmadharayas), ending in
substantives, which have been transformed into adjectives

189. These compounds

another substanagreeing in gender, number, and case with

tive expressed or understood. The transformation is accomfrom the final member to the
panied by a shift of accent
The term possessive is probably the most appropriate
first.
as applied to these compounds, for it expresses their general
in a few instances
in the vast majority of cases
'

'

meaning
more comprehensive sense of connected with is required
to indicate the relation between the substantive and the
;

'

'

the

e. g.
visva-nara
Bahuvrihi compound agreeing with it
Possessives are of two kinds
belonging to all men.
;

1.

Karmadharaya

Possessives, in which the

first

member

is an attributive adj. (including j^articiples), an appositional

and prepositions)
subst., or an adverb (including particles
whose mother has
hata-matr
e.
ugra-bahu powerful -armed
:

g.

rusad-vatsa having a shining calf; asva-parna

indra-satru having
horse-winged, i. e. whose wings are horses
heen slain

Indra as a foe

raja-putra having

Icings as sons

hiranya-

nemi

whose fellies are (made of) gold; asta-pad^ eight-footed,

ittha-dhi having such thought, devout;
dvi-V3^d-' two-footed
is
in front; vi-griva wry-necJced;
car
ivhose
puro-ratha
;

Here the adverbs preceding ordinaiy substantives are =

Gk.

oKTw-TToS-.

Lat. li-ped-.

adjectives.

BAHUVRIHI COMPOUNDS

189]

an-udra

'

icatetiess

dus-pad

harvest]

a-pad

footless

ku-yava causing a bad

su-parna

ill-footed;

277

heautiful- winged.

In some i^ossessives based on appositional Karmadharayas a

comijarison of the first with the final membei- is implied e. g. varsajya
a.

(AV.)

ichose rain is (like)

tree-haired

butter

vrksd,-kesa whose

trees are

(like) hair,

wooded (mountain).

I).
The superlatives jy^stha chief and srestha hest, tlie comparative
bhiiyas more, and para higher, are used substantively as final member
of possessives indra-jyestha huriiifj Indra as chief, yaraa-srestha (AV.)
:

whom Yania

of

part

is

= cliiefly bone,

asthi-bhuyams (AV.) having

lest,

avara-s-para^ (VS.)

bone as

its

chief

in ichich the lower is higher, topsy-iurvij.

2.
In Tatpurusa Possessives the first member most
commonly has a gen., not infrequently a loc, but rarely an
inst. or ace. sense.
The case-ending is in several instances

retained.

wealth

are:

Examples

divi-yoni having

recognimhle hg light

a desire for

rayas-kama having

{his) origin in

tvam-kama

heaven

bhasa-ketu

having a desire for

thee.

In possessives based on gen. Tatpurusas, the first member often

as agni-tejas
implies a comparison, but never with a case-ending
a.

i^AV.) having the

brightness

of

fire, fire-bright

fksa-griva bear-necked

go-vapus cow-shaped mano-java hating the swiftness of thought, swift as

thought; mayiira-ronian having the plumes of peacocks.
b. When a loc. sense is intended, 25arts of the body appear as the
;

member;

last

faced

e.g.

asru-mukha (AV.)

ghrta-prstha having

(AV.) having

a vessel in his

madhu-jihva

butter

hand

Iiacing tears

on her face,

on his back, butter-backed

tear-

patra-hasta

mani-griva liaving pearls on the neck

vajra-bahu having a bolt on

having honey on ids tongue

his arm.

8. Bahuvrlhis come to be used substantively, when the

noun with which they agree is dropped thus su-parna
Of this use there are three applifair-iuinged, m. bird.
:

cations

These compounds very frequently appear as m., sometimes as f., proper names, the adjectival sense often not
a.

'

Gk.

'

Here the

dv-v5po-s,
s of

the num. survives from the use of the two words in

syntactical juxtaposition.

Cp. the later para-s-para

and anyo-'nya.

NOMINAL STEM FOKMATION

278

[189

occurring at all. Thus brhad-uktha adj. having great 2)t'aise,

m. a seer brhad-diva adj. (licelling in high heaven, m. a seer,
:

brhad-diva a goddess

f.

[to

ivhom

sacrifice is dear)

m. as names only, Priya-medha

and Vama-deva {io whom the gods

are dear).

They appear not

b.

the

first

member

is

with

infrequentl}^ as n. substantives

an abstract (sometimes a

collective) sense, especially

when

the privative particle a- or an-, or the

adjective sarva all

n.

childlessness',

e. g. an-apatya, adj.
childless (AV.),
;
sarva- vedasa (AV.) n. whole 2)ro;pcrty',

ni-kilbisa n. deliverance from sin

maternal Jdnship.
c.

With numerals, from dvi

matr-bandhu (AV.)

two upwards, as their first

member, they form

'

sing, neuters
cented a) with a collective sense e.
;

three lives

dvi-raja (AV.) n.

n.

battle

(always ending in acg.

tri-yuga

of two lungs

n. period

of

dasangula

n. length of ten fingers (4 d).

4.

The

final

member of Bahuvrlhis
make it end in a.

is

liable to various

changes tending to

. The n of several words in an, k^rmau," dharaan, naman, p4rvan,

vfsan, sakthin, is frequently dropjied in ordinary Bahuvrlhis, and that
e. g. visvd-karma^ jierforming all icork,
of dhan in numeral collectives
;

priya-dharaa occupying desirable places, chando-nami (VS.) named metre,

metrical, vi-parva* joinfless, dvi-vrs (VS.) having txvo hulls, lomasdsaktha (VS.) haxing hainj thighs sad-aha (AV.) ni. pei'iod of six days.
b. Tlie suffixes a and ya ai'e frequently added, and sometimes ka
e. g. catur-aks-d four-eyed, su-g^v-a having fine cows, anyodar-ya horn
;

from another womb (uddra), ddsa-mas-ya ten months old, madhu-hast-ya

honej-ha)ided, try-amba-ka haring three mothers, vi-manyu-ka (AV.)/rec
from anger, a-karnd-ka (TS.) earless.
c. The
suffix in {possessing) is sometimes pleonasticallj' added

maha-hast-m

'

having large hands,

ku-nakh-in (AV.) having had

Except those formed with aha day, which are m., as sad-aha m.

series of six days.

2
*
*

nails.

But this word retains its n in seven compounds

But also viiSvdL-karman.
But a-parv&n and vfsa-parvan.

in the

RV.

BAHUVEIHI COMPOUNDS

189]

yaio-bhag-in (VS.)

rich

in

279

sa-rath-in (VS.) riding in

(jlonj,

the

same

chariot.

d.

and
i

is

substituteil for

is

in

kava-sakbd^ having a niggard for a friend,

On the other hand,

in dasangulfi n. length of (en fingers (anguli).
substituted for a in some comiiounds of gandhd. smell, and in

a few others

attaining success

dhumd-gandhi
(radha) in

of smoke, kr.std-radhi

smelling

agriculture,

prd.ty-ardhi

to

(AV.)

uhoin the half

(drdha) belongs.
e. In the f. of Bahuvrlhis pSti hnshand or lord, instead of remaining
unclianged, takes the f. form of the subst, (patni ivife) in das^-patni
having a demon as master, deva-patni having a god as a husband, vfsapatni ruled by a mighty one, sura-patni haring a hero as a husband.

4.

189 A. In
number

Governing Compounds.

this class,

which embraces

considerable

compounds, the first member, being either a

preposition or a verbal noun, governs the last in sense.
They resemble Bahuvrlhis in form^ as well as in their
of

adjectival character.
1. In the prepositional

group, in which about twenty

examples occur in the RV., the first member is a preposition
capable of governing a case e.g. ati-ratra^ lasting overnujld
anu-kama according to ivisli a-pathi and a-pathi he'mg on
;

the icay

paro-matra going beyond measure, excessive.

Bahuvrlhis, compounds of this type may become

Like

a.

substan-

upanas-a adj. being on a xoagon, n. (AV.) sipace on a %mgon.

b. The final member, when it does not end in a, adds the suffix a,
and ya sometimes even when it already ends in a e.g. anu-path-a
the feet, pard-ks-a (AV.)
going along the road, adhas-pad-a being under
aicay from the eye (^ks), puro-gav-a m. leader (going before the cows)
tives

e. g.

1
Otherwise sakhi remains unchanged in both Bahuvrlhis and
Karmadharayas (but 188, 2) in the RV. cp. 189, 2a.
2 But the
meaning is entirely different for in tlie prepositional
class the first member has the sense of a prep, (not an adj.), and in
the verbal class, it has a transitive (not an intransitive) sense. In
;

the latter class the final syllable of a part, is always accented (but
in Bahuvrlhis only when that is the natural accent).
'

Here

day and

ratri night

night.

becomes ratra, as in the Dvandva aho-ratrfi n.

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

280

helufj on

adhi-gart-ya

ike car-seal

(gartai,

antah-parsav-y^ (VS.)

hciiKj

occurring every montli (masa),

upa-mas-ya (AV.)

hchveen the libs (pdrsu),

[WJ

tiro-ahn-ya (being beyond a day), belonging

to

ihe

day (ahan)

before

yesterday.

In the verbally governing class the first member is an

agent noun or an action noun governing the last member as
an object. With a single exception they never add a suffix.
2.

'

Three types

which examples of proper names

of

all

(in

occur) may be distinguished.

a. In the commonest type, which

member

is

;\hnost restricted to the

RV.

a participle ending in dt formed from transitive

present stems in a, d, or dya e. g. rdhd,d-vara increasing goods, tardd-

the

first

is

dvesas overcoming (tdrat) foes, dharayat-kavi supporting the wise, mandaydt-sakha' gladdening Ids friend. The following are used as proper
names: rdhdd-ray'^ {^increasing wealth), jamdd-agni* {going to Agni),
bharad-vaja {carrying off the prize).
b. Only three or four examples occur of a second type, in which the
first member consists of a simple present stem (probably representing
an imperative) rada-vasu^ dispensing icecdth, siksa-nar-d" helping men;
:

name of a man trasa-dasyu {terrify the foe).

c. Some half dozen examples occur in the RV. of
which the first member is an action-noun in ti

as the

treasures,

rain

viti-radhas enjoying

as the

name

of a

5.

189

B.

man

a third type, in

dati-vara giving

the oblation, vrsti-dyav causing

pusti-gu m. {rearing kine).

tlie

sky

to

Syntactical Compounds.

certain

number

of irregular

compounds are

formed in a manner differing from that of any of the four

They may be treated as a class,

them have been produced by the same cause:

classes described above.

since all of

frequent syntactical juxtaposition in a sentence.

^

siksa-nar-d

see below, note

G.

rdh increase.
^
saikhi friend becomes sakha in two other governing compounds:
dravayat-sakha speeding his friend and sravaydt-sakha making his
^

rdhdt

aor. i^art. of

friend famous.
*

Cf. 188, 2, note 2.

jaraat is a palatalized form of an aor. jiart. of gam go.

In this and the following example the a of rada

metrically lengthened.

Here the stem of the final

iJfiV

member

is

extended with

and siksa
a.

is

SYNTACTICAL COMPOUNDS

i]

281

a. The relative adverb yad (a nominally formed abl.) in so

far as has come to be compounded with a superlative in the

yac-chrestha tJie best jwssibJc (lit. in so far as best), and

with a gerundive in the adv. yad-radhyam as quicJdi/ us

adj.

2)ossible
b.

in so

(lit.

The

initial

far as attainable).

words of a text begin

to be

compounded

in the later Samhitas as a substantive to designate that text.

Thus ye-yajamaha (VS.) m., used in the N. pi., means the
text beginning with the words yd yajamahe.
c.
Several subst. or adj. compounds have resulted from

Thus
aham-uttara (AV.) n. disinite for precedence (from aham
uttarah I am higher)
mama-satya n. dispute as to oicnerphrases consisting of two words in juxtaposition.

ship (from

mama satyam

it is

certainlij

mine)

mam-pasya

mam pasya

(AV.) designation of an aphrodisiac plant (from

look at me)
kuvit-sa some one (from kuvit sa
;

is it

he

r")

aham sana I icill obtain)

aham-purva eager to be first (from aham purvah I should
he first); kim-tva (VS.) asJcing garrulouslg (from kim tvam
aham-sana

what are

ijou

(voc.) rapacious

doing?).
6.

189

(from

Iterative

Compounds.

C.

Substantives, adjectives, pronouns, numerals,

adverbs, and prepositions are often repeated. They are then
treated as compounds, the second member losing its accent

and the two words l^feing written in the Pada text with the
Avagraha between them, as in other compounds. This class
resembles other compounds in having a single accent, but
differs from them in having not the stem but the fully
inflected form of nominal words in the first member.
In the KV. the iteratives number over 140, rather more
than half of them being substantives. The sense conveyed

by the

repetition is frequency, or constant succession in

time, or distribution in space.
Examples of the various
kinds of iteratives are the following
:

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

282

Substantives:

a.

ever}/ day,

ahar-ahar/ div6-dive,^ dyavi-dyavi

mo7ith after month
grh6-grhe, dame;

vise- vise"- in cvenj Jwuse

dame,
limb

masi-masi

diso-disah (AV.) from

sya of

[189

ever!/

sacrifice

angad-angat /rom

evert/ qttarfer

parvani-parvani

agnim-agnim (duvasyata),

{ivorship)

every

yajnasya-yajnain

cveru

joint

Agni again and again

annam-annam
h.

{AN.) food in perpeiiiitg.

Adjectives: panyam-panyam
.

again and again

to

each eastern direction

be praised
;

somam Soma

who

is

pracim-pracim pradisam
uttaram-uttaram samam (AV.) each
;

folio tcing gear.

c.

Pronouns tvam-tvam aharyathah thou

yad-yad yami whatever I asJc tat-tad

didst

rejoice;

ever

dadhe

/<e

always bestows that?

d. Numerals
panca-pafica five each time
(tredha three times) seven in each case {= 21).''
:

e. Adverbs:^
yatha-yatha as in each
svah-svah on each to-day, on each to-morrow.

f.

Prepositions

lipa. para, pra,

sapta-sapta

case;

adyadya

the four which are found used thus are

tam

e.

pra-pra

g.

sasyate

it

is

ever

proclaimed.
g.

The only example

iterative is
1

verb

'

loc.
^

is

piba-piba

of a verbal

drinli, drink.^

treated independently

e. g.

form occurring as an
Otherwise a repeated

stuhi stuhi praise, praise.

ahar-divi day

after day, is a kind of mixed iterative.

For divi'-divi and visf-visi, owing to tho influence of the frequent
in 6 from a stems.
In the SB. such words are repeated witli va yavad va yavad va
:

and yatame va yatanie

*

va.

Sucli iteratives led to the formation of regular

compounds

in B.

eka-ekah (AV.) ekaikah (^SB.) dva-dva .RV.): dvan-dvdm (MS.)

in twos, dvan-dv^ patV
(B.).
^
In a few instances repeated adverbs are not treated as compounds,
both words being accented nil nu now, noiv ih^hd.
(AV.) here, here,
but always iheha in RV.
:

'

In the SB. also occurs yajasva-yajasva.

CHAPTER

VII

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX
190. Having in the preceding parts
grammar dealt with single words in their

of

the

present
phonetic, their

derivative, and their inflexional aspects, we now turn to

their treatment in syntax, which regards their arrangement
and mutual meaning when they are combined to form a

sentence, which is the expression of a connected and definite

The parts of which the sentence may
unit of thought.

the noun (substantive

words
and the verb, the participle which shares the
or uninflected words
nature of both, and the pronoun
A comparison of
prepositions, adverbs, and conjunctions.
the syntax of the RV. with that of classical Sanskrit shows
(1) that the use of the middle voice, the tenses, the moods,
the inflected participles, the infinitives, and the genuine
prepositions is much fuller and more living in the former,
while (2) that of the passive voice and of indeclinable participles is much less developed, that of absolute cases and of

consist are either inflected

and

adjective)

adverbial prepositions with case-endings is only incipient,

and that of periphrastic vei'bal forms is non-existent. The
later

by

Samhitas and the Brahmanas exhibit a gradual transition

group and by growth in

restriction or loss in the former

the latter to the condition of things prevailing in classical

Sanskrit.

The Order

of Words.

191. Since metrical considerations largely interfere with

the ordinary position of words in the Samhitas, the normal
order

is

best represented

by the prose of the Brahmanas,

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

284

and as

it

there appears

is,

[191

moreover, doubtless the original

one.

The general

rule is that the subject begins the sentence

and the verb ends

it,

the

members coming

remaining

between.
e. g. visah ksatriyaa. The subject begins the sentence
ya balim haranti the peasants pay tribute to the prince (SB.).
;

may, however, be preceded by a particle like uta or

by any other member of the sentence intended
to be strongly emphasized
e. g. pray aj air vai devah
svargam lokam ayan htj means of the Fratjdjas the gods went
It

occasionally

to the

heavenly ivorld (SB.).

The verb occasionally moves to the beginning of the

sentence when it is strongly emj^hasized e. g. yanti va apa,
h.

6ty aditya, 6ti candrama, ydnti naksatrani the ivaters

move, the sun moves, the moon moves, the stars move (SB.).
A predicative noun with the copula (which may be omitted)
equivalent to a verb, naturally occupies the same
position e. g. sarve ha vai deva agre sadrsa asuh all the

"being

mitro vai sivo

gods in the heginning were similar (SB.)
devanam Mitra, indeed, is the Jcindly one among the gods (TS.).
Nevertheless the predicative noun, being emphatic, is as a
;

word

rule the first

deva asuh
yajnah

the

in the sentence

e. g.

martya ha va agre

gods ivere originally mortals (SB.)

the sacrifiee (is)

man

piiruso vai

(SB.).

As

regards the cases, the ace. is x>laced immediately

before the verb e.g. chandamsi yuktani devebhyo yajnam
c.

when they are yoJced, take the sacrifice to

Adverbs and indeclinable participles occupy
a similar position.
Occasionally such words move to the

vahanti

tlie

metres,

the gods (SB.).

e. g. divi vai soma asid, atha^iha

beginning
heaven was Soma, hut here the gods (SB.).
;

devah

in

d. The apposition, including patronymics and participles,

e. g. some
follows the word which it explains or defines
;

raja Soma, the King.

participle,

in its proper sense, if

ORDEK OF WORDS

101]

285

emiihatic may be placed at the beginning e. g. svapantam

vai diksitam raksamsi jigharasanti H is when lie sleeps that
;

the llalcmses seek to slay the initiated

its

(TS.).

Sb'^)

(i.

man

The

attribute, whether adjective or genitive, precedes

substantive e. g. hiranyayena rathena nuth golden car

e.

devanam hota

the priest

of

the gods.

Only when

adjectives are used in apposition, especially as epithets of

the gods, do they follow ; e. g. mitraya satyaya to Mitra,
the true

(TS.)-

Also adjectives designating the colours of

certain animals, especially horses and cows, are found after

The subst. belonging to a gen. is placed before
the subst.
the latter only when it is emphatic.
,/;

The preposition belonging

to a verb precedes

it,

always

in B., generally in V.. where, however, it also sometimes

follows ; e. g. jayema sam yudhi sprdhah ive would conquer

our foes in

battle

The

8-^).

(i.

diately precedes the verb, but

by one or more words

the

One
hate

Bounteous

e.

g.

preposition as a rule immeoften also separated from it

is

sayakam maghava^adatta
32 )
apa tamah
(i.

seised his missile

she drives aivay darkness and sin

papmanam
When a compound verb is emphatic, the preposition

(TS.).

alone

moves to the front occupying the position that the

simple verb would occupy e. g. pra prajaya jayeya I tvould
as a rule

increase with progeny (TS.).

When used with substantives the genuine prepositions as

a rule follow their case, while the prepositional adverbs
The reason of this doubtless is that the former
precede it.
supplement the sense of the
the sense

much more

case,

while the latter modify

emphatically.

e. g.
g. Multiplicative adverbs precede their genitive
trih samvatsarasya three times a year.
h. Enclitics cannot, of course, begin a sentence.
If they
to
a
follow
word
it
otherwise
belong
particular
they
they
;

tend to occupy the second position in the sentence. The

enclitic particles that follow the word with which they are

286

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

[191

kam

most

is
closely connected are ca, va, iva, cid ;
restricted to following nu, su, hi in V., and sma to followThe other unaccented particles, u, gha,
ing ha in B.
ha, svid, which refer to the statement of the whole

occupy the

sentence,

second

(or

third)

position

the

in

sentence.

Even accented particles

They either

most part cannot

follow the word they emphasize in any position in the sentence a, eva, kam or
they occupy the second position in the sentence, as emphai.

for the

begin a sentence.

sizing the whole statement

nii, vai, hi.

The only

anga, aha, id, kila, khalu, tu,

particles that can begin the sentence are atha,

na if it negatives the whole sentence, but if

the
verb only, it follows that.
negatives
Forms
of
the
j.
pronoun ta tend in B. to occupy the first

dpi, uta
it

also

position, especially sa when it anticipates a proper name in

dialogues, or tad as an ace. when famous authorities are
e. g. sa hovaca gargyah (SB.) Garg/ja spoJce (as
follows) ; tad u hovaca^asurih with regard to this Asuri
said (SB.). The order is similar when atha or api are used

quoted

api hovaca yajnavalkyah (SB.).

In relative and interrogative sentences there
Jc.

is

nothing

peculiar except that, as these two classes of words tend to

begin the sentence, cases of them come to occupy the first

which in ordinary sentences do not occupy it ; e. g.

hi sa tair grhaih knryat what indeed should he do with

position

kim
this
a.

house

The

(SB.).

the sentence is exceptionally occupied in the

very often by final datives as a supplement to
g. tt pasiin eva^_^asmai pdri dadati guptyai thus
over to him for protection f^SB.)
2. by the subject either

last position in

following ways
the sentence e.
:

he hands the cattle

1.

name

of an authority quoted or when it is ecxuivalent

to a relative clause; e. g. sd ha^uvaea gargyah so said Gurgya ; aindrdm
carum nir vapet pasvikamah oe (who is^ desirous of cattle should assign

when

it is

the

a pap for Indra (TS.).

ORDER OF WORDS

192-193]

192. There

^287

neither an iiulelinite nor a definite article

is

moaning is inherent in the

pronouns are in forms of
Whether the one or the other is meant

Their
in the Vedic language.
substantive much as personal
the definite verb.

made sufficiently clear by

purohitam I praise Agni the

is

the context

domestic priest

e. g.
(i.

agnim ile
1^); agnim

manye pitaram Agni I

deem a father (x. 7''). In B. the

sometimes very nearly equivalent to

anaphoric use of ta is
the definite article (cp. 195

B 3^

p. 294).

Number.
193. 1. Singular words with a plural or a collective sense
are always treated strictly as singulars, being never construed with a plural form of the verb (cp. 194).

The dual number

is in regular use and, generally

But in certain parts of the
in
strict
application.
speaking,
RV. the plural is often used instead of the dual of natural
2.

pairs

sometimes also otlierwise

devah., sam apo hrdayani

unite the hearts of us two (x.

nau

e. g.

sam anjantu

visve

the gods, let the waters

let all

SS"*').

sometimes used to express a male and

e. g. pitara = father and mother
class
female of the same
=
This type of the dual has its
and
mother
matara
father.
a.

m. or

f.

du. is

widest application in naming pairs of deities by means of

one of them and is equivalent to dual compounds containing
e.g. dyava heaven and earth (= dyava-prthivi)
usasa Datvn and Night {= usasa-nakta) mitra 3Iitra and
Varuna {= mitra- varuna). Sometimes the other member
e. g. mitra tana na
of the pair is added in the N. sing.
rathya varuno yds ea sukratuli Mitra [and Varuna) and

both names

the very wise

Varuna,

like

two constant charioteers

(viii. 25^).

The

plural is sometimes used (analogously to the

dual) so as to include the other two of a group of three
e. g. dyavah the (three) heavens
heaven, air, and earth
3. a.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

288
prthivih

fJie

other

eart]i.<^

(three)

inclusive plural

is

members

earth,

air,

also found with the

and

{m-m
This

licavcn.'^

names

of the

of the group added in the N. sing,

two
thus

abhi samrajo varuno

grnanty, abhi mitraso aryama

Varnna, to it the Mifras
{= Mitra, Varuna, Arytiman), and Aryaman, accordant, sinq

sajdsah

to

it

the universal sovereigns

(vii. 38^).

The

sometimes loosely used instead of

in his dialogue with YamI says
na yat pura cakrma kad dha nunam rta vadanto anrtam
rapema how ]}ray can we, tvhat we have never done lefore,
1).

1.

pers. pi.

the sing, or du.

thus

is

Yama

spealdng of righteous things now talh of ichat is unrighteous 1

The plur. of personal pronouns is also occasionally
(x. 10^).

used in a similar

way

YamT

thus in the dialogue of Yama and

with the correct nau sa no

(x. 10*) nas alternates

nabhih, paramam jami tan
that our highest kinship.
This
due to the situation for the

nau

our bond of union,

occasional looseness is probably

we

the use of the

tu-o
pi.

personal pronoun

expressed and

is

uvaea
ire

is

and

is

moment

generally so as to include others

those present,

that

u^e

others in

for the sing,

being regaided more

would then mean I and
circumstances.

In B.

of the first pers.

of the

liJce

not infrequent both when the pronoun

it is latent in the verb
e. g. sa
ha^

when

namo vayam brahmisthaya kurmah

he replied

1) shoiv reverence to the most learned wfawfSB.)

bhavate gautamaya dadmah we (=

Honour Gautama (SB.).

varam

I, Jaivali) offer a hoon

to his

Concord.

194. The
number are

rules of concord in case, person, gender, and

in general the same as in other inflexional

languages.
To this iitse is probaljly due the conception
and three earths in Vedic cosmology.
^

of tlie three heavens

COXCOED

194]

A.

To the

1.

verb agrees with

that the

rule

289
sub-

its

number the exceptions are very rare.

word tva many, having a pi. sense,
jay an u tvo juhvati many a
pi. verb

stantive in person and

Thus the sing, of the

appears once with a

On the other hand, there

one sacrifices for victories (MS.).
are a few examples in the RV. of a neut. pi. taking a verb
in the sing.
booty accrues
2. a.

e. g.

man

to the hold

8P).

(i.

When

dhrsnave dhiyate dhana

two

have one verb, the latter in

indras ca yad yuyudhate

sing, subjects

most cases is in the dual

ahis ca when Indra and

e. g.

the

dragon fought

no dyaus ca prthivi ca pinvatam may

(i.

32^''^)

urjam

heaven and

earths

indras ca somam pibatam

our strength (vi. 70'')
brhaspate do ye tiro, Indra and {thou), Brhaspati, drink Soma
increase

(iv. 50^'^).

When

one only of two subjects

liaving to be supplied, the verb

a yad indras ca dadvahe

(viii. 34^'^)

isathe
heavenly

brhaspate

Brhaspaii,
wealth

found only

(vii.

when

two,

is

expressed, the other

also in the dual

e. g.

and Indra receive

(I)
indras ca vasvo divyasya^
ivhcn

yuvam

ye

is

(thou) and Indra, dispose of

this usage seems to be

In B.

97^).

the verb

is

in the third person;

e.g.

ta brhaspatis ca^anvavaitani
B rhaspati followed them (TS.).
and
created
beings: (he)
Prajapati

prajapatih praja asrjata

a. In a minority of cases two sing, subjects take a sing, verb when

ca tdsya
they are equivalent in sense to a dn. compound e.g. tokdm
tdimysm ca vardhate his offspring and famihj prosper (ii. 25').
is
P. In B. when two sing, subjects are connected by ca the verb
in the du.
but if a contrast is intended, in the sing.
e.g. tdsya
dhata ca^aryama ca^ajayetam from her Bhalr and Anjaman were hmn
ca vyud akramat
(MS.) but prthivya vdi m^dhyam cav^amedhyd.m
the
from the earth there issued on the one hand the pure and on the other
;

impure (MS.).
b.

When

there are

more than two subjects the verb

is

not

one of them.
necessarily in the pi., but may agree with only
e. g.
is
the
verb
is
1. If each of the subjects
sing.
sing,
;

1819

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

290

[194

mitras tan no varuno rodasi ca dyubhaktam indro

aryama dadatu let Mifra, Varum, Eodasl, Indra and
Aryamayi

give us this divine wealth (vii. 40^).

numbers the verb maye. g.

avad indram
agree with either one or the other
yamuna trtsavas ca Yamuna and the Trtsus helped Indra
If the subjects are of different

2.

(vii.

18^^)

Mow

it (x.

indro vidur angirasas ca Indra and

the

Angirases

108^0).

e. g. girayas ca
Tlie du. and pi. take the du. or the pi.
drlha dyava ca bhuma tujete the firm mountains and heaven
and earth trembled (i. 61^^) dyava ca yatra pipayann aha
ca where heaven and earth and the daijs have given almndance
;

(vii. 652).
a.
0. g.

In B. a

sing,

and a du. subject take a verb in the

ca pticham ca bhavati hoik

vyamamatr^u paksau

sing, or
the

jil.

wings and

tav asvinau ca sfirasvati ea^apam

and Sa7-asvat't moulded the foam of the
a sing, and a pi. take the verb in the pi. e. g.
'Waters into a holt (SFj.)
devas ca vdi yamds ca^_^asmin loke 'spardhanta the gods and Yama
the tail are

a fathom in length (TS.)

phendin vdjram asincan

the

As'vins

fought for (the possession of) this world (TS.).

jS. In B. anyo 'nyd one another takes the verb in the sing., du., or
according as one. two, or several agents are intended ; e. g.
l^l.

tabhyah s& nfr rchad yo nah prathamo 'nyo 'nyasmai druhyat of these
mag cheat another vTS.) ned anyo 'nySm
hin^satah lest they injure each other (SB.) tani srstany anyo 'nyena^
aspardhanta being created they fought with one another (SB.).

he shall he deprived who first of us

3.

When

two or more subjects

verb in the du. or

the

of different persons take a

person is preferred to the

second or third, the second to the third ; e. g. aham ca
tvam ca sam yujyava land thou will unite together (viii. 62^^) ;
tarn

pi.

first

yuyam vayam ca^asyama may

you and we obtain him

(ix, 98^'^).
Occasionally, however, the third person is preferred to the first e. g. ami ca y6 maghavano vayam ca
;

miham na

suro ati nis tatanyuh m,ay these patrons and we

pierce, through as the sun the mist (i. 141^^).
E. 1. An attributive adjective agrees with its substantive
The exceptions are few
in gender, number, and case.

CONCORD

194]

and unimportant, being

chiefly

291

due to the exigencies of

metre.
a. The cardinals from five to nineteen, being adjectives, show some
peculiarities of concord : in the oblique cases they appear in V. not
only in their inflected form, but often also the uninflected form of
the noni. and ace.
e. g. saptabhih putrdih and saptd hotrbhih,
;

pancd.su jd,nesu and pdnca krstisu. In B. only the inflected forms

are used.
h. The cardinals from 20 upwards being substantives in form may
govern a G. e.g. sastim dsvanam sixty horses, satd.m gonam a hundred
;

sahdsrani gdvani thousands of kine. They are, however, generally

but being collectives they take sing, endings
ti'eated like adjectives
e. g. trinisd,d devah. thirty gods, trimsdtam
in concord with pi. cases
yojanani thirty yojanas (ace), trirasata h^ribhih ivith thirty bays, trayastrimsato devBuara of thirty gods (AB.). satdm hundred and sah^sram
thousand are used as the nom. ace. form in agreement with plurals
e. g. satdm piirah a hundred forts, sah^sram hdrayah a thousand bays,
kine,

sahasram pasian a thousand

beasts (TS.) ; they also appear in the same

plural
e.g. sata piirah a hundred forts, sahd,srany ddhirathani a thousand ivagon loads (x. 98^). sat^m and sahdsram are also

sense in

tlie

found (but not in B.) with an inst. pi., as satam purbhih with a
hundred forts beside satena h^ribhih ii7/ a hundred bays, sahasram rsibhih

The noun accompanying sahisra occasionally

iviih a thousand seers.
appears by a kind of attraction in the sing. : sunas cic eh^pam
nlditam sahdsrad yupad amuncah thou didst deliver BunaMepa, xclio teas
bound, from a thousand posts (v. 2'^),: this use does not seem to occur
in B.
2. A predicative adjective used with as or bhu (often to
be supplied) agrees in gender and number with its subject.

The nom.
= be able.

of isvara capable vised thus in B.

is equivalent to
in the majority of cases normal
e. g. isvaro va dsvo 'yato 'pratisthitah pdram paravdtam gdntoh
a horse if unbridled and unobstructed can go to an extreme distance (TS.)

a.

a verb

The concord here

is

isvara praddhah she can burn him (TS.); isvarfiu va et^u

nirddhah both of them can burn (SB. ) tany enara isvarani pratinudah

sa^enam

can drive him away (MS.). Sometimes, however, the concox'd of

either number or gender, or of both, is neglected ; e. g. tarn isvarfim
r^ksamsi hdntoh the demons can kill him (TS.) t^sya^isvardh praja
tliey

papiyasi bh^vitoh

can degenerate (SB.) ; isvaro ha^eta

(f. pi.) are liable to weigh heavily upon one

his offspring

^nagnicitam samtaptoh these

who has not built a fire altar (SB.).

In the

u2

last

two examples quoted

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

292

[194-195

and in otliers the masc. sing, has become stereotyped as

genders and numbers.

nom.

of all

use of a predicative adjective referring to two or more

b. The
substantives differing in gender is very rare it then seems to agree
in gender with the subst. nearest it, or the niasc. seems to have been
;

e. g. traya vdi ndirrta aksah striyah sv^pnab

preferred to the neut.
eva hy
(^MS.) (Jice, women, and deep (are) the treble pernicious (things)
asya kamya stoma ukth&m ca sarnsya thus indeed his two favourites,
A predicative adj. dependent
stoma and vktha, are to be recited (i. 8'";.
on kr agrees with its subst. if there are two, the du. is used e.g.
;

ddivlm ca vavd^asma
makes

so he

3.

As

the divine

in

etd.d

and

the

visam manusim ca^fi,nuvartmanau karoti

Mimanfolk obedient to him (MS.\

Greek and Latin, a demonstrative pronoun

agrees with a predicative noun in gender and number

ye tnsah sa tvak

tvJiat (are)

the husJcs {that

=)

e. g.

those (are) the

(AB.); yad asm samksaritam asit tani vayamsi^

abhavan what teas the concentrated tear {those =) that became
ski)}

the birds (SB.).

Pronouns.
195. A. Personal, a. Owing to its highly inflexional
character the Vedic language, like Latin and Greek, uses
the nominatives of personal pronouns far less frequently
than modern European languages do. Being already inherent
in the first

and second persons of the

pronouns are expressed separately only

finite

verb such

when they

require

emphasizing.
b. The unaccented forms of

aham and tvam (109 a) being

can be used neither at the beginning of a sentence
or metrical line (Pada), nor after vocatives, nor before em-

enclitic,

phasizing, conjunctive or disjunctive pai"ticles.

e. Bhavan Your Honour, the polite form of tvam, which
first comes into use in B., properly takes a verb in the
3.

sing.

pronoun
in

that

But being
person

equivalent to a personal
occasionally appears with a verb
iti vava kila no bhavan pura^

practically

of the 2. pers.,
e. g.

it

PRONOUNS

195]

anusistan avocah (SB.) in

spoken of {us

=) me

293

this sense then

as instructed (cp. 194,

1.
B. Demonstrative.
ayam
pronoun used adjectivally of what

tliis

you Jmve formerly

1).

{here)

is

deictic

the neighbourhood,
and may often be
presence, or possession of the speaker,
translated

I come

mama

here

by

e. g.

emi tanva purastat here

iyam matir
(viii. 100^)

my body
my hymn ayam vatah
before thee

tvith

this

ta

ayam

is in

the loind here (on earth)

ayam janah
ivorld
ayam agnih Agni here (present).
the peo])le here (vii. 55^)

idam bhuvanam
In the RV.

this

ayam

is

sometimes used even with dlv heaven and aditya sun as if

they were included in the environment of the speaker.
2. Opposed to ayam is asau that {there), applied to objects
remote from the speaker, as heaven and its phenomena,
immortals, persons

who

are not present or are at a distance

ami ye deva sthana trisu^a rocan6 divah

e. g.

who are

realms of heaven

in the three bright

there,

ye,
(i.

gods,
105-^)

ami ca ye maghavano vayara ca tltose (absent) patrons andasau yd 6si virakah you tvho go there, a
we (i. 141^^)
;

mannikin

(viii. 91'^).

is similar, only the contrast is more definite

world
in
referring to the earth (ijram) and tlie heavenly
typical
(asdu% and in the phrases yo 'yam pavate he tvho blows here ( =Wind),
rt.

In B. the usage

it is

and yo 's^u tapati

In B. asdu

thire.

he ivho burns there

is

=Sun), and asav adityah.

besides used in a formulaic

name

way {=

so

sun

the

and

so)

e. g. asau naina^_^aydm
be substituted
In
idd.niriipah he here, having this form, is so and so by name (SB.).
va
thus
is
used
also
form
sau
a
the
yatha
voc.
person
addressing
iddm namagraham ^sa asa iti hvdyati as one here (= in ordinary life)

when

the actual

is to

by waij of mention imj the name

3.

ta, like

calls

'

yon

there,

you

asau, can be translated by

asau

there

that,

'

(MS.).

but in a different

and

sense.

It is not like

does

imply a contrast {that there as opposed to

but

it
it

refers to

local,

nor

this here)

something already known either as just

mentioned or as generally
rt.

essentially deictic

familiar.

very frequent application of this meaning

is

its

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

294

reference as a correlative to

antecedent relative clause

sa id dev6su gaehati
is

as

tlic

made known by an

is

yam

(i.

yajnarn paribhur

asi,

Often, however, an antein

1^).

must be mentally supplied

whom we have in mind. Then ta

lacking and

some such form

equivalent to
clearly in the

what

e.g.

the sacrifice that thou encomjpassest, that

certainly goes to the gods

cedent clause

[195

well Jcnotvn.

is

This use comes out most

first verse of a hymn

e. g. sa pratnatha
sahasa jayamanah, sadyah kavyani bal adhatta visva
(i. 96^) he (who is in our thoughts, the famous Agni) being
;

engendered in the ancient way ivith strength, lo ! has straighttvay

assumed all tvisdom ta vam visvasya gopa yajase (viii. 25')
you two famous guardians of the universe I worship).
;

h.

to a

ta has a very frequent anaphoric use, referring back

a pronoun of the third or second person (in B.

noun or

also of the
e. g.

first),

and may then be translated by as

tvam vajasya

sriityasya rajasi

ntlest over glorious sjjoil

sa

as such be gracious

such, so

no mrla
to

us

(i.

thou
36'")

sa tatha^ity abravit sa vai vo varam vrna iti she said,

yes : I as such {= in the proposed circumstances) tvill choose
a boon of you (AB.).
This usage is a prominent and some:

what monotonous

feature of the narrative style in B.

e. g.

prajapates trayastrmsad duhitara asan, tah somaya

rajne 'dadat, tasam rohinim upait, ta irsyantih piinar
agachan Prajapati had thirty daughters ; lie gave them to King

Soma

of them he visited Bohim (only)

they (the others),
When this ta is widely
being jealous, went bach (TS.).
separated from the antecedent noun to which it refers
;

(sometimes only indirectly) it may be translated by the

definite article
thus the opening of the story of Urvasi
urvasi ha^apsarah pururavasam aidarn cakame an
:

Apsaras Urval loved Pwruravas,

sentences later referred to with

atayo bhutva pari pupluvire then

in the form of water birds (SB,).
r

son of Ida is some

tad dha ta apsarasa

the
:

the

Apsarases

swam

about

PRONOUNS

105]

In

a.

its

anaphoric use ta

is

295

frequently followed by personal pronouns

of all persons (regularly in their enclitic form when they have one) ;
o. g. td.m ma sdm srja varcasa unUe me as such with glory (i. 23-^^,
yajnad antdr agata sa vo 'h^m evd yajiifim amiimuham ye have excluded

mam

mo fnull the sacrijice ; so I have thrown your sucrifce inio confusion (SB.)
havismanto vidhema te && tv^rn no ady4 sumdna ih^^avita bhdva

brintjing oblations lue looidd serve thee

so

do thou be for

to-day a benevolent

tis

tva^etdt punar brdvatah, sa tvdm brutat (6b.)

(i. 36=)
do you say (to them)
asya
'/ they {two) shall say this to you again, then
tdm tva vajayamah hewing drunk
pitva ghano vrtranam abhavas

hJper

yd,di

of this thou becamest a slayer of Vrtras

ubcd are
D. tasmai

so ice strengthen thee

i.

4"),

Similarly

(here exceptionally not enclitic),

du. ta vam pi. A. tan vas,
te, G. tdsya te, tdsyas te
sing.

A. tarn tvam

G. t6sam vas.

Four demonstrative pronouns are found following ta in

p.

this

way idam, adds, td itself, and oftenest of all etad e. g. sa^iydm

asme sanaja pitrya dhih this here is among us an ancient hymn of our
tm amum vato dhunoti
tfisya valo uy asanji
forefathers (iii. 39=)
tam ha^eva
that the wind tosses to and fro (SB.)
its tail hangs doion
nd
taranti that
brahmana
tam
sma
ha
tam
dadaha
pura
n&^diti
;

burn across : that same one the Bruhmans used not

(river) he (Agni) did not
veda sa va
formerly to cross (SB.), bhavaty asya^anucaro ya evam
esa ekatithih, sa esa juhvatsu vasati he icho knows this has a follower ;
that (follower) is this one guest ; this same (followei-, the Sun) abides
among the sacrificers (AB.).
The N. sing. s& is sometimes used adverbially in B. (see 180,
:

7.

p. 249).

4.

to

eta

this is

used like ta but

something known

is

more emphatic.

It refers

to the listener as present either to his

senses or his thoughts.

a. The correlative use of eta seems to be limited to B.,
the relative clause here usually following

esa praiti, yo yajne

muhyati

lie

e. g.

patho va

diverges from the f)ath

It
goes wrong in the sacrifice (AB.).
when the relative in the neuter sing,

who

somewhat peculiar
and without a verb is
is

added solely for the purpose of emphasizing a particular

word e. g. svargam va etena lokam upapra yanti yat
;

heavenJg world with that which (is)

In these circumstances eta
the lireliminary sacrifice (AB.).
in
when alone always agrees
gender with the noun in the

prayaniy ah 2)eqp?e go

to tJie

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

29G
relative clause

with the

but

latter

when

e. g.

it is

[i95

accompanied by a substantive,

pasavo va ete yad apah water

is

In this usage yad often loses its

equivalent
(AB.).
inflexional character to such an extent that it becomes like
to cattle

an explanatory
that follows
e.

etair

g.

(=

particle

that

to say),

is

agreeing in case \vith that

it

the substantive

which precedes

atra^ubhayair artho bhavati yad devais ca

brahmanais ca there is need here of both, that is, of the gods

the Brahman s (SB.).
The use of eta without an antecedent, parallel to that of

and

common both in V. and B. o. g. eso usa vy iichati

Dawn (whom Ave see before us) has shone forth (i. 46')

ta, is
this

ha^asura asuyanta iva^^ueur yavad evaisa visnur

abhis6te tavad vo dadma iti the Asuras said someivhat
as much as this Vismi (here present) covers lying
displeased
so
much
we give you (SB,)
doivn,
yuvam etarn cakrathuh.
sindhusu plavam ye two have made that l)oat (present to our
thought) in the ocean (i. 182^) t^na^etam uttaram girim
ati dudrava therewith he passed over that (well known)
te

northern mountain (SB.)

ca

ta ete

kadrum

heings,

ca they created
Siiparn'i and Kadrfi

requires the addition of the

ment

maye

asrjanta suparnim
(well-known) miracidous
In the last example ete

these two

(SB.).

two following names

to supj^le-

its sense.

a. Somewhat bimilarly this pronoun is sometimes followed in B.

by v/oi-ds or a sentence explaining it
e.g. sa etabhir dev^tabhih
sayug bhutva marudbhir visa^agnina^d,nikena,_^upaplayata he, lutUed
with these deities, ihe Martiis us the flghling folk and Agni us the heud,
sd ha,^etd,d eva dadarsa :^^anasanataya vdi ni3
approached (MS.)
prajah p^ra bhavanti^iti he saw tliis : in consequence of hunger vnj
;

creatures ure perishing (SB.).

In its anaphoric use eta expresses identity with that

which it refers back, more emphatically than ta does

h.

to

e. g.

apeta vita vi ca sarpata^ato

lokam akran

asma etam pitaro

go away, disperse, depart from hence

this pilacc

PKONOUNS

195]

207

(oh which you have been standing) the fathers have prepared for him (x. 14") in the final verse the expression esa
stoma indra tubhyam (i. 173') tills praise is for thee, Tiiclra,
tad ubhayam samrefers to the whole i^receding hymn
;

ca^apas ca^istakam akurvams tasmad

etad ubhayam istaka bhavati mrc ca^apas ea having
hrought both those together, clay and water, they made the hricJc
therefore a hrieJc consists of both these, clay and water (SB. ).

bhrtya

mrdam

tya occurs only in the sense of

5.

that {well

hnown)

e. g.

kva tyani nau sakhya babhuvuh what

friendships of us two ?

(vii.

88^).

has hecome of those

It often follows forms of

the demonstrative pronouns eta and

bhanava usasa aguh

have come

(vii.

manthanti
here

(vi.

sense

e. g.

randhayah

et6 ty6

e. g.

Daion

imam u tyam atharvavad agnim

they, like

Atharvan, rub forth that (famous) Agni

is sometimes used after the

The neuter tyad

15").

relative yd,

75^)

idam

here those (familiar) beams of

and often

after. the particle ha, in

an adverbial

yasya tyac chambaram m.ade divodasaya

in the exhilaration of which (Soma) thou didst

that tone subject

Sambara

to

Divoddsa

tit

(vi. 43').

The pronoun a tliat in its substantive sense (= he, she,

they), when it is unaccented, not infrequently appears as

6.
it,

an unemphatic correlative (while the accented form is a

e. g. yasya devair asado barhir agne,
deictic adjective)
ahani asmai sudina bhavanti on whose litter thou,
Agni,
hast sat down, fair days arise for him (vii, 11-); ya vam
satam niyutah saeante, abhir yatam arvak the hundred
;

teams that accompany you,

tvith

them do ye two come hither

nakir esam nindita martyesu, y6 asmakam

(vii, 91")
pitaro gosu yodhah. there is among mortals no reproacher of
;

them who,

(being) our fathers, were fighters for

cows

(iii.

89^).

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

298

THE

[196

CASES.

Nominative.

196. The nominative,

as in other languages, is

mainly

used as the subject of a sentence.

a.
second nominative is employed as a predicate
with certain verbs beside the subject, that is, with verbs

e. g.
become, seem or he accounted, tJiinlc oneself;
treasure
a
hcstower
hi ratnadha asi for thou art
of

meaning

tvam

^ivasah santo asiva abhuvan

153)

(i.

le,

heiur/ friendli/ they

have become unfriendhj (v. \2^ dkavimsatih sam padyante

me achadayan they
they become twenty-one (TS.);' gokama
ko vipra ohate
rsih
cons
seemed to me desirous of
(x. 108^")
;

icho counts as

seer,

as a singer?

(viii. 3^^j

thinking himself

apratir

manya-

somam manyate

manah.

irresistible (v. 323)

papivan he believes he has drunlc Soma (x. 85^) parabhavisyanto manamahe /ce think we are about to perish (TS.).
;

In B. the predicative nom. also appears with verbs meaning tu

indro brahmano
e. g.
vac, vad in the middle)
bruvandh Indra calling himself a Brahman (.TB.) hantavocathah thou
a.

call

oneself (hrii,

hast described thyself as a slayer (TS.).

/3.

With

verbs of

iu B. by the

naming the

nom. with

iti

predicative ace.

e. g.

rasabha

iti

may

also be expressed

hy etam fsayo 'vadan

for the seers called him ^ass' (TS.\

nom. takes the

passive verbs the predicative
e. g. tvam
verb
place of the ace. object of the active
a
ucyase pita thou art called father (i. 31'^).

With

b.

Instead of the predicative nom. the voc. is sometimes

liberal
used
e. g. yiiyam hi stha, sudanavah for ye are
c.

15'-)

(i.

abhur eko, rayipate rayinam

to assume a form, because it is equivaa predicative nom.

e.g. visnu rupam krtva

In B. the phrase rup^m kr

lent to

bhu

assumimj

the

become, takes

thou alone hast been

form of Visnu (TS.).

ACCUSATIVE CASE

196-197]

the lord

of riches

(vi.

thi/self Gautama

SV)

299

gautama bruvana

(Cp. 180 under na, 2

(SB.).

thou icho caltest

a.)

Since apparently two vocatives cannot be connected with ca, the

nora. often apjieai-s instead of the first or tlie second vocative e. g.
vayav indras ca cetathah
Vdyn and India, ye know (i. 2'') indras ca
o.

somam pibatam

brhaspate InUraand Brhaspati, drink

Cp. ISO under ca,

ike

Suma (iv.

50^''),

1 a, h.

Accusative.

197. A. This case is usually employed in connexion

with verbs in various ways.
Besides its ordinary use of
the
of
transitive
verbs, the ace. is employed
denoting
object
to express

the goal with verbs of motion, chiefly gam, also 1,

much less often ya, car, and sr and some others. The ace.
1.

be a person, a place, an activity or a condition e. g.

yajno gachati to Yania goes the sacrifice (x. 14^^)
devam id esi pathibhih sug6bhih to the gods thou goest l>y

may

yamam ha
paths easy

traverse

to

Indra fare

to

yosanam

t/te

(i.

162''^^)

indram stomas caranti

songs of praise

he sped like a lover

to

(x.

47');

a maiden

(ix.

saraj jaro
lOP'*)

ma

na

tvat

ksetrany aranani ganma may we not go from thee to strange

sabham eti kitavah tlic gambler goes to the

fields (vi. 61^^)

assembly

of

(x. 34'^)

jaritiir

the singer (viii. 35^

gachatho havam ye two go

thy mental 2)oicers they [went to

a.

Tlie usage in

13.

is

2.

{go to

=)

attained immortality

=)

similar;

varunam agachan Prajdpati

s^ nd divam apatat he did
may I

to the call

tava kratubhir amrtatvam ayan by

') ;

to

7^^).

prajapatih praja asrjata, ta

to Varuna (TS.)
; iliey icent

e.g.

cieated creatures

not fly

(vi.

heaven (SB.);

sriyam gacheyam

attain prosperity (SB.).

duration of time

(in origin

only a special form of the

satam jiva sarado vardhamanab live

cognate ace.)
so asvatth6 sama
hundred
autumns (x. 161^)
Xyrospering
vatsaram atisthat he remained in the Asvattha tree for a year
;

e. g.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

300
(TB.)

tasmat sarvan rtun varsati therefore it rains durimj

samvatsaratamim ratrim a gachatat

all the

[197

seasons (TS.)

(SB.)/o>- the night a year Jtence thou shalt come (to me).
3. extension of distance
(in origin only a special

of the cognate ace), a use rare in both V.

and B.

form

e. g.

yad

asiibhih patasi yojana puru when with the swift ones thou
sa bhumim visvato vrtva^aty
fliest mamj leagues (ii. 16 ')
;

atisthad dasangulam lie covering the earth on all sides

extended heyond (it) a distance of ten fingers (x.
sapta90^)
dasa pravyadhan ajim dhavanti they run a race (a distance
;

of) seventeen arrow-fligltts (TB.).

4. the cognate object of intransitive
verbs, which may
be allied to the latter
or
etyniologically
only in sense e. g.
samanam anji^anjate they deck themselves with like adorn;

ment

(vii.

jayema
(x.

57^)

yad ague yasi dutyam when,

Agni, thou
(i.
12^)
tvaya^adhyaksena prtana

on a message

goest

128^)

with
;

tasmad

as

thee

raja

samgramam jitva^udajam

therefore a ling, having

(MS.)

tisro ratrir

we would compter

witness

won a

in

battles

aid ajate

battle, chooses Ijooty

vratam caret

he

silould

for himself
perform- a fast for

three nights (TS.).

a.

Verbs meaning

a concrete sense

to

e. g.

(Soma) streams mead

loaters

stream ghee

like the sun, he

5.

stream or

shine in

V. take a cognate ace. with

the tongue of the rite

tdsma apo ghrtd.m arsanti /or him the

vi yat suryo na rocate brhdd bhah ichen,

(ix. 75^),

1255),

(i.

to

rtasya jihva pavate md,dhu

beams forth

loftij

light (vii. 8*).

an adverbial sense. Adverbs of this form

all originated

in various uses of the ace.

dent character.
a.

which have acquired an indepenThey are formed from

substantives

e. g.

night like the ace. of time)

naktam
;

by night (not during the

kamam at icill (still rare in the

kamam

tad dhota samsed yad dhotrakah

pnrvedyuh samseyuh the Hotr may, as he likes, recite what
the assistants of the Hotr
may recite the day before (AB.)
EV.),

e.g.

nama

by name;

e.g.

mam

dhur indram nama devata

ACCUSATIVE

197]

me

(x. 49^^)

they 7iave placed as Indra

hi/

.301

name

(or verihf)

amovg

the pods.
1).

various kinds of adjectives.

They have an attributive
when they express the senses of qukldy or slowly

origin

(ksipram, ciram), onuch or

l)adl//,

e. g.

greatli/ (bahii,

balavat),

ivell

holdhj (dhrsnu), or direction (as

balavad vati

it

hloivs

hard

or

nyak doivnward, &c.)

bhadram jivantah
(SB.)

living happily (x. 37^).

adverbs from ordinals seem to have been appositional

tan va etan sampatan visvamitrah prathamam
apasyat (AB.) these same Sampfdahpniis Vrsvdmitra invented flrsf ( = asthe

The

a.

in

ace.

origin

lirst

p.

e. g.

thing).

Several ace. adverbs are from comparatives and superlatives in

tama formed from prepositions and adverbs e. g. draghiya

tara and

ayuh prataram dddhanah

ohtaining

longer

life

furthermore

53'^).

(i.

A good many

such have a fem. ace. form in later use, but there is only
one found in the RV. samtaram padukfiu hara i>^ your tioo little feet
:

closer together (viii. 33^^).

7.

formed by adverbs in vat expressing that an

by the noun preceding the

special class is

action takes place like that performed

suffix;

e.g.

messenger

ice

tvadutaso
umild speak

manuv^d vadema (ii. 10^) having thee as our

men ( = as men should speak properlj' some-

like

thing that belongs to men).

S. Another class of ace.

formed from various adjectival

formed with the privative particle
a, being of the nature of cognate accusatives
e.g. devas chdndobhir
imal lokan anapajayyftm abhy djayan the gods (unconquerably =)
compounds.

number

adverbs

is

of these'are

irrevocably conquered these worlds by

means

of the metres (TS.).

Another group comparatively rare in V., but very common in

B., are those formed from prepositionally governing adjectival compounds; e.g. anukamdm tarpayetham satisfy yourselves according to
desire (i. 17*), adhidevatdm with reference to the deity (SB.).
Probably
following the analogy of some of these were formed others in which
f.

the first member of the compound is not a preposition, but an adverb

derived from the relative ya e. g. yatha-kamdra ni padyate she turns
in according to her desire (x. 146^), yavaj-jivdm (as long s =)for life
(SB.).
Some other adverbial compounds are used like gerunds in am e.g.
stuka-s&rgam srsta bhavati it is plaited like a braid of hair (B.).
;

197. B. The

ace.

is

largely

Besides being governed by

used with verbal nouns.

all participles, active

and middle.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

302

[197

and by genuine infinitives, in V. it is used with agent

nouns formed from the root or other verbal stems by means
of about ten primary suffixes.
Such nouns are made from
the simple root (when compounded with a preposition), and
with the suffixes a (when the stem is compounded with a
preposition), ani (from the aor. or desid. stem),

(generally

from the reduplicated root), iyas and istha (comparatives

and superlatives), u (from desiderative stems), uka (very
rare in V.), tar (when the root is accented), van (when compounded), snu (from causative stems) and a few with the
secondary suffix in. Examples of the ace. with such agent
nouns are devams tvam paribhur asi thou encompassest
drlha eid arujah hreaJcing even trhat is
the gods (v. IS*"')
firm (iii. 45'-) tvam no visva abhimatih saksanih tlioit
overcomest all our adversaries (viii. 24^")
satam pdro ruruksanih read)) to destroy a hundred forts (ix. 48-)
indra ha
ratnam varuna dh^stha Indra and Varuna hcsfoiv treastirc
most abundantlij (iv. 41") vatsams ca ghatuko vrkah (AV.
xii, 4') and the nolf slays the calves
data radhamsi sum;

hhati giving riehes he shines

coming early

navah

kami

{i.

the sacrifice

to

prataryavano adhvaram
sthira cin namayis44^^)

22*^)
(i.

ye who desire to hend even what is rigid (viii. 20')

hi virah. sadam asya pitim fior the hero alivays desires
;

a draught of it

(ii.

14^).

a. Some adjectives formed with aiie from prepositions governing

the ace. are also used with that case. Such are pratyanc facing,
e. g. pratydnn usdsam urviya vi. bhati facing the
anv5.nc following
Dawn (the fire) shines forth far and wide (v. 28'), tasmad aniici patni
;

garhapatyam aste hence the wife sits behind the Gdrhapatya fire (AB.).
The ace. is found even with samyanc "united e, g. osadhir evd.^enam
;

samySucam dadhati
this adj. also
of s^m.

lie

puts

him

into contact nnth the i^lants

takes the inst., the natural ease with a

(MS.)

but

compound

In B. the only nouns taking the ace. seem to be the des. adjecin u and the ordinary adjectives in uka (which are very
common) and those in in e. g. papmanam apajighamsuh icishing
to drive away sin (AB.), sarpa enam ghatukah syuh the snakes might bite
^.

tives

ACCUSATIVE

197-198]

him (MS.) aprativady

contradict him (PB.).
;

The

c.

ace.

other case.

enam bhratrvyo

303

bhavati

his

enemy does not

governed by more prepositions than any

prepositions with which it is

is

The genuine

exclusively connected in both V. and B. are ati heyond, anu

abhi towards, prati against, tiras across and in V.

after,

only acha towards.

It is also

taken secondarily by others

which primarily govern other cases (cp. 176. 1. 2). The ace.
is further taken exclusively by the adnominal
prepositions
antara between, abhitas around, upari above, sanitur apart
from and secondarily by some others (cp. 177. 1-3).
;

a.

vma

The preposition

uithout, except,

wliich

first

occurs in B. (and

there has only been noted once), takes the ace; and rt6 without^
which in the EV. governs the abl. only, in B. begins to take the ace.
also (as it often does in jiost-Vedic Sanskrit).

In B. a number of adverbs (inst. of adjectives and substantives

formed with tas from pronouns expressive of some relation in
such are dgrena in front of, dntarena withist,
space) take the ace.
between, uttarena north of, ddksinena to the right or the sotith of, pdrena
p.

or

beyond

ubhayfi,-tas on both sides

of.

taken by two interjections. One of them, 6d

behold ! (cp. Lat. en), is always preceded by a verb of motion,
lo !
which, however, has sometimes to be supplied e. g. eyaya vayur
^d dhatd,m vrtram Vdiju came (to see) behold, Vrtra (was) dead (SB.)
y.

In B. the

aec. is

punar 6nia

iti

deva

6d agnim tirobhutam

loe

are coming back', said

came back, and) behold! Agni (had) disappeared! (^B.).

interjection dhiky?e.', used with the ace. of the person
e. g. dhik tva jalma^_^astu fie on tjou,
only, is still very rare in B.
the

gods; (they

The other

rogue! (KB.).

Double Accusative.
198.

verbs; e.g.
tlie

second ace. appears in apposition with various

purusam ha vai deva agre pasvim a lebhire

gods in the beginning sacrificed a

used

It is further
1.

man

as a victim (SB.).

predicatively with verbs of saying (brti, vac), thinking

(man), knowing (vid), hearing (sru), making

(vi-dha),

choosing

(vr),

(kr), ordaining
appointing (ni-dha) in both V.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

304

and B.

svanam basto bodhayitaram abravit

e. g.

he-goat said (that) the dog (was) the tval'ener

anyo 'nyam papam avadan

that the

(i.

161^^)

tlw

yad

one called the other

agnim manye pitai'am Agni I think a father

marisyantam c6d yajamanam manyeta ifJie thinls

tviched (SB.)
(x. 7^)

[198

the sacrificer

(is)

going

to die

(SB.)

ciram tan mene

he thought

vidma hi tva puiuvasum v;e knoiv thee

wealth (i. 8V] na vai hatam vrtram
much
(to be) possessed of
vidma na jivam we hnoiv not (whether) Vrtra (is) dead nor
(whether he is) alive (SB.) revantam hi tva srnomi I hear
that too long (SB.)

(about) thee (that thou art) rich

(viii.

2^^)

srnvanty enam.

agnim eikyanam (TS.) theg hear (about) him having piled the
asman su jigyiisah krdhi make us thoroughlg
fire (altar)
;

t^sam pusanam adhipam akarot he

tasma ahutir yajnam vy
(MS.)
adadhtih. they made (= ordained) the oblations (to be) the
agnim hotaram pra vrne I choose
sacrifice for him (MS.)
Agni priest (iii. 19^); ni tvam agne manur dadhe jyotir

victorious (viii. SO*^)

made Pusan

lord

their

janaya sasvate Mann has appointed

for ever11

man

(i.

Agni, as a

thee,

light

36^ '^).

2. to express the person as a direct object beside the

thing with verbs of addressing (vac), asking (prach), begging
(yac), approaching with prayer (i, ya), milking (duh), shaking

(dhu), sacrificing to (yaj), doing to (kr) e. g. agnim maham

avoeama suvrktim to Agni we have addressed a great hymn
;

prchami tva param antam prthivyah / ask thee

the earth (i. IM"^)
yajnavalkyam
dvau prasnau praksyami I iriil ask Yajiiavalkya iico questions
apo yacami bhesajam I beg healing from the waters
(SB.)
tad agnihotry agnim yacet that the Agnihotr shoidd
(x. 9"')
of
beg
Agni (MS.) vasuni dasmam imahe /re approach the
wondrous one for riches (i. 42^") tat tva yami I approach
thee for this (i. 24^^)
duhanty udhar divyani they milk
(x.

80')

ahout the farthest limit of

celestial

gifts

from

kaman duhe from

the

udder

(i.

her he {milks

64'')

=)

imam

eva sarvan

obtains all desires (SB.)

TWO ACCUSATIVES

198]

vrksam phalam dhuniihi

45*)

(iii.

lofty rite

down

shalce

?>05

to

me

? (v.

tree

the

gods tJie
s6nah. what

can his fechle hosts do

the

from

fruit

yaja devam rtam brhat sacrifice to

kim ma karann abala asya
(i. 75-^)
30'').

Of the above verbs vac, i and ya, dhu, yaj and kr do not seem
be found with two ace. in B. on the other hand a-gam approach,

a.

to

dha viilk, ji loin, jya sorest from are so used there e. g. agnir vai
varunam brahmacSryam a gachat Agni (approached = ) aaked Vaninafor
imal lokan adhayad yam-yam
ihe 2}osition of a religious student (MS.)
kamam akamayata /rom these worlds he extracted whatever he desired (AB.)
devan d.sura yajnam ajayan the Asnras won ihe sacrifice from the gods
(MS.) indro marutah sahasram ajinat Indra wrested a thousand from
;

the

Marnts (PB.>.

to express the agent' with causative verbs beside the

which would be taken by the simple verb also e. g.
nsan devam usatah payaya havih eager thyself cause the
3.

ace.

eager gods

to

the

drinlc

libation

(ii.

37^)

ta yajaraanam

vacayati he mal-es the sacrificer name them (TS.). Witli

verbs of motion the other ace. expresses the goal (which is,
however, never a person)
e.g. param eva paravatam
sapatnim gamayamasi to the extreme distance we cause the
;

rival wife to go (x.

gamayati

he

145*)

causes

the

yajamanam suvargam lokam

sacrificer

to

reach

the

celestial

tvorld (TS.).

In B. the agent

a.

is

frequently put in the inst. instead of the ace.

witla various causatives, especially that of grah seize

nena^agrahayat (MS.) he caused Varima to seise them ( =

e. g. ta varuhe caused them

to be seized

by Varuna).
In B. a second ace. expresses the goal (with ni lead) or duration
of time beside tlie ace. of the object
e.g. evdm eva^enam kxirm&h
suvargdrn lokam nayati thus the tortoise leads him to the celestial icorld
b.

(TS.), tisro ratrir vratdrn caret he should observe a fast for three nights

fTS\
Which would

e. g.
-

be expressed by the nom. with the simple verb

deva havih pibanti

When

adverb

the goal

is

tite

a person

it

is

agnav agnirn gamayet

devatrfi^evd, enad gamayati he sends
1819

gods drink the libation.

e. g.

expressed by the
he would send
it to

the gods

Agni

(SB.^.

loc.
to

or a

loc.

Agni (SB.)

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

306

[i99

Instrumental.

199. A. The fundamental sense of this case is concomitance, which may variously l)e rendered by with, 1)7/,
through, according as it expresses accompaniment, instrumentality or agency, causality, motion through space or
duration of time.
1.

In

sociative sense the instrumental expresses the

accompaniment of the svibjeet in any activity

its

companion or

dev6 dev^bhir a gamat may the god come with the gods
indrena yuja nir apam aubjo arnavam with Indra
l"*)

e. g.
(i.

as thy companion thou

dlrlsf release the

flood of waters

indro no radhasa^a gamat may Indra come

(iv. 55^%

to

(ii.

23^^^)

us with ivealth

Similnrly in B. agnir vasubhir ud akramat Indra departed with

Vasus (AB.) y6na mdntrena juhoti td,d y^juh the spell to the accompaniment of which he offers the oblation is the Yajus (SB.); t^d asya
a.

the

sfi,hasa^aditsanta they

tried to take it from

him hy force (TS.).

instrumental sense it exj)resses the means

by which an action is accomplished e. g.
indrena
sanuyama vajam toe woidd win booty through
vayam
ahan vrtram indro vajrena Indra smote
Indra (i. 101^^)
2.

In

its

(person or thing)

Vrtra with his holt

(i.

32-^).

Similarly in B. k^na virena by whom as champion (SB.); Iirsna

bijam haranti they carry corn {imfh =) on tlte head (SB.); tasmad
a.

diksinena h^stena^_^4nnam adyate

hand (MS.).
3.

In

its

causal sense

of an action
e. g.

the

hy reason

it
of,

therefore food is eaten 7cith the right

expresses the reason or motive

on account of, for the sahe of;

samasya pitya ... a gatam come hither for the sal-e of

Soma draught (i. 46^^) asatriir janusa sanad asi thou
;

art hy thy nature tvithout foes

from of old

(i.

102^^).

sa bhisa ni lilye he concecded himself through fear

(SB.).; so iiarana hy name.
.

4.

Similarly in B.

In

its

local sense of through or over

it is

used with

INSTRUMENTAL

199]

807

verbs of motion to express the space through or over which

an action extends e. g. diva yanti maruto bhumya^agnir
;

ayam

vato antariksena yati

over the earth, the

Agni

antarikse patlaibhih
air

Mariifs go along the

the

s7ci/,

Wind here goes tlirough the air (i. 161^*)

patantam flying along the paths in the

(x. 87^').

constantly used in the local sense with words

but rarely with others e. g. yd.tha^_^dksetrajuo
'ny^na patha nayet as if one who does not hnoio the district were to lead ly a
urong road {HB.) sdrasvatya yanti they go along the Stirasvatt (TS.).
a.

Ill

B. the inst.

meaning jndh or

is

door,

temporal sense the inst. expresses the time

an action extends e. g. purvibhir dadaswhich
throughout
ima saradbhih we have worshipped throughout many autumns
In

5.

its

Sometimes, however, the sense of duration is not

apparent, the inst. being then used like the loc. of time
(i. 86'').

thus rtuna and rtubhih meati in due season.

a.

In B. the temporal meaning

is

rare

sava isumatrSm evahna

e.g.

tirydiin avardhata he grew in the course of a day

ipidth

6.

qtiite

an arrow's

length in

(MS.).

Many

instrumentals (chiefly of the sociative and local

have come to be used in a purely adverbial sense.

Such are formed from either substantives or adjectives (of
which sometimes no other form occurs) e. g. anjasa straightclasses)

mahobhih

sahasa and sahobhis suddenly

antarena u-ifhin, uttarena to the north uccais above, nieais
below, paracais sideways, -prsLcais forwards, sanais and sanais,

way,

mightily,

sanakais

sloivly.

In a number of these instrnmentals the adverbial use is indicated,

not only by the sense, but by a shift of accent e. g. diva by day daksina to the right; madhya between; naktaya 6;/ night; svapnaya in a
dream; aksnaya aoos.s (B.) anomalously formed from ii stems asuya
a.

dhrsnuya ItoUUg, raghuya swiftly, sadhuya straightway, mithuya

(mithya SB.), anusthuya immediately (anusthya B.); and from a

quickly,

falsely

pronoun,

amuya

in that way.

199. B. Besides having the above general and independent uses the

inst. also appears,

x2

in special connexion with

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

308

words by which

different classes of

it

[199

be said to be

may

'

'

governed

1,

with verbs expressing

a.

association or contention with

RV.

in

yat marshal,

sac accompany, yudh fffhf,

yad combine, yuj
in B.
krid
has
yudh fjghf, vi-ji
p^ay
race,
strive,
sprdh
join (mid.),

contend victoriously

(tvith).

RV.

vi-yu
separation from (compounds with vi)
dissever from, vi-vrt turn away from, vy-a-vrt separate (intr.)
in B. vy-a-vrt id., vi-rdh be deprived of, vi-stha be
b.

in

from

removed from, visvann

go (may from

lose.

find pleasure in, mad be

enjoyment; in RV.
be
exhilarated with, uc
fond of, tus be satisfied with, mah
in B. trp be pleased
delight in, hrs rejoice in, bhuj enjoy
with, nand be glad of, bhuj enjoy.
c.

kan

d.

RV.

in
repletion
caus. of pr
:
;

in B.

pr

(ace.) with,^

purya

pi

with

Sircll

be filled with.

piiraya fill, pass,

vi-kri bargain away for
in V.

purchase for (a price)

nis-kri ransom for.
in B.
e.

fill

adoration or sacrifice (the victim or object offered). Witli

in both V. and B.
yaj sacrifice to the deity is in the ace,
in B. the sacrificial date also is put in the (cognate) ace.
e.
amavasyam yajate he celebrates the feast of new moon.
f.

g.

e. g.
both V. and B.
procedure : the verb car in
carati mayaya he acts with barren craft (x. 71'^)
upamsu vaca carati he proceeds in a low tone with his voice
;

g.

adhenva

(AB.).
h.

ability to

do

the verb kr in both V. and B.

e. g.

kim

rca karisyati what will he do with a hymn ? (i. IGi"'^) kim

sa tair grhaih kuryat irhat could he do with that house?
;

(SB.).

In B. the phrase artho bhavati

= there is need o/(Lat.

5

gen.

Sometimes

- fidl

of,

also

with

opus

tlie

hut with the

est

there is business with

aliqua re) is similarly used

gen.: tlie past part.

inst. filUd "'''>>

i)ass.

purnd, witli the

INSTKUMENTAL

199]

309

yarhi vava vo mayartho bhavita if yon (gen.) shall

have need of me (AB.).
/.
dominion: only (in V.) the verb patya be lord o/(lit.
indro visvair viryaih patyamanah
e. g.
means
h}i
of)

e. g.

India who

of all heroic powers (iii. o^^').

only (in B.) the verb jiv live on, subsist by
manusya jivanti (the cow) on which men subsist

is

lord

subsistence

j.

yaya

^- g-

(TS.).
inst.
passive forms of the verb (including participles) the
active verb) or the agent (the
the
with
means
the
either
(as
expresses
nom. of the active verb) ; e. g. ghrtena^agnih sam ajyate Agiii is
usa uchanti ribhyate vasisthaih Usas when
a)iointed with ghee (x. 118*)

With

a.

prajapapraised hy the Vasisthas (vii. 76''). Similarly in B.

tina srjyante they are created hy Prajapati (MS.) patrair annam adyate

she

dawns

is

is

food

eaten with the aid of dishes (MS.).

Nominal forms connected with the verb, when they have a passive
e. g.
sense, as gerundives and infinitives, take the same construction
nfbhir havyah. to be invoked by men (vii. 22'') ripuna na^avacdkse not to
(8.

be observed hy the

2.

enemy

with nouns

(iv. 58^)

adjectives (especially those compounded with sa-) expressive of association or equality e. g.

nasunvata sakhyam vasti surah the hero desires not frienda.

substantives

and

asi samo
him who does not press Soma (x. 42^)
devaih thou art equal to the gods (vi. 48^") indro vai sadrn
devatabhir asit Indra teas equal to the (other) deities (TS.)
ajyena misrah mixed with butter (SB.).
b. other adjectives, to express that by which the quality
Daivn
e. g. uso vajena vajini
in question is produced
ship with

rich in booty

(iii.

61^)

bahuh prajaya bhavisyasi

thou wilt

be rich in offspring (SB.).

c.

e. g.

numerals accompanied by na, to express deficiency

ekaya na vimsatih not twenty by (lack of) one =

nineteen.
o.

with prepositions

genuine prepositions are virtually

The only exceptions in

not used with the instrumental.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

310

EV.

the

are the

employment

of

[199-200

adhi with the

inst. of

snu

of lipa in three passages with dyubhis and dharmaheight

bhis and possibly of sam icith in a few passages with the
;

inst.

the

But prepositional adverbs are found thus used in

KV. only avas heloic and paras above and in both V.
;

and B. saha and sakam

with.

Cp. 177,

2.

Dative.
dative expresses the notion with which an
It is either connected with individual

200. The

action is concerned.

words or is used more generally as a complement

whole statement.
A. Dative in a special sense with

to the

1. verbs (mostly as affecting persons) having the sense of

in V. B. da give, yam extend, dha bestow, bhaj
a. give
e, g. dadhati ratuam vidhate he bestows treasure
aj}portion
;

on

the

ivorshipper (iv.

12^*)

in V. also

other verbs

many

expressing a modification of the sense of giving dis assign,

ava-duh tnilk down on, pr bestow fulljj, pre bestow abwndantlg,
:

mamh

ma measure out, ra procure [for], ni-yu

vid find {for), san obtain {for), su set in
shed {for), and others.

give liberally,

bestow permanently,

motion
b.

{for), srj

sacrifice

in V. a-yaj

ofi^er to

(while yaj takes the ace.)

and in V. B. kr when = make an ofi'ering to in B. a-labh

) offer e. g. agnibhyah pasian a labhate
{catch and tie up
he sacrifices the animals to the Agnis (TS.).
c. say = announce,
explain (but with ace. of person if =
;

in
in V. B. ah, bru, vac, vad (in B. also a-caks)
V. also arc and ga sing to, stu utter praise to, gir, rap,
In B. also ni-hnu apologise
kaxas praise anything (ace.) to.

address)

to

e.g.

tad

u devebhyo

ni hnute thereby he craves pardon of

the gods (SB.).

d.

hear

in

KV.

= listen
linger for

to.

a few times sru

listen

to

also

ram

DATIVE

200]

('.

liave confidence in

believe,

dhatta

him

Relieve in

sam-nam

avail;

12')

(ii.

f. help, he gracious

311

srad dha

pau homage

to,

to

be gracious

bring

g.

in.

aid,

sidh

d&saay a pa g honour to,

honour of (a god) das, vidh,
;

(a

god)

in V.

and B.

to.

vah,

ni, bhr,

vamam

sak

in V.

be complaisant to;

sapai'ya do a)igthing (ace.) in

sac p)ag homage to (a god), sam serve

mrd

srad asmai

e. g.

in B. also slagh trust

hi,

hr

e.

g.

ama

sat6 vahasi

home thou bringest much

wealtlt (i. 12-4^-)
devebhyo havyam vahanti thcij take the
oblation to the gods (TS.)
tarn harami pitryajnaya devam
visah
that god I bring to the sacrifice for the Manes (x. 16^")

bhuri

for him ivho

at

is

ksatriyaya balim haranti the peasants bring the taxes to the

In V. only there are many other verbs, with
nobility (SB.).
this general sense, that take the dative, such as r, inv, cud
motion for, and figurative expressions such as abhi-ksar

set in

stream

61 and sue shine on, prus spninlde on, abhi-va

e. g.
i go is used with the dat.

to,

in V. also the verb

icaft to:

pra visnave susam etu

in

honour of

Vimu

h.

svad

please

manma

let

my

stro)ig

hymn

go forth

154:^).

(i.

be stoeet to

and chand

be pleasing to

e. g.

svadasva^indraya pitaye be sweet to Indra as a draught

ut6 tad asmai madhv ic cachadyat and may that
(ix. 74^)
;

mead

be pleasing to

succeed

i.

him

sam anrdhe

(x. 73'^).

rdh and kip

in B.

e. g.

na ha^eva^asmai

he did not succeed in that (SB.)

tat

kalpate 'smai

he succeeds (TS.).
subject to

j.

our foes

h
stha
to

to

us

yield to
obey,

e. g.

radh

asmabhyam vrtra randhi subject

radh succumb,

m.rad and

(i.

e. g.

(iv. 22'-).
:

mo aham

my enemy

50^")

ksam

dvisate

nam

(B.) yield

and ni-ha bow

to,

radham may I

tasthuh savaya te

a-waso fall a

before,

victim

not succumb to

they obey thy

command

(iv. 54^).
I.

be

angry with

in V.

hr (hrnite)

in V.

and B.

asuya

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

312

and krudh
averse

m.

B.

in

also

he

aratiya

[200

and

hostile

gla

he

to.

seeJc to

injure

V. and B. druh

in

e, g.

striyai punis6 what mischief thou hast done

yad dudrohitha
to woman or man

(AV.).
n.

cast at

hurl at

e. g.

V.

srj discharge

srjad asta

lightning shaft at

him

arrow at

shoots the

harati he hurls the

0.

(i.

Mm

V. B. as throw

didyum asmai

B. pra-hr

the archer shot a

tasmai tarn isum asyati he

vajram bhratrvyaya pra
(MS.)
71'^)

holt at the foe (TS.).

exist or he intended for, accrue to

as

he,

bhu

hecome

gadham asmai even in deep

e.g. gambMr6
indra tiibhyam id
water there is a ford for him (vi. 24^)
cid bhavati

abhuma

Indra (TS.) atha ko

have hecome thine oivn,
bhago bhavisyati then ivhat share will accrue to

tvc

mahyatn
me (SB.).

The dative

a.

is

used with gerundives and infinitives to express

agent, and with the latter also the object

by attraction instead

tlie

of the

e. g. ydh stotrbhyo havyo asti who is to he utvoked by singers (i. 33^)

srayantam prayai dev^bhyah let (the doors) p/^en xoidefor the gods to
enter (i. 142); indram arkair Avardhayann ahaye hantava u ihey
sliengthemd Indra with hymns to slay the serpent (v. 31*).

ace.

vi

2.

The

dative

is

used with a certain

number

of sub-

stantives.
a. Such are words that invoke blessings, especially namas
homage (with the verbs kr do or as he, which are often to be

supplied)
(i.

27^^)

Brahman

e. g.

namo
(SB.).

namo mahadbhyah
'stu

brahmisthaya

to

the

great

to the greatest

Similarly used are the sacrificial formulas

svaha, svadha, vasat hail

hlessing on them (AV.).
a.

homage

adoration

The indeelinables sam

in V.

hlessing

e. g.

tebhyah svaha

and kani in B. meaning

used as uom. or ace. with the dat.

e. g.

yditha

welfare are

sam asad dvipade

catuspade in order tluit there 'inay he ivel/are for hipcd and quadruped
ahutayo hy agnaye k^m/or llie oblations are a joy to Agni (SB.)
{i. 114')
na^asma d-kam bhavati it does notfare ill ivith him (TS.).
;

200]

DATIVE

318

In V. the substantives kama desire and gatii path may i)eiliaps be

13.
krnvaregarded as taking a dative without a verb to be supplied e.g.
naso amrtatvaya gatum procuring for tliemselves a path to immortaUtii
;

^i.72).

the dat. is to be
7. In the name D&syave vrkah WolfiotheDasyu (RV.)
to the Dasyu.
exphvined as due to its use in the sentence he in a very icolf

The

3.

dative

is

used with adjectives meaning dear, kind,

e. g.
hostile
agreeable, beneficial, ivilllng, obedient, ill-disposed,
asit she was kind to friends
siva sakhibhya uta
;

mahyam

atithis carur ayave a guest dear to

vava
jiv6bhyo hitam tat pitrbhyah ivhat
yad
(ii. 2^)
the
is
good for the Manes (SB.) sa ratamana
living
good for

and

also to

man
is

me

(x. 34'^)

vrascanaya bhavati (SB.) he is ready for felling (the tree)

pratyudyaminim ha ksatraya visam kuryat he would
make tlie peasantry hostile to the nobility (SB.).

u. The adj. dnagas sinless often seems to take the dative of the name
of a deity, but it is somewhat uncertain whether tlie case should not

be connected with the verb

sinless (to

=)in

the eyes of

e.g.

Adit

i,

{i.

dnagaso aditaye syama may

may perhaps mean may

24^^)

ice

bo

ivv,

as

sinless, belong to Aditi.

The

4.

dative

is

used with a few adverbs.

aram often takes the dat. e. g. ye aram vahanti

manyave icho drive in accordance with (thy) zeal (vi. 16*^).
This use of aram is common in combination with the verbs
When used with the dat. aram is not
kr, gam, and bhu.
he is
infrequently equivalent to an adj. e. g. sasma aram
manase
aram
astu
somo
him
ayam
(ii.
18^)
ready for
a.

yuvabhyam

let

this

Soma

he agreeable to your heart

In B. alam appears in the place of aram and

(i.

108-).

is

often

e. g. nalam ahutya asa, nalam bhaksaya

simihxrly used
he teas not suitable for sacrifice, nor suitable for food (SB.).
b. The adverb avis visibly is used with the dat. in V. and
;

the verbs kr, bhu or as

avir ebhyo
e. g.
(the latter sometimes to be supplied)
tasmai va
them
to
abhavat suryah the sun appeared
(i. liQ'^)
B.,

but only

when accompanied by

avir

asama we

tcill

appear

to

him

(SB.).

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

314

[200

B. The dative also in a general sense complements the

statement of the whole sentence.

expresses the person for whose advantage or

disadvantage the action of the sentence takes place e. g.
1.

It

devan devayate yaja ivorshi}) the gods for the hcnejit of the
2)lous man (i. 15'-); tasma etam vajram akurvan for him
tasma upakrtaya niyoktaram na
the// made this holt (SB.)
;

vividuh (AB.) for him

our help

e. g.

(vi.

urdhvas tistha na titaye stand up for

na susvim indro avase
help us (i. 30*^)

= in order to

mrdhati Indra
the

they could

(i.e.

(final dative)

help

had heen brought near

they could find no one willing to bind him).

It expresses the purpose for which an action is done

Jind no hinder
2.

tvhen he

23^)

Visnu

ivill

man

in the lurch

for

svargaya lokaya visnukramah. kramyante

are taJien for the salx of

ste2)S

heaven (TS,);

not leave the pious

(=

agnim hotraya pravrnata

in order to gain)

theg chose

Agnifor

in order that he should be priest (SB.). The

final sense is commonly expressed by abstract substantives
the priesthood

(including in V.

many

infinitives)

suryasya ratham tasthau

the car for beautg

= so

tena^eva^enam sam
This

(TS.).

final dat. is particularly

e.g. asti hi

adhi sriye duhita

of the sun has mounted

e. g.

as to produce a beautiful effect (vi. 63') ;

srjati santyai with him (Mitra) he unites

him (Agni)/o/' appeasement

a.

the daughter

sma madaya vah

used with as and

there is

bhu

{something) for gour

to intoxicate you (i. 37^'')

i. e.
madaya somah
astiySoma {is for = ) produces intoxication (SB.).
3. The dative is used, though rarely, in expressions
of time like the English for
nunam na indra^
e. g.
aparaya ca syah now and for the future magst thou he ours,
Indra (vi. 33^) samvatsaraya sam amyate^br a year an
intoxication,

(sc.

alliance is
a.

The

made

iterative

(MS.).

compound dive-dive day by daij, though apparently

meant for the loc. uf the transfer

dat. of div, is probably in reality

stem div&.

DATIVE

200-201]

Two

4.

datives connected in sense often appear together.

This occurs in V.
infinitive

ai5

e. g.

when an

ace.

vrtraya hantave

Vrtra (cp. 200. A. 1 o

is

attracted

by a dative

= vrtram hantave

to

slay

a).

B., where, liowever, an abstract

the phice of the intiuitive; e.g. yatha^idam panibhyam avan6janaya,^ahdranty ev&m just as iheij bring it for ivasldnij tke
hands i^SB.). Two datives are here often found with the verb stha, one

There

a.

an analogous ue in

is

biibstiintivc takes

expressing the purpose, the other

e.g.

tlie

person affected by the action

devebhyah pasavo 'nnadyayalambaya

did not present themselves

to the

na^_^atisthanta the animals

gods for food, for sacrifice (AB.).

5. The adverbial use of the dative is very rare

kamaya
and arthaya for the sale of may bo regarded as such
:

of unrestrained motion
thou hast been horn for our

kamaearasya kamaya for the

(SB.)
asmakarthaya jajnise

salce

sahe (A v.).

Ablative.

201. The abhxtive, expressing the starting-point from

which the action of the verb proceeds, may as a rule be
It is chiefly connected with various
translated by from.
used independently.
use
the ablative appears with
dependent

classes of words, but is also

A. In

its

verbs

expressing a local action, as go, proceed, drive,

receive
lead, take,
pour, drlnlc call, loosen, ward off, exclude ;
1.

a.

e. g.

iyiir

gavo na yavasad agopah

they tvent like

unhcrded

vrtrasya svasathad isafrom

18^")
manah fleeing from the snorting of Vrtra (viii. 96") asatah
sad ajayata/roju non-heing arose heing (x. 72^); abhrad iva
the pasture (vii.

Icine

pra stanayanti vrstayah from

rains

enemies

thuh

the cloud as

it

were thunder the

tvam dasyumr okasa ajah thou drovest the

from the house (vii. 5^) bhujyiim samudrad uha-

(x. 75-')

home Blmjyu from the sea (vi. 62*^)

hiranyapindan divodasad asanisam ten lumps of
ye

tico

have

daso

gold

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

316

[201

from Divodasa (vi. 47^^) apad dhotrad uta

potrad amatta he has drunk from the Hotr's vessel and has
maruto yad
intoxicated himself from the Potr's vessel (ii. 37"*)
vo divah havamahe
Maruts, when ive call //on from heaven
have received

(viii.

7^^)

ch^pam yupad amuncah

siinas cic

thou didst

yuyutam asmad
Sunahsepa from the post (v. 2")
aniram amivam ward off from us sickness and calamit/j

release

(vii. 71-^).
n.

Examples from B. are

y&d dhaved annadyad dhavet

were

if lie

to

run, he inould run away from his food (TS.); sa rdthat papata hefellfroin
lits car (SB.); divo vrstir irte rain comes from the sky (TS.); rsayah kavasam

ailusam som.ad anayan the seers led Kavasa Ailusa away from Soma, i.e.
excluded him from it (AB.) enan asmal lokad anudanta they droce them
au'ayfrom this world (AB,) tasmad auasa eva grhniyat therefore he shotdd
take it from the cart (SB.); kesavat piirusat sisena parisriitam krinati
;

sa evd^eiiam
from a long-haired ynanfor lead (SB.
varunapasan muncati he releases him from the fetter of Varuna (TS.)
suvargal lokad yajamano hiyeta the sacrificer loouldfall short of heaven
The two verbs antar dha liide and ni-li conceal' oneself -Ave used
l^TS.).
with the abl. in B. only vajrena^^enam suvargal lokad antar dadhyat
he would exclude him from heacen ivifh the bolt (TS.)
agnir devebhyo nihe buys the Parisrui

layata Ayni concealed himselffrom

the gods i^TS.).

b. expressing rescue, protect

fear, dislike
transcend, prefer
verbs with the latter two senses as well as urusya protect,
raks guard, and rej tremble take this construction in V. only
;

pa and tra
protect,

protect

bibhatsa

and bhi fear in both V. and B.

be disgusted ivith in B. only

no mitra urusyet

e. g.

ma?/ Mitra rescue us from distress

gopaya

amhaso
(iv.

55^)

sa nas trasate duritat he shall protect us from misfortune

indrasya vajrad abibhet slic ivas afraid oflndra's

pra sindhubhyo ririce, pra ksitibhyah he
somat sutad
reaches bei/ond rivers and begond lands (x. 89^^)
indro avrnita vasisthan Indra preferred the Vasidhas to

(i.

128^)

bolt (x. 138^)

(Pasadyumna's) pressed Soma (vii. 33^).

a. With bhi two ablatives are found, the one being the
object feared, the other the action proceeding from it e. g.
;

indrasya vajrad abibhed abhisnathah

she

was afraid of

ABLATIVE

01]

Imlra's

her

holt,

of its crushing

817
i.

(x. 138"'),

e.

that

it

would crush

asuraraksas6bhya asangad bibhayam cakruh

fhci/

Asuras and Eakmsas, of their attachment

were afraid of the

that they would attach themselves to

them

(SB.).

substantives when derived from, or equivalent to,

verbs used with the ablative e. g. sarma no yamsan triva2.

rutham amhasah
distress

from

sarma

te

thrice-protecting shelter

iva ghrner

aganma

raksobhyo

shade (that
vai tarn bhisa

they restrained their speech

from fear of the

heat

vacam ayachan

lis

chayam

lipa

66"');

(x.

vayam we

from

protects)

they shall grant

have entered

(vi.

16=^^^)

tliy shelter liJiC

demons

(SB.).

adjectives

8.

when

sweeter than butter

Indra

is

and B. comparatives and adjectives

means than e. g. ghrtat svadiyan
visvasmad indra uttarah
(viii. 24^")

in V.

of cognate sense,

it

jatany avarany asmat

bhiivanad
visvasmad
purva

greater than every one{x. 86^)

horn later than he

(viii. 96*')

abodhi she has aioakened earlier than every being

papiyan asvad gardabhah the ass is worse than
(TS.)

brahma

hi

purvam

]ie

ksatrat the priesthood

warrior class (PB.)

anyo
becomes other than we (AB.).

to the

a.

In B. several

nrdhva

above,

local

jihma

(i.

128^)

the horse
is

superior

va ayam asmad bhavati

and temporal adjectives: arvaoina heloic,

arvauc before, paranc after e.g. ydt kim

aslant

ca^_^arvacmain adityat lohaieveris below

the

sun (SB. )

eti.smac catvalad

urdhvah svargdm lokdm upod akraman uincard from that pit they
to heaven (SB.);
yajnaj jihma iyuh they {would go obliquely
from =) lose the sacrifice (AB.); dasa va etasmad arvancas trivrto, dasa
parancah ten Trirrls occur before it and ten after it (AB.).
ill
b.
B. adjectives in uka, which with bhu are equivalent to
a verb e. g. yajamanat pasavo 'nutkramuka bhavanti the animals are
ascended

not inclined

to

run away from the

sacrificer

(AB.).

and cardinals with the former

tlie abl. expresses the point from which the reckoning is made
e.g. isvaro ha^asmad dvitiyo va trtiyo va brahmanatam abhyupaitoh
the second or third (in descent)/rom him can obtain Brahminliood (AB.) with
the latter it expresses the figure by which the complete number is
= ninety-vine.
defective; e.g. kan na satd,m not a hundred by one
c.

in B. numerals, both ordinals

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

318

Analogously with words meaning

incomplete the

[201-202
al>l.

expresses the

of the deficiency; e.g. ikasmad aksdrad dlnaptara (averse)

incomplete hy one syllable (TS. ); tesam alpakad evd^agni'r ^samcita asa

amount

their fire (altar)

was

not completely piled

up by a

little

only, i.e.

was almost

completely piled up (SB.\

4.

adverbs meaning before, beyond, outside, beloiv, far from,

are used prepositionally with the abl.
Those

ivlfhout

occurring in V. only are

adhas beJow, avas down from, ar6

and B. rt6 witliouf, tiras apart

in V.

puras before
from, paras outside, pura before in B. only abhyardhas
far from; bahis outside. Cp. 177, 3.
a. In B. some other adverbs with a local or temporal
sense e. g. duram ha va asman mrtyur bhavati death is
far from him (SB.) tasman madhyamac chankor daksina
pancadasa vikraman pra kramati he strides forward fifteen
7Citliout,

steps to the right of this middle

(making)

peg (SB.)

prag ghomat

before

the oblation (AB.).

The abl. is used independently of any particular class

word to express the reason of an action in the sense of
on account of; e. g. ma nas tasmad 6naso deva ririsah
B.

of

let

us suffer no harm,

god, on account of this sin (vii. 89"')

anrtad vai tab. praja varuno 'grhnat bi/ reason of their guilt
Varuna seised creatures (MS.).
tasmad
Similarly in B.
:

therefore

kasmat

wherefore

Genitive.

202. The

genitive is a dependent case, being in its main

connected
with verbs and substantives, but also appearuses
with
adjectives and adverbs.
ing

A. With verbs the gen. has a sense analogous to that of

the ace, but differs here from the latter in expressing that
the action affects the object not as a whole, but only in part.

used with verbs having the following senses

rule over, dispose of: always with ksi and raj, nearly
always with irajya and is (rarely ace). In B. the only verb
It is
a.

GENITIVE

202]

319

with this sense taking the gen. is is have potver over e. g.

atha^esam sarva ise then every one has poiver over them (MS.).
h. rejoice in
always with trp, pri, vrdh optionally with
;

kan and mad

(also inst.

and loc), and with the caus. of pan

(also ace).

In B. the only verb of this group taking the gen.

a.

e. g.

dnnasya trpyati

note of:

always with

partitive sense;

Ite

trp in a

is

refreshes himself ivHh {some) food

(f^B.).

iaJce

c.

a-dhi

iliinTx

observe,

attend

about,

attend

to,

budh

to,

care for

care for

kr

highly of

and

alternatively with ace.

note of; adhi-i, -gam,

-ga

2.

sf>cal-

tal:e

vid hnow about (with

ace. liiow fully)

In B. only three verbs of this class are thus construed

RV. and kirtaya mention.

a.

In AV.

sru hear (gen. of person, ace. of thing, heard).

kirtaya mention and smr remember take the gen.
srii as in

cit

vid and

d. jmrtitiveness (while the ace.

expresses full extent)

with

same verbs

the

1.

eat,

ace.)
a.

pa

drinh
drinh

as cat of ad cat (almost exclusively with

a.-vrs f 11 oneself fall of, vi and jus enjoy.

In B. only as and pa besides- bhaks

eat (in

RV. with

ace. only)

take the partitive gen.

2.

give, piresent, sacrifice:

pre

present witli;

da

person, gen. of offering), e. g.

worship thee (with a libation) of
a.

In B. yaj

may

give

of,

a-dasasya and sak

give abundantly of; yaj

sacrifice (ace.

somasya tva yaksi I

Soma (iii. 53^).

be used without ace. of the person

e. g.

of

tvill

t^smad

^jyasya^evd yajet therefore he should sacrifice some butter (SB.).

p. In B. several verbs having the general sense of giving and taking,
not so used in V., come to be used with the gen. of the object in
a partitive sense vap strew, hu offe); abhi-ghar powr unon, ava-da cut off
some of, a-s2ut drii^, upa-str spread over, ni-han (AV.) and pra-han striJce,
vi-khau dig up some of; grabh. take of and in the passive be seized
= suffer in (a part of the bodj') e. g. u& eaksuso grhe he does not suffer
in his eye (MS.)
yd vaco grhitdh >rho suffers in his voice (MS.).
:

y<\

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

320
7.

In

Fj.

of that to

anu-bru

iririte is

which he

briihi invite Agni and

e.' obtain,

asJc

bhiks hegfor:

well as person)

is

tlie god and the gen.

agni-somabhyam m^daso 'nii

used with the dat. of

invited

Soma

[202

to the

e. g.

fat (SB.).

bhaj participate in (with ace. ohtain)

and id imphre for (generally ace. of thing as

for:

e. g.

imahe indram asya rayah we

tarn

iyate vasuhnplore Indra for some of that wealth (vi. 22")

nam he is implored for some of his riches (vii. 32"') also a-yu
;

take possession
a.

of.

Of these verbs bhaj remains in use

in B.

with gen. = have

a share

in (with ace. receive as a share).

f.

belong to

as and bhu, with the gen. of the possessor in

both V. and B.

e. g.

asmakam

astu kevalah

let

him

(i.
7^")
atha^abhavat kevalah somo
asya then Soma became exchisiveh/ his (vii. 98''); manor ha
va rsabha asa Manu had a bull (SB.) tasya satam jaya

exchisiveli/ be ours

babhuvuh
The

B.
1.

It

he had a hundred ivives (AB.).

genitive is used with two classes of substantives.

depends on verbal substantives and

is

then allied to

the gen. with verbs (especially those expi'essing possession).

a. The subjective gen., which is equivalent to the agent
of the action exj)ressed

by the cognate verb

= Avhen

e. g.

usaso

dawn breaks
apakramad u ha^eva^esam etad bibhayam cakara he
vyiistau at the breah of daum

the

was afraid of their dejmrture (^B.) = thiii they would run away.
e. g. yajnasya samrdIt very often occurs with datives
;

dhyai /or the success of the sacrifice (TS.) = that the sacrifice
might succeed.
b. The objective gen., which is equivalent to the object
expressed by the cognate verb e. g.
he yokes the steed
of the steed
;

before

the

slaughter of Vrtra (SB.)

It often occurs with datives

e. g.

yogo vajinah the >/oking

pura vrtrasya vadhat

before he slew Vrtra.

yajamanasya^ahimsayai

for the non-injmii of the sacrificer (MS.)

injure the sacrificer.

in order not to

GENITIVE

m]
This genitive
rayo data

321

common with

agent nouns, especially those in

pusa pasuiiam prajanayita
Pusan is the propagator of caiiJe (MS.). But in V. the agent nouns in tr
Avith few exceptions take the ace. when the root is accented; e.g.
data vasu one uito gives wealth (vi, 23^).
a.

tr

is

giver of iceulth (vi. 23'*';

e.g.

The gen. commonly depends on non-verbal substantives.

then have two senses
e. g. v6h parnam the wing of the
a. The possessive gen.
devanam dutah the
J)ird = wing belonging to the bird
2.

may

It

It also appears with abstract nouns

messenger of the gods.
ad id devanam lipa
from
words
e. g.
derived
such
;

then theg came to friendship) with the gods

then they became friends of the gods.

sakhyam ayan
33")

(iv.

a. The gen. used with the perf. pass, part., felt to be the agent, is a
variety of the possessive gen. Already appearing a few times in the
RV. it is common in B. e. g. pfityuh krita (MS.) the Imight (wife) of
;

the

husband

The

/3.

(the wife) bought by

gen.

is

the

husband,

similarly used with the gerundive;

balikrd anyasya^_^adyah paying

taxes

to

anyasya

e.g.

anotlier, to he devoured

Inj

another

(AB.)'.
7. Tlie

dative
to

is freqviently used possessively where we w'ould use a

- a son was born
tasya ha putro jajne a son of his was born

gen.

e. g.

him (AB.).

5. The gen. is occasionally used for the dative with srad dha leliere
and da gire in the AB. This use may have started from the possessive

sense.

l>.

The partitive

gen. expresses a part of the whole e.g.

3iira is the Jcindhj one among the
;

mitro vai sivo devanam

If the gen.

gods (TS.).

is

a plural of the

same word

as that

on which it depends it is equivalent to a superlative e. g.

= best of friends
sakhe sakhinam
friend among friends
;

30");

(i.

hymns
a.

mantrakrtam mantrakrt

of com/posers of

(B.).

This gen.

is

tives (including

and superlan^ pSra jigye

69^) gardabhah

in particular used with comparatives

prathamd,

kataris eanainoh not

first,

either of the

pasimam bharabharitamah

caram^

last,

&c.)

e. g.

two of them conquered (vi.

the

ass is the hest hearer of burdens

animals (TS.).
1819

hest

among

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

322

[202

P. It is used with numbers above iu-en(y (in B. only with sahdsram)

and words expressive of a division or a measure e. g. sastim asvanam
;

(an aggregate of) sixty horses;

yuthani herds

Sometimes
but the whole

ofcoics.

express not a part,

gonam ardh^m

half of (he coivs;

gdvam

this gen. is used by transference to

as in marutam ganah. the host (con;

sisting) o/the Maruts.

e. g. krsnanam
7. Tlie gen. sometimes expresses the material
vrihinam carum srapayati he cooks a mess of Uack rice (SB. ) et6sam
vrk.sanam bhavanti they (the fences) are (made of the wood) of these
trees (SB.).
It is used in this sense with the verb kr
e.g. yd, ev^ kds
ca vrksdh phalagrahis tdsya karya ivhatever tree bears fruit, of (a part of)
that it is to be made (MS.).
;

The

C.

gen.

is

used with a few adjectives meaning

capalle of, Jcnoivinr/, ojfering, alouncUncj in:

priya dear, anuvrata obedient pratyardhi standing at the
attached

like,

to,

side of; anurxi]pai similar

of;

papri

offered,

isvara able

navedas

cognisant

abundantly (partitive gen. of the thing

andhasah of the juice (i. 52^) and with the

e. g.

abounding in.
D. The gen,

is

purna

like adjectives,

ftdl

of,

pipivams

used with certain adverbs having 1. a local

in V. and B.
daksinatas

in V. agratas before (AV.)

to,

Icstoiving

participles, used

sense

avastad

below, parastad aftoye, purastad before;

in B.
uparistad behind, pascad behind, puras before
antikam near, nediyas nearer, n^distham nearest.
to the right of;
:

In the RV. ax far from takes the gen. (also the abl.).
In B. the local adjective (like the local adverbs) lidanc northicard
of takes the gen.
a.

li.

Ida and idanim now are used in V.

2. a temporal sense
with the genitives ahnas and ahnam == at the present time of
day pratar early with the gen. ahnas in V. and with
ratryas in B. e. g. yasya ratryah pratar yaksyamanah
:

syat

in the

morning of which night he

may

be about to sacrifice

(MS.).
3,
ofice

a multiplicative sense: in V. sakrt once with ahnas

a day ; tris thrice in trir dhnas, trir a divah thrice

GENITIVE

202-203]

823

a flay and trir akt6s three times a night

and

with samvatsarasya,

tris thrice

in B.

twice, thrice

dvis twice

a year.

a. The adverbial iiso in V. of the gen. in a temporal sense is perhaps

derived from that with multiplicatives
aktos, ksdpas and ksapds
nfa night; vastos and usasas of a morning.
:

Locative.
case expresses the sphere in which an action
takes place, or with verbs of motion the sphere which is
Its sense includes not only locality
reached by the action.

203. This

It may
(both concrete and abstract) but persons and time.
therefore be variously translated by in, on, at beside, among,
;

in the presence of;

to, into.

A. The loc, appears in a general and independent way in

the following senses
a. concrete
e. g. divi in heaven, parvate in or
1, Place
:

on

the

23-')

(iii.

b.

mountain
;

abstract

graces

48^-)

(viii.

32^)

(i.

sarasvatyam

at

the

samgram6 id.
asya sumatau syama may we

yudhi

in battle

thy poivcr {\n\. 93^)

8^),

(i.

Sarasvati

(SB.).

be in his good

tad indra te vase that,

Indra, is in
yd adityanam bhavati pranitavi ivho

vajrasya yat
of the Adityas (ii. 27")
patane padi susnah when upon the flight of the bolt Susna
ghrtakirtau at the mention of (the word)
fell (vi. 20')
is

in

the guidance

ghee (SB.).
2.

Persons

there is in

me

e. g.
(i.

yat

23^^)

kim

ca duritam mayi whatever sin

pipaya sa sravasa martyesu he

abounds in fame among mortals (vi. 10") yat stho druhyavy

anavi turvase yadau, huv6 vam whether ye two are beside
;

(with) Bruhyu,

Ami, TurvaSa

(or)

Yadu,

call

you

(viii. 10"')

vayam syama varune anagah may we be guiltless in the eyes

asmin pusyantu gopatau let them
of Varuua (vii. 87')
;

prosper under

Time

this

herdsman

(x.

19').

here the loc. expresses that an action takes

the limits of the time mentioned e. g. usaso
within
place
8.

v2

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

324

of dawn usasi in the morning (in B.

used instead) dyavi-dyavi every dap (not used in

vyustau
pratar
B.)

at the flush

is

ahan

trir

[203-204

masi-masi

three times in the

he

born

is

(once)

day

(in B. gen. only)

in

every

(successive)

jayate
month

(x. 523).

This temporal use sometimes comes to mean that something

at the end of the period
e. g. samvatsara iddm adya vy

a.

happens
akhyata
(i.

161")

ye have opened your eyes

ai.

thence arose in

the

end of a year

(=

at the

end

now

io-dcty (for the first time) i7i a year

tatah samvatsar^ piirusah sam abhavat

of) a year a

man

(SB.).

Adverbially. A few substantives and adjectives are

thus used e. g. agre often occurs in the sense of in front
4.

and

appearing even in compounds (e. g. agre-ga

in SB. the loc. of
agre-pa drinldng first)

at first,

going

hefore,

ksipra quich

'mum lokam

ha yajamano
go

to

several times thus employed,

is

ksipre

e.g.

iyat the sacrificer ivoutd speedily

yonder world.

204.

The

B.

words by which

loc.

is

connected with different classes of

may be said to be governed.

1. It is specially connected with verbs expressing
a. in V.
Mess, injure in respect
rejoice in
groiv, prosper
involve
receive
from e.g. visve deva
of; implore,
for (i, hu)
it

havisi

madayadhvam

do ye,

all-gods, rejoice in the oblation

tavisisu vavrdhe he grew in strength (i. 52-)

(vi. 52'^j
ya esam bhrtyam rnadhat sa jivat he ivho icill succeed in
their support, shall live (i. 84"^)
prava nas tok6 bless us in
;

children

(viii. 23'-)

children

(i.

we

71'^)

implore

in V.

for

children

and for grandchildren

for offspring, cows, water

amrtatvam anasa
(iv.

injure us not in our

adha hi tva havamahe tanaye gosu^apsii for

tve involve thee

gods

nas tdk.6 ririsah

agnim tok6 tanaye sasvad imahe Agni

114*);

constantly

(viii.

ma

36*)

(vi.

19^^)

ye received immortality {among

dev^sii^

=) from

the

and B.

rarely in V.)

let
e.

g.

share in (a-bhaj) and struggle for (sprdh,

yan abhajo mariita indra some

the

LOCATIVE

204]

325

Inclm, didst allow to share in Soma

thoit,
ami no 'syam prthivyam a bhajata let us have
in this earth (SB.); adityas ca ha va angirasas ca

Maruts wJiom
(iii.

SS'-*)

a share

svarge loke 'spardhanta

the

Adityas and the Angirases

struggled for (the possession of) the heavenly world (AB.) ;

in B.
request (is), aslc (prach), call in question (mimams)
:

e. g,

ha^iyam devesu sutyayam apitvam

sa

quested from the gods a share in the Sotna feast (SB.)

aprchanta
b.

they inquired of

and B.

in V.

reached.

The

may

Such verbs in V. are

to

indicate

devesv

place that is

tli

to, into, upon.

ascend (a-ruh),

(a-^?^is),

descend (ava-vyadh), fow (ars, dhav),

e. g. sa id devesu gachati

(dha, kr)

te

here be translated by

go (gam), enter

the gods (PB.).

motion,

case

ise she re-

(sic,

^jo/"
(i.

hu), put

that goes to

1^)

devan gachati would mean goes

yo martyesv it krnoti devan
who brings the gods to mortals (i. 77'); viryam yajamane
dadhati he puts energy into the sacrificer (TS.) na va esa

[=

reaches) the gods (while

in the direction

of

the gods)

gramy^sn pasusu hitah

he

{is

among =) does not

In B. verbs meaning to

not placed

belong to the tame animals (TS.).

throw at are especially common with the loc.
c.

eager,

yat

grdh be
annesu jagrdhur they are
divi svano yatate the sound soars to
23'")
indra samsaya gosv asvesu pray
tu
na
a

a-sams hope

strire,

eager for food (ii.

heaven (x. 75")
;

e.g.

give us hope, Indra,

cotvs

of

devata a samsante
of the

the goal or object aimed at

desire, to indicate

and horses

(i.

29')

agnihotrini

the gods place their hope in the maintainer

sacrificial fire (MS.).

The
nouns
2.

loc. is also

used to some extent connected with

a. verbal nouns (substantives and adjectives) derived from

verbs taking that case e. g. na tasya vacy api bhago asti
he has no share in speech (x. 71")
somo bhiitv avapanesv
;

suta

it

Soma

a particiqMtor in drinking bouts

tvara nimisla indra some thou art attached,

abhagah

let

be

(i.

136^)

Indra,

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

326
to the jiressed

iva

hhn

Soma

23')

(vi.

[204-205

tasminn eva^eta nimislatama

(women) are most devoted (SB.).

in V. priya and caru dear
e. g.
priyah surye priyo agna bhavati he will he dear to Surya,
dear to Agnl (v. 37^) carur mitre varune ca dear to Mitra
and Varum (ix. 61^) in B. dhruva firm e. g. rastram eva^
asmin dhruvam akah he has made the sovereignty estallisJted
in him (TS.).
3. The loc. is used with a few prepositions
in V. a in,
and
and
near
at, on,
upa
to, at, upon, as
(rarely) api near, in,
well as the prepositional adverb saca beside, ivith in V. and
B. adhi on and antar within (ep. 176. 2
177, 5).
to

h.

these

ordinary adjectives

Locative and Genitive Absolute.

205.
the case

The absolute construction

1.

is

always accompanied by a

of the loc, in

which
from

participle, started

the ordinary use of the loc.

Combined with a i^articiple it
came to be regarded as a temporal or qualifying clause
where the case alone could not be employed. Thus beside

usasi at daivn could appear uchantyam usasi at dawn as it

which then acquired the independent sense

shines forth,

dawn shines fort J (i. 184'). As regards the participles

used in this construction, the future never occurs ; the perf.
act. is quite isolated
the perf. pass. part, is somewhat
tchen

t.

doubtful in V., but undoubted in B. while the pres. part,

is in fully developed use in V. as well as B.
;

a.

An

absolutely

example
is

of

guest having eaten, he

The

the perf.

part.

act.

in

asitavaty atithav asniyat (AV.

may

vant used
ix.

6^^)

the

eat (cp. 161).

pass, appears in the RV. in several

such
as
jat6 agnau, stirn6 barhisi, sut6 some,
expressions,
in which the loc. probably still has its ordinary sense e. g.
h.

perf.

part.

visvam adhag ayudham iddh6 agnau he hurnt every weapon

in the kindled fire (ii. 15^)
yo asvasya dadhikravno akarit
;

LOCATIVE ABSOLUTE

205]

samiddhe agna
BadhUiravan

iisaso

vyustau who has honoured

beside the Icindledfire at the flush

possibly when the fire is hindled.

absolute sense seems more likely
:

avarsit trsyavatah pravrsy

upon
(vii.

327
the steed

of Dawn (iv.

39^),

In other examples the

yad im enam usato abhy

agatayam when

it

has rained

eager thirsty ones, the rainy season having come

103''); especially in yan marutah surya udite madatha
the

when

of

loc.

Maruts, are exhilarated at the rising of the sun

ye,

(v. 54').

Here surye could not be used alone/ while the

time would be expressed by lidita suryasya at

sunrise.

In B. the absolute use with the pert", part. pass, is much more
e. g. uditesu ndksatresu vacam vi srjati ivhen the stars
have risen he sets free his voice (TS.) s enah svo bhut6 yajate he sacrifices
krit6 some maitravarunaya
fa them ichen the morning has appeared (TS.)
dandam prd, yachati when the Soma has been bovght he hawls the staff to the
Maitrdvaruna priest (TS.); tdsmad gardabh^ pu^a^_^ayusah pramite
a.

pronounced

bibhyati

therefore one is frightened

when a

donketj has died before

its

lime

The substantive has sometimes to be supplied e.g. sa hovaca

hato vrtro yad dhate kuryata tdt kuruta^iti he said : Vrtra is dead ;

(TS.).

what you would

Of the

c.

there are

do, if he were dead, that do (SB.).

pres. part,

with the

many examples

in V.

loc. in
e. g.

maha indram prayati^adhvar^

Indra when

the sacrifice proceeds

(i.

the absolute sense

indram pratar havave involve early,

sarasvatim deva-

Indra
16-')

yanto havante sarasvatim adhvare tayamane

to the gods invoice Sarasvatt,
extended (x. 17') ; ta vam

Sarasvati

tvhile

fnen devoted

the sacrifice

is

adya tav

aparam huvema^
uchantyam usasi so you two to-day, so you two in future ive
ivoidd invoke when Dawn shines fotih (i. 184').
a. Similarly in B
yajiiamukhe-yajnamukhe vai kriydmane yajiiam rdksamsi jighamsanti ahvays ivhen the commencement of the sacrifice
:

is

being made, the Baksases seek

mane
^

yajn.6

hanyate

ichen

to

Soma

destroy the sacrifice (TS.)

is destroyed, the sacrifice is

some hany^-

destroyed (TS.)

Because the sense rejoice in the sun would be unnatixral, though the
mad with the loc. is normal (cp. 204, 1 a).

construction of

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

328

[205-206

tasmad agnicid varsati na dhavet therefore the fire-piler should not run
tim etat pratyayatyam ratrau sayim upatisth.anta
xvhen it rains (TS.)
;

so they

approached him in

the evening lohen night returned

The genitive absolute

ah-eady come into use in B.
2.

(SB.).

in V., but has

It arose from the possessive

is

unknown

value
genitive which acquired an independent syntactical
much
when accompanied by a (pres. or perf. pass.) participle

same way as the loc. The substantive is sometimes

omitted.
Examples are tasya^alabdhasya^ sa vag apa
cakrama he being sacrificed, this voice departed {iiB.) tasmad

in the

jayate therefore, zvhen tvater is heated,

sa eta vipruso 'janayata ya imali

apam taptanam pheno

foam arises (SB.)

skuyamanasya vipravante

he (Agni) produced those sparls

which dart about when (the

(MS.)

fire) is stirred

tesam ha^

uttisthatam uvaca while these stood up he said (AB.). In

the first three of the above examples the close relationship
of the absolute to the possessive case

is still

apparent.

Participles.

206.

inasmuch as
and verb.
inflexion and concord.

Participles are of a twofold nature

characteristics of both noun

share the

they

In form they are adjectives both in

On the other hand they not only govern cases like the verb,
but also indicate differences of voice and generally speaking
retain the distinctions of time expressed by the tenses to
which they belong. They are as a rule used appositionally

with substantives, qualifying the main action and equivalent to subordinate clauses.
They may thus express a relatemporal, causal, concessive, final, or hypothetical
sense.
The verbal character of participles formed directly
tive,

from the root (and not from tense stems)

is restricted (with
in
voice
certain exceptions) to the passive
sense, and to past
their
to
future
and
time while owing
passive nature they
;

are not construed with an ace. of the object, Init only with

the

inst. of

the agent or means.

PARTICIPLES

207-208]

207. The

pres, part, is occasionally

329

used in V. by anaco-

asmad aham tavisad isamana

indrad bhiya maruto rdjamanah / (am) fleeing from this
luthon as a

verb

finite

e.g.

mighty one, fremhliiig with fear of Indra, ye Maruts

This use does not seem to be found in B.

The

a.

with the verbs

pies. part, is used

i go,

(i.

171*).

car move,

as remain, stha stand as auxiliaries to express continued

duration in V. and B.
e. g. visvam anyo abhieaksana eti
;

tlie

(Pusan) goes on watching the universe

other

vicakasac candrama naktam

brightly at night

mana iyuh
(SB.)

tvam

24^")

(i.

te 'sya

and

moon

(ii.

40^)

goes on shining

grhah pasava upamurya-

would go on being destroyed

6ko vrtra carasi jighnamanah ybr thoit

his house

hi

eti the

cattle

alone goest on Idlling the Yrtras

(iii.

80^)

sram-

t6 'rcantah

yantas eeruh they went on praying and fasting (SB.) ream

tvah posam aste pupusvan the oneliceps producing abundance
;

tisthatu

let the

nas tisthanti

somam

eva^etat pibanta asate they thus

ucchvancamana prthivi su
(TS.)
earth keep on yaioning wide (x. 18'-) vitrmha-

of verses (x. 7U^)

on drinJcing

Iceep

Soma

they keep conflicting (TS.).

208. The past passive participle in ta is very frequently

finite verb
e. g. tatam me apas tad u tayate
punah my work is done and it is being done again (i. 110')
na tvavam indra kas cana na jato na janisyate no one is
used as a

like thee,
(i.81^)

Indra, he has not been born, and he

(i.

devata dtha katama et6

the

ista

tdsmin ydd apanuam, grasitam evd.^asya

has been devoured by him (TS.).

The

perf.

forms of as and

mood

104'^).

gods have been worhut ivhich are these gods? (TS. ); also in suboi'dinate clauses:

Similarly in B.

a.

not be born

confidence has been placed in thy great might

shipped,

ivill

used impersonally sraddhitam te mahata indriyaya

pass.

bhu

or tense in V.

part,

is

tfit

what has got

into

him, that

not infrequently used with

as auxiliaries constituting a periphrastic

;

right (steed) be yoked

yuktas te astu daksinah let thy

dhumas te ketur abhavad
82"')

e. g.
(i.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

330

divi sritah. the

heaven
h.

ind.

[208-209

thy banner, {was raised

snioJce,

=)

arose to

(v. 11^).

Such forms (pres, and aor. ind. of bhu, impf and peif.
and opt. of as) make regular past and present tenses and

mood

the opt.

in B.; e.g.

bhuyasibhir ha^asya^ahutibhir
has been made ivith several
devasurah samyatta asan the gods and
offerings (AB.)
tad va rsinam anuAsuras were engaged in conflict (TS.)
tasmad vidhrta
asa
the
seers
srutam
that was heard bg
(SB.)
adhvano 'bhuvan therefore the roads have been divided (TS.).

istam bhavati

bij

him

sacrifice

209. Future Participles Passive. There are

one, that in ayya occurs in the RV. only

these

six
;

of

three,

those in enya, ya, and tva, in V. and in B. two, those in

tavya and aniya in V. (but not in the RV.) and in B.
The commonest sense expressed by these verbal nouns is
;

necessity but various allied meanings, such as obligation,

fitness, certain futurity, and possibility, are also frequent.
Four of them are construed with the inst. of the agent (the
;

gen. and dat. sometimes appearing instead), while the forms

in tva and aniya are never found connected with a case.

The commonest

sadyo

of these gerundives is that in ya

jajnano havyo babhiiva as soon as born he became

one

be invoiced

1.

to

verb

e. g.

It often appears without a

(viii. 96^^).
visva hi vo namasyani vandya namani deva

uta yajniyani vah

worthy ofpraise, and
expressed by the

your names, ye gods, are adorable,

The agent may be
ivorshipful (x. 63^).
all

inst.,

dat.,

or gen.;

e.g.

tvam nrbhir

havyo visvadha^asi thou art always to be involed by men

asmabhir u nu praticaksya^abhut she has
(vii.
22')
become visible {by=) to us (i. 113^^) sakha sakhibhya idyah
a friend to be praised by friends (i. 75^) ya 6ka id dhavyah
carsaninam who alone is to be invoiced of men (vi. 22').
;

a. In B. the agent may be in the

thus tdsmai deyam means io him

example

inst. or gen.,

but not in the dat.

This
should be given (SB.).
also illustrates the impersonal use of this gerundive in B.,
gifts

GERUNDIVE

209]

381

This gerundive is always without a verb,

ii use unkuowu to the RV.
being unaccompanied by forms of as or bhu in B. e. g. bahu d^yam
;

much

(is) to he (jicen

(MS.).

Tlie gerundive in tva in the RV. implies necessity or

but
possibility and is often used in contrast with the past
2.

not found accompanied by a verb (as or bhu) or a noun

expressing the agent e. g. ripavo hantvasah. the enemy are

it is

to he Villed

(iii.

30^^)

yo nantvany anaman ny ojasa who

tad visvam
might lent what could he lent (ii. 24^)
abhibhur asi yaj jatam yac ca jantvam thou surpassest all
hy his

that has leen lorn

and

that

to he

-is

lorn

(viii. 89'^).

The only meaning that seems to be expressed by this gerundive

is possibility; e.g. snatvam udakdm water that can be bathed in
(6b.); no asya^anyad dhotvam asit pranat and he had nothing else that
a.

in B.

could be offered but breath (MS.).

3. The gerundive in ayya, found in the RV. only, sometimes appears accompanied by an agent in the inst. or the

dat.

e. g.

daksayyo nrbhih

daksayyo dasvate

man

pious

dama

in his house

(ii.

to

le propitiated ly

a who

is

to

men

(i.

129^)

Ic ])ropitiated ly the

4^).

in enya, almost restricted to the RV, may

be accompanied by an agent in the inst. e. g. agnir ilenyo
gira Agni to le praised with song (i. 79^) abhyayams6nya

The form

4.

bhavatam manlsibhih
devout
a.

(i.

imuld

utter

found in B.

a speech worthy

to be

at all, occurs

thus

in tavya, which
only twice in the AV.

himsitavyah a Brahmin

is

not

vacam udyasam

susrti-

heard (TS.).

The gerundive

5.

RV.

the

34^).

It is once or twice also

s^nyam I

drawn near ly

le ivilling to le

to le

is
:

not found in the

thus na

brahmano

injured (AV. v.

18*^).

frequent and used much in the same way as the form

also used impersonally and with the agent in the
inst.
e. g. putro yajayayitavyah a son must be made to sacrifice (MS.)
agnicita paksino B^j^^asitavyam anAcjnkit should not eat {any part) of a
bird (^MS.), pasuvrateua bhavitavyam (MS.) he should act after the manner of
a.

in

In B.

ya

it is

here

it is

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

332
cattle

(more literally
manner of cattle).

action should he taken

hij

[209-210

him as one

folloioing the

6. The form in aniya, which is rare in both V. and B.,

does not occur at all in the EV., and only twice in the prose

AV. Expressing only suitability or possibility, and

never used either with an inst. or impersonally, it has

of the

hardly attained the full value of a gerundive even in B.

e. g. upajivaniyo bhavati he is one ivho may he subsisted on
;

(AV.)

Iktble to he hewitchcd (SB.)

abhicaraniya

ahavaniya

suitahle to he offered to (AB.).

Gerund

or Indeclinable Participle.

210. The forms of the gerund, ending in tvij tva, tvaya

and in ya or tya (164) are synonymous, expressing

(cp. 163)

an action that

is

past before that of the finite verb begins.

what is regarded as the subject of the

It regularly refers to

sentence
e. g. giidhvi tamo jy6tisa^_^usa abodhi having
hidden aicay the darkness, Dawn has awakened with light
;

yuktva haribhyam iipa yasad arvak having

yoJxd (them) mag he come hither with his two hags (v. 40^)
striyam drstvaya kitavam tatapa having seen a woman it
80")

(vii.

pains
is

the

pained

gambler, having seen a ivoman,

piba nisadya drink, after having sat doivn (i. 177^)

gamhler
;

(x.

34^^)=

tlic

yo hanti satrum abhitya who

attacked him (ix. 55"*).
a.

The usage in B.

is

similar

e.g.

slays the foe

after having

tSsmat suptva prajah pra budh-

(TS.); tam ha,_^enam

him = having seen him he
became afraid (SB.). The gerund is, however, here found loosely construed in various ways not occurring in V. Thus it refers in sense to
the agent implied by the future j^art. pass, in tavya or ya used predi-

yante

therefore

awake

creatures

after

having

drstva bhir viveda having seen him fear

catively as a finite verb

'vadheyah

his

hand

tences as the following

r^sah sdm bhavati

put

agnihotrah^vanim pratapya hasto

into

it

(by the holder) after having heated

the connexion in such sen-

Still looser is

the ftre-sacrifce ladle (M.S.).

esi,

e. g.

(is) to he

slept

seized

tS

pas^va osadhir jagdhva^apdh pitva tata

the beasts Iiaving eaten the plants

and drunk

-water

GERUND

210-211]
(hen this vital sap arises (6b.)

S33

then acquire this vital

sn}).

The past sense

gerund is often emphasized by the particle d,tha then being

placed immediately after it. The gerund is here sometimes equivaof the

lent to the finite verb

of a subordinate clause

deva istva tant sam^d avindat

after the gods

had

e. g.

atithyena vai

sacrificed ivith the rite of

came upon them (SB.); similarly with the verb

et&d vai devah prapya raddhva^_^iva^amanyanta tlie gods,
having obtained this, thought thai they had as good as won (SB.).
hoHpitahle reception, discord

naan think

b.

the

The gerund

in

member

of

first

am, which is always a compound, and

which is nearly always a preposition,
performed by the subject of

exjDresses a simultaneous action

Being a cognate ace. used

adverbially it is only beginning to be used as a gerund in
e. g. tantram yuvati abhyakramam vayatah the
late V.
the finite verb of the sentence.

iico
a.

maidens weave the web while going iip to it (AV.).

In B. it has become common e. g. abhikramam juhoti
;

(TS.)

This gerund is sometimes used

he sacrifices while ap2)roaching (the fire).
with as, i, or car to express continued action ; e. g. t6 parapatam
asata they kept flying away (MS.).

Infinitive.

211. The normal use of this form

is to

supplement the

general statement of the sentence in a final {in order to) or

The infinitive is, however,
a consequential (so as to) sense.

sometimes dependent on a particular word in the sentence,

usually a verb, occasionally a noun it then loses some of its
The
full meaning, as in other languages after an auxiliary.
:

object

when

it is

expressed
1.

a.

The

is

generally in the accusative.

Dative Infinitive.

various forms of this infinitive govern either an

or (by attraction) a dat., sometimes (according to the

e. g. indraya^arkam
nature of the verb) another case

ace.

juhva sam anje, viram danaukasam vandadhyai for

Indra I tvith my tongue adorn a song, to praise the bountiful
tvam akrnor dustaritu saho visvasmai sahase
hero (i. 61)
;

sahadhyai thou

didst

display irresistible power

to

overcome

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

334

[-211

(vi. 1^); ava sya sura^adhvano na^ante 'smin

no adya savane mandadhyai unyoke,
hero, as at the end
of a journey, to delight in this our Soma pressing to-day (iv. 16^)
abhud u param etave pantha the path has appeared, to
a no nava
(enable us to) go to the farther shore (i. 46^^)

crenj poivcr

matinam yatam paraya gantave

the boat

of our hymns,

to

go

to

do ye two come
the farther shore (i. 46")

to

us with

indram

codaya datave magham urge Indra to give bounty (ix. 75'^)

indram avardhayann ahaye hantava u they strengthened
;

dragon (v. 31"*) a ta etu manah piinah

ca
jivase jyok
suryam drs6 let thy spirit return {to live =)
sisite srnge
that thou mayest live and long see the sun (x. 57^)

Indra

to slay the

raksase vinikse he sharpens his horns in order to pierce

demon (v. 2^) sadyas cin mahi davane to give much
;

once

(viii.

A.Q'^^)

(v.

yudhaye dasyum
30^)

tav

asum may

at

pra yad bharadhve suvitaya davane

to give welfare (v. 59^)
amitran prtsu

when ye proceed
turvane to overcome foes in
aid

the

battle (vi. 46*^)

then he advanced

asmabhyam drsaye

atha,_,upa

to fight

the

sux'yaya punar

pra^
demon

datam

we may see
devo no atra savita nu^artham prasavid
the sun (x. 14^^)
dvipat pra catuspad ityai here god Savitr has now urged on
our bipeds, on our quadrupeds to go to their work (i. 124^)
abodhi hota yajathaya devan the priest has awakened to
these two give us back our breath that
;

worship the gods

b.

word

The

(v. 1^).

dat. inf.

not infrequently depends on a jDarticular

e. g. ta vam
vastuni^usmasi ga-

in the sentence

madhyai

tve desire to

go

to those

abodes of you two

(i.

154^);

dadhrvir bharadhyai strong to carry (vi. 66^) cikid nasayadhyai understanding to destroy (viii. 97^*) agnim dv6so
yotavai no grnimasi we implore Agni to tvnrd off hostility
from us (viii. 71^'') t6 hi putraso aditer vidur dv6samsi
y6tave/o>' those sons of Aditi know how to tvard off hostilities
tvam indra sravitava apas kali thou, Indra,
(viii. 18^)
ivaters to floio (vii. 21^)
made
the
hast
vidyama tasya t
;

INFINITIVE

211]

335

vayam akuparasya da vane may we know

inexhaustible to give

made

the

monster

to

fear

created (him) to rule

I wish

39^)

(v.

(v.

(viii.

of thee who art

this

mrgam kah

bhiyase

he has

29*)

jajanus ca rajase and they

97^")

kavimr ichami samdrse

to see the

poets (iii. 38^).

a. The dat. inf. has sometimes a passive force
e.g. a vo vahistho
vahatu stavadhyai rd.thah may your most swift car bring you hither to he
praised (vii. 37^) girbhih sakhayam gam ni dohdse huve with songs I
esa purutSma drs kd.ni
call my friend like a cow to be milked (vi. 45^)
This sense is
she here that constantly returns (so as) to be seen (i. 124^).
;

which
especially noticeable In the infinitives in tavai, tave, and e,
when used predicatively (as a rule with the negative n) are equivalent to a future part, pass.^ witli the copula
thai bounty of yours is to be praised

(i.

122'')

e. g.

stus6 sa

vam

ratih'^

^pabhartava u
radhah p^ryetave

nd,isa gdvyiitir

away (x, 14^); ydsya nd,

surpassed (viii. 24^^)
nd,_^asmaliaai asti tdt
td.ra adityaso atiskdde this our seal,
Adityas, is not to be overlooked
this pasture (is) not to be taken

whose treasure

(viii. 67*')

is not

ni,

be

to

pramiye savitur d^ivyasya

ti,t this

(work) of the divine

Savitr (is) indestructible (iv. 54*).

the inf. is
(or instrument) of the action expressed by
the inst. or gen. when there is a passive sense e. g. n^^anyina
stomo vasistha nvetave vah your laudation,
Vasisthas, is not to be
^bhud. agnih samidhe manusanam Agni
eqitalled by another (vii. 33')
Wlien there is no passive
has appeared to be kindled of men (vii. 77*).
j3.

The agent

pi\t in

sense the agent

expressed by the dat,

is

dev6bhyo mahih. may

mcty enter

{i.

bhuvanani
nov7

see

ahdm
I

the great {gates)

e. g.

open {for

tJte

vi srayantam prayai
gods

to

=)

that the gods

1426); dabhrara pdsyadbhya urviya vicdksa usa ajigar

vi'sva (i. 113^) Daicn has wakened all creatures (for those loho

= ) that those who see little now may look far and icide
dhdnur a tanomi brahmadvise sarave hdntava u
boicfor Rudra {for the arrow to =) that the arrow may strike the

little

to

riidraya

stretch the

hater of prayer (x. 125").

7.

The

infinitive in

dhyai

is

not infrequently employed elliptically

to express an intention, the subject being either expressed or requiring to be supplied in the first or third person^ ; e. g. prati vam rdtham

In Latin the gerundive actually appears to have taken the place

see Brugmann, Grundriss, 4, 2,
the IE. predicative infinitive
pp. 461 and 488.
2 Which in Latin would be
laudanda {est) vestra benignitas.
^
The inf. is similarly used in Greek in the sense of a 2. pers. impv.;
e. g. -rravra rdS' djy(T\ai /xrjSl ^evSayyeXo^ (7vai tell all this and be not a false
^

of

messenger

(Homer,

Od.)

flirifevai

^xoi,

IpSjis

tell

me, ye Trojans

{ibid.).

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

386
jar^dhyai
ausijo

Ihe chariot

of you

huvddhyai samsam

iioo

(I

the son

purpose)

[211

invoke (vii. 67^)

to

ofUsij (intends)

to

a va

pyoclaim your praise

(i. 122'''').

In B. the

5.

e. g.

tam pra

in tavai lias three uses

inf.

harati

yo 'sya strtyas tasniai

1.

with a

final

star tavai he hurls

it

sense

in order

to strike down him ivho is to he struck down by it

(AB.). 2. predicatively
with nS, often witli a passive sense, sometimes impersonally e.g. na
v&i yajiia iva m^ntavdi it is not to he regarded like a sacrifice (SB.) na
pura suryasya udetor m^nthitav^i one should not ruh fire he/ore sunrise
(MS.); tasmad etenaj^asru n^ kartavM therefore tears should not be shed
by him (MS.). 3. with a pass, sense after an ace. governed by aha,
uvaea and brriyat e. g. agnim pdristaritava aha he says that the fire is
to be enclosed (MS.)
gopaian samhvayitava uvaca he said that the cow;

herds should be called together (SB.)

tad asvam anetavai bruyat then he
should order the horse to be brought (SB.). Perhaps, however, the ace. here
;

depends on the

alone

inf.

2.

The form

a.

in

he should give orders

to

bring ihe horse.

Accusative Infinitive.

am

is

used to supplement statements con-

taining a verb of going or in dependence on verbs

he able (arh, as, sak), wish (vas), or Imoiv (vid)
;

meaning
e. g.

^ipo

viprcham / go to the wise to inquire (vii. 86'^)

iy6tha barhir asadam fhou hast gone to seat thyself on the
sakema tva samidham ive would he able to
strmv (iv. 9^)
Mndle thee (i. 94^") sa veda deva anamam devan he, the god,

emi

cikitiiso

hnoivs (how) to guide hither the gods

(iv. 8'').

d. In B. this form of the inf. appears only in dependance on the

verbs arh, vid, and sak when they are combined with the negative nd,;
e. g.

avarundham nd^asaknot

he

was

not able

to

keep hack (MS.),

h. The inf. in turn in the RV.

expresses the purpose with
verbs of motion^ and also api^ears in dependence on the
verbs arh he able and ci intend e. g. ko vidvamsam upa
;

gat prastum etat ivho has gone

this?

[i.

more

(v. 79^*').

164*);

to the

wise

bhuyo va datum arhasi

Tlie use of this inf. is restricted to

the Latin supine in

tiim.

man

to

ask him

or thou canst give

dependence on such verbs in

INFINITIVE

211]

337

a. In B. the use is similai*, this inf.

expressing the purpose
with verbs of motion, or in dependence on the verbs dhr
intend and (generally accompanied by the
negative na) arh
and sak he able, kam desire, dhrs dare, a-dr trouble, a-sams
e. g. hotum eti Jie
goes to sacrifice (TS.), drastum a
gachati Jie comes in order to see (SB.) anyad eva kartum
dadhrire 'nyad vai kurvanti theij have purposed to do one

expect

thing, but do another (SB.)

hoiv have

you been

hantum

he did not wish

katham asakata mad

me?

(SB.)

rt6 jivitum

na cakame

to kill (SB.).

Ablative- Genitive Infinitive.

3.

The form

a.

able to live ivithout

in as (which

always compounded with

is

prepositions) is almost exclusively abl. as is shown by its

being used with words governing that case, viz. the pre-

positions rt6 without, pura before, and the verbs pa, protect,
tra rescue, hhi fear e. g. rt6 cid abhisrisah pura
jatrubhya
;

atrdah

ivithout

V-^)

(viii.

into the 2nt

thee
a.

I am
In B.

cartilages

(lit.

/row

the pit,

(ii.

being pierced
29") save us

from falling down).

one example of its being a gen., as it is governed

nahi tvad ar6 nimisas canalise for without

is

the verb is

by

the

before

tradhvam kartad avapadah

from falling
There

binding,

not able even to

blinJc

28'').

(ii.

appears only as a gen. governed

it

ydjamanasya pasun nirddhah

he

is able fo

by isvara;

Mm

e. g.

saisvaro

the cattle of the sacrijtcer

(MS.).
b.

The form

when it is governed by the

and a till or by verbs of saving and
pura hantor bhayamano vy ara fearing

in tos is abl.

prepositions

pura

preventing

e.

g.

before

he withdreir. before being struch

tyani gantoh save

The

gen.

is be able

the adverb

form

its

is

30'")

yuyota no anapa-

to childlessness

(iii.

54''^).

found only in dependence on the verb

(with the object by attraction in the gen.) or on

madhya in the midst of; e. g. ise rayah suvir-

yasya datoh he can

1819

(iii.

from coming

give wealth

and

heroic offspring

(vii. 4")

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

338

ma

no madhya ririsata^ayur gantoh.

midst of

before our reaching old age

[211

injure us not {in the

89^).

(i.

It
a. In B. the aljl. inf. is found with prepositional words only.
usually occurs with a till and pura before, both the subject and the
The object may, however, by attraction he
object being in the gen.
e. g. a suryasya lidetoh
in the abl., and a predicate is in the abl.
;

iill

(MS.)
till

the

sun's rising

the

till

milking of three (cows)

sun

the

three

till

a tisrnam dogdhoh (SB.)

(cows) are milked a midhyad

rises

pura siiryasya^udetoh before the suns rising

CMS.) = before the sun rises; pura vagbhyah sampravaditoh before the
The abl. form is also
voices' uttering (PB.)= before the roices are uttered.
sometimes used with the prepositional adverbs purastad and arvacinam before e. g. purastad dhotoh. before sacrificing (MS.) arvacinam
bhdvitoh.

till

becoming pure

jd.nitoh before being horn (MS.).

The gen. form occurs only in dependence on isvar^ able, the object
being in the ace. (sometimes by attraction in the gen.), and the predicate in the nom.
e.g. sd. isvard, artim artoh he can fall into misfortune
(TS.) ta isvara ydjamanam himsitoh these tivo can injure the sacrificer
e. g. t&to diksitah pamano
Occasionally isvard, is omitted
(MS.).
;

bhdvitoh

man

hence the initiated

4.

(can) become scabby (^B,).

Locative Infinitive.

The only loc. forms to which a genuine inf. use (cp. 167, 4)
can be attributed are the few in sani. These supplement
sentence or depend on a
particular word in it, and (like the form in dhyai) express
an intention or exhortation (with the ellipse of a A^erb in

the general statement of

the

1., 2.,

or

asmabhyam
paths

the

e. g. vi nah pathas cltana yastave,

visva asas tarisani do ye oj^en up for us the

3. pers.)

to sacrifice,

{for us to

that tve

=)

may

conquer

nayistha u no

all regions

nah parsany

uesani, parsistha
37")
ati dvisah. the best guides to guide us, the best leaders to lead
(iv.

us through our foes

(x. 126'^)

indraya^upastrnisani
uith power for your In
grnisani (do ye)

ti

extol

tad va ukthasya barhana^

song of praise (I will) spread out

Ira

(vi.

44*^]

priyam vo atithim

your dear guest

bhumir abhi prabhtisani

(x. 132').

this

{let)

Earth

(vi.

assist

15''j

the

ijanam
sacrificer

TENSES AND MOODS

21-2]

839

TENSES AND MOODS.

212. Two or more roots of cognate meaning sometimes
supplement each other in such a way as to be used for
different tenses of what is practically one verb.
Such are
:

as

the

fut.

bhu means
to

the pres., impf and perf. are formed by

and aor, by bhu alone. In its proper sense

as and bhti he

1.

as

he,

it

lo

hccome (originally

of both being

perf.

to gron-),

has the same sense as the

used

but unless oi^posed

latter,

promiscuously.

the pres. and

contrast

The

when the pres. is opposed to the aor. e. g.

yamo va idam abhud yad vayam smah Yama has become
appears clearly

that which we are (TS.).

vipriisa

hrcame gravel (MS.).

2. dhav and sr run

and the

It also appears in the impf.

asarns tah sarkara

pres. sisarti

abhavan what

ya

were S])arks

RV. occur the plup. adadhavat

in B. the pres. dhavati, the impf.

in the

asarat, and the perf. sasara.

3. pas and drs see
the former appears in the pres. only,
the latter in the aor., fut., and perf. only khya see is used
:

in the

same tenses

as drs, but as opposed to the latter

means

disceni.
4.

bru and vac

stem only

speaJc

the former

the latter in the

is

used in the pres.

has also the

aor., fut., perf. (V.

pres. vivakti).
5.

fut.,

han and vadh

slaij:

the former has the pres., impf.,

perf. only, the latter the aor. only.

a. Ill B. a few additional pairs of roots supplement each other to

some extent. Such are ad and ghas ea(; aj and vi drive; i and ga
pra-yam and pr a- da, present sad and si fall.
(aor.) go
;

Present.
A. In V. a number of verbs form two or more present
stems, in which, however, no differences of meaning are
In B. this multiplicity is for the most part lost.
traceable.

z2

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

340

[212

The only type here showing any develoj^ment is that in ya.

which tends to have an intransitive sense. Such j)resent
stems are formed in B. from more than a dozen roots
that do not form it in the EV.
e.
g. tapyati f/roics hot
;

(RV. tapati).

As

1.

in other languages, the present is used to indicate

an action that

is

taking place

when

makes

the speaker

his

statement.

In the RV. the simple

2.

mannei-

sayanam

ati

new statement

in a vivid

purutra vrtro asayad vyastah

e. g.

sometimes employed of

pres. is

past actions in narration to add a

yantl^apah Vrtra

over Itlm as he thus

lies the

lay scattered in

waters flow

(i.

amuya

many places

32'^).

This use does not seem to occur in B.

pura formerly is used with the pres. to indicate an

which has extended through the past down to the
present e, g. kva tani nau sakhya babhuvuh, sacavahe
yad avrkam pura cit ichere has that friendshij) of ns two
a.

action

gone,

inasmuch as we have hithciio associated inoffensively

sa ha^agnir uvaca^atha yan mam pura pra-

(vii. 88'^)

thamam

.so

'now that

sacrifice as the

first

yajatha kva^aham bhavani^iti

you have hitherto honoured me at the
where shall I he? (SB.).

Agni said:

a. In B. pvira is also iised without reference to the actual present

from the speaker's point of view, to express a previous stage in typical
conditions e. g. ahota va esd pura bhavati yada^evS^^enam pravrnit6 'tha hota he is frevionsly a non-Hoir ; as soon as he chooses him, then
he is a Hotr {SB.)
dnaddhaj^^iva va asya^atah pura janam bhavati
;

previously his origin

I),

sma pura

is

as

if

were uncertain (SB.).

with the pres. ind. expresses that something

used to happen in the past

e. g. samhotram sma pura
nari samanaip. va^ava gachati formerly the ivoman used to
;

go down

to the

common

sacrifice or the

assembly

(x.

86^").

with ha sma pura e. g. n ha

snaa vai pura^_^agnir dparasuvrknam dahati forinerhj Agni iised not to
hum iphat ivas not cut off icilh the axe (TS.}. Here, however, the pura ts
a.

Tlie

same usage

is

common

in B.

PRESENT

212-213]

341

much more usually umitted, ha sma alone expressing the same sense,
especially often with the pres. perf. aha ; e.g. etfid dha sma va aha
naradfih (MS.) loith regard to this Ndrada used to saij. (The AB. uses the
and the impf. with ha sma in the same sense.) The particles ha
sma, which originally only accompanied it, have thus acquired, when
used alone, the sense which is inherent in pura only.
perf.

c.

The

the subj.

too

ivill

pres. ind. is also

e. g.

ski//

prasyetam

ati^iti Indra
shall go

round

sometimes used for the

fut.

or

aham

api hanmi^iti ha^uvaca he said :

lihn (SB.); indras ea rusamas ca^amsam

yataro nau purvo bhumim paryeti sa jayand liukima proposed a ivager whichever of us
:

the earth first shall ivin (PB.).

Past Tenses.
213. Each of the past tenses (except the pluperfect) has
meaning of its own, though occasional examples
of aor. and perf. forms occur that are almost indistinguishable in sense from the impf.

a distinctive

A. The perfect characteristically expresses the condition

by the sul^ject as the result of a preceding action.

attained

If that action (often a repeated or continuous one) is continued into the present so as to include the latter, it may be

by the present if it is regarded as concluded

It can express
before the present, by the present perfect.
both these senses when accompanied by the adverbs pura
translated

formerly and

nunam now

rsinam pasprdhre
in past times

and (do

tlie

pura nunam ca stutaya

e. g.

praises of the seers have vied together

so)

now

(vi.

34^)

vayam pura nunam bubhujmahe

sasvad dhi va utibhir

we have constantly enjoyed

your aids and (do so) now (viii. 67') the same sense appears
with the adverb satra always e. g. tiibhyam brahmani
gira indra tubhyam satra dadhire
jusasva to thee
;

prayers,

Indra,

to thee

songs have always been offered (and

accept them kindly

a particle this double sense
still are):

(iii.

is

51").

But even without

not infrequently apparent

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

342

na soma indram asuto mamada

(vii.

[213

26') tinpressed

Soma

has not (in the past) intoxicated Indra (and does not now)

na bhoja mamrur na nyartham iyur

vyathante ha bhojah the liberal have not

died (and die not),

do not now)
indra
107*)

they have not fallen into calamity (and

are not injured

and waver

not

(x.

(and

still fills) the

Thus

two worlds

the liberal

paprau rodasi mahitva Indra has

na risyanti na

ubhe a

with his greatness filed

(iii. 54^'^).

number

of perfects (since their action includes

the present) can be translated by the present, as is indicated
by their often occurring by the side of actual present forms.
a.

Such

perfects

are

formed from verbs meaning

he pleased, sad, or afraid

have, possess

encompass

know

to

stand, sit, lie; rest upon, hold fast;

;

siirpass

prosper

hecome

show

oneself;
kva^idanim suryali kas ciketa irhere is now
the sun
who knows ? (i. 35") yan na indro jnjiise yac ca
vasti what Indra likes from tis and what he desires (iv. 22')
ka isate, tujyate, ko bibhaya who flees (and) speeds, icho is
afraid ? (i. 84^') na methete na tasthatuh they (night and
morning) clash not and stand not still (i. 113''') vane-vane
e. g.

sisriye takvavir iva on every tree he

yatha^iyam prthivi
dadhara

te

manah

holds thy spirit

(x.

60')

sits liJce

a hird

(x. Ol-^)

mahi dadhara^iman vanaspatin eva

as this great earth holds these trees, so he
na te purve na^aparaso na viryam
;

nutanah kas cana^apa

not earlier men, not future men, no

of the present {has attained =) equals thy heroism (v. 42'^')
pra hi ririksa ojasa divo antebhyas pari, na tva vivyaca
raja indra parthivam tJtoit extendest beyond the ends of

man

hexven with thy might, the terrestrial space does not contain thee
indrena susuve nrbhir yds te sunoti through

(viii. SS'')

Indra he who presses (Soma) for thee invspers in men (vii. 32"^)
sed u raja ksayati carsaninam, aran na nemih pari ta
;

babhuva

he rules as king over men, he encompasses the worlds

(ta) as the felly the spolics

vi

(i.

32'-5)

bhasi, ut te soeir bhanavo

bhadra dadrksa urviya

dyam apaptan brilliant

PERFECT

213]

tilou appearest,
to

up

heaven

thou shlnest afar, thy

343
beams, have shot

light, tliy

(vi. 64^).

Other perfects, which sum up past action but exclude

may be transhxted by the present peifect e. g.
yat sim agas cakrma tat sii mrlatu whatever sin we have
t'ommittecl, let him forgive that (i. 179"'); ya vrtraha paravati
Sana nava ca cueyuv^, ta samsatsu pra vocata wliat old
and new deeds the Vrtra-slager has set going in the distance,
6.

the present,

those proclaim in the assemblies (viii. 45^'')

uvasa^usa uchac

mi Dawn has flushed (in the pasi) and she shall flush now
kim aga asa varuna jy^stham, yat stotaram
48"^)
jighamsasi sakhayam a-hat has that chief sin been (in my
ca

(i.

past

life)

thou desirest

iisasam martyasah
tliose

to

slay the praiser, thy friend'^

iyiis te

ye plirvataram apasyan vyuchantim

6 [=8, uj te yanti ye aparisu pasyan
mortals have gone who saw flushing the earlier dawn ;

86^)

(vii.

that

those are

coming tvho shall

The

see her in the

future

113^').

(i.

has been
completed in the recent past, when it can be translated by
the pres. perf.
putrah
e.g. a no yatam divas pari
c.

perf. often expresses a single action that

kanvasya vam iha susava somyam madhu come to us from

heaven: the son of Kaava has here pressed for you the Soma
mead (viii. 8"^). This use of the perf. comes very near that
of the aor.
The distinction seems to be this in the above
passage the perfect means come because the Soma has been
:

pressed,

i.

e.

is

ready for you

The

d.

perf. is

the aor. would

mean come

Soma

has just been pressed for you.

not infrequently used of a single action izi

because of the fact that the

the remoter past, when it cannot be translated by the perf.

It occurs thus beside the impf. of narration, when
pres.
the story is interrupted by a reflexion which often expresses
the result of the action previously related.
Thus in the
of
the
Vitra
the
story
ajayo ga ajayah
fight
poet says
:

sura
win

somam

the kine,

avasrjah. sartave sapta

thou didst win the Soma,

sindhun
hero,

thou didst

thou didst

let

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

844

loose the seven streams to flow

(i.

32'^^);-

[213

he then adds indras

ca yad. yuyudhate ahis ca^uta^aparibhyo maghava vi

jigye ivhen Indra and the serpent fought, the bounteous god

This use
conquered (remained conqueror) /or the future.
of the perf. is hardly distinguishable from the impf.
n.

la B. the

jjerf. incl.

appears in three different uses

in a present sense based on the pres. perf., chiefly in forms that

have a strengthened reduplicative vowel and tlius seem to have an
1.

intensive meaning. It is the jires. perf. tliat includes the present,

expressing that an action takes place in the jiresent as a result of its
repetition in the past e. g. dadhara (Jie has constantly held and iioio)
;

y^t sayam juhoti ratryai tena dadhara if he offers in the

Other perfects of this
evening, he thereby Itolds {A(jni) for the night (MS.).
kind are: didaya shines; upa dodrava rashes at; yoyava wards off';
lelaya quivers bibhaya (beside bibhaya) fea7-s (while the periphrastic
bibhayam cakara has always a preterite sense). Besides these verbs
veda knows and aha says always have a jjresent sense.
Several other perfects with ordinary reduplication often have the
Ijresent sense: anase (has ohfained =) has (MS., TS.)
pariyaya (/ms
holds

e. g.

acquired

=)

possesses (TS.);

{has encompassed

=)

babhuva

contains;

{has become =) is (MS.); vivya3a

dadrsi {has been seen =) appears (Avhile

dadarsa always has a past sense); also the perfect of grab and pra-ap
ye hi pasavo loma jagrhiis te medham prapuh the cattle which have hair

have also fat (MS.).

2. in a preterite sense, expressing that an action once occui-red in
the past (but not in the narrative sense of the impf.). This use most
often appears in the form uvaca, which may be translated by once
said or has said
e. g. etena va upakeru raradha
rdhnoti y^ et^na
:

yajate by

this sacrifice

he loho sacrifices ivith it

Upakeru once prospered
It often occurs in the AB. at the conclusion of a story
prospers (MS.).
related in the impf., in the phrase tad etad rsih pasyann abhyanuvaca seeing this a seer has uttered icith reference to it (the following verse).
;

somewhat different connexion with the narrative impf. ap}3ears in

the following example etam ha vaiyajnasenas citim vidam cakara
tfi.ya vdi sa pasiin avarunddha this method of piling Yajnasena once in:

:
by means of it he acquired cattle (TS.).
This perfect is found contrasting what is past with the present and future in the following
successive sentences yad va asyam kim carcanti y^d anrciir ; yad

tented

evd kim ca vaca^anrcur ydd dto 'dhi^_^arcitarah

offer

on

it

(the earth) or have offered

lohatever prayers they

ivhatever prayers they have offered ivith

the voice or will offer in future

(TS.).
3. in an historical
sense, equivalent to

that of the impf. in narrative,

PEKFECT.

213]

IMPERFECT.

AORIST

345

AB. (vi-viii) and the SB. (i-v xi, xii, xiv),

used elsewhere in B. ^MS., TS., K.,TB., PB., AB. i-v
Thus iii the former nvhoa, said and devas ca^dsuras
ca pasprdhire ihe gods and theAsuras icere in conflict, in the latter abravit

in certain jmrts of the

while the impf.

SB. \i-x, xiii;.

is

and aspardhanta would be used.

There

are, of course, exceptions in

both groups.

B. The imperfect is the past tense of narration, never

having any relation to the present as the perf. and the aor.
have e. g. ahann ahim
pra vaksana abhinat parva.

tanam Jie sleiv the serpent; lie pierced the hellies of the mountains
na vai tvam tad akaror yad aham abravam you
(i. 32\)
did not do luhat I said (SB.).
The impf. has also to do duty
;

for the pluperfect, as in the relative clause of the preceding

example, which
C.

is

The aorist

I had told you,

an action has occurred

equivalent to what

iud. expresses that

the past with reference to the present.

It neither
describes nor indicates duration, but simply states a fact.
It may nearly always be translated by the English present

in

perfect.

The

(iv. 52')
let

her

immediate past

aor. usually expresses the

divo adarsi duhita

;

yasmad

drive aivay tvith her light the evil

(Dawn)

have feared

prati

e. g.

daughter of heaven has appeared

duvapnyad abhaisma^^^apa tad uchatvi
the

dream

that ive

(viii. 47^^).

In B. three uses of the aor. ind. may be distinguished 1. it

expresses what has occurred in the speaker's experience, very
commonly in tlie statement made by the witness of an action e. g.
tato ha gandharvah sd.m iidire
jyok va iydm urvasi manusyesv
a.

avatsit

tlten the

Gandharvas spoke

together

this

Urvasi has dwelt long

As compared with the impf. it never

vai devebhya ud akramat; te deva abruvan
men {SB.).
akramit

narrates
:

e.g.

among
yajno

yajno vai na ud

went away from the gods ; the gods then said : the sacrifice has gone axvaij from us (AB.) ; tam yd.d dprchant sabravid:
adya^
am^ta^_^lti lohen they askt'd her, she said : he has died to-day (MS.) ; t^m
the sacrifice

kasmai tvam ahausir iti they asked him : to tohom have you
(MS.); t^m deva abruvan: mahan va ayam abhiid yo
vrtrdm dvadhid iti the gods said of him he has shotvu. himself great who has
slain Vrtra (TS.)
t6 ha^ucur agndye
tistha^iti tatas tasthav, agnaye
va asthad iti tam agnav a,juha,vnh they said : stand still for Agni ; then
aprchan

sacrificed?

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

346
it

stood still; thinking

it

has stood

still

for Agni,

iheij

[213-214

sacrificed

it

in

Agni

(SB.).
2. it is employed by the author with regard to what from his own
point of view has either jvist happened or has occurred in the more
remote past e. g. sa b^ndhur sunasiryasya y^m purvam avocama
;

this

is

the

import of the Sund-strya ohlalion which

-we

have eTplained above

puro va etan deva akrata yat purolasams tat purolasanam

purolasatvam because the gods have made these cakes their castles, the cakes
The adverb pura is not infrequently used witli
are so called (AB.).
these aorists
e. g. na va etasya brahmanah pu^a^_^annam aksau
(SB,)

Brahmins have never

3.

it

expresses

hitherto eaten his food (TS.).

what

results

from a

ritual act or is antecedent to

it

putrasya nama grhnati prajani eva^anu s^m atanit he gives his

son a name : he has thus extended his race (MS.); et^dvai trtiyani yajnam
e. g.

apad y^c chandamsi^apnoti thereby he has obtained the third sacrifice when
yad dhf^asya^amedhyam abhiit tad dhi^_^
asya^et^d avadhiinoti wliat has been impure in it, that in it he shakes off in

he obtains the metres (TS.)

this

way (SB.).

The pluperfect,

as an augmented perfect, is equivalent

Greek tense in form only. It cannot
be distinguished in syntactical use from the impf. in some
examples and from the aor. in others; e.g. atra samudra

D.

to the corresponding

suryam ajabhartana then ye hroiight the sun

ud u sya devah savita yayama
hUIden in the sea (x. 72')
hiranyayim amatim yam asisret that god Savitr now has
a

gulham

raised

up

the golden sheen

which he has sj^read out

(vii.

38').

Future.

214. A.

1.

The simple

future

is

in comparatively rare

use in V., being formed from only fifteen roots in the RV.
and from rather more than twenty others in the AV. This

employment is accounted for by its sense being

partly expressed by the subjunctive and to some extent by
It means that, according to the opinion,
the present.
limited

expectation, intention, hope or fear of the speaker, an action

The
is to take place in the near or the remote future.

sphere of the future includes that of the will, the specific

meaning of the subjunctive, but the stress is here laid on

FUTURE

214]

347

futurity rather than the purpose

tlie

vibhaktis

e. g.

atha^atah pasoi'

tasya vibhagam vaksyamah next (comes) the

the
of
(sacrificial) animal
(now) we ivill {shall) state

division

division (AB.).

its

Examples from the EV. are stavisyami tvam ahSm I shall praise
kfm svid vaksyami kim ii nu manisye ivhat 2>ray shall
(i. 44"j
I say, ivhat shall I now think ? (vi. 9*')
yady eva karisydtha sakd,m
devair yajiiiyaso bhavisyatha if ye icill do so, you will be partakers of the
na tvavara indra kas cana na jato na
sacrifice ivith the gods (i. 1G1-)
:

iJiee

janisyate no

o?ie

equal

Indra, has been born or will be born.

to thee,

simple future is frequently used after verbs of speaking,

knowing, thinking, hoping, fearing, wliicli are sometimes also to be
supplied; e.g. so 'bravid idd,m mdyi viryam, tat te prfi dasyanii,^^
iti he said: hej-e is heroism in
me, that I will give thee i^TS.); te ha^ucuh
B.

Ill

2.

tlie

kena
with

rajiia,

whom

kena^_,dnikena yotsyama

as leader

tee fight ?

sliall

know

in regard to that he should

cakre

iti

(SB.)

they said

tatra

rain (SB.)

it loill

with ichom as king,

vidyad
;

varsisyati^iti

indro ha va iksam

mahad va

will arise

patsyatii^iti

ito 'bhvam janisyate Indra reflected : a great abuse

sarva devata asamsanta
abhi prati
(SB.)
the gods hoped : lie will begin luith me (AB.) yadi bibhiyad

this

from

all

mam

dusearma bhavisyami^iti if he should fear, 'I shall suffer from skin disease'
divam a roksyama iti the Asuras
(TS.;; asura va istaka acinvata
:

(thinking) ice shall scale heaven (MS.).

a. After an impv., the fut. is often used with dtha; e.g. patim
me piinar yuvanam kurutam atha vam vaksyami (SB.) inake
husband young again then I shcdl tell you {two).
built

the bricks

up

nu
my

After the impv. of a-i or pra-i the 1. pers. fut. is equivalent to

an exhortation e. g. pra^ita, tad esyamah. come, ive ivill go there (SB.).
7. With the negative nd, the 2. and even the 3. pers. may have the
value of a j^rohibition e. g. devan raksamsi
ajighamsan na yaks/3.

yadhva
fice

the

iti the

Eaksases wished

to

slay

tlie

gods (saying)

you shall not sacri-

(SB.); tan visve deva anonudyanta neha pasyanti neha^_,iti all

not here
gods drove them back (saying)
tliey shcdl not drink here,
:

(AB.).

B. The periphrastic future though not occurring in V.,

is

frequent

in B.

something will take place at a definite point

It is therefore often accompanied by such
words as pratar early in the morning, svas to-morroiv (but never by adya
The point of time, however, need not he expressed by an
to-day).
adverb it may be defined by a clause. Examples are samvatsaratamim ratrim a gachatat, tan ma ekam ratrim ante sayitase, jata u
It expresses that
of time in tlic future.

te 'y^ip tdrhi

putro bhavita come for

(lie

night of this day year, then you

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

348

[214-215

wUl lie beside me for one night, then too this son of thine wiU be born (SB.)
y^di
y^di pura samsthanad diryeta^adya varsisyati^_^iti bruyad
s^msthite svo vrasta^iti bruyat if it (the vessel) should be broken before
;

completion (of the sacrifice) he shoidd say : it will rain to-day ; if it has
been completed, he should saij : it will rain to-morrow (MS.)
yarhi vava vo
tlie

maya^artho bhavita, tarhy eva vo 'ham punar agantasmi

ichen you loill

have need of me, then (on that particular occasion) I will come back to yoa

(AB.).
a. Sometimes this form is used to express not that an action will
take place at a definite time, but that it will take place with certainty
'dhi bhavita
e.g. sa^evfi^iyam adya^ipi pratistha, sa^u eva^api^ato

this is the found-ado n to-day,

and

A.

it

will also

(certainly) be so in future (SB.^.

Imperative.

215. The only pure impv. forms are those of the 2. 3. sing,
and 3. pL, represented by bhava and bhavatat, bhavasva
bhavatu bhavantu, bhavantam. The forms later regarded
as imperatives of the l.pers., bhavani, bhavava, bhavama
;

are subjunctives (cp. 131):

while the

2.

3,

du. and 2. pi.

bhavatam, bhavatam, bhavetham, bhavetam

bhavadhvaia,
a.

are injunctives (cp. 122 a

The impv. does not

express

bhavata,

a).

commands

only, but also

a desire in the widest sense, such as a wish, a request,

e. g. devam iha^a vaha bring lather the
advice, a direction
;

gods

14'-)

(i.

imani^asya
vrkse

ahelamano bodhi

he not angrg (i. 24")

sirsani chinddhi cut off these heads of his (MS.)
;

navam

prati badhnisva tie the ship to the tree (SB.)

asnotu sustutih. may the hymn of praise reach you
hanta na eko vettu come, let one of us find
17^)

pra

vam

tivo

(i.

out (SB.).
h.

The sphere

may, however,

of the ordinary impv. is the present ; it

be used for the later of two opposed

still

e. g. varam vrnisva^atha me punar dehi choose

a boon and then give it me bade (TS.). The form in tad,
however, has a tendency in V. to express the more remote

actions

e. g.
and in B. does so distinctly
iha^eva ma
tisthantam abhyehi^iti bruhi, tarn tii na agatam pratipra

future,

IMPERATIVE

215]

brutat

her

tell

come

me

io

as

349

stand here

As

when
form

come, you shall (then) tell it us (SB.).

active, the subj. takes its place in middle verbs

vrnisva

= do thou choose H (now)

choose

then (SB.).

it

this

she has
is

only
thus tarn

as opposed to tarn vrnasai

genuine impv. seems never to be found in negative senthus it never appears in V. witli the prohibitive particle ma
which is used with injunctive forms only, and in B. almost excluIt is employed in positive principal clauses
sively with the aor. in.j.).
n, Tlie

tences

only e. g. v{ no dhehi ydtha jivama so dispose us that ice may live (SB.).
A subordinate clause with ind,, subj., or (very rarely) opt. may precede or follow
e. g. ys tvam dutam saparySti, tfisya sma pravita
bhava be the promoter of him ivlio adores thee as a messenger (i. 12^); sam
vidusa naya yo
anusasati hring us together with one who knows, who
;

may

give

us directions

(vi. .54^)

idm me haryata v^co y^sya tSrema

tdrasa sat&m liimah gladly accept this word of mine by the force of ichich we
In such periods the form with
n-otdd pass a hundred nmiters (v. 54^^).
tad would regularly be used in B.
0.

of 2. sing, forms

The RV. has a niimber

made with

si

added

directly to the root, which are clearly used imperatively, as is indicated

by their being generally accompanied by imperatives (sometimes by
subjunctives and imperatives) e.g. a dev^bhir yahi ydksi ca come
;

with the gods and sacrifice

(i.

14').

and passages borrowed from

it)

These forms are confined to the RV.

except satsi (AV.

vi.

110^);

and they

are restricted to positive principal sentences.

B.

Injunctive.

mood corresponds

to an unaugmented past
and 2. pi. as represented by
mid. bhavetham,
act, bhavatam, bhavatam, bhavata
to be regarded
came
later
which
bhavadhvam,
bhavetam,

Formally

this

tense (including the

2.

3.

du.

as

imperatives).

Its

use

constitutes

one

of

the

chief

Vedic grammar and interpretation, because it

cannot always be distinguished from the subjunctive (e. g.
gamat might be the subj. of a-gan or the inj. of a-gamat)
or from an unaugmented indicative (e. g. carah might be =
difficulties of

a-carah).
Judged by its uses the inj. probably represents
a very primitive verbal form which originally expressed an

action irrespective of tense or mood, the context showing

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

350

The

which was meant.

addition of the

[215

augment gave the

sense of a past tense to one set of forms, while the rest

The general
finally became incorporated with the impv.

meaning

combining the senses

of the inj. expresses a desire,

of the subj., the opt.,

and the impv.

As compared with

the

subj., the inj. is essentially appropriate in principal clauses,

though it sometimes appears in subordinate clauses introduced by relatives or the relative conjunctions yad and
yada.

The
which

a.

of

person expresses an intention the execution

the power of the speaker e. g. indrasya

first

lies in

vlryani pra vocam now I will proclaim the heroic deeds of

Indra (i. 32^). Sometimes, however, the execution depends
on another e. g. agnim hinvantu no dhiyas t6na jesma
nil

dhanam-dhanam

let

our prayers urge Agni

through him we

shall assuredhj ivin booty after booty (x. 156^).

h.
The second person is used exhortatively, very often
beside an impv.
e. g. suga nah supatha krnu ; pusann
iha kratum vidah. do thou malce fair paths for us easy to
;

traverse

vnsdom adya no deva

dusvapnyam suva to-day,
god,

here procure us

Pamn,

savih saubhagam, para

procure us good fortune;

parallel opt.

is

much

drive

evil

an-ay

common

less

dream

e. g.

82^).

(v.

et6na gatum

vido nah; a no vavrtyah. suvitaya by reason of that find

; mayst thou bring us to tvelfare (i. 173'^').

for us thejMth
c.

The

third person also

beside an impv.

jusata no girah
accept our songs

e. g.

let

used exhortatively, very often

is

s^mam vetu

him come

(vii.

15''')

it

vasatkrtim

agnir

Vasat call; may Agni

often accompanied by a

to this
is

a^idam barhir yajamanasya sida

atha ca bhud uktham indraya sastam. seat thyself upon this
straw of the sacrificer ; and then may the hymn be sung to Indra
It appears less frequently with the subj.
e. g(iii. 53'^).
2.

sing.

impv.

e. g.

brahmani srnava ima no, atha te yajnas tanve vayo

dhat mayst thou listen to these our prayers, and then let the
lipa

INJUNCTIVE

215]

sacrifice hesiow vir/our

on

351

flu/self (vi. 40*).

parallel opt. is

pari no heti rudrasya vrjyah, pari

tvesasya durmatir mahi gat would that the dart of liudra
not

common

2XISS its

us

e. g.

Jet the

hij,

great malevolence of the impetuous one avoid

33^*).

(ii.

d. The injunctive is very frequently used alone (unaccompanied by any other modal form) in an impv. sense e. g.
ima havya jusanta nah let them accept these oblations of
;

the preceding verse has the regular impv.

jusantarn yujyam payah let them accept the suitable milk.
In negative sentences the inj. is the only mood (with the
ours

(vi.

52^^)

exception of the single opt. form bhujema) with which

the prohibitive particle ma can be used e. g. ma na indra
;

para vrnak do not, Indra, abandon us (viii. 97') visvayan

ma na a gan let not any sivelling thing come near us (vii. 50^)
ma tantus chedi let not the thread be cut (ii. 28''). The aor.
form is commoner than the impf. form in the EV., but its
;

relative

predominance has greatly increased in the AV.

The

like
inj. not infrequently expresses a future sense
the subj. (215 C) in two types of sentences
e. g. ko no mahya
1. in positive interrogative sentences
e.

aditaye piinar dat who

(i.

The

24^).

will,

tis

give

subj. itself is here

bach

to

great Aditi?

sometimes found beside

it

kada martam aradhasani pada ksumpam iva sphurat,

kada nah susravad girah when will he spurn the niggardly
e.g.

mortal
songs

like
(i.

a mushroom

ivith his

foot

e.
2. in negative sentences with na
druho raksatha, n6m agham nasat
;

protect
a.

from harm, him misfortune

In B. the use of the

disappeared.

devan avat

The
let

it

clauses, especially
Jest ii be

On

when

will he hear

our

84^).

ivill

g.

yam

not reach

aditya abhi
Adityas, ye

ivhom,

(viii. 47^).

in positive sentences has almost entirely

however, preserves several examples e. g.
also sometimes in subordinate
the gods

inj.

SB.,
refresh

with n6d;

e.g.

n6d idarn babirdha

yajiSad bhfivat

outside the sacrifice.

the other hand the

inj. is

very frequent in negative sentences,

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

352
which

[2ir,

constantly appears with ma, in the vast majority of cases

Only a few examples of the impf. form oocur ma
vadhadhvam slay not {TS.) ma bibhita /ear not (AB.); kilbisam nu
ma yatayan Jet them not reprove it as a fault (AB.) and from the perfect
in

it

in the aor. form.

ma

susupthah

sleep not

(SB.).

C.

Subjunctive.

The meaning

of the subj. is best brought out by contrastFrom this it appears that

ing its use with that of the opt.
the fundamental sense of the subj. is will, while that of the
opt, is either

wish or possibility

mood being

(this

therefore

This distinction

alternatively called optative or potential).

appears clearly from the fact that in the first person in
independent sentences one group of verbs in the RV. employs

the subj. exclusively or almost exclusively, while another

employs the opt., because in the former the execution is

dependent on the will of the speaker, while in the latter

With the subj.
it is not in his control, but is only possible.
are thus used the verbs han strike, kr make, su press, bru

With

speak.

the opt. on the- other hand appear

ji

conquer,

tr overcome, sah conquer as and nas obtain, vid acquire, is

a-vrt attract (to the
he master of; sac he associated with
;

sak

mad

vdih. prosper
pas lire
as he (with predicates such as prosperoiis, &c.); also
certain sacrificial verbs idh kindle (with the co-operation of

sacrifice)

he ahle

he liappy

to see;

the god), das worship, vac and vad s^^eaJx (effectively), vidh
ohtain the favour of [a god), hti call {= hring
serve, sap please

hither).
1.

The meanings expressed by

the different persons of the

subj. are the following:

The first person declares the will of the speaker e. g.
svastaye vayum lipa bravamahai /or weZ/are we mil' invoke
;

nti
Vmju (v. 51^2)_ It is often accompanied by the particles
and hanta e. g. pra nii voca sut6su vam I will noiv praise
also
you two at the lihations (v. 69^). The 1. du. and pi. may
with
action
express an exhortation to another to share an
;

SUBJUNCTIVE

215]

353

the speaker, an impv. usually then preceding; e.g. daksime adha vrtrani janghanava bhuri stand on

nato bhava

my

right

then

we two

ivill

many

slay

Joes

(x. 83'')

or an

exhortation to aid the speaker e. g. j6sama^indra tvaya

yuja we will conquer {= let us conqner) with thee as our ally
;

(viii.

63").

In B. the usage
(TS.)

the same; e.g.

is

hanta^iman bhisayai

vdram vrnai

ivell,Iivill terri/ij tlitm

abruvan soraam rajanam hanama^_^iti

king Soma [TS.).

the

/ will choose a hoon

(AB.)

gods said

to

vayum deva

Vdiju

let

us slay

The second person is used exhortatively hano vrtram,

It often
jaya apah slay Vrtra, ivin the waters (i. 80^).
srnuhi
e. g. agne
follows a 2. pers. impv.
dev^bhyo
:

bravasi/zcflr,
it

follows a

OAgni, do thou say

3. pers.

impv.

pibatho asm6 madhuni

to the

e. g.

gods

{i.

139");

vam vahantu

sometimes
.

asvah,

do ye
;
When an
drink the honied draughts beside its (vii. 67').
expectation is indicated, the subj. is almost equivalent to
let

the horses hring

you two

achanta me, chadayatha ca nunam ye have

pleased me and ye shall please me now (i. 165^^).
a future

e. g.

In B. the 2. pers. subj. is used only wlien the speaker makes a condition or gives a direction i-elating to the (not immediate) future ; e.g.
atho etam varam avrnita maya^eva pracim disam pra janatha>_^iti
so he made this condition: through me ije shall (in lutiirej discover the eastern
:

quarter (AB.).

The third person

is

gods, though the subject

e.g.

as a rule used in exhortations to the

is

not always the

imam nah srnavad dhavam

he

name
shall

of the deity;
hear this our

no h61o varunasya vrjyah uriim

(viii. 43--); pari
na indrah krnavad u lokam may the ivrath of Varuna

eall

avoid us:

Indra

shall procure

devam a^iha vaksati he shall

te sumna no asnavan thy
(viii. 90").

The

us tvide space

(vii.

bring the gods hitJier

(i.

84^); sa
1^)

pra

good intentions shall reach

subj. sentence

is

tis

sometimes connected with

sa u sravat I praise Agni

:
a preceding one e.g. agnim ile
he shall hear (viii. 43-*). The subj. here often approaches the
:

1811)

A a

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

354

[2i5

nunam

future in sense, being then usually opposed with

nu to another verb lid u sya devah savita

nunam dev^bhyo
arisen

he

now

trill

ratnam

vi hi dhati

nii

hount//

Dawn

she will flush notv (i, 48^).

e.g. a gha ta gachan uttara yugani, yatra

van ajami
who

when

only

jamayah krna-

later generations tvhen those

are akin will do what hefits not Jcinsinen

In B. the

(x.

10^").

not found in the hortative sense, appearing

3. pers. subj. is

a condition, promise, or curse is expressed e.g. vrnisva,^^

so 'bravin maddevatya^_^eva samid asad iti they said
;

abruvan

ity

come those

there shall

(/od Savitr has just

to the gods (ii. 38')

has flushed (in the past) and
Sometimes there is no opposition

distribute

uvasa^usa uchac ca

or

asthat

me (MS.); sa^abravid
vram vrnai khatat parabhavisyanti mauye tSto ma para bhiivam
iti
pura te samvatsarad api rohad ity abravit she said I 7dU make a
condition; I think I shall perish in consequence of digging ; lei me not perish.
choose a boon

he replied

the fuel shall he sacred to

He

repAied

icith

bolt

made

The

(TB.).

a ceremony

a year for you,

before the lapse of

(TS.) ; devas tan asapan

gods cursed them (the trees)

e. g.

3.

srnad

it

(the

wound)

shall heal

svena vah kiskuna vajrena vrscan

up

iti Uie

they shall destroy you with your oivn handle,

pers. subj. often also expresses the purpose of
:

saram&yani barhfr bhavati (MS.)

iti

of reeds with the intention

it

shall destroy

Mm

2.

The syntactical employment

a.

It appears in principal sentences

the litter is

(the adversary).

of the subj. is twofold.

:

with interrogatives, either the pronoun or the adverbs

katha how ? kada ivhen, and kuvid e. g. kim u. nu vah
a.

krnavama

what, pray, shall

ive

do for you?

mah6 rudriyaya bravama how

Budra-host?

(v.

41");

(ii.

katha

29'');

shall tvc speak to the great

kada nah susravad girah when

ivill

he hear our prayers? (i. 84-).

kuvid nearly always accentuates the verb (which is thus ti'eated as in a subordinate
clause)
the

e. g.

Aivins

asvina

2>fC'^se

sii

well,

rse stuhi
seer:

kuvit te sravato

shall

they

havam

hear thy

call?

(viii. 26^0).

In B.

first

interrogative
/3.

persons only seem to be met with in this use, and an

word

is

sometimes lacking.

In negative sentences with na not

e. g.

na

ta nasanti

SUBJUNCTIVE

215]

na dabhati taskarah
them

they rierish not ;

355

no thief shall {can) harm

(vi. 28'').

In B.

ni, is

sma ma

e. g. nd,^at6 'parah kis cand. sahd siriomcards no otie shall be immortal tcilh his hodij

similarly used

rena^amfto 'sat from

Once only, in
(SB.).

noio

command,

is

the suhj. used with

ma akamam
:

ni padyasai you shall not approach me (in future) against

my

tcill

(SB.).

In dependent clauses the subj. is used either with a

negative or with relatives (pronominal or adverbial)
a. in a final sense with the negative particle n^d that not,
The antecedent clause has either an ind. or an impv.
lest.
aham varuna bibhyad ay am, n6d eva ma
hotrad
e.g.
1).

Varuna,
yunajann atra devah fearing the office of Hotr,
I locnt away, lest the gods should appoint me thereto (x. 51*);
vy ueha duhitar divo ma cirarn taniitha apah, n6t tva
stenam yatha ripiim tapati siiro arcisa shine forth, daughof the shy, delay not long thy irorh, lest the sun scorch
Wee a hostile thief, with his ray (v. 79^).

ter

In B.

tlie

antecedent clause has either an ind. or an opt.

yan na pr^ksate, n^n

not look

is

lest

ma rudro hinasad

Rudra should

injure

iti noiu

him (SB.)

nin ma idSm rudrfyam dato hiudsad

belongs

tdn

ni,

Stha

dadbhih khaded,

iti he should not cheic

to

e. g.

(the reason) why he does

Rudra injure his teeth (SB.).

the antecedent clause has also been noted in che AB.
teeth, lest this that

thee,

it

loith his

A gerundive

in

/3.

in relative clauses

such a clause normally precedes if it contains a suppodetermining the sense of the princij^al clause the
latter usually has an impv., not infrequently a subj., seldom
1.

sition

an

inj.

dhatam

or ind.;

e.g.

yo nah prtanyad, apa tam-tam id

him do ye two slay (i. 132'');

na
tarn
asnavat n^ho shall serve
dasan
amho
yas tiibhyam
reach
no
distress
can
him
(ii.
23'^); iita nunam yad inthee,
ivhoever shall combat us,

driyam karisya indra paumsyam, adya nakis tad a

minat and what heroic, manly deed thou, Indra, shall now do,
that

let

belittle to-day (iv. 30^^)

yasmai tvam sukrte
u lokam agne krnavah syonam, sa rayim

no one

jataveda,

A a 2

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

356

[215

tlic righteous man for whom thou shalt procure,

Jdtavedas, a comfortahk place, he obtains riches for

nasate svasti

Agni
welfare

(v.

4").

In B. the use of the subj. in rehitivo chiuses is similar but here

the subj. is by fiir the commonest form in the principal clause, the
imp%'. and ind. (sometimes omitted) being rare; e.g. tany abruvan, v^ram vrnamahai yad asuran jayama, td.n uah saha^asad iti
ihey said, ive ivill make a condition : what we shall win from the Asuras that
shall be ours in common (TS.) yd.s tva k&s ca^upayat, tiisnim evd^asva
whoever shall come towards ijou, sit still yad vindasai td.t te 'gnihotram
kurmah what thou shalt find, that loe (shall make thy fire-ohlation (MS.) ;
tad vdi sd.mrddham yam devah sadhdve karmane jusantai that, indeed,
In
(is) excellent, if the gods shall he pleased ioilh liimfor a good luork (SB.).
the last example the relative clause exceptionally follows.
;

2. The relative clause follows if it expresses a final or

consequential sense {in order that, so that) arising from the
principal clause the latter usually has an impv., but sometimes an inj., opt., or ind.; e.g. sam pusan vidusa naya,
;

yo anjasa^anusasati, ya eva^idam iti bravat associate us,

Pamn, ivith a wise (guide) ivlio shall at once direct us and
who
gat,

liere it is (vi. 54')

asmabhyam tad radha a
sam yat stotrbhya apaye bhavati let that wealth come

shall saij

to thy praisers and thy kinsman

tad
vacah
prathamam masiya y^na^asuadya
(ii. 38^');
ram abhi deva asama I woidcl to-day think of that as the

for us tvhich shall he a blessing

first (point)

Asuras

(x.

of
53*)

my
;

speech whereby

gods shall overcome

ive

imam bibharmi

sukrtarn te

y^na^arujasi maghavaii chapharujah I bring

well -fashioned ivcapon {icith irhich

=)

the

ankusam
to

thee this

in order that thou shouldst

break the hoof-breakers (x. 44'-').

The subj. of these relative
clauses sometimes comes to have a purely future sense
;

e. g.

6 (==a^u) te yanti ye aparisu

who in future days

will see her

(i.

pasyan

those are coming

113").

In B. this type of relative clause with the subj. is rare e. g. yd,n ma

dhindvat tan me kuruta procure for me that wliich shall refresh me (SB.)
h4iita vayam tat srjamahai yad asmaa anvasad iti come, let us create
what shall corns after us (SB.).
;

SUBJUNCTIVE

215]

with relative conjunctions

y.

357

determinative, means when

the dependent clause then precedes, while the principal clause
usually contains an impv., but sometimes an inj., a subj,,
or an
the conjunction means in order that, so that, if the

yad, which,

1.

opt.

if

the clause

is

dependent clause is final or consequential the dependent

clause then follows, while the principal clause contains an
;

impv., a subj., or an ind.,

yad

if

when

liso

e. g.

yad adya bhanuna

dvarav

vi

rnavo divah, pra no yachatad avrkam

Baivn, ivhen todoors
the
thou
shalt
^^'''^*
beam
of heaven, then
open
dan

bestow on us safe shelter

(i.

48^^)

yad adya bhagam vibhaj-

nrbhya, uso devo no atra savita damuna anagaso

vocati suryaya irhen thou shalt to-day distribute a share to men,
asi

Baivn, god Savitr, the house friend, shall declare us guiltless

to

Sfrnja

(i.

123^);

yad va agah purusata karama,

tasyam apt bhuma

ivhen

tve shall

ma

vas

commit a sin against you

manner of men, let us not have a part m that (shaft) of

yours (vii. 57*) yad didyavah prtanasu prakrilan, tasya
after the

vam syama

sanitara aj^h. ivhen shafts

shall

play in

battles,

of

that conflict of yours tve ivould be the tvinners (iv. 41").

yad

if

in order that, or so that

yavistha, sardho
gods,

sa a

vaha devatatim

yad adya divyam yajasi

youngest, that thou mayst

so bring hither the

adore the heavenly host to-day

tav6d u tah sukirtayo 'sann uta prasastayah,

indra
mrlayasi nah these laudations and praises shall
yad
(iii.

19'*);

be thine, that thou,

Indra, mayst be merciful

to

us

(viii.

45^^);

na papaso manamahe, yad in nv indrarn sakhayam krnavamahai we deem not ourselves wicked, [so] that tve can notv
make Indra our friend (viii. 61"). In such posterior clauses
the yad sometimes comes to express the content of the
e, g. na te sakha sakhyam vasty etat,
principal clause
salaksma yad visurupa bhavati (x. 10-) thy friend tvishes
not this friendship, that she who is of the same type (= akin)
;

shall

become of a different hind

{=

not akin).

This yad

may

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

358

[215

once be translated by till kiyaty a yat samaya bhavati

ya vyusiir yas ea nunam vyuchan in tchat time loill it he
that {= how long will it be till) she shall he hetween those that
:

have shone forth and those that shall noiv shine forth?

(i.

113^-').

subj.
rarely found in tlicse clauses with yad e.g. tdt
prapnuhi ydt te prano vatam apipddyatai attain this that xjour breath

In B.

is

tlie

shall transfer itself to the ivind (SB.).

2.

yatra tvhen seems not to occur in V. with the

when

it

is a

genuine conjunction (that

equivalent to the

In

B.,

when

is,

subj.
is

it

not

the relative pronoun).

found with the subj. in the sense of

loc. of

however,

it is

a future perfect e. g. yatra hota chandasah

tat pratiprasthata prataranuvakam upa
;

param

gachat,

kurutat when

have got to the end of the metre, then let the Pratiprasthafr start a Prdtaranuvdka (SB.).
3. yatha with the subj. as an antecedent clause means as,
as a
the
clause containing an impv. or a subj.
the

Hotr

shall

principal
posterior clause

it

has the sense of

in order that, so that,

the

principal clause containing either a demand (generally impv.,

occasionally inj., opt., or gerundive) or a statement (ind.
pres. or aor., act. or pass.).

Examples

of the first use are

yatha hotar manuso devatata yajasi, eva no adya yaksi

devan as thou
so do thou

of man,
This use does

priest, worship at the divine service

canst,

fonts to-day

tvorship the gods (vi. 4').

not seem to occur in B. Examples of the second use are grhan

:

you may he
ahna
idanim
upavacyo
mistress of the house (x. 85-)
this
nrbhih, sr^stham no atra dravinam yatha dadhat at
hesfow
here
he
that
men
may
time of day he is to he addressed hy
on us the hest tvealth (iv. 5A'); mahatam a vrnimah6 'vo,

gacha grhapatni yatha^asah

go to the house that

;

in
yatha vasu nasamahai ice implore the favour of the great
idam
apayi
riches
patram
order that ice may ohtain
(x. 36")
matsad yatha saumanasaya devam this hotel has heen drunk
;

up,

in

order that

(vi. 44:''^).

The

it

may

exhilarate

the

god

negative in such clauses is

na

to

henevolence

or nu.

SUBJUNCTIVE

215]

359

tlio priiici[)al clause here contains

n. Ill B. thii usage is similar:
either an iiupv. or a subj. ; e.g. tatha me kuru yathaj^^ahani imam
senam jayaiii so arrange for me that I maij cvnqacr this armij (AB.); sam-

dham nii sam dadhavahai ydtha tvam evd, pravisaniti now

make an agreement in order that I may enter into thee (MS.).

us two

let

4. yada when, with the subj. (pres. or aor.), which then

has the vahie of a fut. perf., is regularly antecedent, the

principal clause containing an imjiv. or a subj.; e.g. srtani

yada karasi jatavedo, atha^im enam pari dattat

pitr-

him to
asunitim
the fathers (x. 16-)
etam, atha
yada gachaty
devanam vasanir bhavati tvheii he shall have gone to that

bhyah

icJien

thou shall have

made him

clone,

then deliver

spirit ivorld,

then he shall become subject

the

to

gods

(x. 16^).

yada kada ca whenever seems to give the verb the same

sense yada kada ea sunavama somam, agnis tva dut6
dhanvaty acha whenever ive shall have pressed Soma, Agni
:

shall hasten to thee as

a messenger
;

53*).

(iii.

The usage of B. is the same e. g.

karsdm khatvS, tdsyam m.a bibharasi
a.

yada tdm ativardha, atha

sd,

uilien

(vessel), then having dug a trench you shall keep

me

shall have outgroivn that

in

it

(SB.).

yadi ?/with the subj. generally precedes the principal

clause, which contains an impv., a subj., (rarely) an opt., or
an ind. (sometimes to be supplied); e.g. yadi stomam
mama sravad, asmakam indram indavo mandantu if he
shall hear my praise, let these drops of ours gladden Indra
5.

(viii.

!'')

yajama devan yadi saknavama

ive will

adore the

tvam haryah
(i. 27'^); yadi prati
gods,
apa ena jayema if thou shall accept (it) gladly, we might thereby
win the waters (v. 2''); indra ha varuna dh^stha, yadi
somaih
madayaite Indra and Vani/ia (are) the most
if we

shall be able

liberal, if they shtdl delight in the

a.

etdt

In B. the suhj. with yd,di

punar bravatas, tvdm

is

Soma

very rare

offerings (iv.

an example

is

4P).
:

yidi

brCitat if they two shall say this again

tva,_,

to thee,

do

thou say (SB.).

yad so long as occurs twice with the subj. in the RV.

ananukrtyam apunas cakara yat siiryamasa mitha ucca6.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

360

[215-216

ratah lie has once for all done ivliat is inimitahle so long as sun
and moon alternately shall rise (x. 68^") vasistham ha varursim cakara
no
yan nu dyavas tatanan, yad usasah.
Variina has made Vasidha a seer, so long as the days shall
In B. yad dops not
extend, so long as the dairns (vii. 88*).
;

occur.

sometimes used in an antecedent clause

suborif, which is then treated as a
dinate conjunction and accentuates the verb; e.g. indras
ca mrlayati no, na nah pascad agharn nasat if Indra
8.

Tlie subj. is

with ca in the sense of

shall he gracious to us,

no

evil shall

afterwards touch us {ii. 41").

D. Optative or Potential.

216. 1. The meaning of the opt. is predominantly a

wish, which is modified according to the person of the verb.
The first person, which is very common, expresses the
wish of the speaker, generally addressed to the gods e. g.
Dawn, I would obtain
asyara yasasam rayim
that glorious wealth (i. 92*^) vidhema te stomaih we would
;

lisas tarn,

worship thee ivith songs ofpraise {il9^); vayam

rayinam we would he lords of riches (iv. 50'').

syama patayo

first person is similar, but its occurrence,

nature of the subject-matter, is far less common; e.g.
vise ca ksatraya <;a sarnddam kuryam / should like to create enmity lehceen
people and nobility (MS.).

In B. the sense of the

owing

to the

The second person

is

much

less

common.

It is

almost

exclusively used to express a wish or a request addressed to

a o^od e. g. a no mitravaruna hotraya vavrtyah jyraij hring
M'ttra and Varitna to our oblation (vi. 11^); tya me havam a
;

pray, do ye two come to my call (vi. 50^*') pra

do ye, pray, extend fully our
allotted span that we may live (viii. IS-^).
might here
often rather expect the impv., which indeed frequently

jagmyatam
six

so,

na ayur jivase tiretana

We

either precedes or follows the

raksohatyaya

2. opt.

e.g.

dhisva vajram

sasahistha abhi sprdhah take

the holt

for

OPTATIVE

2i(>]

slaughter of the demons

the

mai/st

thou overcome our foes

imam me samidham vaneh; ima u

45"^);

(vi.

361

girah pray accept

this

my

fuel

sxi

srudhi

graciously hear these songs

6^).

(ii.

In B. the second i>crson

used almost exclusively in wishes e. g.

you. he numerous he,f.ide this sacrificer

is

asmin y^jamane bahvyah syata may

(SB.).

The third person

is

used in the three different senses of

or supposition; e.g. midhvam asmakara

babhuyat may he be bountiful to us (i. 27^) imam amrtam
diitam krnvita martyah this immortal the mortal should make

wish,

precept,

his

messenger {\m. 23'^);

who

the friend

bestoivs

prnann apir aprnantam abhi syat

woidd prevail over him who does not

bestow (x.ll7').
In the sense of a sujiposition (regarded as
or
possible
probable) the opt. seldom appears independently,
but often in an apodosis.
In B.

it is

uh syat

common

inatj

lie

he

in all three senses

hereft of cattle

(TS.)

expressing a wish e. g. apasa general precept (where a

;

gerundive may also be used) e. g. ksdume vdsana agnim a dadhiyatam, te adhvaryave deye wearing linen garments the tiro should lay tlie
;

:
the two (garments) should be given to the Adhvari/u (MS.); a supposition
in the apodosis of periods, but reldom independently
e.g. nd^asya
tam ratrim apo grhan prd hareyur apo v&i santih. samdyeyur eva

fire

(MS.)
is

tliey

extinction

in this

example must be supplied.

The syntactical employment

2.

fold

should not during that night bring ivafer into his house ; for water
The protasis
:
they would thus extinguish (if they did this).

of the optative is two-

appears in principal sentences (for the most part retaining the sense of a wish) with interrogatives, either the
pronoun or the adverbs katha hotv ? kada when 1 and kuvid
a.

it

kasmai devaya havisa vidhema what god would ive

ivorship tviih oblation! (x. 121'); kada na indra raya a
e. g.

Indra, bestow riches upon us ?

dasasyeh when wouldst thou,
(vii. 37^); kuvit tutujyat sataye dhiyab (i. 143'') would he
not stimulate our prayers for gain
bility is

(cp. p.

sometimes thus repudiated;

354, 2

e.g.

a).

A possi-

kad dha nunam.

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

362
rta

vadanto anrtam rapema

[216

liow could ice noiv

righteous ivords utter unrigJifeousness

In B. the optative with interrogatives

? (x.

may

spcaMng

10'*).

express a wisli, precept,

kathdm nu pr4
purvam samset
Yama (^AB.); kim mama

e. g.
possibility, or the repudiation of a suggestion
jayeya hoiv sJwxdd I propagate myself? (SB.) yamim eva
:

should first pronounce Ihefonnula addressed to

t^tah syat (SB.) ichat would then accrue to me {i{ 1 did
driyeta 2cho loould pay attention to that ? (SB.).
}te

The

a.

potential

The sense is either

na risyema kada cana may we

nu. eid never.

e. g.

kd,3 tdd.

appears in negative sentences with

opt.

sometimes

tliis)'?

na

not,

optative or
never suffer

vayor amrtam vi dasyet may

na tad devo na marVdyu
(vi. 37^)
tyas tuturyad yani pravrddho vrsabhas cakara no god,
harm

(vi. 54^);

nil cin nii

never fail

the nectar of

no mortal could surpass what the migldy hull has done (viii. 96^).
The only opt. form with which the prohibitive ma occurs is

bhujema:

ma

suffer hefore

you for a sin done hy others

In B. the

opt. is

va 6no anyakrtam bhujema may

asniyat

this is his

tow: he should not speak

na^_^enam dadhikr,va can^

himself could not make him pure (MS.).
not eat meat

not

used with nd to express either a general prohibition

e. g.
tdsya^etdd vrat&m nd^dnrtam vaden, n

or a potential sense

mams^m

toe

(vi. 51").

the

nnfndh, he should

pavayam kriyat Badhikrdvan

h. In dependent clauses the opt. is used with relatives

(pronominal or adverbial)
a. such a clause having a determining sense, usually
e. g. suryam yo
This type is very rare in V.
precedes.
:

brahma
Jcnotv

vidyat, sa id

Surya

vadhuyam

deserves the bridal

arhati a priest ivho shoidd

garment

(x. 85^^).

In B., on the other hand, clauses of this type, which always imply
a supposition, are very common.
The oj)t. here expresses a precept
or a potential sense
the principal clause most olten has the opt.
also e. g. y^m dvisyat, tdm dhyayet whotn he may hate, he should think
;

o/(TS.)

yo va imd.m

ald,bheta,

miieyeta^asmat papmanah 7te

icho were

In the principal
clause a gerundive occasionally appears or the verb to be has to be

to offer litis

(bull), ivould be delivered

from

this sin {'IS.).

OPTATIVE

21CJ

363

supplied; e.g. yo rastrad dpabhutah syat tdsmai hotavya this should

he offered for him irho should be deprived of his kingdom (TS.) yasya^agnayo
;

gramyena^agnina samdahyeran, ka tatra prayascittih

should he uniled with a

village

fa

c,

the relative clause,

/?.

sense

{in order that,

what expiation
if

there''

(is")

if

any

one'' s

fires

(AB.).

has a final or consequential

it

so that) follows.

The

contains an impv., a subj., or an opt.

j^rincipal clause
e.g.

revatir

nah

sadhamada indre santu yabhir madema (i. 30")

beside Indra he rich {by which that we may rejoice (in them)
dhasatho rayim y^na samatsu sahisimahi bestow wealth on
us {by which ) that we may be victorious in battles (viii. 40');
yaya^ati visva durita tarema sutarmanam adhi navam
ruhema we would ascend the rescuing ship {by which that ice
let

ourfeasts
;

may

cross over all misfortunes (viii. 42^).

In B.

final reLitivo clauses

with the optative are

with relative conjunctions

y.

rare.

in the antecedent clause of pres. conditional

as unfulperiods, the condition being generally regarded
1.

jadif:

filled.

The apodosis normally contains

(though isolated
e. g.

examples of the impv.,

a potential

inj.,

and

opt.

ind. occur);

yad agne syam aham tvam, tvam va gha sya aham,

Agni, were thou, and thou

be
would
fulfilled (viii. 44^3); occasionally
I, thy prayers
e. g. yac chuthe fulfilment of the condition is expected

syxis te satya

iha^asisah if I,

wert

sruya imam havam durmarsam

no antamah
forget

it,

if thou shouldst

cakriya uta, bhaver apir

hear this call and shouldst not

thou wouldst be our most intimate friend

The temporal sense

only once in the RV.

of when
(iii.

with the

opt.

(viii. 45^^).

seems to occur

33").

In B. (as in V.) yd,d z/with the opt. is very common in the protasis,
Avhen the fulfilment of the condition is not expected (yadi with opt.
being used when it is expected); e.g. sa ydd bhidyeta^artim arched

yajamanah if it should be broken, the sacrificer ivouldfall into calamity (TS,).

The infinitive with isvar^ may take the place of the opt. in the prin'varstoh if he
cipal clause; e.g. yad etara samsed Isvarah parjanyo
icere to repeat this {formula), Parjamja might not rain (AB.). Sometimes the

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

364

[216

verb (opt. of as be) is omitted in the apodosis. The opt. witli ydd here
rarely expresses a purely hypothetical case (that is, without the implication that the condition will not be fulfilled); e.g. y^n mam
pravis6h kfm ma bhuiijyah (TS.) if you were to enter me,ofivhat use would
you he to me? (afterwards he does enter Indra).

yad with

a.

very rare

e.g.

yan nunam asyam

in order that

patha
the

the opt. in the final sense of in order that

path of Kitra

I might

is

gatim, mitrasyayayam
I iroukl go on

noir obtain a refuge,

(v. 64-').

In B. ydd with the opt in the sense of Ihat is frequently used

after dva kalpate is suitable, ut sahate endures, ichdti desires, veda
e. g. nd. hi tdd
knows, yukto bhavati is intent, in posterior clauses
avakfilpate
bruyat/or it is nof ftting that he should say (SB.) nd va
ahdm iddm ut sahe yd.d vo hota syam (SB.) I cannot endure this that
should he { = I cannot be) your Hotr; tad dhy eva brahmanena^_^estdvyam
y&d brahraavarcasi syat/o?- that is to he aimed at by the Brahmin, thai he
should he pious (SB.); svayd.m va etdsmai deva yukta bhavanti ydt
/3.

yM

sadhu vddeyuh for

what

is right

the gods themselves are intent

(SB.); kd.s tdd veda

for ivho knoics (this that

=)

on

this, that they

should say

ydd vrataprado vratam upotsiiicet

whether he who Jiands the fast-milk (should add

adds (fresh milk) to it (SB.).

In the SB. isvard also is used with this
construction (in other Brahmanas with the infinitive only) to express
a possible consequence (though the yad is nearly always omitted)
pdran asmad yajno 'bhCid iti^isvard ha yat tdtha^eva syat the
;

e. g.

has turned away from him : it is possible that this should he so (SB.).
Otherwise the phrase regularly appears in the form of iti^^isvaro ha
tatha eva syat, perhaps because isvar^ came to be regarded as a kind
of adverb = possibly this might be so.

sacrifice

7. In B. yad introducing a clause with the opt. accompanied by na

and ending with iti, dependent on a verb of fearing or similar expression, is equivalent to lest
e.g. deva ha vai bibhay,m cakrur yd,d vd,i
nah
asuraraksasani,_^imd.m graham na hanyur iti the gods feared
lest the Asuras and Raksases should destroy this draught
(SB.); indro ha va
iksam cakre yd.n ma tdn nd^abhibhdved iti Indra pondered (fearing)
;

lest that

2.

AV.

should vanquish him (SB.).

yadi ?ywith the opt. does not occur in the RV. and
all, and only once in the SV.

at

In B.

which

is

is very common, expressing a condition the fulfilment of

assvimed (while yd.d with opt. implies non-fulfilment of the

it

condition).

has

The

clause with yddi generally precedes.

The apodosis

OPTATIVE

216]
ustuilly the opt.,
is fulfilled

a.

condition

365

which expresses a precept applicable when the

e. g. yMi pura samsthanad diryeta^adyd var-

the completion (of

sisyati^iti briiyat / (the vessel) should be hruken before
the sacrifice), he should say : it will rain to-day (MS.); yadi na saknuyat
so 'gnaye purolasam nir vapet if he should not be able to do so, he should

The pret-ept occasionally has a potential

to Arjni (AB.).
yddy 6katayisu dvayisu va^_^avagd,ched, aparodhuka enam
syuh (MS.) if he (the banished man) should return after one or two libations,
a cuke

offer

sense

e. g.

might exclude him from the sovereignty (but not if he returns at the
conclusion of the ceremony).
e. g. isvaro ha yady apy anyo
isvar^ with the infinitive
/3.

tJieij

yajeta^atha hotaram yaso

'rtoh. eve7i if another should sacrifice (instead

of him), if is possible tliatfame should come to the Ilolr (AB.).

sa yadi na jayeta, raksoghnyo gayatryo 'niicyah
7. a gerundive
;

if

it

(the

fire) should not be kindled, the

demon-slaying verses are

to

be repeated

(AB.).
S.
e. g.

(sometimes omitted if it is a form of as he);

tasmad yadi yajna rkta artih syad brahmana eva ni

an

ind.

vedayante

therefore if at the sacrifice there should he

with regard

to

any failure
inform the Brahman priest (AB.);
yadi no yajna rkta artih syat, ka prayascittih if we shall
have an accident at the sacrifice in regard to a Be verse, what (is)
the

a Be

verse, they

penance? (AB.).

e.

Tlie difference

between yad and yadi with the

opt.

yan no jayeu
ima
dhavema,
yady
abhyupa
jayema^ima abhyupa
yur

may

be iUustrated by the following example

if they were to conquer us (not to be assumed),

refuge with these (friends), hut (/"(as is to be
assumed) tve should conqiier, wc could again hetake ourselves to

vartemahi^iti
ive shoidcl take

them (MS.).
in V. only in the sense of in order that,
the principal clause, which contains an
following
generally
3.

yatha used

imp v., an inj., or an ind. e. g. apa visvam amitran nudasva,

yatha tava sarman madema drive aicay all foes that tve may
rejoice in thy protection (x. 131'); tvaya yatha grtsamadaso
liparam abhi syiih, sliribhyo grnat6 tad vayo dhah
;

hestow on the patrons

tJiee tlie

and

Gftsamadas may

the singer this hlessing that through

he superior to their ncighhours

(ii.

4^);

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

366

a daivya vrnimah6 'vamsi, yatha

gah

ive

[2I6

bhavema milhuse anamay he sinless before the

implore the divine aids that tve

gracious one

(vii. 97^).

In B. yatha with the opt. has two uses n. in antecedent clauses

in the sense of as, as if, with a correhative meaning so in the principal
clause, which contains an opt., an ind., or no verli
e.g. yatha,^eva
chinna naur bandhanat plaveta,,_^evain eva te plaveran just as a boat
cut from its fastening would drift, so theij icould drift (AB.); sd yatha nadydi pardm parapdsyed evd.m svd,sya^_^ayusah pardm pdra cakhyau as
if he were looking across to the farther bank of a river, so he saw the end of his
dtho ydtha bruyad eti.n me gopaya^fti tadfg ev^
life from afar (SB.)
a.

say : guard this for me (TS.).

the sense of how, so that e. g. upa janita
ydtha^iyd,m piinar agachet do ye find out how she could come back (SB.)
t^t then

it

(is) so as if he

were

to

0. in posterior clauses in

tat

tdtha^evahotavy^m yathaj^^agnim vyaveyat

that it may divide the fire (MS.).

hence

it is to

be so

poured

yatra and yada are not found with the opt. in V., and
yarhi does not occur at all in the RV. and AV.
4.

In B. all three conjunctions are used hypothetically with the opt. in

the sense of when.
besides having the sense of when, in, case, often seems to
moment when, as soon as the jjrincipal clause has the opt. or
e. g. marutdm sapt^kapalam nir vaped ydtra vid rajanam

a. yd,tra,

mean

at the

the ind.

jijyaset he shoidd offer a cake on, seven dishes to the Marids in case the people
were to oppress the king (MS.) sa ydtra prastuyat tdd etani japet as soon
as he (the priest) begins to sing, one should mutter the following prayers (SB.).
;

seems often to imply that the action of the opt.

it seems always to be followed by ^tha
then
e. g. si, yada samgramd.m jyed dtha^aindragn^m nir vapet as
soon as he may have won a battle, he should sacrifice to Indra and Agni (MS.).
7. ydrhi when is generally followed by the coi-relative td.rhi then in
the principal clause, which usually has the opt. also
e. g. ydrhi
prajah ksvidham nigdcheyus, tdrhi navaratr^na Y&^Qta when his people
should be exposed to hunger, then he shmdd sacrifice with the rite of nine nights
as soon as

yada

0.

should be assumed to be past

(TS.).

5.

ced

if is used with the ind. only in the

EV. and only

once with the opt. in the AV.

In B.
change)

yam

it is
;

e. g.

used with the

etdrn ced

if you, were to

0])t.

like y^di (with

any^sma anubrSyas,

communicate

tit

is to

another,

which

it

may

inter-

tata evi, te siras chind-

I would cufoffyourfiead(SB.).

'

PRECATIVE, CONDITIONAL

217-218]

367

Precative.

217. This form, which occurs in the RV. and AV. in

principal clauses only, and never interrogatively, expresses
a prayer or wish addressed to the gods almost exclusively, as
e. g. yo no
is to be expected from the nature of those texts
;

dv6sty adharah sas padista mai/ he who

hates us fall to the

When a negative is used it is na e. g.

53'-').
na mrdhyah. mai/ my good fortune
me
sakhy6
agne
bhago

ground

(iii.

Agni, not relax in {thy) friendship

54^').

(iii.

In B. the precative is almost restricted to verse or prose formulas

quoted and to paraphrases of such formulas e. g. bhuyasinam uttaram sdmam kriyasam iti gdvam ld,ksma kuryat tcould that I may do
mark of the coivs (MS.).
(this) to more next year : so saying he should make the
;

hima

satd.m
sion

'

iti

ity evdi^etdd aha by the expresvoidd that I may live a hundred years

satam varsani jivyasam

a hundred winters

'

he says this

'

'

however, sometimes found in genuine prose narrative

(SB.).
also
e. g. sa
ha vak prajapatim uvaea
^havyavad evd^ah&rn
tubhyam bhiiyasam Vac said to Prajdpati : I irould like not to be a conductor of sacrifice for thee (SB.); td.m asapad
dhiya-dhiya tva vadhyaIt

is,

suh him (Agni)

cursed (saying)

loish tliey

may

kill thee

n-ith

repeated

deliberation (TS.).

Conditional.

218. In V. the conditional occurs only once (RV. ii. 30^) in

a somewhat obscure passage, though the form abharisyat
used after a past tense appears to mean ivould take away
(in place of the future which would have been used after
a present tense).
In B. the conditional

once found in a simple interrogative senkd,smad dhy d,bhesyat thereupon his fear departed: for of what should he have been afraid"? (SB.).
Otherwise it occurs only in compound sentences:
1. usually in both protasis and apodosis of conditional sentences,
expressing what might have happened in the past, but did not happen
The conditional clause is
because the condition was not fulfilled.

tence

tata

is

evd^asya bhayam viyaya

generally introduced by yad, rareh' by yddi (216) e. g. sd, yd dha^d.pi

mukhad ^drosyan, na ha^^evd. prayascittir abhavisyat if it (Soma) had
also flowed out of his mouth, there would not have been apenance (SB.); yd evdm
;

n^vaksyo murdha
dgamisyah

te

vy apatisyat

if

you had not spoken thus, your

asunder (SB.); padau te 'mlasyatam ydi

your feet would have withered, if you had not come (SB.).

head irould have

split

ha

nd^_^

OUTLINES OF SYNTAX

368
a.

When yad

is

[218

used with the opt. the supposed condition

refers to the present (216).

2. in relative clauses dependent on negative principal
clauses containing a past tense (always of vid fin(i) e. g. sa
;

tad eva na^avindat prajapatir yad ahosyat Frajfq^ufi

found nothing that he could sacrifice (MS.); sa vai tarn
na^avindad yasmai tarn daksinam anesyat he found no
one

to

3.

whom

he should give this sacrificial fee (TB.).

in a clause introduced

by yad that dependent on a

e. g. ciram tau mene yad

negative (or equivalent) clause

vasah paryadhasyata he thought

it too long (that =) till he

should put on the garment (SB.) =: he thought the time was not
short enough till he should put on the garment.

APPENDIX

LIST OF VERBS.
The order of the parts of the verb, wlien nil are give)), is Present
Indicative (pk.), Subjunctive (sb.), Injunctive (in j.) .^Optative (op.),
Perfect
I)nperative (ipv.), Participle (pt.), Impei-fect (ipf.)
(pf.)jj
Future
Precative
Aorist
(ft.)]^'
(pRC.)f^
Pluperfect (ppf.)0
(ao-X?,
Past
Passive
Participle (rP.)T
Conditional (cc),
(ps.). Present, Aorist,
Gerundive (gdv.)[ Gerund (gd.); Infinitive (inf.).; Causative (cs.) T
:

5^^

Desiderative (ds.)T Intensive

(int.).

indicate the conjugational class of the verb ;

P. signifies that the verb is conjugated in the Pa)-asmaipada (active)
only, A. that it is co))jugated in the Atmanepada (middle) only.

Roman numerals

T))e

ipv. asnotu
pr. asnoti
sn. asnavat
V.
asnuvant. pf. anamsa and anasa anasma, anasa,
pt.
op. anasyam
anas6
sb. anasamahai
anasur
A. du. asathe,
pf. also asa, asatur, asiir
anasana

ams

attain,

A.

3.

s.

asta,

asyat, prc. 3.

op.

asata;

pi.

root

ao.

asate.

s.

asyas

pf. pt.

aj

I.

I.

drive,
;

ipv. 2.

pr. acati.

acyamana

ajeta
PT.

pr.

ipv.

ipf.

ajyamana.
:

pt.

aca

s.

acyanta

ajati, ajate

ajatu

anj anoint, VII.

aksana.

ao.

pp.

sb.

ajant.

acasva.

akna

ps.

pr. anakti,

ankt6

ajani, ajasi, ajati

ipf.

ps.

ajat.

sb.

anajat

aktva

(B.),

op.

ajyate

ipf.

anjant,
angdhi), anaktu;
op.
ananja
anaj6, anajr6 ; sb. anaja
pt. ajyamana
ps. ajyate ;
PT. anajana.
1819

ipv. aiidhi

anjana.

pt.

pf.

acyate

gd. -acya.

(B.).

inf. -aje.

(=r

GD.

asta,
s: sb.

aksisur.

ac bend,
pt.

inj.

= asyas-t);

asata

pi.

aksat a aset. inf. astave.

aks mutilate, V. pr. ipv. aksnuhi,
is

PT.

-ajya

(B.).

B b

anjan.

anajyat
pp.

akta.

APPENDIX

870

ad eat, II.: pr. admi, atsi, atti; adanti; sb. adat, pi.
adan (AV.) op. adyat ipv. addhi, attu attam, attam
px. adant, adana. ipf. adat. ft. atsyati.
atta, adantu
pp. anna n.food.
gd. attvaya (B.).
inf. attum, attave,
;

attos (B.).

an

aniti

cs.

am

ft.

AO.

PF.

pt.
ps.

amamaria.

amyate.

pr. arcati

arcan

anrciir

pp. anita(B.).

(B.).

sb.

ipv.

anrc6,

pr.

cs.

P.

I.

avatu
avisat

avistam.

as

rcyate

pr. avati; sb.

pt.

Ao. root: op.

-uta.

pt. arcant.

2.

inf.

avit

avistana.

GD. -avya.

3.

ipv.

avat.

arhant.

pt.

inj.

avat;

ipf.

avyas; prc.

inj.

avant.

avat;

pf.

op.

aviddhi, avistu

ft.

pt.

pf.

avet;
ava.

avitha,

avyas (==avyas-t);

avisyati
inf. avitave.

is: avit;

avistam,

avisyant.

pp.

op.
pr. asnati, asnanti
asnit6, asnate
eat, IX.
asniyat ipv. asana pt. asnant. ipf. asnam, asnat
ao. is
asisam, asis, asit
asnan, asnan. pf. asa.
ft. asisyati (B.).
pp. asita.
inj. asit.
ps. asyate
ds.
GD. asitva (B.), -asya (B.).
cs.
asayati (B.).
:

arcan.

ipf.

rcyamana.

pt.

cs.

favour,

SB.

anaanta

inj.

pf. ainir6 (B.).

amayati.
arcama, arcan

ipv.

ame

amit.

area, arcat

arcatu

ps.

I.

ipf.

arcayati.
arh deserve, I.
pr. arhati ; sb. arhat
anrhiir (TS.) ; arhir6. inf. arhase.
a,\

-anya(B.).

cs.

anayati.
pr. amisi, amiti

rcase.

anisyati

(B.).

amisva
amamat.

arc praise, I.
INJ. arcat

anitum

injure, II.

IPV.

(B.).

I.

ipv.

Ao. anisur.
INF.

adayati

anati (AV.)
VI.: anati (AV.); II.:
anihi
pf. ana.
ipf. anit.
pt. anant.

P.:

breathe,

asisisati (B.).
1.

as he, 11. P.: pr. asmi, asi, asti; sthas, stas

smas,
stha and sthana, santi sb. asani, asasi and asas, asati
and asat
asathas
inj. 3. pi.
asama, asatha, asan
;

san

op.

syam, syas, syat; syatam, syatam

syama,

syata and syatana, syiir ipv. edhi, astu stam, stam

pt. sant.
ipf. asam, asis, as ( = as-t) and
sta, santu
;

LIST OF VERBS

371

asaastam, astam asau. pp. asa, asitha, asa

asur.
asatur
asima,
thur,
as throw, IV. pb. asyami, asyati and asyate asyamasi,
pt. asyant.
asyanti ipv. asya and asyatat, asyatu
ft. asisyati.
ps. asyate
pp. asta.
iPF. asyat.
pf. asa.
asit

2.

GD. -asya.
inf. astave, astavai (B.).
ah saij, P. pf, aha, attha (B.) ahatur (B.)
:

ap obtain, V.: pr, apnoti.

apana. ao. red.: apipan

pf.

(B.)

FT. apsyati, -te (B.)

.(AV.).
gd.
AO. api (B.) ; pp. apta.

aptum

(B.).

apayati

cs.

ahiir.

apa, apitha; apir6

;

a: apat;

apta
aptva

ps. apyate
-apya (B.).

(B.).
(B.),

ds.

(B.).

pt.

ap6yam

op.

(B.)

ipsati, ipsate (B.)

ds. of cs. apipayiset (B.).

AO. aipsit (B.)
as sit, II. A. : pr. aste ; asathe, asate ; asmahe,

inf.
;

opt. asita

SB.

asate

PT.

asana and asina.

ipv.

ft.

(B.j.

inf.

imahe
ayan
;

6tu

sb.

pi.

pf.

asitum

cs.

(B.).

asate

adhvam
asam cakre

2.

pp. asita

asayati

(B.).

yanti A. 1. s. iye, du. 3. iyate, pi. 1.

aya, ayasi and ayas, ayati and ayat ayama,

PR. 6ti;

astam,

asisyati, -te (B.).

Ao. asista (B.).

GD. asitva (B.).

II.

3.

iff. pi. 3. asata.

(B,).

i (JO,

s.

yan

inj. pi. 3.

itam, itam

op.

iyam, iyat

and

ita

iyama
yantu

ipv. ihi,

pt.

eta, itana,
;
yant,
;
iyana. iff. ayam, ais, ait aitam, aitam ; aita, ayan ;
I.
ipv.
A. 3. pi. ayata.
ayati, ayate ; inj. ayanta
V. pr. inoti
invir6.
3. du. ayatam,
pi. ayantam.
;

IPF.
PF.

PT.

eta

ainos, ainot.

iy^tha and iyatha, iyaya; iyathur, iyatur; iyiir;

ft. esyati
ayisyati (B.);
iyivams. ppf. aiyes.
;

pp.

ita.

gd.

inf.

-itya.

itva,

6tum

(B.)

6tave, 6tavai, ityai, iyadhyai, ayase 6tos.

idh kindle, VII. A.: pr. inddh6 indhate and indhat6

(B.).

SB.

inadhate;

ipv.

indham (=inddham); indhvam

iff. aindha.
pt. indhana.
op. idhimahi ; pt.
idhir6.
idh6
ao. sb. idhat6
idhana. ps. idhyate ipv. idhyasva pt. idhyamana
-idhe.
From the nasalized
inf. -idham
pp. iddha.

(= inddhvam), indhatam;
PF.

Bb2

APPENDIX

372
inda, the

root,

ao.

is

is

formed in B.

ind. aindhista

OP. indhisiya.
go,

P.

I.

invatas.

1.

= V.

i-nu + a) pr, invasi, invati invathas,

invat
ipv. inva, invatu
invatam, invatam; pt. invant.
is desire, VI.
pr. ichati, -t3
sb. ichat
inj. ichas
ichanta op. ich6t iehdta ipv. icha, ichatu ichata

inv

sb.

ichasva, ichatam; pt. ichant; Ichamana.

PF.

(B.) iy6sa, isiir

FT.

(B.) esisyati, -te.

(B.)
is

2.

6stavai

isyati,

-te

INJ.

pr.

IX. pr. isnati

isanta op. is^ma

PT. isyant.

PR. is6

pp. ista.

(B.).

IV.

send,

aichat.

ao. (B.) aisit; aisfsur.

gd. -isya.
inf. dsturn

is6, isir6.

iff.

cs. isayati, -te

inf.

isnant

isyata ;
isnana. VI.
;

ipf. aisanta.

gd. -isya (B.).

pp. isita.

isiir; is6, isir6.

isyatam

ipv.

pt.

pf.

inf.

isathur,

isadhyai.

isayadhyai.

aiksetam

pr. ikse
pt. iksamana.
ipf. aiksata
A.
aiksanta. per. pf. iksam eakre (B.). ao. is:

aiksisi.

ft. iksisyati,

iks

sec,

I.

iksenya.
inkh swing

-te (B.).

gd. iksitva (B.).

inkhayati, -te

cs.

inkhayavahai

cs.

sb.

inkhaya

ipv.

iksita (B.).

pp.

gdv,

iksayati, -te.
pt.

inkhayatai (AV.),
pp.
inkhayant.

inkhita.

id

2^^'<^ise, II. A.
and ilamahe
;

PT. liana,

pr.

pf. il6 (3.

ir set in motion, II.

iratham

irayati;

irayatam

(3. pi.)

iratam

air-a-tam

ilate

or.

irate;
;

pt.

A. airata

ise

,sb.

irat

irana.
(3. pi.),

ipv.

irsva;

ipf.

pp.

airam,
irna (B.).

in.t.

irayasva

and (once) isate

PT. isana.

ilamahai

ipv. ilisva;

irayanta; ipv. iraya,

irayamahe;
irayadhvam pt. irayant. ipf.

sb.

inj. isata (3. s.)

sb.

ilita;

gdv. idya, il6nya.

pp. ilita.

pr. irte

itte

3.

airayata inf. irayadhyai. pp.

he master, II. A.: pr. 1. ise, 2. ikse and

airayat
is

ile,

s.).

irdhvam,

air-a-t, du. 2.
cs.

1.

ilata

in.j.

isathe;

irita.

isise,

3.

iste,

ismahe, isidhve, isate

op. isiya, isita

pt.

isana.

pf. isire

LIST or VERBS
is move,

6satu
1.

uks

I.

pr.

6sant

PT.

simnldc, VI.
pt.

uks6thara;

-te

isati,

iiksisyati (B.).

6sati

isamana.

373
6sas

inj.

ipv.

isatu,

pp. -isita.

pf. is6 (1. 3.).

pk. uksati, -te ipv. uksatam, uksata;

uksamana. ao. is: auksisam (B.). ft.
uksita.
pp.
gd.
ps. uksyate (B.)
:

-liksya.

uks (=vaks) groiv,

2.

auksat.

iPF.

ue

I.

and VI.

auksis.

ao. s

IV. P.

pr. pt.

uksamana.

uksayate.
uvocitha, uvoca

pf.

pr.

ucyasi.
pt. okivams, ucus.

he pleased,

liksant

uksita.

pp.

cs.

pp. ucita.
ucise, iic6
ipv.
xid wet, VII.: PR. unatti; undanti; undate (3. pi.),
=
VI.
P.:
pr.
undant.
pt.
undhi ( unddhi); unatta;
;

undati
utta

pp.

GD.

(B.).

ubj force, VI. P.

ubjita.

ubh

-udya

ps.

iidyate

ubjatam

(B.).

pr. ubjati

ipv. ubja,

ipf.

ubjant.

iidur.

pf.

2.

ubjatu

ubjas,

aubjat.

3.

pp.

GD. -ubjya (B.).

confine,

VII. P.:

VI. P.: IPV.

IPF.

pt.

ubjantu;

aunat.

ipf.

(B.).

unap

ipf.

umbhata

(2.

s.),

(2. pi.); ipf.

ubhnas, aiibhnat.

aumbhan

aumbhat.

(TS.).

IX. P.:

ubdha.

pp.

ipv. osa and 6satat,

inj. osas
us hum, I. P. pr. osati
ipf.
IX.
P.:
pt, usnant.
osant.
pt.
osatu; osatam;
usnan. pp. uvosa (B.). ao. ausit (B.). pp. usta (B.).
pr. uhati; ipv. uha. ipf. auhat; auhata,
1. uh remove, I.
auhau; A. auliata (3. s.). ao. auhit (B.) op. uhyat
inf.
gd. -u.hya and -iihya (B.).
pp. vidha (B.).
(B.).
:

-iihitavai (B.).
2.

iih consider,
PT.

I.

A.

pr. ohate.

ohana and ohana.

athe?).

II.

pf. ixh.6;

AO. auhista; pt.

A.
2.

pr.

ohate

ipv.

IPV.

A.

rnvatam

aritha, ara

rchatu;

iyarti

iyarta (2. pi.).

rnvir6: inj. rnos

ohasana.

r go, VI. P.: PR. rchati (-te, B.) ; sb. rchat;

pr. iyarmi, iyarsi,
rehantu. III. P.

V.

(3. pi.)

du. iihyathe {^iih-

ipv.

rnomi, rnoti ; rnvanti ; rnv6 ;

rnvan ; A. rnuta (3. s.) sb. rnavas;
pf.
pt. rnvant. ipf. rnvan.
(3. pi.)

pr.

arathur, arur

pt.

arivams

arana.

ao.

APPENDIX

374

root: arta; arata inj. arta (A.

arita pt, arana a aram, arat
;

sb.

aranta;
mahi, aranta
(3. s.);

GD.

rta.

arpipam
rj

rtva,

VII. A.:

(3.

pt.

rnjate

rnj6;
I.

rjyant.

arpayati

cs.

-ftya.

(AV.). INT. alarsi, alarti.

pr. rnjati, -te
direct VI.
PR.

pr.

arata, aran

arpita and arpita.

pp.

3. s.)

ipv.

pp.

op.

aryat (TS.);
A. arata
arama inj. aram; aran; A. araaratam, aratam. ft. arisyati (B.).
:

ipv.

arjati

rnjata
IV.:
ao.

arpayitva
pt.

rnjant.

pr.

pi.);

(B.).

red.

ao.

gd. -arpya,

pt.

rjyate

rnjasana.

inf. rnjase.

rd

VI. P.

stir,

(AV.).

rdh

V. P.

thrive,

rdantu.

ipv.

ardayati

cs.

ardan.

ipf.

I.

pr. ardati

ardayati.

rdhnoti

pr.

sb.

ipf.

ardhnot.

IV.

pr.

rnadhat
pt. rndhant. pf. anardha (K.) anrdhur
OP. rndhyam
anrdh6. ao. root ardhma (B.) sb. rdhat A. rdhathe
OP. rdhyam, rdhyas, rdhyama; rdhimahi
(2. du.)
a op. rdh6t, rdh^ma
pt. rdhant
PRO. rdhyasam
ipv.

rdhyati, -te;

VII. P.:

rdhyatam.

sb.

ardhista (B).

is:
PS.
cs.

rdhyate

rs rush,

I.

rsati
ej

stir,

I.

P.

PR.

A.

PER. PF.

pt. irtsant.
sb.

arsat

arsat

inj.

pt. arsant.

arsata, arsantu;

ipv.

VI. P.: pr.

pp. rsta.

6jati

IPF. aijat.

thrive, I.

(B.).

arsati, -te

(B.).

gdv. ardhya.

pt. rsant.

pt. 6jant.

edh

ardhisyate (B.);
rdhyatam pp. rddha.

ds. irtsati

pr.

arsa, arsatu

ardhita

ft.

ipv.

ardhayati.

pr.

sb.
cs.

6dhate

edham

and 6jat

6jati

ejayati
(B.)

cakrire

ipv.

6jatu

(B.).

ipv.

(B.).

6dhasva, 6dhatam

ao. is: op. edhisiya.

sb.
pf. cak6
pr. pt. kayamana.
kan, ka enjoi/, IV.
cakanas, cakanat; eakanama; inj. cakananta; op.
cakana
pt.
ipv.
cakandhi, cakantu
cakanyat
:

akanisam sb. kanisas.

kam love: pf. pt. cakamana. ao. red.: aeikamata
cs. kamayate
FT. kamisyate (B.); kamita (B.).
pt.
kamayamana.
kamayase
PPF.

cakan

(2. s).

ao.

(B.).
;

sb.

LIST OF VERBS

375

kas appear, I.: pr. kasate (B.). int. cakasimi, cakasiti

pt. cakasat.
ipf.
cakasyate (B.) sb. cakasan (AV.)

acakasam.

kup

cs.

kasayati.

TV.

he angn/,

pr.

pt.

kupyant.

pp.

cs.

kupita.

kopayati.
1.

kr tiiaJic. V. pr. krndmi, krndsi, krnoti krnuthas, krnutas krnmasi, krnutha, krnvanti A. krnv6, krnus6,
krnut6 krnmahe, krnvate in.t. krnvata (3. pi.) sb.
krnavava
krnava, krnavas, krnavat
krnavama,
:

krnavatha (VS.), krnavan

A. krnavai, krnavase,
krnavate
krnavavahai, krnvaite (for krnavaite)
op. krnvita
ipv. krnu,
krnavamahai, krnavanta
krnuhi and krnutat,
krnotu
krnutam
krnutam,?

7aa
krnuta, krnota, and krnotana, krnvantu A. krnusva,
krnutam krnvatham
krnudhvam pt. krnvant
krnvana. ipf. krnavam, akrnos, akrnot akrnutam
A. akrakrnuta, akrnota and akrnotana, akrnvan
nuta (3. s.) akrnudhvam, akrnvata.
VIII. karomi, karoti kurmas, kurvanti kurv6, ku;

7aa

:
7

rut6; kurvate;
A. kurvatam.

ipv. kurii,

kar6tu;
kurvana. ipf. akaros,
akarot akurvan A. kuruthas, akuruta akurvata.
krthas krtha A. krs6.
II.
PR. karsi
PF. cakara, cakartha, cakara
cakrathur, cakratur ;
cakrma, cakra, cakrur A. cakr6, cakrs6, cakr6 cakrathe, cakrate cakrir6 op. cakriyas pt. eakrvams
sb.

karavas, karavat;

kurvant

pt.

eakrana.

cakaram, acakrat; acakriran. ao. root:

kartam, akartam
akaram, akar, akar
akarma,
ppf.

A. akri, akrthas, akrta ; akrata inj.

karam, kar ; sb. karani, karasi and karas, karati and
karat karathas, karatas karama, karanti and karan ;
A. karase, karate
karamahe
op. kriyama
pec.
kriyasma ; ipv. krdhi ; krtam and kartam krta and
akarta, akran,

kartana;

A. krsva

krdhvam;

pt.

krant;

krana.

akaras, akarat ipv. kara ; karatam, karatam

s: akarsit (B.)
A. akrsi (B.). ft. karisyati; -te (B.)
AO. a

APPENDIX

376
SB.

inf.

krtva, krtvi, krtvaya.

kartum.

cs.

kr commemorate
carkarmi

INT.

carkrtya.
krt cut, VI. P.
PT. krntant.

sb.

a:

krntati

pr.

cikirsati.

ds.

(B.).

akarsana is akarisam, akarit.

ao. carkrse (3. s.)
gdv.
carkiran

ao. s

gdv.

karayati, karayate
karikrat and carikrat.

INT. PT.
2.

ps.

akarisyat (B.).
pp. krta.
akari

ao.

kriyate pt. krikartva.

gd.
kartave, kartavai kartos

co.

karisyas.

yamana

krntat

inj.

akrntat.

ipf.

ipv.

krnta

cakartitha, cakarta.
red.:
aeikrtas (B.).
ft.
pf.

pt. krtant;
krtyate pp. krtta. gd. -krtya.
krp lament, I. A. pr. krpate pt. krpamana. ipf. akrpanta. pf. eakrpe (K.). ppf. cakrpanta. ao. root: akrpran is akrapista. cs. pt. krpayant ipf. akrpayat.
pr. krsyati (B.).
krs he lean, IV. P.
pf. cakarsa.
pp.

AG.

akrtas;

ps.

kartsyami.

krsita

krs

cs.

(B.).

I.:

plougli,

karsa.

VI.

karsayati.
-te (B.)
karsati
pr. krsati ; ipv. krsatii
pr.

karsat
ipv.
krsantu A. krsao. red. acikrsam
in.t.

asva; pt. krsant. pf. cakarsa (B.).

sa
akrksat (B.). ft. kraksy6 (B.). ps. krsyate
krsta.
GD. krstva (B.).
int. 3. pi. earkrsati;
carkrsat pt. carkrsat iff. aearkrsur.
:

kr

scatter,

kiratu.
(B.)

kip

pp.

kirna

he adapted, I.

syate

(B.).

pr. kirati, -te

akirat.

iff.

caklpr6.

sb.

VI. P.

amana.

pp.

ao, is

sb.

kirasi

karisat.

ipv.

kalpasva

pr.

kalpate

pf.
akalpata, akalpanta.
AO. red.
sb. ciklpati.
aciklpat
:

pp.
;

ps.

kiryate

(B.).

iff.

kalpayavahai
PT. kalpayant

ipv. kira,

sb.

pt.

ka!p-

caklpur

kalpkalpayati;

sb.
cs. kalpayati;
kalpaya, kalpayatu kalpayasva
ipf. akalpayat.
ds. cikalpayisati (B.)

klpta.
ipv.

ft.

GD. kalpayitva.

krand

pr. krandati
in.t. krandat
ipv.
cry out, I. P.
jpf. akrandas,
pt. krandant.
kranda, kraudatu
krandat.
ppf. cakradas, eakradat.
cakrade.
pf.
:

LIST OF VERBS
a

Ao.

iN.T.

kradan

kradas

acikradas, acikradat

int.

ayati.

red.

eikradas s
kanikranti

inj.

377

akran

s.

(3.

aei-

krand-

cs.

(2. 3. s.).

kanikrant-ti)

pt.

kanikradat.

kram stride,

I.

P.

pr.

kramati

op.

kramema

krama

ipv.

kramate sb. krampf.

irv.
kramasva.
ama
cakrama, cakramur cakram6 cakramathe pt. cakramana. ppf. cakramakran akramur inj. kramur a
anta
ao. root
akramat, akraman s A. akramsta akramsata sb.
kramsate is akramisam and akramim, akramis,
akramit kramista (3. s.) inj. kramis ipv. kramistam.
gd.
FT. kramsyate; kramisyati, -te(B.); pp. kranta.
krantva (B.), -kramya. inf. -krame; kramitum (B.)
kramitos (B.). cs. kramayati (B.). int. ipv. cankram-a-ta (2. pi.) eankramyate (B.).

kramant

PT,

akramat

iff.

A.

kri

krinit^
pr. krinati
IX.
akrinan. pt. kresyati, -te (B.).

buy,

iPF.

krinavahai.

sb.

kriyate

ps.

(B.)

pp. krita.

krudh

gd. kritva, -kriya (B.).

he angri/, IV. P. pr. kriidhyati.

pf.

AO. red.

acukrudhat

sb.

eukrudhama

cukrodha (B.).
inj. cukrudh-

am a inj. krudhas. pp. kruddha. cs. krodliayati.

krus cry out, I. pr. krosati ipv. krosatu pt. krosant
krosamana. ao. sa akriiksat. pp. krusta (B.).
pt.
pf. caksad6
pr. ksadamahe.
ksad divide, I. A.
eaksadana. inf. ksadase.
:

ksam
pt.

endure,

A.

I.

ksamamana.

op.
pf.

ksameta
caksam6

ksamadhvam.

ipv.
(B.)

op.

caksam-

ithas.
ipv. ksara
inj. ksarat
ksar floiv, I. P.
pr. ksarati
ksarantu pt. ksarant. ipf. aksarat aksaran. ao. s
:

aksar.
1,

pp.

ayati (B.).
ksi possess,

ksarita
II. P.

(B.).

inf.

pr. ksdsi, ks6ti

ksayas, ksayat; ksayama;

ksayati; op. ksayema (AV.)

SB.

cs.

ksaradhyai.

pt.
pt.

ksitas

ksiyant.
ksayant.

ksar-

ksiyanti
I.

P.

IV.

pr.

P.:

APPENDIX

378
PR. ksiyati; or.

ksiyema

FT. PT.

ksesyant.
ksi destroy, IX.
iPF. aksinas.
V.

ipv.

cs. ipv.

ao. s: sb. ks6sat.

ksiya.

ksayaya

inj.

ksepayat.
ksinanti
inj. ksinam.
pb. ksinomi. IV. A.
pr. ksiyate
ao. s: inj. ksesta (AV.).
Ps. ksiyate;
ksiyante.
PT. ksiyamana; pp. ksita
ksina (AV.). gd. -ksiya (B.).
INF. -ksetos (B.).
Ds. eiksisati (B.).
ksip throw, VI. P. pr. ksipati inj. ksipat ipv. ksipa;
2.

pr. ksinati

PT.

ksipant. ao. red.

INF. -kseptos
ksipta.

ksnu

wliet, II.

GD.

(B.).

khan, kha

ema

pr.

dig, I.

cakhana

pr.

ksnuvana.

pt.

khanati

se.

pp.

pp.

ksnuta

op. khanakhananta. pf.

khanama;

akhanat

ipf.

cakhniir.

(B.); pp. khata.

ciksipan.

(B.).

khanant.

ciksipas

(B.).

ksnaumi

-ksnutya

pt.

inj.

fp. pt.

ps.

khanisyant,
khatvi
gd, khatva (B.)

khayate
-khaya

(TS.),

khanitum.
pr. khadati
P.
ipv. khada
pt. khadant.
PF. cakhada.
pp. khadita (B.).
gd. khaditva (B.).
khid tear, VI. pr. khidati
inj. khidat
op. khid^t.
IPV. khida
khidant. ipf. akhidat. pf. pt. khidvams.
GD. -khidya (B.).
khya see pf. cakhyathur. ao. a akhyat inj. khyat
ipv.
ft.
ps.
khyatam
khyata.
khyasyati (B.).
khyayate(B.) pp. khyata. gdv. -khyeya. gd. -khyaya.
inf. khyatum (B.)
-khyai. cs. khyapayati, -te (B.).
gam go, I. pr. gaehati, -te sb. gachasi and gachas,
(B.).

khad

inf.

I.

clieiv,

gachati and gaehat; gachatha, gachan; A. gachai;

op. gachet gachema ipv. gacha and gachatat, gachatu
and gachatat
gachata, gagachatam, gachatam
chantu A. gaehasva (AV.), gachatam gachadhvam
;

gachant
gachamana. ipf. agachat agachanta.
PF. jagama, jagantha, jagama
jagmathur, jagmatur;
jaganma, jagmxir jagm6 op. jagamyam, jagamyat
jagamyatam, jagamyur pt. jaganvams, jagmivams
jagmana. Per. pf. gamayam cakara (AV.). ppf. ajagan
pt.

LIST OF VERBS

379

A. ajagmiran. ao. root: agamam, agan

aganma, agman agathas, agata ganvahi
sb.
gamani, gamas, gamat
aganmahi, agmata
inj. gan
gamama, gamanti
gamathas, gamatas
3. s. gamyas
ipv.
vuc.
OP. gainyas
gmiya (B.)
gadhi and gahi, gantu gatam and gantam, gantam
(2. s.)

ajaganta

(2. 3. s.)

pt.
gmant ;
gata, ganta and gantana, gamantu ;
inj. gama agamat. agaman
sb. gamatas ; gamatha
:

an

gam^yam, gamds,

gamama

gam6inahi
red. ajigamam, ajigamat; s agasmahi; is: gamistam;
gmisiya (VS.). ft. gamisyati (AV.); ganta (B.). ps.
gamyate ao. agami pp. gata. gd. gatva, gatvaya,
;

gani6t

inf.

-gatya.

gatvi,

gamayati.
ganiganti

garaadhyai,

gantavai,

gantave,

gantos, -gamas. cs. gamayati and

ds. jigamsati ; jigamisati, -te (B.).
int.

gamadhye

1.

(TS.);

ganigmat.

pt.

ga^o, III. P.: PR. jigasi, jigati; inj. jigat; ipv. jigatam;
jigata; pt. jigat. ipf. ajigat. pf, op. jagayat. ao. root:

agatam, agatam
agama, agata,
agam, agas, agat
agur; sb. gani, gas, gat; gama; inj. gam.; gama, giir;
IPV. gata and gatana; s: inj. gesani(VS.)
gesma(AV.).
;

inf. gatave.
jigasa (SV.).
ga sing, IV. pr. gayasi, gayati

DS.
2.

INJ.

gayat

ipf.
sis:

ipv.

gaya

agayat. pf. jagan (B.).

agasisur; sb. gasisat.

giyamana
-giya

pp.

gatum

inf.

(B.).

gd.

gita.

gayanti

gayata, gayantu

ao. s: inj.
ft.

gasyati

A, gaye

pt.

gasi
(B.}.

gayant.
(1.

s.);

ps.

pt.

gitva (B.) -gaya (B.) and

cs. gapayati, -te (B.).
(B.).
;

DS. jigasati (B.).

gah

i)lun(jc,

IPV.

I.

A.:

gahetham;

pr.
pt.

op.

gahase, gahate;

gahamana.

ipf.

gahemahi;
int.

agahathas.

jangahe.

gur

greet,

VI.

pr.

ipv.

gurasva.

pf.

juguryas, juguryat. ao. root: giirta

GD. -gurya.

guh

liide,

I.:

pr.

guhati,

-te

inj.

sb.

(3. s.

jugurat

A.),

guhas

op.

pp. gurta.

guhathas

APPENDIX

380

guhata
guhas

guhant
guhamana. irr. aguhat.
guhas; pt. guhant; guhamana;
sa: aghuksat. ps.guhyate; pt. guhyamana; pp. gudha;
ipv.

1.

pt.

a:

AO.

inj.

GDV. guhya, -gohya.

gd. gudhvi.
pr. grnami, grnati
gr sing, IX.

ds.

juguksati.

grnitas

grnimasi,
A. grn6, grnis6, grnit6 (and grne), grnimahe
INJ. grnita (3. s. A.)
ipv. grnihi, grnatu
grnitam,
grnitam grnita, grnantu ; pt. grnant grnana. gd.
-girya (B.). inf. grnisani.
:

grnanti

2.

gr tvake:
INT.

ao. red.:

2.

ajigar; ipv. jigrtam; jigrta.

3.

sb.

jagarti; jagrati;

jagarasi (AV.), jagarat; op.

jagriyama(V8.), jagryama(TS.); ipv.jagrhi andjagrtat;
jagrtam, jagrtam pt. jagrat. ipf. ajagar. pf. 1. s. ja3. jagara.
pt. jagrvams ; ft. jagarisyati, -te
gara.
;

(B.)

grdh

pp.

jagarita

AO. a

agrdhat
VI.

gr S'waUow,
SB.

ft.
SB.

P.

garisyati

jalgulas

grdhas
pr.

pp.

(B.).

pt.

(B.).

pf. jagrdhiir.

grdhyant.
grdhat.

girati.

red.:

garat, garan;

jagarayati

pr. pt.

inj.

cs.

(B.).

he greedy, IV. P.

pf.

jagara.

(2.

s.);

ajigar

gd.

girna.

ao.

root

is: inj. garit.

int.

-girya (AV.).

jargurana.

grabh seize, IX. pr. grbhnami, grbhnati grbhnanti

grbhn6 grbhnate sb. grbhnas inj. grbhnita (3. s.)
IPV. grbhnihi.
ipf. agrbhnas, agrbhnat
agrbhnan
agrbhnata (3. pi. A.), pf. jagrabha (1. s.) jagrbhathur
jagrbhma, jagrbhiir A. jagrbhr^ and jagrbhrire op.
pt. jagrbhvams
ppf. ajagrabham, ajajagrbhyat
ao.
root
grabhit.
agrabham agrbhran pt. grbhana
a: agrbham; red.: ajigrabhat
is: agrabhim (TS.),
:

agrabhit; agrabhisma, agrabhisur; agrbhisata(3. pi. A.).

gd. grbhitva,
pp. grbhita.
inj. grabhista (2. pi.),
-grbhya. inf. -grabhd, -grbh6. cs. pt. grbhayant.
pf. op.
pr. grasate
op. grasetam.
gras devour, I. A.
pt.
pp.
grasita.
jagrasita
jagrasana.
grhn6
grah seize, IX.
grhnami, grhnati grhnanti
:

grhnimahe, grhnate

op.

grhniyat;

ipv.

grhnahi(AV.),

LIST OF VERBS
grhnitat and grhana

381

grhnatu grhnitam grhnantu

rr.
iff. agrhnat, agrhnan.
grhnant; grhnana.
jagrhma, jagrhiir jagrh6. ao, a:
jagraha, jagraha
;

PT.

iNJ.

grhamahi

is

agrahifc

ft.

agrahista.

grahisyati

agrahaisyat (B.). ps. grhyate

inf. grahitavai (B.).
gd. grhitva, -grhya.
pp. grhita.
ds. jighrksati,
cs.
grahayati
grahitos (B.).
(B.).
(B.); CO.

agrahTsyat

(B.),

-te (B.).
cat: pf. jaghasa,

ghas

vams

aghastam

jaghasa; op. jaksiyat; pt. jaksiaghas (2. 3. s.), aghat (3. s., B.)
aghasta (2. p]., B.), aksan;
B.)

ao. root

(AV.).

du.,

(3.

SB.ghasas, ghasat; ipv.

ghastam

(3.du.); s

-gdha (TS.).
ghus sound, I. pr. ghosati, gh6sate
pf. jughosa (B.).
PT. ghosant.
red.

aghas

(2. s.);

us. jighatsati.

pp.

ajighasat.

sb.

ghosat

ps.

ao.

gh6san

gd.

ghosi.

-ghusya. cs. ghosayati.

caks sec, II.: pk. cakse (= caks-se), caste; caksathe;
caksate; P. caksi (= caks-si) iff. caksur. I. A. pr.
capf. cacaksa
iff. eaksata (3. s.).
caksate (3. s.)
caks6 (B.). PPF. aeacaksam. gdv. caksya. gd. -caksya.
-caksi.
cs. caksayati.
INF. -cakse, caksase
:

car move,

caran

pr. carati

caratai (AV.)

caratu

P.

I.

sb.

inj.

carava, caratas
caret ; ipv. cara,
iff. acarat.
carant.

carani

carat

op.

carata, carantu; pt.

caeara; cerima, ceriir. ao. red. aeicarat s: acarsam (B.) is: acarisam inj. cant. ft. carisyami.
gdv. -cardnya. gd, caritva
pp. earita
PS. caryate (B.)
;

PF.

(B.)

-carya

DS. cicarsati(B.), cicarisati(B.).

-te(B.).

int. carcariti;

carcuryamana.

FT.

cay note, I.
cakrur
cayitva

pr. cayati (B.)

ao. is
(B.).
:

OP.

ft.

cayamana.
ps.

acayisam.

per. pf.

-cayam

cayyate.

gd.

-cayya.

ci gather, V.

at

carase, caritave, caradhyai ;

caritum (B,); caritos (B.). cs. carayati,
inf.

(B.).

caritavai (B.)

1.

pr. cinoti

ciuuyama

ipv.

cinvanti
ciniihi,

cinut6
cinotu

sb.

cinav-

cinvantu

APPENDIX

882
cinusva;

cinvant; cinvana. I.
cayat op. cayema.

vt.

cayadhve
acaisam

(B.)

acet

is:

ipv.

pf.

ci note. III.

pr. cik6si (AV.)

A.

(3. s.)

acikayur

(B.).

(TS.)

cik6the

du.

dhvam.
c6tante

I.

acetat.

pr. c6tati

II.

A. cikit6

c6tat

A.

c6tathas

pr. cit6

and ciketat eiketathas

cikitana
ppf. ciketam
;

citana

-te

and citayati,

ps.

kitat

aceti
-te;

acait.

sb.

cdtatha

pf.

s.).
;

A. aci-

A. estate
c6tant
iff.
ciketa eikitur
;

pt.

sb. cikitas,

ciketati

cikiddhi

aciketat.

acet

pt.

ao.

cikitvams

acet

root

inf. citaye. cs. cetayati,

op.
cetayani, cetayatai (TS.)
int. cekite (3. s.); sb. c6;

ds. inj. cikitsat.

citayema.

cud

(3.

ipv.

PT,

root

c^tatam

ipv.

cikitr6 and cikitrir6

eiketu

ipv. cikihi (AV.),

ao.
cikyathe).
ds. cikisate.

(for

(B.).

cetuni(B.);

inj.

inf.

cikitam (AV.); pt. eikyat. iff, aciket

pf. cikaya; cikyatur; cikyiir; A. 2.

pp. cita.

cit perceive,

-te

cesyati,

ciyate(B.); pp. cita. gd. citva{B.).

cetavai (B.). ds. cikisate (B.).
PS.

2.

ft.

cayistam.

cayase, cayate

cikaya cikye
s:
citana, ciyantu

root:

ao.

cikyird.

pk.

inj.

pt. c6kitat.

codami

codate inj. codat ipv. coda,

codetham.
cs. sb. codayasi, codcodasva,
ayat codayase, codayate pp. codita.
cyu fHove, I. pr. cyavate inj. cyavam cyavanta ipv.
pf. cicyuse,
cyavasva
cyavadhvam.
cyavetham
cucyuv6 (3. s. ); iNJ.cucyavat op. cueyuvimahi, cucyavirata.
ppf. acucyavat, acucyavit acucyavitana, acucyavur. ao. s: cyosthas. ft. cyosyate (B.). pp. cy'uta.
impel,

codata

I.

pr.

cs.

cyavayati,

-te.

pr. chantsi.
pf. caehanda ;
seem, II.
OP. cachadyat. ao. s: achan ; achanta (
acliant-s-ta),

chad

or

chand

achantsur

chadayat
achadayan.

chid cut

ojf',

chantsat.

sb.

INJ.

VII.

sb.

pr.

cs.

chandayase
ipf.
chandayate

chadayati

chadayatha

chinadmi, chinatti

ipv.

ehindhi

LIST OF VERBS

383

chiuddhi), chinattu; chintam ( = chinttam), pf. cich6da; cichid6 (B.). ao. root: chedma; a: achidat;
achidan s achaitsit (B.) inj. chitthas. ft. chetsyati,
(

:^

-te (B.).

ao. achedi;
pt. chidyamana
chidyate
inf. ch^ttavai
gd. -ehidya; chittva (B.).

PS.

chinna.

pp.

(B.)

ch6ttum

(B.).

ds. cichitsati, -te (B.).

jan generate, I.: pr. janati; sb. janat; inj. janat; ipv.
ipf. ajanat; Janata
janatu; pt. janant; janamana.
pf.
jajnur and
jajnatur;
jajana;
ajananta.
(3. s.);
ao.
pt. jajnana.
jajanur; A. jajnis6, jajn6; jajnir6
;

root

ajani

jijananta

(1. s.)

is

red.

ajijanat, ajijanan

janistam

OP. janisiya, janisista.

ajanisyata (B.).
jantva and janitva.
-te

ayati,

janayatu

jambh
pp.

cs.

jambhayant.
jas he exhausted,
;

red.

ao.

jabdha.

PF. jajasa

gd. janitvi.

janayatam

chetv

ipv.

op.

inf. janitos.

janayes

ajijabham

jambhaya

is

jasamana

ipv.

pr. pt.

ao. red.

jajastam.

jan-

jambhisat.

sb.

pt.

cs.

janaya,

jambhayatam

int. jaiijabhyate (B.)

I.

ipv.

ds. jijanisate (B.).

janayata.

janayas

sb.

ps.

CO.

jijanam

inj.

A. ajanisthas, ajanista ;
ft. janisyati, -te
janita (B.)
gdv.
ao. ajani; jani, jani.
du.)

(8.

IV.

pt.
.

ipv. jasyata.

ajijasata

janjabhana.

(3. s., B.).

cs.

jasayati (B.).
ja he horn, IV. A. pr. jayate
:

jayasva, jayatam
IPF. ajayathas, ajayata
IPV.

1.

ji

conquer,

I.

inj.

jayata

jayadhvam
ajayanta.

jayati, -te

op.

jayemahi
jayamana.
;

pt.

pp. jata.

sb. jayasi,

jayas, jayati

jayava, jayatha; A. jayatai (AV.); inj. jayat; op.

jayema; ipv. jayatu; A. jayantam pt. jayant. ipf.
ajayat. II. P. pk. j6si. pf. jig^tha, jigaya jigyathur
jigyiir A. jigy6 pf. jigivams jigivams (B.) ao. root
INJ. j6s; ipv. jitam; s: ajai.sam, 3. ajais (=ajais-t);
ajaisma; sb. j6sas, j6sat; j^sama; inj. j6sam (VS.),
;

j6s;

ft. jesyati;
pt. jesyant.
j6snia, jaisur (AV.).
gdv. j6tva. gd. jitva (B.) -jitya. inf. jis6 ;

pp. jita;

j6tave (B.)

j6tum

(B.).

cs.

japayati

(B.)

ajijapata

APPENDIX

384

(VS.) and ajijipata (TS,).

ds.

I
pt.

-te;

jigisati,

jigi-

sainana.
2.

V.

ji quicken,

pr. jinosi; jinve.

jinv quicken (=V. ji-nu + a),

thas ; jinvatha, jinvanti

I.

ipf. ajinot (B.).

pr. jinvasi, jinvati

A. jinvate

jinva-

ipv. jinva, jinv-

atu; jinvatam jinvata; pt. jinvant. ipf. ajinvat; ajinvatam. pp. jijinvathur. ft. jinvisyati (B.). pp. jinvita.
;

P.

live, I.

jiv

J-

pr. jivati

lit

sb. jivani, jivas, jivati

J.

jivatha, jivan

op.

jivema

ipv. jiva,

jivatu

and jivat
jivatam

pf. jijiva (B.).

jivata, jivantu; pt. jivant.
PRC. jivyasam; is: inj. jivit.
ft. jivisyati

root:

ao.

ps.

(B.).

pp. jivita.
gdv. jivaniya.
gd. jivitva
jivyate (B.)
inf. jivase; jivitavai, jivatave (ts. vs.); jivitum
(B.).
cs. jivayati.
ds. jijivisati (B.)
jujyusati (B.) ;
(B,).
;

pp. jijyusita (B.).

jus

VI.

cnjoij,

jusamana

PR.

ipf.

jusate

ajusat

op.

jus6ta

jus^rata

pf.

pt.

jujosa
jujusd ;
SB. jujosati, jujosat; jiijosatha, jujosan; A. jujosate;
IPV. jujustana ; pt. jujusvams jujusana. ppf. ajujosam.
AO. root: ajusran
sb. josati, josat; A. josase; pt.
;

ajusata.

sb. josisat.
pp. justa gladdened and justa
gd. justvi.
cs. josayate ; sb. josayase.
I. A.
pr.
JVL speed, iX. P. : pr. junati; junanti ; SB.junas.

jusana

is

welcome,

jujuvur; sb. jujuvat ( = jujavat); pt. jujuvams jujuvana. pp. juta. inf. javase.
jurv consume, I. P. pr. jurvati sb. jurvas ipv. jurva
pf.

javate.

1.

jr sing,

A,:

jur

tvastc aivay,

VI. P.

jarant.
pt.

AO.

jarisur.

I.

jurvit.

pt.

pt.

ipf.

juryant;
is

pr. jarate

jarasva, jaratam
jr,

ao. is

PT. jiirvant.

sb.

P.

inf.

pr. jarati

IV. P.

jurant.

pf.

ajuryan.
pp. jirna,

op.

jarate;

jaramana.

jaratam

ipv.

pt.

pr. jiryati, juryati

jajara;

jurna.

ipv.

jareta;

jaradhyai.

pt.

jarayati, -te

cs.

jujurvams.

jarayant and jarayant.

pr. janati
jna TxHoic, IX.
janimas, janitha, jananti
janit6 janate ; sb. janama
janamahai op. janithas

PT.

VEEBS

LIST OF

385

janatu; janita, janantu; janidhvam,

janant janana. ipf. ajanam, ajanat;

ipv. janihi, janitat,

janatam;

pt.

pt.
pf. jajnaii; jajne;
ajanan; A. 3. pi. ajanata.
op.
ao.
root
and
jneyas
jajnivams
janivams.
(Gk.
in.t. jnesam
s: ajnasam (B.);
ajnasthas
yrot'7/y)
-te (B.)
ft. jnasyati,
sis: ajnasisam.
jnata (B.).
PS. jnayate
ao. ajnayi; pp. jnata; gdv. jneya (B.).
GD. jnatva (B.), -jnaya (B.). inf. jnatum (B.), jfiatos (B.).
cs. jnapayati; ao. ajijnipat (TS.); ps. jnapyate (B.)
pp. jnapta (B.)
jnapayati (B.). ds. jijnasate.
pt. jinant.
op. jiniyat
jya overpoiver, IX. pr. jinati
:

IV. A.

ao. sis

pf. jijyaii (B.).

jyasyati, -te

FT.

(B.).

PR. jiyate.

ps.

(B.).

ajyasisam

jiyate; pp. jita.

ds.

jijyasati.

jval /rtwe,

P.: pr. jvalati

I.

jvalayati

tams
cs.

sJiaJce

(B.).

ft. jvalisyati (B.).

ajvalit (B.).

pf.
pp.

jajvala

ao.
cs.

(B.).

pf. tatasrd.

ppf.

atatamsatam. ao. a

tamsayadhyai.
tamsayati,
gdv. -tantasayya.

aite

(B.).

jvalita (B.).

-te

inf.

atasat.

int. sb.

tantas-

taks fashion,

I.

P.

pr. taksati

sb.

taksama

in.t.

taksat

ipf.
pt. taksant.
taksata, taksantu
ataksat. II. P.: pr. tasti(B.), taksati (8. pi.) ; ipv. talhi.
IPF. ataksma, atasta.
V. P. pr. taksnuvanti (B.). pf,
tataksa (taksathur, taksiir) tatakse. ao. is ataksisnr.

IPV.

taksatam

pp. tasta.

VIII. pr. tanoti tanmasi, tanvanti tanut^

tanavavahai; int. tanuthas; ipv. tanii, tanuhi,
tanotu; A. tanusva; tanudhvam; pt. tanvant; tanvana.
pf. tatantha, tatana and
ipf.
atanvata.
atanuta
and tat6 (\/ta); tatnire
tatn6
3.
A.
1.
tatana;
tatand,
and tenlre sb. tatanat tatanama, tatanan inj. tatanatan
ao. root
pt. tatanvams.
anta
op. tatanyiir
a: atanat;
A. 2. atathas, 3. atata; atnata (3. pi.);
atamsin.t. tanat;
s: atan and atamsit; atasi (B.)

tan

stretch,

SB.

mahi(B.);
1819

is:

atanit.

ft.

C C

tamsyate

(B.).

ps.

tayate

APPENDIX

386

-tatya

tap

heat, I.

tapatu
PF. 1.

tantum

inf.

(B.).

ipf.

PT. tapant.

tapana

PT.

tatvaya

(VS.),

(B.).

sb.

inj. tapat ; ipv.

tapati
IV. P. :pr. tapyati(B.).
;

atapat.

tatapa; tep6;

3.

tatapa.

AO. root

-te

pe. tapati,

gd, tatva (B.),

pp. tata.

Ao. atayi (B.).

red.

sb.

tatapate;

atitipe

(3. s.)

pt.

tepana.

sb. titipasi

-tapya.

atapthas inj. tapsit taptam. ft. tapsyati

tapyate ao. atapi pp. tapta. gd. taptva (B.),
ps.
inf. taptos (B.).
cs. tapayati, -te (AV.)

tapyate

(B.).

atapsit
PS.

(B.).

tamat.

ayati
tij

tu

pr.

tamyati

tanta

pp.

(B.).

pf.

inf.

(B.).

tatama

tamitos

(B.).

ao. a

tam-

(B.).

(B.).

le sharp,

dhi

toxa faint, IV. P.

INJ.

I.

(B.).

A.

pr. t6jate

pp. tikta.

pt.

pf. ipv. titig-

t^jamana.

ds. titiksate.

int. tdtikte.

pf. tutava.
pr. taviti.
he strong, II. P.
tutot. INT. PT. tavitvat (= tavituat).

ppf. tutos,

tuj urge, VII.

pr. tunjanti; tunjate (3. pi.); pt. tunjana.

VI.: PR. tuj6te; pt. tujant. pf. op. tutujyat; pt. tu:

tujana and tutujana.

-tuje.

ps.

tujyate.

inf. tujase, tujaye,

tuj ay ant.

cs. PT.

pt.
tiidantu
ipv. tuda
pr. tudati
thrust, VI.
tudant. IPF. tudat. pf. tutoda. pp. tunna.
tur (= tr) pass, VI. pr. tiirati, -te; IV. P. ipv. turya;
pf. op. tuturyat
II. P.
OP. turyama.
tuturyama. pp.
cs. turayate.
turta (B.). GD. -turya. inf. turvane.

tud

DS. tutursati.
Xvd.

splU.Wl.
atrndan.

PR.trnadmi, trnatti trntte (B.) ipf. atrnat;

tatarditha, tatarda; pt. tatrdana. ao.
;

pf.

trnna(VS.). gd. -trdya. inf. -trdas.

trpnoti ; sb. trpnavas ipv. trpnuhi ;
trpnutam; trpnuta; VI. P. pr. trmpati ipv. trmpa;
IV. PR. trpyati. pf. tatrpiir ; pt. tatrpana. ao. root
PRO. trpyasma; a: atrpat; pt. trpant; red.: atitrpas;
root: SB. tardas.

trp he pleased, Y

P.

pp.

pr.

atitrpama.
-te

co.

atarpsyat

DS. titarpayisati.

(B.).

pp. trpta.

ds. titrpsati

cs.

tarpayati,

bb. titrpsat.

LIST OF VERBS
trs he thirst II, lY.
lir

trsat

pr. trsyati, -te

rx.

tatrsana and tatrsana.

PT.

red.

atitrsama

tarsayati (B.).
trh crush, VII. P.

387

inj. titrsas.

pf. tatrs-

trsyant.

ao. root

trsana

pt.

pp. trsita.

pr. trn^dhi trmhanti

ipv. trn^dhu
trnahan (AV.) pt. trmhant. pf. tatarha. ao. a
atrham. ps. trhyate
pp. trlha, trdha.
gd. trdhva.
:

SB.

cs.

tr cross,

taret
-te

I.

pr. tai^ati, -te

ipv. tai'a

SB. tirati

tiranta

in.t.

sb.

tira

tirata, tirantii

III.

pt. titrat.

tarathas

inj.

tarant. iff. atarat. VI.

pt.

op. tir^ta,

tiradhvam

VIII. A.

pr. tirati,

pL); ipv.

(2.

pt. tirant. ipf. atirat.

tarute.

-tana

tarat; op.
:

tatara

pf.

titirvir

tatarus- (weak stem) and titirvams. ao. red. atitaras is atarit atarisma and atarima, atarisur ; sb.
pt.

tarisas, tarisat

atari

iN.i.taris, tarit

gd. tirtva.

pp. tirna.

dhyai

tarisani.

tartariti

pf. tityaja

tarisimahi.

ps. ao.

-tiram, -tire

tara-

titirsati (B.).

int.

pt. taritrat.

ipv.

op.

ds.

tarayati.

tartiiryante

tyaj forsalce

cs.

inf.

pp.

tityagdhi.

tyakta

(B).

GD. -tyajya (B.).

tras he
is

terrified,

INT.

yati.

tra

I.

trasis (B.).

P.

tatrasyate

IV. A.

trasati.

pr.

pp. trasta (B.).

red.

ao.

inf. trasas.

atitrasan
cs.

trasa-

(B.).

pr.

trayadhve, trayante ;
trayase
trayasva, trayatam trayetham, trayetam trayaII. A.
ipv.
dhvam, trayantam ; pt. trayamana.
trasva tradhvam. pp. tatr6. ao. s.
atrasmahi (B.).
rescue,

IPV.

SB.

trasate

pp.

trata

trasathe

op.

inf.

(B.).

trasitham.

tramane.

ft.
cs.

trasyate
gdv.

(B.).

traya-

yayya.
tvis he stirred, II. P.
VI. A. : atvisanta.
ipf. atvisur.
PF. titvis6 ; pt. titvisana.
ppf. atitvisanta. pp. tvisita.
:

INF. tvis6.

tsar approach stecdthihj, I. P.

pr. tsarati.
pf. tatsara.
ao. s.
gd. -tsarya (B.).
atsar ; is atsarisam (B.).
dams, das hite, I. P.: pr. dasati ; ipv. dasa; pt. dasant. pf.
:

cc

APPENDIX

388

pp. dasta.
or>. damstva (B.).
PT. dadasvams.
int. pt.
daudasana.
daks he ahlc, I. pr, daksati, -te ipv. daksata pt. daksamana. pf. dadaks6 (B.). ao. red. adadaksat (B.).
:

FT.

daksisyate

gdv. daksayya.

(B.).

cs.

daksayati

dagh reach to, V. pr. op. daghnuyat (B.). ao. root

dhak (2. 3. s.) daghma prc. daghyas (8. s.)
dhaktam. ft. daghisyante (B.). inf. -daghas
:

(B.).
in.t.

ipv.

(B.),

-daghos (B.).
dabh, dambh Jiarm, I. P. pe. dabhati sb. dabhati; inj.
dabhat. V. P. pr. dabhnuvanti ipv. dabhnuhi. pf.
debhur
inj.
dadabhanta.
dadabha, dadambha
:

root

AO.

dabdha.

dabhur

dambhayati.

PR.

dhipsati

ds.

dadasvams.

inf.

dipsati;

ps.

dabhyate

-dabhe; dabdhum
sb.

dipsat;

pt.

pp.
(B,).

dipsant;

(B.).

das, das lay tvaste, IV. P.

PR. dasati
sb. dasat

pp.

dabhvir.

gdv. dabhya.

cs.

dasit.

inj.

ao.

dasta

pr.
inj.

inj.

dasyati
dasat;
dasat
;

op.

pt.
pt.

cs.

dasyet. I. P.
dasant. pf. pt.

dasamana

is

dasayate dasayati.
pr.
dah hum, I. P.
pr. dahatl
sb. dahati. II. P.
ao. s.
adhaksit
adhak
dhaksi.
pf. dadaha (B.).
pt. dhaksant and daksant.
INJ. dhak (3. s.)
(8. s.j;
(B.).

FT.

pt.
dhaksyati
dhaksyant.
dagdha. gd. dagdhva (B.) -dahya
;

ps.

dahyate

(B.).

inf.

pp.

-dahas

dagdhos (B.). dagdhum (B.). ds. dhiksate (B.).

da give, III.: pr. dadati
datte; sb. dadas, dadat;
dadan dadatai (AV.), dadamahe; inj. dadas, dadat; op.
dadyat dadimahi, dadiran ipv. daddhi, dehi, dattat,
dadatu dattam, dattam datta and dadata, dadatana,
dadatu A. datsva pt. dadat dadana iff. adadam,
adadas, adadat adattam adadata, adattana. adadur
ipv. daA. adatta. I. dadati dadate inj. dadat
datam (3. s.) iff. adadat adadanta. pf. dadatha,
dadau dadathur, dadatur dada, dadvir A. dad6,
dadathe, dadrir6 pt. dadvams, dadivams (AV.), dada(B.),

1.

LIST OF VEEBS
vams

(AV.)

dadana.

ao.

root

389
adas,

dat

adat,

adama, adur, dur. A. adi, adithas (B.), adita

adimahi (TS.) and adimahi (VS.) sb. das, dati, dat
;

dur;

desma

ipv.

adat.

(VS.)

inj.

datu; datam, datam data; disva

inj.
sb. dasat, dasathas
-te (B.)
is: adadista (SV.). ft. dasyati
data (B.). ps. diyate pt. dadyamana

deyam;

OP.

(VS.); a:

(B.)

s.

adisi

dadisy6 (K.)
AO. dayi
pp. -data, datta, -tta.
gdv. d6ya. gd. dattva,
inf. -dai, datave,
-daya,
-dadya (AV.).
dattvaya
;

datavai, damane, davane

OS.
2.

da

-dam

datum

(B.),

ditsant, didasant.
pr. dati
danti ; ipv. dantu.

dates.

ds. pt.

dapayati.

divide, II. P.

VI. P.

dyami, dyati; dyamasi; ii'V. dyatu; dyatam; IV.

PK. dayamasi
ipv. dayasva, dayatam
pt. dayamana.
iPF. dayanta.
adimahi (B.),
pf. dadir^ (B.).
ao. root
adimahi (VS., K.) s op. disiya. ps. diyate pp. dina
PR.

;J.

da

hind,

GD. -daya.

-tta (B.).

VI. P.

pr.

dyati

ipf.

ps.

adyas.

ao.

dayi

dasema

pp. dita.

das niaJie offering,

IPF.

adasat.

dasnoti.

dasat;

pr.

P.

dasati

pk.

dadasa.

pf.

dasat

op.

dasat.

pt.

V. P.

pr.

dadasas, dadasati and da-

sb.

(SV.).

cs.

(B.).

dis point, Nl.: pr. disami.

mana.

sb.

dasti

dadasvams, dasvams, dasivams

pt.

adasayat

P.

I.

II.

didesa

pf.

didistana.

sb.

ppf. didista

8.:

adiksi

INF.

-dise.

sa

adiksat

int.

disatu

ipv.

didesati
s.

(3.

ipv.

root:

A.),

ao.

pp.

dista.

(B.).

dedisam

ipf.

dedisti;

disant; disadididdhi, didestu

pt.

adista;

gd. -disya.
;

adedista;

dedisyate.

dih smear, II.

IPF. adihan.
:

1.

difli/,

IV.

adiyam.
2.

di,
ipv.

didi

pr.

d^gdhi dihanti sb. d^hat pt. dihana.

s.
adhiksur (B.). pp. digdha.

shine

PR. diyati; -te

int. inf.

didihi

ao.

inj.

ipv.

diyat;

diya.

ipf.

dediyitavai.
pr.

didyati

und didihi

pt.

(3.

pi.)

didyat

sb. didayat
didyana. ipf.
;

APPENDIX

390
adides, adidet.

dJdayasL- and

rr.

did6the, didaya

didayas,

didiyiir

and

didayati

sb.

px.

didayat.

didivams.
diks

he consecrated,

didiksiir

I.

A.

(B.).

FT.

diksisyate
diksayati (B.).
dip shine, IV. A.

(B.).

ds.

pr. diksate(B.)-

ao, red.

adidiksas

pp. diksita.

didiksisate

pf.

didiks6 and

adiksista

(B,).

gd. diksitva (B.).

cs.

(B.)

is

(B.).

pr. dipyate.
ao. red.
adidipat; adidipat (B.) inj. didipas. cs. dipayati.
diy jylai/, IV.: pr, divyati; divyate (B.). pf. did^va.
:

pp. dyuta.
GD. -divya.
du, dii hum, V. P. pr. dunoti; dunvanti; pt. dunvant.
AO. is SB. davisani (or from du go ?).
pp. diina.
dns sj^oil, IV. P.: pr. dusyati (B.). ao. red.: adiidusat
a: dusat (B.)
is: dosistam (B.).
cs. dusayati; ft.
:

diisayisyami.

duh milk,

II. P. pk. dogdhi diihanti

and diihat6, diihrate and dulii'e;

OP.

duhiyat, duhiyan

duham

A.

dugdhe

duh9,te

dohat; dohate
dugdham A. 3. s.
duhram (AV.) and

sb.

du.

ipv. 3.

3. du. dnhatham
3. pi.
duhratam (AV.); pt. duhaut; dughana, duhana, and
duhana; ipf. adhok duhur aduhan (B.) and aduhran
;

(AV.).

I.

A.

dohate.

PR.

VI.

doha, dudohitha; duduhur;

ipf.

A.

aduhat

(TS.).

pf.

du-

duduhe duduhre and

;

duduhana. ao. s: adhuksata (3. pi.)

INJ. dhuksata (3.
sa: adhuksas,
pi.); op. dhuksimahi
aduksat and adhuksat adhuksan, duksan and dhuksan
inj.
A. adhuksata, duksata and dhuksata
duksas A. 3. duksata and dhuksata pi. dliuksanta

dudiihrir^;

pt.

pp.
pt. duhyamana
ps. duhyate
dhuksasva.
dohase
inf.
GD.
duhadhyai;
dugdha.
dugdhva (B.).
dogdhos (B.). cs. dohayati (B.). ds. diiduksati.
dr 2>ierce, II. P. pk. darsi. IX. P. op. drniyat(B.). pf.
dadara pt. dadrvams. ao. root adar s sb. darsasi,

IPV,

1.

ps. diryate (B.)

darsat
op. darsista.
A. darsate
PS. dirna (B).
cs. darayati
gd. -dirya (B.).
darayati
;

LIST OF, VERBS

391

INT. dardarimi, dardariti ;

sb. dardirat
ipv.
dardrhi and dadrhi, dardartu pt. dardrat daridrat
IFF. adardar, dardar (2. 3. s.)
adardrtam;
(TS.)
(B.).

adardirur.
2.

dr

lieed

yate

drp

adrthas

ao.

(B.)

drdhvam

dri-

ps.

(B.).

gd. -drtya.

(B.).

rave, IV.

P.

drapsyati

pr.

ao. a

drpyati.

and

(B.)

drapisyati

adrpat (B.). ft.

pp. drpta and

(B.).

drpita.

drs see: pf. dadarsa;

dadrsrire (TS.) ipv.

dadrks6, dadrse

A.

A.)
ao. root
pi.

(3.

dadrsvams dadrsana.
adarsur (B.); A. 3.
(TS.), adrsma (B.),
adrsram; sb. darsati, darsathas, darsan
:

dadrsre,

dadrsram (AV.); pt.

adarsam (B.) adarsma
;

pi.

adrsran,

inj.

darsam;

drsana and drsana a adrsan inj. drsan op. drs6yam; s: adrak (B.) and adraksit (B.) A. adrksata (3.
SB. drksase
drksam (K.) red. adidrsat (B).
sa
pi.)
ft. draksyati (B.).
ps. drsyate; ao. adarsi and darsi
pt.

pp.

drsta

INF.

gdv. drs6nya.

drsaye

drse,

gd. drstva, drstvaya, -drsya.

drastum.

cs.

ds.

darsayati.

didrksase.

drh

malie firm,

IPF.

I.

P.

d]?mha

ipv.

drmhethe
drmhata (3. s.).

VI. A.

PR.

ipv.

IV.

drmhata
ipv.

ao.

pt.

drhya

dadrhana. ppf. adadrhauta.

adrmhit. pp. drdha. cs. drmhayati.

PF. PT.

ipf.

drmhantam

is

adrmhat.
drmhant.

drhyasva.
adrmhis,

pf. didyota
pr. dyotate.
didyutur
shine, I. A.
pt. dyutant
ao. root
pt. didyutana.
A. didyut6
dyiitana and dyutana a: adyutat (B.) red. adidyutat

dyut

'

pp.
s.
didyutas
adyaut. ft. dyotisyati (B.).
dyutta. GD. -dyutya (B.). cs. dyutayati (shine), dyotayati [illumine), int. davidyutati (3. pi.) sb. davidyutat;
pt. davidyutat
ipf. davidyot.
dra nm, II. P. : ipv. drantu. pf. dadriir pt. dadrana.
inj.

1.

AO. s: SB. drasat.

(B.).

int. pt.

cs.

drapayati(B.)

daridrat.

ds.

didrapayisati

APPENDIX

892
2.

dr a,
FT.

F.

sleep, II.

drasyati

drati

pk.

ao. sis: adrasit (B.).

(B.).

drana.

pp.

(B.).

pf. dudrava (B.)

sb. dudravat.
dravati.
run, I. P.
adudruvat (B.), ft. drosyati
ao. red.
ppF. adudrot.

dru

cs.

druta

pp.

(B.).

dravayati

od.

(B.).

(flows)

drub

drutva

(B.)

-drutya (B.).
dodrava.

int. pf.

dravayati.

pr. druhyati (B.). pf. 1. dudroha,

he hostile, IV. P.
dudrohitha. ao. a druhas inj. druhas druhan
adruksas (B.). ft, dhroksyati. pp. drugdha. gd.
sa
-druhya. inf. drogdhavai. ds. dudruksat.
pe. dv6sti dvismas hb. dv6sat dv6sama
dvis hate, II.
A. dv6sate ipv. dvestu pt. dvisant. pf. didv6sa (B.).
pp. dvista.
AG. sa: INJ. dviksat; A. dviksata (3. s.).
inf. dv^stos (B.).
GDv. dvesya, -dvisenya.
:

2.

dhan run

vams.

dhanv

dadhanat op. dadhanyur pt. dadhandhanayan A. dhanayaute dhanayanta.

pf. sb,
cs.

run,

dhanva.

P.

I.

pf.

pk.

ipv.
sb. dhanvati
dhanvati
dadhanvir6. ao. is adhanv;

dadhanve

isur,
pt. dhamant.
pr. dhamati
hlotc, I. P.
ps. dhamyate;
adhamat.
dhmayate (B. ); pp.
dhamita and dhmata. qd. dhmaya (B.).
pr. dadhami, dadhasi, dadhati; dhatdhaj)u/, III.
dadhmasi and dadhmas, dhatta, dadhati A.
thas
dadhe, dhats6, dhatta dadhathe, dadhate dadhate
dadhathas dadhama,
SB. dadhani, dadhas, dadhat

dham, dhma,

IPF.

1.

dadhan; A. dadhase, dadhate; dadhavahai; op. dadhita and dadhita; dadhimahi; ipv. dhehi and dhattat,
dhatta and dhattana,
dadhatu dhattam, dhattam
dadhatam. pt. dadhat dadadhatu
A. dhatsva
dhana. ipf. adadham, adadhas, adadhat adhattam
pf. daA. adhatthas, adhatta.
adhatta, adadhur
A.
dadhatiir
dadhima, dadhur
dhatha, dadhau
dadhidhve, dadadhis6, dadh6 dadhathe, dadhate
dadhidhvam. ao.
dhir6 and dadhre
ipv. dadhisva
root adham, dhas, adhat and dhat dhatam, adhatam
;

VEEBS

LIST OF

393

A. adhithas, adhita adhitam adhimahi sb.

dhas, dhati and dhat ; dhama dhethe, dhaithe ; dhamahe; inj. dham; dhiir; A. dhimahi; op. dheyam;
dheyur; ipv. dhatu dhatam; dhata, dhatana, and
adhat (SV.), dhat ;
a
dhetana, dhantu A. dhisva

adhur

adhisi(B.); adhisata (B.) sb. dhasathas; dhasatha;

ft. dhaop. dhisiya (B.), dhesiya (MS.),
INJ. dhasur
ao.
adhayi; pp.
syati, -te(B.); dhata (B.). ps. dhiyate;
inf.
-dhe, dhahita, -dhita. gd. dhitva (B.), -dhaya.
s:

tave, dhatavai, dhiyadhyai; -dham;

dhatos. cs.dhapayati; sb. dhapayathas.

dhatum

(B.);

ds. didhisati,

ipv.
-te; INJ. didhisanta; op. didhisema; didhiseya;
gdv. didhididhisantu pt. didhisana dhitsati, -te
;

sayya.
2.

dha

adhat. pp.
ao. root
pr. dhayati.
such, IV. P.
inf. dhatave.
GD. dhitva (B.), -dhiya (B.).
:

dhita.

dhapayate

cs.
1.

dhav
is

1.

I.

run,

adhavit

dhav

dhavati, -te. ppf. adadhavat. ao.

dhavayati.
adhavista.
ao. is
pr. dhavati, -te.

pk.

cs.

(B.).
I.

loasli,

dhauta.

pp.

-ti (B.).

cs.

-te (B.).

dhavayati,

didhye didhyatham and didhitham

(AV.) SB.didhayas; didh^yan; px.didhyat; didhyana.
iPF. adidhet, didhet; adidhayur; A. adidhita. pf. didhpf.
aya didhima, didhiyur and didhyiir didhire.

dhi

thinh, III.

pr.

dhita.

dhu

dedhyat

INT.

(TS.).

sb. dhunavat
dhiinut6
dhUnuta A. dhiinusva pt.
dhiinvant dhiinvana. ipf. adhunot A. adhunuthas,
adhiinuta. VI. P.: pr. dhuvati; op. dhiiv^t. pf. dudhuv6;
pt. dhuvana
ao. root
OP. dudhuvita.
ppf. diidhot.

V.

shulce,

IPV.

pr.

dhiinoti

dhunuhi and dhiinu

s: A.

adhiisata

dhiiyate
dodhaviti

pp.

pt.

(3. pi.),

ft.

dhavisyati, -te

(B.).

ps.

int.
gd. dhutva (B.), -dhuya.
dodhuvat and davidhvatj pf. davi-

dhiita.

dhava.

dhr

liohl

pf.

dadhartha, dadhara

dadhre, dadhrird.

APPENDIX

394
Ao. root

PS.

pp.

dharmane

INF.

dardharsi

dhrati(B.);

dhrs dare, V.
dadhrsur.

ft.

-te;

red.:

didhrtam

ipv.

dhriyate;

yati,

adidharat; didhar (2. 3. s.);

didhrta. ft. dharisyate.
dhrta. gd. dhrtva (B.), -dhrtya (B.).
dhartari dhartavai (B.). cs. dhara-

dhrthas

iNJ.

didharat

iNJ.

ps. dharyate
adardhar
dadharti (B.)
dadhartu (B.).

dharayisyati

ipf.

ipv.

int.

(B.).

3.

pi.

da-

dhrsnoti ipv. dhrsnuhi. pf. dadharsa;

dadharsati and dadharsat; A. dadhrsate ; inj. dadharsit pt. dadhrsvams ppp. dadhrsanta.
dhrsamana dhrsana
AO. a
pt. dhrsant
INJ. dhrsat
is
adharsisur (B.j. pp. dhrsta and dhrsita.
(AV.)
-dhrsas.
inf. -dhrse
GDV. -dhrsya. gd. -dhrsya (B.).
:

pr.

sb.

cs.

dharsayati

dhya

IV. P.

think,

AC.

dhraj,
ipf.

pr.

adhyasisam

sis:

dhyata

(B.).

gd. dhyatva.

(B.).

dhraj sweep, I.
adhrajan. ao. is

pr.

dhvams
ao. a

P.

scatter, I.
:

pr.

dhvasan.

dhvamsayati,

dhvan sound
ayat; ao.

per.

pp.

dadhyau

pf.

dhyayati.

(B.).

ft.

dhyata

(B.).

(B.).

pp.

ds.

didhyasate (B.).
dhrajamana.
dhrajant

pt.

op. dhrajisiya.

dhvamsati, -te(B.). pf. dadhvase.

cs. dhvasayati
dhvasta (B.).
;

-te (B.).

ao. is

adhvanit.

pp.

dhvanta.

cs.

adhvan-

dhvanayit.
dhvr injure, I. P. pr. dhvarati (B.). ao. s A. adhursata
ds. diidhursati.
inf. dhurvane.
(3. pi.),
naks attain, I. pr. naksati, -te inj. naksat ipv. naksasva; pt. naksant; naksamana. ipf. anaksan. pf.
inj.

nanaksiir

nad
ati

sound,

nanaks^.

P.

I.

(3. pi.)

pr. nadati.

nanadyate

(B.)

cs.
;

pt.

int.

nadayati.
nanadat.

nanad-

nem6. ppf.
pf. nanama
namati,
hend,
s: anan (K.)
ao. red.: inj. ninamas;
nanamas.
A. anamsata (3. pL, B.). sb. namsai, namsante; pt.
namasana. ft. namsyati (B.). pp. nata gdv. nantva.
cs. namayati.
inf. -namam, -name.
GD. -natya (B.).

nam

I.

pr.

-te.

LIST OF VEBBS
INT.

nannamiti nannate (3. s.)

irr. anannata (3. s.).

nas

1.

yati
2.

P.

IV.

lost,

ninasas

nesat.

inf.

tk.

ft.

nasyati
ao. red.

I.: pr.

nasisyati.

nasayadhyai.
:

AG. root

A. pr. nasate
OP. nasimahi.

I.
:

nah hintl, IV.:

nahyamana.
naddha.

mana.
a

pr.

-nahya

pp.

nathita
A.

pt.

anijam

I.

uind,
PF.

revile, I.

nasanta.

(2. pi.);

pt.

nahyamana;

pp.

(B.).

A. pr. nathate
nadhita.
:

(B.)

pt.

nadha-

ipv. ninikta (2. pi.).

III.
nijana.
pp. nikta.
inj. niksi.
anaiksit
:

inf. -nije.

cs.

nejayati(B.).

ipv.

P.

nindima

anindisur

pt.

ps.

GD. niktva(B.), -nijya(B.).

nenikte

inj.

nahyatana

ipv.

nahyati;
nanaha.

seek aid,

II.

nasamahe

pf.

gd.

nadh

nij wash,

int.

A. namsi
s.)
ds. inaksasi

inaksat.

unite,

Ao.

(2. 3. s.),

ana];
;

nath,

nas

-te.

nasati,

aninasat; n^sat; inj.

cs. nasapp. nasta.

nas attain, I. pr. nasati, -te. ao. root

nat (3. s.) anastam inj. nak and nat (3.
inf. -nase.
s sb. naksat.
OP. nasimahi
INJ.

nan-

he

nanasa; nesur(B.).

PF.

nannamat

rr.

namaua

395

nenigdhi.
pr. nindati

ninidiir.

nindisat.

sb.

nindat

sb.

ao.
ps.

root

ipv.

nindyate

nindata.

nidana

pt.

pp.

is

nindita.

DS. SB. ninitsat.

ni

lead, I.

pr. nayati, -te

inj.

(AV.);

sb.

nayat; nayanta;

nayati, nayat; A. nayasai

ipv. nayatu; A. nayasva

nayant; nayamana ipf. anayat. II.: pr. n6si(

netha; iff. anitam (3. du.). pf. ninetha, ninaya
IPV.)
ninyathur; ninye (B.) sb. ninithas op. niniyat; ipv.

pt.

ninetu.

ao. s

anaista

(2.

pi.)

anesata

(3.

pi.)

sb.

n6satha; inj. naista (2. pi.); A. nesta

ft. nesyati; -te (B.)
nayiis: anayit (AV.).
(3. s.)
gd. nitva (B.), -niya.
nita.
pp.
ps.
niyate
syati (B.).
inf. nesani; n^tavai (B.); n6tum (B.), nayitum (B.)
netos (B.). ds. ninisati (B.). int. neniyate.
n6sati, n6sat

APPENDIX

396

nu

pk. navati
int.
navamahe, navante
navant; navamana. ipf. anavanta. II.
PT. nuvant
ipf. anavan.
ppf. anunot, nunot
A. anusi
anusatam
anusata
inj. nusata
I.

praise,

pt.

navanta;
P.

Ao. s

(3. pi.)

is

A, anavista.

gdv. navya.

nonaviti

int.

nonumas and nonumasi sb. nonuvanta ipf. navinot

anonavur pf. nonava nonuvur.
nud push, VI. pk. nudati, -te pf. nunude nunudre.
;

AO. root

syate
int.

inj.

pp.

(B.).

nutthas
is
nutta nunna
:
'

anonudyanta

nudisthas.

inj.

inf.

(SV.).

not-

ft.

-nude

-nudas.

(B.).

nrt dance, IV. P. pr. nrtyati ; ipv. nrtya, nrtyatu

nrtyant. ao. root: nrtur (pf. '?) ; a: pt. nrtamana
anartisur. pp. nrtta. cs. nartayati.
:

pac

I.

cooh,

pr.

INJ.

pacat

PF.

papaca

pacati, -te

pt.

is:

sb. pacani, pacati, pacat

;
pacata, paeantu. IV. A. pr. pacyate.
sb. paksat.
pec6. ppf. apeciran. ao. s
;

ipv.

FT.

paksyati, -te (B.)

pakta (B.). ps. pacyate. go.
paktva. INF. paktave. cs. pacayati, -te (B.).
pat fly, I. P. pr. patati sb. patati, patat inj. patat
OP. patet
ipv. patatu
pt. patant.
ipf. apatat.
pf.
;

op.
papata
petathur, petatur
paptima, paptur
papatyat; pt. paptivams. ao. red. apaptat and apipatat; apaptama, apaptan; inj. paptas, paptat; paptan;
;

IPV.

ft.

paptata.

patisyati

pp. patita.

apati (B.)
pattave
patitum
;

Ds. pipatisati.

pad

go,

pt.

papatiti

IV.: pr. padyate

ao. root

PRC.

padista;

patthas.

panna.
(B.).

int.

cs.

apatisyat

-patya

patayati,
;

sb.

ps. ao.

(B.j.

-te

inf.

(B.).

patayati.

papatan.

padyati (B.) ipv. padyasva

apadyanta. pf. papada ped6
apadmahi, apadran sb. padati, padat

padyamana

(B.).

cs.

(B.).

co.

gd. patitva,

ipf.

red.:

s:

apipadama;

inj.

patsi

(1.

s.),

pp.
ps. ao. apadi, padi
patsyati (B.).
-padya. inf. -padas pattum (B.), pattos
padayati, -te ; ps. padyate (B.) ds. pipadaFT.

gd.

yisati (B.).

LIST OF VERBS
pan

I.

admire,

A.

Ao.

papn6.

papana (1.
panyate
gdv. panayayya. int.

in.t. pananta.
panista (3. s.).

panayati, -te

cs.

panita.

pr.

is

397

pf.

ps.

s.)

pp.

pt.

panipnat.
pas see, IV. pr. pasyati, -te sb. pasyani, pasyasi and
pasyas, pasyat
pasyama, pasyan inj. pasyat op.
pasyet pasyeta ipv. pasya pasyasva pt. pasyant
pasyamana ipf. apasyat apasyanta. Cp. spas.
pr. pibati, -te
1. pa drinlc, I.
se. pibasi, pibati and
:

inj. pibat
ipv.
pibava, pibathas, pibatas
pibat
pibatu pibasva pibadhvam pt. pibant ipf. apibat.
PR. pipite (B.), pipate (B.)
ipf.
III.
op. pipiya (B.)
apipita(B.); ipv. pipatu (K.) pt. pipana and pipana
PF. papatha, papau
papathur, papxir; A.
(AV.).
pt.
op.
papivams papana.
pap6 papir6
papiyat;
AO. root
apam, apas, apat apama, apur sb. pas
prc. peyas (3. s.); ipv. pahi, patu
pathas; panti
patam, patam pata and patana, pantu pt. pant s
inj. pasta (3. s.).
ft. pasyati, -te (B.).
ao.
ps. piyate
;

apayi

gd. pitva, pitvi

pp. pita.

inf.

-paya.

pitaye,

patave, patavai patos (B.) pibadhyai. cs. payayati

Ds. pipayayiset (K.).
ds. pipasati;
pt.
pipisati;
pipisant.
pr. pami, pasi, pati
2. pa protect, II.
pathas, patas
sb. pat
ipv. pahi,
patha, pathana, panti
patas
pt.
patu patam, patam pata, pantu
pant pana
ipf. apam, apas, apat
apama, apur. ao. s sb. pasati.
pr. payate.
II. A.
pt. piyana.
V.
pi, pi swell, I. A.
;

PR. pinvire

pt.

p6tha, pipaya

pinvant,

f.

pinvati

pinvana.

pf. pi-

pipyathur; pipyiir pipye (3. s.) sb,

pipayat
pipayatas
pipayan
pipayata
pipayanta inj. pipes ipv. pipihi, pipaya pipyatam,
pt.
pipyatam
pipyata
pipivams
pipyana and
pipyana. ppf. apipe
apipema, apipyan apipayat
apipayanta. pp. pina (AV.).
pinv fatten, I. pr. pinvati, -te inj. pinvat pinvanta
pipayas,

APPENDIX

398

pinva pinvatam pinvata A. pinvasva, pinvpt. pinvant

iff.
atam pinvadhvam
pinvamana
apinvata,
apinvatam
apinvam, apinvas, apinvat

ipv.

apinvan
pinvita

A.

(B.).

pis adorn, Yl.

pipis6

s.

pinvayati

pr.

root

ao.

int. pt,

sicell.

pip6sa; pipisur; A.
ps. pisyate
pisana.

pf.

pt.

pp.

pipinvathur.

Cp. pi

(B.).

-te.

pimsati,

pipisr6,

pf.

apinvata.

3.

cs.

pepisana.
pis crush, VII. P. pr. pinasti pimsanti inj. pinak (2. 3.
VI. P.
ipf. pinak.
pt. pimsant
IPV. pinastana
s.)
ao. sa
pf. pip6sa
iPF. apisan (AV.).
apikpipis^.
pp. pista

pisita.

p^pisat

san

PS.

(B.).

pisyate (B.)

pp.

gd. pistva (B.).

pista.

p^stavai (B.) p6stum (B.).

pid press: pf. pipid6. cs. pidayati.
pus thrive, IV. P. pr. pusyati. pf. puposa
i\p.

PT.

yasma

(B.)

root

ao.

pupusvams.

pus^yam

op.

op.

pupusyas

pusyasam (B.) pnspus6ma. pp. pusta. inf.

prc.

pusyase. cs. posayati.

pu cleanse, IX. pr. punami, punati punanti punite punate (AV.)and punat6; ipv. punihi and punitat, punatu
punitam punita, punitana and punata, punantu pt.
pr. pavate
I. A.
punant punana ipf. apunan.
:

SB.

pavate

ipv.

pavasva,

pavadhvam,
apavathas. pf. pupuv-

pavatam

pavantam; pt. pavamana; ipf.

vir (B.)
pupuv6 (B.). ppf. apupot.

ao. is

iN.T.

pavista

piitva

(3. s.).

-piiya

puyate;

ps.

(B,).

pp.

pavitum

inf.

-te (B.), pavayati (B. ).

pr j^ciss. III. P. PR. piparsi, piparti

(B.).

apavisur
putvi

on.

puta.

pavayat,

cs.

piprthas piprtha,
piprati ; ipv. piprhi and piprtat, pipartu; piprtam; piprta and pipartana. ao. red. apiparam, apiparas apiparan inj. piparas, piparat and piparat ; s sb. parsati,
cs.
sb. parisat.
inf. parsani.
parsat ipv. parsa is
:

parayati
pre mix, VII.
prncate (3.
;

pi.)

inj.

pt.

parayant.
prncanti A. prnc6, prnkte
prnak (3. s.) op. prncita ipv.

parayati
pb. prnaksi

sb.

LIST OF VERBS

399

prndhi (= prngdhi), prnaktu; prnktam pt. prncant;

prncana ipf. aprnak (3. s.). III. P. ipv. piprgdhi
piprkta. pf. paprciir (B.) sb. paprcasi op. paprcyam,
ao. root
sb. parcas
op.
pt. paprcana.
paprcyat
s
A.
pt.
aprak
aprksi, aprkta.
prcimahi
prcana
inf. -proe
PS. prcyate; pp. prkta; -prgna.
prcas.
prn fill, VI. pr. prnati sb. prnaithe (du. 2.) ipv. prna
prnata prnasva prnadhvam ipf. aprnat. inf. prnadhyai. Cp. pf fill.
pf fill, IX. PR, prnami, prnasi, prnati prnitas prnanti
SB. prnati, prnat
op. prniyat
ipv. prnihi, prnatu
prnitam prnita, prnitana A. prnisva pt. prnant
ipf. aprnas, aprnat.
III.
pr. piparmi, piparti
piipv. pipartu
prati (3. pi.)
piprtam pipartana; ipf.
;

vams.
red.

(3. s.

= apiprta).

AO. root:

ipv.

apupuram (B.)

apiprata

puristhas (B.).
inf. -puras (K.).
T^yhfill up, IV. A.

pf. op.

piirdhi

pupiiryas

piparat
piiryate (B.)
in.t.

ps.
cs.

purayati

pt.

papr-

pec.

priyasam (AV.)
ipv. pupurantu is
;

pp.

piirna

purta.

sb. piirayati.

pyayasva, pyayatam
pyayantara
pyayamana. ao. sis op. pyasisimahi
(A v.). pp. pyata. cs. pyayayati ps. pyayyate (B.).
prach asl; VI. pr. prchati, -te sb. prchat prchan A.
prchai. pf. papracha paprachiir (B.). ao. s apraksam, aprat apraksit. ft. praksyati (B.). ps. prchpp. prsta
gdv. paprks^nya.
inf. -prcham,
yate
-pfche prastum.
prath spread, I. A. pr. prathate. pp. 2. papratha (= paA. paprath6 and paprathe (3. s.)
sb.
prat-tha ?)
paprathas, paprathat paprathan inj. paprathanta
PT. paprathana.
ao. root
pt. prathana
is
3. s. A.
:

pr.

pyayase

ipv.

pt.

aprathista

P.

ipvafill, II.

prathista.
PR. prasi.

paprathur, papratur

paprvams.
PS. AO.

ao. root

aprayi

pp.

cs.

pf.

prathayati,

-te.

papratha, papra and paprau

papriir

aprat

prata.

A. paprs6, papr6
sb.

pras

3. s.

pt.

apras.

APPENDIX

400
pri p?msr, IX.
iPF.

pr. prinati; prinit6

pf.

aprinat.

pipriye

piprayasva pt,
apipres (B.)
apiprayan.

piprihi

pruth

pr.

pt.

prinant

prlnana.

se.

piprayas, piprayat ipv.

pipriyana. ppf. apiprayam,
;

ao.

apraisit (B.)
ds. piprisati.

gd. pritva (B.).

pp. prita.

pr^sat.

sb.

pt. prothant
prothamana.
popruthat.
prus sp-inkle, V. pr. prusnixvanti prusnut^ sb. prusnavat. VI. P. ipv. prusa pt. prusant. IV. P. ipf.
IX. P.
pt. prusnant (B.).
ft. pt.
aprusyat (B.).
snort, I.

GD. -pruthya.

prothati

int. pt.

pp.

prosisyant.
^\\x float, I.

AO. red.

psa

(B.)

pp. pluta.

GD.

popluyate
-psaya

(B.).

pf.

aplosta

(B.).

plavati
;

-pluya

pupluv6
ft.

cs.

(K.).

(B.).

plosyati,

plavayati

(B.).

(B.).

devour, II. P.

GD.

prusita.

plavate

apiplavam

-te(B.).
int.

PR.

pr. psati.

ps.

apsiyata

(B.)

pp.

psata.

(B.).

phan spring'., cs. phanayati. int. pt. paniphanat.

bandh hind, IX. pr. badhnami badhnimas, badhnanti
ipv. badhana, badhnatu
A. badhnate (3. pi.)
badhnantu A. badhnitam (3. s.). ipf. abadhnat abadhnan A. abadhnita (3. s.). pp. babandha bedhur. ft.
bhantsyati. ps. badhyate; pp. baddha. gd. baddhva;
baddhvaya (B.); -badhya (B.). inf. -badhe. cs. bandh:

ayati

badh

(B.).

oppress,

I.

A.

badhista.

iNJ.

(3.

s.)

badhate.

badhita.

ds.

badhayati.

cs.

babadhe

pf. babadh6.
ao. is
-badhya. inf. badhe.
bibhatsate; bibadhisate (B.). int.
badbadhd
badpt. babadhana

pr.

pp.

gd.

badhana.

budh
IPV.

wake,

I.

P.

pr.

bodhatu.

IV.

bodhati
:

pr.

sb.

bodhati

budhyate

op.

bodhat
biidhyema

inj.

budhyasva budhyadh vara px. budhyamana. pf.

bubodhatha
bubudh6 sb. bubodhas, bubodhati
PT. bubudhana.
ao. root: A. 3. pi. abudhran, abua
dhram
ipv. bodhi (2. s.)
pt. budhana
inj.
IPV.

LIST OF VERBS

401

budhanta red. abubudhat s A. abhutsi abhutsmahi, abhutsata; is: SB. bodhisat. ft. bhotsyati(B.). ps.
AO. abodhi; pp. bviddha. gd. -budhya
(B.), inf. -budhe.
cs. bodhayati; bodhayate
int. bobudhiti (B.).
(B.).
brh malx big, VI. P.: pr. brhati. I. pr. brmhati, -te
:

babarha

PF.

(B.).

barhxt.

babrhana.

pt.

ao. is

inj.

barhis,

cs.

barhaya. int. sb. barbrhat; ipv. barbrhi.

brti sai/, II.: pr. bravimi, bravisi, braviti
briimas,
bruvanti A. bruve, brus6, brut6 and bruve bruvate
bruvate sb. bravani and brava, bravasi and bravas,
bravat; bravama, bravatha (AV.), bravan A. bravavahai, bravaite bravamahai op. bruyat bruyatam
;

A. bruvita; bruvimahi; ipv. bruhi and brutat, bravitu

brutam bruta and bravitana, bruvantu pt. bruvant
bruvana. ipf. abravam, abravis, abravit abrutam
;

abravita, abruvan.

bhaks

eat: ao.

bhaksayate
bhaj

red.:

(B.)

I.

divide,

ps.

pr.

pF.

(=ipv.).

2.

bheje; bhejate

ababhaksat

(B.)

bbaksyate

(B.).

-te.

bhajati,

babhaktha

s.

bhejir6:

pt.

cs.

P.

II.

(B.), 3.

bhaksayati;
:

pr.

bhaksi

babhaja

s.

ao. red.:

bliejana.

A.
abi-

s: abhak and abhaksit

bhajur (B.)
A. abhaksi,
abhakta sb. bhaksat inj. bhak (2. 3. s.) op. bhaksiya, bhaksita bhaksimahi pro. bhaksista. ft. bhak;

syati, -te (B.).

bhaktvaya
bhanj

hreal;

naktu

ps. bhajyate
pp. bhakta.
gd. bhaktva
-bhajya (B.). cs. bhajayati ps. bhajyate.
VII. P. pr. bhanakti ipv. bhandhi, bha;

bhanj ant. ipf. abhanas (for abhanak, AV.).

PF. babhanja.
ps. bhajyate.
bhan s2)eaJc, I. pr. bhanati bhananti inj. bhananta.
IPF. bhananta.
;

pt.

bhas

devour, III.

bapsathas
inj.

bha
f.

pt.

babhasti; bapsati sb. babhasat

bapsat. VI. P. pr. bhasathas. I. P.
pr.

;
:

bhasat.

shine, II. P.

bhati.

1819

ft.

bhasi, bhati

bhasyati

(B.).

D d

bhanti

ipv.

bhahi

pt.

APPENDIX

402

bhiks

I.

hcf/,

A.

pr.

bhiksate;

bhiksamana.

seta; pt.

bhid split. VII.

pf.

inj. bhiksanta
bibhiks6 (B.).

op,

bhik-

bhinadmi, bhinatsi, bhinatti bhindinj. bhinat (2, 3. s.)

bhinadas, bhinadat
ipv. bhindhi, bhinattu
bhintta
pt.
OP. bhindyat
bhindana. ipf. bhinat (2. 3. s.)
bhindant
abhinat
abhindan. pp. bibh^da; bibhidur. ao. root:
(8. s.)
abhedam, hh.6t (2. 3. s.), abhet (3, s.) sb. bh^dati inj.
bh6t (2. s.) pt. bhidant a op. bhid^yam
s
inj.
anti

pr.

sb.

bhitthas.

abhedi

ft.

(B.)

bhetsyate
pp. bhinna.

bh6ttavai (B.)
bhi /ear, III. P.

ps.

(B,).

bhidyate

gd, bhittva

bh^ttum

(B.).

(B.)

ao.

inf.

-bhidya.

ds. bibhitsati.

bibheti; bibhyati; inj. bibh^s op.

ipv. bibhita, bibhitana ; pt. bibhyat ; ipf.
bibhiyat
sb. bhayate
I. A.
pr. bhayate
bibhes, abibhet.
pr.

bhayatam

abhayanta pt. bhayamana.

PF. bibhaya (1. s.), bibhaya (B. also bibhaya)
bibhyaper. pp. bibhayam
tur
pt. bibhivams
bibhyur
pt. bhiycakara. ao. root inj. bh6s (TS.) bhema
ana; red.: bibhayat abibhayur (Kh.) abibhayanta
s: bhaisis (AV.) abhaisma, abhaisur; pt. bhiyasana
(A v.). CO. abhe.syat (B.). pp. bhita. inf. bhiyase. cs.

IPV.

(8. s.)

ipf.

bhisayate (B.) ao. bibhisas; bibhisathas.

bhuj enjoy, VII. A. pr. bhunkte bhunjate and bhunjpf. btibhuj^
pt. f. bhunjati.
SB. bhunajamahai
at6
ao.
root
sb.
inj.
bhojate
bubhiijmahe, bubhujrird.
bhojam; a: op. blitij^nia ipv. bhuja (TS.). ps. bhujyate (B.). inf. bhuj6 bhojase. cs. bhojayati.
inj. bhujat
ipv. bhuja (VS.).
ppf,
2. bhuj bend, VI. P.
gd. -bhujya (B.).
abubhojis.
pt.
bhur quiver, VI.: inj. bhuranta; ipv. bhurantu
;

1.

bhuramana.

int.

jarbhuriti;

pt.

jarbhurat

jarbhur-

ana.

bhu

le,

I.

pr.

bhavati

bhavats

(B.).

pf.

babhuva,

babhutha and babhuvitha, babhuva; babhuvathur,

babhuvatur; babhuvima, babhuva, babhuvur; op.

LIST OF VERBS

403

babhuyas, babhuyat ipv. babhutu pt. babhuvams.

Ao. root
abhuvam, abhus, abhut; abhutam, abhutam
abhuma, abhuta and abhutana, abhuvan sb. bhiivani,
bhuvan
inj.
bhuthas, bhutas
bhuvas, bhvivat
bhuvam, bhus, bhut bhuma op. bhuyas, bhuyat
;

bhuyama

bhuyas
bhuyasma,
bhuyasta ipv. bodhi (for bhudhi), bhutu bhutain
abua
red.
bhuta and bhutana
bhiivas, bhuvat
pro.

bhuyasam,

3.

bhuvas.

FT.

bhavita

bhavisyati;

bhuta.

pp.

(B.).

gd. bhutvi,
bhavitva.
bhavya and bhavya
bhutva -bhuya. inf. bhuve, -bhxive, -bhve bhusani
bhavitum (B.) bhavitos (B.). cs. bhavayati. ds. bii-

GDV.

bhusati.

bhr

b6bhaviti.

int.

pr. bibharmi, biIII.

bibhrtas
bibhrmasi and
bibhrthas,
bibhrmas, bibhrtha, bibhrati sb. bibharani, bibharat
ipv. bibhrhi, bibhartu
bibhrtam
op.
bibhryat
bibhrta (TS.) pt. bibhrat ipf. abibhar. pp. jabhartha,
jabhara jabhriir A. jabhrs6, jabhr6 jabhrir6 baI.

hear,

pr. bharati, -te.

bharsi, bibharti

bhara
PPF.

(B.)

s:

bharsat; inj.
syati bharta

ao.

ajabhartana.

bhrtam

A. babhr6

babhrana sb. jabharat.

root: pro. bhriyasam; ipv.
pt.

abharsam,
3. s. bhar;

3.

sb.
abhar; abharstara
abbarisam. ft. bhari;

is:

abharisyat. Ps. bhriyate sb.

gd. -bhrtya.
inf.
bhrta.
bhartum ; bhartave, bhartavai bharadhyai bharmane. ds. bubhursati (B.).
int. jarbhrtas ; bharibhrati (3. pi.); sb. bharibharat ; pt. bharibhrat.
;

bhriyate

ao.

co.

(B.).

bhari

pp.

bhrams
pp.

fall, I.

-bhrsta

bhramsat.

pr. inj.

bhrasta.

ao. a

inj.

bhrasat.

cs. pt.

bhrasayant.
pr. bhrajate
pt. bhrajamana.
bhraj shine, I. A.
root: abhrat; pro. bhrajyasam.
ps. ao. abhraji.
;

mamh, mah be great,

mahema, maheta

mamhate; mahe (3. s.) op.

mamhatam pt. mamhamana.
amamhata. pf. mamah^ (1. 3.)
sb. mamahas
mamahanta ipv. mamaliasva, mamahantam pt.
;

ipf.
INJ.

ao.

I.

pr.

ipv.

D d 2

APPENDIX

404

mamahana.

niahita

pp.

-te

inahayati,

inf.

(B.).

mah6, mahaye.

mamhayam.

inj.

cs.

mahayant

pt.

mahayamana.
I. P.
ao. root op. majjyat (B.).
ft.
majjati.
si)i]c,
manksyati, -te (B.). gd. -majjya. cs. majjayati (B.).
pr. mathnami
mathnite (B.
math, manth stir, IX.
ipv. mathnita, mathnantu
pt. mathnant
ipf. amathnat I, manthati, -te mathati (AV.). pf. mamatha
methur (B.) A. methir^ (B.). ao. root sb. mathat
is
amanthistam (3. du.) amathisata (B.) inj. mathis,

majj

mathit.
PS.

INF.

mathisyati, -te (B.).

(B.)
mathita. gd. mathitva (B.) -mathya
manthitavai mathitos (B.).

mathyate

(B.).

mad

ft.

manthisyati

pp.

madati; -te. III. P.: pr, mamatsi ( ipv.). IV. P. pr. madyati

he exhilarated, I.: pk.

matsi.

P.

II.

pr.

mamada

mamadas, mamadat mamadan

ipv. mamaddhi, mamattu
ppf. amamamattana.
madur. ao. root: ipv. matsva red.: amimadas; A.
amimadanta; s amatsur A. amatta (3. s.) amatsata
PF.

(B.).

sb.

(3.

pi.); SB.

sata

(3. pi.)

matsati and matsat; matsatha; inj. matis

amadisur. ps. pt. madyamana
pp.
:

madasb.
madayati, -te
madayase, madayate
yati
inf.
madayaite
madayadhve and madayadhvai
madayadhyai pp. madita.
man fJiinl; IV. A. pr. manyate. VIII. A. pr. manv6
manmahe, manvat6 sb. manavai, manavate inj
manvata (3. pi.) op. manvita ipv. A. manutam (3. s.)
PT. manvana; ipf. amanuta (3. s.)
amanvata (3. pi.)
op. mamanyat
pf. men6 (B.); mamnathe, mamnate
ppf. amaman (3. s.). ao. root
amata
IPV. mamandhi.
amanmahi sb. manamahe, mananta pt. manana
sb
s
amamsatam
amamsata
A.
amamsta
mamsai, mamsase, maipsate and marnsatai (TS.)
mamsante inj. mamsthas, mamsta and mamsta (AV.)
matta.

gdv. -madya.

maditos

inf.

(B.).

cs.

op.

masiya,

mamsisthas,

marasista

mamsimdhi

LIST OF VERBS
mamsirata
syate

mata.

pp.

(B.).

mantavai; mantos (B.).

mimarpsate (AV.), -ti

(B.).

mand

mimamsita

exhilarate, I.

mamandat

pr.

pt.

(AV.).

mandati,

-te.

mamandusi.

f.

ft.

(B.).

gd.

DS.

pp.

manisy6 mam-matya (B.). inf. mautave,

cs. manayati; op. manayet.
amimamsisthas
ao. is
(B.)

mandhvam

ipv.

405

pf.

mamanda

amamandur.

ppf.

sb.

ao.

mandiir pt. mandana is amandit; amandisur

mandista (3. s. A.) amandisatam (3. du. A.) op. mandisimahi (VS.). inf. mandadhyai. cs. mandayati inf.
mandayadhyai.
ma ineasttre, III.: pk. mime, mimite mimate mimiroot

1.

mahe, mimate op. mimiyas, mimiyat ipv. mimihi,

mimatti mimitam, mimitam A. mimisva mimatham
pf. mamatiir
PT. mimana. ipf. am.imithas, amimita.
;

mamur; mame

mamate mamir6 ao. root:

s: amasi; sb.
pt. mana (TS.)
IPV. mahi; masva
masatai (AV.). ps. ao. amayi; pp. mita; odv. m6ya
3.);

(1.

ma hello
SB.

mitva

GD.

(A v.).
2.

tv,

III. P.

-mitya

pr.

mimati

ppf. amiraet.

mimayat.

memyat.
mi fix, V. P.
minvan;
mimyur.

inf. -xn6,

-maya.

minomi, minoti sb. minavama inj.

pf. mimaya;
ipf. minvan.

pr.

minotti.

ipv.
ps.

-mat.

mimanti. pf. mimaya;

int. pt.
inf. matavai.

miyamana;

pt.

miyate;

pp.

mita.

gd.

(B,).

mimikse
mimiksathur, mimiksatur
mim.iksva. cs. meksayati (B.).
mith alternate, I. pr. m6thamasi A. m^thete. VI. P.
pp. mithita.
pf. mimetha.
pt. mithant.

miks mix

pf.

m.imiksire.

wink, VI. P.

ipv.

pr.

misati

pr.

m6hati

mimiksa

misanti

mimiksatam,

pt.

misant.

inf.

-misas.

mih

shed 'water,

I.

mis mix ds. mimiksati

mimiksatam.
mis

ipv.

pt.

mehant m^ghamana.
;

APPENDIX

406

amiksat

ft. meksyati.
pp. midha.
inf.
(B.).
mehayati. int. memihat (B.).
mi damage, IX. pe. minami, minati; nainimasi, minanti ;
SB. minat
minama inj. minit (AV.) minan pt.
minant
minana. ipf. aminas, atninat
aminanta.
IV. A. PK. miyase, miyate op. miyeta(B.). pp. mimaya;
mimaya (AV.). ao. s inj. mesi, mesthas, mesta.

Ao. sa

mih6.

cs.

miyate ao. amayi (B.) pp. mita.

-miyam, -miye. int. pt. memyana.

PS.

miv

muc

P.

I.

push,

mivita

(B.).

VI.

release,

mivya

pr.

mivati

pr.

gd.

pt.

m6tos

inf.

(B.)

-muta

muncasi, muncat

mivant.

i-i-.

(B.).

-te

muneati,

sb.

muncatu A. muiieatam pt. muncant

mana. ipf. amuncat A. amuncata. IV. A.
ipv.

pr.

muc-

mucyatai(AV.). pf. mumucmahe, mumucre

mumueas; raumocati, mum.ocat, mvim^ucat; ipy. m.u-

yase
SB.

muiica-

sb.

mugdhi, mumoktu

2. du. miimuktam, mumocatam

mumocata pt. miumiicana. ppf. amumuktam. ao.
root amok amuktam A. amugdhvam pro. mucista
;

mucas, amueat

mucat
pi.)

OP.

mucyate

muktva

(B.)

-te

mud he

muksiya.
amoci

ao.

muksati,

A.

amukthas

A. amuksi,
(3.

muca

ipv.

sb.

mucati

mucate

inj.

mueas,

mueadhvam s amauk (B.)

mauk (VS.); A. muksata
:

inj.

ft.

moksyati,

mooi

inj.

pp.

-te

(B.).

mukta.

ps.

gd.

inf. moktum (B.).

ds. mu-mueya.
moksate (B.); pt. mumuksamana.
A. pr. modate. pf. mumoda. ao. root

merr//, I.

mudimahi is prc. A. modisisthas. ps. ao. amodi.

INF. mud6. cs.modayati, -te (B.) ds. mrimodayisati(B.).
mus steal, IX. P. pr. musnati pt. musnant ipf. amuspr. mosatha.
ao.
amusnitam.. P P.
nas, amusnat
OP.

is

muh

inj.

mosis.

he dazed,

ao. a
(B.).

pp.

pp.

musita.

IV. P.

amuhat

m.ohayati

(B.)

red.

inf. miis6.

gd. -miisya.

mvihyati.

pf.

dmumuhat.

miidha
miigdha
gd. mohayitva.
;

pr.

(AV.).

mumoha
ft.

inf.

(B.).

mohisyati

miih6.

cs.

LIST OF VEKBS
murch, mur thicken, I. P.
cs. murchayati (B.).
1

mr die, I. pk.
marama A.
mamrvams.
iya

mriyate
'1.

mr

(B.)

injure

ayati

mrj

wi]_)e,

mrta.

IX. P.

crush,

yate

mrc

pp.

ao. root

ao. s

mur-

op.

marisyati (AV.).
cs. marayati.

ps.

(B.).

mrnaat. ps. murmarmartu.

pp. mrkta.
cs. marc-

pt.

int. ipv.

(AV.).

pkc. mrksista.

rarthas

inj.

mrtva
mrnihi

ipv.

gd.

murna

pp.

(B.).

maramahe sb. marati

mamara mamrur px.
ft.

(B.).

murta

pp.

amrta

amimarat

amurchat.

marati, marate
pf.
marai.

red.

ipf.

407

mar cay at.

sb.

II.

marsti

pk.

mrjanti

mrj6; mrjmahe

ipv.

marstu A. mrksva
mrddhvam pt. mrj ana ipf.
mrsta (3. s. A.) amrjata. VII. op. mrnjyat (B.) ipv.
pf, mamarja;
ipf. mrnjata (3. pl.j.
inrnajani (B.)
;

raamrjur

mamrje and mamrje

ao. sa

op. m.amrjita.

amrksat amrksama A. amrksanta ipv. mrksatam

is: amarjit
s amarksit (B.)
red.: amimrjanta (B.)
FT. mraksyate (B.), marksyate (B.); mrasta (B.).
(B.).
pp. mrsta
gd. mrstva
gdv. marjya.
PS. mrjyate
;

marjitva (B.) -mrjya. inf. -mrjas (B.). cs. marj ayati,

int. marmrjyate; marimrj-te; marjayati, -te (B.).
yate (B.); sb, marmrjat; marmrjanta; pt. marmrjat
marmrjyamaaa ipf,
marmrjana and marmrjana
;

marmrjma, marmrjata.

mrd

mrdati mrdate (B.) sb. mrlati

and mrdatat (AV.), mrlatu. pf.

pk.
be gracious, VI.
ipv. mrla
;
;

and mrlat

mamrdyur.

OP.

mm

VI, P.

crusli,

IPF.

mrd

amrnat.

crush

marditos

mrdh
is

ao. root:

(B.)

mrnyiir

mrdyasam
;

inj.

(K.)

(B.)

mrdita.

pp.

mrnat

ft.

gd.

led.

ipv. mrna.
amimrnan.

mardisyate

-mrdya

(B.).

(B.).

inf.

(B.).

neglect, I. P.

ao. root

mrdayati.
mrnati

pk.

ao. pkc.

mrdyate

PS.

cs.
:

op,

pk.

mardhati.

mrdhyas

mardhistam.

pp.

is

sb,

mrddha.

VI.

pk. sb.

mardhisat

mrdhati.

inj.

mardh-

408

APPENDIX

mrs

toudi,

VI.

Ao. sa

(B.).

vn.

mrsati,

amrksat

mamrsur

pf.

-te.

mrksas

inj.

mrsta. gd. -mrsya. inf. -mrse.

ind. marirarsyate
INT. SB. raarmrsat
pp.

not heed, IV.

pr.

INJ,

mrsthas

INJ.

marsisthas.

med be fat,
myaks

IV. P.

VI. A.

medyantu.

ipv.

-mrse.

inf.

he situated,

mimiksiir

mrsanta

inj.

mamarsa. ao. root

is
inj. mimrsas
red.

pf.

mrsyate.

ipv.

medatam

medayati.

cs.

(3. s.).

pi.),

(B.).

(B.).

mrs

mamrs6

mrksata (2.
cs. marsayati
;

I.

P.

myaksa.

ipv.

mimiksire.

A.

pf.

root

ao.

mimyaksa

amyak

ps.

amyaksi.

mrad

I.

crush,

mruc, mluc
mrocant.

mla

set,

cs.

ipv.

pr.

pt.

(B.).

inf. mviica.

mlayati

mlata; mlana

pp.

(B.).

pr, yajati, -te; sb. yajati, -te; op. yajeta;

yajantam ; pt. yajant; yajamana. iff.

pi. ijana.

pf. ije (1. 3. s.),

ao. root

ipv.

yeje

(3. s.)

ijathe

red.: ayiyajat
A. ayasta (3. s.j ; sb

yaksva

s: ayas, ayat; s: ayaksit

(B.)

amrucat

ao. a:

(B.).

mliikta.

yajatu;
ayajat; ayajanta.
(B.)

pr.

cs.

mlapayati.

ya.^ sacrifice, I.:

ijir6;

mradi-

ft.

mradayati.
mrocati mlocati

mumloca

IV. P.:

relax,

(B.).

(B.)

P.

mrada.

ipv.

I.

pf.

mrukta

pp.

mradate
-mrade (B.).

pr.

inf.

syati, -te.

yaksat du. 2. yaksatas, 3. yaksatam A. yaksate inj

yat (2. s.) A. yaksi (1. s.) op. yaksiya sa ipv. yak
satam (3. du.). ft. yaksyate yaksyati (B.) yasta (B.)
pp. ista.
inf. yajadhyai; yajadhyai (TS.)
GD. istva.
yastave yastum. cs. yajayati (B.). us. iyaksati, -te
SB. iyaksan
pt. iyaksant
iyaksamana.
yat stretch, I. pr. yatati, -te sb. A. yataite (3. du.) op.
yatema yatemahi ipv. yatatam A. yatasva yatantam pt. yatant yatamana. i^f. yetir6. ao. root
is
pt. yatana and yatana
ayatista (B.). ft. yatisyate
cs. yatayati, -te;
pp. yatta.
gd. -yatya (B.).
(B.).
PS. yatyate (B.j.
;

LIST OF VEKBS

yam

409

oi\
sb. yachat
yaehati, -te
iff.
and
ayayachatat, yachatu.
yacha
yachet
chat A. ayachathas. pf. yayantha, yayama yemathur, yematur yemima, yema, yemur A. yeni6 (3.
stretch

I.

out,

pr.

ipv.

s.)

yemate

ayamur

yemir6 pt. yemana. ao. root yamam

yamas, yamati and yamat yaman A.

sb.

yamase, yamate op. yamimahi pro. yamyas (3. s.)

IPV, yandhi
yantam yanta and yantana a op.
yamet s ayamsam, ayan (3. s.) A. ayamsi (B.),
ayamsta ayamsata sb. yamsat yamsatas yamsan
is
pt.
A. yamsate
inj, A. yamsi
yamasana
ate
ps.
s.
ft.
y amy
yamista (3.
yamsyati (B.).
A.),
gd. -yatya.
Pl^ yata; gdv. yamsenya.
AO. ayami (B.)
INF. yamitavai, yantave
yamam
yantum (B.).
c's. yamayati
yamayati (B.). ds. yiyamsati (B.). int.
yamyamiti.
yas he heated^ III. P. ipv. yayastu. IV. P. pr. yasyati.
;

pp.

yasta; yasita

(B.).

yanti; op. yayam; ipv. yahi,

yatam yata and yatana, yantu pt. yant. iff.
pf.
ayas, ayat ayatam ayama, ayatana, ayur (B.).
ft. yayiyayatha, yayau yayathur yaya, yayur
vams. AO. s ayasam ayasur sb. yasat inj. yesam

ya

go, II.

yatii

P.: pr. yati

sis
SB.

yasisat

ft.

I.

pr.

yata.
(B.)

ayasista, ayasisur

ipv.

yasistam yasista.
gd. yatva (B.)
-yaya (B.).
cs. yapayati (B.).
-yai.
;

pf.

yacati, -te.

yayace

(B.).

ao.

is

FT.

INF.

yacitum.

yu

unite,

cs. yacayati.
YI.: pr. yuvati,

yavan
yuyuv6. PER.

SB.

yuyusati.
2.

ayasistam

ayacista (B.) ; sb. yacisat ; A. yacisamahe.

pp. yacita;
yacisyate.
yacitva and yacya (B.).

ayacit

1.

pp.

yatave, yatavai

asJc,

pro. A. yasisisthas

yasyati.

inf.

yac

ayasisam, ayasit

Y^

ipv.

int.

yutam

-te.

(3.

s.

FT. yiivita (B.).

yoyuve

aejyanite, III.:

pr.

II.

A.)

pp.

yauti; A. yut6
ft.

yuta.

yuvana.

pf.

gd, -ytiya.

ds.

yoyuvat (AV.); yoyiivana.

yuyoti sb. yiiyavat; inj. yuyo;

ft.

APPENDIX

410

J.

yuyuyatam ipv. yuyodhi, yuy6tu;

yuyutam and yuyotam yuyota and yuyotana. I. P.
thas, yuyota; op.

PE.

yuchati

SB.

yavanta

ipv.
op.

yiichantu

yuyat

(B.)

pt.

yiichant.

du.

3.

ao. root

yuyatam

(B.)

pkc.

yuyot s: yosati and yosat

inj. yusam (AV.)
yosatas
yaustam
yaus (2. s.)
is: inj.
A. yosthas (B.)
yausma, yausta, yausur

yuyas

(3. s.)

red.

inj.

ps. ao.

pp. yuta.
inf. yotave, yotavai
ayavi
int. pt. yoyuvat
yavayati
yavayati.
iPF. ayoyavit; pp. yoyava.
yuj johi^ VII.
yunakti yunjanti yunkte yunjate
SB. yunajat; yunajan; A. yunajate(3. s.)
inj. yufijata
IPV. yundhi, yunaktu
(3. pi.)
yunakta, yufijantu A.
yunksva, yuntam 2, du. yunjatham yungdhvam pt.
yunjant; yunjana ipf. ayunak and ayunak ayunjan
A. ayunjata (3. pi.), pf. yuyoja yuyujma A. yiiyuj^

yavis.

cs.

yotos.

ao.
sb. A. yuyojate (3. s.)
pt. yuyujana.
yuyiijr^
root: A. ayuji, ayukthas, ayukta
ayujmahi, ayiig;

dhvam, yiijata and ayujran sb. yojate inj. y6jam

A. yukta (3. s.) op. yujyava, yujyatam ipv. yuksva
PT. yujana
s.
ayuksi ayuksatam (3. du.) ayuksata
;

ft. yoksyati (B.)

yoksyate yokta (B.). ps.
(3. pi.),
yujyate ao. ayoji inj. yoji pp. yukta. gd. yiiktva,
yuktvaya. inf. yuje yoktum (B.).
yudh figlit, IV. pr. yudhyati, -te sb. y vidhyai. IV. ipv.
yiidhya pt. yiidhyant yvidhyamana ipf. ayudhyas,
II. P. yotsi
pr. yodhanti (AV.).
ayudhyat. I. P.
;

A. yuyudhate (3.
yodhi pt. yodhana
is
ayodhit sb. yodhisat inj. yodhis ipv. yodhistam.
gdv. yodhya,
FT. yotsyati, -te (B.).
pp. yuddha.
inf. yudh6, yudhaye
gd. -yuddhvi.
yudh^nya.

(=

IPV.).

du.).

PF.

yuyodha

ao. root

sb.

yuyudhur

yodhat

ipv.

yudham. cs. yodhayati. ds. yuyutsati, -te.

yup obstruct pf. yuyopa yiiyopima. ao. red. ayuyupan (B.). pp. yupita. cs. yopayati. int. yoyup:

yate

(B.).

LIST OF VERBS
yes

P.: pr. y6sati; pt. y6sant.

he heated, I.

ramh

pr. ramhate
aramhas; A. aramhata (8. s.).
I.

hasten,

411

ramhamana.

pt.

pp.

ipp.

rarahana.

pt.

cs.

ramhayati, -te.
pt. raraks p)ofect, I.
pf. raraksa
pr. raksati, -te.
araksit (B.)
sb. I'aksisas,
raksana. ao. is aiaksit
:

raksisat.

raksita.

pp.

raj colour, IV.

ipf.

raksayate (B.).
pp. rakta (B.).

cs.

arajyata.

cs.

rajayati.

INT. rarajiti.

rad

dig, I.

pr, radati, -te

A. radantam

(3,

pi.)

in.j.

radat

rada

ipv.

radant.

pt.

ipf.

radantu;

aradat, radat.

II. P.
pp. radita.
ratsi (= ipv.).
pf. rarada.
radh, randh maJx suhjed, IV. P. ipv. radhya, radhyatu.
j'F. raradhur.
ao. root: ipv. randhi (=randdhi); a:
inj.
HB. radhama
red.
sb. riradha
inj. radham
riradhatam riradhata is inj.
riradhas, riradhat
randhis. pp. raddha. cs. randhayati sb. randhayasi.
ran rejoice, I. pr. ranati inj. rananta ipv. rana. IV.
:

ranyathas ranyanti. pf.

ranyati
rarana (1. s.) sb. raranas, raranat raranata (2. pi.).
INJ. raran (3. s.) ipv. rarandhi; raranta (2. pi.), rarantu.
cs.
ppF. araranur.
inj. ranistana.
ao. is aranisur
P.

PR. ranyasi,

ranayati.

rap

P.

I.

chatter,

IPF.

pr.

rapati

inj.

rapat

op.

rapema.

int. rarapiti.

arapat.

raps hefidl, I. A. rapsate; rapsante. pf. rarapse.

A.
pf. rarabhma
pr. rabhate.
rabh, rambh grasj), I.
rarabh^ rebhird pt. rebhana. ao. s 3. s. A. arabdha
pt. rabliasana. pp. rabdha. gd. -rabhya. inf. -rabham
:

-rabhe.

rambhayati, -te (B,). ds. ripsate (B.).

ipf. aramnas,
ram rejoice, I. A. pr. ramate. IX. P.
inj.
sb. riramama
aramnat.
ao. red.
ariramat
riraman s A. aramsta (3. s.) aramsata (3. pi.) inj.
ramsthas sis inj. ramsisam. ft. ramsyate -ti (B.).
cs.

pp.

rata

(B.).

gd. ratva (B.j.

ramayati and ramayati.

inf.

rantos

(B.).

cs.

APPENDIX

412
va

1.

ririhi; A. rarasva (AV.)

ipv.

give, III.:

raridhvam

raratham

rarana. II. pr.

(3. du.)
rate (B.); pf. rarima; rare (1. s.), rarise ;
rasi (=ipv.)
rarathe pt. rarivams rarana. ao. root aradhvam ;
IPV. rasva; s: arasma ; arasata (3. pi.); sb. rasat
rasan ; A. rasate (3. s.) ; op. rasiya; ipv. A. rasatam
;

rarate

sb,

pt.

(3. s.)

ra

2.

radh

IV. P.
P.

I.

raj rule,
is

rasatham

barJc,

(2.

pr.

du.)

rasantam (3.
ipv. raya

inf. rajase.

arajisur,

A.

succeed, IV.

rajayati
;

pp. rata.

pt.

pr. rasti

cs.

radhyatam

ipv.

pi.)

II. P.

pr. rajati.

rayasi

rayant.

inj. rat.

ao.

(B.), -te.

radhyamana.

pt.

radhnoti (B.). pf. raradha. ao. root aradham. (B.)

radhama i'rc.
sb. radhat and radhati
s
ariradhat (B.)
red.
radhyasam
radhyasma
V. P.

PR.

aratsis

aradhi

is

radhisi

inj.

raddha

pp.

-radhya

ps. a.o.
ratsyati.
gd. raddhva (B.).

gdv. radhya.

ft.

(1. s.).

inf.

iradhyai. cs. radhayati.

A. rinit6 ;
ri floir, IX.
pr. rinati ; rinithas ; rinanti
rinate ; inj. rinas
rinan ; pt. rinant ; rinana. ipf.
(B.).
:

rinas, arinat

arinitam

IV.

arinita.

pr.

riyate

riyante pt. riyamana.

inj. rinak
sb. I'inacava
ric leave, VII. P.
pr. rinakti
rinak (3. s.). pf. rir^ca
ipf. arinak (2. s.)
(3. s.).
op.
riricathe
riricr6
riricathur A. ririkse, ririce
ririkvams
ppf.
pt.
riricana.
riricyam, riricyat
inj. A. rikthas
ipv. riktam
s
arirecit.
ao. root
araik (3. s.) A. ariksi red. ariricat (B.). ft. reksyate
;

ipf. aricyata
ao. areci
pp. rikta.
PS. ricyate
recayati (B.).
rip smear pf. riripiir. pp. ripta.
Cp. lip.
I'ibh sing, I. P.
rebhanti pt. r^bhant. ipf.
pr. r^bhati
r6bhat. pf. rir^bha. ps. ribhyate.
ris tear, VI.
pr. risamahe
pt. risant.
ipv. risantam
(B.).

cs.

pp. rista.
x'is

he hurt, IV.

OP. risyet

pi;,

risyati

risyema.

I.

sb. risyas, risyati and risyat ;

P.: sb. r6sat; inj. resat. ao.

LIST OF VERBS
a

arisan

OP.

risama, risatha and risathana

bb.

and risant

red.

ririses

INF. ris6

rista.

in J. ririsas, ririsat

risas.

resayati

cs.

inf.

tt.

ririsata

and ririsista

pec. A. ririsista

413
risant

(2.

(3.

pi.)

pp.

s.).

risayadhyai.

Ds. ririksati.

rih

rihant

ft.

and
3. pi. rihate
rihanti
r^dhi
rihana (VS.) and rihana. pp. pt.

pe.

II.:

llch,

rihat6

pt. r^rihat
int. rerihyate
ririhvams. pp. ridha.
rerihana.
Cp. lib.
ipv. ruva; ft.
inj. ruvat
rti cry, VI. P.: pe. ruvati
ruvanti. pf. ruruvird (B.).
rtivant.
II. (B.) rauti
;

1.

AO.

is

aravit

aravisui'.

ruta.

pp.

int.

roraviti

ft.

roruvat; roruvana (B.) ipf. aroravit.

int. pt. r6ruvat.
pp. ruta.
ao. is ravisam.
2. ru Ireal;
ruruc6
rurucur
ruroca
pf.
pe.
rocate.
rue shhie, I.
;

(3. s.)

rurucyas

op.

rurueanta;

iN.i.

rurukvams;

pt.

arurucat A.
red.
rurucana. ao. root ft. i-ucana
arurucata (3. s., B.) is A.aroeista (3. s.) op. rucisiya
(AV.) and rocisiya (B.). ps. ao. aroci. pp. rucita (B.).
int. pt. rorucana.
-te (B.).
INF. ruc6.
cs. rocayati
:

ao.
pf. rurojitha, ruroja.
ruj hreal;, I. P. pe. rujati.
pp. rugna.
red.: arurujatam (2. du.).
root: inj. rok
:

GD.

rud

ruktva

(B.)

tveep, II.

P.

rudant.

ft.

inf. -riije.

-riijya (B.j.
pe.

roditi

arodit

ipf.

rudanti
ao.

(B.).

rodat (Kh.)

sb.

a:

arudat.

cs.

rodayati.
1.

rudh obstnict, VII. PE.runadhmi, ru]^addhi A.rundh6

(= runddh6) rundhate (3. pi.) sb. A. runadhamahai
A. rundham (= runddham,
IPV. rundhi (= runddhi)
pp.
iff. A. arundhata (3. pi.),
ft. rundhana
3. s.)
:

rurodhitha A. rurudhre. ao. root arodham arudhma a arudhat arudhan inj. rudhat ft. rudharaut arautsit (B.) A. arutsi (B.), aruddha
ant
s
pp. ruddha.
ps. rudhyate
FT. rotsyati, -te (B.).
(B.).
:

GD.

-riidhya.

(B.);

roddhos

inf.
(B.).

-riidham,

rundham

cs. riirutsate (B.).

(B.),

-rodham

APPENDIX

414
2.

rudh

IV. P.

pp. rupita.

ruh

P.

gi'oir, I.

I'up hreah,

r6dhati

pr.

rupyati
ropayati (B.).

cs.

rodhat.

in.t.

pr.

ao. red.

(B.).

arurupat.

pp. rurohitha, ruroha

ruhana a aruham, aruhas,
aruhat
aruhama, aruhan sb. ruhava inj. ruham,
ruhat op. ruh^ma ipv. ruha ruhatam sa ruksas,
aruksat
ft. roksyati (B.).
pp. rudha.
aruksama.
GD. rudhva, -riihya.
inf. -ruham
rohisyai (TS.)
I.

ascend,

ruruhiir.

rohati, -te.

pr.

root

ao.

pt,

'

rodhum
DS.

rohayati

cs.

(B.).

-te (B.)

ropayati

(B.).

ruruksati.

rej tremble.

I.

pr. r^jati, -te; inj. r^jat;

r6jamana

PT.

arejetam

iff.

du.)

(3.

r^janta
;

(3. pi.);

arejanta.

cs.

lapisyati

(B,).

rejayati.

lap prate,

P.

I.

pp. lapita.

labh

pr. lapati

lebhird

pf,

labhyate (B.) pp. labdha.

(B.). cs. lambhayati, -te (B.).

PS.

int. lalapiti.

(B.).

ft.

alapsata.

ft.

lapant.

pt.

lapayati -te
pr. labhate.

A.
A. alabdha

tahe, I.

AO. s (B.)

cs.

gd.

lebhana.

pt.

lapsyati, -te

labdhva

ds. lipsate

(B.).

-labhya

lipsate (B.)

PS.

lipsyate (B.).
likh scratch, VI.: pr. likhati; -te
AO. red.

alilikhat (B.)

is

(B.).

Iil6kha

pf.

16khis.

inj.

pp.

(B.).

likhita.

GD. -likhya (B.).

lip smear, VI. P.
AO. s
alipsata

-lipya

pr.

pf.

limpati.
ps.

(3. pi.),

pp. lipta.

gd.

(B.).

lib Ikh, II.

16dhi (B.). cs. lehayati,
:_pr.
ii cling, I.

lilyiir

lilipur (B.).

Iil6pa,

lipyate (B.)

A.

pr.

layate
-layam cakre.
:

ipv.

int. pp. lelihita(B.).

pf. lilye (B.);

layantam.

ao. s

alesta

pp.

(B.).

lapayati (B.). int. lelayati pf. lelaya.

lup break, VI. P. pr. lumpati op. lumpet.
cs.

lina.

pp.

lupta.

lubh

desire,

(B.).

pp.

yisati (B.).

IV. P.

lubdha

ps.

GD. -liipya.
:

pr.
(B.).

cs.

lopayati, -te

liibhyati.
cs.

ao. red.

lobhayati

lupyate

(B.).
:

ds.

aiuJubhat
liilobha-

LIST OP VERBS
lu

etit

IX. P.

(B.),

V. P.

lunati.

PR.

415
:

Iun6ti.

pr.

pp.

luna.

vaks increase (=2. uks): pf. vavaksitha, vavaksa; vavaksatur

vavaksiir
A. vavakse
vavaksir6.
ppf.
;

vavaksat.

vac

cs.

vaksayati.

P, pr. vivakmi, vivakti

ipv. vivaktana.
A.
uvaktha, uvaea and vavaca
ueima, uciir
ueis6 pt. ucana. ao. root prc. ucyasam (B.) red.
avocat sb, v6ca, vocasi, vocati and vocati vocama ;
A. voeavahai inj. vocam, v6cas, vocat vocan A.
voce vocanta op. voc^yam, voc^s, voe^t voc6tam
voc6ma, voc6yur A. voc^ya voc^mahi ipv. vocatat,
vocatu vocatam vocata. ft, vaksyati co. avaksyat
vakta (B.). ps. ueyate
ao. avaci; pp. ukta;
(B.)
GDV. vacya.
go. uktva(B.)
inf. vaktave;
-ucya(B.).
-vaee
vaktum (B.) vaktos (B.). cs. vacayati (B.).
speali, III.

PF.

DS. vivaksati, -te (B.).

int. ipf. avavacit.
pr. vajayamas, -masi
vaj he strong cs. strengthen

avivatan.

I.

pr.

cs.

vatema

op.

pt.

vavakr6.

pf.

vacyate.
vat apprehend,

vad

A.

vajayate; ipv. vajaya; pt. vajayant.

vane move croohedly, I. P. pr. vaneati.

vatant.

ps.

ao. red.

vatayati.

pr. vadati, -te

sb. vadani, vadasi and
speal-, I.
vadas, vadati vadathas vadama, vadan inj. vadat
OP. vadet
A. vadeta ipv. vada, vadatu A. vadasva
vadadhvam pt. vadant. ipf. avadan A. avadanta.
:

PF.

udima; ud6
vadisur.

udita.
cs.

ao. root: prc.

(B.).

ft.

vadayati, -te

(B,).

vadisyati

GD. -udya(B.),
int.

vadh

slay,

ao.

root

I.
:

(B.)

vavaditi;

vavadyate

udyasam

avadisam; avadisur; A. avadiran (AV.);

INJ.

-te (B.).

ps.

ps.

vadisas;

udyato

pp.

vaditum(B.) vaditos (B.).

vadyate (B.). ds. vivadisati
vavaditu; pt. vavadat; A.

inf.

ipv.

(B.); is:

sb.

(B.).

P.

prc.

op. vadheyam, vadhet

vadhyasam op. vadhyat

vadha.

ipv.
(B.)

is

a-

APPENDIX

416

vadhisam and vadhim, avadhis, avadhit and vadhit

avadhisma sb. vadhisas inj. vadhis, vadhit vadh;

ista

and vadliistana

ipv.

vadhistam

(2. pi.),

vadhisur

A. vadhisthas

(2. du.).

vanuthas A. vanve,
pr. vanosi, vanoti
vanavat A. vanavase in.t. vanvan op.
vanuyama ipv. vanvantu A. vanusva, vanutam
vanudhvam, vanvatam pt. vanvant; vanvand ipf.
pe.
VI. and I.
A. avanvata.
avanvan
avanos
sb. vanati
A. vanase, vanate
vanati and vanati
vanas vanava A. vanamahai inj. vanas A. vanta

van

VIII.

ivin,

vanut6

sb.

van^mahi
ipv.
(=vananta); op. van6s; van6ma
vanatam vanata A. vanatam (3. s.). pf. vavantha,
vavana vavanma A. vavn6 sb. vavanat ipv. vavandhi pt. vavanvams. ao. root vamsva sb. vamsat
vamsama; A. vamsate inj. vamsi; op. vamsimahi and vasimahi is sb. vanisat A. vanisanta.
;

pro.

vanisista

sis

op.

vamsisiya.

pp.

-vata.

inf.

vanayantu. ds. vivasati sb. vivasat.

vand greet, I. A. pr. vandate. pf. vavanda vavandima
op. vandisimahi.
ao. is
vavandir6.
A. vavande
inf.
gdv.
vandita
pp.
PS.
AG. vandi
vandya.
-vantave.

cs.

vandadhyai.
vap streiv, I. pr. vapati,

-te.

up6
PS.

(3.

s.).

upyate

vapayati

vam
pp.

AO.

ao.

pf.

upathur

s:

avapsit (B.).
pp. upta.
vapi
;

ft.

A. upis6,

vapsyati

gd.

(B.).

cs.

-lipya.

(B.).

II.

vomit,

uvama

sb.

(B.).

vaman. ipf. avamit avamat

avan (B.). pp. vanta (B.).

(B.).

ao. s:

valg leai), I. P. pr. valganti. ipf. avalgata (2. pi.), pt.

valgant.
vas desire, II. pr. vasmi, vaksi, vasti usmasi and smasi,
pr.
I. P.
usana.
pt. iisant
ipv. vastu
usanti
III.
avasat.
ipf.
vasat
inj.
vasama
sb.
yasanti
P^
pf. vavasiir; A.
PR. vavaksi; vivasti; ipv. vivastu.
:

vavase

pt.

vavasana.

LIST OF VERBS
1.

vas

VI. P.

shinr,

uchat

uchdt

uchat

iichati; sb.

i>r.

417

uchan;

inj.

ucha, uchatu uchata, tichantu

FT. uchant; iff. auchas auchat.
ff. uvaaa; usa (2.
ao. root: avas (2. 3. s.)
pi), usiir; ft. f. ususi (TS.).
A. avasran s avat (3. s.). co. avatsyat (B.). ff. usta.
op.

ipv.

INF. vastave.
2.

vas

cs.

A.

ivear, II.

vasta

INJ.

(3.

avasthas

AO. is

s.)

vastam

vasisva,
IFF.

(3. s.)

(3.

vasatham

avasta.

avasista

vasayati.
fr. vaste
vasathe vasate (3. pi.)
vasata (3. pi.) ; of. vasimahi ; ipv.

s.).

(TS.)

ff.

vavas6

cs.

vasayati,

ft.

vasana;
vavasana.

ft.

-te

vas-

ft.

ayisyate.
3.

vas
AO.

root

carry,

tur

vasana

volham

I.

A. iihis6

(B.).

uvaha

ff.

uhire.

ds. vivatsatl

-usya(B.).

vasyate

fr. vahati, -te.

fs.

vasayati, -te;

lihur

ff. usatur;
vasate (B.).
vavasana. fer. -vasam cakre (B.).
red.
avivasat
avatsis.
ft.
s

vasati;
;

gd. usitva(B.);

(B.).

cs.

(B.).

pr.

fisivams

ft.

vatsyati

vah

I.:

dwell,

usima

ao. root

uhathur, uhaof.

uMta

ifv.

volham; A. vodhvam ft. xihana; s:

avaksur sb. vaksas, vaksati and vaksat
avat, vat
vaksan inj. vaksit. ft. vakvaksathas, vaksatas
vodha (B.). fs. uhyate ff. udha. gd. udhva
syati
inf. vodhum
-lihya.
(B.)
vddhave, vodhavai (B.)
(2.

du.),

-vahe
1.

vahadhyai.

cs.

vahyate (B.).
va hloiv, II. P. fr. vami, vati
vahi, vatu ft. vant iff. avat.
:

2.

vahayati
;

(B.)

vatas

vanti

IV. P.

int.

pk.

vani-

ipv.

vayati

vayatas; vayanti. pf. vavau (B.). ao. sis: avasit (B.).

cs. vapayati.
va weave, IV. fr. vayati
ipv. vaya
vayate (B.)
vayata ft. vayant iff. avayat avayan. pf. Qvur.
ft. vayisyati.
fs. iiyate (B.)
pp. uta.
inf. 6tuin ;
otave, otavai; vatave (AV.).
:

vajaya

vanch
1819

desire booty, den.

desire, I. P.

ipv.

pr. ft.

vajayant.

vanehantu.
E e

APPENDIX

418

vas bellow, I. P. pr. vasati. IV. A. pr. vasyate. pf.

vavasir6 and vavasr6 pt. vavasana. ppf. avavasitam
avavasanta. ao. red.
avivasan
avivasat
(3. du.)
A. avivasanta
is
A. avasisthas (B.). int. pt. va:

va^at.

vie

cs. vasayati.
VII. P. pr. vificanti
:

sift,

iPF.
PS.

avinak.
vicyate

IPF.

pp.

avije.

vinaktu

vincant
vivikvams.

pt.

pf. pt.

ipv.

vijantam
root

ao.

vivijr6.

pt.

vijamana

A. vikthas,

in.i.

cs. vejayati (B.).

vikta; red.: inj. vivijas. ps. vikta,
vevijyate pt. v6vijana.
vid Icnoiv, II. P. pr. vidmas se. vddas, vedati and

INT.
1.

ipv.

(B.).

pr. vijante

pr. viveksi.

vikta

pp.

VI.

vij tremhle,

III. P.

v6dat

v6dathas

vidyat
vidyatam
vidyama, vidyur ipv. viddhi and vittat, v6ttu vittam.
avidur (B.). pf. v6da (1. 3.),
IPF. avedam, avet and v^t
v6ttha
vidathur
vidma, vida, vidur A. vidmahe
per. vidam cakara (B.)
pt. vidvams.
ao.
(B.), vidr6
ft. vedisyati,
is: avedit(B.); per. vidam akran (B.).
;

vidyam,

op.

-te (B.)

-te.
2.

vedita

vidmane

pp. vidita.

(B.).

v^ditum

(B.)

v6ditos

gd. viditva.
cs.

(B.).

inf.

vedayati,

DS. vividisati (B.).

vid find, VI. pr. vindati, -te. II. vits6, vid6 (3. s.)
vidr6 ipv. viddhi
A. 3. s. vidam ( AV.) pt. vidana
and vidana. pf. viv6ditha, viv6da vividathur vividiir A. vivid6, vivits^ vividr6 and vividrir6 sb.
:

ao. a
pt.
vividvams.
vividat
avidam, avidas,
avidan
A. avidanta
sb. vidas,
avidat
avidama,
vidathas vidatha inj. vidam, vidas, vidat
vidat
vidan; A. vidata(3. s.) vidanta; op. vid^yam, vid6t
vid6ma A. vid6ya; prc. videsta (AV.); ipv. vidatam;
:

pt.

vidant

vidyate
vidayya.

v6ttos

ao.

(B.).

A. avitsi.
avedi,

gd. vittva,

v6di

ft.

-vidya

(B.).

DS. vivitsati (B.).

v6vidat; v6vidana.

ps.
vetsyati, -te (B.).
vitta
vinna. gdv.

pp.

inf. vid6,

int. sb.

v6ttave

v6vidama.

pt.

LIST OF VERBS

419

vidh worship, VI. sb. vidhati

int. vidhat
vidhanta
op. vidh6ma
vidh^mahi
:

vidhan A.
vidhant

pt.

avidhat.

ipp.

vip tremble,
PF.

I.

pr.

avepista

v^pamana

pt.

pt.

vipana

vepayati, vipayati.
pr. visati, -te.
pf. vivesa

ipf.

red.

avepanta.

avivipat

is

cs.

(B.).

vis e}der,Nl.

v^pate

Ao. root

vivipr6.

(1. 3,),

viv^sitha;

and (once) vivesur ; A. vivisr6 op. vivisyas

PT. vivisivams (TS.), -visivams (AV.).
ppf. avivesis,
AC. root: A. avisran
s: aviksmahi, aviksata (3 pi.);
vivisiir

is:

v^sit

iNJ.

sa

GD. -visya.

pp. vista.

vis he active, III.

(2.

PF.
FT.

ft. veksyati
v^stavai (B.).

(B.).

-visam

inf.

(B.)
cs.

-te.

vesayati,

mas

aviksat

vivesti

pr. viveksi,

vivistas

vivis-

vivesas ipv. vividdhi ipf. avives and viv6s

I. P.
pt. v^sant
ipf. avesan.
s.), viv6s (3. s.).
vivdsa
vivisiir.
ppf. avivesis.
ao. is
v6sisas.
sb.

veksyati, -te

visyate (B.) pp. vista, gd.

vistvi ; -visya.
inf. -vise.
int. v6vesnii ; vevisyate
OP.
pt.
v^visat
v^visana.
vevisyat
(B.)
pp. vistita.
vist, vest wrap, I. P. ipv. v^statam (3. du.).
ps.

(B.).

cs. vestayati, -te (B.).

vi enjoy, II.
vemi, v6si,

v6ti

vayati

vyantu

pt.

ao.

vivy6.

v6s

in.t.

s.

int.

vitaye.

vid

maTxC strong
vilita.

1.

ipv. vihi,

vyant
:

v^sat.

sb.

veveti
:

vyana.

sb.
vyanti
vitam

ipf.

ps.

avyan.

pf.

vivaya

vita.

inf.

vilayasva.

pp.

pp.

viyate.

veviyate.

sb.

cs.

vlthas

vihi and vitat, v6tu

vilayasi

ipv.

vr cover, V.: pr. vrnoti; A. vrnv6; vrnvate and vrnvat6 PT. vrnvant ipf. avrnos, avrnot A. avrnvata
;

A.
urn6mi, urnoti iirnuthas, urnutas
inj. urnot
ipv. iirnuhi and urnu, iiriirnus6, urnute
notu urnuta, iirnuvantu A. urnusva pt. iirnuvant
(8.

pi.)

PR.

iirnvana ipf. aurnos, aurnot.

I.
pr. varathas
A.
varate
varethe varante
sb. varate
inj. varanta.
:

Ee2

APPENDIX

420
IX.

avrnldhvam

pp. vavartha, vavara

vavrvams. ppf. avavarit. ao.
root: vam (= varam), avar and var (2. 3. s.)
avran
A. avrta int. var (2. 3. s.) vran ipv. vrdhi vartam
varta vrana red. avivaran A. avivarata (3. s.) s
iPF.

vavriir

A. vavr6

(AV.).

pf.

SB.

varsathas

is

avarit

ao. avari

ps.

(B.).

pp. vrta.

GD. vrtva, vrtvi ; vrtvaya

inf. vartave.
cs.
-vrtya.
varayati, -te ; ds. vivarayisate (B,). int. avarivar.
vr cJioose, IX. A. pr. vrn6, vrnis6, vrnit6 : vrnimahe,
vrnate ; inj. vrnita (3. s.) ; op. vrnita ipv. vrnisva ;
;

2.

vrnidhvam, vrnatam
avrnimahi.
avrta;
vurita

sb.

vavrs6

pf.

vrnana ipf. avrni, avrnita

vavrmahe. ao. root avri,

pt.

varas, varat; varanta;

pt. urana; s avrsi

(3. s.)

inj.

vrta

(3. s.);

avrdhvam

op.

avr-

(B.),

gdv. varya varenya.

vrnakti
vrnaksi,
vrnjanti A. vrnj6,
vrnkt6 vrfijate vrnjate sb. vrnajan ipv. vrndhi,
vrnaktu vrnkta, vrnjantu A. vrhksva. ipf. avrnak
sata.

FT.

varisyate

vrj twist, VII.

pp. vrta.

(B.).

(2. 3. s.)
;

(AV.).

avrnjan.

vavrktam

pp. vavrjiir

vark

sb. varjati

du.)

(2,

(2.

pt.

3,

A. vavrj6
vavarjiis-i

op. vavrj-

(a-)varjusi

avrk (AV.)
avrjan
vark op. vrjyam

s.),

varjate

f.

inj.

ipv. varktam (2. du.)

vrjyas (3. s.)
sa
avarksis (B.)
A. avrksmahi
inj. A. vrksi

vrjyama
:

root

AO.

A. avrkta
s

ipv.

yiir

pr.

prc.

avrksam.
vrkta.

varksyati, -te
GD. vrktvi; -vrjya.
ft.

cs.

vrnjase.

varivrjat ;
vrt turn, I. A.

varjayati.

ds.

pp.
vrjyate
inf. -vrje ; vrjadhyai;
int. pt.
vivrksate (B.).
(B.).

ps.

cs. pt.

varivarjayant (AV.).
vartate. pf. vavarta and vavarta vavrtur
op.
A. vavrt6
sb. vavartati, vavartat and vavrtat
vavrtyam, vavrtyas, vavrtyat ipv. vavrttana (2. pi.)
PT. vavrtvams.
A. avavrtranta. ao.
ppf. avavrtran
ipv. varta
root
avart
sb. vartat
A. avrtran
2.
a:
red.:
avivrtat; s: A.
avrtat;
(= vartta,
pi.);
:

avrtsata.
pp.

vrtta.

ft.

vartsyati

GD.

-vrtya.

vartita
inf.

(B.).

-vrte;

co.

avartsyat

-vrtas

(B.).

(B.),

cs.

LIST OF VEKBS
vartayati, -te

421

inf. vartayadhyai.
vartyate (B.)
int. varvarti (= varvartti) and
varivarti (= varivartti) varvrtati (3. pi.) A. varivrtyate (B.) ipf. avarivar (3. s.) avarivur (3. pi.).
vrdh grow, I. pr. vardhati, -te.
vapf. vavardha
vrdhatur
A. vavrdh6
vavrdhur
vavrdhate ; sb.
vavrdhati
A. vavrdhate
ipv.
op. vavrdhithas
ppf.
vavrdhasva
pt. vavrdhvams
A. vavrdhana.
ps.

Ds. vivrtsati; -te (B.).

vavrdhanta.

ao. a
avrdham, avrdhat
vrdhama,
avrdhan
pt. vrdhant
vrdhana red. avivrdhat
avivrdhan A. avivrdhadhvam, avivrdhanta s pt.
vrdhasana
op. vardhisimahi.
is
inf.
pp. vrddha.
vrdh6
vardhavrdhase
cs.
vavrdhadhyai (pp.).
:

yati, -te.

vrs

I.

rain,

int. gdv.

P.

vavrdh6nya.
ipv. varsantu
pt. varsant.
vrs^tham (2. du.). pf. ipv. vavrsasva
varsati

pr.

vrsasva
pt. vavrsana.
ao.
vrasta
(B.)
(MS.),

VI. A.

ft. varsisyati
avarsis, avarsit.
pp. vrsta.
gd. vrstvi
vrstva(B.);

-varstos

cs.

(B.).

varsayati.
pr. vrhati ; inj. vrhat

vrh tear, VI. P.

vrha and vrhatat
:

op.

vrhatam vrhata

vrh6va

ipf.

ipv.

avrhas.

pf.

vavarha. ao. sa: avrksat (B.). ps. vrhyate (B.) ao.

varhi pp. vrdha (B.). gd. -vrhya. inf. -vrhas.
ven long, I. P. pr. v6nati
inj. v6nas
ipv. venatam
PT. v^nant. ipf. avenat.
(2. du.)
;

vyac

extend. III. P.

pr.

viviktas

aviviktam

(3.

du.)

inj.

vivyak

(3.

avivyacur. pf.
vivyaktha, vivyaca. ppf. vivyacat A. vivyacanta.
vyath waver, I. pr. vyathate. ao. red. vivyathas (B.)
is
SB. vyathisat
inj. vyathisthas
vyathismahi. pp.
cs. vyathayati; ao.
vyathita. inf. vyathisyai (B.).
vyathayis (AV.).
vyadh jjierce, IV. P. pr. vidhyati. pr. vivyadha (B.)
PT. vividhvams. ao. s
vyatsis (B.). pp. viddha. inf.
-vidhe. cs. vyadhayatL (B.). ds. vivyatsati (B.).
vya envelope, IV. pr. vyayati, -te op. vyayeyam ipv.
s.).

IPF.

avivyak

(3.

du.)

APPENDIX

422

vyayasva

pt.

cakara
(3.

-viya

ao. a:

(B.).

ps.

(2. pi.);

viyate (B.)

A. avyata
gd.

vita.

pp.

(B.).

vraj proceed,

vrasc cut

P.

I.

ao.

vavraja.
vrajita

ipv.

is

VI. P.

sams praise. I.
sams6 (B.).
asamsit

samsisyati

sb.

samsati, -te.
ao. root: ipv. sasta
ps.

sasyate

gd. vrstva

(B.)

sa-

is:

asamsisam,
samsisam. ft.

inj.

ao.

vrktvi.

sasamsa

(2. pi.)

avrscat and

ipf.

pf.

samsisas, samsisat

(B.).

vrajayati (B.).
vrseat in.t. vrseas

vrkna.

pp.

pp.

cs.

vrseant.

pt.

pf.

pr.

sb.

(B.).

pp. vrscati

pt. vrajant.

ft. vrajisyati (B.).

(2. pi.);

gd. -vrajya (B.).

(B.).
U2),

vrajata

avrajit

vrsca, vrscatu
vrseat.
PS. vrscyate

IV.

ipf.

pt.

avyat; avyata

and vyata.

s.)

avyayam, avyayat. pf.

vivyana; per. pf. -vyayam

vyayant.

vivyathiir; A. vivy6;

sarasi

pp.

sasta

GDv.

samsya; samstavya(B.). gd. sastva (B.). inf. -sase.

sak he able, V. P.
pr. saknomi, saknoti
saknuvanti
SB. saknavama.
pf. sasaka
ipf. asaknuvan.
sekima,
:

seka, sekur.

2.

curse,

I.

PT.

du.);

(3. s.)

pp.

sam,
(B.)
pp.

pt.

samita

sasada

s.),

asakan

ft. saksyati, -te

ipf.

A. sasadmahe, sasadr6

sedur

pt.

ft. satsyati.

(B.).

sb. sapatas (3.

sapate (AV.)
pf. sasapa;
asapata (2. pi.),
;

ao.

sepis6.

s:

in.t,

sapta

(2.

pi.),

pp.

cs.

sapayati.
labour, IV. P.

pt.

simyant.
sasamana. ao.

samyati (B.)
pp. sasam6
is

simyati; ipv.
sb. sasamate

A. asamisthas, asamista.

(B.).

be quiet,

semiir

santa.

(B.)

sapati

sapant.

sak6ma.

sakyam

ds. siksati, -te.

pp. sasadiir

pr.

sepd (1. 3.
sapta (B.).
sam, sim

simyantu

2.

sa,d fall: pf.

sap

1.

saktave.

inf.

sad prevail
sasadana.

op.

asakam, asakat

(B.).

sakas, sakat

sb.

IN.T.

1.

ao. root

a
sagdhi, saktam
sakan op. sak^yam

ipv.

IV. (B.)

(B.).

cs.

ao. a

samayati.

pr.
:

samyati,

asamat

(B.)

-te.
;

red.

pf.
:

sasama

asisamat.

LIST OF VEKBS
sa sharpen, III.

sisami, sisati

pr.

gd. -saya.
sasmi, sassi ; A. sast6

sisatu; sisitam,
iff. sisas, asisat ;

sisana.

sisimasi

am

ipv, sisihi,

-sasana.

423

si sit

A. sisite

sisita (2. pi.); pt.

sisita (3. s.).
pf. pt.

A,

pp. sita.

II.
sasmahe, sasate
pt. sasat
sasan
ipv. sadhi
sastana, sasatu
sasana. iff. asasam A. asasata (3. pi.), pf. sa^asa;

sas order,

SB.

^asasiir

sasas

inj.

A. sisamahi

sasadhi.

ipv.

sisat

inj.

ao. root: sb. sas as

pt. sisant.

pp. iSista

-sisya (B.).
siks (= Ds. of sak) he helpful: pr. siksati, -te
siksat siksan
inj. siksat ; op. sikseyam
;

IPV.

siksa, siksatu

amana.

ipf.

sisas.

lie,

II.

siksant

pt.

siksas,

siksema

gd.

A. siks-

asiksatam.

sisis^ (B.).
ao. a:
ao. s^si ;
;

pf.
ps.

(B.).

sisyate

GD. -sisya (B.).

A.

pr.

saye

s6se,

s^mahe, sere and sdrate

3. s.

pr. sinasti (B.).

seksyati, -te

FT.

pp. sista.
si

asiksas

VII. P.

^is leave,

siksatam

sb.

(8.

op.

s^tam and say am (AV.)

s.)

sayate

sayiya, sayita
;

pt.

sayana

(3.

(3. s.)

ipf.

du.)
ipv-

aseran.

sayate sayadhve, sayante ipf. asayat asayatam A. asayata (3. s.). pf. sisy^ (B.) sisyir6 (B )
is
PT. sasayana.
sb. sisan
A. asayisthas. ft.
ao. s
inf.
-te
sayitase (B.).
sayadhyai.
sayisyati,
(B.)
sue gleam, I. pr. socati, -te. pf. susdca op. A. susucita
pt. susukvams
susucana. ao.
ipv. susugdhi
(3. s.)
pt. sucant
A. sucamana red. siisucas
a asucat
I.

PR.

susucas; siisucan; is: inj. socis; ps. asoei. inf.

sucadhyai. cs. socayati pt. sucayant. int. pb. s6sucan A. sosucanta; pt. sosueat sosucana.
sudh, sundh imrify, I. P. pr. sundhati ipv. siindhata
pp. suddha.
cs.
IV. P.: PR. sudhyati (B.).
(2. pi.).
sundhayati sodhayati (B.).
subh, sumbh heautify, I. A. pr. sobhate; pt. sobhamana;
siimbhate pt. siimbhamana; VI. P.: pr. sumbhati;
INJ.

SB.

sumbhati

ipv.

sumbha

sumbhata, sumbhantu

APPENDIX

424
PT.

sumbhana
I'X. subhana
asusubhanta (B.).
sumbhita
i>p.
inf. subh6
sobhase
subham.
cs.

sumbhamana.

red.

asusubhan

subhitd

(B.).

sivell,
;

sobhayati.
pr. susyati

susavama

A. susuvana.

savasana.

srdh he

susuvat

SB.

susuvams

ipv.
;
siisya, siisyatu ;
gd. -susya (B.).
cs. sosayati.
IV. P.: pr. pt. svayant. pf. susuviir; A.

siisyantu.

susuv6

ao. root

subhayati, -te
BUS dry, IV. P.
su, 6va

inf. silsani

defiant, I.

sardhati
sardhant.

pr.

IPV.

svayitum

susuyama

op.

ao.

asvat

(B.)

pt.

(B.).

sardhate (B.)

inj.

sardhat;

cs. sardhayati.
sardha; pt.
sr crush, IX.
pr. srnami, srnasi, srnati
srnimasi
srnitam srnantu
pt. srnana.
srnihi, srnatu
:

asrnat.
PS.

siryate

ao. is

asarit.

ao. sari; pp. sirna

ipv.

iff.

sasr6.

pf.

ft.

-sirta.

pt.

sarisyate

(B.).

gd. -sirya (B.).

INF. saritos.
su. snathat
ao. red.:
ipv. snathihi.
inj. sisnathas; is;
sisnatham, asisnat and sisnathat
snathistana.
IPV. snathistam
pp.
snathita.
inf.

snaXh. pierce, II. P.

-snathas.

snathayati, -te.
IV.: pr. syayati (B.). ps. siyate(B.);
cs. syayayati (B.).
sina.
sita
pr. srathnit6
pt. srathnana.
srath slaclen, IX.
srathnas
asrathnan.
pf. sasrath6.
ao. red.
pp. srthita.
srathas, sisrathat; ipv. sisrathantu.

sya

cs.

pp.

coagidate,
;

srathayati, -te.
sram he weary, IV. P.

sasramana.
asrami sthas
sra

ao.
inj.

IX.

(sri, sr) hod,

asrinita
sri resort,

I.

(3.

s.).

(B.)
:

pr.

pr.

sramyati.

pf.

sasramvir

sics.

px.

asramat
int. sramat;
is: A.
sramisma. pp. sranta. gd. -sramya
a:

srinanti

pr.

srinita and srinitana

srapyate

ipf.

pt.

pp.

srinant

srata;

sx"inis6
;

srta.

ipv. si'inihi

A. srinana.
cs.

ipf.

srapayati;

A.
ps.

ao. asisrapat (B.).

srayati

-te.

pf. 1.

sisraya,

o.

sisraya;

VERBS

LIST OF
A. sisriye;

oi\ sisrita(8. s.)

root

au.

asisrayur.

pt.

asres,

425

sisriyana. ppf. asisret;

red.
asret ; asriyan

asrait (AV.).
ft. srayisyati, -te (B.).
inf. srayitavai
sriyate (B.) pp. srita ; ao. asrayi.

asisriyat
PS.

cs.

srapayati (VS.).
sris dasp, I.: sb. sr6sama.
(B.).

a:

ao.

in,t.

srisat.

inf.

srita.

inf.

-srisas.

sri

IX.

mix,

srinati

pr.

pp.

sx'inite.

sriyase.

sru hear, V,: pr. srnomi, srn6ti

srnut6 and srnv6
srnvir6

srnvanti

sb.

srnavama, srnavan

A. srnvis6,

srnavat

srnavas,

srnuyama ipv.
srnuyat
srnutam srnuta
srnudhi, srnuhi and srnii, srnotu
and srnota,?
srnvantu 7*
srnusva pt. srnvant
srnotana,7a*

iPF. asrnavam, asrnos

pf. 1. susrava, 3.
asrnvan.
op. susrusb. susravat
susrava; A. susruv6 (3. s.)
ppf. asusravur
pt. susruvams.
yas
susruyatam
A. asusravi (1. s.). ao. I'oot
asravam, asrot asravan
op.

;
7

;
7

(AV.)

sravat; sravathas, sravatas prc. sruyasam,

ipv. srudhi, srotu ; srutam
sruta and
s.)

SB.

srtiyas

(o.

sruvantu
asusravat
a
in.j.
sruvat
red.
asusruvat (B.) s: asrausit (B.). ft. srosyati (B.). ps.
ao. asravi, sravi
qdv. srutya
pp. sruta
sruyate

srota,

hear,

cs.

sravayati, srava-

susrusate.

Ds.

yati.

srus

gd. srutva; -srutya.

sravayya.
I.

svafic spread,

inj.
I.

A.

srosan
pt. srosamana.
ipv. srosantu
pf.
ipv. svancasva
pt. svaneamana.
;

A. SB. sasvacai. cs. svancayas.

svas Now, II.
pr. svasiti
A. suse
ipv. svasihi
svasant and susant
A. susana
iff. asvasit (B.).
:

PR.
cs.

svasati, -te (AV.).

pp.

svasita

(B.).

inf.

pt.
I.

-svasas.

int. pt. sasvasat.

svasayati.

svit he bright: ao. root: asvitan

svitat ; s asvait.

pt.

svitana

red.

asi-

sthiv

S2)ew, I.

(B.).

pp.

P.

pr. sthivati.

sthyuta

(B.).

iff.

asthivan.

pf.

tisth6va

APPENDIX

426

sagh

be

equal
saghat; prc.

sac accompany/,
sascati

(3.

sisakta

sa^ce

iff.

saghyasam
A.

I.

pi.)

III.

A. sascata

inj.

root

sb.

(B.).

pr. sacate.

ao.

asaghnos.

pr. sisaksi; sisakti;

(3. pi.)

sascat and sascat.

pt.

V. P.

to,

I.

ipv.

pk.

sisaktu ;
A.
;

sascasi

ipv. sascata (2. pi.); ipf.

A. sascir6
sascima, sasciir
secir6 (AV.)
pt. sascivams.
ipv. saksva
ao. root
PT. sacana
s
A. asaksata (3. pi.)
inj.
sb. saksat
saksata (3. pi.)
op.
saksimahi.
inf.
sacadhyai
saksani.
(1.

s.)

asascatam

inj,

sascat;
pf.

(2. du.).

saj, sanj, hang, I. P.

(B.)

pr. sajati.

ao. s

sejiir (B.).

gd.
pp. sakta.
asanji (B.)
Ds. sisanksati (B.).
(B.).

ps.

-sajya

pf.

ipf. asajat,

A. asakta.

sasanja

sajyate (B.)

ao.

sanktos

inf.

(B.).

sad dt, I. P.
inj. sidan
sb. sidati
pr. sidati
op.
pt. sidant.
ipf. asidat.
pf.
sidema; ipv. sidatu
sasattha, sasada
sedima, seda,
sedathur, sedatur
pt. sediis-.
ao. a:
sediir; A. sedir6; op. sasadyat
asadat
inj. sadas, sadat
asadan
op. sadema
ipv
sada, sadatu
sadatam, sadatam sadata, sadantu
A. sadantam
pt. sadant
s
red.
asisadan
sb.
:

satsat.
;

INF.

-sade

PS.

pp.

sadyate

(B.).

ao. asadi,
sadyate (B.)
gdv. sadya.
gd. -sadya.

ps.

sanna (AV.)
-sadam sattum

satta

FT. satsyati (B.).

sadi

sadayati, -te

cs.

(B.).

san gain, VIII. P. pr. sanoti

sb. sanavani, sanavat
sanavatha
op. sanuyam
ipv. sanuhi,
sanuyama
sanotu sanvantu. ipf. asanos, asanot asanvan. pf.
sasana pt. sasavams. ao. a asanam, asanat asanama, asanan inj. sanam, sanat op. san6yara, san6t
is
asanisam sb. sanisat A.
pt. sanant
IPV. Sana
sanisamahe, sanisanta ipv. sanisantu. ft. sanisyati.
:

pp.

sata.

sisasati.

GDV. sanitva.
int.

A. sanisnata

inf.

sanaye

(3. pi.).

sataye.

ds.

LIST OF VERBS
sap

I.

serve,

pf.

sapati, -te.

i>e.

427
ao. red.

sepur.

inj.

sisapanta.
op.
sb. saparyat
saparya honour, den. pr. saparyati
pt.
ipf.
ipv.
asapsaparyant.
saparya;
sapary6ma;
aryan. ao. asaparyait (AV.). gdv. sapary^nya.
sastas ipv. sastu sastam
pb. sasti
sas sleep, II. P.
pr.
ipf. asastana.
III. P.
sasantu
pt. sasant
sasasti and sasasti.
sah prevail, I. pr. sahate pt. sahant and sahant A. sahamana. pf. sasaha A. sasahis6, sasah6 sb. sasahas,
:

op. sasahyat sasahyama pro. A. sasahisthas

sasahvams and sahvams A. sasahana and sehana.
ao. root op. sahyas
sahyama pkc. sahyas (3. s.) pt.
saksi saksmahi (B.)
sb. sakand
s:
asaksi
sahana;
sati and saksat
saksama A. saksate op. saksiya
pt. saksant
A. sahasana
is
asahista
IPV. saksva

sasahat

PT.

op.

asat; sb.

ipv. sya, syatu

pr. syati, -te
syatam,
A. syasva syadhvam, ipf. asyat. ao. root
ipv. sahi; a: op. s6t (VS.).
sat; op. simahi

pp. sita.

GD. -saya.

syatam

inf. -sai

sadh succeed, I. pr. sadhati,

sisadhama inj. sisadhas.
:

hind,

sisaya

IX. P.

sic pour, VI.

sisicur
FT.

pr.

sisice.

seksyati

(B.).

GD. siktva (B.)

1.

pr.

sinati

sincati,
ao. a

ipv.

-sicya.

inf.

sinatu.

sisdca

asican

sektavai

pf.

inf. s^tave.

sisicatur

sicamahe.

sb.

ao. aseci (B.)

sicyate;

ps.

sisadhati

sb.

ipv.

sitam.

pf.

-te.

asicat

sadhayati.

sinithas

(B.).

ao. red.

cs.

ao. root

inj. siset.

satum

-te.

si

ds. siksati, -te.

(B.).

sa bind, VI.

sahisimahi and sahisimahi. ft. saksadha. (in. -sahya. ikf. sahadhyai

pp.

(B.).

-saham

sahisivahi

syate

pp. sikta.

(B.).

sidh repel, I. P.: pr. sadhati. pf. sis^dha. ao. is:

gd. -sidhya.
asedhis. pp. siddha (B.).
inf. s^ddhum
(B.).

INT. PT. s6sidhat.

sidh succeed, IV. P.

pr. ipv.
siv setv, IV.

2.

sivyant.

pp.

syuta.

pr. sidhyati.

sivyatu

gd. -sivya.

A.

pp.

siddha

(B.).

sivyadhvam

pt.

APPENDIX

428
su

sunutas
pk. sunoti
suuutha, sunvanti
press, V.
sunavama A. suA. sunv6 sunvir6 b. sunavat
navai ipv. sunii, sunotu sunuta and sunota, sunopf.
sunvana.
pt. sunvant
A. sunudhvam
tana
susvana. ppf. asupt. susuvams
susava susuma
savur and asusuvur (B.). ao. root ipv. s6tu sutam
:

suvana, svana. ft. savisyati (B.)

ao. asavi; pp. suta; gdv.
PS. suyate
sota (B.).
inf. sotave; sotos.
s6tva. GD. -sutya (B.).

sotana

sota,

pt.

su

VI. P.

impel,

generate,

Suva, suvatat, suvatu

asuvat.

ipp.

suvati

pr.

GD.

-te (B.);

pt.

ps.

susyant.

sutva

(B.) ; -sutya (B.).

INT. sosaviti.

tave.

inf.

asusavur

(B.).

inj. savis.

ft.

sosyati,

ipv.

suvant

pt.

A. pr. siive, sute siivate (3. du.) ;

inj. suta (3. s.) ; pt. suvana ; iff. asuta.

II.

suvate (3. pi.)

sasuva susuv6. ppf. asiisot (MS.)
sb. savisat
asavit
asavisur
AO. is

pf.

suvati

sb.

suvatam suvantu

suyate;

suta.

pp.

sutave, sutavai

savi-

in order: pf. susudima; sb. susudas, siisudat and

susudati siisudatha ipv. susudata (2. pi.), ao. red.
asusudanta. cs. sudayati, -te sb. sudayati.

sudxmt

sr flow, III.

sisarsi, sisarti

PR.

A. sisrate

(3. pi.)

ipv.

sisrtam; A. sisratam (3. pi.), pt. sisrat. pf. sasara;

sasrva(B.) sasi'ur A. sasre sasrathe pt. sasrvams ;
sara

sarsr6
srj

cs.

(3. s.)

srjana

asrastam
sata;
FT.

sb.

(3.
:

srjati,

(2. du.)

(2^

ipv.

asari (B.)

sasrjyat

A. sasrj6;

sasarja;
pt.

asrgran, asrgram
AV.), asrak (3. s.), asrat
loot

ppf.

sasrjana.

pt.

(B.)

A. asrksi, asrsta asrksmahi, asrkinj. srastam; A. srksatham (2. du.).

;

sraksat

s.,

pf.

-te.

op.

ao.

pi.),

sras

sraksyati

asaran

inf. sartave,
si'tya (B.).
int.
ds. sisirsati (B.).

sarayati, -te.
sarsrana.

sasrjmahe, sasrjrird

asasrgram

ps. ao.

sarisyati.

pt.

VI.: pr.

emit,

ft.

gd. srtva (B.)

pp. srta (B.).

sartavai.

asaram, asaras, asarat

sarsat.

sb.

ao. a

sasrana.

(B.).

ps.

srjyate

ao. asarji

pp.

srsta.

LIST OF VERBS
srstva

GD.

(B.)

and sarpsyati
inf.

-srpya.

srpyate (B.).
sev attend upon,

A.

I.

skand leap, I. P.
PT. skandant

ds.

(B.).

pr. seve,

ds.

(B.).

ao,

(B.).

pt.

(B.).

srapsyati

gd. srptva (B.) ;

int. sari-

pp. srpta(B.).

(B.).

srpas

sasarpa

A. asrpta

srpat; s:

inj.

-te

sarjayati,
pf.

sarpati.

asrpat

os.

-srjya (B.).

sisrksati, -te (B.).

srp creep, I. P. pr.

429

sisrpsati.

s6vate

s6vasva.

ipv.

skandat ipv. skanda

pf. caskanda.
ao. root
ipp.
ft.
skan (3, s.); s: askan (B.) and askantsit (B.).
pp.
and
skanna.
gd.
-skandya (B.)
skantsyati (B.).
skandati
askandat.

pr.

sb.

;
:

-skadya (B.). inf. -skade, -skadas.' cs. skandayati.

ipf. kaniskan (3. s.).
INT. SB. caniskadat
skabh or skambh prop, IX. pr. skabhnati pt. skabhnant A. skabhana (B.). pf. caskambha skambhatur;
skambhur; pt. caskabhana. pp. skabhita. gd. skabh;

itvi.

sku

INF.

tear,

PS.

-skabhe.
P.

II.

Stan thunder,

II.

stana.

skauti

pr.

skuta.

pp.

skuyate;

IPV.

P.

ipv.

ao. is

coskuyate.
stanihi; in.t. stan

astanit.

V. P.

(B.).

pr.

skunoti.

int,

cs.

I. P.:

(3. s.).

stanayati.

int. ipv

tamstanihi.
ipv. stabhana
stabh or stambh prop, IX. stabhnami
pf. tastambha
iPF. astabhnas, astabhnat.
tastabhur
tastabhana. ppf. tastambhat. ao. s
PT. tastabhvams
astampsit (B.) is astambhit, stambhit. pp. stabhita
stabdha (B.). gd. stabdhva, -stabhya (B.).
pr. staumi (AV.)
stu praise, II.
st6si, stauti (AV.)
:

A. stus6
sb. stavat
stumasi, stuvanti
stavama,
stavatha A. stavai inj. staut op. A. stuvita stuvipv. stuhi, stautu
pt. stuvant
imahi
stuvana,
stavana and stavana ipf. astaut. I. A. stavate and
stave (3. s.) inj. stavanta op. staveta pt. stavamana.
tustuvur A. tustuv6 sb. tustavat pt.
pf. tustava
;

tustuvams: tustuvana.

ppf.

atustavam.

ao.

s:

astau-

APPENDIX

480
sit

(B.)

A.

astosi, astosta

stosat

SB. stosani,

stdsama

FT. stosyati, -te (B.)

(B.).

stuyate
GD. stutva;
PS.

astavi

ao.

astodhvam, astosata
stosam is astavit
;

in.t.

stavisyati, -te. co. astosyat.

pp. stuta
gdv. stus6yya.

stavadhyai, stotave

inf.

-stiitya (B.).

stotum (B.). cs. stavayati (B.).

stubh praise, I. P. pr. stobhati ipv. stobhata, stobhantu pt. stobhant. II. A. pt. stubhana. pp. stubdha
:

stobhayati.
A.
pe. strnami
IX.
strnithana, strnanti
strnitam
ipv.
strnihi
strnimahi
strnit6
inj.
(2. du.)
iff.
pt. strnant; strnana
strnita; A. strnitam (3. s.)
pf.
strnutd.
pr. strnosi
V.
astrnan.
astrnat
tastrir^
tastara (B.) tastarur (B.) A. tistir6 (3. s.)
sb.
A. astrta (B.)
astar
ao. root
PT. tistirana.
cs.

(B.).

str streiv,

starate
OP.

staramahe

strsiya

is

star

inj.

astaris.

ft.

(2.

s.)

astrsi (B.)

-te (B.).

starisyati,
pp. strta

ps.

stirna.
gd.
ao. astari
striyate (B.)
inf. -stire, strnisani ; staristirtva (B.)
-stirya (B.).
;

tave (AV.)
-staritavai

startave

(B,),

staritavai{B.),
startavai(B.)
tustursate (B.).
;

ds. tistirsate (B.)

(B.).

pp. tasthau
tasthathur,
A. tasthd, tasthis6,
tasthima, tasthur
tasth6 tasthir6 pt. tasthivams tasthana. ao. root
astham, asthas, asthat asthama, sthata, asthur A.
asthithas, asthita; asthiran; se, sthas, sthati and sthat
sthatas inj. stham, sthat sthiir op. stheyama ipv.
sthatam (2. du.); sthata; pt. sthant; a: asthat (AV.)

stha stand, I.
tasthatur ;

pr. tisthati, -te.

s: asthisi (B.)
FT. sthasyati.

inf.

AO.

sthatum

asthisata

sthiyate (B.); pp. sthita. gd. -sthaya.

sthatos (B.). cs. sthapayati, -te ;
(B.)
;

Ds. tisthasati (B.).

sna hatlie, II. P. : pr.

(B.).

gdv. snatva.
cs.

(VS.).

ps.

atisthipam, atisthipas, atisthipat

snata.

sthesam

pi.); inj.

(3.

snapayati;

snati
gd.

ipv.

snatva

-te (B.)

snahi
;

inj.

pt.

-snaya.

tisthipat.

snant.
inf.

snapayati (AV.).

pp.

snatum

LIST OF VERBS
spas

see

spr

ivin,

paspase

pf.

V.

INJ.

s.)

I.

contend,

PPF.

ran

du.)

pt.

sprdhana.

ao.

(2.

du.).

gd.

-sprdhya.

sprnuhi.
sparat ;

pp. sprta.

spardhamana.
pasprdhana.

pt.

pasprdhr6

sb.

apasprdhetham
;

(3.

aspasta

ipv.

sparase.
A. pr. spardhate

A. pasprdhate

PF.

sprnavama

sb.

aspar (2. s.)

sprdhi s asparsam.

ipv.

INF.

ao. root

paspasana.

spasayate.
root

ao.

(B.).

GD. sprtva.

sprdh

cs.

sprnvat^

pr.

paspara
spar (2.

PF.

pt.

pp. spasta.

(3. s.).

431

pt.

root
inf.

A. asprdhspardhitum.

sprs touch, VI. pr. sprsati, -te. pf. sb. pasparsat. ao.
red.: SB. pisprsati ; in,i. pisprsas; s: aspraksam (B.)
sa: asprksat.
pp. sprsta.
gd. sprstva (B.); -sprsya
inf.
cs. sparsayati (B.), -te.
-spfse; sprsas (B.).
(B.).
:

sprh

he eager

cs.

sprhayanti

op.

sprhayet.

ipf.

asprh-

ayam. gdv. sprhayayya.

A. sphurate (B.)
pr. sphurati
sphur jerk, VI.
sphuran inj. sphurat ipv. sphura sphuratam
:

du.)

pt.

sphurant.

(^sphr).
sphurj rumble,

smi smile,
mana.

smr
pp.

I.

P.

I.

pf.

I.

asphurat.

pr. sphurjati.

sismiy^

remember,

ipf.

smayate

pr.

inj.

cs.

ao.

is

sb.
(2.

spharis

sphurjayati.

smayanta

pt.

smaya-

pt.

sismiyana.
ps. smaryate
pr. smarati, -te.

(B.)

A.

smrta.

syand move
sisyad6.

on,

I.

ao. red.

pr.

A.
syandate. pf. sisyadur
asisyadanta s asyan

asisyadat

FT. syantsyati (B.).

pp.
ps. ao. syandi (B.)
s.).
syanna. gd. syanttva (B.) syattva (B.), -syadya (B.).
cs. syandayati (B.)
inf.
INF. -syade; syanttum (B.)
syandayadhyai. int. pt. sanisyadat.
pf. sasramsur
sras, srams/aZZ, I. A.: pr. sramsate (B.).
(3.

(B.).

-sramsya

asrat (VS.);

a:

asramsisata

(B.).

root:

ao.

asisrasan

is

(B.).

sridh blunder,

I.

inf. -srasas.

P.

pr.

cs.

sr^dhati

op.

srasema;
pp.

sramsayati.
ipv. sr^dhata
;

red.:

srasta.

gd.

pt.

APPENDIX

432
sr^dhant.
sridhana.
sru floiiJ, I.
susrot.

ao.

pf,

asusrot.

ao. is

sravitavai.

a,

susruvui*

asravis

cs.

sridhat

in.t.

susrava

PR. sravati.

PPF.

sravitave

INF.

asredhan.

ipf.

inj.

pp. sruta.

(B.).

sravayati

rx.

-te (B.).

svaj embrace, I.: pr. svajate; sb. svajate, svajatai (AV.)

INJ. svaj at ; ipv. svajasva; svajadhvam.
pf. sasvaj6;

sasvajate

du.); pt.

(3.

ppf.

sasvajana.

INJ. sisvadat.

-te

SY-dn sound: ao. is

svanita.
sleep, II.

svap

svatta.

pp.

asvanit inj. svanit.

sanisvanat.

P.

svapsyati

pr. ipv.

(B.)

svaptum

svar sound,
asvar
s
:

I.

svadayati,

svid siveat,
svinna.

svanayati;

(3.

pr.

s.)

(B.).

svapisyami. pp. supta. gd. suptva.

cs! svapayati.
svarati.
pf. inj. sasvar (8. s.).
ao.

asvarstam

(3.

du.)

asvaris

(B.).

sisvidana.

pp.

is

cs.

svarayati.
pf.
pr. svadate.

I.

A.

cs.

svedayati

svaptu pt. svapant. I. P. pr.

inj. susupthas (B.)
pt. susupred.
sisvapas and sisvap (2. s.).
;

ao.

(B.).

P.

svaritos

inf.

cs.

vams; siisupana.
INF.

cs.

sb.

red.:

int. sb.

pf. susupiir

svapati.
FT.

inf. -siide.

pp. svadita.

pp.

pp.

asasvajat.

svakta (B.). inf. -svaje.

pr. svadati, -te
A. svadate
svad, svad siveeten, I.
svadati IPV. svada svadantu A.svadasva. ao.

pt.

(B.).

han strike, II. pr. hanmi, hamsi, hanti hathas, hatas

hanmas, hatha, ghnanti sb. hanas, hanati and hanat
hanava
hanama hanatha (AV.), hanan inj. han
op. hanyat, hanyama; ipv. jahi, hantu
(3. s.)
hatam,
hatam; hata and hantana, ghnantu; pt. ghnant. I.:
:

PR.

jighnate

thur
at

-ti (B.).

pf.

jaghantha, jaghana jaghnaA. jaghn6 (B.); sb. jaghanjaghnivams (B.). ao. is ahanit

jaghnima, jaghnur

PT.

jaghanvams

-te (B.).
ps. hanyate ;
hanisyati
GDV. hantva.
gd. hatva, hatvi
hatvaya

(B.).

FT.

INF.

pp.

hantave, hantavai

hantum.

cs.

hata;

-hatya.

ghatayati

(B.).

LIST OF VERBS

433

Ds.

int. janghanti
jighamsati; ao. ajighamsis (B.).
janghanani, janghanas, janghanat
janghanava
A. janghananta
ipv. janghanihi
pt. janghanat ;
ghanighnat.
har he gratified, IV. pr. haryati sb. haryasi and haryas
IPV. harya
pt. haryant. ipp. aharyat
A. aharyathas.
1. ha leave, III. P.: pr.
jahami, jahasi, jahati; jahati;
SB. jahani
jahama op. jahyat jahyiir ipv. jahitat,
pt. jahat.
jahatu
ipf.
jahitam
jahita
ajahat
pf. jaha; jahatur; jahiir.
ao.
ajahatana, ajahur.
root: ahat (B.)
s: ahas (3. s.)
A. ahasi, ahasthas
iN.r.
hasis
sis
in.t.
hasistam, hasistam
hasista,
;

SB.

hasisur.

ft,

hasyati
hasyate (B.). ps. hiyate ao.
ahayi;
hind; hana (B.); jahita. gd. hitva, hitvi,
hitvaya; -haya (B.). inf. hatum (B.). os. ao. jihipas.
;

pp.

2.

ha go forth, III. A. : pr. jihite

jihita; ipv. jihisva, jihitam (3.

jihate

s.)

jihate

jihatham

(2.

inj.

du.)

A. ajihita ajihata.
pf. jahir6.
ao. red.: jijananta; s: A. ahasata (3. pi.);
IN.T.
hasthas. ft. hasyate (B.).
pp. hand (B.).
gd.
-haya. inf. hatum. cs. hapdyati. ds. jihisate.
hi impel, V.
pr. hinomi, hinosi, hinoti
hinmds and
hinmdsi, hinvdnti; A. hinv6 (1. 3,); hinvdte and
hinvir6 sb. hindva inj. hinvdn ipv. hinuhi, hinutat,

jihatam

(3. pi.)

pt.

jihana.

ipf.

hinii

dntu

hinotam

hinntd, hinota and hinotana, hinv-

hinvdnt

PT.

hinvand

ipf.

dhinvan.

pf.

jighyur (B.). ao. root: dhema, dhetana,

dhyan ipv. heta pt. hiyand a dhyam s dhait
dhaisit (B.)
A. dhesata (3. pi.), pp. hitd.
(3. s., AV.)

jighaya

(B.)

GDv. h^tva.

INF. -hy6.

A. himste (AV.);
hindsti; himsanti
hindstu
op. himsyat (B.)
pt. himsana
ipf.
dhinat (3. s., B.). I. pr. himsati, -te (B.). pf. jihimsima.
PPF. jihimsis.
ao. is
inj. himsisam, himsis,

Yiims

injiire.

ipv.

Nil.

himsit; himsistam
himsisydti, -te (B.).
119

(2.

du.)

himsista, himsisur.

himsydte

ps.

pp.

himsita

ft.

gdv.

APPENDIX

484

gd. himsitva.

himsitavya.

inf.

itos (B.).
Ds. jihimsisati (B.).
hid he hostile, I. : pt. h^lant ; A.
PF. jihila (1.

(B.).

s.),

AO,
jihilana.
hidita.
pp.
(TA.).

h61amana

jihlda (AV.)
ajihidat

red.:

PT.

hu

himsitum

cs. pt.

hims-

(B.),

hidamana

A. jihil6 ; jihilir6;
is: A. hidisatam

helayant.

juhomi, juhoti juhumas, juhvati

A. juhv6, juhut6 juhvate sB.jiihavama; op.juhuyat;
juhuyama; juhudhi (B.), juhotu; juhuta and juhota,
juhotana A. juhudhvam ; pt. juhvat juhvana ipf.
ajtihavur A. ajuhvata. pf. juhv6 juhur6 juhvir6
ao. s: ahausit (B.).
(B.)
per. juhavam eakara (B.).
gd.
FT. hosyati.
ps. huyate ; ao. ahavi ; pp. huta.
hutva (B.). INF. h6tavai; hotum (B.), hotos (B.).
sacrifice. III.

pr.

hu

pt. havamana.
in.t. havanta
pr. havate
huv6 (1. 3.)
huvamahe inj. huvat op.
huv^ma A. huv6ya pt. huvant ipf. ahuve ahuvII.
pr.
anta.
III.
pk. juhumasi and juhumas.
humahe.
pf. juhava
hut6
A. juhv6
juhur6
ao. root:
A. ahvi
ahumahi; inj.
juhuvir6 (B.).
h6ma a ahvam, ahvat ahvama A. ahve ahvanta
s
ps. huyate
pp. huta
A. ahusata (3. pi.),
gdv.
gd. -huya (B.).
inf. havitave; huvadhyai.
havya.
I.

call,

VI.

A.

PR.

int. johavimi, johaviti;

sb. A.
johavitu; ipf. ajohavit; ajohavur.
pr. harati, -te
sb. harani, harat; harama,
1.
haran op. haret harema ipv. hara harata, harantu ;
ipf. aharat.
PT. harant.
pf. jahara, jahartha (B.)
A.
ao. root: ahrthas (B.)
s:
jahrur ;
jahr6 (B.).
ahar
A.
ft.
dharsam,
harisyati,
(3. s.)
ahrsata(3. pi.),
-te (B.)
harta (B.) co. aharisyat (B.). ps. hriyate
GD. hrtva(B.) -hrtya. inf. harase; harta vai
pp. hrta.
hartum (B.). cs. harayati, -te (B.).
(B.); hartos (B.)
Ds.

jdhusati

johuvanta;
hr talce, I.

(B.).

ipv.

DS. jihirsati.
2.

hr
IPV.

he angry,

hrnitam

IX. A.
(3. s.)

pr. hrnisd, hrnit6

pt.

hrnana.

in.t.

hrnithas

LIST OF VERBS
hrs

he excited,

I.

harsamana.
yati, -te.

hnu

harsate

pr.

pf. pt.

int. sb.

hide, II.

pr.

ipv.

485

harsasva

pt.

hrsita.

pp.

jahrsana.

harsant ;
harsa-

cs.

jarhrsanta pt. jarhrsana.

A. hnuv6. pp. hnuta.
;

hnutas

gdv.

hnavayya.
hri he ashamed, III. P.
pp. hrita (B.).

ao. root

pk. jihreti.

pt.

-hrayana.

hva call, IV. pr. hvayati hvaye sb. hvayamahai op.

hvayetam (3. du.) ipv. hvaya, hvayatu hvayantu
A. hvayasva; hvayetham (2. du.)
hvayantam; pt.
hvayamana. ipf. ahvayat
ahvayanta. ao. ahvasxt
:

(B.).

ft.

hvayitum

hvayisyati, -te

inf.

(B.).

hvayitavai

(B.)

(B.).

hvr

he crooTced, I. A.
pr. hvarate.
IX. P. pr. hrunati.

III.: SB, juhuras; A. juhuranta; inj. juhurthas; pt.

:

juhurana.

tam
pp.

(2.

du.)

ao. red.
;

s: inj.

hvrta, hrutd.

jihvaras

hvar

cs.

inj.

(2. s.),

hvarayati.

Ff 2

jihvaras

hvarsit;

is:

jihvarahvarisur.

APPENDIX

II

VEDIC METRE.
The main principle governing Vedic metre (the source
1
of all later Indian versification) ^ is measurement by number
The metrical unit here is not the foot in the
of syllables.''
^

sense of Greek prosody, but i\\Q foot (pada) or quarter^ in

the sense of the verse or line which is a constituent of the

Such verses consist of

stanza.

less

(much
more or

commonly)

less regulated

eight,

five syllables.

eleven, twelve,

The verse

is

or

further

by a quantitative rhythm (unaffected

by the musical accent) in which short and long syllables

alternate.
Nearly all metres have a general iambic rhythm
inasmuch as they show a preference for the even syllables
(second, fourth, and so on) in a verse being long rather than
In every metre the rhythm of the latter part of the
short.

verse (the last four or five syllables), called the cadence, is

more rigidly regulated than that of the earlier part. Verses
of eleven and twelve syllables are characterized not only by
their cadence, but by a caesura after the fourth or the fifth
syllable, while verses of five and eight syllables have no

such metrical pause.

Called ehandas in the KV".

Except the two metres Arya and Vaitaliya which are measured

itself.

by morae.
2
This seems to have been the only metrical principle in the IndoIranian period, because in the Avesta the character of a verse depends
solely on the number of syllables it contains, there being no quanti-

tative restriction in

any part of it.

figurative sense (derived from foot = quarter of a
applicable because the typical stanza lias four lines.
*

quadruped)

VEDIC METKE

437

Verses combine to form a stanza or re, the unit of the

hymn, which generally consists of not less than thi'ee or

more than

fifteen

such units.

The

stanzas

of

common

occurrence in the EV. range, by increments of four syllables,

from twenty syllables

in length.^

(4

stanza

X 5)

may

to forty-eight (4 x 12) syllables

consist of a combination of

and
metrically identical or of metrically different verses
either two or three stanzas may further be combined to form
a strophe.
;

a. The following
general rules of prosody are to be noted. 1. The
end of a verse regularly coincides with the end of a word ^ because
each verse in a stanza is independent of the rest in structure. 2. Tho
quantity of the first and last syllables of a verse is indifferent.
3. A vowel becomes long by
position if followed by two consonants.

One
The

or both of these consonants

may belong to the following word.

ch and the cerebral aspirate Ih (dh) count as
^
double consonants.
4. One vowel is shortened before another
e and o are also pronounced e and 6 before a.
5. The semivowels
y and v, both within a word and in Sandhi, have often to be pronounced as i and u e. g. siama for syama suar for svar vi usah
for vy usah vidathesu anjan for vidathesv aiijan.
6. Contracted
vowels (especially i and u) must often bo restored e. g. ca agndye
for cagnaye vi indrah for vmdrah
dvatu utaye for dvatiitaye a
indra for 6ndra.
7. Initial a when dropped after e and o must
nearly always be restoi-ed. 8. The long vowel of the gen. pi. ending
am, and of such words as dasa, sura, and e (us jya-istha for jyestha)
palatal as^^irate

must often be jJi'onounced as equivalent

The spelling of a few words regularly
misrepresents their metrical value thus pavaka must always be pronounced as pavaka, mrlaya as mflaya, and suvand. nearly always as
or ai (as 4-ichas for aichas)
to two short syllables.
9.

svand.

1
There are also several longer stanzas formed by adding more
verses and consisting of 52, 56, 60, 04, 68, and 72 syllables but all
these ai-e rare
only two stanzas of 68 and one of 72 are found in
;

the RV.
^
No infringement of this rule occurs in any metre of the RV. but
the comparatively rare Dvipada Viraj (4 x 5), in which three exceptions
are met with.
3 The
vowels i, u, e when Pragrhya (25, 26), however, remain long
before vowels. When a final long vowel is the result of Sandhi, it
also remains long t^ma adat for tasmai adat.
;

APPENDIX

438

Simple Stanzas.

I.
2.

that

The Vedic hymns

of such as are

is,

metrically identical.

bining

three,

four,

II

consist chiefly of simple stanzas,

formed of verses which are all

Different stanzas are formed by comThe

or six identical verses.

five,

following is an account of the various types of verse and of

the different simple stanzas formed by them.

A. Verse of eight syllables. This is a dimeter verse

consisting of two equal members of four syllables each, the
opening and the cadence. In the opening the first and
third syllable are indifferent, while the second and fourth
are preferably long.
When the second is short, the third
is almost invariably long.
In the cadence the rhythm is

and third syllables being almost

always short, while the second is usually long (though it is
not infrequently short also). Thus the prevailing scheme of
the whole verse is ^
^-^^^^

typically iambic, the first

a.

Even

after every adrdissible

vowel restoration a good

many verses

of this type exhibit the anomaly (which cannot be removed without

doing violence to the text) of having one syllable too few e. g. tarn
;

tua vaydm pito. There are also here a veiy few instances of one or
even two syllables too many e. g. agnim ils bhujara yavi stham
and vayam tad as ya sambhrtam vasu.
;

3.

The Gayatri

a.

verses

^
;

'

.stanza consists of three

'"

octosyllabic

e. g.

^
Next to the Tristubh this is the commonest metre in the RV.,
yet it has
ueai-ly one-fourth of that Sanihita being composed in it
entirely disappeared in Classical Sanskrit. The Avesta has a parallel
;

stanza of 3 x 8 syllables.
*
The first two Padas of the Gayatri are treated as a hemistich in
the Sanihita text, probably in imitation of the hemistich of the
Anustubh and the Tristubh but there is no reason to believe that in
the original text the second verse was more sharply divided from the
third than from the first.
5
By far the commonest variation from the normal type is that in
which the second syllable of the cadence is short {\j ^ ^ ^). This
occurs about as often in the first verse of Gayatris as in the second
and third combined.
;

SIMPLE STANZAS
agnim

purohitam

ile

vam

yajnasya de

i'69

^ ^ ^
\

rtvijam

v^
|

hdtaram ra tnadhatamam
[

|w ^^|

|w ^^||

jj

a.
comparatively rare but sufficiently definite variety
of Gayatrl ^ differs from the normal
type by having a decided
trochaic rhythm in the cadence, ^ while the iambic

rhythm
more pronounced than usual e. g.
tuam no ag ne mahobhih ^ v^ - w <j
~
pahi visva sya arateh - ^

uta dviso martiasya w

w
v^

of the opening

is

"-^

k_/

jl

h.

The Anustubh' stanza

a yas te sar

a.

la the

mar

latest

^ ^
w j^ ^

dhayase

ti
|

dyumnam

a cittam

e. g.

pirasute

agne sam as
aisu

consists of four octosyllabic

two hemistichs

verses, divided into

uta sravah

'

y^

<u

jj

kj

tiesu

dhah

v^

11
i

of the RV. there begins a tendency to

from the second verse of an Anustubh hemistich

hymns

differentiate the first

by making the end of the former trochaic, while the cadence of the
latter becomes more strictly iambic.
Although in these hymns
the iambic cadence of the first verse is still the most frequent
(25 per cent.) of all varieties, it is already very nearly equalled by the
next commonest (23 per cent.), which is identical with the normal
and characteristic cadence of the first verse in the epic Anustubh *
The scheme of the whole hemistich according to this
(sloka).
innovation ^ then is;i=i Sil |i^
^ ^ )=i \^ ^ ^ v.g.
kesi visa sya patrena
yad rudrena pibat saha
\\

'

2,

The only long

||

series of

\\

||

such trochaic Gayatrls occurs in RV.

viii.

1-39,
^

The trochaic Gayatrl is commonest in Mandalas i and viii, which

taken together contain about two-thirds of the total number of
examples in the RV.
'
The frequency of this metre is about one-third that of Gayatrl in
the RV., but in the post-Vedic period it has become the predominant
metre. The Avesta has a parallel stanza of 4 x 8 syllables.
*
Where the iambic cadence in the first verse has entirely disappeared.
*
This is the regular type of the Aiiustubh in the AV.

APPENDIX

440
c.

The Pankti stanza

consists of five octosyllabic verses

hemistichs of two and of three verses

divided into two

an extension of the
This is indicated
that in hymns consisting entirely of Pahktis the

respectively.

In origin

seems

it

Anustubh by the addition

by

II

tlie fact

to be

of a fifth verse.

verse of every stanza is (except in

fifth

refrain

(e. g.

in

a Pankti stanza

i.

80).

The following

i.

is

81) regularly a
an example of

soma in made brahma cakara vardhanam

savistha vajrinn ojasa prthivya nih sasa ahim arcann

ittha hi

|[

anu svarajiam
In about

cl

fifty

|i

stanzas

KV. the number

of the

of

octosyllabic verses is increased to six and in about twenty

others to seven, generally by adding a refrain of two verses

an Anustubh (e.g. viii. 47) or to a Pankti (e.g. x. 133,

The former is called Mahapankti (48), the latter
1-3).

to

i^akvari

B.

4.

(56).

Verses of eleven syllables

differ

from those of

eight in consisting of three members (the opening, the break,

and the cadence). They also contrast with the latter in two
- -) and
their cadence is trochaic
other respects
(- w
have a caesura, M'hich follows either the fourth or the
:

"'

they

fifth syllable.

Tlie

rhythm

of the syllables preceding the

^ - ^ - or - - - - -."
prevailingly iambic, being
The rhythm of the break between the caesura and the
"
Thus the scheme of
cadence is regularly w v^ - or w ^^

caesura

'^

is

The Avesta has a parallel stanza of 5 x 8 syllables.

The only irregularity here is that the first syllable of the cadence
may be short when it coincides with the end of a word.
1

3 This
the caesura
appears to have been the origiiial position of
because the parallel verse of the Avesta has it there and never after
the fifth syllable.
*
Identical with the opening of the octosyllabic verse.
6
The fourth syllable here is sometimes short the fifth is then
:

always long.

of these two syllables is sometimes, but rarely, long in

of the RV., still more rarely in the later hymns, and
hardly ever in B.
6

The

the old

first

hymns

SIMPLE STANZAS

441

the whole normal verse of eleven syllables is

^-^-, ^ ^ -\^y^-^\
^-^-^, v^v^l-^-^l

()
{h)

or

. Apart from corruptions or only seeming irregularities (removable

by restoration of vowels) several verses of tliis tyjie have one syllabic
too many or too few;^ e.g. ta no vidvamsa, manma vo cetam
adyd- (12); tam im giro, jdna yo na pdtnih ^ (lOj.
Occasionally
two syllables are wanting after the caesura or the verse is too long by
a trochee added at tlie end e. g. t4 u sd no, [. .] ma ho yajatrah (9)
ay^m s^ hota, [v^ o] yo dvijdnma (9) rathebhir yata, rsti mddbhir
fisva parnaih (13).
]

The Tristiibh stanza, the commonest in the RV,,^

consists of four verses of eleven syllables divided into two
5.

'

hemistichs.

The following

anagastv6, aditi

(a)

dhatu

srosamanah
I

imam yajnam,

da-

pibantu

1|

||

asmakam santu, bhiiva nasya gopah

somam, ava se nd adya

(6)

a.

are hemistichs of each type

tv6 turasah

few Tristubh stanzas of only two verses (dvipada) occur

(e.g. vii. 17).

Much commoner

two of which

are those of three verses (viraj), the

the Gayatri stanza) are treated in the

Sarnhita text as a hemistich the whole of some hymns is composed
in this three-line metre (e. g. iii. 25).
Fairly frequent are also
Tristubli stanzas of five verses^ divided into two hemistichs of two
first

(as in

and three

A'erses respectively. Thdy are always of isolated occurrence,

appearing generally at the end of (Tristubh) hymns, but never form-

ing an entire

hymn.

^
This anomaly also appears in the metre of later Vedic texts and of
Pali poetry.
^
The extra syllable in such cases is perhaps due to the verse being
inadvertently continued after a fifth syllable caesura as if it were
a fourth syllable caesura.
^
The deficiency of a syllable in such cases may have been partly
due to the similarity of the decasyllabic Dvipada Viraj (8) with which
Tristubh verses not infrequently interchange.
*
About two-fifths of the RV. are composed in this metre.
*
The Avesta has a parallel stanza of 4x 11 syllables with caesura
after the fourth syllable.
^
These are accounted Atijagati (62) or Sakvari stanzas by the
ancient metricians when the fifth verse is a repetition of the fourth.
If it is not a repetition it is treated in the Sarnhita text as a separate
verse (as v. 41, 20; vi. (J3, 11) and is called an ekapada
by the
metricians.

APPENDIX

442
6.

C.

The verse

extension

II

of twelve syllables is probably an

by one syllable which gives

of the Tristubh verse

the trochaic cadence of the latter

an iambic character. ^

The rhythm of the last five syllables is therefore - ^ - v^ ^.

The added syllable being the only point of difference, the
scheme

of the
{a)

whole verse

- _ -

_,

is

^ ^ _

or

THE JAGATI STANZA

443

The Dvipada Viraj stanza^ consists of four such verses

divided into two hemistichs ; ^ e. g.
pari pra dhanva indraya soma
svadur mitraya pusn6 bhagaya
]

\\

cadence a Dvipada
Owing
hemistich not infrequently interchanges in the same stanza
with a Ti'istubh verse * e. g.
the identity

to

a.

of

the

''

priya vo nama

huve turanam
a yat trpan, maruto vavasanah

"'

mixture of Dvipada hemistichs with Tristubh

verses led to an entire hymn (iv. 10) being composed in a
peculiar metre consisting of three pentasyllable verses'
followed by a Tristubh e. g.
Tlie

b.

agne tarn adya asvam na stomaih kratum na bhadram

^
hrdisprsam, rdhia ma ta ohaih
|

||

II.

Mixed

Stanzas.

The only different verses normally used in combination

The
form a stanza are the Gayatrl and the Jagatl.
principal metres thus formed are the following
a. Stanzas of 28 syllables consisting of three verses, the
lirst two of which are treated as a hemistich
9.

to

1
Tills stanza is somewhat rare,
tlian a hundi-ed times.

occumng

in the

RV. not

nuicli

more

The otherwise universal rule that the end of a verse must coincide
with the end of a word is three times ignored in this metre (at the
end of the first and third verses).
3 With this metre
compare the defective Tristubh verse of ten
-

syllables (4 a).

This interchange occurs especially in RV. vii. 34 and 56.

Here the verb, though the first word of the verse (App. Ill, 19 b),
This is because the end of the first and the third
is unaccented.
verse in this metre has a tendency to bo treated like a caesura rather
than a division of the stanza. Cp. note 2.
These three verses are treated as a hemistich in the Samhita text.
The verb is accented because in the Samhita text it is treated as
*

"^

the

first

word

of a separate verse.

APPENDIX

444
1.

Usnih: 8 8 12

II

e.g.

agne vaja sya gomatah

isanah sa haso yaho

||

asm.6 dhehi, jatave

2.

Purausnih

12 8 8;

do mahi sravah

'

i|

e. g.

amrtam apsii bhesajam

apam uta prasastaye
apsii antar,

d6va bhava

ta vajinah

3.

Kakubh

8 12 8

||

e. g.

adha hi in dra girvanah

lipa tva kaman, mahah sasrjmahe
ud6va yan ta udabhih
j

b.

Stcinzas of

||

into

]|

36 syllables consisting of four verses divided

Brhati 8 8 12 8; e.g.

two hemisticlis

sacibhir nah sacivasu

d6va naktam dasasyatam
ma vam ratir, upa da sat kada cana
asmad I'atih kada cana
j

''

Stanzas of

c.

into

40 syllables

U\o hemisticlis

consisting of four verses divided

Satobrhati 12 8 12 8;

e. g.

janaso agnim, dadhi re sahovrdham

havismanto vidhema te
sa tvam no adya, suma na ihavita
1

bhava vaje

su santia
|

|j

10. There are besides two much longer mixed stanzas of

seven verses/ each of which is split up into three divisions
of three, two, and two verses respectively in the Samhita
text.
a.

Stanzas of

verses

^
^

60

syllables consisting of six Gayatri

^
e. g.
8, 8 8, 12 8

and one Jagati: Atisakvari 8 8

These arc the composition of a very few individual i)octs.

Only about ten examples of this metre occur in the KV.

MIXED STANZAS
susuma ya tain adribhih
gosrita mat sara im6
somaso mat sara im6

a raj ana

445

||

divisprsa

tarn upa nah

ime vam mitra, -varu na gavasirah

asmatra gan

||

somah sukra gavasirah

h.

Stanzas of 68 syllables consisting of four GayatrT and

Atyasti' 12 12 8, 8 8, 12 8 e. g,

three Jagati verses

no n6distham, dadrs ana a bhara

agne dev^bhih, saca nah sueetxina
maho rayah sucetuna
mahi savi stha nas krdhi
samcakse bhu j6 asiai
mahi stotrbhyo, magha van suviriam
mathir ugro na savasa
sa

||

||

j[

a. Besides the above

mixed metres various other but isolated
combinations of Gayatri and Jagati verses occur in the KV., chiefly in
single hymns. There are stanzas of this kind containing 20 syllables
2
32 syllables (12 8, 12) ; 40 syllables (12 12, 8 8) * 44 syllables
(128)
(12 12, 12 8) 5
52 syllables (12 12, 12 8 8).
1. Tristubh verses are quite often interspersed in Jagati stanzas,
/3.
but never in such a way as to form a fixed type of stanza or to make
This practice probably
it doubtful whether a hymn is a Jagati one.'^
arose from the interchange of entire Tristubh and Jagati stanzas in
the same hymn bringing about a similar mixture within a single
stanza. 2. An occasional licence is the combination of a Tristubh
with a Gayatri verse in the same stanza. This combination appears
as a regular mixed stanza (11 8, 8 8) in one entire hymn (RV. x. 22).*
3. The combination of a Tristubh verse with a Dvipada Viraj hemistich
has already been noted (8 a).
;

1
This is the only comparatively common long metre (of more than
48 syllables) in the RV., where more than 80 Atyasti
" *stanzas occur.

2
'

RV.
RV.

viii. 29.
viii. 35.

rv.

ix.

RV.

110.

RV.

x. 93.

v. 87.

fiut the intrusion of Jagati verses in a Tristubh lij'mn is

exceptional in the RV., though very common in the AV. and later.
*
Except stanzas 7 and 15, which are pure Anustubh and Tristubh
'

respectively.

APPENDIX

446

Strophic Stanzas.

III.
11.

Two

II

stanzas are often found strophically

or three

combined in the KV.. forming couplets or triplets.

A. Three simple stanzas (called trca) in the same metre
are often thus connected.
Gayatrl triplets are the commonest less usual are Usnih, Brhati, or Pahkti triplets
;

while Tristubh triplets are rare. A hymn consisting of

several triplets often concludes with an additional stanza in
a different metre.
conclude a hymn composed in one
A Tristubh stanza at the end of
a Jagati hymn is the commonest a final Anustubh stanza in Gayatrl
hymns is much less usual but all the commoner metres are to some
extent thus employed except the Gayatvi, which is never used in
It is a typical practice to

a.

metre with a stanza in another.

this

way.

B.

Two mixed

stanzas in different metres are often com-

RV. containing about 250 such strophes. This

doubly mixed strophic metre, called Pragatha, is of two
main types
bined, the

1.

The Kakubha Pragatha

much

is

common

the less

kind of strophe, occurring only slightly more than fifty

times in the RV. It is formed by the combination of a
Kakubh with a SatobrhatT stanza 8 12, 8-M2 8, 12 8 e. g.
:

a no asva

vad asvina
|

vartir yasistam,

madhu patama uara

|

gdmad dasra hiranyavat

||

|j

supravargam, suviryam susthii variam

anadhrstam raksasvina
asminn a vam, ayane vajinivasu
visva vama ni dhimahi
[

j{

2. The Barhata Pragatha is a common strophe, occurring

It is formed by the
nearly two hundred times in the RV.
combination of a Brhati with a Satobrhatl stanza 8 8, 12 8 -f
:

'

12

8,

12 8

e. g.

STROPHIC STANZAS
dyumni vam stdmo asvina
|

ka a gatam

krivir na s6
|

madhvah
patam

sutasya, sa di
gaurav iv6rine
|

447

||

vi priy6 nara

||

pibatam gharmam, madhu mantam asvina

a barhih si datam nara
ta mandasana, manu so durona a
|

ni patam v6

||

dasa vayah

|]

a. Of these two types there are many variations occurring in

individual hymns, chiefly by the addition of one (8), two (12 8),
three (12 8 8), or once (vii. 96, 1-3) even four verses (12 12 8 8).

APPENDIX

III

THE VEDIC ACCENT.

1.

The accent is marked in all the texts of the four Vedas

two Brahmanas, the Taittiriya (including its

as well as in

Aranyaka) and the Satapatha (including the Brhadaranyaka

Upanisad).

The Vedic,

was a musical
on
as
is
indicated
both by its
depending mainly
pitch,
not affecting the rhythm of metre and by the name of the
chief tone, udatta raised.
That such was its nature is,
like the ancient Greek, accent

one,

moreover, shown by the account given of

it by the ancient
Three degrees of pitch are to be distinguished, the high, properly represented by the udatta,
the middle by the svarita {sounded), and the low by the
But in the Rigveda the Udatta.
anudatta [not raised).
the rising accent, has secondarily acquired a middle pitch,
lower than the initial pitch of the Svarita. The Svarita is
a falling accent representing the descent from the Udatta
In the Rigveda it rises slightly
pitch to tonelessness.
above Udatta pitch before descending here therefore it has
something of the nature of a circumflex. It is in realitv
always an enclitic accent following an Udatta, though it
assumes the appearance of an independent accent when the
preceding Udatta is lost by the euphonic change of a vowel
In
into the corresponding semivowel (as in kva = kiia).

native phoneticians.

The
it is called the independent Svarita.
the low tone of the syllables preceding an

the latter case

Anudatta

is

Udatta.
2.

There are four different methods of marking the accent

The system of the Rigveda, which is
texts.

in Vedic

METHODS OF MARKING ACCENTS

449

followed by the Atharvaveda, the Vajasaneyi Samhita, the

Samhita and Brahmana, is peculiar in not marking

Taittirlya

the principal accent at all. This seems to be due to the fact

that in the RV. the pitch of the Udatta is intermediate

between the other two tones. Hence the preceding Anudatta,

having a low pitch, is indicated l)elow the syllable bearing
it by a horizontal stroke, while the following Svarita, which
at first rises to a slightly higher pitch and then falls, is
indicated above the syllable bearing it by a vertical stroke
as

e. g.

agnina

= agnina

viryam

viryam

viriam).
Successive Udattas at the beginning of a hemistich are
indicated by the absence of all marks till the enclitic Svarita

which follows the

last of

them

or

(for

the Anudatta

till

which

(ousting the enclitic Svarita) follows the last of them as

a preparation for another Udatta (or for an independent
tavet tat
tav a yatam
Svarita) ; e. g. tav a yatam

satyam

= tav6t

successive

tat

unaccented

satyam.
syllables

On

the

at

the

other hand, all

beginning of a

e. g. vaisvanaram
But all the unaccented syllables following
a Svarita remain unmarked till that which immediately
e, g. imam
precedes an Udatta (or independent Svarita)

hemistich are marked with the Anudatta

=vaisvanaram.

me gange yamune
yamune sarasvati
a.

sarasvati sutiidri

= imam me

gaiige

sutudri.

Since a hemistich of two or more Padas

is

treated as

a unit that consists of an unbroken chain of accented and

unaccented syllables, and ignores the division into Padas,

the mai'king of the preceding Anudatta and the following
Svarita is not limited to the word in which the Udatta

words not only of the

e. g.
agnina rayim
agnina rayim asnavat

occurs, but extends to the contiguous

same, but of the succeeding Pada

asnavat posam eva dive-dive

1
Here the enclitic Svarita, which would rest on the syllable sa if
the following syllable were vmaccented, is ousted by the Anudatta,
which is required to indicate that the following syllable tyam has the
Udatta.

1819

G g

APPENDIX

450

sa nah piteva sunave ,jgne supanah pit6va sunav6 'gne supayano

p6sam eva div6-dive

yano bhava

III

sa

bhava.^

When

an independent Svarita ^ immediately precedes an

Udatta, it is accompanied by the sign of the numeral 1 if
the vowel is short and by 3 if it is long, the figure being
marked with both the Svarita and the Anudatta e. g.
h.

apsviantah

= apsii

antah

rayo ^ vanih

rayo 'vanih

(cp. 17, 3).

Both the MaitrayanT and the Kathaka Samhitas agree

marking the Udatta with a vertical stroke above (like the
Svarita in the EV.), thereby seeming to indicate that here
But
the Udatta rose to the highest pitch
e. g. agnina.
they differ in their method of marking the Svarita. The
3.

in

MaitrayanI indicates the independent Svarita by a curve

below e. g. viry^ira = viryam but the dependent Svarita
;

by a horizontal stroke crossing the middle of the syllable or

while the Kathaka
by three vertical strokes above it
marks the independent Svarita by a curve below only if an
unaccented syllable follows, but by a hook below if the
;

following

badhnati;

is

syllable

viryam

accented

= viryam

e. g.

viryam

vyacaste

Svarita has a dot below^ the accented

syllable.''

the

= viryam
dependent

The Anudatta

is marked in both these Samhitas with a horizontal stroke

below (as in the EV.).^
4. In the Samaveda the figures 1, 2, 3 are w^-itten above
the accented syllable to mark the Udatta, the Svarita, and

In thePada text on the other hand, each word has its own accent
by contiguous words. The two above hemistichs
there read as I'ollows agnina rayim asnavat posain eva dive^f dive
sah nah pita ,fiva sunave agne su^upayanah bliava.
'

only, unaffected

As

in

kva = kua, viryam =

viriam.

In L. V. Scliroeder's editions of tliese two Samhitas the Udatta

and the independent Svarita only are marked.
*
When the text of any of the Samhitas is transliterated in Roman
characters, the Anudatta and the enclitic Svarita are omitted as
unnecessary because the Udatta itself is marked with the sign of the
acute thus agnina becomes agnina.
;

VEDIC ACCENT

451

the Anudatta respectively as representing three degrees of

pitch

e. g.

barhisi

= barhisi

(barhisi).

The

figure 2

however, also used to indicate the Udatta when there

3

following Svarita

e. g.

gira

two successive Udattas, the second

are

but the
3

following

is,

no

there

not marked,

is

2r written

has

Svarita

When

gira (gira).

is

above;

e.g.

2r

The independent
dviso martyasya (dvis6 martyasya).
the
Svarita is also marked with 2r,
preceding Anudatta
3k

being indicated by

3k

e. g.

2r

tanva

tanva.

The Satapatha Brahrnana marks the Udatta only.

by means of a horizontal stroke below (like the
Anudatta of the KV.) e, g. purusah = purusah. Of two
e. g.
or more successive Udattas only the last is marked
agnir hi vai dhur atha = agnir hi vai dhur atha. An
5.

It does so

independent
syllable

in

Svarita

is

thrown back on the preceding

of an Udatta

the form

manusyesu

e. g.

The

Svarita produced by
manusyesu.
manusyesu
to
a
semivowel, by contraction, or the elision of
change
for

initial

is

similarly treated

e. g.

evaitad

6vaitad for

evaitad ( eva etad).

6. Accent of single words.
Every Vedic word is, as
a rule, accented and has one main accent only. In the
the Udatta
original text of the EV. the only main accent was

which, as Comparative Philology shows, generally rests on

the same syllable as it did in the Indo-European period
e. g. ta-ta-s stretched, Gk. Ta-rd-<i
janu n. Mee, Gk. ydvv
bhara-ta, Gk. (f>ip-Te} But in the
a-drs-at, Gk. e-SpaK-e
written text of the EV. the Svarita appears to be the main
;

accent in some words.

It

which represents

original

then always follows a y or v

u with Udatta e. g. rathyam

or

'
But (pepufiepo-i (bharamanas) by the secondary Greek law of
accentuation which prevents the acute from going back farther than
the third syllable from the end of a word.

Gg2

APPENDIX

452

III

rathi^m
svar - = siiar n. liffht tanvam = tanuam.''
Here the original vowel with its Udatta must be restored in

'

pronunciation except in a very few late passages.

7. Double Accent.
One form of dative infinitive and
two types of syntactical compounds have a double accent.
The infinitive in tavai, of which numerous examples occur
both in the Samhitas and the Brahmanas, accents both the
e. g. 6-tavai to go
first and the last syllable
apa-bhartavai to take mvay. Compounds both members of which
are duals in form (186 A 1), or in which the first member
has a genitive ending (187 A 6 ft), accent bothmembers e. g.
mitra-varuna Mitra and Varum brhas-pati lord of prayer.
;

In B. a double accent also appears in the particle vava.

8. Lack of Accent.
Some words never have an accent
others lose it under certain conditions.
A. Always

enclitic are

ena he, she, it, tva another,

and the following forms of the personal pro-,
nouns of the first and second persons ma, tva me, te
nau, vam; nas, vas (109 a), and of the demonstrative
stems i and sa im (111 n. 3) and sim (180).
h. The particles ea and, u also, va or, iva Uhe, gha, ha
just, cid at all, bhala indeed, samaha somehow, sma just,
a.

all

cases of the pronouns

sama some

indeed, svid probably.

B. Liable to loss

position are
a.
6.

of

accent

according

to

syntactical

vocatives, unless beginning the sentence or Pada.

verbs in principal clauses, unless beginning the

finite

sentence or Pada.
c. oblique cases of the pronoun a, if
unemphatic (replacing
a preceding substantive) and not beginning the sentence or

Pada e. g. asya janimani

usasah of that daivn).
;

^
^

his (Agni's)

Ace. of rathi charioteer.

In the TS. always written suvar.
Ace. of tanu body.

births

(but

asya

ACCENT OF NOMINAL STEMS

d.

yatha as almost invariably when, in the sense of iva

occurs at the end of a Pada e. g. tayavo yatha like

like, it

thieves

kam

1.

9.

453

following nu,

sii,

hi.

Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

The most important

following
A. Primary Suffixes
:

when

indeed always

points to be noted here are the

Stems in-as accent the root if neut. action nouns, but

the suffix if masc. agent nouns e. g. ap-as n. ivork, but
ap-as active. The same substantive here, without change
of meaning, sometimes varies the accent with the gender
a.

e. g.
b.

raks-as m. demon.
Stems formed with the superlative

raks-as

the root

n.,

e. g.

yajistha sacrificing

best.

suffix istha accent

The only exceptions

are jyestha eldest (but jyestha greatest) and kanistha youngest

When the stem is compounded
(but kanistha smallest).^

with a preposition, the

coming
c.

latter is accented

e.

g.

a-gamistha

best.

Stems formed with the

suffix

comparative

iyams

invariably accent the root e. g, jav-iyams swifter. When

the stem is compounded with a preposition, the latter is
;

accented
d.

the

e. g. prati-cyaviyams pressing closer against.

Stems formed with tar generally accent the root when
;

meaning

but the

is participial,

suffix

when

it is

purely

nominal e. g. da-tar giving (with ace), but da-tar giver.

e.
Stems in man when (neut.) action nouns, accent the
e. g. kar-man
root, but when (masc.) agent nouns the suffix
n. action, but dar-man, m. breaker.
The same substantive
here varies, in several instances, in accent with the meaning
and gender (cp. above, 9 A a)
e. g. brahman n. prayer,
brahman m. one who prays sad-man, n. seat, sad-man, m.
sitter.
When these stems are compounded with prepositions,
;

'
These two exceptions arise simply from the desire to distinguish
the two me.inings of each of them. See l)elow (16, footnote 2).

APPENDIX

454

III

the latter are nearly alwaj^s accented

e g.

pra-bharman,

n. presentation.

Secondary Suiflxes:
Stems in ^n always accent the

B.
a.

suffix

e. g.

asv-in

possessing horses.
h.

Stems

in

suffix (except

tama

tama,

if

superlatives, hardly ever accent the

puru-tama

most frequent), but

very
if

mamj, ut-tama

highest,

^a^vat-

ordinals, the final syllable of the

^ata-tama hundredth.
ma, whether superlatives or ordinals, regularly
accent the suffix
e. g. adha-ma lowest
asta-ma eighth
suffix
c.

e. g.

Stems

in

except anta-ma next (but twice anta-ma).

2.

Accentuation of Compounds.

Stated generally, the rule is that iteratives, possessives,

and governing compounds accent the first member, while
10.

determinatives (Karmadharayas and Tatpurusas), and reguformed co-ordinatives accent the last member (usually

larly

Simple words on becoming members

retain their original accent.
Some,
however, alwa5^s change it thus visva regularly becomes
thus
visva
others do so in certain combinations only
piirva prior becomes piirva in purva-cltti f. Jirst thought,

on
of

its final syllable).

compounds generally

purva-huti first invocation

medha-pati lord of
sacrifice and medha-sati f. reception of the sacrifice, and
vira hero in puru-vira possessed of many men and su-vira
purva-piti

m6dha

f.

frst

sacrifice

An

draught,

shifts

its

accent in

compound may shift its accent from

another on becoming a substantive or a
e. g. su-krta toell done, but su-krta, n. good
deed a-raya niggardly, but a-raya m. name of a demon.
a. Iteratives accent the first member only, the two words
being separated b}' Avagraha in the Pada text, like the
heroic.

adjective

member
proper name
one

to

members of other compounds e.g. ahar-ahar day after day

jAd-j ad whatever jAtha-jatha, as in each case adya-adya,
svah-svah on each to-day, on each to-morrow pra-pra foiih
and again piba-piba drink again and again.
;

ACCENTUATION OF COMPOUNDS

455

In governing compounds the first member, when it is

noun (except siksa-nara helping men) is invariably

6.

a verbal

accented

trasa-dasyu

e. g.

terrifying foes,

name

man

of a

present or aorist participles place the accent, wherever

it

may have been originally, on their final syllable; e.g.

tarad-dvesas overcoming (tarat)/ocs. When the first member
a prejjosition, either that

is

directed to

according

word

accented, or the final

is

ends in a e. g. abhi-dyu
anu-kama
heaven, but adhas-pad-a under the feet

syllable of the

compound

if it

to

wish (kama).

c. Bahuvrlhis
normally accent their first member e. g.
raja-putra having kings as sons (but raja-putra son of a Icing)
visvato-mukha facing in all directions saha-vatsa accom;

panied hy her calf.

a. But about one-eighth
chiefly

on the

of all

final syllable).

Bahuvrihis accent the second member

This is commonly the case when the

member is a dissyllabic adjective ending in i or u, invariably in

when it is purii or bahii much e. g. tuvi-dyumnd having great

first

the RV.

vibhu-krdtu having great strength puru-putr4 having many sons

bahv-auna having much food} This also is the regular accentuation
when the first member is dvi t^vo, tri three, dus ill, su ivell, or the

glory

privative particle a or an
three

naves,

toothless,

dur-m^nman

e. g.

dvi-pdd

ill-disposed,

tri-nabhi having

a-ddnt

a-phala lacking fruit (phala).

Determinatives accent the

d.

two-footed,

su-bhi,ga well-endoKed,

member

final

(chiefly

on the

final syllable).

Ordinary Karmadharayas accent the final syllable

prathama-ja first-born, pratar-yiij early yoked, mahadhana great spoil. But when the second member ends in
1.

e,

g.

man, van,

i,

or

is

a gerundive (used as a n. substantive),

the penultimate syllable

hold

su-tarman

purva-p6ya,
'

The

naman
"

later
l,SV.)

n.

is

crossing

accented
ivell

e.g. dur-grbhi Jtard to

raghu-patvan swift-fiying
;

precedence in drinking.

Samhitas tend

to follow the

general rule

e. g.

puni-

many -named.

Bahuvrihis formed with a or an are almost invariably accented

on the final syllable as a distinction from Kaimadharayas (which
normally accent the first syllable, as 6-manusa mftwman) e.g. a-matr6.
;

measureless.

APPENDIX

456
a.

The

conditions.

III

member

liist

is,
however, accented under the following
generally accented when it is an adverbial word

It is

qualifying a 2)ast participle in ta or na or a verbal noun in tl e. g.

diir-hita faring ill
sadhd-stuti joint iwaise. It is almost invariably
accented when it is the privitive particle a or an ' compounded with
;

participle,

adjective,

or substantive
e. g.
an-adant not eating,
d-krta not done, d-tandra imwearied, d-kumara
;

d-vidvams

not knowing,

not a child.

The privative particle is also regularly accented, when it

compound; e.g. 6n-asva-da not giving a horse, dn-agni-

negatives a

dagdha

not burnt with fire,

2. Ordinary Tatpurusas accent the final

e. g.
syllable
gotra-bhid opening the cow-pens, agnim-indha firc-hindling,
;

bhadra-vadin uttering auspicious cries uda-megha shower

But when the second member is an agent noun
oftvater.
in ana, an action noun in ya, or an adjective in i, or van,
;

the radical syllable of that

madana
dragon

member

exhilarating the gods

pathi-raksi protecting

is

the road

e. g.

deva-

n. slaughter

of the

accented

ahi-hatya
;

soma-pavan Soma-

drinhing.

member

however, accented when it is dependent on

na or on action nouns in ti e. g.
devd-hita ordained by the gods, dh6na-sati acquisition of wealth. It is
usually also accented, if dependent on p^ti lord e. g. grha-pati lord of
the house.
Some of these compounds with pati accent the second
member with its original accent some others in the later Samhitas,
conforming to the general rule, accent it on the final syllable
thus apsara-pati (AV.) lord of the Ax>sarases, ahar-pati (^MS.) lord of day,
a.

The

first

is,

past passive participles in ta and

nadi-pati (VS.) lord of rivers,

A certain number of Tatpurusas of syntactical origin, having

j8.
a genitive case-ending in the first member nearly always followed by
e. g. bfhas-pati lord of iwayer.
Other are
p6ti, are doubly accented
apam-nfipat son o/"tya<eys, nara-simsa (for naram-s^msa) 2''!se of men,
The analogy of these is
<5unah-86pa Dog''s tail, name of a man.
;

followed by some Tatpurusas without case-ending in the first member

sdci-pdti lord of might
tdnu-ndpat son of himself (tanii) nf-sdmsa
praise of men.

Sometimes, however, the

accented

a-mrta

e. g.

a-jira imaging
immortal (from mrtd).
;

of the second member is

a-mitra m. enemy {non-friend raitrd)

first syllable

ACCENTUATION OF COMPOUNDS
Regularly formed Dvandvas (ISO

c.

457

3) accent the

2.

stem irrespective of the original accent

of the last member e. g. ajavayah. m. pi. goats and sheep
aho-ratrani days and nights ista-purtam n. lohat is sacrificed
and presented.
final syllable of the

The very

a.

d,har-divi

day

rare cadverbial
day,

hij

Dvandvas accent the

saydm-pratar

evening

member:

first

and morning.

0. Co-ordinatives consisting of the names of two deities, each dual in

form (Devata-dvandvas), accent both members; e.g. indra-vd,runa
Indra and Varuna siirya-masa Sun and Moon. A few others, formed
of words that are not the names of deities, are similarly accented
e. g. turvasa-yadu Turvas'a and Yadu
mat^ra-pitdra mother and father.'
;

Accent in Declension.

3.

11.

The

a.

vocative,

has the acute on the

ddva
nom.

i.

e.

cp.

accented at
syllable

all (18),

e. g.

The regular vocative

(N. deva-s).

dyaus,

when
first

invariably
pitar (N. pita),

of

dyu

(dyav)

is

diaus (which irregularly retains the s of the

Gk. Zev), but the accent of the N., dyaus,

usually appears instead.

b. In the a and a declensions the accent remains on the

same

syllable throughout (except the vocative)

deva-nam.
This rule includes

e. g.

deva-s,

deva-sya,

monosyllabic
stems, pronouns, the numeral dva, and radical a stems

e. g.

from

ma maya, ma-hyam,
:

t6-sam, ta-bhis
ja m.

f.

offspring:

from dva

may-i from ta ta-sya,

dva-bhyam, dvayos from
;

ja-bhyam, ja-bhis, ja-bhyas, ja-su.

The cardinal stems

in a, pdiaca, ndva, dasa (and its compounds)

vowel before the endings bhis, bhyas, su, and
to the gen, ending nam
asta shifts it to all the endings and saptd to
the gen. ending; e. g. pafica-bhis, panca-nam saptd.-bhis, sapta-nam;
asta-bbis, asta-bhyds, asta-nam.
a.

shift the accent to the

perhaps rather an irregular iterative in which the first

repeated by a synonym.
Occasionally these compounds become assimilated to the normal
type by losing the accent and even the inflexion of the first member
e. g. indragni Indra and Agni, indra-vayu Indra and Vdyv.
'

This

member

is

is

APPENDIX

468
The pronoun a

/9.

iliis,

III

though sometimes conforming

to tliis rule

a-smai, d-sya, a-bhis). is usually treated like monosyllables not

ending in a e. g. a-sya, e-sam, a-sam,
(e. g.

When

c.

acute

the final syllable of the stem

accented, the

is

a declension) to the

liable to shift (except in the

is

endings in the weak cases.

1. In monosyllabic stems (except those ending in a) this
is the rule;^ e.g. dhi f. thought', dhiy-a, dhi-bhis, dhinam bhu f. earth bhuv-as, bhuv-6s nau f. ship nav-a,
nau-bhis, nau-sii (Gk. vav-at)
dat-a,
dant, m. tooth
dad-bhis.^
:

There are about a dozen exceptions to this rule go cow, dyo sky
nf man, str star ksam earth tan succession, ran joy, vdn icood vi m.
bird
svar light
e. g. g^v-a, gSv-am, go-bhis
vip rod
dyav-i,
dyu-bhis nir-e, nf-bhis, nf-su (but nar-am and nr-nam) stf-bhis
ksdm-i tdn-a (also tan-a") r^n-e, rdm-su vam-su (but van-am)
vi-bhis, vi-bhyas (but vl-nam) G. vip-as siir-as i^but sur-6) also the
dative infinitives badh-e to press and vah-e to convey. The irregular
accentuation of a few other monosyllabic stems is due to their being
reduced forms of dissyllables these are dru wood (daru), snu summit
e. g.
(sanu), svan dog (Gk. kvcov), yun ^weak stem of yuvan young)
dru-na snu-su sixna, svd.-bhis y^n-a.
:

When

the final accented syllable loses its vowel either

or
by syncope
change to a semivowel, the acute is thrown
forward on a vowel ending e. g. from mahiman greatness
2.

mahimna

dhenii coiv dhenv-a

agni fire
agny-6s
y&dhuhride: vadhv-ai (AV.) -pitf Jather pitr-a.
:

a. Polysyllabic stems in f, u, f and, in the RV., usually those in i,

throw the acute on the ending of the gen. pi. also, even though the
final vowel of the stem here retains its syllabic character; e.g.

agni-nami dhenu-nam, datf-nam, bahvi-nam

(cp. 11 b a),

3. Present participles in at and ant throw the acute

forward on vowel endings in the weak cases e. g. tud-ant
This rule is also
tudat-a (but tudad-bhis).
striking
;

'

tion

At the end
;

e.

g.

of a

su-dhi

compound

tcise,

a monosyllabic stem loses this accentua-

sudhf-nam.

ACCENT IN DECLENSION

459

mahant great and brhant

mahat-a
(but mahad-bhis).
lofty
4. In the EV. derivatives formed with accented -anc
throw the acute forward on vowel endings in the weak cases
when the final syllable contracts to ic or uc e.g. praty-anc
turned towards pratic-a(but pratyak-su) anv-aho following
followed by the old participles
e. g.

anuc-as

hut pr&ho forward: prac-i.^

Verbal Accent.

4.

The augment invariably bears the

12. a.

verb

accented at

is

all

(19)

e. g.

inipf.

if

acute,

a-bhavat

the
aor.

a-bhut plup. a-jagan cond. a-bharisyat. The accentuation of the forms in which the augment is dropped (used
The imperfect accents the
also as injunctives) is as follows.
same sj'llable as the present e. g. bharat bharati ; bhinat
;

The

bhinatti.

pluperfect accents the root

e. g.

cakan

but in the
tatananta
3. pi. also occur cakrpanta, dadhrsanta.
The aorist is variously treated. The s and the is forms
sams-is-am. The
accent the root e. g. vam-s-i (van win)

(3.

s.)

namamas, tastambhat

root aorist (including the passive form) accents the radical

vowel in the sing, active, but the endings elsewhere e. g.
;

2. s. mid. nut-thas.
(\/vrj); pass. v6d-i
"
those syllables
accent
or
-sa
aorists formed with -a

3. s.

vark

The

ruham, vidat

budhanta

e.

g.

dhuk-sa-nta. The reduplicated

aorist accents either the reduplicated syllable e. g. ninasas,

piparat, jijanan or the root, as piparat, sisnathat.
;

h.

Present System.

The

accent in the a conjugation

declension) remains on the same syllable

first and
throughout: on the radical syllable in verbs of the
fourth classes, on the affix in the sixth (125) e. g. bhavati

(as

in

the a

nahyati

tudati.

In the other Samhitas, however, the accent is generally retained

on the stem tlius the AV. forms the f. stem pratic-i (RV. pratTc-f).
^
In the a aorist several forms are found accenting tlie root; e.g.
aranta, sddatam, s6.nat.
>

APPENDIX

460

III

The graded conjugation accents the stem in the strong

In the
(126), but the endings in the weak forms.

forms

strong forms the radical syllable is accented in the second

and the reduplicative syllable in the third class ^ and the
'

stem
e. g.

the

affix in

fifth,

as-ti, as-a-t,

man-av-a-te
na-s

s.

(2.

as-tu

bibhar-ti

classes

kr-no-ti, kr-nav-a-t

yu-na-j-mi, yu-naj-a-t
grh-na-ti, grbhbut ad-dhi, ad-yur; bi-bhr-masi ^
;

sub.);

kr-nv-6, kr-nu-hi

yuhk-sva

and ninth

eighth, seventh,

van-u-yama, van-v-antu

*
;

yunk-t6,

gr-ni-masi, gr-ni-hi.
Perfect.
The strong forms (the sing. 1. 2, 3. ind. and
impv. act. and the whole subjunctive) accent the radical
;

c.

3.

syllable, the

weak forms

jabhar-a-t, vavart-a-ti

mahe
d.

mumok-tu

e. g.

cakara

but cakr-ur, cakr-

vavrt-yam mu-mug-dhi. The participle accents

e. g. cakr-vams, cakr-ana.
The injunctive is identical in accentuation
Aorist.
;

the suffix

(as

140) the endings

(cp.

well as form) with

the

unaugmented indicative

(see

above, 12).
a.

Tlie root aor. accents the radical

syllable in the subjunctive

but the endings in

kdr-a-t, srav-a-tas, gam-a-nti, bhdj-a-te

6. g.

the opt. and impv. (except the 3. s. act.),^ and the suffix in the
kr-dhi, ga-tam, bhu-ta i^but 3. s.
participle ;6 e.g. as-yam, as-i-m^hi
bhid-ant, budh-ana.
sro-tu), kr-svd
;

Eleven verbs of this class accent the root throughout as sit,

set in motion, is rule, caks see, taik.s fashion, tra, protect, nims
:

id praise, ir
kiss,

also

vas wear, si lie, su briny forth c. g. saye, &c.

Occasionally the 2. s. impv. mid. accents the root in other verbs
;

yak-sva (\/yaj).
verbs, ci note, mad exhilarate, yu separate, hu sacrifice, accent
few other verbs do so in isolated
e. g. juho-ti.
forms e. g. bibhfir-ti (usually bibhar-ti).
3
In the third class the reduplicative syllable is accented in the
weak forms also if the ending begins with a vowel e.g. bi-bhr-ati.
*
In the second, fifth, seventh, eighth, and ninth classes the final syl^

e. g.

Four

the radical syllable

mid. is irregularly accented in rihate (beside rih&te)

krnv-at6, vrnv-at6, sprnv-at, tanv-ate, manv-at6 bhunj-at6 (beside
pun-at6, rin-at6.
biiuSj-dte)
^ The radical
syllable (in its strong form) is also in several instances
accented in the 2. pi. act.
e.g. kar-ta beside kr-td; gan-ta, gdn-tana
lable of the

3. pi.

beside ga-td, &c.

In the mid. part, the root

'

dyut-ana.

is,

in several instances, accented

e. g.

ACCENT IN CONJUGATION
13.

The

and

aor. accent

is

461

root in the subjunctive but the

tlie

endings in the opt. and impv. e. g. yfik-s-a-t (Vyb,]), b6dh-is-a-t

but bhak-s-iya (Vbhaj), dhuk-s-i-m^hi (Vduh), edh-is-i-y^ (AV.)
;

avid-dhi, avis-tam.' The s aor. accents tlie root in the act. part.,
but nearly always the suffix in the irregularly formed middle " e. g.
dik-s-ant (\/dah), arca-s-an.
7. The a aorist accents the thematic vowel throughout the moods
e. g. vidat
(as in the unaugmented indicative) and the part.
;

vid^yara

ruhd-tam

trpdnt, guha-mana.'
sa aor. accents the sutKx in the impv.
;

6. The
dhak-s-sva (v^dah).
The same accentuation would no doubt appear in the subjunctive and
optative, but no examples of those moods (nor of the part.) occur.
(. In the reduplicated aor. the treatment of the
subj. and opt. is
:

uncertain because no normally formed accented example occurs; but

is accented
e. g. jigr-tgm, didhr-t^.*

in the impv. the ending

Future.

e.

on the

suffix

The accent

in all forms of this tense remains

sya or i-sya

e. g.

e-syami

kar-i-syati

karisyant.

As all these (except the

/. Secondary conjugations.
primary intensive) belong to the a conjugation, they accent
the same syllable throughout.
The causative (168) accents
the penultimate syllable of the stem, as krodh-aya-ti enrages

the passive, the secondary intensive (172), and the denominative (175), accent the suffix ya
e.g. pan-ya-te is admired;
;

rerih-ya-te

licJcs

rcjcaiedJij

gopa-ya-nti

The

they jprotectJ'

desiderative (169) accents the reduplicative syllable

e. g.
The primary intensive agrees
pi-pri-sa-ti desires to please.
with the third conjugational class in accenting the reduplica;

the strong forms, but the endings with

consonant in the weak forms of the indie, act. e, g.
in the mid.
j6-havi-ti, jar-bhr-tas, but 3. pi. varvrt-ati
tive syllable in
initial

ind. the reduplicative syllable is

more frequently accented

1
No accented impv. forms occur in the s. aor. In the sis aor. the
only accented modal form occurring is the impv. ya-sis-tani.
*
Neither the is nor the sis aor. forms participles.
:

'

e. g.

But the
s&na,

No

root

is

accented, in several imperatives and participles,

sMatam, khydta sadant, d^samana.

;

participial form occurs in this aor.

certain number of unmistakable denominatives,

the causative accent

e. g.

mantra-yati

takes counsel

however, have

(mantra).

APPENDIX

462
than not

III

e. g. t6-tik-te, less often ne-nik-t6.

In the subj.
part, the reduplicative syllable is regularly accented

and

jan-ghan-a-t, jan-ghan-a-nta
c6kit-at, c6kit-ana.
The accentuation of the imperative ^ was probably the same
as that of the present reduplicating class (12 b)
but the
only accented forms occurring are in the 2. s. act., as
e. g.

jagr-hi, carkr-tat.

Accent of Nominal Verb Forms.

5.

13. a. Tense Participles when compounded with one or

more prepositions retain their original accent (while the
e. g.
apa-gachant f/oino away,
prepositions lose theirs)
;

vi-pra-yantah advancing, pary-a-vivrtsan visiting to turn

apa-jaganvaras, apa-jagm-ana.
round; apa-gacha-mana
;

a.

preposition,

single

or

the

first

of

two,

not

infrequently

becomes separated by the interposition of one or more words or by

being placed after the participle. It is then treated as independent
and recovers its accent e. g. dpa drlhani dardrat hxirsiing strongholds
asunder a ca para oa pathibhis c&rantam icandering hither and thither
;

m^dhu

bibhrata upa bringing sweetness near pra vayam

a branch avasrjann xipa hestowing. Occasionally
an immediately preceding preposition is not compounded with the
participle and is then also accented e.g. abhi daksat burning around;
vf vidvan - discriminating abhf a-cdrantah approaching.
on his paths

,//?/iH(7 iq) to

uj-jihanah

h.

On

the other hand, the past passive participle,"

compounded with one

its

accent

when

more

prepositions, generally loses

there are two
ni-hita deposited^

When

e. g.

or

prepositions the first remains unaccented e. g. sam-a-krtam

accumulated or the first may be separated and independently
;

accented

e. g.

pra yat samudra ahitah when dispatched

forth to the ocean.

No accented form of the optative occurs.

Probably in distinction from vividvan simple reduplicated
participle of vid find.
^
Which itself is always accented on the final syllable e. g. ga-td,
*

pati-t&, chin-nfi.
*
In several instances, however, it retains its accent ; e. g. nis-krtd
This is the case with prepositions that are not used
prepared.

independently.

ACCENT OF NOMINAL VERB FORMS

Gerundives in ya

r.

(or tya)

463

and tva accent the root

caks-ya io he seen, sru-t-ya to he heard, earkr-tya to he

those in ayya, enya, aniya
praised, vak-tva to he said
e. g.

accent the penultimate of the suffix

icorthi/ to he seen,

admired, iks-enya
he suhsisted on
while
;

those

to

he

upa-jiv-aniya (AV.)

to

e.

pan-ayya

g.

tavya accent the final

horn.
When compounded

in

jan-i-tavya (AV.) to he
with prepositions (here always inseparable) gerundives nearly
e. g. parialways retain the accent of the simple form
to
to
he
near
he
drawn
caks-ya
abhy-a-yams6nya
despised
syllable

a-mantraniya (AV.)

a.

addressed.

Infinitives are as a rule accented like ordinary cases

14.

that

to he

would be formed from the same stem.

Dative infinitives from stems in i, ti,

as,

van

accent

those in dhyai, the preceding thematic a

those formed from the root, the ending e. g. drsay-e

the suffix

^
to
pitay-e to drinl; caras-e
move, da-van-e
"
tur-van-e to overcome iy-a-dhyai to go ; drs-6

to

When
is

radical infinitives are

accented

e.g.

sam-idh-e

to

compounded with
kindle,

give,

to see.

a.

and

"

'^

root

to see,

prejoositions tlie

abhi-pra-caks-e

to see.

The

dative infinitive from stems in man, the accusative

and the abl. gen. from roots, and all from stems in tu
accent the root e. g. da-man-e io give ^ siibh-am to shine,
a-sad-am to sit down ; ava-pad-as to fall down da-tum
'
to go.
to give, gan-tos to go, bhar-tav-e to hear, gan-tav-ai
h.

a.

When compounded,

tion;' e.g. sam-kar-tum

In these the root

Tliis infinitive also

infinitives
to

collect;

from tu stems accent the preposini-dha-tos

to

put dorvn

&pi-dha-

sometimes accented, as cdks-as-e Io see.

appears with independently accented prepositions pra davdne and abhi pv& davdrue.
^
The root is once accented in dhiir-vane io injure.
*
In these the root is sometimes accented e. g. gdma-dhyai.
"
The regular accentuation of monosyUabic stems when compounded
is

cp. lie,
*
"^

1.

But vid-m6n-e

io

know,

With a secondary accent on the final syllable cp. above, 7.

But when the preposition is detached the infinitive retains
:

accent

e. g.

prd da^tise datave

to

present

to

the worshipper.

its

APPENDIX

464

III

up ^pa-bhar-tavdi to he taken away. Wlien there are two

prepositions the first may be separate and independently accented ;
tav-e

to

cover

'

anu prd-volhum

e. g.

15.
suffix,

to

advance along, vi prfi-sartave

to

spread.

Gerunds formed with tvi, tva, tvaya accent the

but when they are compounded with prepositions

(here always insej^arable) and formed with ya or tya, they

accent the root
e, g. bhu-tva having become, ga-tvi and
;

ga-tvaya having gone

sam-grbh-ya having

gathered,

upa-

srii-tya (AV.) having overcome.

16. Case forms used as adverbs frequently shift their
The
accent to indicate clearly a change of meaning. ^
accusative neuter form is here the commonest e. g. dravat
;

quicMy, but dravat running

n. adj.

vat
in

aparam

later,

but

e. g.

aparam

as

adverbs in
higher, but uttaram as n. adj.
pratna-vat as of old, but the ace. n. of adjectives

uttaram

vant do not accent the

suffix.

Examples

of other cases

div-a hy day, but div-a through heaven aparaya for

sanat from of old,
the future, but aparaya to the later
but sanat from the old.

are

6.

Sandhi Accent.

17. 1. When two vowels combine so as to form a long

vowel or diphthong, the latter receives the Udatta, if either
or both the original vowels had it
e. g. agat = a agat
nudasvatha = nudasva atha kv6t = kva it ^ nantarah
;

= na
a.
(i i)

antarah.

But the contraction

of

i i

is

accented as

having here ousted the preceding Udatta

i,*

e. g.

the enclitic Svarita

diviva ^ = divi iva.

Retaining the secondary accent on the final syllable.

shift is found in nouns to indicate either a simple change
of meaning, e.g. jy^stha greatest, but jyesth^ eldest; or a change of
category also, e.g. gomati rich in cows, but gomati name of a river;
rajaputra son of a king, but rajaputra having sons as kings.
^
Eut when a Svarita on a final vowel is followed by an unaccented
initial vowel, it of course remains, e. g. kveyatha = kva iyatha.
*
In the RV. and AV., but not in the Taittirlya texts, which follow
1

Such a

the general rule.

^

RV. and AV., but diviva in the

This

is

Taittirlya texts.

the praslista or contracted Svarita of the Prati^akhyas.

SANDHI ACCENT
When

2.

465

and u with Udatta are changed

to

y and

v,

a following unaccented vowel receives the Svarita

e.g.
vy anat vi anat. Here the Svarita assumes the appear;

ance of an independent accent but the uncontracted form

with the Udatta must almost invariably be pronounced in
the RV.
3. When accented a is elided it throws back its Udatta
;

on unaccented e or o e. g. sunav6 ^gne = sundve agne

v6 ,jvasah = vo avasah. But when unaccented a is elided,

changes a preceding Udatta to Svarita

= s6 adhamdh.-^

it

7.

e. g.

s6

^dhamdh

Sentence Accent.

The vocative, whether it be a single word or a

compound expression, can be accented on its first syllable
18.

only.
a. It retains its accent only at the beginning of a sentence
or Pada,* that is, when having the full force of the case it
occupies the most emphatic position e. g. agne, supayan6
;

urjo napat sahasavan

Agni, he easy of access
also applies to doubly
rule
This
son
of strength.
mighty

Mitra
e. g. mitra-varuna
accented dual compounds
the
and Varum. Two or more vocatives at
beginning of

bhava

e. g. adite, mitra, varuna

Two accented vocatives are
Varum.
Mitra,
Acliti,
sometimes applicable to the same person e. g. urjo napad,

a sentence are all

accented

the ksaipra or quickly pronounced Svarita of the Pi-ati^akhyas.

the a'bhinihita Svarita of the Prati^akhyas.
^
Here the Svarita (6 a) has ousted the preceding Udatta.
*
This applies to the second as well as the first Pada of a hemistich,
indicating that both originally had a mutually independent character,
which is obscured by the strict application of Sandhi and the absence
of any break in marking the accent, at the internal junction of the
Padas of a hemistich.

The corresponding nom. would be lirjo uapat sdhasava.

The nom. is mitra- vfiruna.

^
^

This
This

i8i

is

is

H h

APPENDIX

466

III

bhadrasocise

son of strength,
projntioushj bright one (both
addressed to Agni).^
1).
When it does not begin the sentence or Pada, the

vocative, being unemphatic, loses its accent

agne div6-dive
bharanta 6masi

dosavastar^
|

ydd indra

hither (come),

a rajana

ye two sovereign guardians

rt^na mitra-varunav

rtavrdhav rtasprsa
and Varuna;^
^
abhidroham caramasi
brahmanaspate
Brahmanaspati, we commit an offence.
\

ile

according to the

verb in a principal sentence

finite

agnim

'

19. The verb is differently accented

natux'e of the sentence.

A. The

namo
|

illuminer of

Indra,

e. g,

upa tva^

law-loving, law-cherishing 3Iitra

through Law,

if,

e. g.

Agni, day ty day,

homage with prayer we come

maha rtasya gopa

;

vayam

to thee,

darkness, hringing

of great order

dhiya

purdhitam I praise Agni

is

unaccented

the domestic priest.

This general rule is subject to the following restrictions

a. A sentence being regarded as capable of having only
one verb, all other verbs syntactically connected with the
:

are accented as beginning new sentences

pahi, srudhi havam drinh of them, hear our

subject of the
e,

t6sam

g.

call

taranir

conquers,

'^

first

ij

rules,

jayati, ks6ti, pusyati the energetic

thrives

man

jahi prajam nayasva ca slay the

progeny and bring (it) hither.

b. The verb is accented if

it

begins the sentence or

if.

^
Here the second voc. is accented as in apposition, whereas if it
were used attributively it would be unaccented as in h6tar yavistha
sukrato
youngest wise prie<it.
2
Accented because the first word of the Pada.
'
This might represent two vocatives addressed to the same persons;
their accented foim would then be rajana, md,ha rtasya gopa.
*
Here the rule that the whole of the compound voc. must be
unaccented overrides the rule tliat the first word of the Pada must
:

be accented,
^

An

i.e.

here rtavrdhav,

example of two independent unaccented vocatives.

A subject or object coming between two such verbs is generally
counted to the first.
>

ACCENT IN THE SENTENCE

467

though not beginning the sentence, it coincides with the

beginning of a Pada e.g. saye vavris, carati jihvayadan
rerihyate yuvatim vispatih sau (he covering lies (there)
;

he kisses the maiden,

he (Agni) moves eating with his tongue
atha
te
the
lord
the
house
antamanam
vidyama
of
bring
;
;

sumatinam
c.

then

may we

experience thy highest favours.

Vocatives being treated as extraneous to a sentence,

a verb immediately following an initial one. becomes the

e.
first word of the sentence and is accordingly accented
g.
;

agne, jusasva no havih

Agni, enjoy our sacrifice. Thus
the sentence indra, jiva surya, jiva d^va, jivata
Indra,
;

live

Surya,

live

gods,

live

contains three accented

verbs as beginning three sentences, while the three preceding

vocatives are accented as bsing at the head of those sen-

though syntactically outside them.

Sometimes the verb when emphatic,

tences,

though not
beginning the sentence, is accented if followed by the
e. g. adha sma no maghavan carkrparticles id or cana
tad it then he mindful of us, bountiful one
na deva
d.

bhasathas cana (him)

gods, ye two never consume.
B. The verb of a subordinate clause (introduced by the
relative ya and its derivatives, or containing the particles
ca and c6d if; n6d lest, hi fo7-, kuvid whether) is always
accented
protectest

yam yajnam paribhur asi ivhat offering thou

grhan gacha grhapatni yatha^asah go to the

e. g.

house that thou mayest be the lady of the house

mrlayati no, na nah pascad agham nasat

indras ca

if Indra he

gracious to us, no evil will hereafter reach us tvam hi balada

asi yor thou art a giver of strength.
The relative may govern
;

two verbs

e.g.

y6na surya jyotisa badhase tamo, jagac

ca visvam udiyarsi bhanuna

the

light

with which thou,

Sun, drivest an-ny the darkness and arousest

with thy beam.

The
form

conditions

the n-orld

is suliject to the extension that principal r-hiuses in

be accented as siibnrdinate in sense under the following

rule

may

all

Hh2

APPENDIX

468

III

The first of two clauses, if equivalent to one introduced by 'if

'when* is occasionally accented e.g. s5m asvaparnas c&ranti no
ndro, asmakam indra rathfno jayantu when our men loinged with steeds
a.

or

come

together,

The

p.

especially

our car-fighters, Indra, win victory.

two antithetical clauses is frequently accented, ^
the antithesis is clearly indicated by corresponding

may

Of

first

when

words

lilie

ydnti,

pfiiry

anyd-any^, 6ka-6ka, ca-ca, va-va

anyd asate

while some go on, others

sit

e. g.

doxcn

prfi-pra^any6

sd,rp.

ca^idhasva

Agni, and waken this man's

When the verb of two such clauses is the same, it usually
knowledge.
appears (accented) in the first only e. g. dvipac ca s^rvam no riksa,

agne,

prfi

ca

bodhaya^enam

both he kindled,

c^tuspad

yfic

quadruped

is

ca nah svfim

protect both every biped of ours

and

^ohatever

our own,

y. The verb of the second clause is accented if it is a 1. pers.

subjunctive or 2. pers. imperative^ with a final meaning, and the
verb of the first clause is a 2. pers. impv. of a + i, gam, or ya 170 e. g.
6ta, dhiyain krndvama come, ice will offer prayer tiayam a gahi, kdnvesu
sii sdca piba come quickly, beside the Kanvas drink thy fill. In B. the verb of
the first clause is an impv. of either a-i or prd-i e. g. 6hi^iddm
;

p&tSLva, (SB.) come,

we

xvill

noiofly thither

pr6ta

tfid

esyamo ydtra^imSm

^sura vibhdijante come, we will go thither where the Asuras are dividing this
earth (B.). The second verb is, however, in similar passages not
infrequently left unaccented in B.

Verbal Prepositions.
20. A. In principal clauses the preposition, which is
detached and usually precedes but sometimes follows the
e. g. a gamat majf he come ; gavam apa
verb, is accented
;

vrajam vrdhi unclose the stable of the Jcinc, jayema sam

yudhi sprdhah. tve would conquer our adversaries in fight
;

gamad
a.

vajebhir a sa nah may he come

When

there are two prepositions, both are independent

e. g. upa pra yahi come forth
pari spaso ni

and accented
sedire the

us with hooty.

to

have sat down around

spies

brhata abhi raya

agne vi pasya

Agni, look forth towards (us) with ample

wealth.

This accentuation is moi*e strictly applied in B. than in V., and

the Samhitas least strictly in tlie RV.
In B. the accented verb is either a subjunctive or a future.

among
-

VERBAL PEEPOSITIONS

469

a. When a is immediately preceded

by another preposition (not
ending in i) it alone is accented, both prepositions being compounded
with the verb e. g. sam-a-krnosi jivd.se ihou fittest (them) to live but
prdty a tanusva draw (thy bow) against (them).
;

B. In subordinate clauses the exact reverse takes place,

compounded and unaccented

nisidathah tvhen ye two sit doivn. It is, however,
often separated by other words from the verb, when it
commonly commences the Pada, or much less frequently
follows the verb e. g. vi yo mame rajasi loho measured out
the two expanses
yds tastambha sahasa vi jm6 antan who

the preposition being generally

e.

g.

yad

with might propped earth's ends asunder.

Occasionally the
preposition is detached and accented even immediately before
the verb e. g. yd ahutim pdri v6da ndmobhih who fidly
;

knows

the offering with devotion.

a. When there are two

i^repositions, either both are compounded and unaccented or the first only is detached and
accented
e. g. yuydm hi devih pari-pra-yathd
for ye,
goddesses, proceed around
ydtra^abhi sam-ndvamahe
;

where we
to

whom
a.

(him) together shout

the cows come together.
to

sdm ydm

a-ydnti

dhendvah

Very rarely both prepositions are detached and accented

prd y6t stota

e.

lipa girbhir Itte when the praiser latids him tcith songs.

g.

VEDIC INDEX
This index contains all Sanskrit words and affixes occurring in the
grammar, except the verbs in Appendix 1, which can be found at
once owing to their alphabetical order. Indifferent words occurring
in examples of Sandhi, of nominal derivation (Chapter VI), or of
Syntax, as well as in Appendixes II and III, are excluded.
The figures refer to paragraphs unless pages are specified.

ABBREVIATIONS
A. = adjective, act., active, adv., adverb, adverbial, ac, aorist.
Bv., Bahuvrihi. cd., compound, cj., conjunction, cond., conditional,
-al.

conj., conjugation,

corr.,

dec, declension,

causative,

correlative,

comparative,

cpv.,

dem., demonsti-ative.

den.,

cs,,

denomina-

der., derivative, derivation,

ds., desiderative.
end., enclitic.
f.n. foot-note.
It., future,
Dv., Dvandva.
ij., intergd., gerund,
jection,
indec, indeclinable.
inj.,
injunctive,
inf., infinitive.
tive,

int., intensive,

larities,

neg., negative,

paradigm,
perfect,
pri.,

inter., interrogative,

nm., numeral,

poss., possessive,

positional.

prn.,

2>rs.,

nom., nominal,

sec,

subjunctive.

synt., syntactical.

jjs.,

secondarj^

Tp., Tatpurusa.

present,

pr.,

pt., participle,

rel.,

relative,

suffix.

sf.,

v.,

par.,

ppf., plu-

perfect,

prp., preposition, pre-

passive,

ref., rellexive.

n.,

ord., ordinal,

pf.,

pp., past passive jjarticiple.

person, personal,

irreguneuter,

irr.,

nominative,

pronoun, pronominal,

reduplication, reduplicated,
sb.,

N.,

per., perijjhrastic.

pel., particle,

primary,

ipv., imi^erative.

mid., middle.

itv., iterative,

vb.,

root,

superlative,

spv.,

vocative,

red.,

rt.,

verb, verbal.

w ith.
A, vowel, pronunciation

of, 15,1a;
dropped, 5 c; 156 a;
elided, 45, 2 b
lengthened,
162, 1 c; 168 6; 171,1; 175 A 1;
thematic, 140,6 141 143, 5. 6
147, 149 change to i, 175 A 1
dropped, 175 A 2 to be restored

a,

and

o, p. 4o7, a

7.

root, 111
of,

195
8

p. 452,

B6
B

c;

a-, augment, 128.

a- or an-, privative pel., in Bv.
in Karmacds., p. 455, 10 c a
;

dharayas, p. 455, f.n, 2

after e

pronominal

accentuation
p. 458 /3.

initial,

10

rf

1 a.

p. 456,

VEDIC INDEX

472
125

-a, sf. of 1st conj.,

pri.

nom.

ddant, pr.

ao. inj.,

rt.

148, 3, op., 148, 4,

adv.

by

bi/

niijht,

178, 0;

184

croak,

av.
1

d.

gen., 202 D.

maid, 100, II .
figre, loc. adv. in front, 178, 7.
dgrena, adv. in front, 178, 3
ace, 197 c /3.

w.

c.
'

-aj,

stems

186

a.

in, 79, 3

m.
2

b.

and sheep,
of.
accentuation

pi. goats

adv. hence, 179, 2.

prp. beyond., w. ace, 176,

f. a metre, p. 441, f.n. 6.

atisakvari, f. a metre, p. 444, 10 .
atyasti, f. a metre, p. 445, 10 6.

atijagati,

here,

3;

179,

then,

180.

b.

96

96,

a. irresistible,

nom.

-ani, pri.

-aniya, gdv.
209, 6.

182, 1

sf..

162

sf.,

2.

90, 3.

an5, adv. thus, 178, 3 c.

-ana, pri. nom. suffix, 182,
anagas, a. sinless, 83, 2 a a.

1 b.

b.

162,

anu, prp. after, w. ace. 176. 1

197 B c.
anudatta, m. toic pitch accent, p. 448,

how marked,

p. 449, 2

p.

450,

3. 4.

anunasika, m. nasal, 10/ 15, 2/.

anustubh, f. a metre, p. 438, f.n.
2
p. 439, 3 b ; later form of,
"

synt. use

180.

Atharvaveda,

p. 439,

liow

accented,

p. 449.
4th.o, adv. moreover, synt.

180.

-ad, stems in, 77, 3

b.

use

of,

b a.

anusvara, m. p^lre nasal, Sf; 10 f

15, 2/; 29 b; 39; 40 a; 40, 2
6
49 6
42
p. 33, f. n. 1, 2,
66 A 67 for n, p. 163, f. n. 2
:

dtha, adv. then, 179,

of,

182, 1

c.

dtra.'adv.

sf.,

and.ks, a. eyeless, 80.

auadvdli, m. o.r, 81

fttas,

197

n. 15.

f.

-ana, pri. nom.

anarvdn,

p. 457, e.
djosas, a. insatiable, 83, 2 a a.
-anc, -ivard, adjectives in, 93 ; accentuation, p. 459, c 4.
pf.,
anj, anoint, pr., 134 D 1
139, 6 ; 140, 1. 3. 5.
103.
of
dnu, small,
toiyams, cpv.
'2 a.'
'
a.
not
dtatha,
saying yes ', 97, 2 a.
Cti,

road, 90.

an, breathe, pr., 134 A 3 (p. 143

-an, pri. nom. sf., 182, 1 b stems
irr. stems in, 91
in, 90, 1
influence of stems in, p. 78,

i^cl. 7i(s?, 180.

fingiras, m. a proj^er name, 83, 2 a.
ficha, prp. towards, w. ace, 176, 1

ajavfiyah,

svnt. use

176, 2.

angi,

driver, 79,

then, 179. 1

of, 180.

ddhvan, m.

78, 2.

f.

agrat^s, adv. before,

dgram, adv. before,

m.

p. 16J

adhas, adv. beloa-, 179, 1 prp., w.

ace, abl., gen., 177, 1. 3.
adhastat, adv. below, 179, 2.
ddhi, prp. upon. w. loe, abl..

fiksi, n. eye, 99, 4.

197

adv.

77, 3 a.

night,

d,ks, eye, 80.

&i,

(par.),

n. 1.

f.

adha, adv.

aktos, gen. adv.

202 D 3 a.

agrii,

85

eating,

prn. that, 112

there, 178, 2 a.
addha, adv. truly, 179, 1.
^drak, has seen, s ao. of drs,

adribhid, Tp. cd. mountain-cleaving.

pre, 148, 4 a.
aktubhis, inst.
178,3.

akhkhali-kr,

j^t.

adas, dem.

sec.
nom. sf.,
182, 1 b
radical nom. stems in,
182, 2
stems
3
der.
nom.
in, 97.
97,
ams, attain, pf., 139, 6 140, 3. 5
sf.

144, 1.
-ant, stems in, 85
act., 156.

sf.

of pr. pt.

antir, prp. between, w. ace, abl.,

loe, 176, 2.
antara, adv. prp. between, w. ace.
197 Be.
177, 1
;

VEDIC INDEX
antarena, adv. prj). beUceen, w.
ace, 197 B c /3.
antastha, f. intermediate = semi11,

voH-el,

a. near,

antika,
103, 2

cpv.

and

spv.

near,

290, 2

next day, 179, 1.

one another, concord

the future,

adv.

\)\.

t/j

future,

2 (par.),
arfu-e, 83, 2 a (,par.).
apanc, a. backward, 93 &.
4pi, prp. M2^oH, w. loc, 176, lb;
adv.

loork, 83,

also, even,

180.

apsards, f. nymph, 83, 2 a.

abhi, prp. towards, w. ace, 176, 1.
abhitas, adv. around, 179, 2
prp.
w. ace, 177, 1 197 B c.
abhinihita svarita, a Sandhi ac;

cent, p. 465,

f.

149 a

ao.,

-am, gd.
211, 2

166

in,

210 a

amad,

inf. in.

a.

n.

f.

adv. from

near,

p.

110,

1.

f.^n.

ami, dem. prn. those, N. pi. m., 112.

amiitas, adv. thence, p. 109, f. n. 1

179, 2.

amutra, adv.

there, p.

109,

f.

amutha, adv. thus, p. 109, f.

amuya, inst. adv. in that
178, 3

amba,

aya,

v.

n.
n.

1.
1.

wa>/,

99, 3.

200
ardh,

5.

thrive, pf. 139, 6.

of r, go,
cs.
a 3.

red.

arp5.ya,

149
arplta and
160,

ao.,

d,rpita, jjp. cs. of r, go,

3.

^rbuda, nm.

ten millions, 104.

aryaman, m., a god,

90.

arvaiic, a. kitherward, 93 b.
arh, deserve, pf., 139, 6.
d,lam = firam, adv., synt. use
180.
pr.

of.

sounding

pt.

high grade of vowel

61pa, a. small, cpv.

103, 2 b.

1,

and

a.

spv.

a,vi,, dem. prn. this, 112 a /3.

^va, prp. down, w. abl., 176,

avagraha, m. nuwk

y.
f.

n.

f.

drus, n. wound, 83, 2 c.

arc, praise, pf. 139, 6
pr. pt. 85.
drthaya, adv. dat. for the sake of,

al,

1.

ama, dem. prn. this, 112 a

ama, adv. at home, p. 110,
178, 3

2.

pr., 134, 3 c; irr. I'ed.

injure,

low grade
;

alalabhavant,
merrily, 184 d.

n. 2.

abhisn&th, a. piercing, 77,

ibhiru, n. fearless, 98 a.

am,

4 a.
aram, adv. suitably, 178, 2 a coml)ounded w. verbs, 184 b svnt.
4 a.
use, 180 w. dat., 200
of,

178,' 7.

apas, n.
apds, a.

of

ten thousand, 104.

stems in, 101, 1.

liigh grade of r, 5 a

ari, a. devout, p. 81,

178, 4.
loc.

1.

sacrijiced, 2. s. s ao.
2.

/3.

apara, a. Innr, 120 f 1.

aparaya, dat. adv. for
aparisu,

n.

f.

yaj, 144,

ar,

otherwise, 179, 1.

i\. following, 93 a.
water, 78, 1 ; 78, la; 96, 1.

f.

111

here,

1.

-ar,

anvinc,
ap,

161,

ayuta, nm.

anyedyus, adv.
'nyi,, a.

aya, adv. thus, 178, 3 c.

dyat, has sacrificed, s no. of yaj,

geii.,

adA'. elsewhere, 171), 3.

anyatra,
auyatha, adv.

this

j>rn.

195

ay as, hast

w.

anyd,, prn. a. other (par.), 120 .

of, p.

i,par.

J).'

adv.

antikam,
202 D.

anyo

ayam, dem.

nf,

b.

473

of,

3.

of separation,

p. 454, 10 a.
fivatta, cut off: pp. of da, 160, 2 6.
avani, f. stream, p. 82, f. n. 3.

avama, spv. lowest, 120 c 1.

avayaj, f. share of oblation, 79, 3 a a.
dvara, cpv, loiver, 120 c 1.
^varena, adv. prp. below, w. abl,,
p, 209, f. n. 3.
avd.s, adv. downwards ; prp. down
from, below, w. abl., 177, 3 ; w.

inst., 177, 2.

c.

mother, p. 78,

cs. sf.,

how

f.

n. 6.

added, 168,

1.

avistad,
202 D,

adv.

below,

w.

gen.,

VEDIC INDEX

474

avaS-C, a. doivnward, 93 b,
avat, has shone, 3. s. s ao. of vas,
14i, 2.
&vi, m. sheep, p. 81, f. n. 1.
1. as, reach, see anis.

asmakam,
116 a.
dsvapnaj,

sleepless, 79, 3 b.
ah, saij, defective verb, pf., 139, 4.
dha, emphasizing pel. JMs<, 180.
dhamsana, a. rapacious, synt. cd.,

2. as e^, pr. stem, 134 E i.

asitavant, pf. pt. haviny eaten, 161.

a^iti,

nm.

d,han, n. day, 90

90, 1. 2 pai'.).
s ao. of sri, resort,
(

stone,

dsrait, 3.
111, 2.

s.

member

possessing

horses,

p.

astakfivas, nm. adv.

"108 a.
astadha, nm. adv. j
ios b.

ahampurvd.,
cd., 189 B

times,

e/t/W

ivays,

eight

aharpati, m. lord of day, 49

106

2a;

w.

p.

453, 9

Ao

adv.

asikni,
f.

Jlsrj,

f.

f.

f.

f.

n. 3.

n. 5

ao.

and da,

n.

f.

n.

ace,

nom.

in, 97, 2

n. 4

f.

p. 273,

f.

1.

176, 2

abl.,

of

gam,

go,

n. 6.

f.

265,

give, p.

emjihasizing

-a, pri.

pel., ISO.

sf.

182, 1 b

nom.

sec.

sf.,

stems

182, 2

for a in sb.,
stems in, 97
134 A 4 c ;3 du. ending, p. 78,'
;

of stu,

praise, 144, 2 a.
asthi, n. bone, 99, 4.

prs. prn. stem, 109 b.

asmatra, adv. among us, 179, 3.
asmdtsakhi, Bv. cd. hacing us as
companions, 109 b.
asmad, prs. prn. stem in cds.,
109 b.
asmadruh, Tp. cd. hating us, 109 b.

p. 206,

meaning

i-everses

a,

a, prp, OH.,w. loc,

^

b.

pi.

of,

147 a 1
nasalized, 19 6,

f.

asau, dem. prn. that there,, 112

(par.) ; synt. use, 195 B 2.
astam, ace. adv. home, 178, 2 ; w.
verbs, 184 c.
astamik^, loc. adv. at home, 178, 7.
2.

day, in cds., p. 275,

reduced to i
or Cl48. 1/; 160, 2; 169,2;
to 1, p. 190, 2
shortened, 19 a,
low wrade

n. 3.

Astodhvam,

n. 3.

A, vowel, dropped,

of a river, p. 86,

n. blood, 79, 3

A2

black, p. 86,

name

s ao. of hi, 144, 2.

s.

ahna = ahan,

asakdu, deni. prn. that little, 117 a.

asasc^t, Bv. cd. 'unequalled, 85 b.
isikni, a.

d.

serpent, 100, I a.

dhait, 3.

aljl.
sense, 179, 3
3 a ; 211, 3 a
to o, 145, 2 b.

loe.

111.

ahoratra, n. day and night, 186

accentuation, p. 457, e.

stems

inf. in, 163,

changed

ahi.

(par.),

pr. pt. act.,

-as, pri. iioin. sf., 182, 1 b

in, 83,

synt.

e a.

tion, p. 457,

'107.

gen.

to be first,

astadasa, nm., 104

as,* be, pr., 134 A 2
156 a.

sf.

eager

t.

nm. eight, 104 106 b (par.;.

astacatvarimsa, ord. forty-eighth,
asta,

a.

eighth, 107.

astamd, ord.

109.

jn-n., I,

ahar, n. day, 91, 2 101, 1.

d,harahar, ecery day, itv. cd. 189 C a
dhardivi, day after day, mixed itv.
accentuacd., 189 C a, f. n. 1

'

ahamuttardi, n. dispute for precedence, synt. cd., 189 B c.

04,

4.

11.

as tinal
91, 2
of Bv. cds., 189, 3 c

ahdm, personal

a.

asvin,

189 Be.

eighty, 104.

Ismail, m.

poss. prn. our, 116 a.

gen. pi. prs. prn. of us,

asmaka,

f.

n. 13

p. 81,

f.

n.

1,

pi. n.

p. 78, f. n. 14.
ake, loc. adv. near, 178, 7.
atmdn, m. self, 115 b a.

ending,

asma,

ad, adv.

tlien,

178,

5; synt. use,

ISO.

adhi,

f.

care,

100

a,

an-, pf. red., 139, 6

140, 1.

n. \.

shortened,

VEDIC INDEX
-ana,

sf.

of mid. pt., pr. 158

f.

of 2.

sf.

anajanfi,

s.

134

ipv. act., 125,

196 a
of

pL mid.,

pf.

anj,

f.

anoint, 159.

of ams,

mid.,

pt.

secondary nom.

2.

182,

sf.,

apfk, adv. in a mixed way, 79,

abhu,

a. present,

100, II

6.

3 a

who

the

offers

a.

avis, adv. openbj, \v. verbs, 184 b

\v. dat., 200
4 b.
asistha, spv. swiftest, 103, 2 P.
xiraijer,

as'a, a. sivlft,

158

pel.,

svnt. use.

180

accents

p2.
idanlm, adv. now, 179, 3
gen., 202 D 2.
idh, kindle,

a.

)3

ao. op., 148, 4

rt.

w.

pt.

148, 6.

-idhe, inf.
-in, sec.

to

kindle,

nom.

sf.,

167 a

182, 2

(p. 191;.

stems

in,

accentuation of, p. 454, B a.

indra-vayii, du. cd., Ijidra and
1
Vdyu, 186
accentuation,
87

f.

p. 457,

83, 2 b a.
spv. of., 103, 2 ^.
asuya, inst. aJv. swiftly, 178, 3 h.
as, n./Kce, 83, 1.
asat, abl. adv. ./Voj near, 178, 5.
asand, pr. pt. mid., of as, sit,
f.

emphasizing

Mis,

179,

so,

3.

109.
^Jj'icsi

;
p. 26,
1, 5.
adv. thus, 179, 1 a.

2.

m.

n.

f,

d.
verb, p. 467, 19
iddm, dem. prn. this, 111 as adv.,
178, 2 a.
w. gen.,
ida, adv. non-, 179, 3

arattat, adv. from afar, 179, 2.

ar, loc. adv. afar, 178, 7
prp. w.
abl, or gen., 177, 3; 202 D a.
arya, f. a metre, p. 436, f. n. 2.
avfim, prs. prn. K. du., we tico,

oblation, 79,

ittha, adv.
180.
id,

-ayana, secondary nom. sf,, 182,

ayu, n. life, 98 a (p. S3;.
-ayya,gdv. sf., 162; 162, 2; 209,
arat, abl. adv. from afar, 178, 5.

avayaj,

syrit. use of, 180

use in Pada text, p. 25,

thus,
/3

n. 2

itthdm,

anaian^, pf.
reach, 159.
ar;),

pel.

iti,

4.

a.

here, 179, 2.

adv.//om

it^s,

n. 9

117 6; 120,

itara, prn. a, other,

a, pf.

159.

-ana,

475

n. 2.
pr. stem, 133

inv, send,

2 6

134 CA&.
ima, dem. prn. stem, this, 111.
imfitha, adv. in this manner, 179, 1.
-iya, secondary nom. sf., 182, 2.
iyant, quantitative a. so much,
118 h par.
iy^m, f. dem. prn. this. 111.
-Iran, 3, pi. mid. ending of ppf.
.

asina, irr. pr,

158 a.

mid., of as,

pt.

sit,

140, 6.
iva, end. pel. as if, like, 179, 1
180 ; p. 452, 8
b.
is, wish, pr. stem, 133 C 2 ; pr. pi.,
"85.
is, f. refreshment, 80.
145.
-is, ao. suffix, 142
isu, f. arrow, 98 a (p. 82 >

asmakd,
f.

poss.

prn,

our,

113,

p.

n. 2.

vowel, low grade of e and ya,

5 a, fc.

I,

4 a
i,

go,

134,

lea;

pr.

132 (pp. 130-1;

157 a.

(par.),
pt.,
-i,

system of

pri.

num.

182,

sf.,

nom.

red. pf.
h

-ij,

id,

f.

-it,

istapurtam, n. Dv. cd. what has

been offered and given, 186
3;

sec.

stems in, 98.

sf., 182, 2
connecting vowel, 89 a 145.
stems in, 79, 3 b,

-i-,

accentuation, 457,
-istha,
-is, pri.

in, 77,

iM,

1.

-ita, pp. sf., 160, 3 ; always

by see. verbs, iUid,

adv.

spv.

num.

in, S3, 2

refreshment, 80.

stems

pri.

p. 453,

e.

suffix.

103,

2;

6.

sf.,

182,

1 b

sterna

6.

here, 179,

1.

taken
I,

vowel, often changd to iy in

VEDIC INDEX

476

low grade of ya,

5 6a; ending of du. and of ami,
unconti'acted in Sandhi, 25 a,
inserted in int. red., 172 a
b, c

Sandhi, 57

nom.

173, 3; sec.

stems

95

in,

100

182, 2;

sf.,

connecting
145 b (is
ao.)

vowel, 144, 2 (s
ao.)
160, 3 a (pp.)
;

162,

3
id, praise, pr. stem, 134
idfksa, prn. cd. such, 117.

b.

idfs, jn-n. cd. sucJi, 117.

2.

jDarticle,

aorist,

secondary nom. suffix, 182, 2.

-iyams, pri. ci)v. suffix, 103, 2
p. 453, 9 Ac.

of i, go, 89 a.
derivative, so great,

pf. pt. act.

IS,

p. 450, 3. 4. 5.

upandh,

f.

vxbhaya,

f. n. 1.
of both kinds, 120

shoe, 81,

a,

concord
216 (p. 365

inf, 211, 3

yad and

(3)

194 B 2 a
av.

216

(p.

364

gen.

211, 3 & a

aa;

op.,

of,

w.

ubhaydtas, adv. on

on

adv.

ubhayadyus,

adv.

inst.

o
u,

of o

both

of,

of,

178, 3 c.
-ur, ending of gen.

days,

both ways,

iii

1.2;
134A4c;

99,

s.,

101; of3.pI.act.: impf.

125, f. n. 7; pf., 186; ppf.,

s ao., 143, 1
root ao.,
140, 6

p.

0).

and va,

a, b.

end.

sides

both

0.

U, vowel, low grade

(par.),

179,^1.

a. able,

inf.,

p. 449,

-una, pri. nom. suffix, 182, 1 b.

upa, pr}). to, w. ace, 176 6 upon,
w. loc, ibid.
upadhmaniya, laMal breathing, 3 g
14
15 43, 2.
upamS, spv. highest, 120 c 1.
lipara, cpv. loiver, 120 c 1.
updri, pip. above, w. ace, 177, 1
197 Be.
uparistad, adv. behind, w. gen.,
202" b.

ubhaya,

lord, 79, 4.

isvard,

w.

134

stem,

pr.

A4ca.

accent, p. 448, 1

how marked,

w. ace, 197

c,

rule,

m.

northward

)3.

is

-iya,

134

udatta, m. rising
p. 451, 6

a.

w. gen., 202

is,

trave, 77,

-ud, stems in, 77, 3 b.

lidanc, a. upioard, 93 a
of,

c fi

im, end. pronominal

180 p. 452, 8 A a.
-im, ending of 1. s.
145 c.

118

f.

3; 197

idrsa, prn. cd., 117, f. n. 4.

-ina, secondary nom. suflSx, 182,

ivant, prn.

lid,

n.

f.

1,

n. 3.

f.

p. 209,

(gdv.).
id, f. praise, 80.
^

iyivams,

ace, 177,

148,

1.

uru, a. wide, 98 c cpv. of, 108, 2a.

uruvyd,nc, a. far-exteiiding, p. 54.
;

180

pel. noiv, pray,

Pada

in

p. 452,

form

f.

text, p. 25,

ii.

&.

stems in, 98.

uks&n, m. ox, 90,
-u,

1 (p. 68).

uc, be pleased, red. pf. pt., 157

ucca, adv. on high, 178, 3 6.
uccd.is, adv. on high, 178, 3 b.
-ut,

stems

ut,
uto,

cj.

and, 180.

cj.

and

in, 77,
also,

uttami, spv.

a.

Tittara, cpv. higher, 103,

bral n, p. 43,
c 1

(par.).

uttarat, abl.
178, 5.
littarena,

adv. from the north,

7iorth

of,

w.

pi.
f.

without cere-

n. 1.

a metre, 81
usnih,
p. 476, 11 A,
f.

-us, pri.

nom.

in, 83, 2

adv. prp.

a.

(par.).

f.

ustranam, gen.

c.

120

usd.s,

synt. use, 180.

1 c

178, 3 b.
81, f. n. 14.

dawn, 80.
f. dawn, 83, 2 a.
usasa, f. elliptical du., dawn and
night, 193, 2 a.

lis,

highest, 103, 1

1.

f.

n^
urviya, inst. adv. /ar,
urvi, f. earth, du, of, p.
usina, m. a name, 97,
usij, a. desiring, 79, 3 6

usf,

f.

sf.,

182,

c.

dawn,

101, 1.

p. 444, 1
1 6

stems

VEDIC INDEX
, vowel often changed to uv in
shortened to u,
Sandhi, 57

for az, 4 b
as du. ending, 26
2 /, ; p. 149, f. n. 2 for a
134
in s ao., 143, 3 shortened before
a, p. 437, a 4.
6ka, nm. o???, 104
105, 1 (,par.) ;

p. 274, f.n. 1 ; pii. nom. sf.,

182, 1 6 ; stems in, 100 (pp. 88-

90).

iadhar, n. xdder, 91, 6

120

vigour, 79,

101,

1.

a.

ekadasa, nm.

inj., 148,

104 a
6kaika,
f.

etadfksa, prn.

m. a name, 90 a.
rnv, send, pr., 134 C 4 &.
rtaya, inst. adv. in fhe right
178, 3 a.

m.
f.

rt^van,
-vas,

of pious

etavant, prn. derivative, so great,

1 18 c.
ed, ij. lo ! with ace, 197 B c y.

waij,

ena, end. prn.,

loorks,

(par.);

n. 3.

a.

regular.

90, 3

v.

A a.

in this

112 a

it,

way, 178,

3.

evd, adv. thus,

f.

evam, adv.

148, 4

chief of the

synt.

as, 179, 1.
thus, 179, 1 ; synt. use,

180.
;

6.

rbhuksd,n, m.

evatha, adv. jwsf

n. 4.

root ao. op.,

just, 179, 1

use, 180.

,p. 303).
rtvij, m. priest, 79, 3,
pt., 148,

he, she,

452, 8

-enya, gdv. suffix, 162, 3 209, 4.

-eya, secondary nom. sf., 182, 2.

thrive,

p.

ena, inst. adv.

in

ibid.

rtutha, adv. regidarly, 179, 1.

rtus&s, adv. season by season, 179, 1
w.
7
rt, adv. prp. without, 178,
w. ace, 197 B r a
abl., 177, 3

rdh,

cd. such, 117.

etadrs, prn. cd. such, 117.

rjisvan,

p." 273,

a. praising, 87.
stanza, 79 : 1, p. 437.

rtascati,

cd. one by one, p. 282,

lord

nm.

n. 4.

rgmin,
f.

nineteen,

/3.

dem. prn. tltis, 101 a 1 (par.)

correlative use, 195 B 4 a = well
anaphoric use,
known, ibid.
w. following ydd =
195 B 4 &
that is to say, 195 B 4 a.

etd,

106

6kau na vimsati. nm.

root ao.
148, 1 g
root ao. op., 148, 4
root ao. pt., 148, 6.

147

ao.,

104

ekadasd., ord. eleventh, 107.

eleven,

(par.).

vowel, low grade of ar and ra,

R,
'
5 a, 6 before y becomes ri, 58
stems in, 101.
a
134 B 3 a
2
r, go, pr., 133
;

b.

ekadha, adv. singly, 179, 1 a.

ekapada verse, p. 441. f. n. 0.
ekavirnsd, ord. twenty-first, 107.
ekasasthd, ord. sixty-first, 107.

iirnamradas, cd., fioft as wool, 83, 2 a.

tirdhvdtha, adv. iqiwards, 179, 1.
dh, consider, pr. stem, 13.3 A 1.
uh, remove, 133 A 1, f. n. 2.

fc,

iidhd., pp. of vah, carri/, 160, 2.

n. 4.
iiii, inst. of uti, f. aid, p. 81, f.
udhan, n. ndder, 91, G.
f.

drj,

477

eva-yavas, voc. going

esa,

Rbhus,

dem. prn.

'llOrt

this,

quickly, 90, 8.

Sandhi

of,

48

195, 4 a.

90, 1 (p. 68).

R before

y becomes

ir or ur.

O, diphthong, originally au, p. 22,

f. n. 3
high grade of u, 4 b low
grade of, 4 a internal Sandhi
for az, 15, 2 k a
p. 47,
of, 59
for aizh, p. 47, f. n. 3 ;
f. n. 3
4 b stem in, 102, 2 shortened
before a, p. 437 a 4.
okivaras, pf. pt. act. of uc, 89 a.
;

L,
vowel, low grade of
'

al,

4 a

(P- 4).

E, diphthong, originally ai, p. 22,

3
f. n.
high grade of i, 5 a
internal
Sandhi of final, 21
Sandhi of, 59
unchangeable

6tave, dat.

inf. to weave,

167 b

4.

VEDTC INDEX

478

osam, adv. quickly, 103, 2 a.

osistha, spv. re?-?/ quick, 103, 2 a.
ohanfi, pr. pt. of uh, consider, 158 a.

kya, inter, prn. who? 113 b.

kaya, inst. adv. how? 178, 3 c.
kirna, ear, compounded w.

AI, diphthong, low grade of, 5 d;

Sandhi of final, 22
internal
Sandhi of, 59 stem in, 102.

poss. cds., 188

]89f?; accentuation of, p. 455,
10 rf 1.
k^rman, n. work, 90, 2 (p. 69).
kasipu, m. n. mat, 98 a.
k&s ca, indefinite prn. any one,
119 b.
kfis cana, indef. prn. any, 119 h.
kds aid, indef. prn. any, 119 b.
kakud, f. 2'>alate, 77, 3 b.
kakubha pragatha, m. a kind of
mixed strophe, p. 446, 11 B 1.
Kathaka Samhita, accentuation

184

-ais, inst. pi.

ending,

n. 9.

f.

p. 78,

ATI, diphthong, low grade of, 5 d

Sandhi of final, 22 internal
Sandhi of, 59; stem in, 102.
-au, ending of 1. 3. s. pf. act.,
of N. A. du., p. 59,
136, 4
f. n. 2
p. 78, f. n. 13.

K, insertion of

transitional, 35.

ka, intei'. prn. who? 113.

-ka, pri. nom. sf., 182, 1 b

nom.

sf.,

kakiid,

kakubh,

f.

of. p,

sec.

kas,

b.
;

p. 444,

IM

many),

a.

prn.

120

times? 179,

katpay^,

adv.

many

hoio

1.

113

a.

a.

what? 113.
kddartha, a. having what purpose?
113 a.
kada, inter, adv. wlien? 179, 3;
kd.d, inter, prn.

p. 354, 2 a

kadru, f. Soma
kdnistha, spv.
kanisthd,
f.

216, 2 .
vessel, p. 89, f. n. 3.
smallest, 103, 2 J>.

spv.

yoxtngest,

p.

95.

n! 3.

kd,niyams, cpv.

lesser,

103, 2 a

yoviiger, 88.

kanya,
kdprth,

f.

girl, p.

96,

f.

n. 3.

n. penis, 77, 2.

kam, adv.

synt. use, 180.

kara, pel. used after nti, su, hi,
180 p. 453, 8 B d.
;

tvell,

1.

ij.,
ij.,

181.
181

184

w. kr,

tear

to

d.

kimkard, m. servant, 113 a.

kimtv, synt. cd. asking garruI'oushj,

189

c.

inter, prn.

pel. irhy? 178,

nhat? 113
2 a; 180.

inter.

kiyant, prn. der. hon- great? 113 a

118 b.
kila, adv. indeed, synt. use, 180.
kicTrs, prn. cd. u-hat like? 117.
kivant, prn. cd. how far? 118 c.
ku, inter, stem in derivatives,
113
kumari, f. girl, 100, lb a (p. 88).
some one,
cd.,
kuvitsa,
synt.
189 B c.
2
kuvid, inter, pel., 180 p. 354, a
accents verb, p. 467,
216, 2 a
19 B.
kiiba, inter, adv. ivhere? 113 a;

a. greatly swelling,

inter, adv. hoic? 179, 1 a.

kdtha, inter, adv. hon- ? p. 354. 2 a

of,

5.

f.

tatters,

kathdm,
21(),

a.

kikkita,
kikkira,

(of

kim,
inter,

icho?

a.

katidha,

dat. for the sake

cough, 83,
ki, inter, prn. stem in eds., 113 a.

katar^, prn. a. icMch (of two) ?,

117 6; 120 rt.
kti, nm. du. hoiv many? 113 a;

US

197

at will,

a metre,

3.

katamd,, inter,

3'.

kamaya, adv.
200

peak, 78, 2

450,

karaam, adv.

2.

182,

summit, 77, 3

f.

c.

karmadharaya,

ffl.

179, 1.
kr, make,

127, 4 a
pr. system,
132 (par.^' anomalous pr. stem,
134 C 4 pr. pt., 85 pf., S8, 2
a ao..
89, 1 (par.)
pf. pt., 157
transfers, 147 a 2; root ao.,
inj.,
148, 1 6 (par.); op., 148. 4
;

VEDIC INDEX
148, 3
(par.)

pt., 148,

ps. ao.,

It.
155; ft., 151 6 (par.)
85; 151 b 2; pre, 148, 4 a.

pt.,

kf-t, a. muldng, 11,

krt, cut, pr., 133 C

kftvas, nm. adv.

sb., 148,

impv., 148, 5

1.

151
108 .

a.

ft.,

limes,

kfp,
hemity, 78,
krp, lament, pr. stem, 133
krs, drag, red. ao., 149,
\i', s(alter. pr.,
kip, be adapled,

133

1.

gir,

1.

a.

kram,

stride,

133

pr. stem,

root ao., 148, 1 d inj., 148, 3

is ao., 145, 1 (par.).
;

krunc, m. curlev; 79, 1.

krudh, he angry, red. ao. inj., 149,

ao.,

3.

n.

ksnu,

Kh4,

3.

hunger, 11, 4.
i.xjush, 78, 2.

147 c;

b,

141

f.

c;

151 a;

ft.,

168, 1

cs.,

stem, 133

hide, pr.

ao.,

guh,

ps. ao., 1,55

gdv., 162,
168, 1 c.

guh,

148, 1 g; red. ao.,

is ao.,
143, 1. 2. 3

s ao.,

gfbh,

1.

stem, 134,

dig, pf., 137,

&

ps.

stem,

d.

sa

hiding-place, 81.

2.

149 a

seizure, 78, 2.

f.

gf, swallow, pr. stem,

red. ao.. 149, 1.

133

hidl,
cow, 102; 102, 2
(par.) accentuation of, p. 458 c 1.
f.

go -m ant,
go-sSn,

1 .

a.

go, m.

n. aperture, 97, 3.

154

149

gr, n-aken, red. ao., 149, 1

ipv., 149, 5.

f.

ichet, pr.

khan,

giidh^, pp. of guh, hide, 160,

ksaipra, a. quickly pronounced Svarita accent in Sandlii, p. 465,

f.

127,

145, 1

ksudh,
ksubh,

c 1.

ksar, ./7o?{j, s ao., 144, 5.

ksd, f. abode, 97, 2.
ksip, throw, red. ao. inj., 149,
ksip, f. finger, 78, 1.

5 a a; 17; 17 ri; 19
21; in
dec, 98; in conj., 125, 1. 2 ;

458,

a. praising^

giaggulu, n. bdellium, 98 b.
guna, high grade (of vowels), 5 a

1. 2; pr. stem, 133 A 1

134,1c; 134, lea; pr.pt. mid.,
158 a a ao., p. 167, f. n. 3
a

krus, cry out, sa ao., 141 a.

ks4p, f. night, 78, 1 gen. adv. of
'a night, 202 D 3 a.
ksm, f. earth. 78, 3 accentuation
of, p.

n. 6.

f.

82,

3.

red. ao., 149, 1.

exdnsire, 120 c 3.
krand, cry out, pf., 137, 2 rf a ao.,
147 6; red. ao., 149, 1; s ao.,
144, 5.

k^vala,

pre. 148, 4 a, impv. 143, 5, pt.

148, 6 ; ao. ps., 155 ; gd., 165 a.
gd,m, f. earth, 78, 3.
gamddhye, dat. inf. to go, 167 6 7 a.
ga, sing, si.s aorist, 146.
gathin, m. singer, 87.
gayatri stanzn, p. 438, 3 a; tro-

chaic, p. 439, 3 a a.
f. praise, 82, f. n. 5

1.

f.

479

a.

a. possessing cows, 86.

winning cows, 11, 5.

rt. ao. of ghas, 148, 1 g.

-gdha, pp. of ghas, eat, 160, 2 a.
gna, f. divine ivoman, 97, 2.
grabh, seise, is ao., 145 b
pr,
system, 132 (par.)
pr. stem,
134 K 2; pf., 137, 2 c; cs., 168,

gdha,

khAlu, emphasizing

pel., indeed,

180.

kha, tweV, 97,

irr

khidvams, oppressing, 157

khya, see, a ao., 147 a 1.

b.

Gam,

2 ; pf.,
go, pr. stem, 133
137, 2 b
138, 7
140, 3 ; pf. pt.,
157; per. pf., 139,9 a; a ao.,
147 a 2 (transfers) ; s ao., 144, 3 ;
rt. ao., 148, 1 a:
op., 148, 4,
;

dat.

inf.

to

167 a

seize,

(p. 191).

stem, 134

2,

giavan, m. pressing stone, 90, 1.

gldu, m. f. lump, 102 102, 5.

3.

grah,
pf.,

5.

grabh6,

2.

pr.

seize,

137, 2

ps.,

154,

6.

Gha, emphasizing end.

p. 452,

6.

pel.,

180

VEDIC INDEX

480
ghdnighnat,
85

kill,

pt. int. of

pr.

J before conj.
jdgat, a. going

han,

b.

ghas, eat,
157 o

137, 2 6

pf.,
rt.

pf.

Id;

ao., 148,

85

pt.,

f.

a.

having ghee, 86 (p. 64,

85.

go, 89 a.
jajnivams,

jan,

n. 3).

pr. pt. of

ghnint,
ghra,

smell, pr.

han,

kill,

stem, 134

c].

f.

100 I a

wheel,

n. 1).
c&ksus, n.

eije,

83, 2

83, 2

j&ni, f. wife, 99, 1 a.

jdnitri, f. mother, 101, 2
janiis, n. birth, 83, 2 c.

caturtM,

106

jar^s,
c

(par-)-,

caturdha, adv. in four ways, 108 b.

cdturvaya, nm. der. fourfold, 108 c.
catiis, nm. adv. four times, 108 a,
catustrimsd, ord. thirty-fourth, 107.
catvarimsa, ord. fortieth, 107.
catvarims^t, nn\. forty, 104.
cand, pel. of euen, synt. nse, 180
accents verb, p. 467, 19 A d.
caru, a. dear, 98 a, c.

1.

2.

157

pf. pt.,
s ao., 144, 5.
cit,

rt. ao.,

even,

pel.

cj.

if,

synt.

use,

180

cyu,

stir,

149,

inj.,

split,

f.

pf.

148, 3.

pt.,

2c;

p. 41,

n.

f.

1.

child, 97, 2.

janu, n. knee, du.

n. 14,

f,

of, p. 81,

15.

japaya, cs. of ji, conquer red. ao.,

149 a 3.
jaraya, den. play the lover, ps. ao.,
155 a 2.
ji, conquer, pf.,
139, 4
pf. pt.,
157 b a
rt. ao.
inj., 148, 3;
:

ao.,

p. 196,
jit, a.

144, 5;
f. n. 1.

ft.,

conquering, 11,

151 a;

157 a

rt.

ao.

cs.,

1.

3 6

j3.

jihvamiiliya, guttural spirant, 3 g ;

14; 15 j; 43,2.
ji, overpouxr, pr. stem, 134 E 1.
jivatave, dat. inf. to live, 167 b 4.
sacrificial
juhii, f. tongue, 100, II a
;

spoon, ibid.

Ch, doubling of, 51

produces
length by position, p. 437, a 3.
-cha, pr. stem sf., 133 A 2 133 C 2.
chand, seem, s ao., 144, 5.
chdndas, n. metre, p. 436. f. n. 1.
chid,

m.

134
;

synt. use, 180 w. op.,

p. 467, 19 B.
red. ao.,
pf., 139, 8
op., 149, 4.
inj., 149, 3

p. 366,

134
ja,

jinv, quicken, pr. stem, 133

p. 452, S Ab.
cisca, ij. whiz! 181.

c6d,

m.

jdvistha, spv. quickest, 103, 2.

jdviyams, cpv. quicker, 103, 2.
jahf, 2. s. pr. ipv. of han, strike,

148. 1 d

thought, 77, 1.

f.

cid,

ao. pt. of gam,

2 (p. 280, f. n. 4).
old age, 83, 2 a a.

stem, 134

6 a

c.

ci, gather, pf., 139, 4.

ci, note, pf., 139, 4.

cit, perceive, pr.

b.

189

go,
.

ord.foiirth, 107.

c&turdasa, Tim. fourteen, 104

jdm, f. earth, 78, 3.

jamat, palatalized

a.

c.

catur, nm./0M-, 104; 105, 4 (par.

101, 2

a. creative,

janayitr,

f.

seeing, 83,

86,

(p.

pr. stem, 154 d; ps. ao., 155 a

OS. pt, 85.

(par.)",

eakri,

7.

pf. pt. of jiia, 89 a.

3 6 ; pf.,
beget, pr. stem, 134
137, 2 b ; red. ao., 149, 1 (par.) ;

;3.

and, syntactical use, 180

b
360 5 ; p. 452, 8
if. w. sb., p.
B.
467,^19
cakrvams, pf. pt., having done, 89

Ca,

a metre, p. 442,

f.

jaganvams, pf. pt.act. of gam, 89 a.

jagmivams, pf. pt. act. of gam,

171, 5.

ghrtdvant,

6.

jagati,

des.,

63 (p. 41, f. n. 3).

n. inanimate world,

s,
;

jxi,

hasten, pr.

stem, 134

speeding, 100, II .
jr, waste away, pr. stem,

1.

jia, a.

jeman,

133

2.

90, 2.
jogu, a. singing aloud, 100, II a.
of
cs.
ink, know, p. 185,
jnaptfi, pp.
f.

a. victorious,

n. 3.

jna, know, pr. stem, 134

pr.

VEDIC INDEX
So

pi.,

14y, i

ao. up.,

it.

sis

tauu,

jyesthd, spv.

187

77,

sf.,

182,

lb;

182,

sf.

16

of

p. 4.52, 7.

-tavya, gdv. sufQx, 162 ; 162, 5 ;

209, 5.
tavyaras, cpv. stronger, 103, 2 .
-tas, adv. sf., vv, abl. sense, 179, 2.

pp., 160.

tams, shake,
147 h.

2d;

137,

pf.,

a,

ao.,

taka, dem. prn. tlmt little, 110 a 3

117 a.
t&tas, adv. thence, synt. use, 180.
td.ti, nm. der. so many, 118 .
tatpiirusa compounds, 100, I a
187, 2 a ; w. ace. sense, 187
1,

tasthivams, pf. pt, of stha, 89 a.

t^smad, abl. adv, therefore, 180.
-ta, secondaiy nom. sf., 182, 2.
stems
-tat, sec. nom. sf., 182, 2
adv. sf. w. abl. sense,
in, 77, 1
179, 2
ending of 2, s, pr. ipv.

A 2,

inst.,

dat.,

A
abl., A 4,

3,

gen., A5, loc, A 6; asjjossessives,

189, 2 accentuation of, i).456, 2,

134

tatha, adv. thus, 110 a

179, 1
syut. use, 180,
tad, adv. then, ihitlier, synt. use,
ISO.

-tati,

tan,

144, 5

stem, 154
f.

accent,

184

ipv.,

tauu, a,
1819

133

thin,

nom.

sf.,

2. pi.

impf. and

182, 2.

cd.,

sucJi,

adv.

across,

compounded w.

182, 2.

p.

113,

179, 2

tiryauc,

a. transverse,

93

a.

/3.

tiksniyams, cpv, sharper, 103, 2

c.

tu, pel.
I

verbs,

b.

tiksnd,, a. sharp, 103, 2

5.

98

prn.

aside,

p. 458, c 1.

-tana, secondary
-tana, ending of

sf., 182, 1 6.
tirasci, m. a man's name, 100, 1 b,
tiras, prp. across, w. ace, 176, 1 ;

197
77,

sf.

a;

(_cs.).

tavaka, jdoss. prn. thy, 116 6.

tavant, prn. der. so great, 118 c.
-ti, nm. a. sf., 118 a; pri. nom.

d.

successio)i,

secondary nom.

C3

133

n. 2

f.

f.'n. 4,

148, 1 d;

rt, ao.,

tadfsa,

144, 2

tad, adv. thus, 178, 5.

tadrs, prn. cd. such, 117.

tadapas, Bv. cd. accustomed to that

'Cork, 110 a.
tada, adv. then, 179, 3.
tadanim, adv. then, 179, 3 /i.
tan, stretch, pr. stem, 134 C 4 a
pf., 137, 2rt, &; 140, 1. 2; s ao.,
ps.

A4

125; 133
4 S 168 e,

act., p.

tarhi, adv. then, synt, use, ISO.

tavastara, cpv. stronger, 103, 1,
-tavai, dat. inf. in, senses of,
211,
5; accentuation of,

sf.,

ill b;
;

nom.

3.

a (in cds.)
stems in
secondary, 77, 1.
dem.
110
in
ta,
j^rn. that,
(par.)
syntax position of, 101 j as
w. prs. prns.,
corr., 19.5 B 3
195 B 3 6 a
w. dem. prng.,
19.5 B 3 6 )3.
-ta, pri.

B
1

103,

sf.,

120 a; 182 ord. sf., 107

adverbs formed \v., p. 301 ;S; accentuation of, p. 454, 9 B b.
82 6,
t&T, f. star, 82, f. n. 5
-tar, loc. inf. of stems in, 167, 4 b.
117 6;
-tara, sec, cpv. sf., 103, 1
120 a 182, 2 adverbs formed
w., p. 301 0.

iji Sandlii, 3(5 a

in gdv., 162, 1 d; deter-

c.

stem, 133
;

interposed

minative

83, 2

-tania, sec. spv.

83, 2.

Uijht,

a. hot,

ta,ia, faint, pr.

103, 2.

eldest,

sb., 149, 2.

tapus,

self,

4i, 1

89 vpar.)

body, p.

tandri, f. iceariness, p. 88 a.
138 b
tap, heat, pf, 137, 2 a
s ao., 144, 2
red. au.
140, 1

.jnapaya, ca. ofjuar'ied.iio., ii'Ja'o.

jdas, HI. relative, 83, 1.
jya, f. bowstrbuj, \)1, 2.
.iyayams, cpv. rjreuicr, 88 108, 2 <(.
as
jyestha, spy. (jreuiest, 103, 2
linal member of Bv. cd., 189, 1 b.

T,

f.

n^b.

au., IJrG.

jyotis, n.

481

thefi, hut,

synt, use, ISO.

,3.

VEDIC INDEX

482
-tu, pri. noiii.

tud,

ace. iiif, in, p. 191; 211, 2

turiya, ord. fourth, 107.

-tum,

-tr, pri.

b.

'in, 101, 2
p. 453, 9 Ad.
trca, m. n. triplet, p. 14G, 11 A.
ord.
120 c 3.
trliya,
third, 107
trp, he pleased, pr. stem, 133 C 1.
trsnaj, a. thirsty, 79, 3 b.
2.
trh, crush, pr. stem, 134

te,

end. dat. gen.

109

a; p. 452,

s.

133

gen., 202 1) 3,
tredlia, nm. adv. in

108

109

nom.

forming

suffix, 182, 2

162

gdv.,

03, 2.

Taittiriya Aranyaka,

tvadyoni,

accented,

Brahmma,
'

accented,

p. 449.
,

449,

-tos,

abl.

211, 3
-tta,

gen. inf. in, 107, 3

\>\).

tm&n, m. self, 90,

tya, dem. prn.

of da, gice,

160, 2 b.
-tna, sec. nom. suffix, 182, 2.
-tnu, pri. nom. suffix, 182, 1

195

b.

syncoi^ated

110 a 2;

tra, protect, s ao. op., 143, 4.

tra, m. protector, 97, 2.
-tra, pri. nom. sf., 182, 1 b.
tri, nm. three, 104
105, 3 (.par.) ;
in Bv. compounds, i).455, 10c, rf.
;

trims^t, nm. thirty, 104; 106 d

(par.\
tridha, nm. adv. in three loays,
108 b.
a. threefold,

77.

member
109

b.

prs. piui. thou, 109 (par.),

Tj). cd. pirescnted by thee,

tvayata,
109 b.

tva, end. prs, prn. ace, of tvam,

109 a p. 452, 8
u.
-tva, suffix of gd., 163, 2; 210.
-tvaya, suffix of gd., 163, 3 210

189, f. n. 1.
pel., 180.
jj.

pi-n. der. like thee, 118 c,

4 c.
tvis, he stirred, pr. steni, 134
tvis, f. excitement, 80.

-tvi,suffix of gd., 163, 1

5.

trivrt,

tvam,

first

tvavant,

b.

-tya, sec. nom. suffix, 182, 2.

165 210.
-tya, gd. suffix, 164
tyaj,/o)srtA:t, pr. stem, 135, 4.
dem.
tydd,
prn. n. as adv., 195 B 5,
-tra, pri. nom. suffix, 182, 1 b.
adv.
sf.
w. loc. sense, 179, 3
tra,
= loc, 179, 3 a.
traya, nm. der. threefold, 108 c.
;

suffix, 182, 2.

added to cs. stem,

tvav^, emphasizing

2.
tliat,

a. derived from thee,

-tvana, sec. nom.

Taittiriya Sanihita,lio\v accented

p.

f.

1.

p. 448, 1

sf.

162,

209, 2.

a.

tvao,
skin, 79,
tvad-, prs. prn. as
of a cd., 109 b.

Taittiriya

ways,

b.

t^jistha, spv. verij sliarp,

tsjiyams, cpv. sharper, 103, 2.
tena, inst. adv. therefore, 180.

448,

three

-tva, sec.

3.

of tvdm, thou,
1

p.

b.

B2

tva, dem. prn. 'Duaiy a one, 112 a

a.
(par.)
p. 452, 8
tvi, 130SS. prn., thy, 116 b.
tva- = tvam, thou, in derivatives
or as first member of a cd.,

stem, 133

nom.

tr, cross, pr.

(.par.)

Av.

roaring aloud, 77, 5,

sf., 182, 1 &; stems

a.

tuvisvan,

1.

138,

pf.,

133

f.
triple praise,
78, 2
a metre, p. 438, f n. 1,2
2^.441,5; triplets, p. 446, 11 A.
tris, nm. adv. thrice, 108
179, 1

tristubh,

1 b.

182,
125, 2

sf.,

pr.,

thrust,

tvdi,

210.

indeed, 180.

l^cl. bv.t

t%?iT, approach stealthily, s ao.,

-Tha,

pri.

nom.

nom.

sf.,

144, 5.

182, 1 b

sec.

suffix, 182, 2.

-tham, adv.

suffix, 179, 1 a.

-tha, pri. vom. sutfix, 182, 1 h.

manner
suffix
of
adv.
-tha,
(=inst.), 179, 1,

4.
bite, pr. stem, 133
dSksat, ao. pt. of dah, lurn, 85 b.
daksinatds, adv. from the right,
w. gen., 202 D.
179,' 2
daksinatra, adv. on tlie right,

Dams,

179,' 3.

d^ksinena, adv.
1

97

/8

soidh

p. 209,

f.

of,

w. ace,

n. 8,

VEDIC INDEX
dagh,

ao.

rt.

reach,

148, 5

i^jv.,

iiij.,

pre, 148, 4

'6

l-tS,
a.

datta, pp. of da, give, IfiO, 2

134 B 3 ^.
dMat, pr. pt. of da, ijke, 85 b.

dadhi,

ii.

citrih,

dip, shine, irr. red. ao. 149 a 1.

dirgha, a. long, 103, 2 a.
diighana, pr. i)t. mid. of duh,

milk, 158 a.
dus, spoil, OS. future of, 151 a a.
dustdra, a. hard to cross, 50 b.
duhsaha, a. hard to resist, 50 b.
dus-, adv. in cds., Sandlii of, 49 c
accent of, }:>. 455, 10 c a.
duh, viilh; pr. stem, 134 A 4
134
4 c a sa ao., 141 a s ao.

99, 4.
80.

dadhfk, adv. boldhj,

dadhfs, a. hold, 80.
dtot.

111.

iootib,

dabh, harm,

85

a.

pf., 137,

((.

!>

dam, n. (?), house, 78, 3.

-dam, adv. suffix of time, 179, 3.
d^mpati, m. lord of the house,
d^sa, nm. ten, 106 c (par.),
dasataya, nui. der. tenfold, 108

1.

da,

143, 4.
pr.pt., mid. of duh, 158a.
duhitd.r, f. daughter, 101, 2.

do, f. gijt, 100 II a.

dvidabha, a. hard to deceive, 49 c.
dudas, a. not -worshipping, 49 c.
dudhi, a. malevolent, 49 c.
dund,sa, a. liard to attain, 49 c,
duriasa, a. liard to destroy, 49 c.
duti, f. messenger, p. 88 .
dura, a. far, cpv. of, 103, 2 d.

c.

pt.,

pt.,

1 6;

duram,

2.

stem,
134 B 3

134

pr.

rjive,

134 B 3 a;
157
157 6 a
a ao., 147 a
;

pf.

/a;

ao.

'148, 1 d.

inj.,

148, 3; op., 148, 4; ft., 151 a;

pp., ICO, 2 b.
2. da, cut, s ao. 144, 3
op., 143, 4.
da, m. fjiver, 97, 2.
-da, adv. suffix of time, 179, 3.
,

m. giver,
-danim, adv.
datar,

in prn. cds. =hA,e, 117.

157 rt. ao. inj.,
a ao., 147 c
'14S, 3; pt., 148, 6

-drksa,
drs,

daru,

11.

davan,

drs, f. look, 63 b (f. n. 1)

79, 4.
-drs, sf. in prn. cds. = like, 111,
drse, to see, dat. inf., 167 a (p. 191).
;

101, 2 (par.).
suffix
of
time.

f. nether
millstone, 77, 3 b.
drh, makeftr)n, pr. sttm, 133 C 1.
deya, gdv. to he given, 162, 1 a.

dr.sdd,

98 a

irood,

(p. S3).

Devata-dvandva

n. giving, 90, 3.

das,
worship, 79, 4.
dasat, pr. pt. ivorshipping,
f.

15<:>

pf. pt.,

ps. ao., 155.

givimj, 90, 2.

11.

sf.

see,

179,3)3,

daman,

adv.ya;-, 178, 2.

durat, abl. adv. /row* afar, 178, 5

dur, loc. adv. afar, 178, 7,
dr, tear, s ao. op., 143, 4; rt.ao.

pt.^

144, 3

ao.,
rt.

02^.,

dasama, ord. tenth, 107.

ddsyave vfka, m. Wolf to theBasiju,
as a name, 200 A 2 7.
dah, burn, s ao., 144, 5 s ao.
143 6: 15(5 a; ft., 151 n

duhana,

78, 3 (( ; p. 273, f. n. 3.
daviyams,/tty7//e/-, 103, 2 a.

151 6

483

p. 457,

85

dasivams, uured. pf. pt., 157 h.

dasvams, unred. 2>f. j)t., 157 b.
ds. gdv.

ivorthij

to

accent

of,

devatat, f. divine service, 77, 1.

devatta, Tp. cd. given by the gods,

didrks6nya,

cds.,

e /3.

160, 2

&.

devadrydnc,
he

f.

devasas, adv.

seen, 162, 3.

fourth conj. class, 125, 3.

div, m. f. skij, 99, 5 (p. 85, f. n. 1).
diva, inst. adv. hy da>j, 178, 3.
div^dive, itv. cd. day hg dag,
189 C 200 B 3 a.
dis, f. direction, 63 b (f, n. 1)
A\v,2)laij,

godward, 93 (p. 73,

a.

n. 1).

179,

to

eacli

of

t/ie

gods,

1.

devanc,
gvdward, 93 b.
devi, f. goddess, 100 I b (par.).
a.

devf, m. liusband^s
dehi, 2. s. pr. ipv.
134 Bib.

79, 4.

6.6s, n.
i

arm, 83,

1.

brother, 101, 1.
act. of da, give,

VEDIC INDEX

484

dydv, m. f. aJiij, 99, 5 (p, 85,

dyavah, N. p], the (three)
3

19.3,

n. 1).

f.

1.

heavens,

186

2a;

dyu, m. day, 98 d

m.

f.

ipv., 148, 5

sky, 99,

shine, pf., 139, 8

144, 5; red. ao., 149,
red. ao., 149 a 1.

dyut,

ao.,
irr.

1;

dyut, f. brilliance, 77, 1.

dyo, 111. f. sky, 102 102, 3 (par.)
accentuation of, \>. 458, c 1.
dyaus, m. N. of dyo, sky, 99, 5
voc, accentuation of, p. 457,
;

lift,

draghman, m.

length, 90, 2.

draghistha, spv.

longest,

draghiyams, cpv.
?i'oorf,

103, 2 a.

ji.

458

c 1.

(par.),

108 h; 179, 1.
dvipada, f. stanza

der.,

com-

n. 2

134
dhik,
dhi,

ways,

verses,

viraj, f. a metre, p. 437,

p. 443.

dvis, hate, sa aorist, 141 a.

dvis, f. hatred, 80.
dvis, 11111. adv. ttrice, 108 a 179,
w. gen., 202 D 3.
;

sing., 81 a.
dhaksat, s ao. pt. of dah, burn,

85

143, 6.
dhanvan, n. boiv, 90, 3.
dhartr, n. ^nop, 101, 2 b.
;

ending,

w. ace, 197
I a

thought, 100,

Hey.
100, I b

vpar.).

-dhuk = -duh + s, N.

s.

milking, 81 a.

dhur, f. burden, 82, f. n. 5.

dhursad, a. being on the yoke, 49 d.
dhiirsah, a. bearing the yoke, 49 d.
dhr, hold, irr. red. ao., 149 a 1
inj., 149, 3; ip\., 149, 5; ps.
stem, 154 d cs. ft., 151 a a.
a. bold, 79,

b.

nether millstone, 77, 3 b.

dhrsad,
dhehi, 2. s. pr. ipv. act. of dha,
1 &.
put, 1.34
f.

n. smithy, 101, 2

dhmatf,

used

-dhyai,

inf.,
211, 1 b y.

b.

elliptically,

-dhruk = druh-f s, N.

s.

haling,

a.

of

-dhva, ending
133 A 5.

dhvams,
-dhvam,

2.

mid.,

pi.

a ao., 147 b.
ending, cerebra-

scalier,
2. pi.

nasal, never cerebraghn = han, in cds.,

50cl3 inserted, in N. s., 79,4 a,
in N. pi. n. of as, is, us stems,
2 c,
SB; loss of: in pr., 134
4 a, in
p. 121, f. n. 1, 134
Karmadliaiinal an steins of
rayas, 188, 2 a, of Baliuvrihis,
steins
189, 4 a, in -ant, 156 a
intiuence of
in radical, 77, 5

W, dental

in

98 .
in, 98
na, pel. not, 180 w. sb., 215 C2(i,
w. inj. (=ft.), 215 c 1, w. op.,
p. 362 a, p. 364 7, w. pre, 217

stems

Dh, stems in, 77, 4.

-dhak =^ -dah. + s, N.

act.

ii>v.

5.

ij.fie!

f.

lized

of two

s.

lized, 144, 2 a.

180.

p. 441, 5 a.
f.

2.

-dhi,

81

dvapaueasa, ovd. fifty-second, 107.

dvar, f. dooj-, 82 (f. n. 5) 82 a.

dvipada

dha, suck, pr. stem, 133 B 1.

-dha, adv. sf. of manner, 179, 1.
-dhi, compounds in, 98 d.

dvi, mil. two, in cds. and

in Bv.
105, 2 (f. n. 2)
l^ounds, p. 455, 10 c o.
dvita, adv. doubly, synt. use,
dvitiya, ord. second, 107.
dvidha, nin. adv. in two

2.

dhrsaj,

105, 2 (par.',
dvandva, n. pair, 189 (p. 282,
f. n. 4)
compounds, 18G accentuation of, p. 457, 10, 2 c.
dvayfi, nin. der. twofold, 108 c.
10(5 c
dvadasa, nm. twelve, 104
;

148, 3 ; op., 148, 4

ps. ao., 155.

longer, 103, 2 a.

accent,

drvih, m. fiend, 81.

dva, mil. <too, 104

rt. ao. inj.,

a.

(par.),

drii,

dyava, elliptical du. heaven and

11.

?)

a.

earth, 193,

dha, 2'"U I'l'- stem, 134 B 1

134 B 3 a; 134 B 3 /S
pf.,
137, 2e; 138, 3; a ao., 147 a 1

like,

180.

-na, pri. noiii.

sf., 160.

sf.,

182,

pp.

VEDIC INDEX
prn. no

ndkis, inclec.

ISO; 113,

never,

one,

n. 2.

f.

nakim, adv. prn. never, 180.

nSktam, ace. adv. hij night, 178,

197

inst. adv.

naktaya,
nadi,

17S, 3o.
100, I b a.

h>/ nir/h(,

stream, 100, I a

f.

n^dh,

nfinandr, m.husbancVs

sinter,

101, 1.

ndnu, adv. by no means, ISO.

n^pat, m. grandson, 101. 2, f.
101,2 a.
ndbh,

nam,

r/ran<Zson,

/lenrt,

n. 5

101,2; 101,

137, 2

pf.,

ndva,

2(i.

103, 2

r.

ninety,

navadha, nm.

spv.

of,

106
104

(pai".\

106

rf

104

nineteen,

b.

3, op.,

149,

-na, coniugational class formed

w., 127, 5.
-na, pri. nom. suffix, 182, 1 b.
nanadhi, a. harimi diverse intentions,
ICO, I a.

nama, adv.

/.*/

namdtha, adv.
na^,

f.

name, 178, 2

180

by

name, 179,

1.

nom.

suffix, 182,

b.

inf,

to

167 a

push,

m. man,

of, ]>.
f.

458,

101,

accentuation

c 1.

dancing, 77,

1.

accents verb, 467,

(p. .355 a)
19 B.
nedistha, spv. nearest, 103, 2 b.
nedisthara, adv. nearest, w. gen,,
202'D.
nediyas, adv. nearer, w. gen.,
202 D.
nediyams, cpv. nearer, 103, 2 ti.
nema, prn. other, 120 c 2 (par.),
nau, end. dii. prn. us two, 109 a
p. 452, 8 A rt.
ndu, f. ship, 102 102, 4 (par.^,

dmcnirard, 93 a.
nyarbuda, n. hundred millions,

nyi,ac,

a.

104,
-ns, original ending of ace. pi. of
a stems, 97, f. n. 8 (p. 78).

p. 446, 11

pac,

nose, S3, 1,

-ni, pri,

148,

in.j.,

1.

;p. 191).
aid, adv. never, w, op.. 216, 2 a
(p. 362),
nunim, adv. non^, 178, 2 a ISO.

Pankti, stanza,

a.

ao.

rt.

151 b

nds, f. wzgi/t^, 79, 4.

nas, pin. m,s, ace, dat., gen., pi.,
109 a p. 452, 8 A a.
rahi, adv. /or not, by no means, 180.
n^hus, m. neighbour, S3, 2 c.

197

sb.,

148, 4.
ao,,

182, 2.

ned, neg. pel. certainly not, lest,

not
that
w. sb., 215
180

inst.

nas, be lost, red.

irr., 149 a 2.

sf.,

nu

nft,

adv. anew, 178, 3.

navyams, cpv. newer, 103, 2 .
1. nas, reach, rt. ao., 148, 1 d,
inj.,
148,

ft.

nf,

adv. in nine n-ays,

navama, ord. ninth, 107.

ndvistha, spv. newest, 103, 2 j8.
i!d,vedas, a. cognisant, 83, 2 a a,
ndviyams, cpv. neiver, 103, 2 /S.

2.

secondary nom.

-ni,

127, 3.

I'par.).

ndvadasa, nm.
106 c (par.}.

n^vyasa,

f.

-nude, dat.
104

nine,

navati, nm.

108

f. bright garmeid, 79, 3 a.

destroyer, 81.
ni, lead, pf., 138, 4 ; s ao. ipv.,
143, 5 ; ft., 151 a.

nirnij,

nud, push,

/3.

n^va, nm.

thousand,

or nu, adv. noiv, synt. use, 180.

-nu, pri. nom, suffix, 182, 1 b.
-nu, conj. class formed with,

w.

cpv, and

neir,

int.,
2.

nu

nd.mas, n. obeisance, w. kr, 184

namasyd, den., 175 B (par.),
n^mi, m. a name, 100, I b.
a.

nidhi, m. treasury, 98 d.
nimriic, f. sunset, 79, 1.
niyuta, n. a hvndred

njh,

destroyer, 78, 2.

f.

^rash, s ao ,
144, 2 ;
174 (par.),
nity^m, adv. constantly, 178,
nid, f. contempt, 77, 3 rt.

nii,

104.

bond, 77, 4.

f.

ndp tr,

2;

a.

485

co'.Je,

p.

440, c; triplets,

A.

pf., 187. 2 a,

pdnca, nm.

//re.

104

106

(par.).

VEDIC INDEX

486
p^ncadasa, nm.

fifteen,

104

106

pancadha, nm. adv.

lOS

in five icays,

h.

ord.

pancamd,

107.

fifth,

pancas^t, nm. fifty, 104.

pat, fiijJaU,

pf.,

pf. pt., 1.57 a

137, 2 a; 137, 2 b a;
red. ao., 149 a 2,

ipv., 149, 5.

patfiya, iterative vb. fiy about, 168.

acp&ti, m. husband, lord, 99, 1
centuation of, in cds., p. 456, 2a.
;

din, m.

p&tir

lord

of

the

house,

78, 3 a.

pitni,
pfiti
1

f. luife,

when

89, 4

a.

paribhvi,

lady, 99, 1 ; as f. for

final member of Bv.,

e.

surrounding, 98 d.

surrounding, 100, II o.
piritta, pp. of pari-da, give airai/,
160, 2 b.
pdrena, inst. adv. beyond, \v. ace,
197 B c /3 p. 209, f. n. 3.
parvasas, adv. joint by joint 179, J.
pas = spas, see, pr. stem, 133 B 1.
pds, f. sight, 79, 4.
pasutrp, a. delighting in cattle, 78, 1,

paribhu,

(par.)._^

a.

pasumdnt,
f.

(p./)4,

a. possessing
n. 3).

cattle,

86

pasca, adv. behind, 178, 3 b.

pascat, abl. adv. from behind,
w. gon., 202 D.
178, 5
pascatat, adv. />'om behind, 179, 2.
1. pa, drink, pr. stem, 133 A 3
134 B 3 ;3, rt. ao. pre, 148. 4 a
;

pith, ni.pa^A, 77,

pithi, m.

2ya(h,

2.

99, 2 a.

pad, ?taZfc, precative, 148, 4 a.

pid, m,/oo<, 77, 3 a.
pada-patha, ni. Pada text, 2; 2o
f.

n. l'{p.

41a;
p.

26);

p. 33.

64,

f.

n.

p.

n. 5

f.

3;

f n. 3
p. 454, 10 a.
p. 205,

p.

f.

f.

67,

f.

p. 206,

2;

n. 5

n. 4 ;
n. 2;

pan, admire, pf., 137, 2 b.

pinthan, m. 2Mth, 91, 1.
piutha, m path, 97, 2 a.

pinyams,
103,/2

cpv.

more

wonderful.

a.

papivaras, pf pt. of pa, drink, 89

paptivams, pf. pt. of pat, fly, 89

a.

-paya, cs. suffix, 168 d ; irr. 2.

pira, a. tdterior, 120 c 2 (par.)
higher, as final member of Bv..

189, 1

parami,

sp\. farthest, 120

1.

papiyams, cpv. worse, p. 96, f. n. 1.

pitir, m. father, lOJ, 2 (par.),
pitara, elliptical du., father and
mother, 186 B 3 ; 193, 2 .
pinv,/f/en, 133 A 3 b ; 134 C 4
pis, adorn, pr. stem, 133 C 1.
pis, f. ornament, 79, 4.

pumscalu, f. courtesan,
pums, m. man, 83, 1

pur,

f.

stronghold,

2,

abl.,

after, w. gen.,
n, 1 ; above, 202 D.
piranc, a. turned an-ay, 93 6.
paraddi, dat. inf. to c/ire up, p. 79.
f. n. 1 ; p. 191.

pardstad, adv. prp.

f.

piri, prp. around, w. ace. and abl.,

176, 1 a.
pirijman, a. going round, 90, 1 a.
paritas, adv. round about, 179, 2 ;

prp. around, w. ace, 177,

1.

f.

p. 89,

f.

n.

/3.

96, 3.

82 (par.),

a metre, p. 444, 2.
before, 179, 3
prp.

puris, adv.
before, w. loe, ace, abl., 176, 2
202 D compounded w. verbs,
184 b.
;

prp. w.

177, 3.

177, 4,

purausnih,

b.

paris, adv. beyond, 179, 3

ace, 177, 1, inst., 177,

pa, protect, pr. stem, 134 A 4 c.

Panini, m. a grammarian, 15.
pad, m.foot, 77, 3.
pada, in. foot, compounded w. gd.,
184 c quarter stanza, verse, 16
18 a; 48; p. 436, 1.
papa, a. bad, cpv. of, p. 96, f. n. 1.
2.

c a.

n.

f.

25,

p. 37,

ipv., 148, 5.

puristad, adv. in front, 179, 2

prp. in front of, w. gen., 177, 4
202 D.
w.
adv. formerly,
pura,
pr.,
212 A 2 a
w. sma, 180 prp.
before, w. abl., ace, inst., 177, 3
179, 3 7.
puranavit, adv. as of old, 179, 1.
puru, a. much, in Bv. compounds,
p. 455, 10 c a.

"

VEDIC INDEX
170,

mam/

in

adv.

purutra,

plara^,

:;.

purudha, ailv, variously, 179,

purodas, m. sacrificial cake, 79, 4 a.
1.

pr. stem, 134

pu, p'irifij,
purpati, m. lord of

49 (L
purva,

a. prior,
p. 454, 10.

the

120

1.

2 (par

purvdtha, m\v formerly 179,

.

puivam,

.)

1.

:iAv formerly 178, 2.

purvavd,t, adv. as of old, 179, 1.
pusdn, m. a god, 90 (p. 68).
s ao.
pr, cross, pr. stem, 134 B 3 a
red. ao., l-l9, 1
ipv., 143, 5
.

loo. inf., 167, 4

c.

prks, f. satiation, 80.

pre, mix, s ao,, 144, 4.
pfch, a. asking, 79, 2.

5.

inf, to ask, 79, 2 ;

'167 rt(p. 191).
prthivis, f. pi. the (three) earths,
"193, 3 a.
prthi, m. a man, 100, I b (p. 87).
pfsant, (pt.") a. spotted, 85 a.
134 E 4 a
Vflflil, pr stem, 133 B 2,

prche, dat.

rt.

ao. ipv., 148, 5

149, 5

red. ao, ipv.,

ps., 154, 4, f. n. 2 ; cs.,
;

168, irr, 5.
pya,./?/i np, sis aorist, 146.
prakhydi, dat, inf. to see,
(p. 79), f, n. 1.

pragatha, m. mixed

3.

prathamajd, a. ,/irst-born, 97,

prathlmdn, m. width, 90, 2.
dat. inf.

prame,
f.

to

form, 167,

1,

n. 2 (p. 191).

79, 3

a.

pray&j,
offering,
prayuta, nm. n. million, 104.
f.
pravdt,
height, 77, 1.
pras, ask, jjr. stem, 133 C 2.
f.

stronghold,

487

prahye, dat.

inf.

(p. 181).
pra, fill, irr.

pf.,

to

167

send,

136,

ao.,

144, 5.

praktat, adv. from the front, 179, 2.

piaeS,, inst. adv. forwards, 178,3 b.
a. forward, 93 b.
pratdr, adv. early, \v. gen., 202 D 2.
prataritvas, v. of -van stem, 90, 3.
pradiir, adv. before the door, w. bhu,
184 b.

praac,

prds, f. dispute, 79, 4.

sec.
priyS, a, clear, 97, 1 (par.)
opv. of, 103, 1.
priyadha, adv. kindly, 179, 1.
;

preradn, m. love, 90, 2.

preyam.s, pii, epv. of priy, dear,
103, '2

rt

f.

of,

88,

f.

n. 1.

pr6stha, spv. dearest, 103, 2 a.

plu, floctt, red. acrist, 149, 1.
psvlr,

victimls, 82,

f.

f.

5.

97,

Phat,

strophe, p. 446,.

ph^I,

ij.
ij.

crash! 181.
! 181.

splash

11 B.

pragrhya, uncontractahle, vowels,

24-6; 24, f.n. 2.; p. 437, f. n, 3.
prach, uslc, s aorist, 144, 5,
pratar^ra,
5
197

ace.
&

adv.

fwithermore,

f.

n.

inf.

to

imitate, 97, 2,

1.

pratitta, pp. of prati-da,

160, 2 h.

flru'c

hack,

pratnatha, adv. as of old, 179,

pratnavdt, adv. as of old, 179,
pratyd.iie,

a.

turned

1.

97

b a.

adv.

93

loicards,

ace.

brown, 100, II h.
babhru,
barhistha, spv. very lofty, 103, 2
f.

bahirdha, adv.

179,
prp./*'oi Old, w. abl., 177, 3.
outivard,

a,
1

much, in Bv. compounds,

455, 10 c a.
bahutia, adv. among many, 179, 3.
balLVi, a.

bahudha,

1.

bind, pr. stem, 134 E 3, 4 ;

151 a
139, 1
ft.,
ps.,

p.

w. ace, 197 B a,
(par,)
pra,tha,m&. Old. first, 107; 120c

prathamam,

pf.,

a.

c.

pratimai, dat.

bandh,

154,5.

i3.

prdti, prp. against, w. ace, 176,

197

Bdt, ij. truly, 181.

bata, ij. cdas ! 181.

3.

Jirst,

11^,

adv.

in

many

ways,

1.

bahuvrihi (a.
compounds,

Jawing much

rice)

189
as
100, I a
substantives, 189, 3 ; ending
suffixts a.
modifitd, 189, 4 d
;

VEDIC INDEX

488
ya, ka, in added

bhid,

to, 189, 4 h, c;

viixed strophe, p. 44G, 11

bal, ij. (J ash ! 181.

149, 1

bibibabliavant, pt. cracklhiy, ISl d.

bibhyat, pr. pt. of bhi, /car, 85 h.

rt. ao. ini.,

cs.,
cs.

red. ao.,
168, irr. 3.
red. ao.,
frighten
;

bhisaya,
149 a 3.
bhiik, ij. bang: 181.
bhuj, enjoij, rt. ao. inj., 148,

h a,

n. 3.

f.

a.

2.

bibhatsia, ds.a. loathing, 100. II

destroi/er, 77.

f.

bhi, f.fear, 100, I a.

bhi, fear, s ao., 144, 2
148, 3, pt., 148, 6

accentuation of, p. 455,10 c

barhata pragatha, m. a kind of

bhiije, dat. inf.,

budh, wake, ao., 141 it. ao. pt.,

red. ao., 149, 1 ; ps. ao.,
148, 6

to

enjoy,

3.

167 a

(p. 191).
bhurij, f. arm, 79, 3

1.55.

Brliadaranyaka
cented, p. 448,

ac-

Upanisad,

132

of,

2. s. ipv. rt. ao.

of bhu,

(par.);

7;

139,

pf.,

5; pt. 157; rt. ao.,

140,
148, 1 c (par.^, inj., 148, 3, pre,
148, 4 a, op.. 148, 4, ipv., 148, 5
red. ao., 149, 1, pt., 151 a
per. ft., 152.
bhu, f. earth, 100, II a II /; (par.i.
4.

3.

85 a
cpv.
103, 2 a; accentuation of,
;

h.

bhuv6, inf. to be, 167 a (p. 191\

bMi, he, as representing first class
of the aconj.. 125, 1
pr. system

1.

(pt.) a. great,

brbant,
of,

p. 444.

metre,
brhati,
p. 446, 11 A.
a

f.

p.'

4.59.

bodhi,

and budh,
f.

n.

wnlce,

148, 5

he

cp, 62,

bru, speal; pr. stem, 134

134 A 4 r a.

1 f

bhumdn, m. abundance, 90,

bhuman, n. cartli, 90. 2.

bhumi,

-Bha, sec. nom. suffix, 182, 2.

bhagavattara, cpv. more bounteous,
103,

143, 4;
1.54, 6 a.

bounteous, 86.
139, 1 ; s. ao. op.,
red. ao., 149, 1 ; cs.,
a.

pf.,

cthundantlij, 103, 1.

bharij, hreal; pr. stem, 134

ps., 154. 5.
pr. pt., 85

M,

bhadrapapas, N. pi. Dv. cd.,

good and the bad, 186 A 2.

the

confounded, 184 d.

bbala, pel. indeed, p. 452, 8 A/j.

bhavan, m. Your Honour, w.

195

s.,

bhavlyams,

f.

3.

c.

134

hind quarters, 77, 8

h.

sharing, 79, 3 a, f. n. 3.
bhamitd, den. pp. enraged, 160,
3, f. n. 2.
a.

bbas, n. light, 83, 1.

bhid, pierce, rt. ao., 148,
148, 3.

42,

1,

f.

n. 1

unchanged in internal Sandhi,

68 becomes n, 68.
ma-, prn. stem of first prs. in der.
and cds., 109 b.
sec.
-ma, pri. nom. sf., 182. 1
nom. sf., 182, 2 p. 454, 9 B r.
m&mhistha, spv. most liberal, 103, 2.
maghavan, a. bountiful, 91, 5.
mnghavant, a. bountiful, 91. 5,
;

li

cpv. more, 88.

bhas, chew, pr. stem,

134 BS 0.

before vowels, 41, somebefore

41 a

final_,

times dropped,
consonants, 42

bhartf, a. supporting, 101, 2 b.

bharbharabliavat, impf. became

-bhaj,

a.

bbaj, share,

bhasdd,

98

bhiiyas, cpv. adv. ace. more, 178. 2.

bhiiyams, cpv. more, 88 becoming
as final member
wore, 103. 2 a
of Bv., 189, 1 fc.
bhuyistha, spv. greatest, 103, 2 a.
bhuridavattara, cpv. a. giving more

1.

bhdgavant,

prs.

earth,

f.

2.

f.

n. 3.

m&tkrta, Tp. cd. dune by me, 109

mattas, adv. from me, 179, 2.

mad,
183

in.].,

he

mad-,
109

b.

6.

exhilarated,
pr. stem,
rt. ao. ipv., 148, 5.
prn. stem of 1st prs.,

VEDTC INDEX

md,dhu,

98

a. sweet,

madhyamd,
120

2.

a.

(par.),

middlemost,

spv.

c 1.

inst. adv. in the midst,

178, 3 h; 211, 3 h.
man, tJiink, pr. stem, 134 C 4 a
in-.
sao.. 143, 3
pf., 187, 2 /'
144, 3.

madhya^

-man, pri. nom. sf., 182, 1

stoms in, 00 p. 453, 9 Ae.

n. mi)id. 83, 2.

maniiv^t, adv.

manus, m.
-mant,

sec.

like

Mann, 179,

name,
nom. sf.,
a

83, 2

1.

e.

1S2, 2

stems

manth, sl/alce, pr. stem, 134 E 3.

mdntha, m. chnrmng stkl-, 97, 2 a.
manmasis, adv. each as he is
poss. prn. my. 116 a.
mamasatya, n. dispiite us to oicner-

mamaka,

c.
ship, synt. ed., 189
see. nom. suffix, 182, 2.
mariit, m. storm-god, 77, 1.

-maya,

having the Maruts

a.

raarutsakhi,

as friends, 99, 2 n.

adv.

martyatra,

a.

pel.

f. n. 2
180.
prohiljitive prn. pel. no
one, 180.
matdr, f. mother, 101, 2 (par.).
matara, f. du. mother and father,

one, never, 113,

180

a.

mortals,

int. cjdv.

he glori-

to

malmalabhavant,

pt.

glittering;

d.^

masmasa-kr,

184

crush,

-mas, vocatives

d.

in, 86.

ind.

pi.

ending, fre-

quency of, p. 125, f. n. 2.

masmasa-kr, crush, 184 d.
mah, a. great, 81.
mahdnt, a. greed, 85 a (par.)
accentuation

of, p.

mavant, prn. der. like me, 118

mils, m. month, 83, 1.
mas, n. flesh, 83, 1.
-mi, pri. nom. suffix, 182, 1
mitradha, adv.

459.

n. 1.

a friendh/

193, 2 a.

mitrasas, m.

Mitra, Variina,
Aryainaii, l93, 3 a.
adv.
mithas,
wronghj, 179, 3.
pi.

mithu, adv. wrongly, 179, 3 7.

-min, stems in, 87.
mih, shed watei; ft., 1.51 a
f.

pr. stem, 134

root ao. ipv., 148, 5.

inf.,

mist, 81.

-mi, pri. nom. suffix, 182, 1 b.

midhvams, a. bountiful, 157 b.
mimamsitd, pp. of des. of man,
think, 160,

.8,

milhustama,

f.

n. 2.

spv.

most

gracious,

b.

release, pr. stem, 133 C 1 ; s

ao. opt., 143, 4 ; rt. ao., 148, 1 a;

muc,

pre., 148, 4 d.
f. joy, 77, 3 a.

miid,

(p. 191).

wai/,

1.

103, 'i

p. 440 d.
greatness, 90, 2.
to
be glad,
167 a

ma, measu7-e,

c.

mitra, m. du. Mitra and Varuna,

mih,

mahapaiikti, a metre,

mahimdn, m.
mah6, inf.

in

f.

of mid. pt., 158.

167 (p. 191).

mah^s, a. great, 83, 2 a a.

maha, a. great. 97, 2 a for mahatiu Karmadharaj'as and Bahuvrihis, p. 275,

e.

sf.

mamaka, possessive prn., 116 a.

mampasyi, synt. cd., a plant,
189 B c.

186

fed,'l62,:].

1.

103, 1

179,

marmrjenya,

a.

matall, m. a name, 100, I b.

matftama, f. spv. most motherli/,

I>.

among

179, 3.

1.

p. 4.52, 8

not, 128 c;
w. inj., 215 2 a; never
w. ipv., 215 b a.
makis, prohibitive prn. pel. vo

180

-mana,

1.

minded, 179,

-masi,

r;

ma, prohibitive

matarisvan, m. a name, 90

in, 86.

184

109

makim,

man as,

ma, bellow, pr. stem, 134 3^

red. ao. inj., 149, 3.
3. ma, exchange, pr. stem, 133 B 1.
ma, f. measure, 97, 2.
ma, end. prs. prn. ace. s., me,

madintara, cpv. more qladdeniny,

103,

489

miir,

m.

destroyer, 82,

murdhdn, m.

f.

head, 90.

n.

(>.

VEDIC INDEX

490
1.

mr,
154

die, rt. ao. inj.,

d.

148, 3

'

ps..

mr, crush, i^r. stem, 134 E 4

mrc, injure, s ao. op., 143, 4.
mrc, f. injurII, 79, 1.
2.

mrj, wipe, pi\ stem, 134,

ao., 141 a.
mrd, f. clay, 11, 3 a.

mrdh,

sa

conflict, 11, 4.

f.

prn. dat. gen.

109 a p. 452, 8 A

aMm,

medha, m.

sacrifice,

accent

s.

of
in

(P; 368).

yada, adv. when, 179, 3

cj., 180
w. sb,, 215 (p. 359, 4)
as soon
216
4
w.
as,
op,,
(p. 366,
/3),
y^di, cj. if, irhen, 180; if, w. sb.,
215 (p. 8.59, 5) if, w. op., 216
;

of, p. 450,' 3.

in ps. ao., 155

d.

in

irr., 4.

168;

364\
yaddevatya,
(p.

182, 2.

sf.,

yams6nya,

ao. gdv.

to

he guided,

yakd,
prn. loho, 114 & 117 .
ydkrt, n. liver, 77, 1.
yaj, sacrifice, pr. stem, 135, 4
pf.,
s ao.,
137, 2c; sa ao., 141
root ao., 148, 5 pt. ft.,
144, 5
rel.

2.

pf.

89

sacrifice,

act.

pt.

of

yaj,

a.

&.

stem, 133 A 2,
pi',
pf, 137, 2 a; 139, 2;

stretch,

135, 4;

165

gd.,

s ao., 144, 5; root ao.

w.

adv. ivhen,
4 7).

yarhi,

216

op.,

(p. 366,

ydvistha, spv. youngest, 103, 2

yasas, n. glorn, 83, 2 a.
ya, low grade of, 4 a.
ya, cjo, sis aorist, 146.
how
-ya, gd. sf., 164

a.

added,

-yams, cpv.

sf.,

103, 2 a

stems

in, 88.

yajistha, spv. sacrificing best, 103, 2.

cpv, sacrificing better,

yajiyams,
2.

yad, adv. as far as, 178, 5

cj.,
so long as, w. sb., 215
180
in so far as, lirst
fp. 359, 6)
member of synt. cd., 189 B a.
ichat
Z/Ae,114 a; 117.
yadrs, prn. cd.
yadrsa, ])vn. cd. what like, 117,
;

yajnani,
100, I

a.

leading

the

sacrifice,

a.

yajnapriya,

a. sacrifice-loving, 100,

Irt.

f.'n. 4.

stretch, pf., 137, 2 a.

yatama,prn. a. trho{ofmany').

yat,

120

yavat,
111 h;

a.

yatar^, prn.

120
yiti,

deity,

expressing quant itv,

sf.

164, 1.

yajivams,

103,

having what

ipv., 148, 5.

162, 3.

151 6

yam,

a.

rt.

-yant, prn.

118

ya, rel. prn. who, 114 (par.).

-ya, gdv. sf , 162
209, 1 gd, sf.,
210; den. sf., 175; sec. nom.
;

114
OS.,

re.

of,

-mna, sec. nora. suffix, 182, 2.

myaks, he situated, rt. ao., 148, 1

Y, interposed

medh^s, n. wisdom, 83, 2 a a.

Maitrayani Samhita, accentuation

3.

p. 454, 10.

^nc\.

cds.

mrs, touch, sa ao,, 141 a.

mrs, neglect, rt. ao. inj., 148,
mrsmrsa-kr, crush, 184 d.

me,

a.

y^tkama, a. desiring lohaf, 114 a,

yatkarin, a. doing tohat, 114 a.
215
y&tra, adv., synt. use, 180
w, op., 216 (p. 366).
(p. 358)
ydtha, adv. as, 114 a
179, 1
loses accent, p. 453. 8 B a cj.
in order that, 180
216 (p. 365)
as, so that, 215 (p. 358).
yad, prn. what, 114
when, so that,
w. sb., 215 (p. 357)
when,
ivhen, if, 180
178, 2 o
if, w,
op., 216 Cp. 363 7 1
p. 365 e)
in order that, 216 (p. 364 a) ; that,
w. op., p. 364 /3 w. cond. 218

a,

who

{of tiro),

117

a.

nm.

cj.

as long

as,

180.

yavant, prn. der. as great, 118 c.

1. yu, unite, pr. stem, 134, 1 a.
134 B 3 a.
2. yu, separate, 133 A 2
-yu, pri. nom. sf., 182, 1 h stems
in, 98 a.
;

der. as many, 118

VEDIC INDEX
yajtjoin, pr, system, 132 (pp. 1367); root ao. ipv., 148, 5; ft.,

151

148, 5

ds. pr. pt., 85.

prn. yon

pi's.

yuvatf,

young, 95

f.

yuvan, m.

randh, make subject, a ao., 147 b.

rabh, grasp, jif., 137, 2 o.
more
violent,
rdbhiyams, cpv.

77, 4.

f. figJit,

yuva-,

b.

c.

90 a

youth,

109

firo,

91, 4

95 c; cpv. of, 103,

accentuation of, p. 458, c
yuvdm, prn. 7je tn-o, 109.

103, 2

f.

2 a;

of,

ram,

118

of a cd.), 109

b.

109 /;.
poss, prn. your, 116 b.
yusmakam, prn. (G. pi.) of you,

116

you, 118

yodhana,

pr.

pt.

of

yudh,

/3

ipv., 143, 5
raj,

to

m.

rich,

a.

ao. op., 143, 4,

root ao. ipv., 148, 5.
s

king, 79, 3 .
king, 90.

night, as final

f.

186

cds.,

f.

(p. 269),
f.

(p. 279),

fight,

5 b
134

raj an, m.

6.

158 a.
yosan, f. woman, 90.
yos, n. u-elfare, 83, 1.

verij

2.

stem,

pr.

give,

ratri,

a.

rt.

c.

yiiyam, prs. prn. ye, 109.

yeyajamahfi, synt. cd., 189

spv.

in root

rarivams, red. pf. pt. of ra, 89 a.

134

h.

der. belonging

103, 1

ra,

yusmaka,

yusmavant, prn.

rasmdn, m. rein, 90,

ra, low grade of, 4 a

der. desiring you,

yusmayant, prn.

red. ao. sb., 149, 2,

sis. ao., 146.

mid. ending in ppf.,

rayintama,

member

yoic (as first

140 b (p. 158, f. n. 1)

ao., 148, 1 ; 148, 1 h.

c.

yusma-, prn.

'a.

rejoice,

inj., 149,
-ram, 3. pi.

1.

yuvayu, a. desiring you two, 109 h.

yuvavant, prn. der. devoted to you
tico,

best
charioteer,
spv.
103, 1.
accentuation
T&n, m. joy, 77, 5
of, p. 458, c 1.
-ran, 3. pi. ending in ppf., 140, 6
in root ao., 148, 1
148, 1 h.

rathitama,

m. companion, 79, 3 a.
yudh, fight, root ao. ipv.,
yiij,

yudh,

491

member

of

n.2; 189

n. 3.

144, 2; red.
red. ao. inj.,

succeed, s ao.,

radh,
ao.

2;

149,

sb.,

149, 3.

G.

rastranam,

pi.,

65

(p.

48),

f.'n. 1.

R, original final, 46, f. n. 1

two r
49 d
before r, 47
sounds in same syllable avoided,
;

r insei'ted in conj.,
39, f. n. 4
134, 1 c stems in, 82.
ra, low grade of, 4 a (p. 4).
-ra, pri. nom. sf., 182, lb; sec.
;

nom.

182,

sf.,

best hestower oj

treasure, 103, 1.

r^thaspdti, m. lord of

(p^273,
rathi,
(p.

m.

86

f.
f.

n.

the car.

187

charioteer,

100,

b.

inj., 148,
f.

rip,

b.

root ao.
144, 5
red. pf. pt., 157 b a.

ric, leave, s ao.,

deceit, 78, 1.

ris, hurt, red. ao. op., 149, 4.

ris, f. injury, 80.

ru,

pr.

cry,

85
stem, 134

a. iveak,

a.

vP-

142,

n. 1).

f.

-ru, pri.

nom.

sf., 182, 1

b.

-ruk, N. of -ruh, a. mounting, 81

rue, shine, red. pf. pt., 157 b a.
rue, f. lustre, 79, 1.
ruj, break, root ao. inj., 148, 3.
3 a.
rud, weep, pr. stem, 134

rudh,

.3).

87, par.).

m. ruler, 100, I
nom. sf., 182,

-ri, pri.

rihdnt, (pt.

2.

raksds, m. demon, 83, 2 a.

raghudru, cd. a. running swiftly,
98 d. _
inst.
adv.
rapidly,
raghuya,
178, 3 a.

ratnadhatama, spv.

rastrl,

rup,

f.

obstruct, s ao.,

144,

5.

earth, 78, 1.

riisant, (pt.) a. brilliant, 85 a.

a.

VEDIC INDEX

492
ruh, ascend, sa
irr. 2,

ruh, f

n.

f.

141

ao.,

IfiS

1.

sprout, 81
ace. adv. Inform, 178, 2.
.

rup&m,

mid. ending, pr.,

134 C 4 7 pf., 136 a, f. n. 1.
r, ni. i.icealth, 102 102, 1 (par.).
3.

-re,

pi.

-La, sec. nom. suffix, 182, 2.

laksrai, f. mark, 100, I a (p. 88).
cpv. lightw, 103, 2

Mghiyams,

ISghu, a. light, cpv. of, 103, 2

labh, take, pf., 137, 2 a.
lip, smear, pr. stem, 133 C 1.
lup, hreak, pr, stem, 133 C 1.

Va, low grade of, 4

-va, pri. nom. sf.,
179,

sf.,

182,

adA^.

85

sacrificer,

h.
;

vanij, m. trader, 79, 3 h.

stems
-vat, sec. nom. sf., 182, 2
in, 77, 1 ; adv. sf., like, 179, 1
advs. in, 197 A 5
7 fp. 301).
;

ft

pf.

s
135. 4 ; pf., 137, 2 b
139, 2
ao. op., 143, 4 ; s ao., 144, 3
sis ao., 146 root ao. ipv., 148, 5
;

(p. 59,
sf.,

in, 90, 1. 2;
f. n.
2) ; 95 c

182, 2

vanad,

f.

182, 1 h

fem.
;

V. in, 94.

sec.

longing, 77, 3 '*.

a. sittinc/ in the

90

nom.

86

nom.
pf.

sf.,

pt.

182, 2
act.

stems
161

in,

205, 1 a.

vap,

stren; pr.

137, 2

stem, 134

139,

151

a.

c.

pf,

2;

cs.

/)

ft.,

vas, s/ime, pr. stem, 133 C 2

s ao., 144, 1
s ao., 144, 5 ; root
ao., 148, 1 d.
vas, m. (?) abode, 83, 1.
vas, encl. prs. prn. A.D.G. pi. you,
\m a; p. 452, 8 a.
89 90, 3 ; 94, 3,
-vas, V. in, 86
3.

f.

n. 3.

103, 2

103, 2 a.
98 a; spv. of,

best,

irealth,
a.

vasuvfin, a. bestowing
vdstos, gen. adv. in
202 D 3 a.
178, 6

best,

icealth, 90, 3.

the moryiing,

belter, 103, 2 a.
vah, can J/, pr. stem, 135, 4 pf.
137, 2 c; s ao,, 144, 2; 144, 5:

vasyams, c^w.

ps.

sli.,

vahat,
;

Z>.

n. 5.

135,

root ao. ipv., 148, 5

icood,

d.

-vant, sec.
in,

of,

n. 4.

f.

vanarsfid,

49

I).

a.

vasu, n.

sf.,

h, f.

H-ear, pr.

vas,

vasistha, spv.

1.

nom.

157

pt..
2.

171 (p. 200), par.

vHn, n.("?) irood, 77, 5 accent, p. 458

nouns

n. height, 103, 2

ds.,

pri.

vrj,

&.

-van,

a.

of

act.

pt.

1.

van, vin, pr. stem, 134 C 4 a

('

pf.

2a

2 rt.
vas, desire, pr. stem. 134
1
vas, dn-ell, pf. 137,2 c; s ao.,
144, 1; s ao., 144, 2; red. pf.

crookedly, ps., 154, 5.

137, 2 c; ps., 154, 6.

vadhar, n. n-eapon, 101,

7rish,

varsistha, spv. highest, 103, 2

higher, 103, 2

vad, speak, pr. stem, 135, 4;

a.

varsiyams, cpv.

vane, wove

a.

excellent, 103,

variyarns, cpv. wider, 103, 2

varjivams,
tn-ist, 157

varsman,

sxieak,

width, 90, 2.

varistha, spv. most

n-i'd'est, 103, 2 a.

pr. stem, 135, 4

pf.,
137, 2 c; 138, 8; red. ao. irr.,
149 a 2, op., 149, 4, ipv., 149, 5
ps., 154, 6
ps. ao., 155.

vac,

vdyas, n. vigour, 83, 2 0. a.

vdra, a. choice, spv. of, 103, 2
v^raya, dat. adv. according to

variman, m.

a.
a.

1.

vaght, m.

vam, vomit, pr. stem, 134

-vam, adv. suffix, 179, 1.
vayam, prs. prn. ice, 109.

178, 4.

a.
1 h

cpv. more ironderfid,

103, 'l.
vapus, n. heauty, 83, 2 c.

vdpustara,

f.

154

p.s.,

ps. ao.,

stream, 85

154, 6;

155 a

1.

b.

va, low grade of, 5 6 a.

va, weave, pr. stem, 133 B 1.
va, encl. cj. or, 180 p. 452, 8 A b.
-vams, sf. of red. pf. pt., 157 ;
;

stem, 135, 4

pf.,

pf. pt. in,

89

(par.).

VEDIC INDEX
va3, f. spvcc/i, 79, 1.
-vace, inf. to apeak, 167 a (p. 191).
Vajasaneyi Sarahita, how acuented, p. 449.
-vat, N. sing, of -vah, canyiny,

si

a.

vatikrta, u. a disease, 184 d a.

vam, prs. prn. du. ice hvo, 109
a.
p. 452, S
vara, end. prs. prn., A. D. G. du.,
;

109

ijuu Ifco,

v5,r,

m.

var, n.

a.
f.

protector, 82,

82,

axitcr,

a.

varkary^,
vavd, pel.

n. 0,

n. 7.

f.

producing water, 49

d.

180.

certainlij,

vas, bellow, red. ao., 149, 1.

vi, ni. bird, 99, 3; accent, p. 458,
cl.

vimsati,

nm.

tiventy,

104

106

rf

(par.).

15 < b a.
sift, red. pf. pt.,
3.
vij, tremble, root ao. inj., 148,
vjj, f. (?) stake, 79, 3 a.

a ao., 147,
4 c a
134
a ao. op., 147, 4 (par.).
vid, f. knowledge, 77, 3 a.
;

vidana, and vidana,

of vid, find, 158 a.
vidustara, cpv.

vidvams,

vidhartf,
-vidhe, inf.
vin, sec.

nom.

1
)

sf.,

167 a
182, 2

mid.

b.

stems

vina, prp. without, w. ace, 197

(p. 303).
f.

rod,

78, 1

cl.
vipas, f. a river, 63
viprus, f. dro2J, 80.

vibhavas,
vibhii,

a.

vibhvan,

vistdp, f. summit, 78, 1.

visvaiic, a. all-pervading, 93 a.
14 ;
visarjaniya, m. spirant. 'S g
15; 27; 31; 32; 37; 43; 43,3,
;

76
49 c
48
44
n. 4
sandhi of final, 43 44 sometimes becomes s before gutturals
and labials, 43, 2 a
dropped,
48
45, 2 a
43, 3a; 45, 1
44
46.
to
r,
changed
vispds, m. spy, 79, 4.
VI, m. receiver, 100, I a.
vir^, m. hero, accent of, in comf.

accent, p. 458,
b,

f.

n. 2

i:)ounds, p. 454, 10.

1.

vr,

cover,

stem, 134

pr.

79, 4.

v. radiant, 90, 3.

eminent, 100, II b.
a. far-reaching, 90, 1 a.

viraj, f. stanza of three verses,

p. 441, 5 a.
vivisivams, red. pf. pt. of vis,
enter, 89 a ; 157 a.

1 d,

148,

inj.,

3,

6 ; red. ao.,
ipv., 148, 5, pt., 148,
149, 1 ; cs. ft., 151 a a.
2. vr, choose, root ao. inj., 148, 3.
'ticist,

sa ao., 141 a; root ao.,

'148, 1 d, op., 148, 4.

vrt, t^lrn, ft., 151 a ; red. pf. pt.,
"157.
vrt,

f.

host, 77, 1.

vrtratara,

in, 87.

vip,

visva, prn. a. all, 120 b (par.)

accent in cds., p. 454, lO.
visvatra, adv. ecery where, 179, 3.
visvatha, adv. in every way, 179, 1.
visvadanim, adv. always, 179, 3 ti.
visv^dha, adv. in every way, 179, 1.
visvaha, adv. always, 179, 1.

vrj,

b.

(p. 191).
;

of vis,

pt.

pf.

visevise, itv. cd. in ecerg house,

189 C a.
vispdti, m. lord of the house, 49 a.

wiser, 103, 1 b.

to pierce,

visivams, unred.
enter, 157 b.

root ao., 148,

pf. pt. knowing, 157

a. meting out, 101, 2

79, 4

1 (par.

pr. pt.

n. 2

t.

b,

stem, 133

63

settlement,

vitaram, adv. more toidely, 178, 2.

1. vid, Anoa', unred. pf., 139, 3
ao. ps., 155.
vid, find, pr.

f.

(par.).

vie,

2.

vis,

493

vrtrahan,

cjjv. a worse Vrtra, 103,

a. Vrtra-slaying, 92.

1.

vrddha, pp. grown up, cpv. of,

'103,2 b.
vf ddhi, f. strong grade of vowels,

5aa; 17; 17a; 19 6; 22;

in pr.
128 b
23 (for Guna)
stem, 134, 1 a (irr.) in pf. stem,
in
in s ao., 143, 1
136, 2. 3
in ao. ps., 155
is ao., 145, 1
iA gdv., 162, lb; 168, 1 c.

"oa;

vrdh, grow, red. ao., 149, 1.

vrdli, f. prosperity, 11, 4 ; a. strengthening, 11, 4.

VEDIC INDEX

494

vrsanasva, Bv. cd. haviny slalUons

as steeds, 52 .
vrsan, in. bull, 90.

vrsantama,

most

spv.

sayutra, adv. on a couch, 179,

sarad, f. autumn, 77, 3 b.
sal,

1 .

'ios,

vedi,

f.

f. 1).

98

loe. of,

altar,

(p.

81\

lie,

frequent,

B 1.
133 B

most

being

1 h.

mighty, 103,
vris, f. finger, 79, 4.

5.

147 a

I'oot ao.

85

siras, n. Iiead, 90, 1 a.

sista, pp. of sas, order. 160, 2 b.
siksanara, a. helping men, 189 A 2 i*.
134 A 4 c a
si, lie, pr. stem, 134, 1

(f.

n. ri.

1.
;^

n. 6.

90.

Satapatha Brahmana, accentuap. 451, 5.

siici, a. bright,

sataidpS, adv. by hundreds, 179, 1.

satruha, a. slaying enemies, 97, 3.

sam, n. happiness, 78, 3.

s^yana, i^r. pt. mid. of
158 a.

98

(par.).

shine,

b.

b a.

fc

red. ao., 149, 1.

srath, slacken, red. ao. ipv., 195, 5.

compounded with

srad, heart,
verbs, 184

b.

inf.

to

f.

167, 1,

trust,

(p. 191).

sram,
sri,

be iceary, pr, stem,

root ao, inj.,

resort,

red. ao., 149, 1

sri,

f.

168

c,

ps.

3.

148, 3

155

ao.,

f.

jir.

root
stem, 134 C 3
5 ps. ao., 155.

ao. ipv,, 148,

srut,

133

n. 2

n. 1 (p. 196).
glory, 100, I a.

sru, hear,
lie,

f.

scandr^, a. bright, 50 a.
snath, pierce, pr. stem, 131

cs.,

si,

183

splendour, 78, 2.
sii, swell, red. pf. pt., 157
socis, n. glow, 83, 2 b.

subh,

sraddhe,

106 d
sat&m, nm. hundred, 104
concord of, 194 B 1 ?*.
Vimr.)

sdnais, adv. slowly, 178, 3

sap, curse, pi., 137, 2 a.

157

pr. stem,
root ao. pt., 148, 6.

might, 100, I b.
sat&kratu, a. having a hundred
powers, 98 (p. 82), f. n. 6.
satatauia, ord. hundredth, 107.
sitadavan, a. giving a hundredfold,

a.

subh,

f.

4 a; a

sas, m. ruler, 83, 1.

sasat, i:>r. pt, instructing,

156

1.

a metre, p. 440 d

tion of, p. 448,

134

sas, order, pr. stem,

ao.,

red. ao. inj., 149, 3.

siic, f flame, 79, 1

suffix, 182, 2.

sakrt, n. excrement, 77,

f.

stem, 134

praise, ps., 154,

be able, ])t., 137, 2
jpv., 148, 5.

p. 441,

pr.

a.

sirsan, n. head, 90, 1.

sue, shine, red. pf. pt.,

sak,

f.

c-

sams,

sakvarij

pf., 139,

S, stems in, 79, 4.

nom.

179, 1.
sa, sharpen,

134

troop, 97, 2.

spv.

spv.

coitslant,

1.

179,

1
vya, envelope, pr. stem,
a ao., 147 a 1.
vyatta, opened, pp. of vi-a-da,
160, 2 6.
vrasc, cut, pr. stem, 133 C 2.
-vraska, a. cutting, 133 C 2, f. n. 2.

vrSdhantama,

most

sasvant, a. constant, 103, 2 a.

-sas, adv. sf. w. distributive sense,

vya^dh, 2nerce, pr. stem, 133

si,

1.

103,

135, 4.

saci,

more

sasvadha, adv. again and again,

volhave, dat. inf. io carry, 167, 1 i> 4.

vyac, extend, pr. stem, 134 B 2

-sa, sec.

mid. of

cpv.

sasvattama,

n. 2.

f.

pf. pt.

103, 2 a.

6.

vedhas, m. ordainer, 83, 2 a a.

veh^t, f. barren coic, 85 6.
vd.i, emphasizing pel. indeed, 180.
vaitaliya, n. a metre, p. 436, f.

vra,

181.

ij. claj} !

sasayan^,
159 a.
sasiyams,

manly,

3.

a.

hearing,

77, 1.

VEDIC INDEX
srenisas, adv. in rous, 179, 1.
sreyams, cpv. hetfcr, 103, 2 a.
srdstha, sjiv. best, 103, 2 a lb9, 1 b.
sresthatania, double i5])v., 103, 1 c.
sloka, m. ;i metre, p. 439, 3 b a.
sv^n. 111. duij, 90 a 91, 3 accen;

tiiatioii

svasru,
f.

f.

(if,

J).

458,

c 1.

mother- in-lair, 100, II

h, a,

a.

svit, he bright, s ao.. 144, S.

S, stems ill, SO.
sdt, iim. six, 65 c,
sas, iim. six, 104 ;

nm.

2 (p. 43).

lOG a

104

sixteen,

106

six wai/s,

108

b.

changed to t, 83, la; 89

171, 6 (ds.); 144. 1 (s ao.) loss
of, 133 B 1, 144, 2 a, in s ao.,

between

6,

consonants,

of N. in cds., 189, 1 6:
adv. sf., 179, 1 ; ao., 142; 143;
stems in, 83.

Ig:

dem. prn., 110

48

Sandhi

of,

pleonastic formulaic use

of,

sf.

169,

of

1.2;

141 o ; of ds.,
ao.,
pri. noin. sf., 182, 1 b.

saka, dem. prn., that little, 117

sakft, nm. adv. once, 108

a.

gen., 202

w.

3.

f,

a.

134B3/3; 134 B3;

2b;

ao.

ijDV,,

pri^,

samnam,

&
f.

157

a.

sap,

favour, 78, 3.

pf.,
inj., 149, 3.

137, 2 a

to

103, 2 a.
red. ao.
be adored,

162, 3.

nm. seven, 104

nm. seventtj,

106

c (par.),

104.
saptath^, ord. seventh, 107.

saptati,

saptadasa, nm. seventeen, 104

106 c.
saptadha, adv. in seven ivays, 108 h.

saptamd, ord. seventh, 107.

sama, indef. prn. any, 119 a
p. 452, 8

A a.

samaha, adv.
179, 1

samudri,

saca; prp. with, w. loc, 177, 5.

88

older,

sapar^nya, den, gdv.

pf.

i^t.,

togetltcr,

)3.

serve,

root

abl.,

85,

be,

ace. adv. closer

samtaram,
197

w,

far from,

177, 3.
s^nt, pr. pt. of as,

148, 5

sauutar,

s ao. op., 143,

red,

4 a

sanitur, prp. ajmrt from, w. ace,

197 B c.
177, 1

samand,,

sand.j, a. old, 79, 8 I.

sanat, abl. adv.//oj of old, 178, 5.
-sani, loc. inf. in, 211, 4,

137,2a;

pf.,

134

stem,

pr,

gain,

93

converging,

n, 1,

red, pf. pt., 157.

-san, loc. inf. of stems in, 167,
4 c.
sana, a. old, cpv. of, 103, 2 .

saptd,

sakthi, n, thigh, 99, 4.

sdksant, s ao. act. pt. of sah,
156 a.
overcome, 85
sakha foi- sd.klii, in cds., 188, 2
,p. 275), f. n. 2; 189, 4 rf.
sakhi, m. frie^id, 99, 2 in Bahuvrihis
and Karmadliarayas,
in governing
188, 4 d, f. 11. 1
2 (p. 280), f. n. 3.
cds., 189
3 a ;
sac, folloiv, i3i\ stem, 133
137,

147, 5; red. ao., 149,

ahcags, 179, 3.
s^da, adv. alicays, 179, 3.
sadivas, adv. to-daij, 179, 3.
sadyds, adv. to-day, 179, 3,
sadha-, adv. together, 179, 1 (p. 212).

sdnyams, cpv.

180.
sa,

1.

san,

(par.).

I.

sodha, nm. adv. in

sa,

(p. 74),

s/x/j/,

sodasa, nm.

144,
148,

c.
satobrhati, f.
satydrm, adv. tralg, 178, 2.
satra, adv. in one place, 179, 3.
3 pf.,
sad, sit, pr. stem, 133
a ao. ipv.,
137, 2 a, f. n. 2

sadhryaiic,
f. 11.

104.
.sastha, ord. sixth, 107,

S,

stem, 133 A 4.
a metre, )). 444, 3

sddam, adv.

svas, bloic, pr. stem, 134 A 3

svds, adv. to-morroic, 179, 3.

(par.

2 a a.

a. united, 88,

sajosas,

saiij, hang, pr.

n. 1.

sasti,

495

f.

(par.);

in some ivuy or other,

8
&.
120 c 2 (p. 117).
oceanic, 100, I a (p. 86),

p. 452,

a. similar,
f.

n. 1.

samprasarana, m.
17a,

f.

n.2; 69

5b

distraction,

c, f.

n. 2

89

91,

VEDIC INDEX

4D(J

p. 450,

samraj, in. sovereign

sar^h, f. (?) bee, 81.
f.

sarit,

stream, 77,

w. ace,

49

ruler,

-si,

a.

b.

1.

f.

85

b.

pr. pt., 85.

su, su, adv.

p. 455, 10

156

s ao. pt. act.,

b.

overcome,

151

ipv.,

140, 3a; s. ao.,

144,3; op., 143, 4; ipv.,143, 5;
150 a ; ft.,
pt., 143, 6
jjf. i^rc,

sah,

cadiiig

sidant, \)v. pt. of sad, sit, 85.

sim, end. prn. pel., 180 i>. 452,
8 A. a.
su, impel, pr. stem, 134. 1 a (p. 142).
su, press, root ao. part., 148, 6

b,

a. 5,

sascdrt, in. pursuer,

b.

iad.

m. weaver, 110, I
sis aorist, 142 ; 146.

77, 1.

sascat, pr. pt. of sac, follow, 85

157
s.

siri,

completely,

offerituj

2.

e a.

pt. act., 2^re-

jif.

215 h 0.
simhi, f. lioness, 100, I a (p. 88).
sic, sprinkle, pr. stem, 133 C 1.
sic, f. hem of a garmeid, 79, 1.
sima, dem. pra., 100, 3 a.

sarva, prii. a. ivhole, 120 b (par.).

sarvada, adv. always, 179, 3.

sarvahut,

475

inoniing, accoatiuitioa, p.

sahvams, uared.
vailing,

93 a

luiitcd,

of,

4.

sayfim, adv. in the evening, 178, 2.

sayampratar, adv. evening and

iiT., 5.

sainyd.Sc, a.
197.

acceatuatioa

Samaveda,

5 'M, 2 "JD, 5, f. a. 1
pr.
stem, 133 B 1 133 C 2, f. n. 1
134 B 2
134 E 2
13i A 2
135,4; 137, 2a, f. n. 1; 137,2c;
139,2; 154,6; 1(50,2; 160, 3;
inf., 167, 1, f. n. 3; cs., 16S,

3. i.

a.

180

welt,

ia Bv, cds.,

c a.

a. victorious,
s&h, in. conqueror, 81
81 a (par.),
sahd, prp. ?ti7/t, w. inst., 177, 2

sudas, a. liberal, 83,

sudhi, a. wise, 100, 1 a, f. a.
supu, a. clarifying well, 98 d.

adv 179, 1.
sahaatama, spv. most

sumdd, prp. ivith, w. inst., 177, 2.

sumedhas, a. intelligent, 83, 2 a a.

1.

victorious,

103, 1 b.
sdihasa, inst. a.dv. forciblij, 178, 3.
106 d
sahisra, n. thousand, 104
;

concord of, 194 B 1 6.

Qjar.)
sahasratamfi, ord. thousandth, 107
;

(p. 102),

f.

a. 2.

sahasradha, am. adv.

rays, 108 b,

in a thousand

179,

adv.

by

thousands,

1.

sahyams, cpv.

stronger, 103, 2 a.

sa, biiut, root ao. ipv.

sakam, prp.

with,

148,

a.

5.

su, bring forth, pf., 139, 7

151 c ps. iaj., 154 b.
su, m. begetter, 100, II a.
sud, put in order, red. ao.

(p.

ipv.,

ft., 151 a.
sv,Jtow, a ao., 147 c
srj, emit, s aorist, 144, 4. 5.
sobhari, m. a aaaie, 100, I b.
skand, leap, root ao. 148, 1 d.
;

sku,

54\

(p. 142),

stem,

pr.

tear,

f.

n.

3.

straightest, 103,

a.

sadhu, a. straight, spv. of, 103, 2 a.

adv.
inst.
straight,
sadhuya,
178, 3 b.
sanu, m. a. summit, 98 (p. 81),
f. n. 13
98 a.

stambh,

1.

stem, 134

pirop, pr.

red. pf. pt., 157.

stdr, m. star, 82, f. a. 5
stavanfi, pr. pt. mid.

praise,

158

134,

Stan, thunder, pr. stem, 134

1.

succeed, red. ao. sb., 149, 2

inj., 149, 3.

it.,

inst., 177, 2.
visibly, 178, 5.

sadh,

sadhistha, spv.

a.

skambh, make firm, 134 E

w.

saksat, abl. adv.

-sac, a. accompanying, 79
f.

surabhintara, cpv., 103, 1 a.

suradhas, a. bountiful, 83, 2 a
suvastu, f. a river, 98 a.

195, 5.

saliasrasas,

4.

82

3.

b.

6.

of

stu,

a.

lea;

stu, praise, pr. stem, 134,

s ao., 143, 1. 2 (par.)
pf., 138, 5
ft. pt., 151 b 2
ps. ao., 155.
;

VEDIC INDEX
stubh,

f.

praise, 78, 2.

accentuation

str, star,

of,

p. 458,

svad,
svan,
svap,

s ao.

pf.,

c 1.
1

svayam,

(p. 88).

pr.

pt., 85.

sp&s, m. spy, 63 6, f. n. 2 79,

spr, (rin, root ao., 148, 1 d.
-sprk, N. of -sprs, tuuching, 81
;

.sprs,

f.

eucl.

sma,

2;

emphasizing
pr.

pel.,

212

Sivid,

180
2 &

Sandhi

of,

48.

-sya,

suffix, 151.

ft.

-syade, inf. tojiow, 167 a

syand,

flow,

red. ao., 149,

;
thread, 100, II a.

f.

Hvams, fall, a
149,

147

ao.,

(p. 191).

135, 4

pf.,

144, 5

syu,

ao.,

1.

'

sridh,
srue, f.

spv.

of,

pel.,

180

&.

treated like aspirate cerebral,

69 c like dh, 69 d; reverts to
;

81.

ha, end. emphasizing pel., 180;

w. piira and pr.,
p. 452, S
212 A 2 ba.

Kb

-ha, a. slaying, 97, 3.

-ha, adv. suffix, 179,

1 p.

han, slay, pr. stem, 134, lea;

134 B 3 ;3
134 A 2 c
pf.,
;

137, 2 6 ; 139, 4
156 a gd., 165 a.

pr.

pt. act.,

-han, a. slaying, 77, 5 92.

hanta, ij. come! 180; 181.
hay6, ij. coj)(e 181.

ladle, 79,
stream, 100, II .

prn. own, 115

c 2.

.'

havismant,

a.

offering

an

oblation,

86.'

1.

116 c; 120
i8ia

and

f./oc, 77, 4.

sv6., po.ss.

cpv.

guttural, 92 (p. 72) f.n. 1, in pr.

2 c, 1.58 a stems in,
stem, 134

red. ao.,

1.

garland, 79, 3 a.
sravat, f. stream, 85 b.
2.
s. s ao. of srj, emit, 141, 2.
sras,

f.

light,

j8.

end. emphasizing

srd.j, f.

srii,

sma, prn. element, 110.

sradd, prp. icith, with inst., 177, 2.
smr, remember, ps., 154, 4, f. n. 1.
that,

as

brilliant

;i.

red. ao.

8Ab.

sya, dem. prn.

d.

a. sweet,

103, 2

inj., 149, 3.

w. pura and
p. 452,

svadu,

4.

a.

svarpati, m. lord of heaven, 49 d.

svaria, a. winning light, 49 d,
svarsati, f. acquisition of light, 49 d.
svasocis, a. setf-radiant, 83, 2 b.
svasr, f. sister, 101, 1.
svadistha, sjjv. sweetest, 103, 2 P.
svadiyams, cpv. sweeter, 103, 2 /3.

p. 452,

touch, sa ao., 141 a

sb., 149,

svarcaksas,
49 d.

77, 4.

battle,

115 ca,
;

-snu, pri. nom. sf., 182, 1 b.

see, pr. stem, 133 B 1

a,

svarita, m. (encWiic) falling accent,

6
how
1
p. 448,
p. 451,
marked, p. 449, 2 ; p. 450, 3. 4.

b.

spas,

115

82
tight, 82, f. n. 7
accentuation of, p. 458, c 1.
svarabhakti, f. vowel element, 15

sthapaya, cs. of stha, stand: red.

ao 149 a 3.
sthira, a firm, cpv. of, 103, 2 b.
sth6yams, cpv, most steadjasf,
103, 2 a.
snu, summit, accent, p. 458, c 1.
snu, rfis<i7, pr. stem, 134, 1 a
(p. 142), f. n. 1.

svar,
svar, n,

pt., 148, 6 ; red. pf. pt., 157.

stha, a. standing, 97, 2.

101, 2

ref. i)rn.

self-yoked,
sound, s ao. , 144, 5.

sprdh,

a;

pt.,

pf.

svdyukta, Tp. cd.

a. stationary,

A3

stem, 134

pr.

sleep,

135, 4; 1.37. 2 c;
157 red. ao., 149, 1.

stha, stand, pr. stem, 133 A 8 a

I'oot
134 B 3 /3 a ao., 147 a 1
ao., 148, 1 a (par.), op., 148, 4,

sthatf,

red. ao. inj., 149, 3.

sounding, 11, 5.

SH-eeten,
a.

Ih B

iroman, 100,

f.

stri,

n.

f.

str, slrew, ps., 154, 3,

op., 143, 4.

497

6, c

(par.)

has, laugh, pr. .stem, 134 B 3.

hasta, m. hand, compounded w.
gd., 184 c.
hastin, a. having hands, 87 (par.).

Kk

VEDIC INDEX

498

ha, go away, pr. stem, 134

sao.,144,2. 5; 146.
accents verb.
hi, cj. for, 180
;

19 B.
-hi, ending of
134 C 4 5.
p. 467,

hims,
hiri,

injure, pr.

ij.

184

2.

s.

ipv.

act,,

stem, 134

compounded with

1.

rf.

hinv, impel, pi: stem, 133

134 C 4 ^.

him, n. cold, 78, 3.

hlranyavasimattama,

a.

wielder of the golden axe, 103, 1.

hiruk, ij. cnvay ! 181.
hid, he angry, red. no., 149, 1.

hu,

sacrifice, pr.

huruk,

ij.

stem, 134

aivay, 181.

1516

ps.,

(,P'i'.).

hr, take, s ao., 144, 5.

hrttas, adv. //-om the heart, 179, 2.
hfd, n. heart, 77, 3 o.
181.
hai, V]. ho

hyas, adv. yesterday, 179, 3.

hvar, he crooked, pr. stem, 134
s ao., 144,

best

spv.

148,3;

inj.,

ipv.,

'.

kr, do,

hitd, pp. of dha, put, 160, 2

hu, ccdl, rt. ao.

154 a (par.),
impf., 154 c.

n.

hva, ccdl, pr. .stem, 133

147 a 1.

L = d,

15; 2

(p. 3),

f.

n.

a ao.,

11

rt

d; 15, 2i.

Lh = dh, 3
15,

red. ao. inj., 149,3.

&
;

7 (p. 3), f.
produces

n. 1

position, p. 437, a 3.

15, 2 d;

lengtli

)>y

GENERAL INDEX
abbreviations occurring in this index liave been explained at
beginning of Appendix I and of the Vedlc Index.
The figures refer to paragraphs unless pages are specified.
Tlift

tlie

lack

Ablative, syntactical use of, 201

1
w. substanw. verbs, 201
2
w. adjectives,
tives, 201
3c;
201
3 ; w. numerals, 201
w. pre4
w. adverbs, 201
3
positions, 176 a, b
expresses the reason, 201 b.
Abl.-gen. inf., 167, 3 (p. 194);
svnt. use of, 211, 3.

in dec,
of,
p. 452, 8
457, 11 a
p. 475, 11 a ; in
the sentence, p. 464, 18 verbal,
459-62 ;
of augmented
pp.
of pr.
tenses, p. 459, 12 a
system, p. 459, 12 b
p. 460,

Absolute eases, 205

gen,, 205, 2.
Accent, 16 71
;

82

h,

83, 1

f)

97, 2.

100,

85

f.

n,

f.

m,

loc, 205,

82

191

n.

f.

a,

f.

87 88 93 95 c
120 186 B w. inst., 199, 2 , b;
w. gen., 202 C w. inf., 211, 1 b
;

211,

p.

methods of marking,

App. Ill, 2-5; of single words,

Greek, p. 451, 6
p. 451, 6
;

211, 3

b a.

suffixes,

179

w. inst.

10 p. 458, lie; p. 464,

pp. 448 -69 musical, p. 436

448, 1

Adverbs, 180; compound, 197 A 5

b S, (p. 301);
compounded
w. verbs, 184 b, w. gd., 164, 1 a
108
a-c; prepositional,
numeral,
177; w. gen., 202 d.
Agent, expressed by inst., 199, 2
nouns, 101, 2
152, f. n. 1

sense, 171, 1 ; w, abl sense,

179, 2 ; vv. loc. sense, 179, 3 ;
particles, 180.

Baa;

Adverbial,

Adjectives, 86

II

100,

of,

p. 454,

position

100, 1 a

particles,

i.

w. preposijections, p. 303, 7
197 B c
tions, 176, 1
177, 1
2 ;
(p. 303) ; adverbial, 178,
197, 5
inf.,
double, 198
167, 2 ; 211, 2.
Action nouns, 182, 1.
Active voice (Parasmaipada), 121.

n. 1

100, II 6; 102, 2, f. n. 1
101, f. n. 6
103, 1. 2 (f. n. 1-3)
104 a, b; 106; 107
125, 1. 2
128 ; 131
126 o
127, 1. 2
4 & (f. n. 1)
134
134, 1 c
136
141. 1 (f. n. 3)
148, 5
159 a 4
154; 155; 158 a
164
167, 1 b, f. n. 1
162, 4
169; 172; 175; 175 A 2, f. n. 1
189 A, f. n. 2 195 B 6 ; double
1
167 b 6 ; 185, f. n. 1 ; 186
shift
p. 456, 2 ^
p. 452, 7
72
85 b
of, 5 ;
100, I b,
f. n. 3 and p. 87:
112, f. n. 4
199
6 a ;
112 7, f. n. 1 189
;

c.

Accusative, syntactical use of,

197 A w. verbal nouns, 197 B
w. adjectives, 197 B a, /3 (p. 302);
w. adverbs, p. 303, iS w. inter-

n. 1

f.

c,

93

n. 2 (p. 79) ;
f.
n. 3;
b.

12

pf.

Accented

77, 5,

89

p.

Kk

182,

w. gdv., 209,

a,

3,

GENERAL INDEX

500
w.

4, 5 a
211 bp.

Analogy,
stems,
99,
p.

97,
f.

273,

f.

sense,

n. 5 !p. 77)

f.

f.

p. 78,

1,

in ps.

inf.

n.

n. 15
1

of

an

of r stems,
139, 6 (pf.^

n. 3.

76
97

b,

f.

ft

2 ; 28, f. n. 3 ;
79, 3 a, f. n. 3 ;
78, f. n. 9 ; 107

n. 1

p.
n. 1

(p. 102),

f.

113 22 a a
149; 154,6 6
;

139,5; 139, 9a

161, f. n. 6
162, 4, f. n. 1
163, 1, f. n. 1 ; 166, 167 ; 168
172 190 191 ; p. 452, 7.
;

Anai)horic use of ti, 195 B 3 6

of et^, 195 B 4 ft.
Antitlietical clause, accentuation
;

Break, metrical,

Aorist, 141-9 meaning of, 213 C

accent of its moods, p. 460, 12 d.
Apodosis in conditional sentences,
216 (p. 364, yadi 2) 218, 1.
Apposition, position of, 191 d in
;

4 B.

p. 440,

Breathing h, 7 a 4

468, p.

of, p.

Brahmanas,

15, 2 ?
13
becomes k
treated like gh
s,
l)eforo t, th, dh, 69 b.

29

origin

of,

69 a

before

1.

_ descriptive compounds, 188,

Article, non-existent, 192

cipient in B., 195 B 3 &.

double, p. 442, 7 a.
intermediate
Cardinals, 104-6
between decades, 104 a
as
Dvandvas, 186 A 2, f. n. 3

of,

Aspiration,

53-5

of

d, b,
n. 1 ;

134
62 b

53 a

s,

of h, 54

40,

initial,

of

62
62,
thrown back, 62 a
thrown forward,

55

loss

of,

?;

loss of initial, 141 , f. n. 1

(p. 160)
143, 6 ; 148, 1 </.
Aspirates, 15, 2 ; 30, 2 ; avoidance
of two, 55, f. n. 1.
;

29
32
33
Assimilation, 16
34
37
38
40, 1. 3
43, 3
60 o.
Attraction of ace. by dat., 200 B 4
;

a ;
of ace. by gen. inf., 211, 3
in gender and number, 194, 3.
Attribute (adj. or gen.), position
?;

of,

29.

f.

50.
in-

Articulation, jjlionetic position

g,

1.

Aranyakas,
Archaisms in compounds, 49

Cadence, p. 436 p. 438 p. 440,

4 B
trochaic, p. 440, 4 B
p. 442, 6
p. 443, 8 a.
Caesura, p. 436
p. 440, 4 B

191

e.

Aufrecht, Prof.,
f. n. 6
p. 38,
;

f.

2,
f.

n. 1

p. 33,

n. 1.

23 c
128
15, 1 c
lengthened, 128 a 140, 6 141
a; 148, Id; Sandhi of, 128

Augment,

J;

accented, p. 459, 12 a.
Avesta, p. 67, f. n. 4
134, 2 b
137, 2 a (f. n. 2)
p. 436, f. n. 3
p. 438, f. n. 1
p. 439, f. n. 3
;

p. 440,
p. 442,

f.

f.

n. 1;
n. 1.

p. 441,

f.

n.

concord of, 194 B 1 a, b accentuation of, Y>. 457, 116 a.

Case-endings, 16 a normal, 71
;

sometimes

Cases, 70 c; strong, 73; position

of, 191 c ; synt. use of, 196-205.
Causal sense of inst., 199
3 of
.abl., 201 B.
124
168 ; tenses and
Causative,
moods of, 168 c; sense of ao.,
149
sf.
dropped, 154, 6 a
sf. 23artl}^ retained in
160, 3
red. ao., 149 a 3
ft., 151 ; synt.
use of, 198
3.
Cerebi'al sibilant s, 12 6 ; in dec.

and
II

conj.

49

,64a;

z, 8,

f.

n. 1

(in cds.)!

Cerebralization, of ch, 63 d ; of j,
63
of s, 63 b ; of dentals,
64 69 c ; of n, 10 c
15, 2 7t a
65 66, 2 b ; of n in cds., 50 c
65 6 ; of n in external
65 a
Sandhi, 65 c of initial d, n in
of dh, 160, 2, f n. 1
cds., 49 c
of s, 50 6
67
81 , f. n. 2
83, 2 6, 2 c ; of s in vb. cds.,
;

5;

Benedictive (or Precative), 150.

in compounds, 187 a ; 188, 2 3 189, 2.

Case-forms, adverbial, 178 nom.,
I ; ace, 2 ; inst., 3
dat 4
abl., 5 ; gen., 6
loc, 7.

retained

GENERAL INDEX
of s in nom. cds,, 67 b
of s in external Sandlii, 67 c
of Visarjaniya, 43, 1 a
43, 2

67 a

a; absence
92,

f.

67,

of,

n. 1, 8, 4

Cerebrals, 3 b y 29 a internal
Sanilhi of, 64
65 67 origin
of, 8
pronunciation of, 15, 2 d ;
;

stems in, 80.

consonant
Changeable
84-96
irregularities

steins,

96

of,

fem. of, 95.

peculiarities of, 94
Cognate accusative, 197, 4.
Collective Dvandvas, 186
3.
Comparative Philology, 17, f. n. 2
;

p. 451, 6.

103

1,

189, 2 a.
Compounded participles, accent
of, p. 462, 13.
Compounds, 184-9 ; classification
;

gender of, 185 a

verbal, 184
doubly accented,
of,

185

452, 7
p. 454, 10.
p.

accentuation

Concomitance, expressed by
199 A.
Concord, 194.

of,

inst.,

90, 2

lOl
f. n. 2
d (ao.); 160, 2,
30
unquality of,
changeable, 60, 1.
;

144

96, 3,

134.

148,

n.

f.

vowels

Contracted
p. 437 a, 6.

restored,

2 a a (p.

Contraction,

83,
59) ;
(pr.); 137, 2 (f. n. 1\
a
irr.
2
(red.
149,
(pf.)
ao.)
171, 3 a (ds.) ;
171, 3 (ds.)
after secondary hiatus, 48 a.

133,

p. 446, 11.

Dative, syntactical use of, 200:

w. verbs, 200
1, w. substan2, w. adjectives,
tives,
3,
w. adverbs, A 4 of advantage,

1, of purpose, B 2, of time,
double, 200 B4 adverbial,
200 B 5 for gen., 97 a 98 a
f.
n. 8
100, I 6 j8 (p. 88),
b a (p. 89\
f.
n. 2; 100,

200

B3;

f.

n.

1.

Dative

Conditional, 153
synt. vise of,
218 in rel. clauses, p. 368, 2
in periods, 218, 1
w. ydd and
w. yMi if,
op., Y>. 363 7 1
w. c6d if, p. 366, 5.
p. 364, 2
Conjugation, 121-75 first, 125
graded, 124 paradigms of pr.
system, 132 second, 126.
125
Conjugational classes, 124
133
127
irregularities of,

use

in

a, in
in taye,
in tavai, b 5,
6, in dhyai,
in vane, b 9

inf., 167, 1
ase, b 1, in aye,
b 3, in tave, b 4,
& 5 a, in tyai, b
b 7, in mane, b 8,

e,

b 2,

w. ps.
211, 1
a (p. 335).
force, 211,
of nouns,
Declension, 70-120
74-102 ; of numerals, 104-7
synt.

of,
1 6

of pronouns, 109-20
p. 457, 11 a.

accent in,

Demonstrative pronouns, 110-12

concord
synt. use of, 195 B

seconConjugations, two, 124

accentuation of,
dary, ibid.
p. 461, 12 e.
;

Conjunctive particles, 180.

149
Connecting vowel a, 147
i, 89 a; 136 a; 140,5; 157 a, b
162, 4. 5
160, 3
163, 1. 2
169 i, 140, 6 143, 1.
Consonant, endings w. initial
(bhyam, bhis, bhyas, su), 16 a
;

73 a

classification of, 29
doubling of, 51 (eh); 52
(ii, n); final, 27; 28; 31; 32
33
76
loss of, 15, 2k; 28

Couplets,

Comparison, degrees
implied in compounds, 188,
of,

189, 1 a

37

30;

61

n. 1.

f.

32

501

stems, 75-96.

Consonants,

6-14

changes

of,

3.

124
175
ao.,
175 B a ft., ibid. pj). ibid.
Dental
n, Handhi of finiil, 35
39
40
36
52
42, 3 a
2
66 A 1 66
s, changed to
66 B 1 disappears,
t or d, 9 a
66 B 2 inserted, 40, 2.
S
9a; 10 a (n)
Dentals, 3 &
29 a palatalized, 37 a
15, 2 e
38 40 (n) 63 a cerebralized,
64 stems in, 77.
;

of.

194

Denominative,

GENERAL INDEX

502

Derivative verbs, 168-75.

188

pp.,

168

ihid.

;
gd.,
197), f. n. 4.

c (p.

209
;
synt. use of,
of cs., 168, 1 c
periaccent
152
;
phrastic,
of, p. 461,
214

170
201);

ibid.

of

Dipthongs,

3a;

12

e.

Gender, 70 a
compounds,

cs.,

Determinative compounds. 185 h

187
dependent, 187, 2 a de187
accent
of,
scriijtive,
p. 4.55, 10 d.
Devanagari character. 2, f. ii. 1.
Dialects, 11 c.
Dimeter verse, p. 438,

162

gdv.,

Descriptive
compounds,
accent of, p. 455, 10 d 1.
169
Desiderativc, 124
171 a (p.
171
ao.,

194

rules

18.5

attraction in, 194, 3.

Genitive, synt. use of, 202
;

w.

verbs, 202 A. w. substantives, B,

w.
adjectives, C, adverbs,
prepositions, 177, 4 adverbial,
202 C 3 a
absolute,
178, 6
205, 2
partitive, 202 A d

2.

183 of
in syntax,

of,
;

h.

possessive, 202 B 2
objective,
202 B n- subjective, 202 B 1 u.
;

134 C 3
96, 2
174 a.
Distance,
by ace,
expressed
197 A 3.
Dodecasyllabic verse, p. 442, 6.
Doubling of ch, 51 of n and n,
Dissimilation,

Gerund, 122
tion

163-6

464, 15

of, p.

accentua-

compounded

w. adv., 165
w. noun, 166
syntactical use of, 210.
Gerundive, 162
synt. use of,
;

209.

52.

Dravidian sounds, 8.
Dual, synt. use of, 193, 2 comellii^tical,
poimds, 186 A 1
186 B 3 a 193, 2 .
;

Goal of an action, expressed by

the ace, 197, 1 198, 3 h by the
;

loc, 204,

c; 198, 3, f. n. 2.
Governing compounds, 185?*; 189;
as substantives. 189, 1 a
w.
suffixes a orya, 189, 1 b
accent
1 b,

Elision of initial a, 11, 1 a, b, c ;

21 a, f. n. 4 and 6.
19 h, f. n. 1
;

Emphatic words,
191

of,

synt.

j^osition

a.

of,

Grammarians, Hindu, 5 a.
7b; 15, 2 b
Gutturals, S b a 6
29 a changed to palatals, 7ba

in conj.,
Endings,
dec, 71
of pf., 136 .
131 (table)
External Sandhi, 17-55.

92

to,

160, 2

134

171, 4.

15, 2

Haplology,

Hard

f.

n. 1

of u
101, I h

stems, 98 c (p. 83j ;

of tr stems, 101 c of
and spv. stems, 103,
ordinals, 107
special
of (in i and a stems),
suffixes,
97, 1, f. n. 5
;

sec. cjiv.
1 c

of

endings
100, I h

183 .
Final consonants allowable, 27
28 31 61 76.
Final dative, synt. position of,
191 A, a 1.
Frequentative, see Intensive.
pt. ps. =
Future, simple, 151
;

b.

sounds,
32 33.
30, 1
18
Hemistich, 16
438,
]>.
f. n. 2
p. 439 b
p. 440 C
p. 449, 2;
p. 441, 5; p. 443
accentuation of, p. 465, f. n. 4.
Hendecasyllabic verse, p. 440, 4 B.
22
Hiatus, 15. 1 /: 16; 21 b
24 45 48; 49; 97, 1, f. n. 11;
avoidance of, 16; in compounds,
49 restored, 18 6; 19 a, f. n. 4
20 21 6 secondary, 22 a 48 a
(surd,
;

Feminine, formation of, 73,

of changeable stems. 95

reversion
160, 1 b

5.

in

/).

Enclitics, 109 a; 112 a; p. 452,

8 A
synt. position of, 191 h

195

p. 455, 10

voiceless)

(avoided).

High grade

syllables e, o, ar, al),

(ya, va,
(ya, va, ra), 5 b
of i and u, 4 & 6a, b.
ra), b ba

rt

GENERAL INDEX
Historical present, 212, 2.
Hyi)otlietical clauses, 216 (under
yad, p. 363, and ykdi, p. 361^
218.
;

Imperative, 122 a formation of,

122 a; endings of, p. 125;
is ao.,
root iio.. 148, 4 a 5
sis ao., 146, 5
145, 5
pf.,
;

first persons wanting,

140, 4
121
syntactical use of, 215.
Impei'fect, inflected, 132
ps.,
154 c syntactical use of, 213 B.
;

176-81

Indeclinable,
words,
synt. position of, 191 f-i; participle (= gerund), 210.
Indefinite pronouns, 119 b.

Indo-Eui'opean period, p. 451, 6.

Indo-Iranian, 8; 11 c; p. 442,
f.

n. 1

n. 3.

f.

i^eriod, p. 436,

167 a

synt. use of, 211 ;

w. ps. force, 211, 1 b a, 0, 5.
Initial consonant, loss of, 50 a,
f. n. 5
134
2 & 171, 6.
128 c
formaInjunctive, 122
tion of, 122 a a root ao., 148, 2
is ao., 145, 3 ; sis ao., 146, 4
s ao., 143, 3
a ao., 147, 3
pf., 140, 2
synt. use of, 215 B.
3
Insertion, of vowels
i, i, 134
of,

stem) i. 134 A2 & (impf.),'

172 a (int.), 173, 3 (int.), 174 6
of consonants
(int.)
k, 35
(in SandliiV t, 36 a, 40, 1 (in
.Sandlii), n, 66 A 2 (in N. pi. n.),
;

105, 4 (G. pi.), p. 100, f. n. 1,

(C4. pi.), n or na, 127, 3 (pr.
155 (ps. ao.), 168
stern), y,
irr. 4 (cs.),
r,
134, 1 c (pr.
stem), s, 40, 1 a (in Sandhi),
s,
f.

s,

40, 2 (in Sandhi), 134 C 4,

n. 1 (pr. stem), 150 (prc.\

168, irr. 4 (cs.).

:

p. 309, a,

f.

2,

n.

2.

171_,

184 d.
Interrogative pronoun, 113 ; synt.
191
k.
position of,
Iranian, Old, 11 c, d; 15, 1 a.
Irregularities, of vowel Sandhi,
23
of consonant Sandhi, 48
49 in declension : 91 92 96
98 a 99 (i and u stems) ; in
134 (pr.
133,
conjugation
156 a, 157 b a (pr. pt.
stem)
158 a (pr. j)t. mid.) 139
act.)
159 a (pf. pt. mid.)
(pf.)
144 (s ao.)
145 a-c (is ao.)
147 a-c (a ao.)
149 a (red. ao.) ;
151 c (ft.)
155 a (ps. ao.) 168,
p. 197 (cs.); 171, l(ds.); 174
Intej-jections, 181

(int.).

Iteiative, verbs, 168

185 b
10 a.

189

compounds,

accent

of, p. 4-54,

Labials, 3 6

9 6; 29

<(

stems

in, 78.
p. 437 a 3,
Lengthening, of vowels, 15, 1 c
155
15, 2 lea; 143, 1. 3 (s ao.)

Length by position,

(ps.

ao.)

p. 280,

n.

f.

of

reduplicative vowel, 139, 9 (pf.)

171, 6 (ds.).
Local
sense of instrumental,
199 A 4.
Locative, sing, in i and ii (uncontractable\ 25 b ; inf., 167, 4
(p. 195)
211, 4
synt. use of,
1. 2,
203; local sense, 203
temporal sense,
8, adv. sense,
A 4 w. verbs, 204, 1 w. nouns,
w. adjectives, 204, 2 b
204, 2
w. prepositions, 176, 2 204, 3

Instrumental, synt. use of, I'J'J

w. verbs, 199 B 1, w. nouns,
B 2, w. numerals, B 2 c, w.
adv.
prepositions, B 3, 177, 2
use of, 178, 3
199 A G
exmeans
or
199
A 2;
presses
agent,
/3.

127,

172-4 moods of, 174, 2-4 pt.,

174, 5; impf., 174, 6; pf., 174,
6 a cs. ibid.
Interchange of vowel and semivowel, 134C3; 167, l,9,f.n.4;

Cpr.

Intensive, 124;

167 accent
Infinitive, 1 ; 122 rZ
characteristics
of, p. 463, 14 ;
;

503

205,

1.

Long vowels pronounced

as

two

437 a 8.
Loss of sounds of initial a, 21 a
156 of
io, 2 b; 134 A 2 6
medial a (see Syncope)
of
p.

GENERAL INDEX

504

medial u, 134 C 1 134 C

2 of final n, 90 (N. s.)

Neuter, 73 b (changeable stems)

98 a (i and u
97, 1 a (a stems)
101, 2 b (tr stems)
stems)
suffixes, 183 b
synt. use of,
194 A 1 B 2 &.
Nominal
185-9
compounds,

f. n.
94, 2
(N. s.) of radical nasal, 137, 2 d
4 (pr. stem) ; 160, 2
(pf.) ; 133
(pp.) ; 165 a (sd.) ; of n in 3. pi.
ending, p. 125, f. n, 4 ; 156

4,

of Visarjanij^a, 45;
48; ofs(N. s.), 100, 1 6 (p. 87).
(pt. act.)

Low

grade vowels, i a

I, c,

d.

characteristics

of,

185.

Nominal stem formation, 182-4.

Nominal verb forms, accent of,
pp. 462-4.

Magadhi

dialect, 11

Nominative, synt. use of, 196

w. iti =
predicative, 196 a
ace, 196 a ^ for voc, 196 c a.
Nouns, declension of, 74-102

c.

Mantras, 1.
Manuscripts, age of, 2.
Masculine suffixes, 183.

Max
f.

Muller, p. 33,
n.

f.

n. 6

classification of, 74.

p. 38,

Number, 70

1.

Metathesis, 11 ca 103, 2 a (cpv.) ;

144. 4 (s ao.)
167, 2 b (inf.).
16
19 a; 20
18 &
Metre, 1
21
22 a; 41 a
52
49
191
194 B 1
Appendix II,
pp. 436-47.
Middle, stem, 72; 73 a, b; 101, 2,
note; 185a; voice, 121; endings,
131 (p. 126).
Monosyllabic stems, accentuation
;

of, p. 4.58, c 1.

121 a

215-18.

member of poss.
derivatives, 108
adv. Av. gen., 202, 3.
Numerals, 104-8.
Numeral, as

first

cd., 189, 3 c

Objective genitive, 202 Bib.

Octosyllabic verse, p. 438, 2.
Opening of a verse, p. 438, 2
p. 440, 4 B.
Optative (Potential), 122a formation of, 122 a a; pf., 140, 3
;

s ao., 143, 4

146, 3

ao.,

Multiples, formation of, 104 b.

Multiplicatives, 108 a, c; w. gen.,

202 D 3.
Mutes, 3 b.

ao., 148,

is ao., 145, 4

89

of,

pt.)

(pf.

133

134 E 3 137, 2 rf
(pr.); 134
(pf.)
139, 1
140, f. n. 4 ;
144, 3 (s ao.) ; 147 irr. b (aao.)
148, 1 e (rt. ao.) ; 149 (red. ao.)
154, 5 (ps.); 167, 1, f. n. 5
(inf.) ; 160, 2 (pp.) ; 165 a (gd.)
insertion
188, 2a
171, 1 (ds.)
of, 79, 3 a, f. n. 2, 3;
pure,
10 /; sonant, 4 a
127, 4 a ;
134 C 4 a 143, 4, f. n, 3 p. 163,
f. u. 3
p. 185, f. n. 1.
;

Nasalization, 19 a,

f.

19
79, 3

n. 5

n. 1 ; 24, f. n. 2 ;
n. 2 ; 133 C 1.
Nasals, 3; 10; 15, 2 /;
f.

6,

a,

f.

35 (in Sandhi).

29 6;

sis

rt.
a ao., 147, 4
synt. use of, 216.
;

Oral tradition, 2.
Order of words, 191.
Ordinals, 107 fem.
;

Nasal, loss

synt. use

193.

Moods, 122 a
140, 1-4 (pf.)
171, p. 200 (ds.)
synt. use of,

final,

of,

of, ibid.

13
Palatal, aspirate eh, 7 a 1
s and
old sibilant z, 15, 2 A; a
eh before s, 63 b ; spirant y,
15,2 g ; sibilant s, 12 a, inser;

tion of, 40, 1 a.

Palatalization of n, 63 c.
29 a ; two series
Palatals, 3 b 13
old, 7a; 81 a ;
of, 7 ; new, 7 b
before gutturals, 63 before s,
63 & revert to gutturals, 139, 4
140, 6, f. n. 2 ; 148, 1 h, f. n. 8
157 & a 157 a, f. n. 2 ICO, 1
171, 4 ; represent
160, 1 b
in
reduplication,
gutturals
129, 3 ; nominal stems in, 79.
Participles, 156-62; 122 6; act.,
;

85

156

157

mid. and

ps.,

GENERAL INDEX
168-62 pr., 85 156 pr. mid.,
158
pf. act.,
pr. ps., 154 c
89; 140, 5; 157; pf. mid.,
85
156
a ao.,
159
ao. act.,
147, 6; ft. act., 85; 151 & 2
156; ft. mid.. 158; pp., 160;
indec.
ft. ps. pt.
(gdv.), 162
(gd.), 163; fem. of pr. and ft.,
95 ff, 6 synt. use of, 206-10
characteristics of, 206 durative
sense of pr., 207 a pr. = finite
\v. gen.
absolute,
verb, 207
205, 2 w. loc. absolute, 205, 1
pp. as finite verb, 208 pp. used
;

periphrastically, 208rt, b; meaning and construction of ft. ps.,

209 construction of indec, 210.
Partitive genitive, 202 B 2 b.
154 (par.)
155
Passive, 121 ;
154 ; sb.,
(ao.) ; pr. stem, 121
;

154

cs.

stem, 154, 6 a
past
w. as and
mood or
;

= finite vb., 208

bhu = periphrastic
pt.

tense, 208 a, b.
Past tenses, meaning
use of, 213.

and synt.

Pentasyllabic verse,

442,

Perfect, 135-40

p.

8.

of,

176
adverbial,
adnominal, 177 comw.
2 syn184,
pounded
roots,
tactical jiosition of, 191/; synt.

Prepositions,
176, 1

195 A.

accentuation

Apj). Ill, 20.

of,

Present, system, 123-34

tense,
synt. use of, 212
stems,
plurality of, 212 for ft., 212A3;
= finite vb., 207, expressing
pt.
accentuation
duration, 207
of, p. 459, 12 &; p. 458 c (pr. pt.).
Primary endings, 131 nom. suffixes, 182, 1
182, 1 b accentuation of, p. 453, 9 A.

Principal clause, verb unaccented

in, App. Ill, 19 A.

Pronominal

adjectives,

n. 4

f.

109-20
(p. 77)

use

120

105,

;
:

its

120.

Pronouns, 109-20 personal, 109

demonstrative, 110-12; interrogative, 113
relative, 114
reflexive, 115
possessive, 116
compound and derivative, 117;

indefinite, 119
use of, 195.

18

syntactical

15
Pronunciation,
ancient,
Greek, of Sanskrit words, ibid.
of vowels, 15, 1 a
of diphthongs, 15, 1 6 of consonants,
of 1, 15, 2 g.
15, 2
Proper names, 189, 3 a 189 A 2
193, 2 a, 3 a; 200 A 2 7.
Prosodical rule, 18 6, f. n. 1 25 a.
Prosody, rules of, p. 437 a.
Protasis, 216 (vv.'yid, p. 363, and
;

Phoneticians, native, p. 448, 1.

Pluperfect, 140, 6
meaning of,
213 D.
use
Plural, elliptical
of, 193, 3 a
loose use of, 193, 3 b
Dvandvas,
18G A 1.
Possessive,
compounds, 185 b
189 gen., 202 B 2 a.

declension
influence on noforms, 97, f. n. 1, 2

minal

endings of, 13()

paradigmsof, 138 irreguhirities
moods of, 140 synt.
of, 139
use of, 213 A
act. pt. unre157 6
dti plicated,
pt. mid.,
159
formed w.
pt. ps., 160
both ta and na, 160, 1 a accentuation of, App. Ill, 12 c.
ft.,
Periphrastic forms
152,
forerunners of, 152, f. n. 1,
sense of, 214 B pf., 139, 9 a.
Personal pi-onouns, 109 limited
;

Precative (Benedictive), 150 ; pf.,

140, 3 a; rt. ao., 148, 4 a;
synt. use of, 217.
Predicative adjective, concoi'd of,
194 B 2
noun, synt. position
of, 191 b.

107,

505

y^di, p. 364) 218,

Purpose, expressed
200 B 2.
;

1.

by

dative,

Potential, see Optative.

Prati^akhyas, 11 ; 15, 1 a,

b,

15, 2 ; 15,2 e, g, i, j ; 42, 2,

f. n. 2; 51 ;
p. 465, f. n. 1.

Radical vowel lengthened, 143, 1

155 171, 6 shortened,
145, 1
149; 171, 6; 174.

GENERAL INDEX

506

Reason,
expressed
by inst.,
199 A 3 by abl., 201 B.
Reduplicated root as nom. stem,
;

182,

1 a.

Reduplication, general rules of,

129, 1-6
sj^ecial rules of, 130
119 a, b
135, 1-4 (pf.)
(pr.)
170 (ds.)
173 (int.)
(ao.l
w. an-, 139, 6 (pf.) w. reijeatecl
w. inserted
nasal, 173, 3 (int.)
of vowel in
nasal, 171 a (int.)
second syllable, 149. irr. 3
dropped. 139, 3 (pf.)
171, 6 a
157 h (pf. pt.) 171, 6 (ds.).
Relatives, synt. position of, 191
Restoration of elided a, 21 , f. n.
;

/.-.

5, G.

Rhotacism, 11

Rhythm,

t,

d.

quantitative, p. 436,

iambic,

p.

436

438

p.

p. 440,

3.

in

(p.

268)

compounds: 49-50; 185

;

arcbaismsin,

139, 9,

rule, 136 a,

f.

n. 2 (pf.)

f.

n. 3 (pf.\*

149 (re

tendency, 50 rf.
Rigveda, 1 2.
Root, as nom. stem, 182.

i.

1 a; 16.

f.

v.,

ao.,

Roots, two or more used in iniiexion of same vb., 212 ; secondary, 134 C 4 a.

Sandhi,16-69; accentin.p. 464.17

1. external, 16nature of, 16
19 20 of
of vowels, 18
55
diphthongs, 21 22 irr. vowel,
23 absence of vowel, 24-6 of
of final k,
consonants, 27-55
of
t, t, p before n or m, 33
;

final t before 1, 34, before palaof

of final nasals. 35
tals, 38
;

final dental n, 36 ; 39 ; 40 ; of
final m, 41 ; 42 ; 42, 3 a and
n. 5 (ambiguous) ; of final
f.

Visarjaniya, 43 ; 43, 2 a and

44 ; of the final syllable
3
of the
48
ah, 45, 2 ; 46
46 of
final syllable ah, 45, 1
final r, 46 ; 47 ; 2. internal :
56-69 of vowels, 57 58 ; of r,
58; 154, 3; of f, 58; 154, 4;
of consoof diphthongs, 59
of aspii-ates, 62
nants, 60 ; 61
;

450,

Second Aorist, 147-9.

Secondary, endings,
2

suffixes,

182,
of, p. 453, 9
i, u, r, 5 e.

Semivowel
15, 2

r,

131
nom.
accentuation
;

shortening of

originally cerebral,

i/.

3c; 11 15, 2 g
17 B 1
20 29 c pronounced
as vowels, p. 437 a 5.
16
190
Sentence,
accent,
;

148.

p.

n. 3.

p. 464, IS.

49a,6,c,rf.

Sanski-it, Classical, 1.

Snmhitfi text, 2 15,

Samhitas, 1 2.
Schroeder, Prof. L.

Semivowels.

ili.

Rhythmic,
ao.)

of palatals before
consonants,
of dentals after cerebrals,
65 ; of dental n before y,
of dental s, 66 B ;
V, s, 66, 1. 2
67
of
before y, r, 1, v, 68
of h before s, t, th, dh, 69

63
64

12
15, 2h
29 d; assimilation of, 12, a, I;
66 B 2 traces
loss of. 15, 2 /.
of soft, 7 a 3; 8; 15, 2 /;
2
A29 d.
15,
15, 2 A- a
Singular number, sti'ict use of,
Sibilants, B d; 7 a 2

1.

193,

Sociative sense of inst., 199

1.
Soft (sonant,
voiced) sounds,
30, 1.

Space, extension of, expressed by

ace, 197, 3.
Spelling, misleading, p. 437, a 9.
Spirants, S g 14 ; 15 ; 29 e.
Stanzas, p. 437 ; simple, pp. 438;

43

mixed, pp.
mixed, p. 445, 10

443-5

Z)

a,

/3

irr.

strophic,

pp. 446-7.

Stem formation, nominal,

182.

Stems, classification of nominal,

74 ending in consonants, 7496
unchangeable stems, 75183
nouns with two, 85-8
89-93
nouns with three,
ending in vowels, 97-102
of
accentuation
nominal,
;

;
;

p. 453, 9.

GENERAL INDEX
Strong stem, in declension, 72 ;
73
97, 2 a ; in conjugation,
124; 126 (pr.); 134 (pr.) 136
145 (is ao.)
143 (s ao.)
(pf.)
;

148,

134

1 (rt.

an.)

in

weak forms,

B 3a; 134C45;

148, 5.

Strophe, p. 437.
Subject, synt. position of, 191 a ;
exceptional position of, 191 ka2.
Subjective genitive, 202 B 1 a.

Subjunctive,
of, 122 a a

122 a

formation

140, 1 (pf.)
143, 2
146 (sis
145, 2 (is ao.)
147, 2 (a ao.)
ao.)
148, 2 (rt!
synt. use of, 215 C.
ao.)
Subordinate clause, verb accented
in, App. Ill, 19 B.
(s ao.)

Substantives compounded w. gd.,

184 c
w. participle,
164, 1 a
184 c.

3.

Triplets, p. 446, 11.

Unaccented

pronouns, 109 a
112 a; 195 b; synt. position of,
191 h; 195 &.

Unaspii'ated consonants, 30, 2.

Qnaugmented forms, 128 c.
Unchangeable consonant stems.
75-83.
Un reduplicated pf. forms, 139, 3 ;
139, 3a; 157 h.

Upanisads,

Velars, 3

irre;ularly

retained,

1.

139, 2 (pf.)
148, 1 e, g
;
149, irr. a 2 (red. ao.)
156 a (pr. pt.)
157 a, f. n. 1
Vpf.pt.); 160, 2(pp.); 171,3
(ds.) ; p. 458, 2.
;

(rt. ao.)

compounds,
190-218;

1;

2.

sounds

1 h

of, 3.

15, 2

h.

Verb, concord of the, 194 A 1

w. two
synt. position of, 191 a
s. subjects, 194 A 2 a
w, more
than two, 194 A 2 & w. subjects
of different numbers, 194 A 3
w. subjects of different persons,
194 A 3
accent of,
synt.
loses accent, jd. 452.
p. 466, 19
;

Syntactical
189 B.

Vedic language,

2.

97 a a 166.
Syncope, 78, 3 a 90, 1. 2. 3 (an
stems); 133, 3(pr.); 134 A2c
134 B 3 (pr.)
(pr.)
137, 2 6

Syntax,

s.

in istha, 103,

(pf.)

Vedas,

28 a a (cp. f. n. 3).
Superlative suffix in tama, 103,
Sutras',' 1

(p. 267,

f. n. 1)
186 A 1.
Transfer stems, in pr. system,
130 rt, f. n. 4; 134 C 4 /S
134 E 4a; in ppf., 140, 6; in
ao., 147 rt, 6.

seconprimary, 182, 1
16 a s and t of

dary, 182, 2
2.

Tmesis of compounds, 185

Suffixes,

507

185

charac-

teristics of Vedic, 190.

?>.

Verbal compounds, 65 a 184.

Verbs governing two ace, 198
inst., 199 B 1
dat., 200 A 1
abl., 201 A 1
gen., 202 A
loc,
;

204, 1.
Vocative, 71 a 72 a 76 a 94, 3 ;
98 &
for predicative nom.,
196 c accent of, p. 457, 11 a
18
loses accent, p. 452,
p. 465,
;
8 B a ; compound, p. 466,
;

2
Temporal sense of ace, 197
of inst., 199
5; of dat.,
200 B 3 of gen., 202 D 3 a of

loc, 203, 3.
Tenses, 122 synt. use of, 212-14.
Terminations, see Endings.
T)ian expressed by abl., 201 A 3.
;

ace.
inst.
of,
197, 2;
199 A 5
dat. of, 200" B 3
gen. of, 202 D 3 a; loc. of,

Time,
of,

203, 3.

f.

n. 3, 4.

Voices of the verb, 121.

Vowel shortened before
p. 437, a 4.

Vowel declension, 97-102

in a, a, 97

vowel,
:

stems

in i, u, 98
irr.
in
i, u stems, 99 ; in i, ii, 100
r, 101 ; in ai, o, au, 102.
4
classification
Vowels, 3 rt
;

of,

17

changed

to semivowels,

GENEEAL INDEX

508

19
20
coalescence of, 18
19
contraction
avoided,
a,
24 25 26 gradation
f. n. 2
1
4
5
loss
e
127,
of, 15,
of,
134 C 1
131 A 2 6
f. n. 3
145 a long by jjosition before
69 c
oh, 51
lengthened, 47
78, 1 a
78, 2 a
(cp, f. n. 4)
82 (i, u)
83, 2 (N. pi. n.)
83, 2 a (N. s, m. f.) 85 a(mahat)
87 (in
86 (mat, vat steins)
92
90 (an stems)
stems)
;

(ds.)

(den.)

(p.

94, 1 (N. s.) ; 96, 1. 2

3
131 (p. 125), f. n. 1 ; 133
144, 3 ; 145, 1 ; 145, 5a; 149
151 c ; 154, 2 (ps.) ; 155 (ps.
ao.) ; 160, 2 c (pp.) ; 162, 1 c
(gdv.); 169, 1 (ds.); 171, 1

(han)

pounds, 49 e; 50 d shortened,
89 (pf. pt.) 94, 3 (voc.) 129, 6
133 B 1 (pr.) 149 (red.
(red.)
ao.) 174 i^int.) 187 a a (p. 273)
shortened in compounds, 50 e
shortened before other vowels,
18 6; 18 6, f. n. 1 19 a, f. n. 5
20, f. n. 2; 26 b
100, I a

86^
19

f.

n. 2

a, f.

nasalized, 15

n 5
.

19

f.

&,

n, J

terminations beginning w., 76

stems in, 97-102.

173, 2 a (int.)
;

lengthened

175
in

com-

Weak

stem, in dec, 72; 84; in

conj.,

160,

134A2(pr.);137, l(pf.);

2 (pp.)

in first

compounds, 185 a.
Weakest stem, 72 73 h.
Weber, Prof. A., 2, f. n.

member

of

Writing, introduction

1.

of, 2,

Printed in England at the Oxford University Press

221-

^988

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF

TORONTO LIBRARY